Yamaha Rs7000 Manual

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro-
products may have either labels similar to the graphics duce products that are both user safe and environmentally
shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graph- production methods used to produce them, meet these
ics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indi- goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the
cated on this page and those indicated in the safety law, we want you to be aware of the following:
instruction section.
Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-
rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
place. The average life span of this type of battery is
CAUTION approximately five years. When replacement becomes nec-
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
essary, contact a qualified service representative to perform
DO NOT OPEN the replacement.
Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regu-
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
lated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer
is required by law to return the defective parts. However,
you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of
these parts for you.
The exclamation point within the equi- Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged
lateral triangle is intended to alert the beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-
user to the presence of important oper- ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and fed-
ating and maintenance (servicing) eral regulations that relate to the disposal of products that
instructions in the literature accompa- contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
nying the product. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-
edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the
The lightning flash with arrowhead unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manu-
symbol, within the equilateral triangle, facturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsi-
is intended to alert the user to the pres- bility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your
ence of uninsulated “dangerous volt- dealer before requesting service.
age” within the product’s enclosure that
may be of sufficient magnitude to con- NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi-
stitute a risk of electrical shock. cates the location of the name plate. The model number,
serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this
plate. You should record the model number, serial number,
IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and
are tested and approved by an independent safety testing retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.
laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is
properly installed and used in its normal and customary
manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO MUSICAL INSTRUMENT
379U MIDI
THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME NMB-003
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE
FOLLWWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1)THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE,AND
(2)THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECIVED,INCLUDING INTERFERENCE
DU CANADA.
US LISTED
NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless

THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
IN
POWER CAUTION INPUT OUTPUT
ON/ OFF RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK SCSI FOOT SW CONTRAST R L R L/MONO PHONES
DO NOT OPEN
specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance AC INLET

ATTENTION : RISQUE DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR.
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
WARNING DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
OUT A
and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed OUT B
under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/

has been modified. Implied warranties may also be
affected. Rear Panel
Model
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The
information contained in this manual is believed to be cor-
Serial No.
rect at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the
right to change or modify any of the specifications without
Purchase Date
notice or obligation to update existing units.
92-469- ➀ (rear)
2 RS7000
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from
electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited
to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord Water warning

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may any openings.
have accumulated on it. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, Fire warning
and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
or roll anything over it.
If you notice any abnormality

Do not open
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden
• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not attempt to loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or
disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power
switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or
damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord Location

• Always connect the three-pin attachment plug to a properly grounded power • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold
source. (For more information about the main power supply, see page 22.) or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal
hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. components.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,
used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or
radio may generate noise.
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-
connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might
overheating in the outlet. accidentally fall over.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
(2)-8 1/2 RS7000 3

Connections Backup battery
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the
• This instrument has a built-in lithium backup battery. When you unplug the
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
power cord from the AC outlet, the system setup data (Utilitey mode [Page
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the
255] and other settings) is retained. However, if the backup battery fully
volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the
discharges, this data will be lost. When the backup battery is running low, the
volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening
display indicates “Backup Battery Low.” In this case, immediately save the
level.
data to a Memory Card (SmartMedia)/a SCSI disk (See page 114, 166, 204),
then have qualified Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery.
Maintenance
Saving data
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint
thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Saving and backing up your data
• Voice and sequence data you created is lost when you turn off the power to
Handling caution the instrument. Save the data to a Memory Card (SmartMedia)/a SCSI disk
(See page 114, 166, 204) .
• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
• System setup data (Utility mode [Page 255] and other settings) is retained
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the when the power is turned off, as long as the backup battery retains a charge.
panel. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power However, the data could be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation.
cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Save important data to a Memory Card (SmartMedia)/a SCSI disk.
Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this
might discolor the panel or keyboard.
Backing up the Memory Card (SmartMedia)/SCSI disk
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you
not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. save your important data onto two Memory Cards (SmartMedia)/SCSI disks.
• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or

uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If
you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.
4 RS7000 (2)-8 2/2

Handling and Installation of Options
WARNING
• Before beginning installation, switch off the power to the RS7000 and connected peripherals, and unplug them
from the power outlet. Then remove all cables connecting the RS7000 to other devices. (Leaving the power cord
connected while working can result in electric shock. Leaving other cables connected can interfere with work.)
• Do not disassemble, modify, or apply excessive force to board areas and connectors on the option board and
SIMMs. Bending or tampering with boards and connectors may lead to electric shock, fire, or equipment
failures.
CAUTION
• Before handling an option board or SIMM, you should briefly touch the RS7000 metal casing (or other such
metallic area) with your bare hand so as to drain off any static charge from your body. Note that even a slight
amount of electrostatic discharge may cause damage to these components.
• It is recommended that you wear gloves to protect your hands from metallic projections on the RS7000, SIMMs,
an option board, and other components. Touching leads or connectors with bare hands may cause finger cuts,
and may also result in poor electrical contact or electrostatic damage.
• Take care to avoid dropping screws into the RS7000 unit. If a screw does fall in, be sure to remove it before you
reassemble and power up the unit. Starting the unit with a loose screw inside may lead to improper operation or
equipment failure. (If you are unable to retrieve a dropped screw, consult your Yamaha dealer for advice.)
* Consult your Yamaha dealer if you have any questions regarding installation procedures for the option board or SIMMs.
* If SIMM memory fails to work properly, consult the item's dealer for advice.
RS7000 5
Supplied Accessories
I N T R O D U C T I O N
Thank you for your purchase of the Yamaha MUSIC PRODUCTION STUDIO RS7000.
The Yamaha R7000 brings it all together. Everything you need for professional-level music and
remix production — particularly in dance, techno, hip hop, R&B, and ambient genres — is
included and flawlessly integrated in a system that has been specifically designed to facilitate
modern production techniques. The RS7000 combines a powerful, flexible sequencing system
with a state-of-the-art AWM2 tone generator loaded with an awesome selection of drum kits
and voices, and a sampler which allows you to sample your own sounds and loops and easily
incorporate them into your sequences. All of this is brought together with an interface that is
intuitive and easy while offering the depth and real-time control required by professional
applications.
In order to take maximum advantage of the many advanced features and capabilities offered
by the RS7000, we urge you to read the manual carefully, and keep it in a safe, readily-accessi-
ble location for future reference.
* The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective com-
panies.
* Unauthorized copying of copyrighted software for purposes other than purchaser’s personal use is prohibited.
Supplied Accessories
Please check that the following accessories are included in the RS7000 package.
• CD-ROM × 1 • Memory Card × 1
• AC Power Cord × 1 • Memory Card Security Adapter × 1
• Owner’s Manual (this document) × 1
• “About the Memory Card & CD-ROM” Document × 1
• AC Power Cord • Memory Card Security Adapter
* Refer to the separate “About the Memory Card & CD-ROM” document for information about the contents of the supplied Memory
Card and CD-ROM.
6 RS7000
RS7000 FEATURES
RS7000 FEATURES
● Powerful 16-track Sequencer

In the phrase-based PATTERN mode, complete patterns can be quickly assembled by combining indi-
vidual phrases from the vast range of preset phrases provided, or you can record your own using the
extensive selection of drum kits and other voices provided by the internal AWM2 tone generator. Sam-
pled sounds, loops and breakbeats can just as easily be added to the sequence to create the groove
your music demands. Your patterns can be used individually, or the PATTERN CHAIN mode can be
used to automatically sequence specified patterns to create even complex arrangements.
There’s also a SONG mode which functions as a 16-track sequencer with all the features and versatil-
ity you’d expect from a full-blown stand-alone sequencer … and more.
● AWM2 Tone Generator
Even electronic sounds change with the times, and the RS7000 is right up to date. The internal AWM2
tone generator system offers more than 1054 pitched voices, and sound effects, as well as 63 top-quality
drum kits — you’ll find what you need for just about any musical genre. You also have a range of voice
editing functions that make it easy to customize and personalize the sound to bring your art to life.
● A Wealth of Preset Phrases
Up-to-date preset phrases are provided. Patch these together in the PATTERN mode for an unlimited
range of pattern variations.
● Arpeggio Function
5 auto-arpeggio types are ideal for use in dance and techno styles. Arpeggiated phrases can be
recorded to the sequencer and edited as required, or transmitted to other gear via MIDI.
● Advanced Sampling and Editing Features
In addition to directly loading sample data in a variety of popular formats, the RS7000 allows you to
record your own samples from CDs or any line-level or microphone source. Once your samples are
recorded they can be trimmed, sliced, looped, and otherwise prepared for playback with the power
and flexibility you’d expect from a stand-alone sampler. And when your samples are ready, they can be
incorporated into patterns and sequences just as easily as the tone-generator voices. You can even
use the sampler to record vocal parts to take your project right up to the final production stage without
using any equipment other than the RS7000.
● Real-time Loop Remix and Play Effects
Performance data can be automatically divided and randomly rearranged to create totally new sounds.
Create a range of variations instantly from a drum pattern, for example.
Play effects are also ideal for real-time creative variation, allowing you to tweak timing, note parame-
ters, or harmonization without altering the sequence data.
● Real-time Control
Another key requirement for creative freedom in modern music production is real-time sound control.
The RS7000 offers plenty of sonic manipulation capability with a comprehensive range of knobs for
hands-on control of BPM, filter parameters, envelopes, pitch, LFO, and more. The RS7000 also fea-
tures a keyboard and velocity-sensitive pads that allow voices and samples to be played in real time,
as well as switching between sequence sections and tracks, and controlling the track mute and solo
functions. The RS7000 also features mute and scene memory functions which can take “snapshots” of
track mute setups or complete panel-control setups that can be recalled in an instant.
RS7000 7
Using the Owner’s Manual
● Memory Card Storage, SCSI, and Memory Expansion

Sequences, phrases, and samples can be conveniently stored on compact, high-capacity memory
cards, or on just about any type of external SCSI storage medium (hard disk, MO, ZIP, etc.) connected
to the RS7000’s SCSI port. You can also connect read-only devices such as a CD-ROM drive to con-
veniently load samples and other data. 2 SIMM slots are provided for memory expansion, allowing the
RES7000 to be packed with up to 64 megabytes of RAM for extra sampling leeway.
● I/O Expansion
The optional AEB1 I/O expansion board can be installed in the RS7000 to provide 6 additional individ-
ual analog outputs as well as both coaxial and optical digital input and output.
● An Extensive Range of Effects
In today’s music effects are almost as important as the sounds they are applied to. The RS7000 offers
plenty of sound processing power with PLAY FX which function at the sequencing stage to provide
harmonization as well as note and timing variations; a three-stage DSP effect system with VARIA-
TION, DELAY, and REVERB effects; and a MASTER EFFECT stage that offers a range of up-to-date
effects for the overall sound.
● In Depth Jobs and Editing
Creating sequences that sound just right can be a tricky business, but the RS7000 makes the job as
smooth and easy as possible with an extensive selection of jobs and editing functions. There’s grid
groove, for example, to give your tracks the kind of groove and feel that straightforward sequencing
simply can’t achieve. In the RS7000 this flexible feature works with samples as well as tone-generator
data for unprecedented “feel” control. Another sampling feature that offers hands-on creative control is
“real time loop remix” — a powerful and easy way to remix your sampled loops while monitoring them
in real time. Then there are jobs to automatically create glides, rolls, crescendos, and other subtleties
that can make a huge difference to the musical mood. If you can image it, the RS7000 can probably do
it. And when you want to really make detailed refinements, the EDIT mode gives you direct access to
individual note and even parameters.
Using the Owner’s Manual
The Manual Structure

The RS7000 Owner’s Manual is broadly divided into 3 main sections: the Tutorial section, the Reference section, and the Appendix.
● The Tutorial Section
This section covers basics such as the structure of the RS7000 system, voice selection, recording, sampling, and other
operations that are fundamental to the RS7000.
● The Reference Section
This section includes detailed descriptions and procedures for all of the RS7000 features and functions. Use it as an
“encyclopedia of functions” to find specific information you need.
The Reference section includes the following chapters:
Chapter 1: Basics...(Page 51)
The basic concepts, procedures, displays, and special functions you’ll need to know in order to operate the RS7000 effi-
ciently. Be sure to read this chapter before using the RS7000 for the first time.
Chapter 2: The Pattern Mode ...(Page 69) ~ Chapter 6: The Utility Mode...(Page 255)
Complete, detailed coverage of all features and functions, organized by mode. Find specific information about specific
functions in these chapters.
Chapter 7: Other Information...(Page 263)
Basic information about MIDI and MIDI events handled by the RS7000. Refer to this chapter form information about
using the RS7000 with other MIDI devices.
Appendix...(Page 271)
Information on installing optional equipment, the RS7000 specifications, voice lists, effect list, error messages, MIDI data
format, and other detailed information.
8 RS7000
Finding Specific Information
Finding Specific Information
Use one of the methods described below to find the information you are looking for.
● The Table of Contents ...(Page 10)

The Table of Contents is best for finding chapters or sections of the manual that cover the type of information you are
looking for.
● The Index ...(Page 343)

The index is the place to look when you are searching for a specific function or information related to specific nomencla-
ture.
● The Controls & Connectors ...(Page 12)

This section provides information about the RS7000 panel controls and connectors, with references to related informa-
tion throughout the manual.
● The Function Tree ...(Page 55)

The Function Tree lists all RS7000 functions with page references in a tree-type diagram which is organized by mode.
● The Page Footers, Margins, and Headers

The area at the bottom of each page shows the page number. The chapter numbers and titles are also listed in the right-
most margin of each spread. The header (the top margin) displays the title of the information included in the page. This
information can help you find information while flipping through the manual pages.
Symbols
The following symbols are used through the manual to indicate different types of information.
IMPORTANT .................. Important information! Read this to ensure that you don’t accidentally erase important
data or make other potentially serious errors.
NOTE ................................. Incidental information. This information is helpful, through not always essential. Read
as necessary.
[Step] ..................................... Procedure. Step-by-step instructions for performing an operation.
[PLAY] .................................... Buttons. References to the RS7000 buttons will appear like this in the text.
P ** ..................................... Page reference. Related information can be found on the page number provided.
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat differ-
ent from those on your instrument.
RS7000 9
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
RS7000 FEATURES ....................................................... 7 Character Entry ......................................... 67

Using the Owner’s Manual ............................................ 8 Track Selection.......................................... 67
Finding Specific Information ........................................ 9 Free Tempo Entry...................................... 68
Symbols .......................................................................... 9 Used Memory Display ............................... 68
CONTENTS ................................................................... 10 Initializes the Master Effect settings .......... 68
The Controls & Connectors ........................................ 12 Undo/Redo ................................................ 68
Notes on Musical Copyright ....................................... 21 Auto Repeat............................................... 68
Preparation and Setup ................................................ 22 Auto Load .................................................. 68
Power Connection ..................................... 22
Connecting to Audio Equipment ................ 22 Chapter 2. The Pattern Mode 69
Connecting a Footswitch ........................... 23
Connecting External MIDI Devices ............ 23 About the Pattern Mode .............................................. 70
Turning Power On and Off......................... 24 1. Pattern Playback ................................................... 72
Restoring the Initial Factory Settings ........................ 25 2. Combining Phrases to Create Patterns (Patch) .... 75
3. Phrase Recording ................................................. 77
Record Standby................................................... 78
Real-Time Recording........................................... 80
Step Recording.................................................... 80
Grid Step Recording ............................................ 83
Tutorial 4. Adding Groove to a Pattern ................................. 85
5. Play Effects............................................................ 87
1. RS7000 System Overview..................................... 28 6. MIDI Delay .............................................................. 90
2. Assemble a Pattern Using Preset Phrases ......... 30 7. Adjusting Level and Effects for
3. Real-time Sound Control ...................................... 38 Each Track (Mixer) ................................................ 93
4. Recording Original Phrases ................................. 39 8. Changing the Sound of Voices (Voice Edit) ....... 97
5. Add Samples.......................................................... 43 9. Adding Effects..................................................... 104
6. Finalizing Your Sound .......................................... 46 10. Arpeggio & Assignable Knob Settings (Setup)... 107
11. Master EQ and Effects ........................................ 111
12. Saving to Memory Card or Disk......................... 114
13. Loading From Memory Card or Disk ................. 126
14. Pattern & Phrase Editing — The Pattern Jobs .... 133
15. Phrase Editing ..................................................... 154
Reference
Chapter 3. The Pattern Chain Mode 157
Chapter 1. Basic 51 About the Pattern Chain Mode ................................. 158
1. RS7000 System Overview..................................... 52 1. Sequential Pattern Playback
Mode Structure .................................................... 52 (Pattern Chain Play) ............................................ 159
Function Tree....................................................... 55 2. Creating Pattern Chains
2. RS7000 Internal Structure .................................... 58 (Pattern Chain Recording).................................. 161
The 6 Functional Blocks ...................................... 58 Record Standby................................................. 161
Sequencer ................................................. 59 Real Time Recording......................................... 162
Tone Generator ......................................... 60 Step Recording.................................................. 163
Controllers ................................................. 62 3. Master EQ and Effects ........................................ 164
Arpeggiator ................................................ 63 4. Saving to Memory Card or Disk......................... 166
Effects........................................................ 63 5. Loading from Memory Card or Disk .................. 169
Master EQ & Effects .................................. 63 6. The Pattern Chain Jobs ...................................... 171
Memory Configuration ............................... 63 7. Pattern Chain Editing.......................................... 175
3. Basic Operation..................................................... 64
Selecting Modes ........................................ 64 Chapter 4. The Song Mode 179
Selecting Sub Modes................................. 64 About the Song Mode ............................................... 180
When One Button Accesses 1. Song Playback..................................................... 182
Several Pages ........................................... 65 2. Song Recording .................................................. 184
Editing Parameter Values .......................... 66 Record Standby................................................. 184
Command Selection and Execution........... 66
Job Selection ............................................. 67
10 RS7000
CONTENTS
Real-Time Recording......................................... 186

Step Recording .................................................. 187
Grid Step Recording .......................................... 189
3. Adding Groove to a Pattern................................ 191
4. Play Effects .......................................................... 192
5. MIDI Delay ............................................................ 193
6. Adjusting Level and Effects for
Each Track (Mixer) .............................................. 194
7. Changing the Sound of Voices (Voice Edit) ..... 196
8. Adding Effects ..................................................... 198
9. Arpeggio & Assignable Knob Settings (Setup) ... 200
10. Master EQ and Effects ........................................ 202
11. Saving to Memory Card or Disk ......................... 204
12. Loading from Memory Card or Disk .................. 208
13. The Song Jobs..................................................... 212
14. Song Editing ........................................................ 225
Chapter 5. The Sampling Mode 227

About the Sampling Mode ........................................ 228
1. Recording Samples (Sampling) ......................... 229
2. The Real Time Loop Remix Function ................ 239
3. Sample Editing .................................................... 241
4. The Sample Jobs................................................. 244
Chapter 6. The Utility Mode 255

About the Utility Mode............................................... 256
1. System.................................................................. 257
2. MIDI Setup............................................................ 260
3. MIDI Filter ............................................................. 262
Chapter 7. Other Information 263

1. MIDI Basics .......................................................... 264
2. MIDI Events Handled by the RS7000 ................. 266
Appendix 271
1. Installing Optional Equipment ........................... 272
2. Specifications ...................................................... 282
3. Troubleshooting .................................................. 286
4. Error Message List .............................................. 288
5. Voice List (Normal voice) ................................... 291
6. Drum Voice List ................................................... 295
7. Phrase Category List .......................................... 313
8. Effect Type List.................................................... 313
9. Effect Parameter List .......................................... 315
10. Effect Data/Value table........................................ 323
11. MIDI Data Format................................................. 325
12. Glossary ............................................................... 334
13. Index ..................................................................... 343
RS7000 11
The Controls & Connectors
The Top Panel (Upper Section)
1 2 3 4
MUSIC PRODUCTION STUDIO

Integrated Sampling Sequencer
MASTER EFFECT SAMPLING

MULTI COMP RING MOD REAL TIME
EFFECT
ON/OFF CTRL DELAY V-DIST LOOP SAMPLE IN
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
REC VOLUME MIDI MASTER VOLUME
SEQUENCE PLAY FX EFFECT SEND / VOLUME
SELECT
8 9
5 BEAT STRETCH CLOCK SHIFT
GATE TIME MIDI DELAY
SWING
VELOCITY
DRY VARI DELAY/CHO REVERB TRACK VOLUME
LFO EG
WAVE
0 AMP A
FILTER
S&H
SPEED USER DEPTH PITCH ATTACK DECAY SUSTAIN RELEASE
PGM
PITCH FILTER
PORTAMENTO - + LPF24
TYPE FINGERED TYPE
LPF18
C FULL TIME D
LPF12
6 OFF HPF
BPF
PITCH BEND PORTAMENTO TIME CUTOFF RESONANCE ENV.DEPTH
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
7 PATTERN PATT
MODE
SONG UTILITY UTILITY
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
1 MASTER EFFECT (Page 63) Control Knob 1 ~ Control Knob 4

These controls control the final master effect stage which These four knobs control the master effect parameters
applies processing to the stereo signal appearing at the shown below each knob at the top of the LCD display.
RS7000 stereo outputs. The parameters controlled by these knobs can also be
Detailed settings are available in the PATTERN mode, PAT- accessed and edited via the PATTERN, PATTERN
TERN CHAIN mode, and SONG mode MASTER sub mode PATCH, and SONG mode MASTER sub mode display
(Page 111, 164, 202).
(Page 111, 164, 202).
Effect Type Selector (Page 63)
[EFFECT ON/OFF] Button Effect Type Selector Selects the master effect type.
MASTER EFFECT
MULTI COMP RING MOD
2 SAMPLING
EFFECT
CTRL DELAY V-DIST
ON/OFF
D-FILTER LO-FI The controls in this group control sampling via the RS7000
ISOLATION SLICE
INPUT L and R connectors, and allow editing of recorded

Control Knob 2 Control Knob 4 samples.
Control Knob 1 Control Knob 3
[REAL TIME LOOP REMIX] Button

[SAMPLE EDIT] Button
[EFFECT ON/OFF] Button SAMPLING

REAL TIME
Turns the master effect stage on or off. The indicator lights LOOP
REMIX
SAMPLE
EDIT STANDBY
when the master effects are on.

To temporarily turn the master effect on, press the START/STOP
REC VOLUME
[EFFECT ON/OFF] button while holding the [SHIFT] but- [STANDBY START/STOP] Button
ton. The master effect will be applied only while the button [REC VOLUME] Knob
is held.
12 RS7000
[REAL TIME LOOP REMIX] Button (Page 239) 7 [F1] ~ [F4] Function Buttons
Turns the real-time loop remix function on or off. The Select parameters appearing on the bottom line of the LCD,
indicator lights when the real-time remix feature is on. execute functions, and switch between display pages.
When more than one parameter is assigned to a single
[SAMPLE EDIT] Button (Page 241)
function knob ([Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4]), the corresponding
Engages the SAMPLE EDIT mode. The indicator lights
function button can be used to select the parameter to be
when the SAMPLE EDIT mode is active.
edited.
[STANDBY START/STOP] Button (Page 229) When a function knob is active (i.e. it can be used to per-
Switches to the sampling mode, and starts/stops the sam- form a function), the corresponding indicator will light.
pling operation. When a numeric parameter is to be edited, in some cases
the SUB MODE buttons can be used as a numeric keypad
[REC VOLUME] Control for direct numeric data entry while the [SHIFT] and related
Adjusts the input level of the analog signal appearing at function button ([F1] ~ [F4]) is held (Page 66).
the INPUT L and R connectors. Used for sample recording
and A/D input. 8 SEQUENCE PLAY FX Controls
When the optional AIEB2 I/O expansion board is installed, In addition to the functions described here, these knobs are
additional DIGITAL IN and OPTICAL IN inputs are avail- fully assignable and can be set up to control a wide range
able, but the [REC VOLUME] control does not affect the of functions and parameters.
input level of these inputs. Since the knobs allow continuous parameter control for the
3 MIDI IN/OUT Indicator selected track, they can be used for creative real-time per-
The appropriate lamp will flash when MIDI data is received formance sound control. 2 functions can be assigned to
or transmitted by the RS7000. Use this indicator to confirm each knob, selected by the [SELECT] button to their right,
MIDI data reception or transmission. allowing the three knobs to control up to 6 different parame-
ters or functions.
4 [MASTER VOLUME] Control The default assignments for these knobs are the main
Adjusts the level of the signal appearing at the RS7000 PLAY EFFECT and MIDI DELAY parameters. Refer to
OUTPUT L/MONO and R connectors as well as the “Chapter 2: The Pattern mode”, pages 87 and 90, for more
PHONES jack. information on PLAY EFFECTS and MIDI DELAY.
When the optional AIEB2 I/O expansion board is installed,
[BEAT STRETCH/GATE TIME] Knob
additional ASSIGNABLE OUT (AS1 ~ 6), DIGITAL OUT, [CLOCK SHIFT/MIDI DELAY] Knob
and OPTICAL OUT outputs are available, but the [MAS- SEQUENCE PLAY FX
TER VOLUME] control does not affect the level of these SELECT
outputs.
5 Display BEAT STRETCH CLOCK SHIFT SWING

GATE TIME MIDI DELAY VELOCITY
This backlit LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) displays all infor-
mation and parameters necessary for operation of the [SWING/VELOCITY] Knob [SELECT] Button
RS7000.
[BEAT STRETCH/GATE TIME] Knob
6 [Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4]
With the initial default settings, this knob provides real-
These four knobs adjust the parameter values which
time control of the PLAY FX BEAT STRETCH and GATE
appear directly above them in the display. Rotating a knob
TIME parameters.
while holding then [SHIFT] button allows coarse adjustment BEAT STRETCH compresses or expands the length of
at approximately 10x the normal rate. measures (Page 89), while GATE TIME alters the gate
time of the notes (Page 88).
[CLOCK SHIFT/MIDI DELAY] Knob

time control of the PLAY FX CLOCK SHIFT and MIDI
DELAY parameters.
CLOCK SHIFT shifts the timing of notes (Page 89), while
MIDI DELAY adjusts the delay time of the MIDI DELAY
effect (Page 91).
RS7000 13
[SWING/VELOCITY] Knob 0 LFO Knobs

With the initial default settings, this knob provides real- In addition to the functions described here, these knobs are
time control of the PLAY FX SWING and VELOCITY fully assignable and can be set up to control a wide range
parameters. of functions and parameters.
SWING adjusts the timing of the 8th-note up (back) beats Since the knobs allow continuous parameter control for the
to create a bounce or swing feel (Page 89). VELOCITY
selected track, they can be used for creative real-time per-
adjusts the velocity of the notes (Page 88).
formance sound control. 3 functions can be assigned to the
[SELECT] Button [DEPTH] knob, selected by the [AMP/FILTER/PITCH] but-
Selects one of the two functions/parameters assigned to ton B to its right.
each knob. The indicator next to the currently selected The default assignments for these knobs are the main LFO
parameters will light. parameters.
[WAVE] Button
9 [EFFECT SEND/VOLUME] Knobs
LFO
In addition to the functions described here, these knobs are
WAVE
fully assignable and can be set up to control a wide range
of functions and parameters.
S&H
Since the knobs allow continuous parameter control for the SPEED USER DEPTH
PGM
[SPEED] Knob [DEPTH] Knob
formance sound control.
The default assignments for these knobs are the main
[SPEED] Knob (Page 98)
MIXER parameters. Refer to “Chapter 2: The Pattern
mode”, page 69, for more information on the MIXER
time control of the LFO SPEED parameter.
parameters.
[DEPTH] Knob (Page 98)
[DRY VARI] Knob [REVERB] Knob
EFFECT SEND / VOLUME time control of the LFO DEPTH parameter. Depending on
the function selected by the [AMP/FILTER/PITCH] but-
ton B, the [DEPTH] knob can control the depth of a trem-
olo, wow, or vibrato effect.
[WAVE] Button (Page 98)
[DELAY/CHO] Knob [TRACK VOLUME] Knob
Selects the LFO waveform.
A [EG] Knobs
[DRY VARI] Knob (Page 96) In addition to the functions described here, these knobs are
With the initial default settings, this knob provides real- fully assignable and can be set up to control a wide range
time control of the MIXER DRY SEND LEVEL parame- of functions and parameters.
ter. This adjusts the level of the signal sent to the dry line. 3 parameters are assigned to each knob, selectable via the
[AMP/FILTER/PITCH] button B.
[DELAY/CHO] Knob (Page 96)
Since the knobs allow continuous parameter control for the
time control of the MIXER DELAY/CHORUS SEND
LEVEL parameter. This adjusts the level of the signal sent formance sound control.
to the delay or chorus effect. The default assignments for these knobs are the main
MIXER parameters. Refer to “Chapter 2: The Pattern
[REVERB] Knob (Page 96) mode”, page 69, for more information on the MIXER
With the initial default settings, this knob provides real- parameters.
time control of the MIXER REVERB SEND LEVEL [ATTACK] Knob [SUSTAIN] Knob
parameter. This adjusts the level of the signal sent to the
EG
reverb effect.
[TRACK VOLUME] Knob (Page 94)

ATTACK DECAY SUSTAIN RELEASE
time control of the volume of the currently selected track.
[DECAY] Knob [RELEASE] Knob
14 RS7000
[ATTACK] Knob [PORTAMENTO TIME] Knob (Page 100)

With the initial default settings, this knob provides real- With the initial default settings, this knob provides real-
time control of the AMPLITUDE EG, FILTER EG, or time control of the PORTAMENTO TIME parameter.
PITCH EG ATTACK parameter. The target EG is selected
by the [AMP/FILTER/PITCH] button B. [PORTAMENTO TYPE] Button (Page 100)
Selects the PORTAMENTO type. The settings are selected
[DECAY] Knob in sequence each time the button is pressed.
time control of the AMPLITUDE EG, FILTER EG, or D FILTER Knobs
PITCH EG DECAY parameter. The target EG is selected In addition to the functions described here, these knobs are
by the [AMP/FILTER/PITCH] button B. fully assignable and can be set up to control a wide range
[SUSTAIN] Knob
Since the knobs allow continuous parameter control for the
With the initial default settings, this knob provides real- selected track, they can be used for creative real-time per-
time control of the AMPLITUDE EG, FILTER EG, or
formance sound control.
PITCH EG SUSTAIN parameter. The target EG is selected
The default assignments for these knobs are the main FIL-
by the [AMP/FILTER/PITCH] button B.
TER parameters.
[RELEASE] Knob
[CUTOFF] Knob [ENV. DEPTH] Knob
time control of the AMPLITUDE EG, FILTER EG, or
FILTER
PITCH EG RELEASE parameter. The target EG is - + LPF24
selected by the [AMP/FILTER/PITCH] button B. TYPE
LPF18
LPF12
HPF
B [AMP/FILTER/PITCH] Button BPF
CUTOFF RESONANCE ENV.DEPTH
BEF
Selects the parameter to be controlled by the LFO and EG
knobs. The indicator light in sequence each time the button [RESONANCE] Knob [TYPE] Button
is pressed, indicating the currently selected parameter:
AMP → FILTER → PITCH → AMP, etc.
[CUTOFF] Knob (Page 103)
C PITCH Knobs With the initial default settings, this knob provides real-
In addition to the functions described here, these knobs are time control of filter CUTOFF.
fully assignable and can be set up to control a wide range
[RESONANCE] Knob (Page 103)
Since the knobs allow continuous parameter control for the With the initial default settings, this knob provides real-
time control of filter RESONANCE.
formance sound control. [ENV. DEPTH] Knob (Page 103)
The default assignments for these knobs are the PITCH With the initial default settings, this knob provides real-
BEND and PORTAMENTO TIME parameters. time control of filter ENVELOPE DEPTH.
[PITCH BEND] Knob [PORTAMENTO TYPE] Button [TYPE] Button (Page 103)
Selects the filter type. The settings are selected in sequence
PITCH
PORTAMENTO each time the button is pressed.
TYPE FINGERED
FULL TIME
OFF
PITCH BEND PORTAMENTO TIME
[PORTAMENTO TIME] Knob
[PITCH BEND] Knob (Page 101)

time control of PITCH BEND.
RS7000 15
The Top Panel (Lower Section)
EM F G J H I
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
PATTERN PATT SONG UTILITY UTILITY
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

GROOVE PLAY FX MIDI DELAY MIXER GROOVE PLAY FX MIDI DELAY MIXER
GRID GROOVE HARMONIZE MIDI DELAY VOICE SELECT
REC STOP PLAY NOTE FEEDBACK VOL/PAN/OUT
TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
VOICE EDIT EFFECT SETUP MASTER VOICE EDIT EFFECT SETUP MASTER
SHIFT LFO EFFECT TYPE ARPEGGIO MASTER EQ
PORTAMENTO VARIATION A/D SETUP MASTER
PITCH DELAY KNOB ASSIGN EFFECT
MUTE EG REVERB MIDI OUT CH
KEY- ARPEGGIO OCT OCT MEMORY 4 5 6 0 FILTER
BOARD ON DOWN UP STORE SCENE 1 2 3 4 5 EXIT SAVE LOAD JOB EDIT SAVE LOAD JOB EDIT
SAVE LOAD JOB LIST EDIT CHANGE
L N K EXPORT
RENAME
DELETE
IMPORT
SCSI SETUP
SCSI COMM
VIEW FILTER
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
SECTION A B C D E F G H I J TAP
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
O
CAPS ALL 1~8 9~16 TR- TR+ PAD ASSIGN
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
P SPACE DEL
SOLO
K ! L # M $ N % O & P ' Q ( R ) S - T @ U ^ V _ W { X } Y ~ Z
Q TRANSPOSE(-) TRANSPOSE(+)
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
R S T
E [SHIFT] Button [ ■ ](STOP) Button

Access several secondary functions when used in conjunc- Stops pattern or song playback or recording.
tion with other buttons and controls.
[ ](PLAY) Button
F Sequencer Buttons Starts pattern or song playback, and starts phrase or song
The sequencer buttons control recording and playback in recording. When playback or recording is started, the [ ]
the PATTERN and SONG modes. button indicator flashes at the current BPM (the indicator
lights continuously in the STEP recording mode).
[ ](Fast Reverse) Button

[●](REC) Button [■](STOP) Button [ ] Button [ ] Button
Moves back one measure when pressed briefly, or scrolls
backward continuously (fast reverse) when held.
REC STOP PLAY
[ ](Fast Forward) Button

Moves forward one measure when pressed briefly, or
[ ] Button [ ](PLAY) Button scrolls forward continuously (fast forward) when held.
G LED Display
[●](REC) Button Displays the current BPM or measure number. The LED
display also briefly displays the current value set by a knob
Switches to the phrase or song recording display. The indi-
cator will light when the button is press to engage the while the knob is operated.
record standby mode. Whether the LED display normally shows BPM or the mea-
sure number is determined by the setting in the UTILITY
[ ](Top) Button mode System page (Page 258).
Goes directly to the top measure of the current pattern or
song.
16 RS7000
H MODE Buttons [GROOVE] Button

Select the main RS7000 operating mode. The indicator Selects the GROOVE quantize sub mode.
above the selected MODE button will light.
[PLAY FX] Button
[PATTERN] Button [SONG] Button Selects the PLAY FX sub mode and the various display
pages provided.
MODE
PATTERN PATT SONG UTILITY [MIDI DELAY] Button
CHAIN
Selects the MIDI DELAY sub mode and the various dis-
play pages provided.
[MIXER] Button
[PATT CHAIN] Button [UTILITY] Button
Selects the MIXER sub mode and the various display
pages provided.
[PATTERN] Button (Page 70) [VOICE EDIT] Button
Selects the PATTERN mode. The PATTERN Play and Selects the VOICE EDIT sub mode and the various display
PATTERN Patch modes are selected alternately each time pages provided.
the button is pressed.
[EFFECT] Button
[PATT CHAIN] Button (Page158)
Selects the EFFECT sub mode and the various display
Selects the PATTERN CHAIN mode. pages provided.
[SONG] Button (Page180) [SETUP] Button
Selects the SONG mode. Selects the SETUP sub mode and the various display
pages provided.
[UTILITY] Button (Page256)
Selects the UTILITY mode. After entering the UTILITY [MASTER] Button
mode the [UTILITY] button sequentially selects the vari- Selects the MASTER sub mode and the various display
ous pages provided. pages provided.
I SUB MODE Buttons [SAVE] Button
These buttons access the various sub modes available Selects the SAVE sub mode and the various display pages
within each of the main modes. When a sub mode includes provided.
more than on display page, the pages are sequentially
selected each time the button is pressed. [LOAD] Button
Selects the LOAD sub mode and the various display pages
provided.
SUB MODE
GROOVE PLAY FX MIDI DELAY MIXER [JOB] Button
Selects the PATTERN, PATTERN CHAIN, or SONG JOB
sub mode and the various display pages provided.
7 8 9 +/-
VOICE EDIT EFFECT SETUP MASTER [EDIT] Button
Selects the PATTERN, PATTERN CHAIN, or SONG
EDIT sub mode and the various display pages provided.
4 5 6 0
SAVE LOAD JOB EDIT
J [EXIT] Button
Moves backward (upward) through the sub mode display
1 2 3 ENTER pages, or out of the current sub mode back to the main
mode.
RS7000 17
K SCENE/MUTE Buttons M [ARPEGGIO ON] Button

Up to 5 complete scene and mute setups can be stored in Turns the RS7000 automatic arpeggio feature on or off. The
memory and recalled at the touch of a button. [ARPEGGIO ON] button indicator will light when the
A “scene” includes all parameter settings for all tracks (all ARPEGGIO feature is on, and notes played on the keyboard
knob settings and mute on/off settings). A mute setup will be played as an arpeggio. To turn the arpeggio function
includes the mute on/off status for all tracks. off press the button again so that its indicator goes out.
The ability to store and instantly recall complete scene and
mute setups means that even complex setups that would N [OCT DOWN] and [OCT UP] Buttons
take a considerable amount of time to program in real time The [OCT DOWN] and [OCT UP] buttons allow the pitch of
can be called up at the touch of a button. Recall operations the keyboard to be shifted down or up in octave steps.
can be recorded to pattern chains and songs as well. Press both buttons simultaneously to return to normal
pitch. The current amount of octave shift is indicated on the
NOTE LCD display. (Page 73)
• Scenes do not include sequence data. O [TRANSPOSE] Button (Page 73)
• Scene/mute setups cannot be stored during
sequence recording. Store operations are Used in conjunction with the keyboard to transpose the
possible during playback. overall pitch. Transposition is set by holding the [TRANS-
POSE] button and pressing the key on the keyboard corre-
sponding to the desired amount of transposition above or
below the E (track 8) key. While the [TRANSPOSE] button
MUTE is held the E indicator will light and the indicator of the
MEMORY
STORE SCENE 1 2 3 4 5 selected transpose key will flash. To transpose by more
than an octave first press the [OCT UP] or [OCT DOWN]
button and then the keyboard.
[STORE] Button P [MUTE] Button (Page 74)

Store the current scene or mute settings to one of the 5 This button is used to make track mute settings and solo
available memory locations: [MEMORY 1] ~ [MEMORY settings.To make mute settings, press the [MUTE] button to
5]. The selected type of data is stored when a scene/mute
make the indicator light. To make solo settings, hold down
memory button — [MEMORY 1] ~ [MEMORY 5] — is
the [SHIFT] button and press the [MUTE] button to make
pressed while the [STORE] button is held.
the indicator flash. When you do so, the keyboard pad indi-
[SCENE/MUTE] Button cators (white keys) corresponding to tracks that contain
Switches between the scene and mute memory functions. data will light, and pressing one of these keys will engage
The SCENE and MUTE indicators light alternately each the mute or solo function for that track, causing the indica-
time the button is pressed. tor to flash. Press the same key again to disengage the
mute function for that track. To disengage the solo function,
[MEMORY 1] ~ [MEMORY 5] Button
press the [MUTE] button.
Used in conjunction with the [STORE] button (see above)
to store scene or mute setups, and when pressed alone Q [TRACK SELECT] Button (Page 67)
these buttons recall the stored scene or mute data. Used in conjunction with the keyboard to select a track for
recording or other operations. Tracks are selected by press-
L [KEYBOARD] Button
ing the appropriate white key on the keyboard while holding
Determines whether the RS7000 keyboard is to be used as
the [TRACK SELECT] button.
a music keyboard (i.e., to play notes). When you press the
[KEYBOARD] button so that its indicator lights, the key- R Keyboard
board will function as a music keyboard to play notes. If you The keyboard is used like a conventional keyboard to enter
press the button once again so that the indicator goes dark, performance data, as well as to select sections, select
the keyboard can be used to select sections, to select tracks, mute and solo tracks, set transposition, and more.
tracks, or as track mute buttons. Normally the number “6” key corresponds to middle C. The
keyboard does not respond to velocity or aftertouch.
S [TAP] Button
Tap this button at the desired tempo to automatically set the
BPM.
18 RS7000
T [PAD 1] and [PAD 2] U CARD Slot

Velocity-sensitive pads for performance data entry. Tapping Slot for memory card insertion.
these pads enters the pre-specified note data at the speci-
fied pitch. The pitch for each pad can be set by playing the
appropriate key on the keyboard while holding the [TAP]
button and [PAD 1] or [PAD 2].
The Rear Panel
1 4 5 6 7 8 9
THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003. THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE
MUSICAL INSTRUMENT
379U MIDI CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME NMB-003 (1)THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE,AND
DU CANADA. (2)THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECIVED,INCLUDING INTERFERENCE
US LISTED THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
IN
DO NOT OPEN
WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, OUT A
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
AC INLET
MODEL SER. NO.
OUT B
MADE IN JAPAN
2 3
1 POWER Switch 5 FOOT SW Jack

Press in to turn the RS7000 on, and press again to turn it An optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch connected to
off. this jack can be used for start/stop, section selection, sus-
tain, or tap BPM entry.
2 AC INLET
The AC power cable supplied with the RS7000 is plugged 6 CONTRAST Control
in here. Use only the supplied cable. Use the CONTRAST control to achieve the best LCD dis-
play visibility (LCD visibility varies with viewing angle).
3 MIDI IN, OUT A, and OUT B Connectors
If you plan to use a MIDI keyboard or other instrument to 7 INPUT L and R Jacks
play and program the RS7000, it should be connected to Analog mono or stereo signals can be connected here for
the MIDI IN connector. sampling (recording). Connect mono signals to either the L
The MIDI OUT A and B connectors can be connected to an or R jack.
external tone generator or synthesizer if you want to trans-
8 OUTPUT L/MONO & R Jacks
mit performance data, button and knob operations, and pad
These are the main stereo outputs from the RS7000. When
operations to external equipment from the RS7000.
a plug is inserted into only the L/MONO output, the left- and
4 SCSI Connector right-channels signals are mixed and delivered via that out-
External SCSI storage devices (hard disks, CD-ROM put to allow direct connection to mono sound systems.
drives, etc.) can be connected here. The connector is a 50-
9 PHONES Jack
pin half-pitch type.
Any pair of stereo headphones with a 1/4” stereo phone
plug can be plugged in here for convenient monitoring. The
PHONES output level is adjusted via the MASTER VOL-
UME control.
RS7000 19
Rear Panel with Optional AIEB2 I/O

Expansion Board Installed
THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003. THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE
MUSICAL INSTRUMENT
379U MIDI CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME NMB-003 (1)THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE,AND
DU CANADA. (2)THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECIVED,INCLUDING INTERFERENCE
US LISTED THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
IN
DO NOT OPEN
WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, OUT A
AC INLET
MODEL SER. NO. OPTICAL DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE OUT
OUT B
IN OUT IN OUT AS6 AS5 AS4 AS3 AS2 AS1
MADE IN JAPAN
1 2 3
1 OPTICAL IN, OUT Connectors Options

Digital input and output for connection via optical cable.
Digital signals to be recorded (48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 32 kHz A range of options are available to give the RS7000 even greater
fs) can be connected to OPTICAL IN. OPTICAL OUT deliv- music production capabilities.
ers the same signal as the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks
Expansion Memory (SIMM)
in digital form (fs = 44.1 kHz). Recorded samples and samples loaded from memory card must
be stored in the internal memory in order to be played.
2 DIGITAL IN, OUT Connectors
The RS7000 comes equipped with 4 MB of memory which
Digital input and output in S/P DIF format (the format nor- allows up to 46 seconds of monaural sample recording or play-
mally used by home-use CD or DAT equipment) for connec- back at the maximum 44.1 kHz sampling frequency. Additional
tion via coaxial (RCA-pin) cable. Digital signals to be memory (SIMM) can be installed to allow much longer sample
recorded (48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 32 kHz fs) can be con- recording and playback. If you need longer sample recording and
playback time, or want to keep a large number of samples in
nected to DIGITAL IN. DIGITAL OUT delivers the same sig-
memory at the same time, you may need to add extra memory.
nal as the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks in digital form (fs See page 274 of the Appendix for details on installing extra mem-
= 44.1 kHz). ory.
3 ASSIGNABLE OUT 1 ~ 6 Jacks

Unlike the STEREO OUT outputs, the output from individ-
ual tracks can be assigned to these outputs. (Page 21)
The ASSIGNABLE OUT jacks can be used as mono out-
puts or as stereo pairs (1&2, 3&4, 5&6).
20 RS7000
Notes on Musical Copyright
Precautions for Purchasing Expansion SIMM

• We recommend SIMMs which conform to JEDEC*
Memory
standards. However, even though a SIMM which
Some types of commonly available SIMM memory may not
work properly with the RS7000, and we cannot guarantee opera- conforms to the JEDEC internal circuit configuration
tion with untested memory types. Please check with the retail functions perfectly in a computer, there is no guar-
outlet where you purchased your RS7000, or an authorized antee that it will work properly with the RS7000.
Yamaha representative, before purchasing expansion SIMM
*JEDEC stands for the “Joint Electron Device
memory.
Engineering Council”, a group which sets stan-
dards for the configurations of electronic
IMPORTANT devices.
• Use only 4, 8, 16, or 32 megabyte 72-pin SIMMs
with an access time faster than 70ns. x32bit SIMMs
are the standard, but x36bit types (with parity) can AIEB2 I/O Expansion Board
also be used. Initially the RS7000 can only record samples from analog
• Always install SIMMs in pairs of the same capacity.
sources, and only analog output capability is provided. With the
optional AIEB2 I/O Expansion Board, however, you gain optical
A single SIMM will not work.
and coaxial terminals for direct digital signal input and output.
• The RS7000 comes with 4 megabytes of pre-
Also, 6 assignable outputs (ASSIGNABLE OUT 1 ~ 6) are pro-
installed sample memory. Thus if you install a pair of vided in addition to the standard OUTPUT jacks.
16 megabyte SIMMs (32 megabytes total) you will Refer to page 276 in the Appendix for details on installing the
have 36 megabytes (32 + 4 megabytes) of sample AIEB2 I/O Expansion Board.
memory. However, since the maximum allowable
sample memory for the RS7000 is 64 megabytes, if NOTE
you install a pair of 32 megabyte SIMMs (64 mega-
The AIEB1 expansion I/O board cannot be
bytes total) the initial 4 megabytes will not be used.
used.
• SIMMs which use more than 19 memory chips per
unit may not function properly with the RS7000.
Please choose SIMMs which use 18 or fewer mem-
ory chips.
Notes on Musical Copyright
The RS7000 supports SCMS (Serial Copy Management System) to protect the copyrights of music software.
Data that was digitally sampled from a CD or other source cannot be saved to a memory card or SCSI disk in WAV format, or transferred
via the TWE wave editor as sample data. If you wish to save this data, you must save it in the RS7000’s own format.
It is prohibited to use copyrighted songs and sound data (that can be recorded via the RS7000) for commercial pur-
poses. It is also prohibited to reproduce, transfer, or distribute the data, or play the data for a commercial audience
without permission from the owners of the copyright, except for personal use or application that does not infringe the
copyright. If you wish to use such data for occasions other than personal use, consult a copyright expert. Yamaha is
not responsible for any data created, reproduced, or edited using the RS7000, nor for any reproduction or use of
such data.
RS7000 21
Preparation and Setup
Power supply and other equipment connections will be described in this section.
Power Connection Connecting to Audio Equipment
WARNING CAUTION
Connections with external equipment must be made
• Be sure that the RS7000’s power switch is OFF
with the power of the RS7000 and peripheral equip-
before you connect the cord.
ment turned off. Making connections with the power
• Make sure your RS7000 is rated for the AC voltage
on may damage your amp or speakers.
supplied in the area in which it is to be used (as
listed on the rear panel). Connecting the unit to the
wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the
internal circuitry and may even pose a shock haz- The RS7000 has no internal amplifier or speakers of its own. To
ard! monitor the sound of the RS7000, connect headphones, powered
• Use only the AC power cord supplied with the speakers, or other playback equipment as required.
RS7000. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and
needs to be replaced, contact your Yamaha dealer. ■ Headphones
The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a If you are using headphones, connect them to the rear panel
fire and shock hazard! PHONES (headphones) jack. When using headphones, adjust the
• The type of AC power cord provided with the MASTER VOLUME control to an appropriate level that will not
RS7000 may be different depending on the country harm your hearing. The rear-panel OUTPUT L/MONO and R
in which it is purchased (a third prong may be pro- jacks are active even when headphones are connected.
vided for grounding purposes). Improper connection
of the grounding conductor can create the risk of INPUT OUTPUT
R L R L/MONO PHONES
electrical shock. Do NOT modify the plug provided
with the RS7000. If the plug will not fit the outlet,
have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electri-
cian. Do not use a plug adaptor which defeats the
grounding conductor.
• The RS7000 is designed for use with a grounded
line (three-prong outlet). The power cord includes a
grounding pin to prevent electrical shock and dam-
age to equipment.
Connect the supplied power cord to the AC inlet on the rear

panel. Then plug the other end of the cord into a 3-prong wall ■ Powered Speakers
outlet. Connect a pair of powered speakers (such as the Yamaha CBX-
S3) to the output jacks (L/MONO, R) using appropriate connec-
AC INLET
MODEL SER. NO. tion cables. If you are connecting only one powered speaker, use
the L/MONO jack.
M
INPUT OUTPUT
SW CONTRAST R L R L/MONO PHONES
22 RS7000
■ Connecting to a Mixer Connecting External MIDI Devices

Connect the output jacks (L/MONO, R) to two channels of the
mixer. The channel connected to the L/MONO jack should be
panned left, and the channel connected to the R jack should be ■ Connecting a tone generator module
panned right. RS7000 sequence playback data can be used to play an external
tone generator module. Use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI
INPUT OUTPUT
SW CONTRAST R L R L/MONO PHONES OUT connector on the rear panel to the MIDI IN connector of the
external MIDI device.

EFFECT
ON/OFF
MASTER EFFECT
MULTI COMP
CTRL DELAY
D-FILTER
ISOLATION
RING MOD
V-DIST
LO-FI
SLICE
REAL TIME
LOOP
REMIX
SAMPLE
EDIT
SAMPLING
STANDBY
START/STOP
REC VOLUME MIDI
IN
OUT A
OUT B
MASTER VOLUME
Tone generator
module
SELECT
BEAT STRETCH CLOCK SHIFT

GATE TIME
LFO
MIDI DELAY
WAVE
SWING
VELOCITY
DRY
EG
VARI DELAY/CHO REVREB TRACK VOLUME
MIDI OUT MIDI

A or B
AMP
IN
FILTER
S&H
PGM
PITCH FILTER
TYPE FINGERED TYPE
LPF18
FULL TIME LPF12
OFF HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
EXPORT IMPORT VIEW FILTER
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
TRANSPOSE(-) TRANSPOSE(+)
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
CAUTION
Do not connect the output jacks of the RS7000 ■ Connecting a MIDI keyboard
to the mic input jacks of an amp or cassette Real-time recording input will be easier if you use a MIDI key-
deck etc. If they are connected to mic inputs, board.
the sound quality may be impaired, and the Use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT of the external MIDI
device may be damaged. Also, when connect- keyboard to the MIDI IN connector on the rear panel.
ing the RS7000 to a mixer or similar device, set THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS COMPLIES WITH
the mixer channels to Line Input sensitivity.

MUSICAL INSTRUMENT
379U MIDI CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE LA CLASSE B EST C
DU CANADA.
US LISTED
IN
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK SCSI
DO NOT OPEN
N : RISQUE DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR.
O REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, OUT A
MODEL SER. NO.
Connecting a Footswitch OUT B
MADE IN JAPAN
When using an optional FC4 or FC5 footswitch, insert the foot-

switch plug into the FOOT SW jack located on the rear panel.
The footswitch function is determined by the UTILITY mode
SYSTEM page FOOT SWITCH parameter (Page 257).
MIDI OUT
INPUT OUTPUT
SCSI FOOT SW CONTRAST R L R L/MONO PHONES
■ Connecting to an MTR (Multi-track Recorder)

Since the RS7000 implements MTC (MIDI Time Code) and
MMC (MIDI Machine Control), you can produce music while
synchronized to a MTC- or MMC-compatible multi-track
recorder. The RS7000 does not generate MTC on it’s own, so
you’ll need an optional MTC device such as the Yamaha
AW4416. Use MIDI cables to connect the MIDI OUT connector
of the RS7000 to the MIDI IN connector of the MTR, and the
MIDI IN connector of the RS7000 to the MIDI OUT connector
of the MTR. The RS7000 will sync to the MTC clock signal
received from the external device. If your MTR recognizes
MMC, then the start/stop, fast forward and rewind functions can
be remotely controlled from the RS7000. In this case go to the
UTILITY mode MIDI page and set the MIDI Sync parameter to
“MTC” (Page 260).
RS7000 23
RS7000 Synchronized to External MTC 3. Turn the power to audio equipment on, then turn the RS7000
and audio volumes up to a reasonable listening level.
EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
BEAT STRETCH CLOCK SHIFT SWING DRY VARI DELAY/CHO REVREB TRACK VOLUME
LFO EG
PITCH
SPEED
WAVE
USER
S&H
PGM
DEPTH
AMP
FILTER
PITCH ATTACK
FILTER
DECAY
-
SUSTAIN
+
RELEASE MIDI MIDI
Multi-track
PORTAMENTO LPF24
TYPE FINGERED TYPE
OUT
LPF18
IN
FULL TIME LPF12
OFF HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
Recorder
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
4. If the display is not easily visible, use the CONTRAST con-

trol to adjust for optimum visibility.
* In this case MTC must be sent to the RS7000 from an external
MIDI device. CONTRAST
RS7000 Controlling External Device via MMC


EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
BEAT STRETCH CLOCK SHIFT

GATE TIME
LFO
MIDI DELAY
SWING
VELOCITY
DRY
EG
VARI DELAY/CHO REVREB TRACK VOLUME
5. Always turn the RS7000 power off after turning the volume
MIDI MIDI
WAVE
AMP
FILTER
S&H
USER PITCH
all the way down or turning off all connected audio equip-
SPEED DEPTH ATTACK DECAY SUSTAIN RELEASE
PGM
PITCH FILTER
- +
Multi-track
PORTAMENTO LPF24
TYPE FINGERED TYPE
LPF18
OUT
FULL TIME LPF12
OFF HPF
IN
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
ment.
MODE
Recorder
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
A or B
BPM SUB MODE
TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
CAUTION
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
The RS7000 system setup data is retained in

memory by a backup battery. When the backup
battery runs low, the “Backup Battery Low!”
Turning Power On and Off warning will appear in the display. If the battery
runs down completely, the contents of memory
1. Make sure all peripheral equipment is properly connected to will be lost. If the “Backup Battery Low!” warning
the RS7000, and turn all audio volume controls down to min- appears, immediately save the data to a mem-
imum. ory card (Smart Media) or an external SCSI
disk, and then have the backup battery replaced
2. Turn the RS7000 power on after the peripheral devices.
by the qualified Yamaha service personnel.
MUSICAL INSTRUMENT
379U MIDI
US LISTED
POWER CAUTION
ON/ OFF RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
AC INLET
MODEL SER. NO.
MADE IN JAPAN
24 RS7000
Restoring the Initial Factory Settings
The original RS7000 factory settings can be restored as follows.
When the factory settings are restored, all the voice and sequence data you created as well as the system
setup data will be erased. Be sure to save all important data to memory card (Smart Media) or SCSI disk
(Page 114, 166, 204) before performing this procedure.
[Procedure]
1. Turn the power OFF.
2. Turn the power ON while holding the [OCT DOWN], [OCT
UP] and [STORE] buttons.
MUTE
ARPEGGIO OCT OCT
D ON DOWN UP STORE SCENE 1
POWER
ON/ OFF
RS7000 25
26 RS7000
Tutorial
Although all the information you need to operate the RS7000 is available in
the reference section of this manual, you might want to take the time to go
through the tutorial in order to familiarize yourself with some of its most
important features in a step-by-step “linear” manner.
The tutorial is presented in 6 sections, outlined below, each of which builds
on the information presented in the previous section.
1. RS7000 System Overview ......................... 28

A quick look at the overall RS7000 system and what it can do.
2. Assemble a Pattern Using

Preset Phrases ........................................... 30
The fast, easy way to create patterns. Here we’ll create a pattern that we’ll
build on in the following sections.
3. Real-time Sound Control ............................ 38

A quick detour to try out some of the RS7000’s awesome real-time control
capabilities.
4. Recording Original Phrases....................... 39

Record an original phrase and add it to the basic pattern we created in sec-
tion 2.
5. Add Samples ............................................... 43

Record a new sample and add it to our pattern.
6. Finalizing Your Sound ............................... 46
The final mix — fine-tuning the groove and adding effects.
Please note that the tutorial by no means covers all the capabilities and fea-
tures of the RS7000. Important functions which are not included in the
tutorial — the SONG, EDIT and UTILITY modes, to name a few — are
described in detail in the reference section of the manual. Use the table of
contents and index to find detailed information on the features and func-
tions you want to learn about. The same applies to features described here
in the tutorial: for full details on any feature, refer to the reference section.
RS7000 27
1. RS7000 System Overview
The Yamaha RS7000 brings it all together. Everything you need for professional-level music production
— particularly in dance, techno, R&B, and ambient genres — is included and flawlessly integrated in a
system that has been specifically designed to facilitate modern production techniques. The RS7000
combines a powerful, flexible sequencing system with a state-of-the-art tone generator loaded with an
awesome selection of drum kits and voices, and a sampler which allows you to sample your own
sounds and loops and easily incorporate them into your sequences. All of this is brought together with
an interface that is intuitive and easy while offering the depth and real-time control required by profes-
sional applications.
Powerful 16-track Sequencer

In the phrase-based PATTERN mode, complete patterns can be quickly assembled by combining individual phrases from
the 5980 preset phrases provided, or you can record your own using the extensive selection of drum kits and other voices
provided by the internal AWM2 tone generator. Sampled sounds, loops and break-beats can just as easily be added to the
sequence to create the groove your music demands. Your patterns can be used individually, or the PATTERN CHAIN mode
can be used to automatically sequence specified patterns to create even complex arrangements.
There’s also a SONG mode which functions as a 16-track sequencer with all the features and versatility you’d expect from
a full-blown stand-alone sequencer.
Real-time Control
Another key requirement for creative freedom in modern music production is real-time sound control. The RS7000 offers
plenty of sonic manipulation capability with a comprehensive range of knobs for hands-on control of BPM, filter parame-
ters, envelopes, pitch, LFO, and more. The RS7000 also features a keyboard and velocity-sensitive pads that allow voices
and samples to be played in real time, as well as switching between sequence sections and tracks, and controlling the track
mute and solo functions. Scene and mute memory functions can be used to take “snapshots” of track mute setups or com-
plete panel-control setups for instant recall when needed.
Advanced Sampling and Editing Features

In addition to directly loading sample data in a variety of popular formats, the RS7000 allows you to record your own sam-
ples from CDs or any line-level or microphone source. Once your samples are recorded they can be trimmed, sliced,
looped, and otherwise prepared for playback with the power and flexibility you’d expect from a stand-alone sampler. And
when your samples are ready, they can be incorporated into patterns and songs just as easily as the tone-generator voices.
You can even use the sampler to record vocal parts to take your project right up to the final production stage without using
any equipment other than the RS7000.
AWM2 Tone Generator

Even electronic sounds change with the times, and the RS7000 is right up to date. The internal AWM2 tone generator sys-
tem offers more than 63 top-quality drum kits as well as 1054 pitched voices and sound effects — you’ll find what you
need for just about any musical genre. You also have a range of voice editing functions that make it easy to customize and
personalize the sound to bring your art to life.
An Extensive Range of Effects

In today’s music effects are almost as important as the sounds they are applied to. The RS7000 offers plenty of sound pro-
cessing power with PLAY FX which function at the sequencing stage to provide harmonization as well as note and timing
variations; a three-stage DSP effect system with VARIATION, DELAY/CHORUS, and REVERB effects; and a MASTER
EFFECT stage that offers a range of up-to-date effects for the overall sound.
28 RS7000
In Depth Jobs and Editing

Creating sequences that sound just right can be a tricky business, but the RS7000 makes the job as smooth and easy as pos- TUTORIAL
sible with an extensive selection of jobs and editing functions. There’s GRID GROOVE, for example, to give your tracks
the kind of groove and feel that straightforward sequencing simply can’t achieve. In the RS7000 this flexible feature works
Tutorial
with sliced samples — the RS7000 will also automatically “slice” your break-beat samples into individual beat segments
— as well as tone-generator data for unprecedented “feel” control. Another sampling feature that offers hands-on creative
control is REAL TIME LOOP REMIX — a powerful and easy way to remix your sampled and sliced loops while monitor-
ing them in real time. Then there are jobs to automatically create glides, rolls, crescendos, and other subtleties that can
make a huge difference to the musical mood. If you can image it, the RS7000 can probably do it. And when you want to
really make detailed refinements, the EDIT mode gives you direct access to individual note and event parameters.
Memory Card (SmartMedia™*) Storage & SCSI Expandability

Sequences, phrases, and samples can be conveniently stored on compact, high-capacity memory cards, or on a variety of
external SCSI storage media (hard disk, MO, ZIP, etc.) connected to the RS7000’s SCSI port. You can also connect read-
only devices such as a CD-ROM drive to conveniently load samples and other data.
* SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.
I/O Expansion
The optional AIEB2 I/O expansion board can be installed in the RS7000 to provide 6 additional individual analog outputs
as well as both coaxial and optical digital input and output.
Keyboard Pads, Velocity Pads

Sequence Controls, Play Effects
16-track Sequencer
CD-ROM (Patterns, Pattern Chains, Songs)
SCSI DISK
MEMORY CARD
Real-time knobs & controls.
Samples Resample AWM 2

Tone Generator
MIC
Mixer
Levels, Effects
CD PLAYER
MD PLAYER
Master Effect
Master EQ
OUTPUT
RS7000 29
2. Assemble a Pattern Using Preset Phrases
Let’s begin the “hands-on” portion of our tutorial by discovering just how easy it is to create great-
sounding grooves by selecting and combining a few of the RS7000’s preset phrases. The RS7000 pro-
vides an enormous database of 5980 preset phrases … just image the number of possible combina-
tions. Also keep in mind the fact that once you’ve assembled the basic pattern, there are still countless
ways in which the details can be changed to make the sound your own.
Definition: Patterns & Phrases

• Patterns
An RS7000 “pattern” is a musical segment between one and 256 measures in length and consisting of as many as 16 individual
tracks. Each “track” can be approached as a separate “part” of the pattern: e.g. a bass drum part, a cymbal part, a synthesizer bass
part, a sampled loop, etc. The patterns are further organized into “sections” and “styles”. The RS7000 has memory for up to 1,024
patterns organized as 64 styles, each with 16 sections labeled “A” through “P”, alphabetically.
TRACK 1: Phrase 1 — [e.g. bass drum]

TRACK 2: Phrase 2 — [snare or percussive effect]
TRACK 3: Phrase 3 — [synth bass]
PATTERN TRACK 4: Phrase 4 — [sampled loop]
:
:
TRACK 16: …
• Phrases
Phrases are essentially pre-programmed “parts” for your patterns. The RS7000 comes with loads of preset drum and percussion
phrases. All you have to do is select a pattern track, select the phrase you want to assign to that track, then repeat for as many
tracks as you need. Of course, you can record your own phrases for use in patterns, too. Phrases can use voices from the RS7000’s
internal tone generator, or samples in the RS7000’s sample memory.
Procedure
1 Engage the PATTERN Play mode

If the PATTERN Play mode isn’t already selected, press the [PATTERN] button to select it.
MODE
PATTERN PATT SONG UTILITY
CHAIN


EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
BEAT STRETCH CLOCK SHIFT SWING DRY VARI DELAY/CHO REVERB TRACK VOLUME
LFO EG
PATTERN Play SPEED

PITCH
WAVE
USER
S&H
PGM
DEPTH
PORTAMENTO
TYPE FINGERED
AMP
FILTER
PITCH ATTACK
FILTER
DECAY
-
SUSTAIN
+
RELEASE
TYPE
LPF24
LPF18
FULL TIME LPF12
OFF HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
2 Select a STYLE
Use [Knob 1] to select the “STYLE” (i.e. the group of 16 “sections” — if you’re not sure what we’re talking about here, go back and
review the “Definitions” sidebar, above) that you want to record. STYLE numbers range from “01” through “64”. For our tutorial, select
STYLE 01.
30 RS7000
3 Select a SECTION
Use [Knob 2] to select the “SECTION” of the selected STYLE (“A” through “P”) you want to record. For our example, select section A.
Hint
TUTORIAL
When assigning sections it is a good idea to do so in some kind of logical order so you can remember what’s what, particularly if
Tutorial
you’re going to be switching sections in real time. Generally, the different sections within a style will be the various sections of a
complete composition or dance groove. You might want to record the intro in section A, the main “verse” in section B, a fill in sec-
tion C, the “chorus” in section D, and so on.
An Alternative Track Selection Method

When the [KEYBOARD] button indicator is out (press the [KEYBOARD] button if it is lit), the black keys on the RS7000 key-
board can be used to directly select sections “A” through “J” — note the labels above the black keys.
4 Set the Pattern’s METER (if necessary)

“Meter” is another term for “time signature”. Since our tutorial pattern is in 4/4 time (the default), there’s no need to set the meter, but
when you do want to create pattern in a different meter, here’s how:
Press the [F1] function button so that the METER parameter on the display is highlighted. Then use [Knob 1] to select the desired meter.
F1 F2 F3 F4
5 Set the Pattern’s LENGTH (if necessary)

To set the pattern’s length in measures press the [F3] function button so that the LENGTH parameter on the display is highlighted, then
use [Knob 3] to select the desired length (001 through 256). For our example the pattern will be one measures long, so select “001” if
LENGTH is not already set to this value.
F1 F2 F3 F4
RS7000 31
6 Set the Approximate BPM

The BPM (beats per minute) setting can be changed at any time (even in real-time during playback), but it’s a good idea to set the
approximate final BPM at this stage to get a better feel for how the pattern will sound when finished.
To set BPM, simply rotate [Knob 4].
Our tutorial pattern is designed to be played at a BPM of about 120.
F1 F2 F3 F4
7 Select a Track
Select the track you want to assign a phrase to via the RS7000 keyboard: Press the lower key (white or gray) corresponding to the
desired track number (1 through 16) while holding the [TRACK SELECT] button. The keyboard LED corresponding to the currently
active track will flash while the [TRACK SELECT] button is held. When a track is selected the corresponding track number in the LCD
PATTERN Play display is highlighted.
Track 1 is a logical place to start, so select track 1.
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
TRACK
SELECT
K ! L # M $ N % O & P ' Q ( R ) S - T @ U ^ V _ W { X } Y


EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
LFO EG
WAVE
AMP
FILTER
S&H
PGM
PITCH FILTER
TYPE FINGERED TYPE
LPF18
FULL TIME LPF12
OFF HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 + /- LEVEL
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
32 RS7000
8 Switch to the PATTERN Patch Mode

Phrases are assigned to the pattern tracks via the PATTERN Patch display. Select the PATTERN Patch display by pressing the [PAT-
TERN] button (the [PATTERN] button alternately selects the main PATTERN Play display and the PATTERN Patch display). TUTORIAL
PATTERN Play display
Tutorial
MODE
CHAIN
Track number
PATTERN Patch display
Space for
EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
phrase category
SELECT
LFO EG
WAVE
PITCH
SPEED USER
S&H
PGM
DEPTH
PORTAMENTO
TYPE FINGERED
AMP
FILTER
PITCH ATTACK
FILTER
DECAY
-
SUSTAIN
+
RELEASE
TYPE
LPF24
LPF18
and number
FULL TIME LPF12
OFF HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
Phrase category selected Meter and length of

TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
Note shift
SPACE DEL
for current track

SOLO
current phrase
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
Phrase number parameter

selected for
current track
Note that the PATTERN Patch display shows all 16 tracks with spaces to the right of each track number for the specified phrase category
and number. As in the PATTERN Play display, the number of the currently active track is highlighted. You can change tracks while the
PATTERN Patch display is showing in the same way that you change tracks in the main PATTERN display: press the appropriate white
or gray key on the RS7000 keyboard while holding the [TRACK SELECT] button.
9 Press the [PLAY] Button

Press the [PLAY] button. You won’t hear anything yet, because we haven’t selected any phrases, but the [PLAY] LED will flash at the
currently selected BMP indicating that playback is in progress.
REC STOP PLAY


EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
LFO EG
WAVE
AMP
FILTER
S&H
PGM
PITCH FILTER
TYPE FINGERED TYPE
LPF18
FULL TIME LPF12
OFF HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
PLAY LED flashes at current BPM during playback.
RS7000 33
0 Select a Phrase for the First Track

The preset RS7000 phrases are organized into categories. Take a look at the Phrase Category List on page 313 for a complete list of the
phrase categories. To select a phrase you will need to specify both its category and number.
Use [Knob 1] to select the phrase category, and [Knob 2] to select the phrase number for the first track. For our example, select the
“BD1” phrase category and phrase number “008”. This phrase will provide the rhythmic foundation for our pattern. Since the sequencer
is in the PLAY mode, you’ll hear the phrase as soon as you select it.
F1 F2 F3 F4
A Select the Next Track

Select the next track (track 2 for our example) in the same way as you selected the first track: press the appropriate white or gray key on
the RS7000 keyboard while holding the [TRACK SELECT] button.
B Select a Phrase for Track 2

Select the “SD1” phrase category and phrase number “002” for track 2 in the same way that you selected the phrase for track 1 in step
10, above.
C Select the Phrases for the Remaining Tracks

Just two more tracks to go. Select the tracks and phases listed below by repeating steps 11 and 12, above.
The Phrase Selections for STYLE 01, SECTION A
Track 1 Phrase: BD1 008

Track 2 Phrase: SD1 002
Track 4 Phrase: HH1 105
D Create a New Section

Now you know the procedure, create a new section which uses phrases listed in the chart below rather than those we used in section A.
Select section B for the new pattern. You can do this either by returning to the PATTERN Play display (press the [PLAY] button) and
using [Knob 2], or you can select the new section directly via the RS7000 keyboard while in either the PATTERN Play or PATTERN
Patch display: press the [KEYBOARD] button so that its indicator goes out, then press the black key on the keyboard corresponding to
section B (note that the black keys are labeled with section names “A” through “J”).
Either way, the rest of the procedure is the same as described above: select the tracks and assigned the appropriate phrases to each one.
The Phrase Selections for STYLE 01, SECTION B
Track 1 Phrase: BD1 008

Track 4 Phrase: HH4 179
34 RS7000
E Return to the PATTERN Play Display

Press the [PATTERN] button to go to the PATTERN Play display. You can do this either while the pattern is playing or stopped. Note,
when you return to the PATTERN Play display, that the tracks which now contain data — i.e. the tracks you assigned phrases to — are TUTORIAL
indicated by solid blocks above the track numbers. The empty tracks show only dotted outlines.
Tutorial
MODE
CHAIN These tracks contain These tracks do not
playback data contain playback data


EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
LFO EG
WAVE
AMP
FILTER
S&H
PGM
PITCH FILTER
TYPE FINGERED TYPE
LPF18
FULL TIME LPF12
OFF HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 + /- LEVEL
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
F Try Out the MUTE and SOLO Functions

While we’re at it, let’s try out a couple of the RS7000’s convenient monitoring features: MUTE and SOLO.
MUTE
Tracks can be individually muted (turned off) for monitoring purposes … or for creative real-time playback control. To mute
tracks press the [MUTE] button so that its indicator lights, then the lower (white and gray) keys on the keyboard will alternately
mute and un-mute the corresponding tracks. When a tracks is muted “[M]” appears on the display in place of the track number.
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MUTE

EFFECT
ON/OFF
MASTER EFFECT
MULTI COMP
CTRL DELAY
RING MOD
V-DIST
REAL TIME
LOOP
REMIX
SAMPLE
EDIT
SAMPLING
STANDBY IN
SOLO
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
START/STOP
REC VOLUME MIDI
OUT B
MASTER VOLUME K ! L # M $ N % O & P ' Q (

SELECT
LFO EG
WAVE
TRACK
AMP
FILTER
S&H
PGM
PITCH
PORTAMENTO
TYPE FINGERED
FULL TIME
FILTER
- +
TYPE
LPF24
LPF18
LPF12
SELECT
OFF HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
RS7000 35
SOLO
SOLO is sort of like mute in reverse: when a track is “soloed” only that track will sound while all others are muted. Press the
[MUTE] button (note that the button also has a “SOLO” label) while holding the [SHIFT] button to solo the currently selected
track (i.e. the track with the highlighted track number). Press the [MUTE] button to disengage the SOLO function. Only one track
can be soloed at a time, but you can switch soloed tracks rapidly simply by pressing the corresponding white or gray key on the
keyboard while the SOLO function is engaged. When a track is soloed “[S]” appears in place of the track number.
SHIFT
KEY-
BOARD MUSIC PRODUCTION STUDIO

EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
LFO EG
SECTION SPEED
WAVE
USER
S&H
DEPTH
AMP
FILTER
PITCH ATTACK DECAY SUSTAIN RELEASE
PGM
PITCH FILTER
TYPE FINGERED TYPE
LPF18
FULL TIME LPF12
OFF HPF
BPF
BEF
TRANSPOSE F1 F2 F3 F4
PATTERN PATT
MODE
SONG UTILITY UTILITY
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
CAPS
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK CAPS
TRACK
MUTE
1 2
ALL
3
1~8 9~16
4 5 6
TR-
7
TR+
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PAD ASSIGN
16
SPACE DEL
MUTE
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
SOLO
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
G Play the Pattern & Switch Sections in Real Time

With the pattern playing in the PATTERN Play mode and the [KEYBOARD] button indicator OFF (if it is on, press the [KEYBOARD]
button to turn it off), you can use the black keys on the RS7000 keyboard to directly switch between sections “A” through “J”. Since
we’ve created a section “A” and a section “B” so far, try using the keyboard to switch back and forth between these two sections.
H Save the Pattern

Since the RS7000 saves all pattern (and other) data in volatile RAM memory, the data will be lost as soon as the power is turned off. In
order to keep patterns, phrases, songs, or samples you’ve created, you’ll need to save them to either a memory card or external SCSI disk
before turning the power off. Memory cards are the obvious choice for maximum convenience, ease-of-use and portability, while SCSI
disks offer greater storage capacity.
Complete information about memory cards, SCSI disks, and save-related procedures is available in the “Saving To Memory Card or
Disk” section on page 114 of chapter 2. Here’s a brief outline to save you the trip.
CAUTION
The supplied memory card contains style data when initially shipped. Use a separate memory card or
save the style data to an external SCSI disk if you want to keep this style data.
36 RS7000
The Save Procedure

1. While pattern playback is stopped, press the [SAVE] button from the PATTERN Play or Patch wode to go to the Save page.
PATT
PATTERN CHAIN SONG UTILITY
TUTORIAL
SUB MODE
GROOVE PLAY FX MIDI DELAY MIXER
Tutorial

EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
7 8 9 +/- BEAT STRETCH CLOCK SHIFT

GATE TIME
LFO
MIDI DELAY
WAVE
SWING
VELOCITY
DRY
EG
VARI DELAY/CHO REVERB TRACK VOLUME
AMP
VOICE EDIT EFFECT SETUP MASTER

FILTER
S&H
PGM
PITCH FILTER
TYPE FINGERED TYPE
LPF18
FULL TIME LPF12
OFF HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
4 5 6 0
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
EXIT SAVE LOAD JOB EDIT

SECTION
TRANSPOSE
CAPS
A
ALL 1~8
B
9~16
C
TR-
D
TR+
E F G H I J TAP
PAD ASSIGN
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
1 2 3 ENTER
2. Use [Knob 1] (FILE TYPE) to select “PATT” if it isn’t already selected.
3. Use [Knob 2] (PATTERN) to select the style to be saved — “01” should already be selected.
4. Press [F4] (CARD/SCSI) to specify whether you want to save to a memory card or disk. [F4] alternately selects “CARD” and
“SCSI”.
5. Press [F1] (OK) to go to the save execution page.
6. Use [Knob 1] (FILE NAME) and the keyboard to enter a file name: [Knob 1] moves the file name cursor right or left to the
desired character location, and the keyboard enters the corresponding character at the cursor location. The characters entered
by the black keys are listed above the keys, and those entered by the white/gray keys are listed below the keys. The second
white/gray-key characters are entered by pressing the key while holding the [SHIFT] button. Numbers can be entered via the
SUB MODE buttons.
7. Use [Knob 3] to select “CurrentDir” at the top of the list to save to the currently open folder. If the selected memory card or
disk contains multiple folders, use [Knob 3] to select the folder to which the file is to be saved. As necessary use [F3]( )
[F4](OPEN) to move between folders, or [F2](NEW) to create a new folder.
8. Press [F1](SAVE) to execute the save operation.
If a file with the same file name already exists on the card or disk, the “Overwrite? NO[F2]/YES[F3]” confirmation message
will appear.
Press [F3] if it is OK to overwrite the existing file and replace it with the new file. Press [F2] to cancel the save operation and
return to the status prior to pressing the [F1] button (step 5, above).
9. Press [EXIT] twice to return to the PATTERN Play or Patch display.
RS7000 37
3. Real-time Sound Control
3. Real-time Sound Control
Our pattern isn’t finished yet — we still need to record an original phrase and add some sampled mate-
rial — but now would be a good time to take a little detour and investigate some of the real-time control
provided by the RS7000’s panel knobs. Although the RS7000 is geared towards “production” rather
than live sound (but that doesn’t mean it isn’t a killer live-mix tool, too), the ability to creatively control
the sound in real time is an essential part of modern production technique. Real-time control brings
“spontaneity” to high-tech music production.
Procedure
With the pattern playing in the PATTERN Play mode, try the following:
1 Adjust the BPM
Rotate [Knob 4] to change the tempo (BPM) of the pattern in real time.
2 Select a Track & Try the Following Controls

The panel knobs we will explore below affect the currently selected track. So select the track you want to control, then try out the con-
trols listed below.
SELECT


BEAT STRETCH CLOCK SHIFT SWING DRY VARI DELAY/CHO REVERB TRACK VOLUME EFFECT
ON/OFF
MULTI COMP
CTRL DELAY
D-FILTER
RING MOD
V-DIST
LO-FI
REAL TIME
LOOP
REMIX
SAMPLE
EDIT STANDBY IN

OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
LFO EG SELECT
LFO EG
WAVE WAVE
AMP
FILTER
S&H
PGM
PITCH FILTER
TYPE FINGERED TYPE
LPF18
AMP PITCH BEND PORTAMENTO TIME

FULL TIME
OFF
LPF12
HPF
BPF
BEF
FILTER F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
S&H NUM
PATTERN PATT
CHAIN SONG UTILITY UTILITY
SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
PITCH
MIDI FILTER
SPEED USER DEPTH ATTACK DECAY SUSTAIN RELEASE BPM GROOVE

SUB MODE
PLAY FX MIDI DELAY MIXER GROOVE PLAY FX MIDI DELAY MIXER
PGM
TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 + /- LEVEL
PITCH FILTER
- +
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
PORTAMENTO
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
LPF24 SECTION A B C D E F G H I J TAP
TYPE
PAD 1 PAD 2
FINGERED TYPE TRANSPOSE
LPF18 CAPS
TRACK 1 2
ALL
3
1~8 9~16
4 5 6
TR-
7
TR+
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PAD ASSIGN
16
MUTE
FULL TIME LPF12 SOLO

SPACE DEL
OFF HPF TRACK

SELECT
3.3V
CARD
BPF
BEF
FILTER
Experiment with the [CUTOFF], [RESONANCE], and ENV. DEPTH knobs to hear how they affect the selected track. Note that
these controls are fairly interactive, so you may have to play around a bit to find the sound you want. You might also try using the
[TYPE] button to change the filter type.
EG
These “grab-and-twist” envelope knobs can affect the sound in a big way. The [AMP/FILTER/PITCH] button determines whether
the EG knobs affect the amplitude, filter, or pitch envelope generator. Select “FILTER” and try them on the bass-drum track (track
1) to hear how the ATTACK knob, for example, can add a dynamic filter affect to the sound.
EFFECT SEND/VOLUME
These knobs are directly linked to the corresponding controls for the selected track in the RS7000’s mixer (we’ll look at the mixer
in section 6 of the tutorial). Simply, the first three knobs — [DRY ↔ VARI.], [DELAY/CHO] and [REVERB] — control the
effect send levels to the corresponding RS7000 effect stages. The [TRACK VOLUME] knob does just what it says — controls the
volume of the selected track in relation to the others.
PITCH
The [PITCH BEND] knob directly changes the pitch of the selected track (the center click-stop position is normal pitch). When the
selected track contains a melodic line, the [PORTAMENTO TIME] knob controls the length of the pitch slide between subsequent
notes when either the FINGERED or FULL TIME PORTAMENTO TYPE is selected. See page 100 of the reference section for
more details about portamento and portamento types.
LFO
Much like the LFO on an analog synthesizer, these knobs apply LFO (Low-Frequency Oscillator) modulation to the selected track.
Use the [WAVE] button to select an LFO waveform, then use the [SPEED] and [DEPTH] knobs to adjust the LFO effect as
required.
SEQUENCE PLAY FX
These knobs directly control a number of the RS7000’s PLAY FX parameters. “Play Effects” function at the sequencing stage to
provide harmonization as well as note and timing variations without permanently affecting the sequence data. Six note and timing
related Play Effect parameters can be accessed via these three knobs, selectable in groups of three (the upper and lower labels
below the knobs) by using the [SELECT] button.
38 RS7000
4. Recording Original Phrases

TUTORIAL
So far we have created a basic 4-track pattern using preset phrases supplied with the RS7000. Now
let’s try recording an original phrase to add to the existing section-A pattern. Nothing fancy — perhaps
Tutorial
a few “hits” using the “HiQ 1” voice.
Real-time Recording Procedure
1 Select a New Track

In the PATTERN Patch mode (use the [PATTERN] button to select it if necessary) use [Knob 2] to select section-A, and use the standard
track-selection procedure to select a new track for recording. Since we’ve already used tracks 1 through 4, select track 5.
2 Select a User Phrase to Record

Still in the PATTERN Patch mode, use [Knob 1] to select the “User” phrase category, and [Knob 2] to select the number of the user
phrase you want to record. The RS7000 has memory for up to 256 user phrases per style. Select “001” for our example.
3 Engage Record Standby (PATTERN Patch) and Select a Voice

Press the [REC] button to engage the record standby (PATTERN Patch) mode and the display will change to allow you to select a voice
for the new user phrase. The red LED above the [REC] button will light.


EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
LFO EG
WAVE
AMP
FILTER
S&H
PGM
PITCH FILTER
TYPE FINGERED TYPE
LPF18
FULL TIME LPF12
OFF HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
REC STOP PLAY A B C D E F G H

1
I
2
J
3 ENTER
EXPORT
RENAME
DELETE
FORMAT
IMPORT
SCSI SETUP
SCSI COMM
VIEW FILTER
SECTION TAP
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
Use [Knob 1] (BANK) to select the “SFX 1” voice bank (063 006), and then [Knob 2] (PGM) to select the “HiQ 1” voice (100).
4 Go to the Rec Standby (PATTERN Play) Display

Press the [PATTERN] button to go to the PATTERN Rec Standby (PATTERN Play) display.
RS7000 39
5 Select a Record Mode

Normally, when recording a new track from scratch you’ll want to use the REPLACE record mode. Use [Knob 2] to select “REPLACE”
(if it isn’t already selected).
If you’ve already recorded some material on a track and want to record additional notes without erasing the existing material, select the
OVERDUB record mode instead of the REPLACE mode. There’s also a STEP mode that allows notes and events to be entered one at a
time so you don’t have to play the part in real time (Page 80), and a GRID record mode that allows easy note entry using the white/gray
keys on the keyboard as a 16th-note “grid” (Page 83).
6 Select a REC LOOP Mode

Use [Knob 1] to turn the REC LOOP mode ON or OFF as required. If REC LOOP is ON the pattern will cycle repeatedly allowing you
to add new material on each pass — or simply listen to pattern a few times while you get ready to record. If REC LOOP is OFF there
will be only one recording pass. Turn REC LOOP ON.
The REC QUANTIZE Function

This handy function allows you to quantize “on-the-fly” as you record in real time. If you record with REC QUANTIZE “OFF”,
anything you play on the keyboard will be recorded at maximum resolution (480 clocks per quarter note on the RS7000). But if
you use [Knob 3] to select a quantize note value (quantize values are displayed both in clocks and graphic note symbols), all notes
you play will be quantized to the nearest specified note value as you record. You can even adjust the swing value for each quantize
value selection by pressing the [F3] function button so that the SWING parameter is highlighted and then using [Knob 3]. See
page 78 in the reference section of this manual for more details on quantization and swing.
7 Record
When you’ve set up all the parameters as required, press the [PLAY] button to begin recording. The RS7000 will give you a one-mea-
sure count-in, then recording will begin. Make sure the [KEYBOARD] button indicator is lit (press the [KEYBOARD] button if it isn’t),
and play your original part on the RS7000 keyboard.

EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
LFO EG
WAVE
AMP
FILTER
S&H
PGM
PITCH FILTER
TYPE FINGERED TYPE
LPF18
FULL TIME LPF12
OFF HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
KEY-
BOARD
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
Changing the Count-in Length

If a one-measure count-in doesn’t suit your needs, you can change the number of count-in measures via the UTILITY mode REC
COUNT function, described on page 257.
8 Stop Recording
Press the [STOP] button to stop recording.
9 Play and Check the Results

Press the [PLAY] button to play back the pattern and check the results.
0 Apply Quantization (Optional)

If your timing is perfect or you want to retain a “human” feel in your pattern you might not need to perform this step, but we’ll describe
it anyway since you’ll probably want to make use of the RS7000’s many useful “jobs” quite frequently as you create original phrases
and sequences. Refer to “Pattern and Phrase Editing — the Pattern Jobs” on page 133 for a complete list of the available jobs and param-
eters.
40 RS7000
Job Selection (Quantize) and Execution Procedure

1. With the track containing the data to be processed selected (track 5 for our example), press the [JOB] button from the PAT-
TERN Play or Patch mode to go to the job list. TUTORIAL
Tutorial
SUB MODE MUSIC PRODUCTION STUDIO
GROOVE PLAY FX MIDI DELAY MIXER EFFECT

ON/OFF
MASTER EFFECT
MULTI COMP
CTRL DELAY
D-FILTER
RING MOD
V-DIST
LO-FI
REAL TIME
LOOP
REMIX
SAMPLE
EDIT
SAMPLING
STANDBY IN
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
+/-
LFO EG
7 8 9 SPEED
WAVE
USER
S&H
DEPTH
AMP
FILTER
PGM
PITCH FILTER
VOICE EDIT EFFECT SETUP MASTER PORTAMENTO

TYPE FINGERED
FULL TIME
OFF
- +
TYPE
LPF24
LPF18
LPF12
HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 + /- LEVEL
4 5 6 0
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
SAVE LOAD JOB EDIT

1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
1 2 3 ENTER
2. Use [Knob 1] (CATEGORY) and [Knob 2] (JOB) to move the cursor to the desired job. In this case you want to select the “01
Quantize” job in the “NOTE” category.
3. Press [F4] (SELECT) to jump to the selected job page.
4. Use [Knob 2] (CURSOR ↔ ) to move the cursor to the various parameters in the Quantize display page, and [Knob 3]
(VALUE -/+) to set the parameter values as required. When you initially go to the Quantize page the parameters are set up for
strict 16th-note quantization, which is fine for our purposes here so you can simply go on to the next step. But if you want to
learn about the various parameters and make fine adjustments, refer to page 135 of the manual.
5. When the parameters are set press [F4] (DO!) to execute the Quantize job. “Completed” will appear when the job is done.
6. Press [EXIT] twice to go back to the PATTERN Play or Patch mode, then press the [PLAY] button to play back the pattern and
check the results.


EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
LFO EG
WAVE
AMP
FILTER
S&H
PGM
PITCH FILTER
EXIT PORTAMENTO
TYPE FINGERED
FULL TIME
OFF
- +
TYPE
LPF24
LPF18
LPF12
HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
RS7000 41
Step Recording
Real-time recording is fine for many recording tasks, but if you want precise control over note placement, or are attempting to record a
phrase that would be difficult to play on the keyboard in real time, the Step record mode is ideal.
For full details on step recording see page 80. Here’s a quick rundown of the procedure to give an idea of how it works.
Step Record Procedure (Note Data)

1. Start from step 5 of the real-time record procedure described above, but select the “STEP” record mode instead of
“REPLACE”.
2. Use [Knob3] to select the type of data you want to record: notes, pitch bend, or control change. Since you want to record notes,
make sure “NOTE” is selected.
3. Press [PLAY] and the Step Rec display will appear.


EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
LFO EG
WAVE
AMP
FILTER
S&H
PGM
PITCH FILTER
TYPE FINGERED TYPE
LPF18
FULL TIME LPF12
OFF HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
REC STOP PLAY A B C D E F G H

1
I
2
J
3 ENTER
EXPORT
RENAME
DELETE
FORMAT
IMPORT
SCSI SETUP
SCSI COMM
VIEW FILTER
SECTION TAP
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
4. The Step Rec display shows one measure of 32nd notes. Each diamond-shaped marker corresponds to a 32nd note. The triangu-
lar pointer above the 32nd note markers indicates the current note position. Use [Knob 1] to move the pointer to the position at
which you want to enter a note, [Knob 2] to set the note length, [Knob 3] to set the note velocity, and [Knob 4] to set the gate
time.
5. Enter the note by pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard. In the step record mode notes are actually entered when the
keys are released. So when entering chords be sure to press all notes you want to enter before releasing the keys.
Press [F1] to enter a rest, or [F2] to enter a tie. The [F3] (DELETE) and [F4] (BACK DELETE) buttons can be used to delete
entered notes.
If you press the [PLAY] button the [PLAY] indicator will flash and you will be able to hear how your step-recorded phrase is
shaping up. Press [STOP] to stop playback and continue entering notes in the step mode.
6. Stop recording and return to the PATTERN Play (or PATTERN Patch) mode by pressing the [STOP] button.
42 RS7000
5. Add Samples
5. Add Samples
TUTORIAL
Although it would be easier just to load one of the pre-recorded samples provided on the SmartMedia
memory card supplied with the RS7000 and add it to our pattern, we recommend that you take the time
Tutorial
to actually try recording your own samples.
The Source
You will need to provide a source for sampling. This could be a CD player, tape player, or any other source capable of
delivering a line-level signal. You could also use a microphone since the RS7000 inputs can easily be set for microphone-
level input.
For Line-level Sources

Press the [SETUP] button twice to access the A/D SETUP page and make sure that the INPUT GAIN parameter is set to LINE.
Use [Knob 1] to select LINE if necessary.


ON/OFF
MASTER EFFECT
MULTI COMP
CTRL DELAY
D-FILTER
RING MOD
V-DIST
LO-FI
REAL TIME
LOOP
REMIX
SAMPLE
EDIT
SAMPLING
STANDBY IN
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
+/-
LFO EG
7 8 9 SPEED
WAVE
USER
S&H
DEPTH
AMP
FILTER
PGM
PITCH FILTER

TYPE FINGERED
FULL TIME
OFF
- +
TYPE
LPF24
LPF18
LPF12
HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
4 5 6 0
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
SAVE LOAD JOB EDIT

1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
1 2 3 ENTER
For Microphones
Press the [SETUP] button twice to access the A/D SETUP page and make sure that the INPUT GAIN parameter is set to MIC. Use
[Knob 1] to select MIC if necessary.
Mono Sources
If you have a mono source — such as a single microphone — plug it into the INPUT L jack on the rear panel.
Stereo Sources
Plug the left and right outputs from a stereo source in the INPUT L and R jacks, respectively.
What to Record
Obviously, you can sample any sound or instrument you like for your own music. The RS7000 has a number of features
that make creating even complex samples quite easy. The SLICE+SEQ sampling mode, for example, automatically
“slices” breakbeats or musical phrases you record into beat-size segments which are then placed in the selected pattern
track along with the note data required to play them back as recorded. You can then “remix” the sliced samples to create a
range of original variations.
For our tutorial, however, it would be wise to keep things simple. Record a single sound that can be used as a “hit” in our
pattern. A convenient way to do this would be to connect a microphone and record a percussive vocal sound: “Hah!”,
“Yo!”, “Boo” … whatever works. You might be able to get some neat distorted sounds by cupping the mic right up against
your mouth as you record. You can also use the RS7000’s sophisticated effects to process the sound later. Use your imagi-
nation.
RS7000 43
5. Add Samples
Basic Sampling Procedure
1 Select a Track for the Sample

In the PATTERN mode use [KNOB 2] to select section-A, and select the track to be used for sampling by pressing a white/gray key on
the keyboard while holding the [TRACK SELECT] button. For our example select track 6.
2 Select a Sample Voice Number

Press [MIXER] to go to the MIXER page and select the sample voice number to which you want to record the new sample: use [Knob
1] to select either the SmpLocal (Local Sample Voice) or SmpCmn (Common Sample Voice) bank, and [Knob 3] to select a voice num-
ber to which your sample will be recorded from 001 through 128. When done press [EXIT] to go back to the PATTERN display.
For more information on Local Sample Voices and Common Sample Voices refer to page 61.

ON/OFF
MASTER EFFECT
MULTI COMP
CTRL DELAY
D-FILTER
RING MOD
V-DIST
LO-FI
REAL TIME
LOOP
REMIX
SAMPLE
EDIT
SAMPLING
STANDBY IN
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
+/-
LFO EG
7 8 9 SPEED
WAVE
USER
S&H
DEPTH
AMP
FILTER
PGM
PITCH FILTER

TYPE FINGERED
FULL TIME
OFF
- +
TYPE
LPF24
LPF18
LPF12
HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 + /- LEVEL
4 5 6 0
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
SAVE LOAD JOB EDIT

1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
1 2 3 ENTER
3 Set the INPUT GAIN

If you haven’t already done so, press the [SETUP] button twice from the PATTERN mode to go to the A/D Setup page, and use [Knob
1] to set the INPUT GAIN as required. When done press [EXIT] twice to go back to the PATTERN display.
Refer to “The Source” (Page 43) for appropriate settings for various source types.
4 Go to the Sampling Setup Page

From the PATTERN mode press the [STANDBY/START/STOP] button to go to the Sampling Setup page45.

EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
LFO EG
WAVE
AMP
FILTER
STANDBY
S&H
PGM
PITCH FILTER
TYPE FINGERED TYPE
LPF18
FULL TIME LPF12
OFF HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

START/STOP
TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
5 Set the Sampling Setup Parameters

Use [Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4] to set the sampling TYPE, FREQUENCY, SOURCE, and MONO/STEREO, as follows:
TYPE Select “KIT+NOTE”, since we want to record a simple, one-shot sample synchronized with
sequencer playback.
FREQUENCY You can choose any sampling frequency you like, but if you don’t have any immediate preference
the “44.1 K” setting will give you the best sound quality.
SOURCE Select “A/D INPUT” if you’re recording via the RS7000’s built-in analog inputs.
If you have the AIEB2 I/O Expansion Board installed then you might want to select “DIGITAL” or
“OPTICAL”, as required.
MONO/STEREO This will depend on the source you are recording. If you have a mono microphone plugged into the
INPUT L jack, select “MONO L”. If your microphone is plugged into the INPUT R jack select “MONO
R”. Select “STEREO” if you want to create a stereo sample from a stereo source connected to the L
and R inputs, or “MONO L+R” to create a mono sample from a stereo source connected to the L
and R inputs.
44 RS7000
5. Add Samples
6 Go to the Sampling Standby Page

Press [F4] (OK) to go to the sampling standby page.
TUTORIAL
Tutorial
7 Set the Trigger Mode/Level
Use [Knob 3] (TRIGGER MODE) to set the trigger mode to “LEVEL”, and [Knob 4] (TRIGGER LEVEL) to set the trigger level to
“64”. Play your source or speak into the microphone at this point to make sure that the level bar graph extends past the triangular trigger
level marker below the level meter, but doesn't “peak out” due to excessively high input levels (you’re not actually sampling yet). If the
level is too low or high, use the REC VOLUME control to adjust as necessary. If the REC VOLUME control doesn’t allow sufficient
adjustment, recheck your INPUT GAIN setting (step 3, above) or change the Trigger Level setting as required.
Refer to page 232 for information on the other available trigger modes.


EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
LFO EG
WAVE
AMP
FILTER
S&H
PGM
PITCH FILTER
TYPE FINGERED TYPE
LPF18
FULL TIME LPF12
OFF HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
MEMORY 4 5 6 0 FILTER
REC VOLUME
KEY- ARPEGGIO OCT OCT
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
8 Press [STANDBY/START/STOP] to begin sampling

Pressing [STANDBY/START/STOP] engages the trigger wait mode, and sampling will begin automatically as soon as the input signal
exceeds the specified trigger level. Since the KIT+NOTE sampling type is selected sequence playback will begin automatically when
the [STANDBY/START/STOP] button is pressed. Sampling will always be synchronized with sequencer playback — in other words,
your sample will be placed in the pattern at exactly the point you begin recording.
9 Stop Sampling
Press the [STANDBY/START/STOP] button to stop sampling when your sample is recorded. Sampling will also stop automatically
when the end of the pattern is reached. The sampling mode will be exited when sampling ends.
0 Play and Check the Results

Press [PATTERN] to select the PATTERN Play or PATTERN Patch page, then press the [PLAY] button to play back the pattern and
check the results.
Editing Your Sample

If all went well your vocal hit will play back with the pattern in precisely the location it was recorded (this is because the
KIT+NOTE sample type was selected. You might also want to loop, slice, or modify the way your sample plays back in
other ways. Refer to “Chapter 5: The Sampling Mode” beginning on page 227 for complete information on all of the sam-
ple editing functions provided by the RS7000.
RS7000 45
6. Finalizing Your Sound
In this section we’ll take a look at some of the important RS7000 features you can use to refine and
finalize your sound.
Grid Groove
With the RS7000 there are a surprising number of ways to modify your sound even after the tracks are recorded. The Grid Groove func-
tion is one of these. Grid Groove lets you change the notes, timing, length, and velocity of individual beats in your pattern or song to
fine-tune the “groove”. The Grid Groove function can be very effective when used with sliced break-beat samples. Here’s how it works:
Procedure
1 Select the Grid Groove Mode

Press the SUB MODE [GROOVE] button to engage the Grid Groove function.


ON/OFF
MASTER EFFECT
MULTI COMP
CTRL DELAY
D-FILTER
RING MOD
V-DIST
LO-FI
REAL TIME
LOOP
REMIX
SAMPLE
EDIT
SAMPLING
STANDBY IN
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
+/-
LFO EG
7 8 9 SPEED
WAVE
USER
S&H
DEPTH
AMP
FILTER
PGM
PITCH FILTER

TYPE FINGERED
FULL TIME
OFF
- +
TYPE
LPF24
LPF18
LPF12
HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
4 5 6 0
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
SAVE LOAD JOB EDIT

1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
SPACE DEL
SOLO
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
1 2 3 ENTER
2 Select a Track
Use the standard track-selection procedure to select the track you want to work on (press a gray or white key on the keyboard while
holding the [TRACK SELECT] button). The number of the selected track appears in the title bar at the top of the display.
3 Select One or More Beats

The entire Grid Groove display corresponds to one 4/4 measure, and the vertical divisions are 16th beats. The 16 gray or white keys on
the keyboard correspond to each of these 16th beats. Press the keys on the keyboard corresponding to the beat(s) you want to affect with
the groove controls. The selected segments in the Grid Groove display will be highlighted.
4 Play the Pattern & Adjust the Groove Parameters as Required

Press the [PLAY] button to begin playback, then use [Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4] to adjust the corresponding groove parameters for the selected
beats. The little icons that appear on the grid tell you when any parameter has been shifted from its “0” setting.
NOTE OFFSET
Shifts the selected note(s) up or down in semitone increments. With pitched voices this will obvisously change the pitch, but with-
drum kit voices or sliced break-beats this will change the instrument played on the specified beat(s).
CLOCK SHIFT
Shifts the timing of the specified beat(s) forward or backward in clock increments (there are 480 clocks per quarter note) up to a
maximum of plus or minus 120 clocks (i.e. a 16th note).
GATE OFFSET
Adjusts the gate time (length) of the selected beat(s). Positive settings make the note(s) longer and negative settings make them
shorter.
46 RS7000
VELO OFFSET
Increases or decreases the velocity of the selected beat(s). Positive settings for higher velocity and minus settings for lower. By
playing with the velocity settings you can dramatically change the rhythmic feel of a pattern. TUTORIAL
Grid Groove Changes Can Be Recorded
Tutorial
Even if you’re working on a preset phrase, the results of your Grid Groove tweaking can be recorded for posterity. For this and
details on other Grid Groove features, see page 85 of the reference section.
The Mixer
As the name implies, the RS7000 mixer is much like a mixer you’d use for mixing regular sources. You’ll use it to select
voices for individual tracks, adjust levels and pan, adjust equalization, and adjust effect send levels.
Selecting SUB MODE Pages

The various display pages corresponding to these mixer functions are accessed by pressing the SUB MODE [MIXER] button. The
four little “bullets” next to the button indicate that it accesses four pages, and the actual names of the pages accessed are listed
under “MIXER” on the panel to the right of the SUB MODE buttons. You move one page down the list each time you press the
[MIXER] button until you reach the last page. You can then move up through the list by using the [EXIT] button. The same prin-
ciple applies to all the SUB MODE functions.
MODE
CHAIN
SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER

MULTI COMP RING MOD
SUB MODE
REAL TIME
EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
GRID GROOVE HARMONIZE MIDI DELAY VOICE SELECT SELECT
NOTE FEEDBACK VOL/PAN/OUT BEAT STRETCH CLOCK SHIFT

GATE TIME MIDI DELAY
SWING
VELOCITY
TIME EQ LFO
WAVE
EG
EFFECT SEND AMP
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL PITCH

SPEED USER
S&H
PGM
DEPTH
PORTAMENTO
TYPE FINGERED
FILTER
PITCH ATTACK
FILTER
DECAY
-
SUSTAIN
+
RELEASE
TYPE
LPF24
LPF18
FULL TIME LPF12
VOICE EDIT EFFECT SETUP MASTER VOICE EDIT EFFECT SETUP MASTER PITCH BEND PORTAMENTO TIME
OFF
HPF
BPF
BEF
LFO EFFECT TYPE ARPEGGIO MASTER EQ F1 F2 F3 F4

MODE
PORTAMENTO VARIATION A/D SETUP MASTER NUM

PATTERN PATT
CHAIN SONG UTILITY UTILITY
SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
PITCH DELAY KNOB ASSIGN EFFECT BPM GROOVE

SUB MODE
PLAY FX MIDI DELAY MIXER GROOVE PLAY FX
GRID GROOVE HARMONIZE
MIDI DELAY
MIDI DELAY
MIXER
VOICE SELECT
EG REVERB MIDI OUT CH REC STOP PLAY
7
VOICE EDIT EFFECT
8 9
SETUP
+/-
MASTER VOICE EDIT
NOTE
TIME
EFFECT SETUP
FEEDBACK
MASTER
VOL/PAN/OUT
EQ
EFFECT SEND
LEVEL
4 5 6 0 FILTER SHIFT
KEY-
BOARD
ARPEGGIO
ON
OCT
DOWN
OCT
UP STORE
MUTE
SCENE 1 2
MEMORY
3 4 5 EXIT
4
SAVE LOAD
5 6
JOB
0
EDIT
LFO
PITCH
EG
FILTER
SAVE
EFFECT TYPE ARPEGGIO
PORTAMENTO VARIATION
DELAY
REVERB
LOAD
A/D SETUP
MASTER EQ
MASTER
KNOB ASSIGN EFFECT
MIDI OUT CH
JOB EDIT
EXIT
RENAME SCSI SETUP
SAVE LOAD JOB EDIT SAVE LOAD JOB EDIT

DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
SAVE LOAD JOB LIST EDIT CHANGE TRANSPOSE

PAD 1 PAD 2
EXPORT IMPORT VIEW FILTER CAPS
TRACK 1 2
ALL
3
1~8 9~16
4 5 6
TR-
7
TR+
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PAD ASSIGN
16
RENAME SCSI SETUP MUTE
DELETE SCSI COMM

SPACE DEL
SOLO
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
Procedure
* Levels & Pan

1 Select the MIXER Volume/Pan/Out Page
Use the [MIXER] button (or the [EXIT] button if you’re at a lower mixer page) to select the MIXER Volume/Pan/Out page.
2 Select a Track
Use the standard track-selection procedure to select the track you want to work on (press a gray or white key on the keyboard while
holding the [TRACK SELECT] button). The number of the selected track will be highlighted on the display.
RS7000 47
3 Adjust the Parameters as Required

Use the function knobs to adjust the required parameter(s). Use [Knob 1] to adjust the volume of the selected track. The graphic “fader”
will move accordingly. [Knob 2] adjusts the stereo pan position. [Knob 3] controls random pan depth, and [Knob 4] selects the output to
which the selected track will be sent — see page 94 of the reference section for details.
While you’re here, use the volume and pan parameters to set up a mix for our pattern that sounds good to your ears.
* EQ and Effects
Now that you know the basic procedure (select mixer page → select track → make adjustments) you should have no trou-
ble in accessing and adjusting the mixer’s EQ and Effect Send parameters.
The EQ parameters are fairly self-explanatory, but there are quite a few EQ types you can select for each track. Anytime
you need details, simply refer to the appropriate chapter in the reference section of the manual: page 94 for EQ, and page
96 for Effect Send.
The Effect Send mixer page provides effect send level controls for the RS7000’s three effect stages: VARIATION,
DELAY/CHORUS, and REVERB. The panel [DRY ↔ VARI.], [DELAY/CHO] and REVERB knobs are directly linked to
the mixer Effect Send controls for the selected track, so you can use them instead of the function knobs to make adjust-
ments. The RS7000 offers an impressive range of high-quality effects in each effect stage, each with a comprehensive
selection of editable parameters.

EFFECT
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
D-FILTER LO-FI
OUT A
ISOLATION SLICE
OUT B
START/STOP
SELECT
LFO EG
WAVE
AMP
FILTER
S&H
PGM
PITCH FILTER
EFFECT SEND / VOLUME

TYPE FINGERED TYPE
LPF18
FULL TIME LPF12
OFF HPF
BPF
BEF
F1 F2 F3 F4
MODE
CHAIN
NUM SYSTEM
MIDI SETUP
MIDI FILTER
BPM SUB MODE

TIME EQ
EFFECT SEND
7 8 9 +/- LEVEL
RENAME SCSI SETUP
DELETE SCSI COMM
1 2 3 ENTER FORMAT
PAD 1 PAD 2
TRANSPOSE
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE
DRY VARI DELAY/CHO REVERB TRACK VOLUME SOLO

K ! L # M $ N % O & P '
TRANSPOSE(-)
Q ( R ) S -
TRANSPOSE(+)
T @ U ^ V _ W { X } Y ~ Z
SPACE DEL
3.3V
TRACK CARD
SELECT
Master Effects
As if the effects accessed via the mixer weren’t enough, Yamaha has added a versatile Master Effect stage which allows even further pro-
cessing of the overall sound. Spend some time playing with the various effects provided to hear how they affect the pattern we’ve cre-
ated.
Procedure
1 Turn the MASTER EFFECT Stage ON

Press [PATTERN] to select the PATTERN Play page, then press the [EFFECT ON/OFF] button so that its indicator lights to turn the
MASTER EFFECT stage ON.
MASTER EFFECT
EFFECT
ON/OFF
48 RS7000
2 Select an Effect
Use the MASTER EFFECT selector dial to select an effect — ISOLATION, D-FILTER, CTRL DELAY, MULTI COMP, RING MOD,
V-DIST, LO-FI, or SLICE. Note that when you select an effect the names of parameters pertaining to that effect appear in the top bar of TUTORIAL
the display.
Tutorial
MASTER EFFECT
MULTI COMP RING MOD
EFFECT
ON/OFF CTRL DELAY V-DIST
D-FILTER LO-FI
ISOLATION SLICE
ISOLATION
D-FILTER
CTRL DELAY
MULTI COMP
RING MOD
V-DIST
LO-FI
SLICE
3 Adjust the Effect Parameters

The four knobs above the display adjust the parameters listed directly below them. Other parameters are available in the MASTER sub
mode (Page 111). Experiment with the various effects and their parameters while playing back the pattern to get a feel for what the
RS7000 master effects can do for your sound.
MASTER EFFECT
MULTI COMP RING MOD
EFFECT
ON/OFF CTRL DELAY V-DIST
D-FILTER LO-FI
ISOLATION SLICE
RS7000 49
50 RS7000
Chapter 1. Basic
1. RS7000 System Overview .......................... 52

2. RS7000 Internal Structure .......................... 58
3. Basic Operation.......................................... 64
RS7000 51
• Groove [GROOVE]...(Page 85)

Mode Structure Allows groove and feel variations to be applied to individual
tracks.
In order to make operation of the RS7000 as comprehensive and
as smooth as possible, all functions and operations have been • Play Effects [PLAY FX]...(Page 87)
grouped in “modes”, many of which also have a number of “sub
Add depth and harmony to individual tracks.
modes”.
• MIDI Delay [MIDI DELAY] ...(Page 90)
Recording, playback, editing, and other displays are grouped into
Adds a special MIDI-based delay effect to individual tracks.
the following 5 modes.
PATTERN mode ................. Creation and playback of • Mixer [MIXER]...(Page 93)
phrases and patterns.
Individually adjusts the volume, effect level and other param-
PATTERN CHAIN mode .... Sequential playback of patterns.
SONG mode ........................ Creation and playback of songs. eters for each track.
UTILITY mode .................... Basic RS7000 settings.
• Voice Edit [VOICE EDIT] ...(Page 97)
SAMPLING mode .............. Recording and editing of sam-
ples. Edits the voices assigned to each track.
These modes are further divided into several sub modes.
• Effect [EFFECT]...(Page 104)
Mode and sub mode selection is accomplished by using the cor-
responding mode buttons. It might be a good idea to actually Sets the effects for the REVERB, DELAY/CHORUS, and
switch through the modes as they are described, below, to get a VARIATION effect stages.
feel for the overall structure of the RS7000 system.
• Setup [SETUP]...(Page 107)
Provides access to the arpeggiator, knob assignment, and
PATTERN mode [PATTERN] ...(Page 70) channel settings.
• Master [MASTER]...(Page 111)

This mode is used to play and create patterns. Patterns can be cre-
ated using up to 16 tracks. Phrases, which make up the patterns, Provides access to the master EQ and master effect settings.
can also be recorded and edited in this mode.
• Save [SAVE]...(Page 114)
Press the [PATTERN] button to enter the PATTERN mode. The
PATTERN mode includes the following 15 sub modes. Saves data to memory card or disk.
• PATTERN Play [PATTERN]...(Page 72) • Load [LOAD]...(Page 126)

Patterns can be selected and played. This display page always Loads data from memory card or disk.
appears first when the PATTERN mode is engaged.
• Job [JOB] ...(Page 133)
Accesses the pattern and phrase editing jobs.
• Phrase Edit [EDIT]...(Page 154)

Allows editing or insertion of new data in recorded phrases.
PATTERN CHAIN mode

• PATTERN Patch [PATTERN]...(Page 75)
[PATT CHAIN]...(Page 158)
Phrases are combined to create patterns.
• Phrase Recording [REC]...(Page 77) Allows sequential playback of patterns. Patterns can be “chained”
Original phrases can be created by recording to “user” to create songs, and the results can be converted to actual RS7000
songs.
phrases.
Press the [PATT CHAIN] button to enter the PATTERN CHAIN
mode. The PATTERN mode includes the following 6 sub modes.
52 RS7000
• PATTERN CHAIN [PATT CHAIN]...(Page 159) • Play Effects [PLAY FX]...(Page 192)
This mode is used to set up a sequence of patterns for play- Add depth and harmony to individual tracks.
back, and play the resulting chain. The following display will
• MIDI Delay [MIDI DELAY]...(Page 193)
always appear when the PATTERN CHAIN mode is first
selected.
• Mixer [MIXER]...(Page 194)
Individually adjusts the volume, effect level and other param- 1
eters for each track.
Basic
• Voice Edit [VOICE EDIT]...(Page 196)
Edits the voices assigned to each track.
• Effect [EFFECT]...(Page 198)

• Master [MASTER]...(Page 164) Sets the effects for the REVERB, DELAY/CHORUS, and
Provides access to the master EQ and master effect settings. VARIATION effect stages.
• Save [SAVE] ...(Page 166) • Setup [SETUP] ...(Page 200)
Saves data to memory card or disk. Provides access to the arpeggiator, knob assignment, and
• Load [LOAD]...(Page 169) channel settings.
Loads data from memory card or disk. • Master [MASTER]...(Page 202)
• Job [JOB]...(Page 171) Provides access to the master EQ and master effect settings.
Accesses the pattern chain editing jobs. • Save [SAVE]...(Page 204)
• Phrase Edit [EDIT]...(Page 175) Saves data to memory card or disk.
Allows editing or insertion of new data in pattern chains. • Load [LOAD]...(Page 208)
Loads data from memory card or disk.
SONG mode [SONG]...(Page 180) • Job [JOB]...(Page 212)

Accesses the song editing jobs.
This mode is used to play and create songs using up to 16
sequencer tracks. • Song Edit [EDIT]...(Page 225)
Press the [SONG] button to enter the SONG Play mode. Allows editing or insertion of new data in recorded songs.
The SONG mode is made up of the following 14 sub modes.
• Song Play [SONG]...(Page 182)
UTILITY mode [UTILITY]...(Page 256)
Songs can be selected and played. This display page always
appears first when the SONG mode is engaged.
Accesses the basic RS7000 settings and MIDI settings.
Press [UTILITY] to go to the UTILITY mode.
The UTILITY mode is made up of the following 3 sub modes.
• System Setup [UTILITY]...(Page 257)
Master tuning, controller settings, and other overall system
parameters.
• MIDI Setup [UTILITY]...(Page 260)

• Song Recording [REC]...(Page 184)
MIDI synchronization, echo back, and other MIDI-related
Original songs are recorded in this mode.
setup parameters.
• Groove [GROOVE]...(Page 191)
• MIDI Filter [UTILITY]...(Page 262)
Allows groove and feel variations to be applied to individual
Specifies which MIDI events will be received or transmitted
tracks.
via the MIDI IN/OUT connector.
RS7000 53
SAMPLING mode ...(Page 228)
This mode is used to record and edit samples.

The SAMPLING mode is made up of the following 3 sub modes.
• Sampling [STANDBY/START/STOP]...(Page 229)
Records samples.
NOTE
A “sample” is digitally recorded wave data that
includes sample parameter data which defines
the way it is to be triggered and played back.
• Real-time Loop Remix [REAL TIME LOOP

REMIX]...(Page 239)
Allows recorded sample phrases to be remixed in real time.
NOTE
The REAL TIME LOOP REMIX function divides
up the performance data in the selected track
and randomly rearranges part of it to create a
range of variations. Since this function works
with MIDI data, it can also be applied to tracks
that don’t use samples.
• Sample Edit [SAMPLE EDIT]...(Page 241)

Allows samples to be edited. The sample jobs are also
included in this sub mode.
54 RS7000
Function Tree Save [SAVE]

Save ..................................................................P.118
● PATTERN MODE Export ...............................................................P.120
Rename.............................................................P.122
Pattern Play [PATTERN]......................................................... P.72 Delete................................................................P.123
Patch [PATTERN]...................................................................... P.75 Format...............................................................P.124
Phrase Recording [REC]
Recording Standby............................................. P.78
Load [LOAD] 1
Load..................................................................P.126
Real Time Recording ......................................... P.80
Import ...............................................................P.129
Basic
Step Recording................................................... P.80
SCSI Setup .......................................................P.131
Grid Step Recording .......................................... P.83
SCSI Communication.......................................P.132
Groove [GROOVE] Job [JOB]

Grid Groove ....................................................... P.85 Job List .............................................................P.133
00 Undo/Redo........................................P.134
Play Effects [PLAY FX] 01 Quantize............................................P.135
Harmonize.......................................................... P.88 02 Modify Velocity................................P.136
Note.................................................................... P.88 03 Modify Gate Time ............................P.137
Time ................................................................... P.89 04 Crescendo .........................................P.138
05 Transpose..........................................P.138
MIDI Delay [MIDI DELAY] 06 Glide .................................................P.138
MIDI Delay Edit ................................................ P.91 07 Create Roll........................................P.139
Feedback Edit..................................................... P.91 08 Chord Sort ........................................P.139
09 Chord Separate .................................P.140
Mixer [MIXER] 10 Shift Clock........................................P.140
Voice Select........................................................ P.93 11 Copy Event .......................................P.141
Volume/Pan/Out. ................................................ P.94 12 Erase Event.......................................P.141
EQ ...................................................................... P.94 13 Extract Event ....................................P.142
Effect Send Level............................................... P.96 14 Create Continuous Data....................P.142
15 Thin Out............................................P.143
16 Modify Control Data ........................P.143
Voice Edit [VOICE EDIT]
17 Beat Stretch ......................................P.144
LFO .................................................................... P.97
18 Copy Phrase......................................P.144
Portamento ....................................................... P.100
19 Exchange Phrase...............................P.145
Pitch ................................................................. P.100
20 Mix Phrase........................................P.145
EG .................................................................... P.101
21 Append Phrase..................................P.146
Filter................................................................. P.102
22 Split Phrase.......................................P.146
23 Get Phrase.........................................P.147
Effect [EFFECT] 24 Put Phrase .........................................P.147
Effect Type ....................................................... P.104 25 Clear Phrase......................................P.148
Variation Parameters ........................................ P.105 26 Phrase Name.....................................P.148
Delay/Chorus Parameters................................. P.105 27 Copy Track .......................................P.148
Reverb Parameters ........................................... P.106 28 Exchange Track ................................P.149
29 Create Track .....................................P.150
Setup [SETUP] 30 Normalize Play Effects.....................P.150
Arpeggio Setting .............................................. P.108 31 Divide Drum Track...........................P.150
A/D Setup......................................................... P.108 32 Copy Pattern .....................................P.151
Knob Assign..................................................... P.109 33 Append Pattern .................................P.151
MIDI Out Channel ........................................... P.110 34 Split Pattern ......................................P.152
35 Clear Pattern .....................................P.153
Master [MASTER] 36 Style Name .......................................P.153
Master EQ ........................................................ P.111
Phrase Edit [EDIT]
Master Effect.................................................... P.112
Edit Change ......................................................P.154
View Filter ........................................................P.156
RS7000 55
● SONG Mode Save [SAVE]

Song [SONG] ........................................................................... P.182 Save ..................................................................P.205
Export ...............................................................P.206
Song Recording [REC]
Rename.............................................................P.206
Recording Standby........................................... P.184
Delete................................................................P.207
Real Time Recording ....................................... P.186
Format...............................................................P.207
Step Recording................................................. P.187
Grid Step Recording ........................................ P.189
Load [LOAD]
Load..................................................................P.208
Groove [GROOVE]
Import ...............................................................P.210
Grid Groove ..................................................... P.191
SCSI Setup .......................................................P.211
SCSI Communication.......................................P.211
Play Effects [PLAY FX]
Harmonize........................................................ P.192
Job [JOB]
Note.................................................................. P.192
Job List .............................................................P.212
Time ................................................................. P.192
00 Undo/Redo........................................P.213
01 Quantize............................................P.214
MIDI Delay [MIDI DELAY]
02 Modify Velocity................................P.214
MIDI Delay Edit .............................................. P.193
Feedback Edit................................................... P.193 03 Modify Gate Time ............................P.214
04 Crescendo .........................................P.215
05 Transpose..........................................P.215
Mixer [MIXER]
06 Glide .................................................P.215
Voice Select...................................................... P.194
07 Create Roll........................................P.216
Volume/Pan/Out ............................................... P.194
08 Chord Sort ........................................P.216
EQ .................................................................... P.195
09 Chord Separate .................................P.216
Effect Send Level............................................. P.195
10 Shift Clock........................................P.216
11 Copy Event .......................................P.217
Voice Edit [VOICE EDIT] 12 Erase Event.......................................P.217
LFO .................................................................. P.196 13 Extract Event ....................................P.218
Portamento ....................................................... P.196 14 Create Continuous Data....................P.218
Pitch ................................................................. P.197 15 Thin Out............................................P.219
EG .................................................................... P.197 16 Modify Control Data ........................P.219
Filter................................................................. P.197 17 Beat Stretch ......................................P.220
18 Create Measure.................................P.220
Effect [EFFECT] 19 Delete Measure.................................P.220
Effect Type ....................................................... P.198 20 Copy Track .......................................P.221
Variation Parameters ........................................ P.198 21 Exchange Track ................................P.221
Delay/Chorus Parameters................................. P.199 22 Mix Track .........................................P.222
Reverb Parameters ........................................... P.199 23 Clear Track .......................................P.222
24 Normalize Play Effects.....................P.222
Setup [SETUP] 25 Divide Drum Track...........................P.223
Arpeggio Setting .............................................. P.200 26 Copy Song ........................................P.223
A/D Setup......................................................... P.200 27 Split Song to Pattern.........................P.223
Knob Assign..................................................... P.201 28 Clear Song ........................................P.224
MIDI Out Channel ........................................... P.201 29 Song Name .......................................P.224
Master [MASTER] Song Edit [EDIT]

Master EQ ........................................................ P.202 Edit Change ......................................................P.226
Master Effect.................................................... P.203 View Filter ........................................................P.226
56 RS7000
● PATTERN CHAIN Mode ● SAMPLING Mode

PATTERN CHAIN [PATT CHAIN] ...................................... P.159 SAMPLING ................................................................................P.228
Pattern Chain Recording [REC] Sampling [STANDBY/START/STOP]
Recording Standby........................................... P.161 Sampling Setup.................................................P.231
Real Time Recording ....................................... P.162 Sampling Standby.............................................P.232
Step Recording................................................. P.163 Trim ..................................................................P.234
Slice ..................................................................P.235 1
Master [MASTER]
Master EQ ........................................................ P.164 Real Time Loop Remix [REAL TIME LOOP REMIX]
Basic
Master Effect.................................................... P.165 Real Time Loop Remix ....................................P.239
Save [SAVE] Sample Edit [SAMPLE EDIT]

Save.................................................................. P.167 Trim ..................................................................P.241
Export............................................................... P.167 Sample Parameter.............................................P.242
Rename ............................................................ P.167 Sample Job List ................................................P.244
Delete ............................................................... P.168 01 Copy .................................................P.245
Format .............................................................. P.168 02 Delete................................................P.246
03 Extract ..............................................P.246
Load [LOAD] 04 Move.................................................P.246
Load ................................................................. P.169 05 Normalize .........................................P.247
SCSI Setup ....................................................... P.170 06 Time Stretch .....................................P.248
07 Pitch Convert ....................................P.248
Job [JOB] 08 Fade In/Out.......................................P.249
Job List............................................................. P.171 09 Frequency Convert............................P.250
00 Undo/Redo ....................................... P.172 10 Stereo To Mono ................................P.251
01 Copy Event....................................... P.172 11 Loop Remix......................................P.251
02 Erase Event ...................................... P.172 12 Slice ..................................................P.252
03 Create Measure ................................ P.173 13 Sample Name ...................................P.253
04 Delete Measure ................................ P.173
05 Convert to Song ............................... P.173
06 Copy Chain ...................................... P.174
07 Clear Chain ...................................... P.174
08 Chain Name ..................................... P.174
Pattern Chain Edit [EDIT]

Edit List............................................................ P.175
● UTILITY Mode
Utility [UTILITY] ....................................................................... P.256
System.............................................................. P.257
MIDI Setup ...................................................... P.260
MIDI Filter....................................................... P.262
RS7000 57
2. RS7000 Internal Structure
The 6 Functional Blocks

The RS7000 system consists of 6 main functional blocks: the sequencer, the tone generator, controllers, the arpeggiator, effects, and
master EQ & effects.
OUTPUT
INPUT EFFECTS
MASTER EQ
MASTER EFFECTS
SAMPLING
PERFORMANCE
TONE GENERATOR
RECORD PLAY
MIDI IN BACK
SEQUENCER
MIDI OUT
PLAYBACK
RECORD PERFORMANCE
ARPEGGO
CONTROLLERS
● Sequencer...(Page 59) ● Arpeggiator...(Page 63)

The sequencer block records performance data from the This function automatically plays notes and chords played on the
RS7000’s own controllers or external MIDI equipment, and plays keyboard as arpeggios. In addition to driving the tone generator
back the data using the internal tone generator or external MIDI block, arpeggio data can be sent to the sequencer block and
equipment. recorded as sequence data to a phrase or song, or transmitted to
external equipment via the MIDI OUT connectors.
● Tone Generator...(Page 60)
The tone generator block produces voices controlled by the ● Effects...(Page 63)
RS7000 sequencer, the controllers, the arpeggiator, or MIDI data The effect block can be used to apply effect processing to the out-
received from external MIDI equipment. put of the tone generator block. Three effect stages are provided
— reverb, delay/chorus, and variation — and different effects can
● Controllers...(Page 62) be applied to each track.
This block includes all controllers which control the sequencer
and tone generator blocks: the keyboard, the assignable knobs, ● Master EQ & Effects...(Page 63)
sequencer buttons, etc. Performance data played on the keyboard This block applies equalization and effects to the final stereo out-
is sent to the sequencer and tone generator in the form of MIDI put signal. This block is ideal for “mastering” the overall RS7000
data, and the sequencer buttons control pattern or song playback. sound.
58 RS7000
Sequencer ● Pattern Organization (Styles & Sections)

Patterns are grouped into “styles”. Each style can include as
The sequencer block records performance data from the many as 16 patterns, each of which is known as a “section”. You
RS7000’s own controllers or external MIDI equipment, and plays can switch directly between any of the sections included in a
back the data using the internal tone generator or external MIDI style using the RS7000 keyboard. The internal RS7000 memory
equipment. holds up to 64 styles (01 ~ 64), each with 16 sections (sections A
~ P), for a total of 1024 patterns (64 × 16 = 1024).
CAUTION
1
Pattern
Style × 64
All data in the internal sequencer memory will
Basic
be lost when the power is turned off. Be sure to Style 01
save important data to a memory card or SCSI A B C D E F G H

disk before turning the power off. I J K L M N O P
16 sections
● Patterns & Phrases

“Patterns” are any type musical pattern which can be played, 64 styles
repeated or switched in the PATTERN mode. Patterns consist of
from 1 to 16 “phrases” assigned to the 16 pattern tracks.
Each phrase can be thought of as a “part” of the patter: a drum
part, a bass part, guitar or piano chord backing, a brass line, or ● Pattern Chains
any other musical part. In addition to the many preset phrases A “pattern chain” is basically a number of patterns played
provided with the RS7000, original phrases can be recorded to sequentially to produce a complete song. Pattern chains can be
create totally original patterns. created to automatically switch styles and sections. In addition to
a pattern track which contains the data for pattern switching,
Internal Pattern Structure there is a scene/mute which allows scene and mute memories to
MEASURE 1 MEASURE 2
be recalled as well as specific track mute operations, and a tempo
track that allows tempo variations. Pattern chains can be con-
Track 1 Phrase (Bass Drum)
verted to songs, so creating a pattern chain is a convenient way to
begin producing a song. The RS7000 has memory for 20 pattern
Track 2 Phrase (Snare Drum)
chains (01 ~ 20).
Track 8 Phrase (Percussion) Pattern Chain Track Structure

Track 9 Phrase (Bass) Track Data Type 1 2 3 4 5 ••• Measures
Pattern Style 01
Track 10 Phrase (Guitar) Repeat Repeat •••
Track Section A B C
Scene/Mute Scene Memory Number 3 4 2 •••

Track Mute Memory Number 1 2 5 •••
Track 16 Phrase (Effect Sound 1)
BPM Track Tempo Change 120 158 72 •••
RS7000 59
● Songs Tone Generator

Songs on the RS7000 are much like the songs you would create
with a conventional sequencer. Songs are different from patterns The tone generator block produces voices controlled by the
in the following ways: RS7000 sequencer, the controllers, the arpeggiator, or MIDI data
• Performance data can be directly recorded to the tracks. received from external MIDI equipment.
• Long songs with up to 999 measures can be created.
• Scene/mute changes and tempo changes can be
recorded to the scene/mute and BPM tracks, respec- CAUTION
tively.
• The meter (time signature) can be changed for each All voice data you created will be lost when the
measure. power is turned off. Be sure to save important
• Punch-in recording is available. data to a memory card or SCSI disk before turn-
• Multi-record mode simultaneously records all 16 ing the power off.
tracks.
The RS7000 has memory for 20 songs (01 ~ 20).
● Voices & Sample Voices
Song Track Structure The RS7000 uses two types of voices: “voices” and “sample
voices”.
Track 1 2 3 4 5 ••• Measures
Track1
“Voices” are the internal voices produced by the RS7000’s
Track2 AWM2 tone generator. Since the voices are preset, they are ready
Sequencer Track3 for use as soon as the power is turned on.
Track Track4
“Sample voices” are samples recorded using the RS7000 sam-
:
Track16
pling function or imported from other sources. The sample voice
Scene/Mute Scene Memory Number 3 4 2 ••• memory is always empty when the power is first turned on.
Track Mute Memory Number 1 2 5 •••
BPM Track Tempo Change 120 158 72 ••• ● Normal Voices & Drum Voices
Voices are further divided into two types: “normal voices” and
“drum voices”.
● Data Recorded with Styles and Songs “Normal voices” are played normally via the keyboard or a MIDI
The following types of data are recorded with each style and controller, with each note playing at the corresponding pitch.
song. These types of voices are usually used like individual musical
• BPM (Tempo) instruments. In the RS7000 Bank Select MSB = 0, 63 selects the
• Scene/Mute Memory normal voices.
• Transpose (songs only) “Drum voices” are especially for drums and percussion instru-
• Phrases (styles only) ments, with each note producing the sound of a different instru-
• Note Shift (styles only) ment. In the RS7000 Bank Select MSB = 126, 127 selects the
• Groove drum voices.
• Play Effects Refer to page 295 in the “Appendix” for complete lists of the
• MIDI Delay instrument-to-key assignments for the drum voices.
• Mixer Normal Voice
• Voice Effect
• Effect
• Setup
• Local Sample Voice
Each key plays the selected

voice at the corresponding
pitch.
Drum Voice
Bass Drum Snare Hi Hat
Each key plays a different

instrument.
60 RS7000
● Sample Kit Voices & Pitched Voices Up to 128 common sample voices can be stored in the RS7000
Sample voices are further divided into two types: “sample kit memory at a time. The sample contents and program number/
voices” and “pitched voices”. voice relationship remains the same even when songs or styles
“Sample kit voices” allow up to 128 different samples to be are switched.
assigned to different notes from C-2 to G8. Different samples can The maximum total number of sample voices — local for all
thus be played individually or simultaneously as required. Stereo songs/styles as well as common — that can be stored in the
samples use up two of the available assignments, so up to 64 ste- RS7000 memory at any one time is 256.
reo samples can be assigned to one sample kit voice.
Pitched voices play one sample at appropriate pitches across the
1
Song 01 Style 01
range of the keyboard.
Basic
Local Sample Voice Local Sample Voice
001 ~ 128 001 ~ 128
Pitched Voice
Song 01 ~ 20 Style 01 ~ 64
Common Sample Voice

C001 ~ C128
One sample is played at
different pitches.
● Voice Banks
Voice banks organize the RS7000 voices into related categories,
and are selected by MIDI Bank Select MSB and LSB data. The
Sample Kit Voice
RS7000 has 5 main voice categories, further divided into 15
voice banks. A maximum of 128 voices can be stored in each
bank.
• (MSB LSB) = (000 000) is the GM* voice bank. This
bank contains 128 normal voices conforming to the GM
standard.
• (MSB LSB) = (063 000) ~ (063 009) are the RS7000
Sample A Sample B Sample C
voices banks, containing a range of top-quality, up-to-date
voices that are ideally suited for modern music production.
The voices are organized as follows:
Different samples are (063 000)...........SyBa&Ld1: Synth bass and synth lead
assigned to each key.
bank 1.
(063 007)...........SyBa&Ld2: Synth bass and synth lead
bank 2.
(063 001)...........SyPd&Fx1: Synth pad and pitched
● Local Sample Voices & Common Sample effects bank 1.
Voices (063 008)...........SyBa&Fx2: Synth pad and pitched
Sample voices can be either “local” or “common”. effects bank 2.
Local sample voices are used by a specific song or style. Up to (063 002)...........SyMaterl: Analog and FM synthesis
128 local sample voices can be saved with each song or style. If type voices — these are ideal for edit-
you have samples you want to use in a number of styles or songs, ing.
they should be used as “common sample voices” (below). (063 003)...........BandInst: Piano, organ, guitar, electric
Common sample voices are available for use by all songs and bass, and other common band instru-
styles. ments.
RS7000 61
(063 004) .......... Cls&Wind: Classic string and wind Controllers

instruments.
(063 005) .......... Eth&Perc: Ethnic and percussion instru- This block includes all controllers which control the sequencer
ments. and tone generator blocks: the keyboard, the assignable knobs,
(063 006) .......... SFX1: Sound effect bank 1. sequencer buttons, etc. Performance data played on the keyboard
(063 009) .......... SFX2: Sound effect bank 2. is sent to the sequencer and tone generator in the form of MIDI
• (MSB LSB) = (126 000) contains the RS7000 drum data, and the sequencer buttons control pattern or song playback.
voices — all up-to-date and a perfect match for today’s
music. ● The Keyboard
• (MSB LSB) = (127 000) is the GM drum voice bank con- In addition to sending performance (note) data to the sequencer
taining a single standard GM drum kit voice. and tone generator blocks, the RS7000 keyboard can be used in
• (MSB LSB) = (064 000) ~ (064 001) are the sample conjunction with the [KEYBOARD], [TRACK SELECT],
voice banks. The sample voices are organized into local [MUTE] and [TRANSPOSE] buttons for section switching, track
sample voices and common sample voices. selection, muting, transposition, and more.
(064 000) .......... Local Sample Voices: All 128 voices in
the bank are switched when the song or ● Assignable Knobs
style is switched. The assignable knobs can be used for real-time control of play
(064 001) .......... Common Sample Voices: The voices effects, voice parameters, and mixer parameters, allowing hands-
remain the same when the song or style on creative control over the sound in real time. In addition to the
is switched. functions listed on the panel, other functions can be assigned
which are memorized and automatically recalled with each style
NOTE or song.
*GM is a standard which assigns the same ● The Velocity Pads
voices to the same voices numbers so that MIDI These velocity-sensitive pads are convenient for performance
data will sound the same when played on any data entry. Tapping these pads enters the pre-specified note data
GM-compatible equipment. The RS7000 GM at the specified pitch.
voice bank (000 000) and GM drum voice bank The pitch for each pad can be set by pressing [PAD 1] or [PAD
(127 000) have been provided to allow playback 2] while holding the [TAP] button and the appropriate key on the
of GM data, but do not fully conform to the GM keyboard.
standard.
● Scene/Mute Memory
Up to 5 complete scene and mute setups for each song and style
● Maximum Polyphony can stored in memory and recalled whenever needed.
The RS7000 can play up to 62 notes simultaneously. If perfor- A “scene” includes all parameter settings for all tracks (all mixer,
mance data which plays a greater number of notes is received voice edit, mute on/off, groove, play effect, MIDI delay, BPM
some notes will be cut off. Be careful that the maximum polyph- and transpose settings). A mute setup includes the mute on/off
ony is not exceeded, especially when using many notes with a status for all tracks.
slow decay or release time. The ability to store and instantly recall complete scene and mute
Furthermore, the maximum polyphony applies to the number of setups means that even complex setups that would take a consid-
voice elements used, not the number of voices. The normal voices erable amount of time to program in real time can be called up at
include both 1-element and 2-element voices, so the maximum the touch of a button. Recall operations can be recorded to pattern
number of simultaneous notes may be less than 62. Refer to the chains and songs as well.
voice list (Page 291) for a complete listing of the number of ele- The [SCENE/MUTE] button switches between the scene and
ments used by each voice. mute memory functions. The SCENE and MUTE indicators light
Sample voices use 1 element, but stereo samples use 2. alternately each time the button is pressed.
62 RS7000
The [STORE] button is used to store the current scene or mute ● Variation Effects
settings to one of the 5 available memory locations: [MEMORY 100 variation effects are provided, including reverb, distortion,
1] ~ [MEMORY 5]. The selected type of data is stored when a overdrive, and much more:
scene/mute memory button — [MEMORY 1] ~ [MEMORY 5] See the “Effect List” on Page 313 for details.
— is pressed while the [STORE] button is held. When pressed
alone the [MEMORY 1] ~ [MEMORY 5] buttons recall the
stored scene or mute data. Master EQ & Effects
Store and recall operations cannot be carried out in the sampling
mode.
1
This block applies equalization and effects to the final stereo out-
● Sequencer Buttons put signal. This block is ideal for “mastering” the overall RS7000
Basic
These control the basic functions of the sequencer block. sound.
[ ] .....................................Goes directly to the top measure of 8 Effect types are provided.
the current pattern or song. See the “Effect List” on Page 313 for details.
[ ]...................................Moves forward one measure when
pressed briefly, or scrolls forward
continuously (fast forward) when Memory Configuration
held.
[ ]...................................Moves back one measure when The RS7000 internal memory can be categorized as System
pressed briefly, or scrolls backward Memory, Preset Memory, and User memory.
continuously (fast reverse) when
held. ● System Memory
[ ] (REC)........................Switches to the phrase or song The RS7000 operating environment is retained in this memory.
recording display. System setup, MIDI setup, and MIDI filter setup parameters.
[ ] (STOP) .....................Stops pattern or song playback or
● Preset Memory
recording.
This is a read-only memory (it can’t be erased or rewritten) that
[ ] (PLAY) ......................Starts pattern or song playback, and
contains the preset phrases and voices.
starts phrase or song recording.
● User Memory
The user memory is a volatile memory (the contents can be
Arpeggiator erased and rewritten) which is used to retain recorded phrases,
patterns, and samples. A memory protect function is provided to
This function automatically plays notes and chords played on the prevent accidental erasure. The memory can hold up to 128 local
keyboard as arpeggios. In addition to driving the tone generator samples for each style or song, 128 common samples, 5 scene
block, arpeggio data can be sent to the sequencer block and and 5 mute setups, 256 user phrases for each style, 1024 patterns
recorded as sequence data to a phrase or song, or transmitted to (64 styles × 16 sections), 20 pattern chains, and 20 songs.
external equipment via the MIDI OUT connectors. The user memory is empty when the unit is shipped from the fac-
Arpeggios are also sometimes known as “broken chords”, and are tory.
used frequently in modern dance and techno styles. To play auto-
mated arpeggios press the [ARPEGGIO ON] button so that its
CAUTION
indicator lights and play a chord on the keyboard.
All user memory data is erased when the power
is turned off. Be sure to save data you want to
Effects keep to a memory card or an external SCSI
disk.
The effect block can be used to apply effect processing to the out-
put of the tone generator block. Three effect stages are provided
— reverb, delay/chorus, and variation — and different effects can
be applied to each track.
● Reverb Effect
This effect stage is especially for reverb. It can add a natural
sense of ambience and space to the sound.
12 types of reverb are provided:
See the “Effect List” on Page 313 for details.
● Delay/Chorus Effects
25 delay and chorus effects are provided:
See the “Effect List” on Page 313 for details.
RS7000 63
3. Basic Operation
3. Basic Operation
Selecting Modes Selecting Sub Modes
The MODE buttons are used to switch between modes. When a Most modes have a number of sub modes that can be accessed by
MODE button is pressed its indicator will light and the corre- using the appropriate SUB MODE buttons, or the [REC] button.
sponding mode will be selected. The [EXIT] button can be used to exit from the sub modes.
[PATTREN] button [SONG] button SUB MODE

GROOVE PLAY FX MIDI DELAY MIXER
MODE
PATTERN PATT SONG UTILITY 7 8 9 +/-
CHAIN VOICE EDIT EFFECT SETUP MASTER
4 5 6 0
SAVE LOAD JOB EDIT
[PATT CHAIN] button [UTILITY] button

1 2 3 ENTER
[PATTERN] ...............Alternately selects the PATTERN Play and
PATTERN Patch modes. EXIT
[PATT CHAIN] .........Selects the PATTERN CHAIN mode.
[SONG] .....................Selects the SONG mode.
[STANDBY/START/STOP], [SAMPLE EDIT],
[REAL TIME LOOP REMIX] [GROOVE]................ Allows groove and feel variations to be
...............Select the corresponding sampling modes. applied to individual tracks.
[UTILITY] ................Selects the UTILITY mode. The System, [PLAY FX] ............... Selects the PLAY FX Harmonize, Note,
MIDI Setup, and MIDI Filter pages are and Time pages.
selected in sequence each time the button [MIDI DELAY]......... Selects the MIDI DELAY MIDI Delay and
is pressed. The [EXIT] button can be used Feedback pages.
to move backward through the pages. [MIXER] ................... Selects the MIXER Voice Select, Vol/Pan/
Out, EQ, and Effect Send Level pages.
NOTE [VOICE EDIT].......... Selects the VOICE EDIT LFO, Porta-
mento, Pitch, EG, and Filter pages.
Modes cannot be selected during playback or [EFFECT] ................ Selects the EFFECT Effect Type, Varia-
recording. tion, Delay/Chorus, and Reverb pages.
64 RS7000
3. Basic Operation
[SETUP] ....................Selects the SETUP Arpeggio, A/D Setup, When One Button Accesses Several Pages
Knob Assign, and MIDI Out Ch pages.
[MASTER] ................Selects the MASTER Master EQ and Mas- Some modes and sub modes have more than one display page. In
ter Effect pages. such cases the various pages provided can be accessed in
[SAVE] ......................Selects the SAVE Save, Export, Rename, sequence by pressing the related button. You can move backward
Delete, and Format pages. through the pages by using the [EXIT] button.
[LOAD] .....................Selects the LOAD Load, Import, SCSI
Setup and SCSI Communication pages.
[JOB] ........................Accesses the job list.
1
[EDIT] .......................Selects the Edit change and View Filter
Basic
pages.
MASTER EXIT
PATTERN PLAY PAGE
REC
[REC].........................Selects the record standby page. MASTER

MASTER EQ EXIT
REAL TIME
LOOP SAMPLE
REMIX EDIT STANDBY
MASTER EFFECT
START/STOP
[STANDBY/START/STOP]
.................Selects the Sampling Setup and execution Immediately to the left of the MODE and SUB MODE buttons
pages. are a number of dots that indicate the number of pages accessed
[SAMPLE EDIT] ......Selects the SAMPLE Trim and parameter by that button. The actual titles of the pages accessed are listed on
pages, and the sample job list. the panel to the right of the MODE and SUB MODE button
[REAL TIME LOOP REMIX] groups.
.................Selects the Real Time Loop Remix page. Further, some mode and sub mode displays will have arrows at
the bottom left or right indicating that other pages can be
accessed. In this case use the [F1] or [F4] button to scroll to the
next page.
F1 F4
F1 F4
RS7000 65
3. Basic Operation
Editing Parameter Values
Parameters can generally be edited by using [Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4].

The parameters that can be adjusted by each knob appear immedi-
ately above each knob in each display page. SHIFT
F1 F2 F3 F4
or or or
Command Selection and Execution

[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]
Command selection and execution is carried out using the [F1] ~
[F4] buttons.
When this is possible the name of the command will appear out-
lined above the function button at the bottom of the display, and
In some cases a single knob may be assigned to two parameters. the indicator of the corresponding function button will light.
Use the related function button ([F1] ~ [F4]) to switch to the
desired parameter and then edit it as required using the appropri-
ate knob.
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
When a numeric parameter is to be edited, in some cases the SUB

MODE buttons can be used as a numeric keypad for direct
numeric data entry while the [SHIFT] and related function button
([F1] ~ [F4]) is held. After entering the desired value press the
[EDIT] (ENTER) button to actually enter the value (it will stop
flashing on the display).
(This entry method is not available for all parameters.)
66 RS7000
3. Basic Operation
Job Selection 3. Press [F4] to actually enter the selected character.
In the PATTERN mode, PATTERN CHAIN mode, SONG mode,

and SAMPLING mode job list pages [Knob 1] and [Knob 2] are
used to move the cursor to the desired job, and then [F4] is
pressed to actually select the job.
Basic
F1 F2 F3 F4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
F1 F2 F3 F4
NOTE
File and folder names will automatically be
entered in upper case.
Character Entry Track Selection
Style names, song names, file names for disk storage, etc. are all Hold the [TRACK SELECT] button and press the white key on
entered using the same procedure. As an example, here’s how you the keyboard corresponding to the track to be selected. The corre-
would enter a file name. sponding key indicator will flash.
1 knob, 2 function buttons, the keyboard, the [CAPS] button, and The track numbers are listed above the white keys.
the [PAD1] and [PAD2] buttons are used for name entry. Tracks can also be selected by using the black [TR-] and [TR+]
1. Use [Knob 2] to move the cursor to the target character posi- keys while holding the [TRACK SELECT] button.
tion. Groups of tracks can be selected by using the black [All], [1-8],
or [9-16] keys while holding the [TRACK SELECT] button.
2. Press a white or black key on the keyboard to enter the corre-
While the [TRACK SELECT] button is held the indicators above
sponding character.
the keys will light continuously, flash, or remain off to indicate
Hold the [CAPS] button while pressing a key to enter a capi- the status of the track, as follows:
tal letter. Lit............... The corresponding track contains data.
Hold down [SHIFT] and use the white keys of the keyboard Flashing...... The corresponding track is selected.
pad to enter symbols. Off.............. The corresponding track does not contain data.
Press [PAD1] (SPACE) to enter a space.
Press the [PAD2] (DEL) to delete the character at the cursor
position.
TRACK
SELECT
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1
MUTE
SOLO
K ! L # M $ N % O & P ' Q ( R ) S - T @ U ^ V _ W { X } Y ~
RS7000 67
3. Basic Operation
Tap Tempo Entry Auto Repeat
With this function you can enter a BPM setting by tapping the The sequencer [ ] and [ ] buttons include an auto key
[TAP] button at the appropriate tempo. repeat function. Hold either button to continuously scroll through
Tap the [TAP] button 3 or 4 times in the PATTERN, PATTERN the measures in the corresponding direction.
CHAIN, or SONG mode to automatically enter the correspond-
ing BPM.
Auto Load
TAP BPM
If the power is turned on while holding one of the white keys on
the keyboard as listed below, the Auto Load function will be acti-
PAD ASSIGN
vated and the corresponding file will be loaded automatically.
Files to be loaded using the Auto Load function must initially be
created and saved via the appropriate mode SAVE page with the
Tap several times to set the tempo.
file name “AUTOLOAD_1” ~ “AUTOLOAD_9”, using the
“ALL” file type.
Once a file has been set it will be automatically loaded without
Free Memory Display having to press a keyboard key.
White Key [1] ................AUTOLD_1.R2A
If you press [UTILITY] while holding [SHIFT], the amount of White Key [2] ................AUTOLD_2.R2A
free memory will be shown while the buttons are held. The White Key [3] ................AUTOLD_3.R2A
amount of recordable memory (the amount of memory available White Key [4] ................AUTOLD_4.R2A
for recording or loading samples) may increase if the utility mode White Key [5] ................AUTOLD_5.R2A
wave memory optimize function is executed. White Key [6] ................AUTOLD_6.R2A
This will not be displayed while standing by for sequence or sam- White Key [7] ................AUTOLD_7.R2A
ple recording, or during recording. White Key [8] ................AUTOLD_8.R2A
White Key [9] ................AUTOLD_9.R2A
White Key [10] ..............Auto Load function Off
For example, if you’re working on a project but need to stop and
turn the power off for a while, save the project with the file name
“AUTOLD_1”. Then, hold the [1] white key when you turn the
power back on and the project will be automatically reloaded.
NOTE
Initializes the Master Effect settings • If a SCSI drive is connected, first a memory
card will be searched in file order, then drives
Press [MASTER] while holding [SHIFT] to initialize the cur- with SCSI IDs 0 ~ 7 will be searched in order,
rently selected master effect. and the first matching file located will be
loaded.
• The “AUTOLD_1.R2A” file is set to be loaded
Undo/Redo automatically as the factory default.
The Undo job cancels the changes made by the most recent oper-
ation, restoring the data to its previous state.
The Redo job cancels Undo and restores the changes.
Undo/Redo can be executed from any display page except Save,
Load and Edit by pressing the [JOB] button while holding the
[SHIFT] button. Undo and Redo are selected alternately each
time the [JOB] button is pressed.
NOTE
• Undo/Redo cannot be used during sequencer
playback or recording, or while the arpeggio
function is operating.
• Undo/Redo does not work with sample voice
operations.
68 RS7000
Chapter 2. The Pattern Mode
About the Pattern Mode ................................... 70

1. Pattern Playback ......................................... 72
2. Combining Phrases to Create Patterns
(Patch) .......................................................... 75
3. Phrase Recording ....................................... 77
4. Adding Groove to a Pattern ....................... 85
5. Play Effects.................................................. 87
6. MIDI Delay .................................................... 90
7. Adjusting Level and Effects
for Each Track (Mixer) ................................ 93
8. Changing the Sound of Voices
(Voice Edit) .................................................. 97
9. Adding Effects........................................... 104
10. Arpeggio & Assignable Knob Settings
(Setup)........................................................ 107
11. Master EQ and Effects .............................. 111
12. Saving to Memory Card or Disk............... 114
13. Loading From Memory Card or Disk ....... 126
14. Pattern & Phrase Editing —
The Pattern Jobs ....................................... 133
15. Phrase Editing ........................................... 154
RS7000 69
About the Pattern Mode
This mode is used to play and create patterns. Patterns can be created using up to 16 tracks. Phrases,
which make up the patterns, can also be recorded and edited in this mode. Press the [PATTERN] but-
ton to enter the PATTERN Play mode. The pattern play page display will appear on the LCD.
NOTE
PATTERN Play
For more information on patterns and phrases
see “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 59.
Sub Modes of the Pattern Mode ● Play Effects...(Page 87)

The PATTERN mode is made up of the following 15 Sub Modes.
● PATTERN Play...(Page 72)
Patterns can be selected and played. This display page always
appears first when the PATTERN mode is engaged.
● PATTERN Patch...(Page 75)
Phrases are combined to create patterns.
● MIDI Delay...(Page 90)
● Phrase Recording...(Page 77)

Original phrases can be created by recording to “user” phrases.
● Mixer...(Page 93)
Individually adjusts the volume, effect level and other parameters
for each track.
● Groove...(Page 85)
tracks. ● Voice Edit...(Page 97)
70 RS7000
● Effect...(Page 104) ● Job...(Page 133)

Sets the effects for the REVERB, DELAY/CHORUS, and VARI- Accesses the pattern and phrase editing jobs.
ATION effect stages.
● Phrase Edit...(Page 154)

● Setup...(Page 107) Allows editing or insertion of new data in recorded phrases. 2
Provides access to the arpeggiator, knob assignment, MIDI chan-
nel, and AD input setting.
The Pattern Mode

● Master...(Page 111)
Provides access to the master EQ and master effect settings.
● Save...(Page 114)
Saves data to memory card or disk.
● Load...(Page 126)
RS7000 71
1. Pattern Playback
1. Pattern Playback
Select and play patterns.

This display always appears first when the [PATTERN] button is pressed to enter the PATTERN mode.
Pattern Playback Procedure [Section Selection Procedure]

Sections A through J can also be selected via the keyboard.
Press the [KEYBOARD] button so that its indicator goes out,
1. Select the playback pattern by setting the STYLE and SEC-
then use the black keys to select the corresponding section.
TION parameters.
2. When the [PLAY] button is pressed the PLAY indicator will KEY-
BOARD
flash and pattern playback will begin.

3. Press [STOP] to stop playback.
NOTE A B C D E F G H I J
The parameters in the PATTERN Play page can

be changed during pattern playback. Changes 1 2
ALL
3
1~8 9~16
4 5 6
TR-
7
TR+
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1
made during playback are saved as pattern data.

(when MEMORY PROTECT is OFF).
The black-key indicators indicate section status as follows:

Lit ............ The corresponding section contains playback
data.
Display Parameters Flashing .. The corresponding section is selected.
Off .......... The corresponding section does not contain
playback data.
8 2
4 METER .........................................................[F1] → [Knob 1]
9 [Settings] 1/16 ~ 16/16, 1/8 ~ 16/8, 1/4 ~ 8/4
A
0 Specifies the meter (time signature) for the pattern.
Use [F1] to move the cursor to the meter parameter, and then
use [Knob 1] to set as required.
1 4 3 5 6 7 5 MEAS (Measure)
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] .......................... [Knob 3], [SHIFT]+[F3] → Numeric Keypad
[F1] [F3] [F4]
[SHIFT]+[F1] [SHIFT]+[F3] [SHIFT]+[F4]
6 LENGTH
................. [F3] → [Knob 3], [SHIFT]+[F3] → Numeric Keypad
[Settings]
1 STYLE (Style Number) Measure............001 ~ Length
...........................[Knob 1], [SHIFT]+[F1] → Numeric Keypad Length ..............001 ~ 256
MEAS shows the current measure number during playback.

2 Style Name [Knob 3] can be used to change the measure number, and
thus the playback position.
3 SECTION ................................................................[Knob 2] LENGTH shows the length of the pattern in measures.
The length of the pattern can be set by pressing [F3] to move
[Settings] the cursor to LENGTH, and then using [Knob 3].
Style Number 01 ~ 64
Style Name Display only
NOTE
Section A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
• The [ ], [ ], and [ ] buttons can also be
The pattern to be played back is selected by specifying the used to change the measures number (also
style number and section. during playback).
• Press [STOP] while holding [SHIFT] to set the
current measure as the jump location (the
NOTE measure to which the song position will jump
For more information about styles and sections when playback is stopped). The jump setting
see “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 59. can be cancelled by pressing [ ] or [ ]
while holding [SHIFT].
72 RS7000
1. Pattern Playback
7 BPM (Tempo) ......................... [Knob 4], [F4] → [Knob 4], 0 Track

[SHIFT]+[F4] → Numeric Keypad [Settings] 01 ~ 16
[Settings] 001.0 ~ 300.0 (BPM) Shows the track numbers.
Sets the pattern playback tempo. The currently selected track number is highlighted.
Use [Knob 4] to adjust the BPM in steps of 1, or press [F4] to [Track Selection Procedure]
move the cursor to the right of the decimal point and use Hold the [TRACK SELECT] button and press the white key
[Knob 4] to adjust in steps of 0.1. on the keyboard corresponding to the track to be selected.
The corresponding key indicator will flash.
NOTE The track numbers are listed above the white keys.
While the [TRACK SELECT] button is held the indicators
BPM can also be set by using the [TAP] button above the keys will light continuously, flash, or remain off to
(Page 68). indicate the status of the track, as follows: 2
Lit ............ The corresponding track contains data.
The Pattern Mode

8 OCT (Octave) Flashing... The corresponding track is selected.
Off ........... The corresponding track does not contain data.
[Settings] -5 octaves ~ +5 octaves
Shows the current octave setting of the keyboard.
Each “ ” on the display corresponds to one octave down,
and each “ ” corresponds to one octave up. TRACK
SELECT
The keyboard octave can be changed by pressing the [KEY-
BOARD] button so that its indicator lights, and then using the
Hold
[OCT DOWN] and [OCT UP] buttons to set the octave.
Press the [OCT DOWN] and [OCT UP] buttons simulta- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1
neously to restore the normal keyboard octave settings (no
octave shift). K ! L # M $ N % O & P ' Q ( R ) S - T @ U ^ V _ W { X } Y ~
9 Transpose
[Settings] -36 ~ 0 ~ +36 (semitones)
Transposes the pitch of pattern playback. NOTE
Transposition is set in semitone increments. A setting of “12”
transposes by one octave. If both the [KEYBOARD] and [MUTE] button
indicators are out, tracks can be directly
[Procedure] selected by pressing the white keys on the key-
Transposition is set by holding the [TRANSPOSE] button board.
and pressing the key on the keyboard corresponding to the The sequence in the corresponding track will
desired amount of transposition above or below the central C play while the key is held.
(track 8) key. Tracks can also be selected by using the black
While the [TRANSPOSE] button is held the middle C indica- [TR-] and [TR+] keys while holding the [TRACK
tor will light and the indicator of the selected transpose key SELECT] button.
will flash. If a black key is specified the indicators on either
side of the key will flash.
To transpose by more than an octave first press the [OCT
DOWN] or [OCT UP] button and then the keyboard.
TRACK
SELECT
TRANSPOSE
CAPS
Hold
A B C D E F G H I J
Hold
ALL 1~8 9~16 TR- TR+
A B C D E F G H I J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1
ALL 1~8 9~16 TR- TR+ K ! L # M $ N % O & P ' Q ( R ) S - T @ U ^ V _ W { X } Y ~
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 TRANSPOSE(-) TRANSPOSE(+)
RS7000 73
1. Pattern Playback
A Track Status
Indicate whether the corresponding track contains data, as
well as the mute or solo status of the track. MUTE
: The track contains sequence data.

: The track is empty. SOLO
: The track is muted (no sound will be produced by this Flashing

track).
[S]:The track is soloed (all other tracks are temporarily
muted and only this track will sound). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1
: Sample data is assigned to this track.

[Mute & Solo Setting Procedure]
1. To use the mute function first press the [MUTE] button
so that its indicator lights.
To use the solo function press the [MUTE] button while
holding the [SHIFT] button so that the indicator flashes.
• Solo
When a white key is pressed to solo a track the corre-
NOTE
sponding key indicator will flash. When a different white
While the [MUTE] button indicator is either lit or key is pressed the solo function switches o the new track
flashing, the indicators above the keyboard (only one track can be soloed at a time).
white keys will be lit, flashing, or off, indicating
the status of the tracks as follows:
Lit ................The corresponding track contains SHIFT
data. KEY-
BOARD
Flashing ......The corresponding track is muted Flashing
or soloed. ALL 1~8 9~16
SECTION
Off ...............The corresponding track does 1 2 3 4 5
not contain data. TRANSPOSE

K ! L # M $ N % O &
CAPS
TRACK
MUTE
2. Press a white key on the keyboard to mute or solo the cor-
responding track. SOLO
• Mute
When a white key is pressed to mute a track the corre- 3. When the [MUTE] button is pressed so that its indicator
sponding key indicator will flash. Additional white keys goes out the solo function is disengaged and all tracks
can be pressed to mute multiple tracks. will sound. Muted tracks will remain muted.
74 RS7000
2. Combining Phrases to Create Patterns (Patch)
Phrases can be combined to create patterns.

Pressing the [PATTERN] button alternately selects the PATTERN Play page and this page (PATTERN
Patch).
Display Parameters 4 Phrase

Displays the phrases assigned to each track. Phrase assign-
6 7 84
ment is accomplished using [Knob 1] and [Knob 2].
9
The phrase “boxes” on the display indicate the following: 2
.............A user phrase which contains no data.
0 .............The phrase is shorter than the specified
The Pattern Mode

length of the pattern.
.............The phrase is longer than the specified
length of the pattern.
1 2 3 5 .............The phrase is shorter than the specified
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] length of the pattern.
[SHIFT]+[F2] [SHIFT]+[F3]
5 PHRASE METER, PHRASE LENGTH

1 PHRASE CAT. (Phrase Category) ..............[Knob 1] Displays the meter and length in measures of the phrase
assigned to the currently selected track.
2 PHRASE NO. (Phrase Number)
...........................[Knob 2], [SHIFT]+[F2] → Numeric Keypad 6 SEC (Section)
[Settings] [Settings]
Phrase Category No Phrase, US (User) Section A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
For more information on the pre-
set phrase categories refer to Displays the currently selected section.
Appendix (Page 313).
Phrase Number 001 ~ 256 (the actual range will NOTE
depend on the selected phrase See page 72 in “1. Pattern Playback” for the
category) section selection procedure.
Select a phrase category and phrase number to assign a

phrase to the currently selected track.
7 MEAS (Measure)
NOTE 8 LENGTH
See page 72 in “1. Pattern Playback” for the MEAS displays the current measure during playback.
track selection procedure. Length is the length of the pattern in measures.
NOTE
3 NOTE SHIFT
...........................[Knob 3], [SHIFT]+[F3] → Numeric Keypad The [ ], [ ], and [ ] buttons can be used
to change the measures number (also during
[Settings] -127 ~ +127 (semitones)
playback).
Shifts the pitch of the note data in the current phrase up or
down in semitone increments.
NOTE
If a phrase which uses a drum kit voice is note-
shifted, the drum instrument sounds will
change.
RS7000 75
9 Track 9. To adjust the BPM, press [PATTERN] to return to the PAT-

TERN Play mode and use [Knob 4](BPM) to adjust as
Track numbers. required.
The currently selected track number is highlighted.
10. Use the SUB MODE buttons (GROOVE … SETUP) to set
other parameters as required (refer to the respective SUB
NOTE MODE sections of the manual).
See page 72 in “1. Pattern Playback” for the
track selection procedure.
0 Track Status
Indicate whether the corresponding track contains data, as
well as the status of the track.
: Sample data is assigned to this track.
: The track is muted (no sound will be produced by this
track).
muted and only this track will sound).
NOTE
See page 72 in “1. Pattern Playback” for the
mute and solo setting procedure.
Pattern Assembly Procedure
1. Use the [UTILITY] MODE button to access the SYSTEM

page, then use [Knob 4](MEMORY PROTECT) to turn
MEMORY PROTECT “OFF” (Page 257).
2. Press [PATTERN] button to go to the PATTERN Play page,
and set the STYLE and SECTION parameters to select the
pattern you want to create.
You can give the style a name, if required (Page 153).
3. Press [F3] to move the cursor to the LENGTH parameter, and
use [Knob 3](LENGTH) to set the length of the pattern.
4. Press [F1] to move the cursor to the METER parameter, and
use [Knob 1](METER) to select the desired meter.
5. Press the [PATTERN] button again to go to the PATTERN
Patch page.
6. Select a track to which you want to assign a phrase (Page 67).
7. Use [Knob 1](PHRASE CAT.) and [Knob 2](PHRASE NO.)
to select the phrase to be assigned to the selected track. Press
[PLAY] to hear the phrases during selection.
8. If necessary use [Knob 3](NOTE SHIFT) to set a note-shift
value for the current phrase.
76 RS7000
3. Phrase Recording
3. Phrase Recording
Create original phrases by recording performance data to user phrases.

Three recording modes are available: real-time recording, step recording, and grid-step recording.
NOTE
Before beginning recording, make sure that the UTILITY mode MEMORY PROITECT function is “OFF”
(Page 257). Recording is not possible when memory protection is turned on.
2
The Phrase Recording Display Real-time Record: Overdub...(Page 80)
The Pattern Mode

This mode allows material to be added to existing material on
a track. Previous performance data will not be erased. This
Phrase Recording has the following display pages. makes it easy to create parts by recording them a little at a
● Record Standby (PATTERN Play)...(Page 78) time.
This page is used to prepare for recording performance data to ● Step Record...(Page 80)
the currently selected phrase. This mode allows notes to be entered one at a time. Step record-
Parameters such as loop recording, the recording type, and record ing makes it easy to create user phrases even if you can’t play the
quantize are accessible via this page. phrase in real time.
Notes are entered by first specifying the note type, and then the
note pitch via the keyboard.
● Record Standby (PATTERN Patch)...(Page 79)

This page is used to prepare for recording performance data to a
phrase. ● Grid Step Record...(Page 83)
Voice selection and transposition can be carried out via this page. As in the Step record mode, notes are entered one at a time. After
specifying the note’s pitch, the note is entered at the grid position
(timing) specified by the keyboard.
This method is particularly useful when entering drums and
sequenced phrases which use consecutive notes of the same pitch.
● Real-time Record...(Page 80)

This recording mode allows notes played via the RS7000 and
variations applied via the assignable knobs, as well as perfor-
mance data from external MIDI devices, to be recorded in real
time. Recording can be carried out while monitoring playback of
other tracks.
Real-time Record: Replace...(Page 80)

Any previous data in the recorded track will be erased (over-
written) and replaced by the new performance data. This is
handy when you need to re-record the same part several
times.
RS7000 77
3. Phrase Recording
Record Standby 1 REC LOOP (Record Loop) ............................ [Knob 1]

[Settings] ON, OFF
Prepare to record to the currently selected user phrase. Turns loop recording ON or OFF.
When ON, the phrase will play repeatedly during real-time
recording. This can be handy when recording drums parts, for
Record Standby Procedure example, in which you want to add different instruments on
each pass.
1. Press [PATTERN] to engage the PATTERN Play mode. When OFF recording stops after one pass through the phrase.
2. Select the pattern for which a phrase is to be recorded.
2 REC TYPE (Record Type) ............................. [Knob 2]
3. Select an empty track by using the white keyboard keys while
holding the [TRACK SELECT] button. [Settings] REPLACE, OVERDUB, STEP, GRIDSTEP
4. Press the [REC] button to go to the Rec Standby display. If Selects the record mode.
the PATTERN Play page is showing when the [REC] button For more details on each record mode see “3. Phrase Record-
is pressed the PATTERN Play Rec Standby page will appear. ing” on the previous page.
If the PATTERN Patch page is showing when the [REC] but-
ton is pressed the PATTERN Patch Rec Standby page will 3 REC QUANTIZE (Record Quantize) ......... [Knob 3],
appear. [F3]→[Knob 3], [SHIFT]+[F3] → Numeric Keypad
[Settings]
VALUE
Display Parameters
OFF, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet),
120 th
(16 note), 160 th
(8 note triplet),
Record Standby (PATTERN Play)
240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)
REC TYPE = REPLACE or OVERDUB
SWING
5 OFF when VALUE = OFF
50% ~ 75% when VALUE = 60 , 120 , 240 ,
480
66% ~ 83% when VALUE = 80 , 160 , 320
Record quantize aligns the timing of notes which are not

exactly on the beat on-the-fly as you record.
The record quantize parameters can be set in the Rec Standby
1 2 3 4
mode when the REPLACE or OVERDUB record type is
[F3] [F4] selected.
[SHIFT]+[F3] [SHIFT]+[F4] The quantize VALUE parameter specifies the note timing to
which the nearest recorded notes will be aligned.
The quantize SWING parameter specifies by how much the
timing of notes on even-numbered beats (back beats) will be
delayed to create a swing feel. When a triplet VALUE is
REC TYPE = STEP specified, the last note of each triplet is affected by the
SWING parameter.
Quarter note
back beats length back beats
Original timing
6 Quantize value
[Knob 3] (Swing Rate = 50%)
Quantize value
(Swing Rate = 60%)
To adjust the SWING parameter, press [F3] to move the cur-

sor to SWING, then use [Knob 3] to adjust.
78 RS7000
3. Phrase Recording
NOTE Record Standby (PATTERN Patch)
• When the OVERDUB record type is selected,

quantization will also be applied to the exist-
ing data in the track.
The first playback, however, will not be
affected (quantization will be applied, how-
ever).
• When record quantize is not OFF, quantiza- 1 2 3
tion is applied to all controller data in addition [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3]
to the note data. Use the Quantize job to [F1]
quantize only the note data. [SHIFT]+[F1] [SHIFT]+[F2]
1 BANK (Voice Bank) ............. [Knob 1], [F1] → [Knob 1], 2

4 BPM (Tempo) .........................[Knob 4], [F4] → [Knob 4], [SHIFT]+[F1] → Numeric Keypad
The Pattern Mode

[SHIFT]+[F4] → Numeric Keypad
This parameter has the same effect as in the PATTERN Play 2 PGM (Program Number)
mode. See page 72 for details. .......................... [Knob 2], [SHIFT]+[F2] → Numeric Keypad
[Settings]
5 LENGTH Voice Bank (Bank Select MSB, LSB)
This parameter specifies the length of the phrase to be recorded in *** *** (Phrase), 000 000 (GM),
measures. 063 000 (SyBa&Ld), 063 001 (SyPd&Fx1),
This parameter cannot be set in the Rec Standby mode. Be sure to 063 002 (SyMater1), 063 003 (BandInst),
set the LENGTH parameter in the PATTERN Play mode before 063 004 (Cls&Wind), 063 005 (Eth&Perc),
engaging Rec Standby. 063 006 (SFX1), 063 007 (SyBa&Ld2),
NOTE 063 008 (SyPd&FX2), 063 009 (SFX2),
For example, to create a 1-measure phrase that 064 000 (SmpLocal), 064 001 (SmpCmn),
will repeat during an 8-measure pattern, do the 126 000 (DrumKit), 127 000 (GM Drum)
following: Program Number
1. In the PATTERN Play mode set the LENGTH 001 ~ 128 (depends on the voice bank)
to 1.
2. Record the new phrase. Selects a voice for the phrase to be recorded.
3. In the PATTERN Play mode set the LENGTH Voice banks organize voices in voice-type categories, and are
back to 8. selected using MIDI bank select MSB and LSB data. For
more details on voice banks refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”,
page 61.
6 EVENT TYPE ........................................................[Knob 3] The program number parameter selects the individual voices
in each bank.
When the STEP record type is selected this parameter specifies To access the BANK LSB, press [F1] to move the cursor to
the type of event to be recorded. the LSB value then use [Knob 1] to adjust.
[Settings] NOTE, PITCH BEND, CC[000] ~ CC[119]
Specifies the type of data to be recorded. NOTE
When NOTE is selected notes data is recorded.
When PITCH BEND is selected pitch bend change data is The voice selected here is used when the voice
recorded. bank parameter in the PATTERN mode MIXER
When CC[000] ~ CC[119] is selected, the corresponding display (Page 93) is set to “Phrase”.
control change data is recorded: volume, pan, expression, etc.
For CC[000] ~ CC[119], select the control number of the data
(volume, pan, expression, etc.) that you wish to record. Only 3 TRNS ON/OFF (Transpose ON/OFF) ........ [Knob 3]
when inputting the control change number, you can use [Settings] ON, OFF
[SHIFT] + [F3] for numeric key input.
Determines whether transpose setting changes will affect the
phrase to be recorded.
When ON, transpose setting changes will transpose the
recorded data.
When OFF, transpose setting changes will not affect the
recorded data.
It is a good idea to turn this parameter OFF when recording
drum phrases or other phrases you do not want to be trans-
posed.
RS7000 79
3. Phrase Recording
12. Stop recording and return to the PATTERN Play (or PAT-
Real-Time Recording TERN Patch) mode by pressing the [STOP] button.
Real-time recording allows anything played on the RS7000 key-

NOTE
board, operation of the assignable knobs, and data received from
an external MIDI controller to be recorded in real time. Pressing [JOB] while holding [SHIFT] directly
In this section we’ll look at the real-time REPLACE or OVER- accesses the “00 Undo/Redo” phrase job (Page
DUB recording procedure. 68, Page 134), allowing the previous record
operation to be undone. This is useful if, for
example, you’ve accidentally erased material
Record Procedure (REPLACE, OVERDUB) on a track you wanted to keep by recording in
the REPLACE mode.
1. Press [PATTERN] to enter the PATTERN Play mode.
2. Specify a style and section to select the pattern for which the
phrase is to be recorded (Page 72). Step Recording
3. Press [PATTERN] to switch to the PATTERN Patch mode.
4. Select a track and a user phrase (Page 75).
User phrase notes, pitch bend data and control change data can be
recorded step-by-step.
5. Press [REC] to engage the Rec Standby mode (PATTERN
Patch).
6. Use [Knob 1](BANK) and [Knob 2](PGM) to select a voice Record Procedure
for the phrase.
If necessary also use [Knob 3](TRANS ON/OFF) to turn
transposition ON or OFF.
7. Press [PATTERN] to switch to the PATTERN Play Rec
phrase is to be recorded (Page 72).
Standby mode.
8. Use [Knob 2](REC TYPE) to select the REPLACE or
OVERDUB record type. 4. Select a track and a user phrase (Page 75).
Use [Knob1](REC LOOP) to turn the REC LOOP parameter 5. Press [REC] to engage the Rec Standby mode (PATTERN
ON or OFF, as required. Also use [Knob 3](REC QUAN- Patch).
TIZE) and [F3] to set up record quantize, and [Knob 6. Use [Knob 1](BANK) and [Knob 2](PGM) to select a voice
4](BPM) to set the BPM as required. for the phrase.
9. Press [PLAY] and begin recording after the count-in. If necessary also use [Knob 3](TRANS ON/OFF) to turn
10. Play the part on the keyboard and assignable knobs. transposition ON or OFF.
11. Tracks can be switched during recording. 7. Press [PATTERN] to switch to the PATTERN Play Rec
Standby mode.
NOTE 8. Use [Knob 2](REC TYPE) to select the STEP record type.
• If REC LOOP is ON, the phrase being 9. Use [Knob 3](EVENT TYPE) to select the type of data you
recorded will continue to loop until the [STOP] want to record: notes, pitch bend, or control change.
button is pressed. 10. Press [PLAY] and the Step Rec display will appear.
• Mistakes can be “erased” by holding the
[SHIFT] button and pressing the key corre- ● Recording Notes
sponding to the note or instrument you want 11. Use [Knob 1](POINTER) to move the pointer to the position
to erase. at which you want to enter a note, [Knob 2](STEP) to set the
• Assignable knob data can also be erased by note length, [Knob 3](VELOCITY) to set the note velocity,
holding the [SHIFT] button and operating the and [Knob 4](GATE TIME) to set the gate time.
appropriate knob. The knob data is erased 12. Enter the note by pressing the appropriate key on the key-
from the point at which the [SHIFT] button is board.
held and the knob operated until the [SHIFT] Press [F1](REST) to enter a rest, or [F2](TIE) to enter a tie.
button is released. The [F3] (DELETE) and [F4] (BACK DELETE) buttons can
be used to delete entered notes.
80 RS7000
3. Phrase Recording
NOTE Display Parameters

If you press the [PLAY] button the [PLAY] indi-
cator will flash and you will be able to hear how
When “NOTE” has been selected via the EVENT knob
your step-recorded phrase is shaping up. Press
[STOP] to stop playback and continue entering 2
notes in the step mode.
1
TERN Patch) mode by pressing the [STOP] button.
NOTE 6 7 8 9 2
[F1] [F2] [F3] [F4]
In the step recording mode notes are actually 2 3 4 5
entered when the keys are released. So when [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]
The Pattern Mode

entering chords be sure to press all notes you [SHIFT]+[F1] [SHIFT]+[F2] [SHIFT]+[F3] [SHIFT]+[F4]
want to enter before releasing the keys.
When the EVENT type is not “NOTE”
● Recording Pitch Bend or Control Change Data

11. Use [Knob 1](POINTER) to move the pointer to the position
at which you want to enter the data, [Knob 2](STEP) to set
the data step size, and [Knob 3](VALUE) to set the value.
12. Enter the specified data by pressing a key on the keyboard.
All keys have the same effect except when “KEYBOARD” is
selected by [Knob 3](VALUE), in which case the value
entered depends on the key pressed. 0
Press [F1](REST) to enter a rest. The [F3] (DELETE) and [Knob 3]
[F4] (BACK DELETE) buttons can be used to delete entered [SHIFT]+[F3]
notes.
13. Press the [PLAY] button to hear how your step-recorded
phrase is progressing. Press [STOP] to stop playback. 1 Beat Graph
14. Stop recording and return to the PATTERN Play (or PAT- This is the display in which notes are “placed” during step
TERN Patch) mode by pressing the [STOP] button. recording.
When the meter is 4/4, the display is divided into 4 beats (one
NOTE measure). Each diamond-shaped marker in the display repre-
sents 1 32nd beat (each 1/4 note division is divided into 8
When you need to make large value changes
32nd beats).
rotate a knob while holding the [SHIFT] button
For example, if the following rhythmic pattern
to change values in increments of 10 rather
than 1. is entered in 4/4 time the display will
appear like the one shown below.
2 POINTER ...... [Knob 1], [SHIFT]+[F1] → Numeric Keypad

[Settings] 001:01:000 ~ Pattern Length
Sets the data-entry position.
The triangular pointer above the beat graph indicates the
data-entry position.
Rotating the [knob 1] causes the pointer to move left or right,
accordingly.
RS7000 81
3. Phrase Recording
3 STEP 7 TIE .................................................................................... [F2]

(Step Time) ...[Knob 2], [SHIFT]+[F2] → Numeric Keypad When [F2] is pressed to enter a tie the preceding note is length-
[Settings] ened to the full step time. For example, in the following phrase
Settings made via the knob note 1 is entered with 1/4 note step time. If the step time is then
0001 ~ 0059, 32nd note , 16th note triplet , changed to an 8th note and [F2] is pressed, note 2 is entered.
16th note , 8th note triplet , 8th note ,
1/4 note triplet , 1/4 note , half note , 1 2
whole note
Settings made via the numeric keypad
0001 ~ 9999 clocks
Specifies the length of the note or rest to be entered.

When the PB or CC event type is selected this parameter Dotted notes can also be entered using the TIE function. To pro-
specifies the step time: duce a dotted 1/4 note, for example, enter the step time to an 8th
the size of the step the pointer will move to the next position note, then press [F2] twice.
after an event is entered.
4 VELOCITY .....[Knob 3], [SHIFT]+[F3] → Numeric Keypad

[Settings] 001 ~ 127, RND1 ~ RND4 (random)
8 DELETE .......................................................................... [F3]
Specifies the velocity value with which the note will be
Deletes all notes at the current pointer position.
entered.
Use [Knob1] (POINTER) while holding [F3] to delete all notes at
The set value (1 ~ 127) corresponds to the MIDI velocity
the pointer positions.
value entered.
When one of the random settings is selected (RND1 ~
9 BACK DELETE ........................................................... [F4]
RND4) a random velocity value will be entered.
RND1 ~ RND4 can be set by using [SHIFT] + [F3] → Moves the pointer backward by one step and deletes all notes
Numeric keypad to enter 128 ~ 131. at that location.
5 GATE TIME ...[Knob 4], [SHIFT]+[F4] → Numeric Keypad

NOTE
[Settings] 001% ~ 200%
Mistakenly entered notes can be erased by
Sets the gate time to produce slurs, staccato notes, etc. pressing [F4] immediately after they are entered
“Gate time” refers to the actual length of time the note (before changing the step time value).
sounds. For the same 1/4 note, for example, a long gate time
will produce a slur while a short gate time will produce a
staccato effect. 0 VALUE............. [Knob3], [SHIFT]+[F3] → Numeric Keypad
Gate time is indicated as a percent value of the step time. [Settings]
A setting of 50% produces a staccato sound, values between When the EVENT TYPE is PITCH BEND
about 80% and 90% produce normal note length, and a value
-8192 ~ +8191, KEYBOARD
of 99% will produce a slur.
When the EVENT TYPE is CC
000 ~ 127, KEYBOARD
6 REST ................................................................................[F1]
Press [F1] to enter a rest as long as the specified step time. The Sets the value of the data to be entered.
point will move ahead to the next data-entry position. Rests do When KEYBOARD is selected the value can directly entered
not appear on the display. via the RS7000 keyboard.
[Procedure]
NOTE When the EVENT TYPE is PITCH BEND
There is no actual data representing rests. The pitch bend values from -8192 through +8191 are
When a “rest” is entered the pointer simply assigned to the keyboard.
moves ahead to the next data-entry position, Pressing the leftmost white key (E) while holding the
effectively leaving a rest. [OCT UP] button enters ±0000, and each key to the right
of this increases the value by 341 (semitone steps) until
+8191 is reached at the high E key (the second from right-
most white key).
82 RS7000
3. Phrase Recording
OCT OCT A B C D E F G H I J
DOWN UP TAP
ALL 1~8 9~16 TR- TR+ PAD ASSIGN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Hold
000 127
Increases by 5 or 6 with each semitone.
A B C D E F G H I J TAP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Grid Step Recording
±0000 Like step recording, grid step recording allows notes to be

Each semitone increases the value by 341
+8191
recorded to a user phrase one at a time. With grid step recording, 2
however, the pitch of the notes to be entered is specified first, and
Operation when the [OCT DOWN] key is held is the the data-entry position is specified via the keyboard. This method
The Pattern Mode

opposite: the high E key enters ±0000, and each key to is particularly useful for entering drum patterns or sequences
the left of this lowers the value by ±341 until -8192 is which use several consecutive notes of the same pitch.
reached at the leftmost white key.
OCT OCT
DOWN UP
Record Procedure
Hold
phrase is to be recorded (Page 72).

4. Select a track and a user phrase (Page 75).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5. Press [REC] to engage the Rec Standby mode (PATTERN
Patch).
-8192 ±0000
Each semitone decreases the value by 341. 6. Use [Knob 1](BANK) and [Knob 2](PGM) to select a voice
for the phrase. If necessary use [Knob 3](TRANS ON/OFF)
When the keyboard only is used, the SECTION H (middle to turn transposition ON or OFF.
C) white key corresponds to ±0000, while each semitone 7. Press [PATTERN] to switch to the PATTERN Play Rec
to the right of this key adds approximately 341, and each Standby mode.
semitone to the left subtracts the same amount. The sec- 8. Use [Knob 2] to select the GRID record type.
ond white key from the right produces a value of +4096,
9. Press [PLAY] and the Grid Step record display will appear.
and the leftmost white key produces a value of -4096.
10. Set the pitch of the notes to be entered via [Knob 1](NOTE).
A B C D E F G H I J
If necessary also use [Knob 2](GATE TIME) to set the gate
TAP
ALL 1~8 9~16 TR- TR+ PAD ASSIGN time and [Knob 3](VELOCITY) to set the note velocity.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
11. Use the keyboard to specify the note-entry point on the grid.
The grid divides a measure into 16th note divisions, and the
-4096 ±0000 +4096 16 white keys on the keyboard correspond to each of these
Each semitone Each semitone grid positions.
decreases the value increases the value The leftmost white key enters a note on the first beat of the
by 341 by 341 measure, the 5th white key (B) enters a note right on the 2nd
beat, and so on.
A note is entered on the grid each time a white key is pressed
When the EVENT TYPE is CC and its indicator lights. Press the same white key a second
The control change values from 000 through 127 are time so that its indicator goes out to erase the note at that
assigned to the keyboard. position.
The leftmost white key (E) enters 000, and each key to the
right increases the value by 5 or 6 until 127 is reached at
the high E key (the second from rightmost white key).
RS7000 83
3. Phrase Recording
When the selected meter has more than 4 beats per measure 2 GATE TIME .. [Knob 2], [SHIFT]+[F2] → Numeric Keypad
(5/4, for example), notes fro the 5th beat onward can be [Settings] 001% ~ 999%
entered after pressing the [OCT UP] button. Press [OCT
DOWN] to go back to beats 1 through 4. Sets the gate time as a percentage of the grid’s 16th note
For example, this rhythmic pattern in 4/4 time can be entered steps.
Settings below 99% result in note lengths shorter than full
as follows ( ).
16th notes, producing a staccato effect.
Settings higher than 101% increase the note length so that the
16th notes will overlap subsequent notes.
1 2
ALL
3
1~8 9~16
4 5 6
TR-
7
TR+
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PAD ASSIGN
16
3 VELOCITY .... [Knob 3], [SHIFT]+[F3] → Numeric Keypad
Has the same effect as the step recording parameter. Refer to
page 82 in the “Step Record” section for details.
4 BPM (Tempo)
..................[Knob 4], [F4], [SHIFT]+[F4] → Numeric Keypad
Has the same effect as the pattern play parameter. Refer to
page 72 in the “Pattern Playback” section for details.
When the phrase being recorded is more than 2 measures
long, Use the [ ] button to move to the next measure.
12. If you press the [PLAY] button the [PLAY] indicator will
flash and you will be able to hear how your grid-recorded
phrase is shaping up. Press [STOP] to stop playback.
TERN Patch) mode by pressing the [STOP] button.
Display Parameters
1 2 3 4
[F4]
[SHIFT]+[F1] [SHIFT]+[F2] [SHIFT]+[F3] [SHIFT]+[F4]
1 NOTE ...............[Knob 1], [SHIFT]+[F1] → Numeric Keypad

[Settings] C-2 ~ G8
Specifies the pitch of the notes to be entered.
In addition to using [Knob 1], the pitch can be specified by
pressing a key on the keyboard while holding the [SHIFT]
button.
84 RS7000
4. Adding Groove to a Pattern
The GROOVE function can be used to add feel and groove to patterns.
This is accomplished by varying note timing, gate time, and velocity on an easy-to-use grid. By using
the GROOVE function you can vary the feel of the preset phrases as well as your own. Give dry-sound-
ing patterns more drive, and in general make your grooves more musical.
Press the [GROOVE] button while in the PATTERN Play or Patch mode to access the Grid Groove dis-
play page.
● The groove settings for all 16 tracks are memorized

Groove Features
with the style.
2
No extra save procedure is necessary. Your groove settings
● Pitch, note timing, gate time, and velocity can be
The Pattern Mode

are saved with the style data and are automatically recalled
varied to change the groove of your patterns with- whenever a style is selected.
out actually changing the original data. If MEMORY PROTECT is ON, however (Page 257), the
groove settings will not be saved and will be erased when a
TONE
different style is selected.
PHRASE DATA GRID GROOVE GENERATOR
Grid Groove Procedure

● Parameter changes affect playback in real time, so
you can tweak the groove of your patterns while
1. Press [GROOVE] while in the PATTERN Play or Patch mode
monitoring the results to achieve precisely the feel
to access the Grid Groove display page.
you want.
2. Press a key on the keyboard while holding the [TRACK
● Add groove to the preset phrases. SELECT] button to select the track to which groove is to be
Although the preset phrases cannot be directly altered, you applied.
can use Grid Groove to indirectly change the way they sound.
3. Press a white key on the keyboard to select the grid segment
● Groove settings can be applied to the pattern data to be edited.
when complete. The grid is divided into 16th note segments which are selected
Groove settings can be applied to pattern data in two ways: by pressing the corresponding white keys on the keyboard.
• By using the PATTERN JOB “Normalize Effect” job The leftmost white key corresponds to the first beat of the
(Page 150). measure, the 5th white key to the 2nd 1/4 note beat, and so on.
• By using the real-time OVERDUB record mode (Page 80). Press the same key again to de-select the segment.
When a key is pressed the corresponding grid segment is
NOTE highlighted.
More than one segment can be selected at a time for simul-
The real-time OVERDUB record mode cannot taneous groove editing. If several segments are selected you
be used if a preset phrase is assigned to the can select a single segment only by pressing the appropriate
selected track. In this case first copy the preset key while holding the [SHIFT] button.
phrase to a user phrase and assign that phrase
to the track. NOTE
The selected segment is indicated both by the
keyboard indicators and on the display. In the
● Different groove settings can be made for each
example below the 3rd 1/4 note beat is selected
track.
for editing.
You can, for example, apply different groove settings to bass
drum and snare tracks.
RS7000 85
4. Press [PLAY] to begin playback and use [Knob 1] through 5 TR (Track)

[Knob 4] to adjust the groove parameters as required. [Settings] TR01 ~ 16
5. Press [EXIT] to return to the PATTERN Play or Patch mode.
Specifies the track to which the groove settings are to be
applied.
NOTE See “Pattern Playback”, page 72, for the track selection pro-
When you need to make large value changes rotate a cedure.
knob while holding the [SHIFT] button to change val-
ues in increments of 10 rather than 1.
Recording the Groove Settings to a Phrase
Using the Overdub Record Mode
Display Parameters
If a user phrase is assigned to the track to which groove has been
applied, the following procedure can be used to actually record
5 the groove settings to the track.
1. Set up the GROOVE parameters as required.
2. Press [PATTERN] to go to the PATTERN Play page.
3. Press [REC] to engage the Rec Standby mode.
4. Use [Knob 2](REC TYPE) to select the OVERDUB record
type.
5. Use [Knob 3](REC QUANTIZE) to set the REC QUANTIZE
1 2 3 4 value to “OFF” (OFF).
6. Press [PLAY] to begin recording.
7. When the entire phrase has played through once, press the
1 NOTE OFFSET .......................................... [Knob 1] [STOP] button to stop recording.
[Settings] -99 ~ +99 The groove settings have now been recorded along with the
phrase, and the groove settings for that track are initialized.
Shifts the notes on the selected grid segment(s) up or down in
semitone increments.
NOTE
2 CLOCK SHIFT ........................................... [Knob 2] • Please note that during this process any keys
[Settings] -120 ~ +120 played on the keyboard, panel knob opera-
tions, or data received from an external MIDI
Shifts the timing of notes on the selected grid segment(s) controller will also be recorded.
backward or forward in clock increments. • If MEMORY PROTECT is ON, “Memory Pro-
tected” will appear on the display when you
3 GATE OFFSET .......................................... [Knob 3] press the [REC] button and the Rec Standby
[Settings] -120 ~ +120 mode will not be engaged. If this happens go
to the UTILITY mode and turn MEMORY
Increases or decreases the gate time of notes on the selected PROTECT OFF (Page 257) and then con-
grid segment(s) in clock increments. tinue from step 2 of the above procedure.
4 VELO OFFSET (Velocity Offset)............. [Knob 4]

[Settings] -127 ~ +127
Increases or decreases the velocity of notes on the selected
grid segment(s).
86 RS7000
5. Play Effects
5. Play Effects
Play effects can be used to temporarily alter parameters such as gate time and velocity, or to add
effects such as harmony to enhance the richness and depth of the sound during pattern playback.
Play effects are set and applied via this sub mode. Three display pages are provided: Harmonize, Note,
and Timing.
Press [PLAY FX] while in the PATTERN Play or Patch mode to access the play effects.
Play Effect Features Be sure that whatever effect you use, the maximum 62 note
polyphony of the RS7000 is not exceeded. For more informa-
tion on maximum polyphony refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”,
2
● Play effects allow you to temporarily alter note tim- page 62.
ing, gate time, and velocity without actually chang-
The Pattern Mode

ing of overwriting the original pattern data. You can ● Different play effect settings can be made for each
also add effects such as unison, octave, and har- track.
monize for thicker textures. ● The play effect settings for all 16 tracks are memo-
rized with the style.
TONE
No extra save procedure is necessary. Your play effect set-
PHRASE DATA PLAY FX GENERATOR tings are saved with the style data and are automatically
recalled whenever a style is selected.
If MEMORY PROTECT is ON, however (Page 257), the
● Parameter changes affect playback in real time, so play effect settings will not be saved and will be erased when
you can tweak the groove of your patterns while a different style is selected.
monitoring the results to achieve precisely the feel
you want.
● Add play affects to the preset phrases. Play Effect Procedure
Although the preset phrases cannot be directly altered, you
can use play effects to indirectly change the way they sound. 1. Press [PLAY FX] while in the PATTERN Play or Patch mode
to access the Harmonize page.
● Play effect settings can be applied to the pattern
data when complete. 2. Press a key on the keyboard while holding the [TRACK
Play effect settings can be applied to pattern data in two SELECT] button to select the track to which play effects are
ways: to be applied.
• By using the PATTERN JOB “Normalize Effect” job 3. Use [Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4] to make the required settings.
(Page 150). 4. Press [PLAY FX] to go to the Note page.
• By using the real-time OVERDUB record mode (Page 80).
5. Use [Knob 1] ~ [Knob 3] to make the required settings.
6. Press [PLAY FX] to go to the Timing page.
NOTE
The play effects settings cannot be recorded to 8. Use the [EXIT] to move back through the Note and Harmo-
preset phrases. To permanently apply the play nize pages, and finally to return to the PATTERN Play (or
effect changes to a preset phrase, first copy the Patch) mode.
phrase to a user phrase and assign the new user
phrase to the track to which the play effects are NOTE
to be applied, then use the play effects recording
• When you need to make large value changes
procedure described on this page.
than 1.
● Unison, octave, and harmonize effects use polyph-
• Using the three SEQUENCE PLAY FX knobs
ony.
you can directly edit the corresponding
The octave and harmonize 1/2 effects use up one note each (2
parameters on the Note and Timing pages
notes when a 2-element voice is used). Unison uses up the
(except NOTE OFFSET).
number of notes set by the unison setting (or twice the num-
ber of notes when a 2-element voice is used).
For example, if the unison effect is set to “8” the effect will
use up 8 (or 16) simultaneous notes.
RS7000 87
5. Play Effects
Display Parameters 1 NOTE OFFSET .......................................... [Knob 1]

[Settings] -99 ~ +99
[1] Harmonize Page
Shifts the notes in the phrase or down in semitone incre-
ments.
[PATTERN] → [PLAY FX]
2 GATE TIME ............................................... [Knob 2]

[Settings] 000% ~ 200%
Alters the gate time of notes in the phrase by the specified
percentage.
1 2 3 4
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] Original Data
(Gate Time = 100%) (Gate)
1 UNISON ...................................................................[Knob 1]
Gate Time = 50% (Gate)
[Settings] OFF, ×2, ×3, ×4, ×5, ×6, ×7, ×8
Plays a unison phrase which has the same notes and timing as
the data recorded in the target phrase. Gate Time = 200% (Gate)
The unison phrase will be slightly out-of-phase in relation to
the original phrase, and thus produce a “thickening” flanging
type effect.
NOTE
2 OCTAVER ..............................................................[Knob 2] If the resultant gate time is less than zero, it will
[Settings] -10 ~ -1, OFF, +1 ~ +10 be set to 1.
Creates and plays a phrase the specified number of octaves
above or below the original phrase data.
3 VELOCITY (Velocity Offset) ......................... [Knob 3]
3 HARMONIZE 1 .......................................... [Knob 3] [Settings] -127 ~ +127
Increases or decreases the velocity of notes in the phrase by
4 HARMONIZE 2 .....................................................[Knob 4] the specified offset value.
[Settings] -99 ~ -1, OFF, +1 ~ +99
Adds a harmonized phrase to the recorded phrase data to cre-
ate a rich, harmony sound. Two harmonize effects can be Original Data (Vel)
96 64 48 32
used simultaneously to create an even thicker sound.
(Vel)
Velocity Offset = -20 76 44 28 12
[2] Note Page
[PATTERN] → [PLAY FX] × 2 Velocity Offset = +20

(Vel)
116 84 68 52
NOTE
If the resultant velocity value is less than zero it
will be set to 1, and if the resultant velocity is
greater than 128 it will be set to 127.
1 2 3
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3]
88 RS7000
5. Play Effects
[3] Timing Page 3 SWING .................................................................... [Knob 3]

[Settings] -120 ~ +120
[PATTERN] → [PLAY FX] × 3
Delays the timing of the back (even-numbered) 8th notes in
the phrase in clock increments.
Recording the Play Effect Settings to a

Phrase Using the Overdub Record Mode
1 2 3 If a user phrase is assigned to the track to which play effects have
been applied, the following procedure can be used to actual
record the play effect settings to the track.
2
1. Set up the PLAY FX parameters as required.
1 BEAT STRETCH..................................................[Knob 1]
The Pattern Mode

2. Press [PATTERN] to go to the PATTERN Play page.
[Settings] 25%, 33%, 50%, 66%, 75%, 100%, 125%,
150%, 200%, 300%, 400% 3. Press [REC] to engage the Rec Standby mode.
4. Use [Knob 2](REC TYPE) to select the OVERDUB record
Shortens or lengthens the phrase by the specified percentage.
type.
The amount by which the phrase is shortened or lengthened is
determined as a percentage of the notes on which the meter of 5. Press [PLAY] to begin recording.
the phrase is based. Simply, a setting of 50% shortens the 6. When the entire phrase has played through once, press the
phrase to half its original length, while a setting of 200% [STOP] button to stop recording.
lengthens the phrase to twice its original length. A setting of The play effect settings have now been recorded along with the
100% produces no change. phrase, and the play effect settings for that track are initialized.
2 CLOCK SHIFT ......................................................[Knob 2]

NOTE
[Settings] -480 ~ +480
• Please note that during process any keys
Shifts the timing on notes in the phrase forward or backward played on the keyboard, panel knob opera-
in clock increments. tions, or data received from an external MIDI
controller will also be recorded.
Original Data • If MEMORY PROTECT is ON, “Memory Pro-
Quarter note length tected” will appear on the display when you
press the [REC] button and the Rec Standby
Clock Shift = +480 mode will not be engaged.
If this happens go to the UTILITY mode and
turn MEMORY PROTECT OFF (Page 257)
Clock Shift = -480 and then continue from step 2 of the above
procedure.
NOTE
Notes cannot be shifted to a position that is
before the beginning of the phrase.
If a clock shift setting results in notes being
positioned before the beginning of the phrase,
those notes will all be aligned with the begin-
ning of the phrase.
In the example below, if the clock shift parame-
ters is set to -480 (one 1/4 note) the first three
8th notes will all become grouped at the begin-
ning of the pattern.
1:1:000 2:1:000 1:1:000 2:1:000
Clock Shift = -480
These three notes will become A Chord

grouped at the first beat.
RS7000 89
6. MIDI Delay
6. MIDI Delay
This sub mode can be used to apply a special MIDI delay effect to a pattern.
MIDI delay works by creating a copy of the original data which plays back several times slightly after
the original data, thus simulating the sound of a normal delay effect. MIDI delay has some special fea-
tures which aren’t available with standard delay effects, however.
Two display pages are provided: Delay and Feedback.
From the PATTERN Play or Patch mode press the [MIDI DELAY] button to access the MIDI delay pages.
MIDI Delay Features ● Different MIDI delay settings can be made for each
track.
● Unlike conventional delay effects, MIDI delay works ● The MIDI delay settings for all 16 tracks are memo-
by adding MIDI data which means that the pitch, rized with the style.
velocity, and gate time of the delay sound can be No extra save procedure is necessary. Your MIDI delay set-
freely controlled, and special feedback clock varia- tings are saved with the style data and are automatically
tions can be applied. recalled whenever a style is selected.
For example. The pitch of the delay sound can be raised or If MEMORY PROTECT is ON, however (Page 257), the
lowered in semitone or whole-tone increments, or the volume MIDI delay settings will not be saved and will be erased
of the delay can be gradually increased or decreased. Feed- when a different style is selected.
back clock control allows, for example, the delay time to be ● MIDI delay settings can be applied to the pattern
gradually shortened or lengthened. data when complete.
● Since MIDI delay uses the MIDI clock as the basis There are 2 ways to do this:
for all delay times it is easy to create precise note- • By using the PATTERN JOB “Normalize Effect” job
length delays. (Page 150).
In conventional delay systems the delay time is specified in • By using the real-time OVERDUB record mode (Page 80).
milliseconds (thousandths of a second) so it is necessary to
calculate the relationship between milliseconds and note NOTE
length when you want to create note-length delays. Further, if If a preset phrase is assigned to the selected track,
the tempo changes during playback it becomes necessary to the real-time OVERDUB record mode cannot be
do extra work to make the delay time follow the tempo used. In this use first copy the preset phrase to a user
changes. phrase and assign that phrase to the track.
With MIDI delay, however, the delay time can be set in clock
increments so the delays will always be locked to the play-
back tempo.
● MIDI delay uses polyphony. MIDI Delay Setup Procedure
Since MIDI delay uses the tone generator stage to produce
the delay sound, it uses 1 note (2 if a 2-element voice is used) 1. Press [MIDI DELAY] while in the PATTERN Play or Patch
of the RS7000’s maximum polyphony. Be sure that whatever mode to access the first MIDI delay display page (Delay).
effect you use, the maximum 62 note polyphony of the
2. Press a key on the keyboard while holding the [TRACK
RS7000 is not exceeded. For more information on maximum
SELECT] button to select the track to which MIDI delay is to
polyphone refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 62.
be applied.
4. Press [MIDI DELAY] to go to the Feedback page.
90 RS7000
6. MIDI Delay
6. Use the [EXIT] to move back to the Delay page, and then to [2] Feedback Page
return to the PATTERN Play (or Patch) mode.
[PATTERN] → [MIDI DELAY] × 2
NOTE
than 1.
• The SEQUENCE PLAY FX knob can be used
to directly edit the Delay page DELAY LEVEL
1 2 3 4
parameter.
2
Display Parameters 1 FB VELOCITY (Feedback Velocity) ........ [Knob 1]
The Pattern Mode

[Settings] -127 ~ +127
[1] Delay Page
When MIDI delay is set up to produce multiple repeats, grad-
ual changes in the level of the repeats are produced by
[PATTERN] → [MIDI DELAY] increasing or decreasing the velocity values.
For example, if the velocity of the original data is 100 and the
FB VELOCITY value is set to +10, if the velocity of the first
repeat is 60, the second repeat will be 70, the third 80, and so
on.
Velocity Delay data

1 2 3 (Repeat Time = 3)
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] Original data
10
1 DELAY TIME ............................................. [Knob 1] Delay level 10
[Settings] 0030 ~ 1920 (clocks)
Feedback
60 velocity
Sets the delay time. The delay time is the amount of time
between the playback of the original notes and the delay
notes, specified in clock increments (one 1/4 note = 480 Delay Time Time
clocks).
2 DELAY LEVEL .....................................................[Knob 2]

2 FB NOTE (Feedback Note) ........................... [Knob 2]
[Settings] 000 ~ 127 (%)
[Settings] -24 ~ +24, RDN
Sets the velocity of the delay sound in percent.
When MIDI delay is set up to produce multiple repeats,
changes in the pitch of the repeats can be produced in semi-
3 REPEAT TIMES ...................................................[Knob 3]
tone or whole-tone increments.
[Settings] 00 ~ 64 For example, if the pitch of an original note is C3 and the FB
NOTE value is set to +1, the pitch of the first repeat will be
Specifies the number of delay repeats.
C#3, the second repeat will be D3, the third D#3, and so on.
RS7000 91
6. MIDI Delay
When RND (RANDOM) is selected the pitch of the delayed For example, if the delay time of an original note is 240
notes will change at random. clocks and the FB CLOCK parameters is set to –50%, the
delay time of the 1st repeat will be 120 clocks, the second
Velocity
repeat will be 60 clocks, the third 30 clocks, and so on.
Delay data
Original data
Velocity
Delay data
Original Data
C3 C#3 D3 D#3 Time
Semitone Semitone Semitone

Time
3 FB GATE TIME (Feedback Time) ...............[Knob 3],
Delay time 2nd repeat delay 3rd repeat
[Settings] -100 ~ +100 (%) 120 time delay time
60 30
When MIDI delay is set up to produce multiple repeats, this
parameter can be used to apply gradual changes in the gate
time of the repeats. The gate times of the repeats are affected
as follows: Recording the MIDI Delay Settings to a
The gate time of the 1st
repeat = Phrase Using the Overdub Record Mode
the original gate time × the TIME parameter setting.
The gate time of the 2nd and subsequent repeats = If a user phrase is assigned to the track to which MIDI delay been
the gate time of the preceding repeat × the TIME set- applied, the following procedure can be used to actual record the
ting. MIDI delay settings to the track.
For example, if the gate time of an original note is 240 clocks 1. Set up the MIDI DELAY parameters as required.
and the TIME parameters is set to –50%, the gate time of the 2. Press [PATTERN] to go to the PATTERN Play page.
1st repeat will be 120 clocks, the second repeat will be 60
clocks, the third 30 clocks, and so on.
4. Use [Knob 2] (REC TYPE) to select the OVERDUB record
type.
Velocity
5. Press [PLAY] to begin recording.
Delay data
6. When the entire phrase has played through once, press the
Original Data [STOP] button to stop recording.
The MIDI delay settings have now been recorded along with the
phrase, and the MIDI delay settings for that track are initialized.
NOTE
• Please note that during process any keys
Time
played on the keyboard, panel knob opera-
240 120 60 30
tions, or data received from an external MIDI
controller will also be recorded.
• If MEMORY PROTECT is ON, “Memory Pro-
4 FB CLOCK (Feedback Clock).................. [Knob 4] tected” will appear on the display when you
press the [REC] button and the Rec Standby
[Settings] -100 ~ +100 (%)
mode will not be engaged.
When MIDI delay is set up to produce multiple repeats, this If this happens go to the UTILITY mode and
parameter can be used to apply gradual changes in the delay turn MEMORY PROTECT OFF (Page 257)
time of the repeats. The delay times of the repeats are and then continue from step 2 of the above
affected as follows: procedure.
The delay time of the 2nd and subsequent repeats =
the delay time of the preceding repeat × the FB CLOCK
setting.
92 RS7000
7. Adjusting Level and Effects for Each Track (Mixer)
This sub-mode is used to adjust pattern-playback volume levels, effect levels, and other parameters
individually for each track.
4 pages are available: Voice Select, Volume/Pan/Out, Equalizer, and Effect Send. The equalizer parame-
ters are available on 2 sub pages accessible via the [F1] and [F4] buttons.
Press the [MIXER] button from the PATTERN Play or Patch mode to go to the MIXER Voice Select page.
Mixer Features 7. Use [Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4] to make the required settings.

8. Press [MIXER] to go to the Effect Send page. 2
● This mode functions as a “mixer” which allows
adjustment of individual track levels, pan, effect 10. Use the [EXIT] to move back through the EQ 1/2, Volume/
The Pattern Mode

send and other parameters during pattern playback. Pad/Out and Voice Select pages, and finally to return to the
PATTERN Play (or Patch) mode.
● Regardless of the voices specified for the phrases
used, voices can be assigned for each style.
NOTE
● Mixer parameters are also saved when a pattern is
saved to memory card or disk as an SMF (Standard
MIDI File) file.
● The mixer settings are memorized with the style. than 1.
No extra save procedure is necessary. Your mix and voice • Using the four panel EFFECT SEND/VOL-
settings are saved with the style data and are automatically UME knobs you can directly edit the corre-
recalled whenever a style is selected. If MEMORY PRO- sponding mixer parameters without having to
TECT is ON, however (Page 261), the mix and voice settings access the mixer displays.
will not be saved and will be erased when a different style is
selected.
● Absolute and relative parameters.
Absolute parameters are parameters which directly control
Display Parameters
the corresponding function.
[1] Voice Select Page
Relative parameters, on the other hand, function more like
offset values which shift some other value by a specified
amount. [PATTERN] → [MIXER]
In the mixer sub mode, only the RANDOM PAN DEPTH
parameter is relative.
Mixer Setup Procedure
1. Press [MIXER] while in the PATTERN Play or Patch mode

to access the Voice Select display page. 1 2 3
2. Select the track to be adjusted (Page 69). [Knob 1] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]

4. Press [MIXER] to go to the Volume/Pan/Out page. 1 BANK ...................................................................... [Knob 1]
6. Press [MIXER] to go to the EQ 1/2 page.
RS7000 93
2 PROGRAM (Program Number) ....................[Knob 3] 1 VOLUME ................................................................ [Knob 1]

[Settings] [Settings] 000 ~ 127
Voice Bank (Bank Select MSB, LSB)
Sets the volume level of the selected track.
*** *** (Phrase), 000 000 (GM),
063 000 (SyBa&Ld1), 063 001 (SyPd&FX1),
063 002 (SyMater1), 063 003 (BandInst), 2 PAN .......................................................................... [Knob 2]
063 004 (Cls&Wind), 063 005 (Eth&Perc), [Settings] L63 ~ L01, C, R01 ~ R63
063 006 (SFX1), 063 007 (SyBa&Ld2),
063 008 (SyPd&FX2), 063 009 (SFX2), Sets the stereo pan position of the selected track.
064 000 (SmpLocal), 064 001 (SmpCmn),
126 000 (DrumKit ), 127 000 (GM Drum) 3 RANDOM PAN .................................................... [Knob 3]
Program Number 001 ~ 128
[Settings] -64 ~ 0 ~ 63
(depends on the voice bank)
Sets the depth of random pan for the selected track.
Assigns a voice to each track for pattern playback. When set to “0” no panning occurs.
Voice banks organize voices in voice-type categories, and are
Other values produce a random pan position each time a note
selected using MIDI bank select MSB and LSB data.
The program number parameter selects the individual voices is played.
in each bank.
When the BANK MSB and LSB are set to “*** *** 4 OUTPUT SEL (Output Select)...................... [Knob 4]
(Phrase)”, the voice specified for the phrase assigned to that [Settings] L&R, AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6,
track is used. (Page 79) AS1&2, AS3&4, AS5&6
L&R ...................Output is sent to the RS7000 OUTPUT
NOTE jacks.
See “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 61 for details AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6, AS1&2, AS3&4,
about voice banks. AS5&6 ..............These settings send output to the cor-
responding individual outputs on the
optional AIEB2 I/O Expansion Board
3 HOLD (Voice Parameter Hold) .....................[Knob 4] (Page 20).
[Settings] OFF, ON
OFF ................... edited absolute voice parameters will Specifies the output to which the sound from each track will
be reset. be sent.
ON..................... edited absolute voice parameters will The assignable outputs on the optional AIEB2 I/O Expansion
be retained. Board can be used to separately output specified patterns or
samples for processing via separate external audio devices.
Determines whether edited absolute voice parameters will be
AS1 through AS6 are mono output settings, while AS1&2,
retained when a different voice is selected.
When “OFF” the absolute voice edit parameters are initial- AS3&4, and AS5&6 output a stereo program to the specified
ized each time a voice is selected. When “ON” the absolute output pair.
voice edit parameters are retained.
NOTE [3] Equalizer Page
The LFO User Wave parameters, Coarse Tune, [PATTERN] → [MIXER] × 3

Detune, Pitch Bend Range, and Pitch Bend are
all absolute parameters, but their value will be
EQ TYPE = PEQ
held whether ON or OFF.
[2] Volume/Pan/Out Page
[PATTERN] → [MIXER] × 2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
94 RS7000
EQ TYPE = BOOST 2 Q (Bandwidth) ..................................................... [Knob 2]

[Settings] 0 ~ 31
Specifies the bandwidth, or range of frequencies, to be
affected by boost or cut when the PEQ type is selected.
The specified frequency range is centered at the specified EQ
frequency (below).
Small Q Large Q
EQ TYPE = LOW&HIGH
+ 2
Gain Equalizer
–
The Pattern Mode

5 6 [F4] Frequency Frequency
[Knob 3] [Knob 4]
3 FREQUENCY ....................................................... [Knob 3]

[Settings] 139.7 Hz ~ 12.9 kHz
Sets the center (or cutoff) frequency of the frequency band to
be equalized.
[F1] 7 8 4 GAIN (Output Select) ....................................... [Knob 4]

[Knob 2] [Knob 3]
Specifies the amount of boost or cut to be applied to the EQ
EQ TYPE = THRU frequency band.
5 LOW FREQ. (Low Frequency) ..................... [Knob 3]

Sets the cutoff frequency for the EQ band adjusted by the
LOW GAIN parameter, below.
6 LOW GAIN ............................................................ [Knob 4]

1 EQ TYPE .................................................................[Knob 1]
Boosts or cuts the low frequency band, below the cutoff fre-
[Settings] Low&High, PEQ, BOOST6, BOOST12, quency set by the LOW FREQ parameter, above.
BOOST18, THRU
Low&High ....... Independent control of Low and High 7 HIGH FREQ. (High Frequency) ................... [Knob 2]
EQ bands.
PEQ................... Parametric Equalizer — provides con-
trol of center frequency and Q (band- Sets the cutoff frequency for the EQ band adjusted by the
width) as well as boost/cut. HIGH GAIN parameter, below.
BOOST6 ........... Provides a 6-dB level boost.
BOOST12 ......... Provides a 12-dB level boost. 8 HIGH GAIN ............................................................ [Knob 3]
BOOST18 ......... Provides a 18-dB level boost. [Settings] -32 ~ +32
THRU ................ The equalizer is bypassed.
Boosts or cuts the high frequency band, above the cutoff fre-
Specifies the type of equalization to be applied to each track. quency set by the HIGH FREQ parameter, above.
RS7000 95
[4] Effect Send Page
[PATTERN] → [MIXER] × 4
1 2 3 4
1 VARIATION............................................................[Knob 1]
[Settings] 000 ~ 127
Sets the variation effect send level from the selected track,
and thus the depth of the variation effect for that track.
2 DELAY .....................................................................[Knob 2]
Sets the delay effect send level from the selected track, and
thus the depth of the delay effect for that track.
3 REVERB..................................................................[Knob 3]
Sets the reverb effect send level from the selected track, and
thus the depth of the reverb effect for that track.
4 DRY LEVEL ...........................................................[Knob 4]

Specifies the “dry line” send level for each track.
The “dry line” is a direct connection to the outputs which
does not go through the system effects. In other words, an
effect bypass circuit. It is a stereo line in order to maintain the
stereo pan position of each track.
If the dry line level is reduced the depth of the system effects
is increased, but with some effects the sound may appear at
stereo center.
96 RS7000
8. Changing the Sound of Voices (Voice Edit)
This sub mode allows voices to be edited for each pattern track. You can modify brightness, attack,
and other parameters to make the sound your own. There are 5 main display pages: LFO, Portamento,
Pitch, EG (Envelope Generator), and Filter. The LFO and EG pages each have 3 sub pages accessible
via the [F1] and [F4] buttons.
Press the [VOICE EDIT] button from the PATTERN Play or Patch mode to go to the VOICE EDIT LFO
page.
Voice Edit Features 7. Use [Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4] to make the required settings.
2
8. Press [VOICE EDIT] to go to the EG page.
● Versatile relative editing of voice parameters.
The Pattern Mode

10. Press [VOICE EDIT] to go to the Filter page.
● EG, LFO, filter and other synthesizer-like parame-
ters facilitate aggressive voice editing.
12. Use the [EXIT] to move back through the EG, Pitch, Porta-
● Edited voice settings are memorized with each mento and LFO pages, and finally to return to the PATTERN
style. Play (or Patch) mode.
No extra save procedure is necessary. Your edited voice set-
tings are saved with the style data and are automatically
recalled whenever a style is selected. NOTE
If MEMORY PROTECT is ON, however (Page 257), the • When you need to make large value changes
voice edit settings will not be saved and will be erased when rotate a knob while holding the [SHIFT] button
a different style is selected. to change values in increments of 10 rather
than 1.
● Absolute and relative parameters.
• Using the panel LFO, PITCH, EG and FILTER
Absolute parameters are parameters that directly control the
knobs and buttons you can directly edit the
corresponding function (pitch bend range, pitch bend, porta-
corresponding voice parameters without hav-
mento ON/OFF, portamento time, pitch modulation depth,
ing to access the mixer displays.
filter modulation depth, amplitude modulation depth).
Relative parameters, on the other hand, function more like
offset values which shift some other value by a specified
amount. All voice edit parameters other than those listed
above are relative. Display Parameters
In the sections that follow the absolute or relative status of
[1] LFO Page
each parameter is listed beside the parameter name.
● Voice edit parameters are not saved when a pattern
[PATTERN] → [VOICE EDIT]
is saved to memory card or disk as an SMF (Stan-
dard MIDI File) file.
Voice Edit Procedure
1. Press [VOICE EDIT] while in the PATTERN Play or Patch

mode to access the LFO display page. 1 2 3 4 [F4]
2. Select the track to be adjusted (Page 67).
4. Press [VOICE EDIT] to go to the Portamento page.
6. Press [VOICE EDIT] to go to the Pitch page.
[F1] 5 6 7 8 [F4]
RS7000 97
1 KEY ON RESET ...................................................[Knob 1] 4 LFO PHASE ........................................................ [Knob 4]

Absolute Absolute
[Settings] OFF, EACH-ON, 1st-ON [Settings] 0, 90, 120, 180, 240, 270
OFF (Reset Off)......... No phase reset.
Specifies the phase from which the LFO will begin oscilla-
EACH-ON .................. Phase reset for each note
tion when it is reset.
played.
1st-ON ....................... Phase reset on the 1st note of
0 90 120
legato phrases (when subse-
quent notes are played while the
first note is still held).
Specifies the LFO phase reset mode.
2 BPM SYNC (BPM Synchronization) ..........[Knob 2]

180 240 270
Absolute
[Settings] OFF, ON
Determines whether the LFO speed is to be synchronized to
the playback tempo (BPM SYNC ON) or not.
3 LFO SPEED ...........................................................[Knob 3]

[Settings]
When BPM SYNC = OFF: -64 ~ +63 (Relative) 5 PITCH DEPTH ..................................................... [Knob 1]
When BPM SYNC = ON: 16th, 8th/3, 16th., 8th, 4th/3, Relative
8th., 4th, 2nd/3, 4th., 2nd, [Settings] -64 ~ +63
whole/3, 2nd., 4th × 4,
Sets the depth of pitch modulation (vibrato effect).
4th × 5, 4th × 6, 4th × 7,
4th × 8 (Absolute) 6 FILTER DEPTH ................................................... [Knob 2]
16th ........................... 16th note
Relative
8th/3 .......................... 8th note triplet
16th. .......................... dotted 16th note.
8th ............................. 8th note Sets the depth of filter modulation (wow effect).
4th/3 .......................... 1/4 note triplet
8th. ............................ dotted 8th note. 7 AMP DEPTH .......................................................... [Knob 3]
4th ............................. 1/4 note Relative
2nd/3 ......................... 1/2 note triplet [Settings] -64 ~ +63
4th. ............................ dotted 1/4 note.
Sets the depth of amplitude modulation (tremolo effect).
2nd ............................ 1/2 note
whole/3 ..................... whole note triplet 8 LFO WAVE ............................................................ [Knob 4]
2nd. ........................... dotted 1/2 note.
Absolute
4th × 4 ~ 4th × 8 ....... one LFO cycle per 4 = 8 1/4 notes
[Settings] TRI, SAW UP, SAW DOWN, SQU, S/H,
Specifies the LFO speed for vibrato, wow, tremolo, and other PGM, USER
LFO-based effects. TRI ....................Triangular wave
When BPM SYNC is OFF the LFO speed is specified as a SAW UP ............Rising sawtooth
number. SAW DOWN .....Falling sawtooth
When BPM SYNC is ON the LFO speed is specified as the SQU ..................Square wave
type or number of beats per cycle. S/H ....................Sample & hold
PGM ..................Programmed wave (can only be
selected for preset voices which use
an original waveform)
USER ................User wave
98 RS7000
Specifies the LFO waveform. A total of 7 waveforms are pro- ■ User Wave Page
vided.
Press [F4] to go to the USER wave setup page.
TRI (Triangular wave)
Variation
[F1]
9 0 A B C
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] [F4]
[F2]
Time
2
SAW UP (Rising sawtooth) 9 SLOPE .................................................................... [Knob 1]
The Pattern Mode

Absolute
Variation
[Settings] OFF, UP, DOWN, UP&DOWN
OFF ...................The waveform steps are not con-
nected by slopes. The wave will be
Time similar to a rectangular or sample-&-
hold wave.
UP .....................Slopes will be used to connect only
steps which increase in amplitude.
SAW DOWN (Falling sawtooth) This produces composite rising saw-
tooth type waveforms.
DOWN ...............Slopes will be used to connect only
Variation
steps which decrease in amplitude.
This produces composite falling saw-
Time tooth type waveforms.
UP&DOWN .......Slopes connect all steps. The result is
a composite triangular waveform.
Determines whether or not the steps of a user waveform will

SQU (Square wave) be connected by slopes.
Variation 0 STEP/TOTAL ............................ [Knob 2], [F2] → [Knob 2]

Absolute
[Settings]
Time STEP .................1 ~ TOTAL STEP
TOTAL ..............2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 12, 16
STEP selects the step in the user waveform for which the
amplitude will be specified via the STEP VALUE parameter,
S/H (Sample & hold) ......... Random Variation below.
TOTAL specifies the total number of steps per one cycle of
Variation the user waveform. More steps allow more complex wave-
forms.
Press [F2] to move the cursor to the TOTAL parameter and
set the total number of steps using [Knob 2].
Time
RS7000 99
A STEP VALUE ........................................................[Knob 3] 2 PORTAMENTO SW

Absolute (Portamento Switch) ....................................... [Knob 2]
[Settings] 0 ~ 127 Absolute
Sets the amplitude of the currently selected step in the user [Settings] OFF, FINGERED, FULL TIME
waveform. Select the steps via the STEP parameter, above, OFF ...................Portamento is OFF
FINGERED........Portamento is only applied to legato
and use the STEP VALUE to alter the level of each to create
notes (i.e. the first note is still held
the waveform. when the second note is played)
FULL TIME .......Portamento is applied to all notes
B TEMPLATE ............................................................[Knob 4]
Absolute
Selects the portamento type.
Portemento is a smooth slide between successive notes of dif-
[Settings] ALL 0, ALL 64, ALL 127, SAW UP, SAW
ferent pitch.
DOWN, EVEN STEPS, ODD STEPS
ALL 0 ................ Sets the STEP VALUE of all steps to 0.
3 PORTAMENTO TIME ....................................... [Knob 3]
ALL 64 .............. Sets the STEP VALUE of all steps to
Absolute
64.
ALL 127 ............ Sets the STEP VALUE of all steps to
127. Determines the length of the portamento slide between suc-
SAW UP............ Produces a composite rising saw- cessive notes. The smaller the value the faster the porta-
tooth waveform. mento. At a settings of 000 there is no noticeable portamento
SAW DOWN ..... Produces a composite falling saw- effect.
tooth waveform.
EVEN STEPS.... The STEP VALUEs of all even steps
are set to 127 while the odd steps are [3] Pitch Page
set to 0.
ODD STEPS ..... The STEP VALUEs of all odd steps are [PATTERN] → [VOICE EDIT] × 3
set to 127 while the even steps are set
to 0.
Provides a selection of 7 different “templates” on which user

waveforms can be based.
C RANDOM ........................................................................[F4]
The SLOPE and STEP VALUEs for the user waveform are 1 2 3 4
selected randomly each time the [F4] button is pressed. [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]
1 COARSE TUNE ................................................... [Knob 1]

[2] Portamento Page Absolute
[Settings] -24 ~ +24 (semitone increments)
[PATTERN] → [VOICE EDIT] × 2
Adjusts the pitch in semitone increments.
2 DETUNE ................................................................. [Knob 2]

Absolute
[Settings] -12.8 ~ +12.7 (Hz)
Allows fine tuning adjustment (detuning) in 0.1 Hz incre-
ments.
1 2 3
3 P.B. RANGE (Pitch Bend Range)............... [Knob 3]
Absolute
1 MONO/POLY .........................................................[Knob 1] [Settings] -24 ~ +24
Absolute
Specifies the maximum pitch bend range in semitone incre-
[Settings] MONO, POLY ments. (12 semitones = 1 octave)
Selects the MONO (only one note can be played at a time) or
POLY (multiple notes can be played at a time) mode.
100 RS7000
4 PITCH BEND .........................................................[Knob 4] 3 AEG SUSTAIN (Amplitude Envelope Generator

Absolute Sustain) .................................................................. [Knob 3]
[Settings] -8192 ~ +8191 Relative
Sets the amount of pitch bend.
Determines the sustain level at which the envelope will con-
tinue while a note is held, after the initial attack and decay.
[4] EG Page
4 AEG RELEASE (Amplitude Envelope Genera-
tor Release) ......................................................... [Knob 4]
[PATTERN] → [VOICE EDIT] × 4
3 EG pages are available — AEG, FEG, and PEG — and these Relative
can be accessed by using the [F1] and [F4] buttons.
The pages will be described separately, below.
2
Determines how fast the envelope falls from the sustain level
to zero when a note is released. The lower the value the faster
■ AEG Page
The Pattern Mode

the release.
■ FEG Page
1 2 3 4 [F4]
[F1] 1 2 3 4 [F4]
AEG sustain level [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]
Volume
Attack value
FEG sustain level

Time
Cutoff
frequency
AEG attack time AEG decay time AEG release time
Release value
Value at
note-on
1 AEG ATTACK (Amplitude Envelope Generator
Time
Attack) .................................................................... [Knob 1]
Relative
FEG attack time FEG decay time FEG release time
Determines the speed of attack from the time a note is played 1 FEG ATTACK (Filter Envelope Generator
until the maximum initial level of the envelope is reached. Attack) .................................................................... [Knob 1]
The smaller the value the faster the attack. Relative
2 AEG DECAY (Amplitude Envelope Generator
Decay)......................................................................[Knob 2] Determines the speed of filter variation from the time a note
Relative is played until the maximum initial level of the envelope is
reached. The smaller the value the faster the attack.
Determines how fast the envelope falls from maximum attack 2 FEG DECAY (Filter Envelope Generator Decay)
level to the sustain level. The smaller the value the faster the ................................................................................... [Knob 2]
decay. Relative
Determines how fast the filter envelope falls from maximum
attack level to the sustain level. The smaller the value the
faster the decay.
RS7000 101
3 FEG SUSTAIN (Filter Envelope Generator Sus- 3 PEG DCY (Pitch Envelope Generator Decay)
tain) .......................................................................... [Knob 3] ........................................................................[F2] → [Knob 2]
Relative Relative
[Settings] -64 ~ +63 [Settings] -64 ~ +63
Determines the sustain level at which the filter envelope will Determines how fast the envelope falls from the normal pitch
continue while a note is held, after the initial attack and of the voice to the sustain-level pitch. The smaller the value
decay. the faster the decay.
Press [F2] to switch to this parameter.
4 FEG RELEASE (Filter Envelope Generator
Release) ..................................................................[Knob 4] 4 PEG SUS (Pitch Envelope Generator Sustain)
Relative ................................................................................... [Knob 3]
[Settings] -64 ~ +63 Relative
Determines how fast the filter envelope falls from the sustain
level to zero when a note is released. The lower the value the Sets the sustain-level pitch which will be maintained while a
faster the release. note is held.
■ PEG Page 5 PEG RLS (Pitch Envelope Generator Release)

........................................................................[F3] → [Knob 3]
Relative
Determines how fast the envelope falls from the sustain-level
pitch to the release-level pitch (below) when a note is
released. Press [F3] to switch to this parameter.
[F1] 3 5
1 2 [F2] 4 [F3] 6 6 PEG RLS LEVEL (Pitch Envelope Generator
Release Level) ................................................... [Knob 4]
Relative
Higher
pitch
Initial pitch Sets the final pitch reached after the note is released.
PEG sustain
PEG level
level
Normal
pitch Time
[5] Filter Page
PEG attack
level
PEG release [PATTERN] → [VOICE EDIT] × 5
level
Lower
pitch
PEG attack PEG decay PEG release
time time time
Play Release
1 PEG INIT LEVEL (Pitch Envelope Generator

Initial Level) ......................................................... [Knob 1] 1 2 3 4
Relative [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]

Specifies the initial pitch of the note. Lower values produce
Volume
lower pitch.
2 PEG ATK (Pitch Envelope Generator Attack) Resonance
....................................................................................[Knob 2] Passed Cut-off harmonics

harmonics
Relative
Determines the speed of attack from the initial pitch to the Frequency
normal pitch of the voice. The smaller the value the faster the Cutoff
attack.
102 RS7000
1 CUTOFF (Filter Cutoff Frequency) ............[Knob 1] BPF .............................. Band-pass filter

Relative Volume
Blocked Passed Blocked
frequencies frequencies frequencies
Sets the filter cutoff frequency. Positive values move the cut-
off toward higher frequencies, while negative values move
the cutoff toward lower frequencies.
The effect of the cutoff frequency will vary according to the
selected filter type.
Center frequency Frequency
2 RESONANCE........................................................[Knob 2]
Relative Frequencies around the center frequency are passed, while all
other frequencies are blocked. 2
Produces a resonant peak centered at the filter’s cutoff fre- BEF .............................. Band-elimination filter
The Pattern Mode

quency.
When the BPF filter type is selected, higher resonance set- Volume Passed
Passed Blocked
tings produce a narrower passband at the cutoff frequency. frequencies frequencies frequencies
When the BEF filter type is selected, higher resonance set-
tings produce a narrower elimination band at the cutoff fre-
quency.
NOTE
Increasing the resonance excessively may Center frequency
Frequency
cause some voices to distort.
Frequencies around the center frequency are blocked, while

3 FILTER TYPE........................................................[Knob 3] all other frequencies are passed.
Absolute
NOTE
[Settings] BYPASS, LPF24, LPF18, LPF12, HPF,
BPF, BEF Some 2-element voices use a different filter
BYPASS ...........................The filter is OFF. The filter type for each element. The element-1 filter type
type indicators on the panel is displayed by default. If the filter type is
will all be off. changed the filter types for both elements are
Sets the filter type. changed.
LPF24, LPF18, LPF12 ..... Low-pass filter

Passed frequencies Blocked frequencies 4 ENV. DEPTH (Envelope Depth) .................. [Knob 4]
Relative
Sets the depth of the filter envelope set via the FEG display
(Page 101). Negative settings invert the filter envelope.
Frequency
Cutoff frequency
Frequencies higher than the cutoff frequency are cut off.

Three cutoff slopes are provided — 24 dB/oct, 18 dB/oct, and
12 dB/oct — each with its own distinct sound.
HPF ..............................High-pass filter
Volume
Blocked Passed frequencies
frequencies
Cutoff frequency Frequency
Frequencies lower than the cutoff frequency are cut off.
RS7000 103
9. Adding Effects
9. Adding Effects
This mode is used to select effects for pattern playback and change the effects settings as required. 4
pages are available: Effect Type, Variation Parameters, Delay/Chorus Parameters, and Reverb Parame-
ters. The Variation Parameters are available on 5 sub pages accessible via the [F1] and [F4] buttons, the
Delay/Chorus Parameters are available on 4 sub pages accessible via the [F1] and [F4] buttons, and the
Reverb Parameters are available on 3 sub pages accessible via the [F1] and [F4] buttons.
Press the [EFFECT] button from the PATTERN Play or Patch mode to go to the EFFECT mode.
Effect Features NOTE

When you need to make large value changes rotate a
● 3 high-performance built-in effect stages can be knob while holding the [SHIFT] button to change val-
applied individually to each track. ues in increments of 10 rather than 1.
● The effect sound is output via the OUTPUT jacks.

● Edited effect settings are memorized with each
style. Display Parameters
No extra save procedure is necessary. Your edited effect set-
tings are saved with the style data and are automatically [1] Effect Type Page
recalled whenever a style is selected.
The depth of the effect applied to each track is determined by [PATTERN] → [EFFECT]
the effect send settings.
If MEMORY PROTECT is ON, however (Page 257), the
effect settings will not be saved and will be erased when a
different style is selected.
Voice Edit Procedure

1 2 3
1. Press [EFFECT] while in the PATTERN Play or Patch mode [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3]
to access the Effect Type page.
3. Press [EFFECT] to go to the Variation Parameter page.
1 VARIATION TYPE .............................................. [Knob 1]
[Settings] 0 ~ 100
5. Press [EFFECT] to go to the Delay/Chorus Parameter page. Refer to the Effect Type List, page 313.
Selects the variation effect type.
7. Press [EFFECT] to go to the Reverb Parameter page.
8. Use [Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4] to make the required settings. 2 DELAY TYPE ....................................................... [Knob 2]
9. Use the [EXIT] to move back through the Delay/Chorus [Settings] 0 ~ 25
Parameter, Variation Parameter, and Effect Type pages, and Refer to the Effect Type List, page 313.
finally to return to the PATTERN Play (or Patch) mode.
Selects the delay effect type.
3 REVERB TYPE .................................................... [Knob 3]

[Settings] 01 ~ 12
Refer to the Effect Type List, page 313.
Selects the reverb effect type.
104 RS7000
9. Adding Effects
[2] Variation Parameter Page [3] Delay/Chorus Page
[PATTERN] → [EFFECT] × 2 [PATTERN] → [EFFECT] × 3
1 2 3 4 [F4] 1 2 3 4 [F4]
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]
2
The Pattern Mode

[F1] 5 6 7 8 [F1] 5 6 7
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]
1 ~ 4 EFFECT PARAMETERS .....[Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4]

1 ~ 4 EFFECT PARAMETERS .......[Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4]
Allow adjustment of the detailed parameters for each effect. The
parameters available are different for each effect. For information
on the individual parameters refer to the “Appendix”, page 315.
5 SEND VAR. TO DELAY..........................................[Knob 1]
5 SEND DELAY TO REVERB ................................. [Knob 2]
Adjusts the signal level sent from the VARIATION effect
Adjusts the signal level sent from the DELAY/CHORUS
stage to the DELAY/CHORUS effect stage.
effect stage to the REVERB effect stage.
6 SEND VAR. TO REVERB ....................................[Knob 2]
6 RETURN LEVEL ................................................. [Knob 3]
Adjusts the signal level sent from the VARIATION effect
Adjusts the signal level sent from the DELAY/CHORUS
stage to the REVERB effect stage.
effect stage (the effect or “wet” sound) sent to the RS7000
stereo outputs.
7 RETURN LEVEL ..................................................[Knob 3]
[Settings] 000 ~ 127 7 PAN (Delay Pan) ................................................ [Knob 4]
Adjusts the signal level sent from the VARIATION effect [Settings] L63 ~ CENTER ~ R63
stage (the effect or “wet” sound) sent to the RS7000 stereo
Adjusts the stereo pan position of the signal output from the
outputs.
DELAY/CHORUS effect stage.
8 PAN (Variation Pan) ..........................................[Knob 4]
[Settings] L63 ~ CENTER ~ R63
VARIATION effect stage.
RS7000 105
9. Adding Effects
[4] Reverb Page
[PATTERN] → [EFFECT] × 4
1 2 3 4 [F4]
[F1] 1 2 5 6
1 ~ 4 EFFECT PARAMETERS
.................................................................[Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4]
5 RETURN LEVEL ..................................................[Knob 3]

Adjusts the signal level sent from the REVERB effect stage
(the effect or “wet” sound) sent to the RS7000 stereo outputs.
6 PAN (Reverb Pan) ..............................................[Knob 4]

REVERB effect stage.
106 RS7000
10. Arpeggio & Assignable Knob Settings (Setup)
This sub-mode is used to set up arpeggios, the assignable knobs, and other RS7000 functions.
4 pages are available: Arpeggio Setting, A/D Setup, Knob Assign, and MIDI Out Channel. The A/D Setup
parameters are available on 3 sub pages accessible via the [F1] and [F4] buttons.
Press the [SETUP] button from the PATTERN Play or Patch mode to go to the SETUP mode.
Setup Features 8. Press a key on the keyboard while holding the [TRACK
SELECT] button to select the track for which the MIDI out-
put channel settings will apply.
● Setup settings are memorized with each style. 9. Use [Knob 3] ~ [Knob 4] to make the required settings.
2
No extra save procedure is necessary. Your edited setup set-
10. Use the [EXIT] to move back through the Knob Assign, A/D
tings are saved with the style data and are automatically
The Pattern Mode

recalled whenever a style is selected. Setup, and Arpeggio Setting pages, and finally to return to the
If MEMORY PROTECT is ON, however (Page 257), the PATTERN Play (or Patch) mode.
setup settings will not be saved and will be erased when a dif-
ferent style is selected. NOTE
When you need to make large value changes
Arpeggio Features to change values in increments of 10 rather
than 1.
● Arpeggio performance can be recorded to phrases
using real-time recording.
● Play effects can be applied to arpeggio perfor- Arpeggio Performance Procedure
mance.
This makes it possible to create an unlimited range of arpeg- 1. In the PATTERN Play or Patch mode press the [ARPEGGIO
gio patterns. ON] button so that its indicator lights. The [KEYBOARD]
● Arpeggio settings apply to all tracks. button indicator will also light.
2. Arpeggio playback will begin when you hold one or more
● Arpeggio settings are memorized with each style.
notes on the keyboard.
No extra save procedure is necessary. Your arpeggio settings
are saved with the style data and are automatically recalled 3. If the HOLD parameter in the Arpeggio Setting page is OFF
whenever a style is selected. the arpeggio will stop as soon as you release the keys.
If MEMORY PROTECT is ON, however (Page 257), the When the HOLD parameters is ON arpeggio playback can be
arpeggio settings will not be saved and will be erased when a stopped by pressing the [ARPEGGIO ON] button so that its
different style is selected. indicator goes out.
Setup Procedure
1. Press [SETUP] while in the PATTERN Play or Patch mode to

access the Arpeggio Setting page.
3. Press [SETUP] to go to the A/D Setup page.
5. Press [SETUP] to go to the Knob Assign page.
7. Press [SETUP] to go to the Out Channel page.
RS7000 107
Display Parameters 2 SORT ....................................................................... [Knob 2]

[Settings] OFF, ON
[1] Arpeggio Setting Page
Determines whether the arpeggio notes will be sorted by
pitch or not.
[PATTERN] → [SETUP]
When ON the arpeggio notes are sorted and played from low-
The automatic arpeggios created by the RS7000 are an indispens-
est to highest or highest to lowest. This is the normal way to
able element of modern techno and dance music.
play arpeggios.
When OFF the arpeggio notes are not sorted by pitch.
Instead, the notes are played in sequence from the first key
pressed to the last, or vice versa, producing different arpeg-
gios depending on how the chord is played.
3 HOLD ....................................................................... [Knob 3]

[Settings] OFF, ON
1 2 3 4
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] Determines whether arpeggio playback will continue or not
after the notes are released.
NOTE
4 OCT RANGE ........................................................ [Knob 4]
If you start real-time recording while an arpeg- [Settings] 1 ~ 4
gio is playing, recording will begin without a
count-in. Specifies the maximum arpeggio range in octaves.
Arpeggio settings apply to all tracks.
[2] A/D Setup Page

1 TYPE.........................................................................[Knob 1]
[Settings] OFF, UP, DOWN, ALTER1, ALTER2, [PATTERN] → [SETUP] × 2
RANDOM The RS7000 INPUT L and R jacks allow an external audio signal
OFF................ Arpeggio playback is OFF. to be input and mixed with the sound from the internal tone gen-
UP.................. When the SORT parameter is ON, erator. The external audio signal can even be processed via the
RS7000’s REVERB, DELAY, and VARIATION effect stages.
the notes are played in sequence
from the lowest to the highest.
When SORT is OFF, the notes are
played in sequence from the first
key pressed to the last.
DOWN ........... When the SORT parameter is ON,
the notes are played in sequence
1 2 3 4 [F4]
from the highest to the lowest.
When SORT is OFF, the notes are
played in sequence from the last
key pressed to the first.
ALTER1......... Alternate UP and DOWN arpeg-
gios. The “turnaround” note is
played once.
ALTER2......... Alternate UP and DOWN arpeg-
gios. The “turnaround” note is 5 6 7 8 [F4]
played twice. [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]
RANDOM....... The notes are played in random
order.
Selects the arpeggio type.
108 RS7000
NOTE
7 VARIATION SEND 1/2 ..................................... [Knob 3]
[Settings] 0 ~ 127
When the MONO/STEREO parameter is set to
MONO × 2, the [F1] and [F4] buttons can be Adjusts the level of the signal sent to the VARIATION effect
used to switch pages providing access to indi- stage.
vidual REVERB SEND 1/2, DELAY SEND 1/2, “0” produces the dry signal only, and “127” produces the
and VARIATION SEND 1/2, and PAN 1/2 variation sound only.
parameters for each channel.
A/D settings for the INPUT L jack are provided 8 PAN 1/2 .................................................................. [Knob 4]
in A/D Setup page 2/3, and settings for the
INPUT R jack are provided in A/D Setup page
3/3. Adjusts the stereo pan position of the A/D input signal.
2
1 INPUT GAIN ..........................................................[Knob 1] [3] Knob Assign Page
The Pattern Mode

[Settings] MIC, LINE
[PATTERN] → [SETUP] × 3
Matches the input gain of the INPUT L and R jacks to the This knob allows a range of parameters and tracks to be assigned
type of source used. The MIC setting produces input gain to the panel knobs.
high enough for direct microphone input, while the LINE set- The 4 LFO DEPTH and EG knobs can be independently set for
ting lowers the gain for optimum matching with line-level AMO, FILTER, and PITCH. Assignments can be made for up to
sources. 31 knobs.
This INPUT GAIN setting also applies to SAMPLING pro-
cedure (Page 229).
2 MONO/STEREO...................................................[Knob 2]
[Settings] MONO × 2, STEREO
Determines whether signals input via the INPUT L and R
jacks will be handled as separate mono signals (MONO × 2),
or as a stereo pair (STEREO). 1 2 3
3 VOLUME 1 .............................................................[Knob 3]
[Settings] 0 ~ 127 1 KNOB SELECT ................................................... [Knob 1]
[Settings] 1 ~ 31
Adjusts the volume of the input signal.
processed this parameters adjusts the volume of the INPUT L Specifies the knob to which a parameter or tracks will be
signal, and when a stereo signal is being received it adjusts assigned.
the volume of the L and R inputs.
2 PARAMETER (MIDI OUT)............................... [Knob 2]
4 VOLUME 2................................................. [Knob 4]
Specifies the parameter to be assigned to the knob selected
[Settings] 0 ~ 127 via KNOB SELECT, above.
Adjusts the volume of the input signal. Control numbers 001 ~ 119 (except 32), pitch bend, BPM, as
When a mono signal is being processed this parameters well as play effect and MIDI delay parameters can be
adjusts the volume of the INPUT R signal. assigned.
This parameter cannot be set when MONO/STEREO is set to
STEREO. 3 TRACK .................................................................... [Knob 4]
[Settings] AUTO, 01 ~ 16
5 REVERB SEND 1/2 ............................................[Knob 1]
Specifies the track to be controlled by the knob selected via
[Settings] 0 ~ 127 KNOB SELECT, above.
Adjusts the level of the signal sent to the REVERB effect When set to AUTO, the selected track will be automatically
stage. assigned to the knob.
When set to 01 ~ 16, the specified track is assigned to the
6 DELAY SEND 1/2 ................................................[Knob 2] knob regardless of the currently selected track.
[Settings] 0 ~ 127
Adjusts the level of the signal sent to the DELAY/CHORUS
effect stage.
RS7000 109
NOTE
3 TR (Track)
[Settings] 01 ~ 16
When a knob is operated during pattern play-
back, playback of the style data corresponding Selects the track for which a transmit channel is to be
to the parameter assigned to that knob will stop. assigned.
For example, if a knob assigned to reverb send To select a track press the appropriate key on the keyboard
is operated during pattern playback, the reverb- while holding the [TRACK SELECT] button.
send style data will stop playing back. Playback
will resume normally after playback is stopped, NOTE
the style number is changed, or the section is The graphic display on the left side of the LCD
changed. shows the MIDI channel assignments for TG
(the internal tone generator), MA (MIDI A), and
MB (MIDI B).
The upper area of this display indicates the
MIDI transmit channel assignments for each
[4] Out Channel Page
track.
The boxes in the lower area of the display indi-
cate when the MIDI channel assignment for the
[PATTERN] → [SETUP] × 4
corresponding destination is OFF or not. An
The parameters in this page assign the MIDI transmit channel for
empty box indicates OFF, and a solid filled box
each track and output destination: the tone generator and MIDI A
indicates that a transmit channel, 01 ~ 16, is
and B connectors.
assigned.
1 2
[Knob 3] [Knob 4]
1 OUT SELECT ........................................................[Knob 3]

[Settings] TG, MIDI A, MIDI B
TG.................. Output is sent to the RS7000 tone
generator.
MIDI A............ Output is sent to the MIDI OUT A
connector.
MIDI B............ Output is sent to the MIDI OUT B
connector.
Determines the MIDI output for which a channel number is

to be assigned.
2 OUT CHANNEL....................................................[Knob 4]
[Settings] OFF, 01 ~ 16
OFF................ No MIDI data is transmitted.
01 ~ 16........... MIDI data is transmitted on the
specified channel.
Specifies the MIDI transmit channel.
110 RS7000
11. Master EQ and Effects
The MASTER sub-mode provides access to the master EQ parameters which adjust the sound at the
final output stage, and the master effect parameters.
The Master EQ parameters are available on 3 sub pages accessible via the [F1] and [F4] buttons, and
the Master Effect parameters are available on 5 sub pages accessible via the [F1] and [F4] buttons.
Press the [MASTER] button from the PATTERN Play or Patch mode to go to the MASTER mode.
The MASTER settings apply to all styles and songs.
Master Setup Procedure Master Effect 2

1. Press [MASTER] while in the PATTERN Play or Patch mode Master Effects provide a number of sophisticated sound process-
The Pattern Mode

to access the Master EQ display page. ing options at the final output stage of the RS7000.
2. Use [Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4] to make the required settings. A block diagram of the Master Effects is given below.
3. Press [MASTER] to go to the Master Effect page.
NOTE
5. Use the [EXIT] to move back to the Master EQ page, and • The Master EQ and Master Effects do not
finally to return to the PATTERN Play (or Patch) mode. apply to the assignable outputs.
• The Master EQ and Master effects apply to all
signals output via the stereo outputs, and are
NOTE ideal for final “master” processing of the
When you need to make large value changes sound.
than 1.
Display Parameters
[1] Master EQ Page
Master EQ
[PATTERN] → [MASTER]
The Master EQ is a 4-band equalizer which can be used to adjust
the sound at the final output stage of the RS7000.
The Master EQ allows the type of response control shown in
the graph below via 3 parameter pages: GAIN, FRE-
QUENCY, and Q.
LOW MID1 MID2 HIGH

Q Q Q Q
Level 1 2 3 4 [F4]
LOW HIGH
GAIN GAIN
MID1 MID2
GAIN GAIN
Frequency 1 LOW GAIN ............................................................ [Knob 1]

LOW MID1 MID2 HIGH
FREQ. FREQ. FREQ. FREQ. [Settings] -24 dB ~ +24 dB
Sets the amount of low-frequency gain (boost or cut).
2 MID1 GAIN ............................................................ [Knob 2]

[Settings] -12 dB ~ +12 dB
Sets the amount of low-mid gain (boost or cut).
RS7000 111
3 MID 2 GAIN ............................................................[Knob 3] 0 MID 1 Q ................................................................... [Knob 2]

[Settings] -12 dB ~ +12 dB [Settings] 0.01 ~ 12.0
Sets the amount of high-mid gain (boost or cut). Sets the Q (bandwidth) of the low-mid EQ band. Lower val-
ues produce a broader bandwidth — i.e. a wider range of fre-
4 HIGH GAIN.............................................................[Knob 4] quencies will be boosted or cut.
[Settings] -12 dB ~ +12 dB
A MID 2 Q ................................................................... [Knob 3]
Sets the amount of high-frequency gain (boost or cut).
[Settings] 0.01 ~ 12.0
Sets the Q (bandwidth) of the high-mid EQ band. Lower val-
ues produce a broader bandwidth — i.e. a wider range of fre-
quencies will be boosted or cut.
B HIGH Q ................................................................... [Knob 4]
[F1] [F4] [Settings] 0.01 ~ 12.0

5 6 7 8
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] Sets the Q (bandwidth) of the high EQ band. Lower values
produce a broader bandwidth — i.e. a wider range of fre-
5 LOW FREQUENCY ............................................[Knob 1]
[Settings] 63 Hz ~ 2.0 kHz
Sets the frequency of the low EQ band. [2] Master Effect Page
6 MID 1 FREQUENCY ...........................................[Knob 2] [PATTERN] → [MASTER] × 2

Sets the frequency of the low-mid EQ band. 1
7 MID 2 FREQUENCY ...........................................[Knob 3]

Sets the frequency of the high-mid EQ band. [F4]
2 3 4 5
8 HIGH FREQUENCY............................................[Knob 4]
Sets the frequency of the high EQ band.
[F1] [F4]
6 7 8 9
9 0 A B
[F1]
9 0 A B
9 LOW Q .....................................................................[Knob 1]
[Settings] 0.01 ~ 12.0
[F1] [F4]
0 A B C
Sets the Q (bandwidth) of the low EQ band. Lower values [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]
produce a broader bandwidth — i.e. a wider range of fre-
[F1] [F4]
D E F G
112 RS7000
5 KNOB 4 ASSIGN ................................................ [Knob 4]

[Settings]
Effect parameter 1 ~ 16 (Refer to the “Effect
Parameter List” on page 315)
Specifies the parameter to be controlled by [CONTROL

KNOB 4].
[F1] H I J K The parameters which can be assigned depend on the selected
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] effect type.
The effect parameter to be controlled by the control knob can
be independently assigned for each effect type.
1 EFFECT TYPE ................ MASTER EFFECT Select Knob
[Settings] ISOLATION, D-FILTER, CTRL DELAY, 6 ~ K EFFECT PARAMETERS 1 ~ 16 2
MULTI COMP, RING MOD, V-DIST, LO-FI, ............................................................ [Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4]
SLICE
The Pattern Mode

These settings adjust the corresponding effect parameters,
Selects the master effect type from the 8 types provided. thus determining the sound of the effect.
The number and type of available parameters depend on the
2 KNOB 1 ASSIGN .................................................[Knob 1] selected effect type.
[Settings] Refer to page 315 of the Appendix for information on the
Effect parameter 1 ~ 16 (Refer to the “Effect parameters for each effect type.

KNOB 1].
The parameters which can be assigned depend on the selected
effect type.
3 KNOB 2 ASSIGN .................................................[Knob 2]

[Settings]

KNOB 2].
effect type.
4 KNOB 3 ASSIGN .................................................[Knob 3]

[Settings]

KNOB 3].
effect type.
RS7000 113
12. Saving to Memory Card or Disk
The SAVE sub-mode allows you save and load data to or from standard memory cards — available at
many electronics and computer stores — or SCSI disks.
5 display pages are provided: Save, Export, Rename, Delete, and Format.
Press [SAVE] from the PATTERN Play or Patch mode to go to the SAVE sub mode. The SAVE sub mode
cannot be selected, however, during pattern playback or recording.
Handling the Memory Card NOTE

(SmartMediaTM*) *"During access" includes save, load, format,
delete, and directory creation operations. Also,
Be sure to handle Memory Cards with care. Follow the important be aware that the instrument will automatically
precautions below. access the Memory Card to check the media
type when it is inserted while the instrument is
● Compatible Memory Card Type turned on.
3.3V(3V) Memory Cards can be used. 5V type Memory Cards
are not compatible with this instrument.
A blank 8MB Memory Card has been included in your instru-
ment.
* SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation. CAUTION
● Memory Capacity Never attempt to remove the Memory Card or
There are five types of Memory Cards: 2MB/4MB/8MB/16MB/ turn the power off during accessing. Doing so
32MB. A Memory Card with the memory capacity exceeding can damage the data on the instrument/Mem-
32MB can also be used if it conforms to the standards of SSFDC ory Card and possibly the Memory Card itself.
(Solid State Memory Card: another name of SmartMedia) Forum.
● Inserting/Removing Memory Cards Formatting Memory Cards

Before using a Memory Card with your instrument it must first be
To insert a Memory Card: formatted. Once it is formatted all data on it will be erased. Be
Hold the Memory Card so that the connector section (gold) of the sure to check if the data is unnecessary for you or not, before-
Memory Card is facing downward and forward, towards the hand.
Memory Card slot. Carefully insert the Memory Card into the
slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it is fitted in place.
* Don’t insert the Memory Card in wrong direction. CAUTION
* Don’t insert anything other than a Memory Card in the slot.
The supplied memory card contains style data
To remove a Memory Card: when initially shipped. Use a separate memory
Before removing the Memory Card, be sure to confirm that the card or save the style data to an external SCSI
Memory Card is not in use (see the following note), or it is not disk if you want to keep this style data.
being accessed by the instrument. Then pull the Memory Card
out slowly by hand.
NOTE
* The Memory Cards formatted with this instru-
ment may become unusable with other instru-
ments.
114 RS7000
● About the Memory Cards Installing the security bracket

To handle Memory Cards with care: You can install an optional security bracket to prevent theft of the
• There are times when static electricity affects Memory Cards. memory card. Install the security bracket as needed.
Before you handle Memory Cards, to reduce the possibility of
static electricity, touch the metal parts such as a door knob and
aluminum sash.
• Be sure to remove the Memory Card from the Memory Card
slot when it is not in use for a long time.
• Do not expose the Memory Card to direct sunlight, extremely
high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liq-
uids. 2
• Do not place heavy objects on a Memory Card or bend or apply
The Pattern Mode

pressure to the Memory Card in any way. IMPORTANT
• Do not touch the metal part (gold) of the Memory Card or put If the security bracket is installed, it will not be
any metallic plate onto the metal part. possible to insert or remove the memory card.
• Do not expose the Memory Card to magnetic fields, such as Before you install the security bracket, check to
those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since see whether the memory card is inserted in the
memory card slot.
magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the
Memory Card, rendering it unreadable.
• Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a
Memory Card. Also make sure that labels are attached in the Procedure
proper location.
1. Be sure that you have the following at hand before starting
To protect your data (Write-protect): the installation.
To prevent inadvertent erasure of important data, stick the write- • Security bracket
protect seal (provided in the Memory Card package) onto the • Phillips screwdriver: Magnetic-tipped screwdriver is rec-
designated area (within a circle) of the Memory Card. ommended.
Conversely speaking, to save data on the Memory Card, make 2. Remove the two screws at either side of the memory card
sure to remove the write-protect seal from the Card. slot.
Do not reuse the seal that is peeled off.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the
locations shown below.
Write-protect seal
Data Backup
For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you keep
two copies of important data on separate Memory Cards. This 3. Attach the security bracket.
gives you a backup if one Memory Card is lost or damaged. Position the security bracket in the correct orientation (see
illustration below), and use the two screws you removed in
Step 2 to fasten it in place.
RS7000 115
About Disks ● ALL

All data in the RS7000 memory is saved as a single file.
• Only DOS-format disks (The CD-ROM format is ISO9660 ALL files include the following data:
All style data ......................... Style 01 ~ 64 (including 16 pat-
Level 1) can be used by the RS7000. Disks formatted by the
terns and 256 phrases per style).
RS7000 are formatted using DOS format. All pattern chain data ............ Pattern chain 01 ~ 20
• The RS7000 cannot write to CD-R/RW disks. All song data .......................... Song 01 ~ 20
• Disks formatted to DOS format by a personal computer can be All sample voices .................. Local sample voices 001 ~ 128
used with the RS7000, but we recommend using disks format- and common sample voices 001 ~
128 for each style and song.
ted by the RS7000.
System setup ......................... Utility mode and other settings.
• When formatted using the RS7000, disks with a capacity of
less than 260 MB are formatted using FAT16 format, and larger
disks are formatted using FAT32 format. File Extensions
• MO disks which can be used with the RS7000 include 128 MB,
230 MB, and 540 MB types. MO disks with a capacity of 640 When any of the files described above are saved, an appropriate
MB and above cannot be used. 3-character file extension is added automatically to differentiate
• The RS7000 can use up to 2 GB removable disks. Even if a the file type.
PATT .................................. .R2P
larger disk is connected the RS7000 will use a maximum of 2
SONG................................. .R2S
GB. Further, all removable disks are formatted using FAT16 SMF ................................... .MID
format. WAV ................................... .WAV
ALL.................................... .R2A
When a PATT, SONG or ALL file is saved, the sample data for
About File Types the sample voices is automatically saved with an R3P, R3S, or
R3A extension, respectively. When any of these file is then
Files Types Handled In the Save Page loaded, the corresponding sample data is also loaded automati-
cally.
When organizing the files on a computer, place the “.R2P” and
The file styles handled via the SAVE page (Chapter 2: Pattern “.R3P”, “.R2S” and “.R3S”, “.R2A” and “.R3A” in the same
Mode, Chapter 3: Pattern Chain Mode, Chapter 4: Song Mode) folder, respectively. Also make sure that the names of the data file
are described in this section. and paired sample data file are the same in the first 8 characters of
the file names, not including the extension.
● PATT (Pattern)
All data included in the selected style is saved as a single file.
In addition to all 16 patterns in the style, corresponding to sec-
File Types Handled In the Load Page
tions A through P, and all user phrases, PATT files include
groove, play effect, MIDI delay, mixer, voice edit, effect, setup,
and master settings. Further, when a style uses local samples or The file styles handled via the LOAD page (Chapter 2: Pattern
common sample voices, the samples are saved as well. Mode, Chapter 3: Pattern Chain Mode, Chapter 4: Song Mode)
are described in this section.
● SONG
All data included in the selected song is saved as a single file. ● PATT (Pattern)
Song files include the MIDI data recorded in tracks 1 through 16, A single style is loaded into the specified style number in the
groove, play effect, MIDI delay, mixer, voice edit, effect, and internal memory from a PATT type (.R2P) or ALL type (.R2A)
setup settings. Further, when a song uses local samples or com- file.
mon sample voices, the samples are saved as well. When an ALL type (.R2A) file is selected, the style to be loaded
can be specified from multiple styles saved in the ALL file.
● SMF (Standard MIDI File) In addition to all 16 patterns in the style, corresponding to sec-
Only the performance data included in the selected pattern is tions A through P, and all user phrases, PATT files include
saved to a format-0 standard MIDI file. groove, play effect, MIDI delay, mixer, voice edit, effect, setup,
and master settings. Further, when a style uses samples the sam-
● WAV (Wave) ples are included in the file as well.
The selected sample is saved in WAV format.
116 RS7000
NOTE NOTE
When the style to be loaded includes common ALL (R2A) files include all data in the RS7000
sample voices, if common sample voices with internal memory, as follows:
the same numbers already exist in the internal All style data ................. Style 01 ~ 64 (includ-
memory the “ALL SKIP” and “RENUMBER” ing 16 patterns and
options become available. 256 phrases per
When “ALL SKIP” is selected common sample style).
voices with duplicate numbers are not loaded. All pattern chain data..... Pattern chain 01 ~ 20
When “RENUMBER” is selected the common All song data.................. Song 01 ~ 20
sample voices are loaded into vacant numbers. All sample voices........... Local sample voices
001 ~ 128 and com-
Pattern Data On Disk Internal Sample Voice Memory

mon sample voices
001 ~ 128 for each
2
Overwrite
Local Sample Voice Load Destination Style style and song.
Local Sample Voice
The Pattern Mode

001 ~ 127 System setup................. Utility mode and other
Common Sample Voice settings.
Common Sample Voice
Select “ALL SKIP”
001 ~ 127
or “RENUMBER”
● SMPL (Sample Voice)

A specified sample from multiple sample voices included in a
PATT (.R2P), SONG (.R2S) or ALL (.R2A) type file can be
● SONG loaded to the specified sample voice number.
A single song is loaded into the specified song number in the
● SMF (Standard MIDI File)
internal memory from a SONG type (.R2S) or ALL type (.R2A)
Sequence data can be loaded into the currently selected pattern
file.
from an SMF (Standard MIDI File, format-0) type file.
When an ALL type (.R2A) file is selected, the style to be loaded
can be specified from multiple styles saved in the ALL file.
● RM1x PATT
In addition to all 16 sequence tracks, the BPM track and scene/
Pattern data saved in RM1x pattern format can be loaded into the
mute track, SONG files include groove, play effect, MIDI delay,
currently selected RS7000 style.
mixer, voice edit, effect, setup, and master settings. Further, when
a song uses samples the samples are included in the file as well. ● RM1x SONG
RM1x SONG type files can be loaded into the currently selected
NOTE SONG number.
When a song to be loaded includes common ● SAMPLE

voice samples, the procedure is the same as for Sample data and WAV files can be loaded into the specified inter-
PATT files, above. nal sample voice number.
Data saved to a SCSI disk by the devices listed below can be
imported:
● ALL A5000, A4000, A3000 ....... Sample (From SCSI disk)
An ALL type (.R2A) file is loaded and all internal memory SU700 ................................ Sample (From SCSI disk)
except the system setup data is overwritten. Computer............................ AIFF file (.AIF),
WAV file (.WAV, from SCSI disk or memory card, 8/16-bit linear,
● ALL+SYSTEM mono/stereo)
An ALL type (.R2A) file is loaded and all internal memory
including the system setup data is overwritten.
NOTE
• Some imported samples may play at an unex-
pected pitch, loop playback may change, or
the sound quality may vary.
• Programs and samples saved to SCSI disk in
AKAI S1000 or S3000 format can be imported
by the RS7000 (with some exceptions).
• Akai-format disks and other CD-ROMs cannot
be used at the same time.
* Any product names and company names
which appear in this document are trade-
marks or registered trademarks of the respec-
tive companies.
RS7000 117
Save Page Structure [1] Save Page
The SAVE sub-mode includes the following display pages. Saves internal data to a memory card or disk.
Saves data from the internal memory to memory card or disk. Save Procedure
1. Press the [SAVE] button from the PATTERN Play or Patch

mode to go to the Save page.
2. Use [Knob 1] (FILE TYPE) to select the type of file you want
to save.
3. If the “PATT” file type is selected, use [Knob 2] (PATTERN)
to select the style to be saved.
4. Press [F4] (CARD/SCSI) to specify whether you want to save
● Export...(Page 120) to a memory card or disk.
Saves the selected sample or pattern to memory card or disk in a 5. Press [F1] (OK) to go to the save execution page.
standard format — SMF or WAV — that can be handled by a per-
6. Use [Knob 1] (FILE NAME) and the keyboard to enter a file
sonal computer.
name.
7. Use [Knob 3] to select the folder to which the file is to be
saved.
Select “CurrentDir” at the top of the list to save to the cur-
rently selected folder.
As necessary use [F3]( )/[F4](OPEN) to move between
folders, or [F2](NEW) to create a new folder.
NOTE
● Rename...(Page 122)
When the save destination is SCSI it is neces-
Changes the file name of a file stored on memory card or disk.
sary to select the appropriate SCSI ID and parti-
tion in the SCSI Setup page.
8. Press [F1](SAVE) to execute the save operation.

If a file with the same file name already exists on the card or
disk, the “Overwrite? NO[F2]/YES[F3]” confirmation mes-
sage will appear.
Press [F3] if it is OK to overwrite the existing file and replace
it with the new file. Press [F2] to cancel the save operation
● Delete...(Page 123)
and return to the status prior to pressing the [F1] button (step
Deletes a specified file from memory card or disk.
5, above).
NOTE
When the file save destination is SCSI only
DOS-formatted disks can be used (disks for-
matted by the RS7000 are formatted using DOS
format).
● Format...(Page 124)
Formats a memory card or disk.
118 RS7000
Display Parameters 2 PATTERN .............................................................. [Knob 2]

[Settings] Style ..... 01 ~ 64
[PATTERN] → [SAVE]
Selects the pattern to be saved.
FILE TYPE = PATTERN, CARD or DISK = CARD This parameter is not available when the FILE TYPE param-
eter is set to “ALL”.
Available Icon
NOTE
Empty styles which contain no data cannot be
saved.
3 SCSI/CARD ................................................................... [F4]

2
1 4 2 3 [Settings] SCSI, CARD
The Pattern Mode

[Knob 1] [F1] [Knob 2] [F4]
SCSI .............. The hard disk, ZIP disk, or other
SCSI disk connected to the SCSI
FILE TYPE = PATTERN, CARD or DISK = SCSI
connector.
Disk Type
CARD ............ A memory card inserted in the
Available SCSI ID card slot.
Icon
Selects the disk or card to which the data is to be saved.

When CARD is selected and a properly formatted memory
card is in the card slot, a memory card icon will appear along
with the available memory on the card.
When SCSI is selected and a properly formatted disk is con-
nected to the SCSI connector, a disk icon will appear along
1 4 2 Partition Name 3 with the disk description, SCSI ID number, partition name,
[Knob 1] [F1] [Knob 2] [F4]
and amount of available space in the partition.
FILE TYPE = ALL, CARD or SCSI = CARD
4 OK ..................................................................................... [F1]
Available Icon Switches to the save execution page.
■ Save Execution Page

[PATTERN] → [SAVE] → [F1]
1 4 3
[Knob 1] [F1] [F4]
1 FILE TYPE..............................................................[Knob 1] 0
[F1]
[Settings] PATT, ALL
Specifies the type of data file to be saved. 5 FILE NAME ........................................................... [Knob 1]
For descriptions of the various file types see “About File
Types” on page 116. Moves the cursor for file-name entry.
Use [Knob 1] to move the cursor to the desired character
position, then use the keyboard to enter the desired character.
Refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 67, for character-entry
details.
RS7000 119
NOTE [2] Export Page
File names can be a maximum of 8 characters

Saves the selected sample or pattern to memory card or disk in a
in length (not including the extension). Further,
standard format — WAV or SMF — that can be handled by a per-
the file extension cannot be changed.
sonal computer.
Characters which cannot be used in file names
are automatically converted to “_”.
Export Procedure
6 Folder Select .......................................................[Knob 3]
1. Select the pattern containing the data to be exported while in
Selects the folder to which the file will be saved. the PATTERN Play or Patch mode.
To save to the currently selected folder, select “CurrentDir”
2. Press the [SAVE] button twice from the PATTERN Play or
at the top of the list.
Patch mode to go to the Save page.
to save.
4. If the “WAV” file type is selected, use [Knob 2] (TRACK) to
select the track which uses the sample to be saved.
5. If the sample assigned to the selected track is a sample kit
voice, use [Knob 3] (NOTE) to select the note to which the
5 7 6 8 9 sample to be exported is assigned.
[Knob 1] [F2] [Knob 3] [F3] [F4]
6. Press [F4] (CARD/SCSI) to specify whether you want to save
to a memory card or disk.
7 NEW ..................................................................................[F2]
7. Press [F1] (OK) to go to the save execution page.
Creates a new folder. 8. Use [Knob 1] (FILE NAME) and the keyboard to enter a file
The folder-name entry display will appear. name.
9. Use [Knob 3] to select the folder to which the file is to be
saved.
Select “CurrentDir” at the top of the list to save to the cur-
As necessary use [F3]( )/[F4](OPEN) to move between
folders, or [F2](NEW) to create a new folder.
10. Press [F1](EXPORT) to execute the export operation.
[Knob 2] [F3] [F4]
If a file with the same file name already exists on the card or
This page allows entry of file names up to 8 characters in disk, the “Overwrite? NO[F2]/YES[F3]” confirmation mes-
length. sage will appear.
[Knob 2] moves the cursor to the desired character position. Press [F3] if it is OK to overwrite the existing file and replace
The keyboard is used to enter a character at the cursor posi- it with the new file.
tion. Press [F2] to cancel the save operation and return to the status
Refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 67, for character-entry prior to pressing the [F1] button (step 5, above).
details. 11. Press [EXIT] twice to return to the PATTERN Play or Patch
Press [F4] to create a folder and return to the save execution mode.
page.
Press [F3] to abort folder creation and return to the save exe- NOTE
cution page.
• When the file save destination is SCSI only
8 (UP) ...........................................................................[F3] DOS-formatted disks can be used (disks for-
matted by the RS7000 are formatted using
Moves to the next highest folder in the folder hierarchy. DOS format).
• When the export destination is SCSI it is nec-
9 OPEN................................................................................[F4] essary to select the appropriate SCSI ID and
partition in the SCSI Setup page.
Opens the selected folder, moving down one level in the
folder hierarchy.
0 SAVE ................................................................................[F1]
Saves the file to the selected folder.
When “CurrentDir” is selected, the file is saved to the cur-
120 RS7000
Display Parameters 3 NOTE ....................................................................... [Knob 3]

[Settings] C-2 ~ G8
[PATTERN] → [SAVE] × 2
When the sample used by the selected track is a sample kit
FILE TYPE = WAV, sample kit voice selected voice, this parameter selects the note to which the sample to
be exported is assigned.
Sample Sample When the sample used by the selected track is a sample voice,
Available Space Icon
Number Name the number and name of the sample will appear on the dis-
play.
4 SCSI/CARD ................................................................... [F4]

[Settings] SCSI, CARD
SCSI .............. The hard disk, ZIP disk, or other 2
1 5 2 3 4 connector.
The Pattern Mode

[Knob 1] [F1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
card slot.
FILE TYPE = WAV, pitched sample voice selected
Selects the disk or card to which the data is to be exported.
Sample Sample
Number Name Available Space Icon card is in the card slot, a memory card icon will appear along
with the available memory on the card.
with the disk description, SCSI ID number, partition name,
and amount of available space in the partition.
5 5 OK ..................................................................................... [F1]
1 [F1]
2 3 4
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4] Switches to the export execution page.
■ Export Execution Page

FILE TYPE = SMF
[PATTERN] → [SAVE] × 2 → [F1]
Style Name
Available Space
Style Number Section
Icon
6 A 8 7 9 0
1 5 4 [Knob 1] [F2] [Knob 3]
[Knob 1] [F1] [F4]
6 FILE NAME ........................................................... [Knob 1]

1 FILE TYPE..............................................................[Knob 1]
Moves the cursor for file-name entry.
[Settings] WAV, SMF Use [Knob 1] to move the cursor to the desired character
Specifies the type of data file to be exported. position, then use the keyboard to enter the desired character.
For descriptions of the various file types see “About File Refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 67, for character-entry
Types” on page 116. details.
Copy-protected sample files cannot be exported as WAV
files. See “Notes on musical copyright” (Page 21). NOTE
File names can be a maximum of 8 characters
2 TRACK.....................................................................[Knob 2]
in length (not including the extension). Further,
[Settings] 01 ~ 16 the file extension cannot be changed.
Selects the track that uses the sample to be exported. Characters which cannot be used in file names
When the sample used by the selected track is a sample voice, are automatically converted to “_”.
the number and name of the sample will appear on the dis-
play.
RS7000 121
7 Folder Select ........................................................[Knob 3] Rename Procedure

Selects the folder to which the file will be saved.
To export to the currently selected folder, select “Current” at 1. Press the [SAVE] button 3 times from the PATTERN Play or
the top of the list. Patch mode to go to the Rename page.
2. Press [F1] (CARD/SCSI) to specify whether you want to
8 NEW ..................................................................................[F2] rename a file on a memory card or disk.
3. Use [F2]( ) and [F3] (OPEN) to select a folder.
Creates a new folder.
The folder-name entry display will appear. 4. Use [Knob 2] to select the folder and file to be renamed.
5. Press [F4] (RENAME) to go to the name-entry dialog page.
6. Use [Knob 2] (FILE NAME) and the keyboard to enter a file
name.
7. Press [F4] to execute the rename operation and close the
rename dialog display.
8. Press [EXIT] 3 times to return to the PATTERN Play or Patch
mode.
[Knob 2] [F3] [F4]
This page allows entry of file names up to 8 characters in Display Parameters

length.
[Knob 2] moves the cursor to the desired character position. [PATTERN] → [SAVE] × 3
The keyboard is used to enter a character at the cursor posi-
tion.
Refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 67, for character-entry
details.
Press [F4] to create a folder and return to the export execu-
tion page.
Press [F3] to abort folder creation and return to the export
execution page.
9 (UP) ...........................................................................[F3] 2 1 3 4 5
[F1] [Knob 2] [F2] [F3] [F4]
Moves to the next highest folder in the folder hierarchy.
0 OPEN................................................................................[F4] 1 FILE .......................................................................... [Knob 2]
Opens the selected folder, moving down one level in the The file or folder to be renamed.
folder hierarchy.
NOTE
A EXPORT ..........................................................................[F1] This function can be used to change the name
When “CurrentDir” is selected, the file is saved to the cur- of any file or folder on a memory card or disk.
2 SCSI/CARD ................................................................... [F1]

[3] Rename Page [Settings] SCSI, CARD
Changes the name of a file or folder. SCSI disk connected to the SCSI
connector.
NOTE CARD ............ A memory card inserted in the
When the target rename media is a SCSI disk, card slot.
files and folders on DOS-formatted disks can be
Selects the disk or memory card containing the file or folder
renamed.
to be renamed.
122 RS7000
When CARD is selected and a properly formatted memory 3. Press [SAVE] 3 times to go to the Delete page.
card is in the card slot, a memory card icon will appear. 4. Use [F1] ( ) and [F2] (OPEN) to select a folder.
5. Use [Knob 1] to select the folder to be deleted.
with the disk description, SCSI ID number, and partition 6. Press [F4] to delete the file.
name. 7. The “Are you sure? NO[F2]/YES[F3]” confirmation message
will appear.
3 (UP) ...........................................................................[F2] Press [F3] if it is OK to delete the file. Press [F2] to abort the
delete operation.
4 OPEN................................................................................[F3] mode.

NOTE
2
folder hierarchy.
The delete operation is irreversible. Proceed
The Pattern Mode

5 RENAME! .......................................................................[F4] with caution.
Folders which contain files cannot be deleted.
Opens the file rename and folder name dialog display. First delete the files in the folder, and then the
folder.
Display Parameters
[PATTERN] → [SAVE] × 4
[Knob 2] [F3] [F4]
This page allows entry of file names up to 8 characters in

length.
[Knob 2] moves the cursor to the desired character position.
The keyboard is used to enter a character at the cursor posi-
tion. Refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 67, for character-
entry details.
Press [F4] to rename the folder or file and return to the previ- 1 2 3 4
ous page. [Knob 1] [F1] [F2] [F4]
Press [F3] to abort rename and return to the previous page.
1 FILE .......................................................................... [Knob 1]
NOTE
The file or folder to be deleted.
Folder names can be up to 8 characters in
NOTE
length.
Both the file name and file extension can be Specifies the file or folder to be deleted from the
changed. Be sure that the file name is 8 charac- memory card or disk.
ters or less, and the file extension is 3 charac-
ters or less.
Characters which cannot be used in file names 2 (UP) .......................................................................... [F1]
are automatically converted to “_”.
3 OPEN ............................................................................... [F2]

[4] Delete Page Opens the selected folder, moving down one level in the
folder hierarchy.
Deletes files or folders.
4 DELETE! ........................................................................ [F4]
Deletes the selected file or folder.
Delete Procedure
1. Press the [SAVE] button from the PATTERN Play or Patch

mode to go to the Save page.
delete a file from a memory card or disk.
RS7000 123
[5] Format Page Display Parameters
Formats memory cards and disks. [PATTERN] → [SAVE] × 5
CARD or DISK = SCSI

Format Procedure
Partition Name
1. Press the [SAVE] button 5 times from the PATTERN Play or SCSI ID Disk Type Icon
Patch mode to go to the Format page.
2. Press [F1] (CARD/SCSI) to specify whether you want to for-
mat a memory card or disk.
3. If a SCSI disk is selected, use [Knob 3] to select the type of
formatting you want to apply.
NOTE 1 2 3 4
[F1] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] [F4]
Normally when formatting a hard disk, ZIP disk,
etc., it is best to start with LOGICAL formatting.
CARD or DISK = CARD
If LOGICAL formatting produces an error, then
try PHYSICAL formatting.
4. When the PARTITION format type is selected, use [Knob 4]

to select the disk partition to be formatted.
5. Press [F4] to begin the format operation.
6. The “Are you sure? NO[F2]/YES[F3]” confirmation message 1 4
will appear. [F1] [F4]
Press [F3] if it is OK to go ahead with the format operation.
Press [F2] to abort the format operation.
1 SCSI/CARD ................................................................... [F1]
mode. [Settings] SCSI, CARD
NOTE
connector.
• The format operation erases all data from the
target card or disk and is irreversible. Proceed CARD ............ A memory card inserted in the
with caution. card slot.
• Before using the above procedure to format a
Selects the disk or memory card to be formatted.
SCSI disk you will need to:
1. Press [LOAD] 3 times from the PATTERN
card is in the card slot, a memory card icon will appear.
Play or Patch mode to display the SCSI
Setup page.
2. Use [Knob 1] (MOUNT ID) to set the
with the disk description, SCSI ID number, and partition
RS7000 SCSI ID number.
name.
124 RS7000
2 FORMAT TYPE ....................................................[Knob 3]

[Settings] LOGICAL, PHYSICAL, PARTITION
LOGICAL....... Applies logical formatting to the
selected SCSI disk.
PHYSICAL..... Applies physical formatting to the
selected SCSI disk. Use this
option when LOGICAL formatting
produces an error. PHYSICAL for-
matting takes longer than LOGI-
CAL formatting.
PARTITION ... Formats a selected partition on 2
an already-formatted disk. This
option does not affect partitions
The Pattern Mode

other than the one selected for
formatting.
Selects the type of formatting to be used when a SCSI disk is

selected.
3 PARTITION ............................................................[Knob 4]
[Settings] 1 ~ 4
Selects the partition to be formatted when the FORMAT
TYPE is set to PARTITION.
4 FORMAT!........................................................................[F4]
Executes the format operation, initializing the selected card
or disk.
NOTE
• Disks formatted to DOS format by a personal
computer can be used with the RS7000, but
some partitions may not mount.
• Only 2 GB of space on removable disks larger
than 2 GB can be used.
• MO disks larger than 640 MB cannot be used.
RS7000 125
13. Loading from Memory Card or Disk
This sub mode is used to load data from a memory card or disk.
4 display pages are provided: Load, Import, SCSI Setup, and SCSI Communication.
Press [LOAD] from the PATTERN Play or Patch mode to go to the Load display.
NOTE
• Refer to “Chapter 12: Saving to Memory Card or Disk” for information about the types of memory cards
and disks that can be used with the RS7000. (Page 114)
• If the memory protect function is ON, “Memory Protected” will appear on the display when the [F1] button
is pressed and it will not be possible to load data. In this case go to the UTILITY mode System page (Page
257) and turn MEMORY PROTECT “OFF”.
Load Page Structure ● SCSI Communication...(Page 132)

Allows communication with the YAMAHA TWE Wave Editor
The LOAD sub-mode includes the following display pages. application running on a personal computer.
Loads data into the internal memory from memory card or disk.
[1] Load Page

● Import...(Page 129)
Loads sequence or sample data saved to disk using other equip- Loads data to internal memory from a memory card or disk.
ment, or saved to memory card or disk by a computer.
Load Procedure
1. Press the [LOAD] button from the PATTERN Play or Patch

mode to go to the Load page.
to load.
● SCSI Setup...(Page 131) 3. Press [F1] (CARD/SCSI) to specify whether you want to load
Provides access to a number of SCSI settings. from a memory card or disk.
4. Press [F4] (OK) to go to the load execution page.
5. Use [Knob 1] to select the file to be loaded.
If the file to be loaded is inside a folder, Use [F1] ( ) and
[F2] (OPEN) to move to the folder containing the file.
6. Use [Knob 4] to select the style or track to which the data is
to be loaded.
If the ALL file type was selected in step 2, this parameter
does not need to be set and will appear as a blank on the dis-
play.
126 RS7000
7. Press [F4] to execute the load operation. 1 FILE TYPE ............................................................. [Knob 2]
If the destination style or sample voice already contains data [Settings] PATT, ALL, ALL+SYSTEM, SMPL
the “Are You Sure? No[F2]/Yes[F3]” confirmation prompt
PATT (Pattern)
will appear.
The confirmation prompt will always appear when the “ALL” ............... A single style is loaded into the
file type is selected. specified style number in the
Press [F3] if it is OK to overwrite the corresponding memory internal memory from a PATT
contents. type (.R2P) or ALL type (.R2A) file.
Press [F2] to abort the load operation and return to the status ALL .................An ALL type (.R2A) file is loaded
of the RS7000 prior to pressing the [F1] button.
and all internal memory except the
system setup data is overwritten.
NOTE
ALL+SYSTEM 2
............... An ALL type (.R2A) file is loaded
When the LOAD service is a SCSI disk it is neces- and all internal memory including
The Pattern Mode

sary to select the appropriate SCSI ID and parti-
the system setup data is overwrit-
tion in the SCSI Setup page.
ten.
SMPL .............. A specified sample from multiple
sample voices included in a PATT
Display Parameters (.R2P), SONG (.RS2), or ALL (.R2A)
type file can be loaded to the speci-
[PATTERN] → [LOAD] fied sample voice number.
CARD or DISK = CARD Specifies the type of data file to be loaded.

For details about the various file types see “About File
Types” on page 116.
2 SCSI/CARD .................................................................. [F1]

[Settings] SCSI, CARD
2 1 3
connector.
[F1] [Knob 2] [F4]
card slot.
CARD or DISK = SCSI
Selects the disk or card from which the data is to be loaded.
Partition Name When CARD is selected and a properly formatted memory
SCSI ID card is in the card slot, a memory card icon will appear along
Disk Type Icon with the available memory on the card.
with the disk description, SCSI ID number, and partition
name.
3 OK ..................................................................................... [F4]
2 1 3 Switches to the load execution page.

[F1] [Knob 2] [F4]
■ Load Execution Page
[PATTERN] → [LOAD] → [F4]
RS7000 127
FILE TYPE = PATT When the selected FILE TYPE is SMPL

Selects the track to which the data will be loaded.
Style Name If a sample voice is assigned to the selected track and the
number of the assigned sample is the same as that of the sam-
ple to be loaded, the “REPLACE” appears to indicate that the
existing sample will be replaced by the loaded sample.
If no sample voices are assigned to the selected track then an
empty sample voice number will be displayed and “EMPTY”
will appear to indicate that the sample will be loaded to
empty memory.
4 5 8
[Knob 1] [Knob 4] [F4]
NOTE
FILE TYPE = ALL, ALL+SYSTEM • Select the destination style via the PLAY dis-
play.
• When the load operation is executed, any
existing data in the selected style number or
sample voice number will be overwritten.
6 (UP) .......................................................................... [F1]

4 8 Moves to the next highest folder in the folder hierarchy.
[Knob 1] [F4]
7 OPEN ............................................................................... [F2]

FILE TYPE = SMPL
folder hierarchy.
Sample Voice Number
When the FILE TYPE is set to PATT or SMPLE, ALL
(.R2A) and PATT (.R2P — only when FILE TYPE = SMPL)
files can be opened like folders to allow individual styles or
sample voices to be selected for loading.
4 6 7 5
[Knob 1] [F1] [F2] [Knob 4]
4 File Select ..............................................................[Knob 1]

Selects the file to be loaded. 8 LOAD! ............................................................................. [F4]
Only files matching the selected file type are shown in the
list. Executes the load operation.
If the file to be loaded is inside a folder, Use [F1] ( ) and If the destination style or sample voice already contains data
[F2] (OPEN) to move to the folder containing the file. the “Are You Sure? No[F2]/Yes[F3]” confirmation prompt
will appear.
5 PATTERN, TRACK .............................................[Knob 4] The confirmation prompt will always appear when the
“ALL” file type is selected.
[Settings] Press [F3] if it is OK to overwrite the corresponding memory
Style Select (when FILE TYPE = PATT) 01 ~ 64 contents.
Track Select (when FILE TYPE = SMPL) 01 ~ 16 Press [F2] to abort the load operation and return to the status
When the selected FILE TYPE is PATT
Selects the style to which the data will be loaded.
The name of the selected style is displayed.
128 RS7000
9. Press [EXIT] twice to return to the PATTERN Play or Patch

NOTE
mode.
When the file type is PATT and the style to be
loaded includes common sample voices, if com-
NOTE
mon sample voices with the same numbers
already exist in the internal memory the “ALL When the import source is a SCSI disk it is neces-
SKIP” and “RENUMBER” options become avail- sary to select the appropriate SCSI ID and parti-
able. tion in the SCSI Setup page.
When “ALL SKIP” is selected common sample
voices with duplicate numbers are not loaded.
When “RENUMBER” is selected the common
sample voices are loaded into vacant numbers. Display Parameters
Refer to “About File Types” on page 116 for
more information.
2
[PATTERN] → [LOAD] × 2
The Pattern Mode

CARD or DISK = CARD
[2] Import Page
Loads sequence or sample data which was saved to a SCSI disk

or memory card by other music equipment or a personal com-
puter.
2 1 3
[F1] [Knob 2] [F4]
Import Procedure
CARD or DISK = SCSI
1. Select the pattern to which the data is to be imported while in
Partition Name
the PATTERN Play or Patch mode.
SCSI ID
2. Press the [LOAD] button twice from the PATTERN Play or
Disk Type Icon
Patch mode to go to the Import page.
to import.
import from a memory card or disk.
5. Press [F4] (OK) to go to the import execution page.
6. Use [Knob 1] to select the file to be imported. 2 1 3
If the file to be imported is inside a folder, Use [F1] ( ) [F1] [Knob 2] [F4]
and [F2] (OPEN) to move to the folder containing the file.
7. If the file to be imported is a sample, use [Knob 3] (TRACK) 1 FILE TYPE ............................................................. [Knob 2]
and [Knob 4] (TYPE) to select the track and sample voice [Settings] SAMPLE, SMF, RM1x PATT
type to which the data is to be imported.
SAMPLE........ Sample data, WAV files (.WAV)
8. Press [F4] to execute the import operation.
and AIFF files (.AIF) can be
If the destination style or sample voice already contains data
loaded into the specified internal
the “Are You Sure? No[F2]/Yes[F3]” confirmation prompt
will appear. The confirmation prompt will always appear sample voice number.
when the “ALL” file type is selected. SMF (Standard
Press [F3] if it is OK to overwrite the corresponding memory MIDI File)....... Sequence data can be loaded into
contents. the currently selected pattern
Press [F2] to abort the import operation and return to the sta-
from an SMF (Standard MIDI File,
tus of the RS7000 prior to pressing the [F1] button.
format-0 or 1) type file.
RM1x PATT... Pattern data saved in RM1x pat-
tern format can be loaded into the
currently selected RS7000 style.
RS7000 129
Specifies the type of data file to be imported. 4 File Select ............................................................ [Knob 1]
Some imported samples may play at an unexpected pitch,
loop playback may change, or the sound quality may vary. Selects the file to be imported.
Voice edit and effect settings will not be reproduced when an Only files matching the selected file type are shown in the
RM1x PATT file is imported. Voices may also change. Fur- list.
thermore, sequence data in tracks which use preset phrases If the file to be loaded is inside a folder, Use [F1] ( ) and
cannot be reproduced. For details about the various file types [F2] (OPEN) to move to the folder containing the file.
see “About File Types” on page 116.
5 TRACK .................................................................... [Knob 3]
2 SCSI/CARD....................................................................[F1] [Settings] 01 ~ 16
[Settings] SCSI, CARD Selects the track to which the data will be imported when the
SCSI .............. The hard disk, ZIP disk, or other FILE TYPE is SAMPLE.
connector. 6 TYPE ........................................................................ [Knob 4]
CARD ............ A memory card inserted in the [Settings] PITCHED, KIT: C-2 ~ G8
card slot. Selects the sample voice to be imported when the file type is
set to SAMPLE.
Selects the disk or card from which the data is to be imported.
The available settings will depend on the type of sample
voice assigned to the selected track.
card is in the card slot, a memory card icon will appear along
with the available memory on the card. ● When a pitched sample is assigned to the selected
When SCSI is selected and a properly formatted disk is con- track.
nected to the SCSI connector, a disk icon will appear along Two choices will be available: PITCHED SAMPLE and
with the disk description, SCSI ID number, and partition SAMPLE KIT. When SAMPLE KIT is selected you will also
name. need to specify a note name.
“REPLACE” will appear on the display, and the existing data
3 OK......................................................................................[F4] will be overwritten when the data is imported.
Switches to the import execution page. ● When a sample kit is assigned to the selected track.
The sample voice type cannot be changed. You will need to
■ Import Execution Page specify the note name to which the data will be loaded.
[PATTERN] → [LOAD] × 2 → [F4] If the specified note name is empty, “EMPTY” will appear on
the display.
FILE TYPE = SAMPLE If a sample voice is assigned to the specified note name,
“REPLACE” will appear on the display and the existing data
Sample Voice Number
will be overwritten.
● When a sample voice is assigned to the selected
track.
Two choices will be available: PITCHED SAMPLE and
SAMPLE KIT. When SAMPLE KIT is selected you will also
need to specify a note name.
“EMPTY” will appear on the display, and the number of the
4 7 8 5 9 6 newly created sample voice will be displayed.
[Knob 1] [F1] [F2] [Knob 3] [F4] [Knob 4]
7 (UP) .......................................................................... [F1]

FILE TYPE = SMF, RM1x PATT
Style Number Section
8 OPEN ............................................................................... [F2]
folder hierarchy.
4 8 Pattern Name
[Knob 1] [F2]
130 RS7000
9 IMPORT ...........................................................................[F4] 4. Use [Knob 2] (MOUNT PARTITION) to select the partition

to be mounted.
Executes the import operation. 16 partitions are displayed in the list.
If the destination pattern or sample voice already contains Press [F3] (NEXT) to the next 16 partitions. Press [F3]
data the “Are You Sure? No[F2]/Yes[F3]” confirmation (PREV) back to the previous 16 partitions.
prompt will appear.
Press [F3] if it is OK to overwrite the corresponding memory 5. Press [EXIT] 3 times to return to the PATTERN Play or Patch
contents. mode.
Press [F2] to abort the load operation and return to the status
Display Parameters
NOTE
When an RM1x PATT file is imported all data 2
originally in the destination style number will be
erased.
The Pattern Mode

1 2 4 3
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [F3] [Knob 4]
[F1]
1 MOUNT ID .....................................................[Knob 1], [F1]

[Settings]
0 ~ 7 (the current SCSI SELF ID number cannot be
[3] SCSI Setup Page selected)
Provides access to a number of SCSI settings. Selects and mounts the SCSI device (disk) which will be used
Selects the disk and partition for save and load operation. for file transfer.
Use [Knob 1] to select the SCSI ID number, then press [F1]
to mount the selected device. Once the selected device is
SCSI Setup Procedure mounted it will be possible to select a partition on the device.
2 MOUNT PARTITION ........................................... [Knob 2]

1. Press [LOAD] 3 times from the PATTERN Play or Patch
mode to go to the SCSI Setup page. Selects a partition for file transfer operations from among the
2. Use [Knob 4] (SELF ID) to set the RS7000 SCSI ID number. partitions available on the mounted disk.
3 SCSI SELF ID ...................................................... [Knob 4]

NOTE
[Settings] 0 ~ 7 (the current MOUNT ID cannot be
The new SCSI ID number will take effect the selected)
next time the RS7000 power is turned on (i.e.
the system is re-booted). Be sure to restart the Sets the SCSI ID number of the RS7000.
RS7000 (turn the power off and on again) after SELF ID changes take effect after the RS7000 has been
changing the SCSI ID number. restarted.
4 NEXT/PREV .................................................................. [F3]

3. Use [Knob 1] (MOUNT ID) the select the SCSI ID number
16 partitions are displayed in the partition list.
of the disk to be mounted, then press [F1] to mount the
Press [F3] (NEXT) to scroll to the next 16 partitions. Or press
selected device.
[F3] (PREV) to scroll back to the previous 16 partitions.
RS7000 131
[4] SCSI Communication Page 1 TRACK .................................................................... [Knob 1]

[Settings] 01 ~ 16
Selects the track to which the edited wave data from TWE
About the YAMAHA TWE Wave Editor
will be returned.
The Yamaha TWE Wave Editor can be used to edit RS7000 wave 2 TYPE ........................................................................ [Knob 2]
data on a personal computer.
[Settings] PITCHED, KIT: C-2 ~ G8
Selects the type of sample data to be received from TWE.
TWE Communication Page Procedure The available settings will depend on the type of sample
voice assigned to the selected track.
1. Connect the RS7000 to a personal computer via the SCSI ● When a pitched sample is assigned to the selected
connector. track.
2. Launch TWE on the personal computer. Two choices will be available: PITCHED SAMPLE and
3. In the PATTERN Play mode select the pattern to which the SAMPLE KIT. When SAMPLE KIT is selected you will also
sample you want to edit is assigned. need to specify a note name.
“REPLACE” will appear on the display, and the existing data
4. From the PATTERN Play or Patch mode press [LOAD] 4
will be overwritten when the data is imported.
times to go to the SCSI Communication page.
5. Using TWE, transfer the sample to be edited to the personal ● When a sample kit is assigned to the selected track.
computer. The sample voice type cannot be changed. You will need to
Copy protected samples are invisible from TWE. Refer to specify the note name to which the data will be loaded.
“Notes on musical copyright” on page 21. If the specified note name is empty, “EMPTY” will appear on
the display.
6. Edit the wave data using TWE.
If a sample voice is assigned to the specified note name,
7. Use [Knob 1] (TRACK) to select the track to which the “USED” will appear on the display and the data cannot be
edited wave data is to be returned. imported.
8. Use [Knob 2] (TYPE) to select the sample voice type.
● When a sample voice is assigned to the selected
9. Using TWE, transfer the edited wave data back to the track.
RS7000. Two choices will be available: PITCHED SAMPLE and
10. Press [EXIT] 4 times to return to the PATTERN Play or Patch SAMPLE KIT. When SAMPLE KIT is selected you will also
mode. need to specify a note name.
“EMPTY” will appear on the display, and the number of the
newly created sample voice will be displayed.
Display Parameters
1 2
[Knob 1] [Knob 2]
132 RS7000
14. Pattern & Phrase Editing — The Pattern Jobs
The RS7000’s 37 pattern “jobs” can be used to edit and modify pattern and phrase data in a number of
ways.
● Job List
[Undo/Redo Category]
00 Undo/Redo Undo job cancels the changes made by the most recent operation, restoring the data P.134
to its previous state. Redo job cancel Undo and restores the changes.
2
[Note Category]
01 Quantize Adjusts the timing of note events by moving them closer to the nearest exact beat. P.135
The Pattern Mode

02 Modify Velocity Alters the velocity values of the specified range of notes. P.136
03 Modify Gate Time Alters the gate times of the specified range of notes. P.137
04 Crescendo Creates a crescendo or decrescendo over the specified range of notes. P.138
05 Transpose Transposes notes in the specified range in semitone increments. P.138
06 Glide This job is ideal for producing guitar-like slide or note-bending effects. P.138
07 Create Roll This job is ideal for creating fast drum-like rolls. P.139
08 Chord Sort This job sorts chord events by order of pitch. P.139
09 Chord Separate Use this job after the Chord Sort job, above, to create guitar-like upstroke or down- P.140
stroke effects.
[Event Category]
10 Shift Clock Shifts all data events in the specified range forward or backward by the specified P.140
number of clocks.
11 Copy Event Copies all data from a specified source range to a specified destination location. P.141
12 Erase Event Clears all specified events from the specified range. P.141
13 Extract Event This job moves all instances of specified event data from a specified range of a P.142
phrase to the same range in a different phrase.
14 Create Continuous Data Creates continuous pitch bend or control change data over the specified range. P.142
15 Thin Out Thins out the specified type of continuous data in the specified range to save memory P.143
space.
16 Modify Control Data Changes the values of a specified type of control change data in the specified range. P.143
17 Beat Stretch This job performs time-expansion or compression over the selected range. P.144
[Phrase Category]
18 Copy Phrase Copies a selected phrase to the designated destination phrase. P.144
19 Exchange Phrase Exchanges the contents of two specified phrases. P.145
20 Mix Phrase This job mixes all data from two selected user phrases — “a” and “b” — and places P.145
the result in phrase “b”.
21 Append Phrase Appends one phrase to the end of another to create one longer phrase. P.146
22 Split Phrase This job splits a selected phrase into two separate phrases. P.146
23 Get Phrase Copies a segment of sequence-track data from a song into the designated destination P.147
phrase.
24 Put Phrase Copies a selected user phrase into a specified area of a selected song. P.147
25 Clear Phrase This job deletes all data from the selected phrase. P.148
26 Phrase Name Use this job to enter or change a phrase name. P.148
RS7000 133
[Track Category]
27 Copy Track Copies all data of the selected type from specified source track to specified destina- P.148
tion track.
28 Exchange Track Exchanges the content of two tracks. P.149
29 Clear Track This job deletes all data of the selected type from the selected pattern track, or from P.150
all pattern tracks.
30 Normalize Play Effect This job rewrites the data in the selected track so that it incorporates the current Play P.150
FX/Groove/MIDI Delay settings.
31 Divide Drum Track Separates the note events in a drum phrase and places the notes corresponding to P.150
different drum instruments in separate tracks.
[Pattern Category]
32 Copy Pattern This job copies all data from a selected source pattern to a selected destination pat- P.151
tern.
33 Append Pattern Appends one pattern to the end of another to create one longer pattern. P.151
34 Split Pattern Splits a selected pattern into two patterns. P.152
35 Clear Pattern This job deletes all data from the selected pattern, or from all patterns. P.153
36 Style Name Use this job to enter or change a style name. P.153
PATTERN Job Procedure Precautions
• If there is no data in the specified range “No Data” will appear

Category Job on the display and the job can not be executed.
• If you make a mistake or want to compare the sound of the data
before and after executing a job, use the “00 Undo/Redo” func-
tion (Page 134).
• The job application range is specified in measures and beats as
follows:
If the range is 001:1:000 ~ 004:1:000, the job will effect
data from the 1st beat of the 1st measure up to the 4th
(last) beat of the 3rd measure.
1. Press the [JOB] button from the PATTERN Play or Patch
mode to go to the job list. • The specifiable beat range will depend on the meter. 1 ~ 4 can
2. Use [Knob 1] (CATEGORY) and [Knob 2] (JOB) to move be specified if the meter is 4/4, 1 ~ 8 can be specified if the
the cursor to the desired job. meter is 8/4, etc.
4. Use [Knob 2] (CURSOR ← →) to move the cursor to the var-
ious parameters, and [Knob 3] (VALUE -/+) or [SHIFT]+[F3]
00 Undo/Redo
→ Numeric Keypad to set the parameter values as required.
5. When the parameters are set press [F4] (DO!) to execute the The Undo job cancels the changes made by the most recent oper-
job. ation (job, edit, recording), restoring the data to its previous state.
“Completed.” will appear when the job is done. The Redo job cancel Undo and restores the changes.
6. Press [EXIT] twice to go back to the PATTERN Play or Patch Undo/Redo can also be executed in the Play screen etc. by press-
mode. ing [SHIFT]+[JOB].
NOTE
NOTE
If the memory protect function is ON, “Memory
Protected” will appear on the display when the Undo/Redo does not work with sample voice
[JOB] button is pressed and it will not be possi- operations.
ble to access the job list. In this case go to the
UTILITY mode System page (Page 257) and
turn MEMORY PROTECT “OFF”.
134 RS7000
3 Quantize Value
1 [Settings] 32nd-note
16th-note triplet , 16th-note
8th-note triplet , 8th-note
Quarter-note triplet , Quarter-note
16th-note and 16th-note triplet
8th-note and 8th-note triplet
Selects the quantize value (note timing) to which the note
2 [F4] data will be aligned.
4 Strength
1 Undo/Redo Indication
“Undo” or “Redo” appears on the display to indicate the job
[Settings] 000% ~ 100% 2
that is currently available. Undo and Redo are selected alter- The Strength value sets the “strength” by which note events
The Pattern Mode

nately. are pulled toward the nearest quantize beats.
A setting of 100% produces exact timing. A setting of 0%
2 Undo/Redo target results in no quantization.
Identifies the operation currently available for undoing or Quarter-note length

redoing.
“Undo Impossible” will appears when Undo/Redo cannot be Original timing
executed. (Quarter-note quantization
applied to the original data)
Quantize
Strength = 100%
01 Quantize Quantize
Strength = 50%
Quantization is the process of adjusting the timing of note events
by moving them closer to the nearest exact beat. You can use this
feature, for example, to improve the timing of a performance 5 SwingRate
recorded in real time. [Settings]
If quantize value is , , , or :
1 2 ............................................50% ~ 75%
If quantize value is , , or :
............................................66% ~ 83%
If quantize value is or :
5 ............................................50% ~ 66%
6 Delays notes on even-numbered beats (the back-beats) to

produce a swing feel.
[Knob 2] 43 [Knob 3] [F4]
For example, if the meter is 4/4 and the quantize value is quarter
notes, the 2nd and 4th beats of the measure will be delayed.
1 Phrase When a triplet quantize value is used, the last note of each triplet
[Settings] 001 ~ 256 is delayed.
When the quantize value is or , even-numbered or
2 Range beats will be delayed.
[Settings] Measure:Beat:Clock
Quarter-note length
001:1:000 ~ 257:1:000 Back beat Back beat
Sets the range of measures/beats/clocks over which quantiza- Original timing
tion is applied.
Quantize value
(Swing Rate = 50%)
Quantize value
(Swing Rate = 60%)
RS7000 135
The Swing Rate range depends on the selected quantize value.

NOTE
If the quantize value is , , , or If a swing value other than 100% results in

Front beat
notes being positioned after other non-swing
Back beat
notes, the latter notes are delayed accordingly.
6 Swing Gate Time

0% 50% 75% 100% [Settings] 000% ~ 200%
Specified range Adjusts the gate time (the length of time a note sounds) of the
even-numbered back-beat notes to enhance the swing feel.
A setting of 100% is equivalent to twice the length of the When a triplet quantize value is used, the gate time of the last
specified quantize value. note of each triplet is adjusted.
A setting of 50% produces exact timing and therefore no When the quantize value is or , the gate time of the
swing feel. Settings above 51% increase the amount of swing, even-numbered or beats will be adjusted.
with 75% being equivalent to a dotted-note delay. A setting of 100% retains the original gate time.
[Settings] 50 ~ 75% (50% is the initial value) If the resultant gate time 0 or less it will be set to 1.
If the quantize value is , , or

Front beat Back beat
02 Modify Velocity
This job alters the velocity values of the specified range of notes.
Velocity changes are calculated as follows:
0% 33% 66% 83% 100%
Adjusted velocity =
3
(original velocity × Rate) + Offset
Specified range If the result is 0 or less, the value is set to 1. If the result is higher
than 127, the value is set to 127.
A setting of 100% is equivalent to three times the length of
the specified quantize value. A setting of 66% produces 1 2
exact timing and therefore no swing feel. Settings above
67% increase the amount of swing, with 83% being equiva-
lent to a sextuplet delay.
[Settings] 66% ~ 83% (66% is the initial value)
5
If the quantize value is or
Front beat Back beat [Knob 2] 43 [Knob 3] [F4]
1 Phrase
0% 33% 50% 66% 100%
3 2 Range
Specified range [Settings] Measure:Beat:Clock
001:1:000 ~ 257:1:000
A setting of 100% is equivalent to twice the length of a or
Sets the range of measures/beats/clocks over which the job is
note. A setting of 50% produces exact timing and therefore
applied.
no swing feel. Settings above 51% increase the amount of
swing, with 66% being equivalent to a triplet delay.
3 Set All
[Settings] 50% ~ 66% (50% is the initial value)
[Settings] Off (0), 001 ~ 127
Sets the velocities of all target notes to the same fixed value
(1 to 127).
When set to “OFF” the Set All parameter has no effect. When
set to a value other than “OFF” the Rate and Offset parame-
ters are unavailable and appear as “***” on the display.
136 RS7000
4 Rate 1 Phrase
[Settings] 000% ~ 200%, *** [Settings] 001 ~ 256
Specifies the percentage by which the target notes will be
2 Range
shifted from their original velocities.
Settings below 100% reduce the velocities, and settings [Settings] Measure:Beat:Clock
above 100% increase the velocities proportionately. When 001:1:000 ~ 257:1:000
the Set All parameter is not “OFF” this parameter appears as Sets the range of measures/beats/clocks over which the job is
“***” and cannot be changed. applied.
3 Set All
[Settings] Off (0), 0001 ~ 9999
Original velocity (Vel)
96 64 48 32 2
Sets the gate times of all target notes to the same fixed value.
When set to “OFF” the Set All parameter has no effect.
The Pattern Mode

Rate = 50% (Vel)
48 32 24 16 When set to a value other than “OFF” the Rate and Offset
parameters are unavailable and appear as “***” on the dis-
play.
Rate = 150% (Vel)
127 96 72 48
4 Rate
5 Offset [Settings] 000% ~ 200%, ***
[Settings] -127 ~ +127, *** Specifies the percentage by which the gate time of the target
notes will be changed.
Adds a fixed value to the Rate-adjusted velocity values. Settings below 100% shorten the notes, and settings above
A setting of 0 produces no change. Settings below 0 reduce 100% lengthen the notes proportionately. When the Set All
the velocities, and settings above 0 increase the velocities. parameter is not “OFF” this parameter appears as “***” and
When the Set All parameter is not “OFF” this parameter cannot be changed.
appears as “***” and cannot be changed.
Original gate time (Gate)

32 32 32 48
Original velocity (Vel)
96 64 48 32
Gate time rate = 50% (Gate)

16 16 16 24
Rate = -20 (Vel)
76 44 28 12
Gate time rate = 150% (Gate)

48 48 48 72
Rate = +20 (Vel)
116 84 68 52
5 Offset
[Settings] -9999 ~ +9999, ****
03 Modify Gate Time Adds a fixed value to the Rate-adjusted gate time values.
A setting of 0 produces no change. Settings below 0 shorten
This job alters the gate times of the specified range of notes. the gate time, and settings above 0 lengthen the gate time.
Gate time changes are calculated as follows: When the Set All parameter is not “OFF” this parameter
Adjusted gate time = appears as “****” and cannot be changed.
(original gate time × Rate) + Offset
If the result is 0 or less, the value is set to 1.

Original gate time (Gate)
32 32 32 48
1 2
Offset = -20 (Gate)
12 12 12 28
5 Offset = +20 (Gate)

52 52 52 68
[Knob 2] 43 [Knob 3] [F4]
RS7000 137
04 Crescendo 05 Transpose
Creates a crescendo or decrescendo over the specified range of Transposes notes in the specified range in semitone increments.
notes.
1 2
1 2
[Knob 2] 3 [Knob 3] [F4]

[Knob 2] 3 [Knob 3] [F4]
1 Phrase
1 Phrase [Settings] 001 ~ 256
2 Range
2 Range
[Settings] Measure:Beat:Clock 001:1:000 ~ 257:1:000
001:1:000 ~ 257:1:000 Note C-2 ~ G8
Sets the range of measures/beats/clocks over which the job is Sets the range of measures/beats/clocks and note pitches over
applied. which the job is applied.
3 Velocity Range 3 Transpose

[Settings] -127 ~ +127 [Settings] -127 ~ +127
Sets the intensity of the crescendo or decrescendo. Transposes notes in the specified range in semitone incre-
The velocity values of the notes in the specified range are ments. A setting of +12 transposes up one octave, while a
gradually increased or decreased starting at the first note in setting of -12 transposes down an octave. A setting of 0
the range. The velocity of the last note in the range becomes produces no change.
the original velocity of the note + the Velocity Range value.
If the resultant velocity is outside the 1 ~ 127 range it is set
to 1 or 127 accordingly. Settings greater than 0 produce a
crescendo, and settings less than 0 produce a decrescendo. A 06 Glide
setting of 0 produces no effect.
Replaces all notes following the first note in the specified seg-
1 2 ment with pitch bend data, producing smooth glides from note to
note.
Original velocity This job is ideal for producing guitar-like slide or note-bending
(Vel)
64 64 64 64 effects.
Velocity range = +40
(application range =
(Vel)
1 2
001:1 ~ 003:1) 64 74 84 94
Velocity range = -40

(application range = (Vel)
001:1 ~ 003:1) 64 54 44 34
3
[Knob 2] 4 [Knob 3] [F4]
138 RS7000
1 Phrase 4 Step Clock

[Settings] 001 ~ 256 [Settings] Start 001 ~ 999
End 001 ~ 999
2 Range
Specifies the size of the step (i.e. the number of clocks)
[Settings] Measure:Beat:Clock between each note in the roll.
001:1:000 ~ 257:1:000 Both the starting and ending clock values can be specified,
Sets the range of measures/beats/clocks over which the job is making it easy to create rolls in which the step size varies
applied. from note to note.
3 Time 5 Velocity
[Settings] 000 ~ 100 [Settings] Start 001 ~ 127

End 001 ~ 127 2
Specifies the length of the glide. Higher values produce a
longer glide between notes. Specifies the velocity of the notes in the roll.
The Pattern Mode

Both the starting and ending velocity values can be specified,
making it easy to create rolls in which the velocity increases
4 PB Range
or decreases.
[Settings] 01 ~ 24
Specifies the maximum pitch bend range to be applied by the
glide job in semitone increments.
08 Chord Sort
This job sorts chord events (simultaneous note events) by order
07 Create Roll of pitch.
Creates a series of repeated notes in the specified range with the NOTE
specified continuous changes in clock step and velocity.
• The sort affects the order of the notes in the
This job is ideal for creating fast drum-like rolls.
EDIT page listing (Page 154), but does not
change the timing of the notes.
1 2 4 • When used to pre-process chords before
using the Chord Separate job (see next
page), Chord Sort can be used to simulate
the “stroke” sound of guitars and similar
3 instruments.
[Knob 2] [Knob 3] 5 [F4]
1 2
1 Phrase
2 Range 3
001:1:000 ~ 256:16:479
[Knob 2] 4 [Knob 3] [F4]
applied.
1 Phrase
3 Note [Settings] 001 ~ 256
[Settings] C-2 ~ G8
2 Range
Sets the note (the instrument in drum kit voices) to be rolled. [Settings] Measure:Beat:Clock
The note can also be entered via the RS7000 keyboard. 001:1:000 ~ 257:1:000
applied.
RS7000 139
3 Type 3 Clock
[Settings] UP, DOWN, UP&DOWN, DOWN&UP [Settings] 000 ~ 999
If UP the notes are sorted in ascending order.
Sets the number of clock cycles inserted between adjacent
If DOWN the notes are sorted in descending order.
chord notes.
UP&DOWN sorts chord notes on downbeats in ascending
order and chord notes on up beats in descending order,
NOTE
based on the grid setting, below.
DOWN&UP sorts chord notes on downbeats in descend- • Note that there are 480 clock cycles per quar-
ing order and chord notes on up beats in ascending order ter note.
• It is not possible to separate chords so that
Determines how the chord note data is sorted. they cross the next measure boundary or
chord.
NOTE
Guitar downstrokes are played from the 6th (low-
est) string to the 1st (highest) string, while
upstrokes are played from the 1st (highest) string
to the 6th (lowest) string. 10 Shift Clock
Shifts all data events in the specified range forward or backward
4 Grid by the specified number of clocks.
[Settings] 32nd-note , 16th-note triplet ,
16th-note , 8th-note triplet , Original data
8th-note , Quarter-note triplet ,
Quarter note
Quarter-note length
Specifies the type of note that will serve as the basis for the Clock = 000:1:000
Chord Sort job. Direction = Delay
Clock = 000:1:000
Direction = Advance
09 Chord Separate
This job slightly separates notes in chords within the specified 1 2
range, inserting a specified number of clocks between each note.
Use this job after the Chord Sort job, above, to create guitar-like
upstroke or downstroke effects.
3
1 3 2
[Knob 2] [Knob 3] 4 [F4]
1 Phrase
2 Range
1 Phrase 001:1:000 ~ 257:1:000
applied.
2 Range
[Settings] Measure:Beat:Clock 3 Clock
001:1:000 ~ 257:1:000
Sets the range of measures/beats/clocks over which the job is 000:0:000 ~ 255:15:479
applied.
Sets the amount by which the data will be delayed or advanced
in measures, beats, and clocks.
140 RS7000
NOTE 12 Erase Event

• Note that there are 480 clock cycles per quar-
ter note. This job clears all specified events from the specified range,
• If the Clock Shift job results in data being moved effectively producing a segment of silence.
beyond the beginning of the pattern, the data
will be grouped at the beginning of the pattern. NOTE
• If the Clock Shift job results in data being moved
beyond the end of the pattern, the data which When this job is applied to a phrase which uses
falls beyond the end of the pattern will be sample voices, the note events which trigger
erased. the sample voice will be erased so that the sam-
ple voice does not sound, but the sample voice
itself is not erased.
4 Direction
2
[Settings] ADVANCE, DELAY
The Pattern Mode

Specifies the direction in which the data will be shifted.
1 2
ADVANCE moves the data toward the beginning of the
sequence, while DELAY shifts the data toward the end of the
sequence.
11 Copy Event
This job copies all data from a specified source range to a speci- 3 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
fied destination location.
1 Phrase
CAUTION [Settings] 001 ~ 256
When Copy Event is executed any data already
existing at the Destination location will be over- 2 Source Range
written. [Settings] Measure:Beat:Clock
001:1:000 ~ 257:1:000
Sets the range of measures/beats/clocks over which the job
1 2
will be applied.
3 Event
[Settings] Note (Note events)
PC (Program change)
PB (Pitch bend)
CC (Control change):000 ~ 127, ALL
3 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] 4 [F4] CAT (Channel aftertouch)
PAT (Polyphonic aftertouch)
1 Phrase
EXC (System exclusive)
[Settings] 001 ~ 256 ALL (All events)
2 Source Range Sets the event type to be cleared erased.

[Settings] Measure:Beat:Clock All events are cleared when ALL is selected.
001:1:000 ~ 257:1:000 Individual control change numbers can be specified when
erasing control change events.
Sets the range of measures/beats/clocks from which the data
will be copied.
3 Destination Location
001:1:000 ~ 256:16:479
Specifies the location to which the data will be copied.
4 Times
[Settings] 01 ~ 99
Specifies the number of times the data is copied.
RS7000 141
4 Destination Phrase
13 Extract Event
This job moves all instances of specified event data from a speci- Selects the destination phrase.
fied range of a phrase to the same range in a different phrase.
NOTE
14 Create Continuous Data
If this job is applied to a phrase that uses a
sample voice, the note data that plays the sam-
Creates continuous pitch bend or control change data over the
ple voice in the specified range will be moved
specified range.
(when the event type is "Note"), and the sample
voice will no longer sound. When you want a
sample voice to sound in the destination 1 5 2
phrase, set the voice used by that phrase to
Sample voice in the MIXER page (Page 93).
3
4
7
1 2
[Knob 2] 6 [Knob 3] [F4]
1 Phrase
3 [Settings] 001 ~ 256
2 Range
4 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4] [Settings] Measure:Beat:Clock
001:1:000 ~ 257:1:000
1 Source Phrase
[Settings] 001 ~ 256 will be applied.
Selects the phrase from which events are to be extracted.
3 Event Type
2 Source Range [Settings] PB (Pitch bend)
[Settings] Measure:Beat:Clock CC (Control change):000 ~ 127
001:1:000 ~ 257:1:000 CAT (Channel aftertouch)
EXC (System exclusive)
Sets the range of measures/beats/clocks from which the data
will be extracted. Selects the event type to be created.
3 Event 4 Times
[Settings] [Settings] 01 ~ 99
Event Type Range Specifies the number of times the data creation is to be
Note ....................................................C-2 ~ G8, ALL repeated.
PC (Program change) .......................— For example, if data is created in the range M001:1:000 ~
PB (Pitch bend) .................................— M003:1:000 and the Times parameter is set to 03, the same
CC (Control change) .........................000 ~ 127, ALL data will be created at M003:1:000 ~ M005:1:000 and
CAT (Channel aftertouch).................— M005:1:000 ~ M007:1:000.
PAT (Polyphonic aftertouch)............— Using this job it is possible to insert continuous volume or fil-
EXC (System exclusive) ...................— ter cutoff variations to create tremolo or wow effects.
Selects the event type to be extracted.
Specific note and control change numbers can also be speci-
fied as required.
142 RS7000
5 Data 1 Phrase
[Settings] 000 ~ 127 [Settings] 001 ~ 256
(-8192 ~ +8191 for pitch bend data)
2 Range
Specifies the lower and upper limits for the data range to be
created. The left value is the lower limit, and the right value [Settings] Measure:Beat:Clock
is the upper limit. 001:1:000 ~ 257:1:000
6 Clock will be applied.
3 Event Type
Specifies the number of clocks to be inserted between each
[Settings] PB (Pitch bend)
created event.
CC (Control change):000 ~ 127, ALL 2
7 Curve CAT (Channel aftertouch)
The Pattern Mode

Selects the event type to be thinned.
Specifies the “curve” of the continuous data.
Refer to the graph below for approximate curve shapes.
Curve = +16 Curve = 0 (linear) Curve = -16 16 Modify Control Data

Changes the values of a specified type of control change data
End point — pitch bend, control change, aftertouch, etc. — in the spec-
ified range.
The data value is calculated as follows.
Start point
Value = original data × Rate + Offset.
This distance If the resultant value exceeds the allowable range it will be
specified by Clock
set to the maximum or minimum value.
1 2
15 Thin Out
Thins out the specified type of continuous data in the specified 3

range to save memory space.
6
NOTE 4 [Knob 2] 5 [Knob 3] [F4]
The Thin Out job will not work on continuous
data that has a clock interval of greater than 60 1 Phrase
clocks per event.
2 Range
1 2
001:1:000 ~ 257:1:000
will be applied.
3 Event Type
[Settings] PB (Pitch bend)
3 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4] CC (Control change):000 ~ 127, ALL
CAT (Channel aftertouch)
Selects the event type to be modified.
RS7000 143
4 Set All 1 Phrase

[Settings] Off (0), 000 ~ 127 [Settings] 001 ~ 256
(-8192 ~ +8191 for pitch bend)
2 Range
Sets all target events to the same fixed value.
When set to “OFF” the Set All parameter has no effect. When [Settings] Measure:Beat:Clock
set to a value other than “OFF” the Rate and Offset parame- 001:1:000 ~ 257:1:000
ters are unavailable and appear as “***” on the display. Sets the range of measures/beats/clocks over which the job
will be applied.
5 Rate
[Settings] 000% ~ 200%, *** 3 Time
Specifies the percentage by which the target events will be [Settings] 025% ~ 400%
shifted from their original values. Sets the amount of time expansion or compression as a per-
When the Set All parameter is not “OFF” this parameter centage.
appears as “***” and cannot be changed. Settings higher than 100% produce expansion, and settings
below 100% produce compression.
6 Offset
[Settings] -127 ~ +127, ***
(-8192 ~ +8191 for pitch bend, ***)
18 Copy Phrase
Adds a fixed value to the Rate-adjusted event values.
When the Set All parameter is not “OFF” this parameter
Copies a selected phrase to the designated destination phrase.
appears as “***” and cannot be changed.
CAUTION
17 Beat Stretch Any previous data in the copy destination will be
overwritten.
This job performs time expansion or compression over the
selected range. All events in the specified range - including note
step time, gate time, all event locations, etc., - are expanded or
compressed. 1 2
NOTE
Only MIDI data is affected by this job. Sample
voices are not expanded or compressed.
However, for samples recorded using the
SLICE+SEQ feature, the Beat Stretch job
5 3 [Knob 2] 4 [Knob 3] [F4]
expands or compresses the timing of the note
data, step times, and gate times that control
playback of the sliced samples. The sample 1 Source style
voice itself is not affected.
[Settings] 01 ~ 64
Specifies the style containing the phrase to be copied.
2 Source phrase
1 2
[Settings]
Phrase Category
US (User Phrase)
For the preset phrase categories refer to “Appendix”,
page 271.
Phrase Number
001 ~ (depends on phrase category)
[Knob 2] 3 [Knob 3] [F4]
Selects the phrase to be copied.
3 Destination style
[Settings] 01 ~ 64
Specifies the destination style.
144 RS7000
4 Destination phrase 1 Style, 3 Style

[Settings] 001 ~ 256 [Settings] 01 ~ 64
Specifies the destination phrase. Specify the styles containing the phrases to be exchanged.
5 Sample 2 Phrase, 4 Phrase

When the checkbox is checked sample voices used by the [Settings] 001 ~ 256
source phrase are copied to the destination style as local sam- Specify the phrases to be exchanged.
ple voices, and are assigned to destination phrase.
This parameter has no effect when no sample voice is used by
the source phrase.
20 Mix Phrase 2
NOTE
• When there is no memory available in the This job mixes all data from two selected user phrases — “a” and
The Pattern Mode

destination style for local sample voice data, “b” — and places the result in phrase “b”.
“Too Many Load Sample Voices” will appear
on the display and the sample voice data will Phrase “a” Phrase “b”
not be copied. If this occurs, use Sample Job
“02 Delete” (Page 246) to delete unused local
samples then try again.
Mix Phrase
• Undo/Redo (Page 134) can be used after a
sample voice copy operation, but will not Phrase “b”
apply to the sample voice.
• When the “5. Sample” box is checked and the
[F4] (DO!) button is pressed, the “Are You
Sure? Cancel [F2]/OK [F3]” confirmation
prompt will appear. [F3] will execute the Copy NOTE
Phrase job. If this job is applied to phrases which use sam-
ple voices, the sample voices will not be copied
or mixed.
19 Exchange Phrase
1 42
Exchanges the contents of two specified phrases.

Phrase
“a”
NOTE Phrase
This job does not affect sample voices used in “b”
the specified phrases. 3 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
1 Style a, 2 Phrase a
1 2 [Settings] Style a ........... 01 ~ 64
Phrase a........ 001 ~ 256
Specify phrase “a”.
3 Style b, 4 Phrase b
[Settings] Style b........... 01 ~ 64
3 [Knob 2] 4 [Knob 3] [F4]
Phrase b ....... 001 ~ 256
Specify phrase “b”.
RS7000 145
21 Append Phrase 22 Split Phrase
Appends one phrase to the end of another to create one longer This job splits a selected phrase into two separate phrases.
phrase.
Original phrase Split measure
Phrase “a”
Split Phrase
Append Phrase
Original phrase Split destination phrase
Phrase “b”
NOTE
NOTE
If this job is applied to phrases which use sam-
If this job is applied to phrases which use sample voices, the sample voices will not be split.
ple voices, the sample voices will not be
appended.
CAUTION
The job overwrites any data already existing in
1 2 the destination phrase.
b 1 2 3 4
3 [Knob 2] 4 [Knob 3] [F4]
1 Style a, 2 Phrase a
[Settings] Style a ........... 01 ~ 64
Phrase a........ 001 ~ 256 5 [Knob 2] 6 [Knob 3] [F4]
Specify phrase “a”, which will be appended to Phrase “b”.

1 Source Style, 2 Source Phrase
3 Style b, 4 Phrase b [Settings] Style .............. 01 ~ 64
Phrase........... 001 ~ 256
[Settings] Style b ........... 01 ~ 64
Phrase b........ 001 ~ 256 Specify the source style and phrase. After the Split Phrase
operation the section of the phrase before the specified split
Specify phrase “b”, to which Phrase “a” will be appended.
measure will remain, and the section following the split mea-
sure will be moved to the split destination phrase 6.
3 Meter
[Settings]
1/16 ~ 16/16; 1/8 ~ 16/8; 1/4 ~ 8/4
Sets the meter of the split phrase segments after the split
operation.
The phrase meter can be changed later.
146 RS7000
4 Split Measure 5 Copy Sample

[Settings] 002 ~ source-phrase length When the checkbox is checked sample voices used by the
(in measures) source track are copied to the destination style as local sam-
Specifies the measure at which the phrase will be split. ple voices, and are assigned to destination phrase.
5 Split Destination Style, the source track.
6 Split Destination Phrase
NOTE
[Settings] Style .............. OFF, 01 ~ 64
Phrase........... OFF, 001 ~ 256 • When there is no memory available in the des-
tination style for local sample voice data, “Too
Specify the destination style and phrase. After the Split
Many Local sample Voices” will appear on the
Phrase operation the section of the phrase before the speci-
fied split measure will remain in the source phrase, and the
display and the sample voice data will not be 2
copied. If this occurs, use Sample Job “02
section following the split measure will be moved to the split
Delete” (Page 246) to delete unused local
The Pattern Mode

destination phrase.
If the split destination style or section is OFF, the section
after the split measure will be erased.
sample voice copy operation, but will not
• When the “5. Copy Sample” box is checked
and the [F4] (DO!) button is pressed, the “Are
23 Get Phrase You Sure? Cancel [F2]/OK [F3]” confirmation
prompt will appear. [F3] will execute the Get
Copies a segment of sequence-track data from a song into the Phrase job.
designated destination phrase.
CAUTION
the destination phrase. 24 Put Phrase
Copies a selected user phrase into a specified area of a selected
song.
1 2 3
CAUTION
the destination track.
5 [Knob 2] 4 [Knob 3] [F4]

12
1 Source Song, 2 Source Track

[Settings] Song.............. 01 ~ 20
Track ............. 01 ~ 16 4
Specifies the copy source song and track.
3 Source Range 5 [Knob 2] 3 [Knob 3] [F4]

1 Source Phrase
Specifies the range of measures to be copied.
[Settings]
Phrase category US (User), Preset Phrase, see the
4 Destination Phrase
Appendix (Page 313) for information
[Settings] 001 ~ 256 on the phrase categories.
Phrase Number 001 ~ 256 (The available range may
Specifies the destination phrase. change depending or the category.)
Specifies the source phrase.
RS7000 147
2 Destination Song, 3 Destination Track 2 Delete Sample

[Settings] Song.............. 01 ~ 20 When the checkbox is checked, sample data assigned to the
Track ............. 01 ~ 16 selected phrase will be deleted.
Specify the destination song and track. This parameter has no effect when no sample voice is used by
the selected phrase.
4 Copy Measure
[Settings] 001 ~ 999 NOTE
Specifies the measure location in the destination track to
delete sample operation, but will not apply to the
which the phrase is to be copied. The phrase will be copied
sample voice.
without modification, regardless of the meter.
• When the “2. Delete Sample” box is checked
and the [F4] (DO!) button is pressed, the “Are
5 Copy Sample
You Sure? Cancel [F2]/OK [F3]” confirmation
When the checkbox is checked sample voices used by the prompt will appear. [F3] will execute the
source phrase are copied to the destination song as local sam- Delete Phrase job.
ple voices, and are assigned to destination track.
the source phrase.
26 Phrase Name
NOTE
• When there is no memory available in the des- Use this job to enter or change a phrase name. The name can be
tination song for local sample voice data, “Too up to 12 characters long.
Many Local Voices” will appear on the display
and the sample voice data will not be copied.
1
If this occurs, use Sample Job “02 Delete”
(Page 246) to delete unused local samples
then try again.
• When the “4. Copy Sample” box is checked
and the [F4] (DO!) button is pressed, the “Are [Knob 2] [F4]
You Sure? Cancel [F2]/OK [F3]” confirmation
prompt will appear. [F3] will execute the Put 1 Phrase Name
Phrase job.
Refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 67, for details on name
entry.
NOTE
25 Clear Phrase • Phrases cannot be selected from this display.

Select the phrase you want to name or
rename while in the PATTERN Play mode
This job deletes all data from the selected phrase.
(Page 75).
• Phrase names cannot be entered for empty
1 phrases.
27 Copy Track
Copies all data of the selected type from specified source track to
specified destination track.
2 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
1 Phrase CAUTION
[Settings] 001 ~ 256 The copy operation overwrites any data previ-
ously existing on the destination track.
148 RS7000
12 NOTE
• When there is no memory available in the
destination style for local sample voice data,
“Too Many Local Sample Voices” will appear
on the display and the sample voice data will
3 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4] samples then try again.
1 Source Style, Section, and Track apply to the sample voice.
[Settings] Source Style ................. 01 ~ 64
Source Section............. A ~ P
• When the “Sample” box is checked and the
2
Source Track ................ 01 ~ 16 Sure? Cancel [F2]/OK [F3]” confirmation
The Pattern Mode

prompt will appear. [F3] will execute the Copy
These first three settings select the source style, section, and
Track job.
track.
2 Destination Style, Section, and Track

[Settings] Destination Style.......... 01 ~ 64
Destination Section ..... A ~ P 28 Exchange Track
Destination Track......... 01 ~ 16
Exchanges the specified type of data between two specified
These three settings select the destination style, section, and tracks in the current style and section.
track.
NOTE
3 Data Type
[Settings] The style and section cannot be selected via
SEQ EVENT
this job. Be sure to select the style and section
containing the tracks you want to exchange
All events in the track.
PLAY FX/GROOVE/MIDI DELAY
before accessing this job.
The track’s PLAY FX. GROOVE, and MIDI DELAY set-
tings.
MIXER/VOICE EDIT 12
The track’s mixer and voice edit settings.
SAMPLE
If a sample voice is selected via Voice Select (Page 93) …
the selected sample voice.
If a phrase is selected via Voice Select … the sample
voice used by the phrase assigned to the source track.
Determine the type(s) of data to be copied. When a checkbox 3 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
is checked the corresponding data type will be copied.
1 Track, 2 Track
[Settings] 01 ~ 16
Specify the two tracks between which data will be exchanged.
3 Data Type
[Settings]
SEQ EVENT
tings.
MIXER/VOICE EDIT
Determine the type(s) of data to be exchanged. When a

checkbox is checked the corresponding data type will be
exchanged.
RS7000 149
29 Clear Track 30 Normalize Play Effect
This job deletes all data of the selected type from the selected This job rewrites the data in the selected track so that it incorpo-
pattern track, or from all pattern tracks. rates the current Play FX/Groove/MIDI Delay settings.
NOTE NOTE
The style cannot be selected via this job. Be • After the Normalize Play Effect job is exe-
sure to select the style containing the tracks you cuted the PLAY FX, GROOVE, and MIDI
want to delete before accessing this job. DELAY parameters for the track are initial-
ized.
• The style and section cannot be selected via
this job. Be sure to select the style and sec-
1 tion containing the tracks you want to normal-
ize before accessing this job.
2 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
1 Source Section and Track

[Settings] Source Section A ~ P, ALL
Source Track 01 ~ 16, ALL 1 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
2 Data Type 1 Track

[Settings] [Settings] 01 ~ 16, ALL (All sequence data)
SEQ EVENT
The track’s PLAY FX. GROOVE, and MIDI DELAY set- 31 Divide Drum Track
tings.
MIXER/VOICE EDIT
Separates the note events in a drum phrase assigned to a specified
track, and places the notes corresponding to different drum
SAMPLE
instruments in separate tracks (tracks 1 through 8).
The sample voice assigned to the selected track.
Determine the type(s) of data to be cleared. When a checkbox NOTE

is checked the corresponding data type will be cleared.
• This job requires 8 empty user phrases in
which to store the separated note data. If the
NOTE required phrases are unavailable the “Phrase
• Undo/Redo (Page 134) can be used after a Number Overflow” message will appear and
delete sample operation, but will not apply to the job will be aborted. If this occurs use Job
the sample voice. 25 (Clear Phrase) to delete unused phrases
• When the “Sample” box is checked and the and try again.
[F4] (DO!) button is pressed, the “Are You • The style and section cannot be selected via
Sure? Cancel [F2]/OK [F3]” confirmation this job. Be sure to select the style and sec-
prompt will appear. [F3] will execute the Clear tion containing the track you want to divide
Track job. before accessing this job.
• The note data is divided and copied to tracks
1 ~ 8 according to the GM-format drum voice
note assignments. Voices belonging to the
same group — such as the tom-tom voices,
for example — are copied to the same track.
• Since the full-edit and SFX-type drum voices
do not comply with the standard GM-format
note assignments, these voices will not be
divided properly.
150 RS7000
3 Data Type
1 [Settings]
PRESET PHRASE → USER
If the style data includes preset phrases, these are copied
to the user phrase.
Determine the type(s) of data to be copied. When a checkbox

is checked the corresponding data type will be copied.
NOTE
1 Track • When there is no memory available in the

destination style for local sample voice data,
[Settings] 01 ~ 16
“Too Many Local Voices.” will appear on the 2
Specifies the drum track to be divided. display and the sample voice data will not be
The Pattern Mode

32 Copy Pattern • Undo/Redo (Page 134) can be used after a
This job copies all data from a selected source pattern to a apply to the sample voice.
selected destination pattern. When the [F4] (DO!) button is pressed, the
“Are You Sure? Cancel [F2]/OK [F3]” confir-
1 2 mation prompt will appear. [F3] will execute
the Copy Pattern job.
33 Append Pattern
3 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
Appends one pattern to the end of another to create one longer

1 Source Style and Section pattern.
[Settings] Source Style ................. 01 ~ 64
Source Section............. A ~ P, ALL Original pattern “a”
Select the source style and section. If you select ALL for the
Source Section, the Destination Section is also automatically
set to ALL. Append Pattern
2 Destination Style and Section Pattern “b”
[Settings] Destination Style.......... 01 ~ 64

Destination Section ..... A ~ P, ALL
Select the destination style and section. If you select ALL for
the Destination Section, the Source Section is also automati- NOTE
cally set to ALL. • If this job is applied to patterns which use
When the destination style is empty, or the copy source or local sample voices, the sample voices will
destination section is set to “ALL”, the scene/mute memory not be appended.
contents are also copied. • If the pattern length becomes greater than
256 measures as a result of the Append Pat-
tern job, an error message will be displayed
and the job will be aborted.
RS7000 151
1 2 CAUTION
a the destination pattern.
b
1 3
3 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]

2
a
1 Source Style a and Section a
b
[Settings] Style a ............... 01 ~ 64
Section a........... A ~ P
4 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
Specify pattern “a”, which will be appended to pattern “b”.
1 Source Style and Section
2 Destination Style b and Section b
[Settings] Style a ............... 01 ~ 64
[Settings] Style b ............... 01 ~ 64
Section a........... A ~ P
Section b........... A ~ P
Specify the source style and section. After the Split Pattern
Specify pattern “b”, to which pattern “a” will be appended.
operation the section of the pattern before the specified split
measure will remain, and the section following the split mea-
3 Keep Original Phrase
sure will be moved to the split destination pattern 3.
If the checkbox is empty, the phrases that make up pattern
“a” are appended to the phrases that make up pattern “b”, and 2 Split Measure
the pattern “b” phrases are overwritten. [Settings] 001 ~ source-pattern length
If the checkbox is checked the pattern “b” phrases are left (in measures)
unaffected and the results of the append operation are written
to empty phrases. Specifies the measure at which the pattern will be split.
3 Split Destination Style and Section

NOTE
[Settings] Style ...................... OFF, 01 ~ 64
When the KEEP ORIGINAL PHRASE checkbox Section.................. OFF, A ~ P
is checked, this job requires twice the number
of empty user phrases as the number of tracks Specify the destination style and section. After the Split Pat-
containing data in which to store the appended tern operation the section of the pattern before the specified
phrase data. If the required phrases are split measure will remain in the source pattern, and the sec-
unavailable the “Phrase Number Overflow” tion following the split measure will be moved to the split
destination pattern.
message will appear and the job will be
When the split destination style or section are OFF, the mea-
aborted. If this occurs use Job 25 (Clear sures following the split measure are erased.
Phrase) to delete unused phrases and try The scene/mute memory data will only be copied when the
again. split destination style is empty or if “ SAMPLE” box is
checked.
4 Split Data Type

[Settings]
KEEP ORIGINAL PHRASE
34 Split Pattern If the checkbox is empty, the phrases that make up pat-
tern “a” are appended to the phrases that make up pattern
Splits a selected pattern into two patterns. “b”, and the pattern “b” phrases are overwritten.
If the checkbox is checked the pattern “b” phrases are left
unaffected and the results of the append operation are
Original pattern Split measure
written to empty phrases.
SAMPLE
If the checkbox is checked sample voices assigned to
Split pattern each track in the source pattern are copied to the split
destination style as local sample voices and are assigned
Original pattern Split destination pattern to the corresponding tracks in that pattern.
This checkbox has no effect if no sample voices are
assigned to the tracks in the source pattern.
Specifies the types of data to be split.

152 RS7000
NOTE
2 Keep Common Samples
• When there is no memory available in the If the checkbox is checked, the common sample voices used
destination style for local sample voice data, by the specified patterns will not be cleared.
“Too Many Local Voices” will appear on the
display and the sample voice data will not be NOTE
Local sample voices used by the specified pat-
tern will be cleared regardless of this setting.
2
36 Style Name
The Pattern Mode

prompt will appear. [F3] will execute the Copy
Pattern job. Use this job to enter or change a style name. The name can be up
• When the KEEP ORIGINAL PHRASE check- to 16 characters long.
box is checked, this job requires twice the
number of empty user phrases as the number NOTE
of tracks containing data in which to store the
Styles cannot be selected from this display.
appended phrase data. If the required
Select the style you want to name or rename
phrases are unavailable the “Phrase Number
while in the PATTERN Play mode.
Overflow” message will appear and the job
will be aborted. If this occurs use Job 25
(Clear Phrase) to delete unused phrases and
try again.
1
35 Clear Pattern
This job deletes all data from the selected pattern, or from all pat- [Knob 2] [F4]
terns.
When Section = All the scene/mute memory data is also cleared.
1 Style Name
1 Refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 67, for details on name

entry.
2 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
1 Style and Section

[Settings] Style ...................... 01 ~ 64, ALL
Section.................. A ~ P, ALL
Select the style and section from which data is to be cleared.
NOTE
If Clear Pattern is executed when Style is set to
ALL, the Undo function cannot be used.
RS7000 153
15. Phrase Editing
15. Phrase Editing
In addition to editing and deleting data recorded in user phrases, this sub mode allows insertion of new
events. It can be used to correct mistakes as well as add dynamics or effects such as vibrato to refine
and finish the phrase.
Press [EDIT] from the PATTERN Play or Patch mode to go to the phrase edit Edit Change page.
NOTE
• If the memory protect function is ON, “Memory Protect” will appear on the display and it will not be possi-
ble to edit, delete, or insert events. In this case go to the UTILITY mode System page (Page 257) and turn
MEMORY PROTECT “OFF”.
• “Events” include notes played on the keyboard, voice changes (program change), and all other perfor-
mance data recorded in a track.
Phrase Edit Procedure 5. When the parameter has been edited as required, press
[ENTER] to confirm and enter the edit (the event will stop
1. Select the track to which the user phrase is assigned in the
flashing).
PATTERN Play or Patch mode. • If the cursor is moved to a new event while the current
Tracks can be selected by pressing the appropriate key on the event is still flashing, editing of the current event is
keyboard while holding the [TRACK SELECT] button. cancelled.
2. Press [EDIT] to go to the PHRASE EDIT Edit Change page. 6. Press [F2] to delete the event at the cursor position.
● Inserting New Events

7. Press [F3] to go to the Edit Insert page.
• Events can be edited or deleted via this display page.

To insert a new event press [F3] to go to the event type
selection page.
8. Use this page to specify the event to be inserted, setting the
● Editing and Deleting Existing Events measure, beat, clock, and event type as required.
3. Use [Knob 1] to move the cursor to the event to be edited. 9. Press [F3] to insert the specified event at the specified loca-
tion.
• When the cursor is move to a note event the corre-
sponding note will sound. 10. Press [EDIT] to return to the EDIT Change page.
4. Use [Knob 2] to move the cursor to the event parameter to be

edited, and change the value as required. An edited event will
flash on the display. Display Parameters
• For details about all events and parameters refer to
“Chapter 7: Other Information”, page 263.
• The measure, beat, and clock can be edited to change 1 2
the location of an event, as required.
• While an event is flashing (being edited), you can use
the SUB MODE buttons as a numeric keypad to directly 3
enter parameter values. 4
5 6 7 8 9
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [F2] [F3] [Knob 4]
154 RS7000
15. Phrase Editing
1 TR (Track Number) 7 DELETE .......................................................................... [F2]

[Settings] TR01 ~ 16 Deletes the currently selected event.
Selects the track to which the phrase to be edited is assigned.
8 INSERT ........................................................................... [F3]
Select the track by using the keyboard keys while holding the
[TRACK SELECT] button. Inserts a new event.
For details on track selection refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”,
page 67. 9 VALUE .................................................................... [Knob 4]
Adjusts the value of the selected parameter.
2 View Filter Icon When the entire event line is flashing after operating [Knob
Indicates that the View Filter is set so that certain event types 4], the value can be directly entered by holding the [SHIFT]
are not displayed. and [F4] buttons and using the SUB MODE buttons as a
View Filter settings are made via the View Filter display numeric keypad. 2
page (Page 156).
The Pattern Mode

3 Measure, Beat, and Clock Insert Page
[Settings] Measure 001 ~ 256
Beat 1 ~ 16 (depends on meter) Press [F3] from the phrase EDIT page to access this page.
Clock 000 ~ 479 (depends on meter)
3
Indicates the location of the corresponding event. Changing
any of these values changes the location of the even accord-
ingly. 2
4 Event and Parameters

[Settings]
Events (sequence tracks)
1 4 5 6
: Note [Knob 2] [F3] [Knob 4]
: PB (Pitch Bend)
: PC (Program Change) 1 Event
: CC (Control Change)
[Settings]
: CAT (Channel Aftertouch) Events (sequence tracks)
: PAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch)
: Note
: RPN
: PB (Pitch Bend)
: NRPN
: PC (Program Change)
: SEXC (System Exclusive)
: CC (Control Change)
Parameters
: CAT (Channel Aftertouch)
Depends on the event type.
: PAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch)
Displays the type of each event. : RPN
For details about the event type and their parameters refer to : NRPN
: SEXC (System Exclusive)
NOTE Selects the type of event to be inserted.

For details about the event type and their parameters refer to
“TOP” and “END” are displayed at the begin- “Chapter 7: Other Information”, page 263.
ning and end of the data, respectively. “TOP”
and “END” are not phrase data and cannot be
2 Measure, Beat, and Clock
edited.
[Settings] Measure 001 ~ 256
Beat 1 ~ 16 (depends on meter)
5 ↑ ↓ (Cursor ↑ and ↓)..........................................[Knob 1] Clock 000 ~ 479 (depends on meter)
Specifies the location at which the new event will be inserted.
Moves the cursor up or down the event list to select an event
for editing.
3 Parameter
6 ← → (Cursor ← and →)...................................[Knob 2] The value for selected event. The available parameter(s)
depends on the type of event selected.
Moves the cursor left or right to select the parameter to be
edited for the current event.
RS7000 155
15. Phrase Editing
4 ← → (Cursor ← and →)...................................[Knob 2] Display Parameters

Moves the cursor left or right to select the parameter to be set
for the current event. [Knob 3]
[Knob 4]
5 DO......................................................................................[F3]
1 2
Inserts the specified event.
6 VALUE .....................................................................[Knob 4]
The value can be also directly entered by holding the
[SHIFT] and [F4] buttons and using the SUB MODE buttons
3 4 5 6
as a numeric keypad.
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [F3] [F4]
[SHIFT]+[F1]
View Filter Page 1 Event Checkboxes ...........................[Knob 3], [Knob 4]

[Settings] (ON), (OFF)
Sets the view filter.
The view filter determines which event types will appear in the Only events with checked boxes (i.e. “ON”) will appear in
edit list. It could be set, for example, so that only note events the event edit list.
appear in the edit list.
Press [EDIT] twice from the PATTERN Play or Patch mode to go 2 View Filter Icon
to the phrase EDIT mode View Filter page. This icon will appear if any event is not checked 1 (i.e. if
one or more events is “OFF”).
NOTE
“Events” include notes played on the keyboard, 3 CTRL NO (Control Number)
voice changes (program change), and all other ...................... [Knob 1], [SHIFT]+[F1] → Numeric Keypad
performance data recorded in a track. [Settings] 000 ~ 119, ALL
Specifies the control change numbers that will appear in the
edit list.
When the CONTROL CHANGE event type view filter
View Filter Procedure checkbox is ON, only the control change number(s) specified
here will appear in the edit event list.
1. Select the track to which the user phrase is assigned in the
PATTERN Play or Patch mode. 4 ← → (Cursor ← and →) .................................. [Knob 2]
Tracks can be selected by pressing the appropriate key on the
keyboard while holding the [TRACK SELECT] button. Moves the cursor to select a parameter.
2. Press [EDIT] twice to go to the phrase EDIT View Filter
page. 5 CLEAR ALL .................................................................. [F3]
3. Use [Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4] to make the required settings. Clears all checkboxes, turning display of all events OFF.
4. Press [EXIT] twice to return to the PATTERN Play or Patch
mode. 6 CHECK ALL ................................................................. [F4]
Checks all checkboxes, turning display of all event types ON.
156 RS7000
Chapter 3. The Pattern Chain Mode
About the Pattern Chain Mode ...................... 158

1. Sequential Pattern Playback
(Pattern Chain Play) .................................. 159
2. Creating Pattern Chains
(Pattern Chain Recording)........................ 161
5. Loading from Memory Card or Disk ........ 169
6. The Pattern Chain Jobs ............................ 171
7. Pattern Chain Editing................................ 175
RS7000 157
About the Pattern Chain Mode
About the Pattern Chain Mode
This mode is used for sequential pattern playback. Patterns can be chained to create complete songs,
and the results can be converted into an RS7000 song.
Press [PATT CHAIN] to go to the Pattern Chain Play screen of PATTERN CHAIN mode. The Pattern
Chain Play page will appear.
● Save [SAVE]...(Page 166)

PATTERN CHAIN
NOTE
Refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 51, for more ● Load [LOAD]...(Page 169)
information on patterns and songs. Loads data from memory card or disk.
The PATTERN CHAIN Mode SUB MODES
The PATTERN CHAIN mode has the following 7 sub modes.

● PATTERN CHAIN [PATT CHAIN]...(Page 159) ● Job [JOB]...(Page 171)
This mode is used to set up a sequence of patterns for playback, Accesses the pattern chain editing jobs.
and play the resulting chain. The following display will always
appear when the PATTERN CHAIN mode is first selected.
● PATTERN CHAIN Recording [REC]...(Page 161)
Record pattern changes, BPM changes, scene/mute changes, and
other elements of a pattern chain.
● Edit [EDIT]...(Page 175)

Allows the order of patterns recorded in a pattern chain to be
edited, and new tempo or scene/mute events to be inserted.
● Master [MASTER]...(Page 164)

158 RS7000
1. Sequential Pattern Playback (Pattern Chain Play)
Pattern chains are created and played in this mode.

Press [PATT CHAIN] to go to the PATTERN CHAIN mode.
NOTE
Refer to “2. Pattern Chain Recording” on page 161 for details on recording pattern chains.
Pattern Chain Playback Procedure Display Parameters
1. Press [PATT CHAIN] to go to the PATTERN CHAIN Play

display. 8 2 3
2. Use [Knob 1] (CHAIN) to select the pattern chain to be
played. 9
The Pattern Chain Mode

3. Press the sequencer [PLAY] button to start chain playback.
0
NOTE
• The parameters in the PATTERN CHAIN Play
1 3 45 6 7
display page can be edited during pattern
chain playback. Changes made during play-
[F2]
back are temporary and will not overwrite the [SHIFT]+[F1] [SHIFT]+[F2] [SHIFT]+[F3] [SHIFT]+[F4]
pattern chain data. Refer to “2. Pattern Chain
Recording” on page 161 for details on record-
ing pattern chain changes.
1 CHAIN ............ [Knob 1], [SHIFT]+[F1] → Numeric Keypad
2 Chain Name
than 1. [Settings]
• You can also use the SUB MODE buttons as Pattern Chain Number 01 ~ 20
a numeric keypad to enter values after hold- Chain Name Display only.
ing both the [SHIFT] and [F1] ~ [F4] button. Specifies the number of the pattern chain to be played.
3 STYLE ............ [Knob 2], [SHIFT]+[F2] → Numeric Keypad
4 SECTION ................................................... [F2] → [Knob 2]
RS7000 159
5 Style Name 8 OCT (Octave)

[Settings] [Settings] -5 octaves ~ +5 octaves
Style Number OFF, 01 ~ 64, END Shows the current octave setting of the keyboard.
Section A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, Each “ ” on the display corresponds to one octave down,
P and each “ ” corresponds to one octave up.
Style Name Display only. The keyboard octave can be changed by pressing the [KEY-
BOARD] button so that its indicator lights, and then using the
Displays the currently-playing style and section. Also allow
[OCT DOWN] and [OCT UP] buttons to set the octave.
the style and section to be temporarily changed.
Press the [OCT DOWN] and [OCT UP] buttons simulta-
If further style or section changes are record in the chain,
neously to restore the normal keyboard octave settings (no
however, those changes will take priority.
octave shift).
The STYLE parameter can be set to OFF to create breaks
(blank sections) in the chain (the chain continues playing).
When STYLE is set to END, playback will stop at that point. 9 Transpose
Press [F2] to move the cursor and use [Knob 2] to set the sec- [Settings] -36 ~ 0 ~ +36 (semitones)
tion. Transposes the pitch of pattern chain playback.
Transposition is set in semitone increments. A setting of “12”
NOTE transposes by one octave.
• Refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 51, for [Procedure]
more information on styles and sections. The transpose procedure is the same as in the PATTERN
• Sections can be changed by pressing the mode (Page 73).
[KEYBOARD] button so that its indicator goes
off, and then pressing the black key on the 0 Track
keyboard corresponding to the desired sec-
Shows the track numbers, and indicates whether the corre-
tion. (Page 72)
sponding track contains data, as well as the mute or solo sta-
tus of the track. The three track types available in the
PATTERN CHAIN mode (PATT, SCENE, and BPM) as
6 MEAS well as the tracks included in the currently selected pattern (1
(Measure) ..... [Knob 3], [SHIFT]+[F3] → Numeric Keypad ~ 16) are shown.
[Settings] 001 ~ 999 : The track contains sequence data.
Displays the current measure number. Can also be used to : The track is muted (no sound will be produced by this
change the current measure number. track). (TR01 ~ TR16)
: The track is empty (TR01 ~ TR16).
: The track is empty (PATTERN, SCENE/MUTE, BPM).
NOTE
[Track selection procedure]
• The [ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons can also be used With the difference that you can select BPM track, Scene/
to move from measure to measure (also dur- Mute track, or Pattern track, the procedure for selecting a
ing playback).
track is the same as when selecting a Patterne track. The
• Press [STOP] while holding [SHIFT] to set the
current measure as the jump location (the BPM track and Scene/Mute track can be selected by holding
measure to which the song position will jump down [TRACK SELECT] and pressing [TR-]/[TR+].
when playback is stopped). The jump setting The name or number of the selected track will be displayed in
can be cancelled by pressing [ ] or [ ] inverse video (black).
while holding [SHIFT].
[Mute & Solo Setting Procedure]
The mute and solo setting procedure is the same as in the PAT-
TEN mode (Page 74).
7 BPM ................ [Knob 4], [SHIFT]+[F4] → Numeric Keypad
[Settings] 001.0 ~ 300.0 (BPM)
Sets the pattern chain playback tempo.
Use [Knob 4] to adjust the BPM in steps of 1, or press [F4] to
move the cursor to the right of the decimal point and use
[Knob 4] to adjust in steps of 0.1.
NOTE
BPM can also be set by using the [TAP] button
(Page 68).
160 RS7000
2. Creating Pattern Chains (Pattern Chain Recording)
This function makes it possible to specify a sequence of patterns for pattern chain playback. Sections
switching, track muting, scene/mute changes, and BPM changes can be recorded in real time.
NOTE
• Events recorded in real time can be edited and new events individually inserted in the pattern chain via the
Pattern Chain Edit mode (Page 175).
• Before recording a pattern chain be sure to turn the UTILITY mode Memory Protect function OFF (Page
257). If the Memory Protect function is ON recording will not be possible.
Pattern Chain Recording Page 2. Use [Knob 1] (CHAIN) to select the chain number to be
recorded. 3
Pattern Chain Recording includes the following display pages. 3. Press [REC] to engage the record standby mode.
● Record Standby...(Page 161)

Selects the track to be recorded and allows other preparations for Display Parameters
recording.
[Knob 2]
2 [SHIFT]+[F2]
● Real Time Recording ...(Page 162)

Operations performed via the RS7000 keyboard and scene/mute
memory buttons as well as pattern and tempo changes can be 1 4 3 5 6
recorded in real time. [Knob 1] [F2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]
[Knob 2] [F4]
[SHIFT]+[F4]
NOTE
• Pattern chain real time recording is always
carried out in the Replace mode (previous 1 REC TRACK (Record Track) ........................ [Knob 1]
data in the recorded track will be overwritten
and replaced by the new data). [Settings] PATT, BPM, SCENE
• Style and section changes can be recorded PATT .................PATTERN track
BPM ..................BPM track
once per measure in the pattern track. If a
SCENE ..............SCENE/MUTE track
style or section is changed in the middle of a
Selects the track to be recorded.
measure, it will actually be recorded at the
beginning of the next measure.
2 STYLE ............ [Knob 2], [SHIFT]+[F2] → Numeric Keypad
3 SECTION ................................................... [F2] → [Knob 2]
4 STYLE NAME
Record Standby [Settings]
Style Number OFF, 01 ~ 64, END
Select the track to be recorded. Section A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O,
P
Style Name Display only.
Record Standby Procedure

mode.
RS7000 161
Displays the currently-playing style and section. Also allow 2. Use [Knob 1] (CHAIN) to select the chain number to be
the style and section to be recorded at the beginning of the recorded.
next measure to be selected during pattern track recording. 3. Press [REC] to engage the record standby mode.
If further style or section changes are record in the chain,
4. Use [Knob 1] (REC TRACK) to select the track to be
however, those changes will take priority.
recorded.
The STYLE parameter can be set to OFF to create breaks
(blank sections) in the chain (the chain continues playing). 5. If the BPM track is selected for recording, use [Knob 3]
When STYLE is set to END, playback will stop at that point. (REC TYPE) to select the REPLACE record mode.
Press [F2] to move the cursor and use [Knob 2] to set the sec- 6. Use [Knob 4] to set the BPM.
tion. 7. If the pattern track is to be recorded in real time, use [Knob 2]
(STYLE) and [F2] → [Knob 2] (SECTION) to set the style
NOTE and section for the first measure.
• Refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 59, for 8. Press [PLAY] so that its indicator flashes, then start recording
more information on styles and sections. after the count-in.
• Sections can be changed by pressing the 9. Operate [Knob 2] (STYLE), [F2] → [Knob 2] (SECTION),
[KEYBOARD] button so that its indicator goes [Knob 4] (BPM), [F4] → [Knob 4] (BPM) the keyboard and
out, and then pressing the black key on the scene/mute memory buttons as required.
keyboard corresponding to the desired sec-
tion. (Page 72)
NOTE
• If the pattern track is selected, [Knob 2] and
5 REC TYPE (Record Type) ..............................[Knob 3] [F2] → [Knob 2] can be used to record style
and section changes. Sections A ~ J can also
[Settings] REPLACE, STEP
be selected via the black keys on the key-
REPLACE ......... Any previous data in the recorded
board after the [KEYBOARD] button is
track will be erased (overwritten) and pressed so that its indicator goes out. These
replaced by the new data. changes will actually be recorded at the
STEP................. This mode allows events to be beginning of the next measure.
entered one at a time. This mode is • If the BPM track is selected use [Knob 4] or
only available when the BPM track is [F4] → [Knob 4] to record BPM changes.
selected. • If the SCENE (scene/mute) track is selected
use the [SCENE/MUTE] and [MEMORY 1] ~
Selects the record mode.
[MEMORY 5] buttons to record scene and
Only the REPLACE option is available when any track other
mute memory operations. Also, if the [MUTE]
than BPM is selected.
button is pressed so that its indicator lights
the white keys on the keyboard can be used
6 BPM ..................[Knob 4], [F4] → [Knob 4], [SHIFT]+[F4]→ to record track mute and un-mute operations.
Numeric Keypad
[Settings] 001.0 ~ 300.0 (BPM)
Sets the pattern chain playback tempo. 10. Press [STOP] to stop recording.
move the cursor to the right of the decimal point and use NOTE
• Pressing [JOB] while holding [SHIFT] directly
accesses the “00 Undo/Redo” job (Page 134),
allowing the previous record operation to be
Real Time Recording undone. This is useful if, for example, you’ve
accidentally erased material you wanted to
keep.
Operations performed via the RS7000 keyboard, scene/mute
memory buttons, and knobs as well as pattern and tempo changes
can be recorded in real time.
than 1.
• You can also use the SUB MODE buttons as
Real Time Recording Procedure a numeric keypad to enter values after hold-
ing both the [SHIFT] and [F4] button.
mode.
162 RS7000
1 Beat Graph
Step Recording
This is the display in which events are “placed” during step
recording.
Allows events to be recorded to the BPM track one at a time.
Step recording can only be applied to the BPM track. Displays
measure). Each diamond-shaped marker in the display repre-
and operation are the same as for BPM track recording in the
sents 1 32nd beat (each 1/4 note division is divided into 8
SONG mode.
32nd beats).
2 POINTER ...... [Knob 1], [SHIFT]+[F1] → Numeric Keypad

Step Recording Procedure
Sets the data entry position.
The triangular pointer above the beat graph indicates the data
entry position. Rotate [Knob 1] to move the left or right.
mode.
Measure numbers can be specified numerically by using
2. Use [Knob 1] (CHAIN) to select the chain number to be [SHIFT] + [F1] + numeric keypad.
recorded.
3. Press [REC] to engage the record standby mode. 3 STEP (Step Time)
4. Use [Knob 1] (REC TRACK) to select the BPM track to be .......... [Knob 2], [SHIFT]+[F2] → Numeric Keypad 3
recorded. [Settings]
5. Use [Knob 3] (REC TYPE) to select the STEP record mode. Settings made via the knob

6. Press [PLAY] so that its indicator lights and the Step Record- 0001 ~ 0059, 32nd note , 16th note triplet ,
ing display appears. 16th
note , 8th
note triplet , 8th note ,
7. Use [Knob 1] (POINTER) to move the pointer to the position 1/4 note triplet , 1/4 note , half note ,
at which you want to enter a BPM change, [Knob 2] (STEP) whole note
to set the step length, and [Knob 3] (BPM) to set the BPM Settings made via the numeric keypad
value. 0001 ~ 9999 clocks
When you need to make large value changes rotate the knob Specifies the step time: the size of the step the pointer will
while holding the [SHIFT] button to change values in incre- move to the next position after an event is entered.
ments of 10 rather than 1.
8. Enter the specified value by pressing any key on the key- 4 BPM ....... [Knob 3], [F3], [SHIFT]+[F3] → Numeric Keypad
board. [Settings] 001.0 ~ 300.0
9. If you press the [PLAY] button the [PLAY] indicator will Specifies the BPM value to be entered.
flash and you will be able to hear how your step-recorded
chain is shaping up. Press [STOP] to stop playback. 5 REST ............................................................................... [F1]
10. Stop recording and return to the SONG Play mode by press- When [F1] is pressed the pointer will move by the specified
ing the [STOP] button. step time.
6 DELETE .......................................................................... [F3]

Display Parameters Use [Knob1] (POINTER) while holding [F3] to delete all
events the pointer passes.
2
7 BACK DELETE ........................................................... [F4]
Moves the pointer backward by one step and deletes all
1 events at that location.
NOTE
5 6 Mistakenly entered events can be erased by

2 3 4 7 pressing [F4] immediately after they are entered
[Knob 1] [F1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F3] [F4]
(before changing the step time value).
[SHIFT]+[F1] [SHIFT]+[F2] [F3]
[SHIFT]+[F3]
RS7000 163
The MASTER sub-mode provides access to the master EQ parameters which adjust the sound at the
final output stage, and the master effect parameters.
The Master EQ parameters are available on 3 sub pages accessible via the [F1] and [F4] buttons, and
Press the [MASTER] button from the PATTERN Chain mode to go to the MASTER mode.
Details are the same as in the PATTERN mode (Page 111).
Display Parameters 1 LOW GAIN .......................................................... [Knob 1]
[1] Master EQ Page 2 MID1 GAIN ........................................................... [Knob 2]
[PATT CHAIN] → [MASTER] 3 MID2 GAIN .......................................................... [Knob 3]
4 HIGH GAIN .......................................................... [Knob 4]
5 LOW FREQUENCY .......................................... [Knob 1]
6 MID1 FREQUENCY .......................................... [Knob 2]
[F4] 7 MID2 FREQUENCY .......................................... [Knob 3]

1 2 3 4
8 HIGH FREQUENCY ......................................... [Knob 4]
9 LOW Q ................................................................... [Knob 1]
0 MID1 Q ................................................................... [Knob 2]
A MID2 Q ................................................................... [Knob 3]
[F1] 5 6 7 8 [F4] B HIGH Q .................................................................. [Knob 4]

[F1] 9 0 A B
164 RS7000
[2] Master Effect Page 1 EFFECT TYPE .............[MASTER EFFECT Select Knob]
[PATT CHAIN] → [MASTER] × 2 2 KNOB1 ASSIGN ................................................ [Knob 1]
3 KNOB2 ASSIGN ................................................ [Knob 2]

1
4 KNOB3 ASSIGN ................................................ [Knob 3]
5 KNOB4 ASSIGN ................................................ [Knob 4]
2 3 4 5 [F4] 6 Effect Parameter 1 ........................................... [Knob 1]

7 Effect Parameter 2 ........................................... [Knob 2]
9 Effect Parameter 4 ........................................... [Knob 4] 3


[F1] 6 7 8 9 [F4]
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] A Effect Parameter 6 ........................................... [Knob 2]
B Effect Parameter 7 ........................................... [Knob 3]
C Effect Parameter 8 ........................................... [Knob 4]
D Effect Parameter 9 ........................................... [Knob 1]
E Effect Parameter 10 ........................................ [Knob 2]

[F1] 0 A B C [F4]
F Effect Parameter 11 ........................................ [Knob 3]
G Effect Parameter 12 ........................................ [Knob 4]
H Effect Parameter 13 ........................................ [Knob 1]
I Effect Parameter 14 ........................................ [Knob 2]
J Effect Parameter 15 ........................................ [Knob 3]

[F1] D E F G [F4]
K Effect Parameter 16 ........................................ [Knob 4]
[F1] H I J K
RS7000 165
The SAVE sub-mode allows you save and load data to or from standard memory cards — available at
many electronics and computer stores — or disks. 5 display pages are provided: Save, Export,
Rename, Delete, and Format.
Press [SAVE] from the PATTERN Chain Play mode to go to the SAVE sub mode. The SAVE sub mode
cannot be selected, however, during pattern chain playback or recording.
NOTE
For information about memory cards, disks, file data, file extensions, etc., refer to “Chapter 2: The Pattern
Mode”, page 114.
Save Page Structure ● Delete...(Page 168)

The SAVE sub-mode includes the following display pages.
Saves data from the internal memory to memory card or disk.
● Format...(Page 168)
● Export...(Page 167)
Export functions are not available from the Pattern Chain mode.
● Rename...(Page 167)
166 RS7000
[1] Save Page 4 FILE NAME .......................................................... [Knob 1]
Saves internal data to a memory card or disk. 5 Folder Select ...................................................... [Knob 3]
Details are the same as for the PATTERN mode SAVE page
(Page 114). Only parameters that are different from the PAT- 6 NEW ................................................................................ [F2]
TERN mode will be introduced here.
7 SAVE! ............................................................................ [F1]
Display Parameters
[2] Export Page
[PATT CHAIN] → [SAVE]
[PATT CHAIN] → [SAVE] × 2

Available Space Icon The export functions are not available from the PATTERN Chain
mode.
[3] Rename Page

3

Changes the name of a file or folder.
1 3 2 Details are the same as for the PATTERN mode SAVE page.
[Knob 1] [F1] [F4]
(Page 114)
1 FILE TYPE..............................................................[Knob 1] Display Parameters

[Settings] ALL
The type of data to be saved is set to ALL and cannot be [PATT CHAIN] → [SAVE] × 3
changed.
For descriptions of the various file types see “About File Types”
on page 116.
2 SCSI/CARD....................................................................[F4]
3 OK......................................................................................[F1]
2 1 3 4 5
■ Save Execution Page [F1] [Knob 2] [F2] [F3] [F4]
[PATT CHAIN] → [SAVE] → [F1]
4 7 6 5
[Knob 1] [F1] [F2] [Knob 3]
RS7000 167
1 FILE .........................................................................[Knob 2] [5] Format Page
2 SCSI/CARD ..................................................................[F1] Formats memory cards and disks.
3 (UP) ........................................................................[F2]
Display Parameters
4 OPEN ..............................................................................[F3]
5 RENAME! ......................................................................[F4]
CARD or DISK = SCSI
Partition Name
[4] Delete Page
Disk Type
SCSI ID Icon
Display Parameters
1 2 3 4
[F1] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] [F4]
CARD or DISK = CARD
1 2 3 4
[Knob 1] [F1] [F2] [F4]
1 FILE .........................................................................[Knob 1]
1 4
2 (UP) ...........................................................................[F1]
[F1] [F4]
3 OPEN ..............................................................................[F2]
1 SCSI/CARD ................................................................. [F1]
4 DELETE .........................................................................[F4]
2 FORMAT TYPE .................................................. [Knob 3]
3 PARTITION .......................................................... [Knob 4]
4 FORMAT! ..................................................................... [F4]
168 RS7000
3 display pages are provided: Load, Import, and SCSI Setup.
Press [LOAD] from the PATTERN Chain mode to go to the Load display.
NOTE
Refer to “Chapter 2: The Pattern Mode”, page 116, for information about file types.
Load Page Structure [1] Load Page
The LOAD sub-mode includes the following display pages. Loads data to internal memory from a memory card or disk.
Details are the same as for the PATTERN mode LOAD page
3
● Load...(Page 169) (Page 126). Only parameters that are different from the PAT-

TERN mode will be introduced here.
Display Parameters
[PATT CHAIN] → [LOAD]
CARD or DISK = CARD
● Import...(Page 170)
This import functions are not available from the PATTERN chain
mode.
2 1 3
[F1] [Knob 2] [F4]
CARD or DISK = SCSI
● SCSI Setup...(Page 170) Partition Name

Provides access to a number of SCSI settings.
Disk Type
SCSI ID Icon
2 1 3
[F1] [Knob 2] [F4]
RS7000 169
1 FILE TYPE ............................................................[Knob 2] Display Parameters

[Settings] ALL, ALL+SYSTEM
ALL .................. An ALL type (.R2A) file is loaded and [PATT CHAIN] → [LOAD] × 3
all internal memory except the system
setup data is overwritten.
ALL+SYSTEM .. An ALL type (.R2A) file is loaded and
all internal memory including the sys-
tem setup data is overwritten.
Specifies the type of data file to be loaded.
For details about the various file types see “Chapter 2: The
Pattern Mode”, page 116.
1 2 4 3
2 SCSI/CARD ..................................................................[F1] [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [F3] [Knob 4]
[F1]
3 OK ....................................................................................[F4]
■ Load Execution Page 1 MOUNT ID ....................................................[Knob 1], [F1]

[PATT CHAIN] → [LOAD] → [F4]
2 MOUNT PARTITION ........................................ [Knob 2]
3 SCSI SELF ID ..................................................... [Knob 4]
4 NEXT/PREV ................................................................. [F3]
4 7
[Knob 1] [F4]
4 File Select .............................................................[Knob 1]
5 (UP) ...........................................................................[F1]
6 OPEN ..............................................................................[F2]
7 LOAD! .............................................................................[F4]
[2] Import Page
The import functions are not available from the PATTERN chain
mode.
[3] SCSI Setup Page
Provides access to a number of SCSI settings.

Details are the same as for the PATTERN mode LOAD page
(Page 126).
170 RS7000
6. The Pattern Chain Jobs
The RS7000’s 9 pattern chain “jobs” can be used to edit and modify pattern chain data in a number of
ways.
● Job List
00 Undo/Redo Undo cancels the changes made by the most recent opera- P.172
tion, restoring the data to its previous state, while Redo
restores the “undone” change.
[Event Category]
01 Copy Event Copies all data from a specified source range to a specified P.172
destination location.
02 Erase Event Clears all events from the specified range. P.172
3
[Measure Category]

03 Create Measure Creates empty measures at the specified location. P.173
04 Delete Measure Deletes the specified measure(s). P.173
[Convert Category]
05 Convert To Song Converts the current pattern chain to performance data and P.173
copies the data to a specified song.
[Chain Category]
06 Copy Chain This job copies all data from a selected source pattern chain P.174
to a selected destination pattern chain.
07 Clear Chain This job deletes all data from the selected pattern chain. P.174
08 Chain Name Use this job to enter or change a pattern chain name. P.174
Pattern Chain Job Procedure 5. When the parameters are set press [F4] (DO!) to execute the
job. “Completed.” will appear when the job is done.
6. Press [EXIT] twice to go back to the PATTERN Play or Patch
Category Job mode.
NOTE
If the memory protect function is ON, “Memory
Protected” will appear on the display when the
[JOB] button is pressed and it will not be possi-
ble to access the job list. In this case go to the
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [F4] UTILITY mode System page (Page 257) and
turn MEMORY PROTECT “OFF”.
1. Press the [JOB] button from the PATTERN Chain Play mode
to go to the job list.
2. Use [Knob 1] (CATEGORY) and [Knob 2] (JOB) to move the
Precautions
cursor to the desired job.
4. Use [Knob 2] (CURSOR ← →) to move the cursor to the var- on the display and the job can not be executed.
ious parameters, and [Knob 3] (VALUE -/+) or [SHIFT]+[F3] • If you make a mistake or want to compare the sound of the
→ Numeric Keypad to set the parameter values as required. data before and after executing a job, use the Undo/Redo func-
tion (Page 172).
RS7000 171
00 Undo/Redo
1
The Undo job cancels the changes made by the most recent oper-
ation (job, edit, recording), restoring the data to its previous state.
The Redo job cancels Undo and restore the changes.
Undo/Redo can also be executed by pressing [SHIFT]+[JOB] in
display pages such as the Play screen.
NOTE 2 [Knob 2] 3 [Knob 3] [F4]
Undo/Redo does not work with sample voice

operations.
1 Source Range
[Settings] Measures 001 ~ 999
Specify the source range from which the data will be copied.
1
[Settings] Measures 001 ~ 999
Specifies the location to which the data will be copied.
3 Times
[Settings] 01 ~ 99
2 [F4] Specifies the number of times the data is copied.
“Undo” or “Redo” appears on the display to indicate the job
02 Erase Event
that is currently available. Undo and Redo are selected alter-
nately. This job clears all data from the specified range.
2 Undo/Redo target 1
Identifies the operation currently available for undoing or
redoing.
If the specified Undo/Redo target is not in memory, “Undo
Impossible!” will appear and the Undo/Redo function cannot
be executed.
01 Copy Event
This job copies all data from a specified source range to a speci- 1 Range
fied destination location. [Settings] Measures 001 ~ 999
Sets the range of measures over which the job will be applied.
CAUTION
When Copy Event is executed any data already
existing at the Destination location will be over-
written.
172 RS7000
03 Create Measure 04 Delete Measure
Creates empty measures at the specified location. Deletes the specified measures.
NOTE NOTE
• When empty measures are inserted, measure • Measure and meter data following the deleted
and meter data following the insert point are measures are moved backward accordingly.
moved forward accordingly. Original data
• If the insert point is set after the last measure
001~004 005~012 013~024
containing data, only the meter data at that
point is set without actually inserting the mea-
sures. Measures M005 ~ M012 deleted
Original data
001~004 005~016
001~004 005~016
8 measures inserted at measure 5

3

001~004 005~012 013~024
The inserted 8 measures 1
1 2
1 Delete Range
[Knob 2] 3 [F4]
[Knob 3]
Specifies the range of measures to be deleted.
1 Insert Point
[Settings] 001 ~ 999 05 Convert to Song
Specifies the insert point (measure number) at which the
newly created blank measures will be inserted. Converts the current pattern chain to performance data and copies
the data to a specified song.
2 Meter
[Settings] 1/16 ~ 16/16, 1/8 ~ 16/8, 1/4 ~ 8/4 NOTE
Specifies the meter of the measures to be created. • Pattern chains cannot be selected from this
display page. Be sure to select the pattern
3 Number of Measures chain you want to convert while in the PAT-
[Settings] 01 ~ 99 TERN Chain mode, then select this job.
• Local sample voices used by the styles in the
Specifies the number of empty measures to be created and
chain will also be copied to the song as local
inserted.
sample voices. If multiple styles are used in a
chain, however, only the local sample voice of
the style used in the last measure of the chain
will be copied.
RS7000 173
07 Clear Chain
1 2
This job deletes all data from the selected pattern chain.
1 Song Number [Knob 3] [F4]

[Settings] 01 ~ 20
Sets the song to which the converted pattern chain data will
be copied. 1 Chain
[Settings] 01 ~ 20
2 Measure
Selects the pattern chain to be deleted.
Specifies the range of data to be converted and copied.
08 Chain Name
06 Copy Chain Use this job to enter or change a pattern chain name. The name
can be up to 16 characters long.
This job copies all data from a selected source pattern chain to a
selected destination pattern chain. NOTE
Pattern chains cannot be selected from this dis-
1 play. Select the pattern chain you want to name
or rename while in the PATTERN Chain mode
(Page 159).
1
2 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
1 Source Pattern Chain
2 Destination Pattern Chain

[Settings] 01 ~ 20 [Knob 2] [F4]
Specify the copy source and destination pattern chain num-
bers.
1 Chain Name
Refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 67, for details on name entry.
174 RS7000
7. Pattern Chain Editing
The Pattern Chain Edit mode makes it possible to edit the order of the patterns in a chain as well as
inserting tempo, and scene/mute event data.
Press [EDIT] from the PATT CHAIN Play mode to go to the Pattern Chain Edit Change page.
NOTE
• Before entering the Pattern Chain Edit mode be sure to turn Memory Protection OFF: go to the UTILITY
mode System page (Page 257) and turn MEMORY PROTECT “OFF”.
If memory protect is ON “Memory Protected” will appear when the [EDIT] button is pressed and pattern
chain editing will not be possible.
• The Solo function cannot be used during pattern chain editing.
3
Pattern Chain Edit Procedure 6. When the parameter has been edited as required, press
[ENTER] or [F3] (DO!) to confirm and enter the edit (the

1. Select the pattern chain you want to edit in the PATT CHAIN
event will stop flashing).
Play mode. • If the cursor is moved to a new event while the current event is still
flashing, editing of the current event is cancelled.
2. Select the track to be edited by pressing the appropriate key
on the keyboard while holding the [TRACK SELECT] but- 7. Press [F2] (DELETE) to delete the event at the cursor posi-
ton. If a track 1-16 is selected, you will enter pattern track tion.
editing. 8. Press [F3] (INSERT) go to the Insert page if you want to
3. Press [EDIT] to go to the PATT CHAIN EDIT Edit Change insert new tempo or scene/mute events.
page.
When the BPM or SCENE/MUTE track is selected

BPM (tempo) and scene/mute events can be edited or deleted via this dis-
play page. To insert a new event press [F3] to go to the event type selec-
tion page.
Set the measure, beat, clock, and parameter, and then press
[F3] (DO!) insert the event.
9. Press [EXIT] to return to the PATT CHAIN Play page.
When a pattern track is selected

In this display the style, section, and meter can be edited for each mea-
4. Use [Knob1] to move the cursor to the event to be edited. sure.
5. Use [Knob 2] to move the cursor to the event parameter to be
edited, and use [Knob 4] (VALUE) to change the value as
required. An edited event will flash on the display.
• The measure, beat, and clock of an even can be edited to change its
location.
• While an event is flashing (being edited), you can use the SUB
MODE buttons as a numeric keypad to directly enter parameter
values.
4. Use [Knob 1] to move the cursor to the measure to be edited.
5. Use [Knob 2] to move the cursor to the meter, style, or sec-
tion to be edited, and use [Knob 4] (VALUE) to change as
required.
• When a style is turned OFF, a corresponding blank section is pro-
duced during pattern playback (playback does not stop).
RS7000 175
• Complex time signatures can be created by changing the meter at 3 Event and Parameters
appropriate measures. It is also possible to switch sections on
every beat (or 8th note or 16th note) to create special effects.
[Settings]
BPM Track
6. If you mistakenly enter data, move the cursor to that location
• Tempo Change: 001.0 ~ 300.0 (BPM)
and press [F3] (CLEAR) to delete the event. .............Tempo change events.
SCENE/MUTE Track
NOTE • Scene Memory Number: Scene Memory 1 ~ 5
.............Recalls a scene memory.
Be sure to enter “END” at the end of the chain.
• Mute Memory Number: Mute Memory 1 ~ 5
.............Recalls a mute memory.
• Track Mute: Track Mute
.............Track mute on/off events. Tracks 1 ~
Display Parameters 16 are displayed in order from left to
right. indicates that mute is off;
Edit Change Page indicates that mute is on.
Displays the type of each event.
When the BPM or SCENE/MUTE track is selected For details about the event types and their parameters refer to
1 3
NOTE
“TOP” and “END” are displayed at the begin-
2 ning and end of the data, respectively. “TOP”
and “END” are not phrase data and cannot be
edited.
4 5 6 7 8
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [F2] [F3] [Knob 4] 4 ↑ ↓ (Cursor ↑ and ↓) ....................................... [Knob 1]
[SHIFT]+[F4] Moves the cursor up or down the event list to select an event
for editing.
When a pattern track is selected
Meter Measure Style Number Section 5 ← → (Cursor ← and →) ................................ [Knob 2]
0 9 A B Moves the cursor left or right to select the parameter to be
edited for the current event.
6 DELETE .......................................................................... [F2]

Deletes the currently selected event.
7 INSERT .......................................................................... [F3]

C
Clear
Jumps to the Insert page to allow insertion of a new event.
8 VALUE ...................................[Knob 4], [SHIFT]+[F4]

1 Track
[Settings] BPM, SCENE, PATT
BPM .................. BPM (Tempo) track 9 Measure
SCENE.............. Scene/Mute track
PATT................. Pattern track
Sets the measure for which the meter, style or section is to be
Selects the track to be edited. edited. [Knob 1] can be used to move from measure to mea-
sure.
[Settings]
Measure 001 ~ 999
Beat 1 ~ 16 (depends on meter)
Clock 000 ~ 479 (depends on meter)
Indicates the location of the corresponding event. Changing
any of these values changes the location of the event accord-
ingly.
176 RS7000
0 Meter 1 Event
[Settings] 1/16 ~ 16/16, 1/8 ~ 16/8, 1/4 ~ 8/4 [Settings]
Sets the meter for each measure, allowing complex time sig- BPM Track
natures to be created as required. • Tempo Change: 001.0 ~ 300.0 BPM
.............Tempo change events.
A Style Number SCENE/MUTE Track
• Scene Memory Number: Scene Memory 1 ~ 5
B Section .............Recalls a scene memory.
• Mute Memory Number: Mute Memory 1 ~ 5
[Settings] .............Recalls a mute memory.
Style Number OFF, 01 ~ 64, END • Track Mute: Track Mute
Section A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, .............Track mute on/off events. Tracks 1 ~
P 16 are displayed in order from left to
Specifies the style and section to be played at the measure right. indicates that mute is off;
specified by “9. Measure”, above. indicates that mute is on.
It is not necessary to enter the style and section for each mea- Selects the type of event to be inserted.
sure when the same style and section are to be repeated. For details about the event types and their parameters refer to
When a style is turned OFF, a corresponding blank section is “Chapter 7: Other Information”, page 263. 3
produced during pattern playback (playback does not stop).
Pattern playback will stop when the “END” is reached. 2 Measure, Beat, and Clock

[Settings]
NOTE Measure 001 ~ 999
• For more information on styles and sections Beat 1 ~ 16 (depends on meter)
refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 59. Clock 000 ~ 479 (depends on meter)
• Sections A through J can be selected directly Specifies the location at which the new event will be inserted.
via the black keys on the keyboard when the
[KEYBOARD] button indicator is lit. (Page 72) 3 Parameter
The value for selected event. The available parameter(s)
depends on the type of event selected.
C CLEAR........................................................... [F3]
Clears the style or section at the cursor position. 4 ← → (Cursor ← and →) .................................. [Knob 2]
Moves the cursor left or right to select the parameter to be set
for the current event.
Insert Page
5 DO! ................................................................................... [F3]
Press [F3] (INSERT) from the phrase EDIT page to access this Inserts the specified event.
page.
6 VALUE ............................................ [Knob 4], [SHIFT]+[F4]
2 3 Adjusts the value of the selected parameter.
1 4 5 6
[Knob 2] [F3] [Knob 4]
[SHIFT]+[F4]
RS7000 177
178 RS7000
Chapter 4. The Song Mode
About the Song Mode .................................... 180

1. Song Playback........................................... 182
2. Song Recording ........................................ 184
3. Adding Groove to a Pattern ..................... 191
4. Play Effects................................................ 192
5. MIDI Delay .................................................. 193
6. Adjusting Level and Effects
for Each Track (Mixer) .............................. 194
7. Changing the Sound of Voices
(Voice Edit) ................................................ 196
8. Adding Effects........................................... 198
9. Arpeggio & Assignable Knob Settings
(Setup)........................................................ 200
12. Loading from Memory Card or Disk ........ 208
13. The Song Jobs .......................................... 212
14. Song Editing .............................................. 225
RS7000 179
About the Song Mode
About the Song Mode
This mode is used to play and create songs.

Press the [SONG] button to enter the SONG Play mode, and the Song Play page will appear on the LCD.
Song Play NOTE

For more information on songs see “Chapter 1:
Basics”, page 60.
Sub Modes of the Song Mode ● MIDI Delay...(Page 193)

The SONG MODE is made up of the following 14 sub-modes.
● Song Play...(Page 182)

Songs can be selected and played. This display page always
appears first when the SONG mode is engaged.
● Song Recording...(Page 184)

● Mixer...(Page 194)
Original songs are recorded in this mode.
Individually adjusts the volume, effect level and other parameters
for each track.
● Groove...(Page 191)
● Voice Edit...(Page 196)
tracks.
● Play Effects...(Page 192)

180 RS7000
About the Song Mode
● Effect...(Page 198) ● Job...(Page 212)

Sets the effects for the REVERB, DELAY/CHORUS, and VARI- Accesses the song editing jobs.
ATION effect stages.
● Song Edit...(Page 225)

● Setup...(Page 200) Allows editing or insertion of new data in recorded songs.
Provides access to the arpeggiator, knob assignment, and channel
settings.
● Master...(Page 202) 4
The Song Mode

RS7000 181
1. Song Playback
1. Song Playback
Select and play songs.

This display always appears first when the [SONG] button is pressed to enter the SONG mode.
Song Playback Procedure 2 Song Name

[Settings] Song Number 01 ~ 20
1. Select the playback SONG number. Song Name Display only
2. When the [PLAY] button is pressed the PLAY indicator will The song to be played back is selected by specifying the song
flash and song playback will begin. number.
3. Press [STOP] to stop playback. Refer to “13. The Song Jobs”, page 212 for information on
entering song names.
NOTE
3 Meter ........................................................... [F1] → [Knob 1]
• The parameters in the SONG Play page can
be changed during song playback. Changes [Settings] 1/16 ~ 16/16, 1/8 ~ 16/8, 1/4 ~ 8/4
made during playback are saved as song Sets the meter (time signature) of the song.
data (when MEMORY PROTECT is OFF). Press [F1] to move the cursor to METER, and then use
• When the UTILITY mode VOICE SETUP TO [Knob 1].
TG (Page 261) parameter is OFF, the mixer,
voice edit, and effects will not change when a 4 JUMP .............. [Knob 2], [SHIFT]+[F2] → Numeric Keypad
different song is selected.
[Settings] OFF, 001 ~ 999
• Press [START] while holding [SHIFT] for
repeat song playback. Specifies the measure to which the song position will jump
when playback is stopped.
Press [STOP] while holding [SHIFT] to set the current mea-
sure for jump location. This can be turned OFF by pressing
Display Parameters [ ] or [ ] while holding [SHIFT].
5 Measure ........ [Knob 3], [SHIFT]+[F3] → Numeric Keypad

8 2 9
6 Beat
A [Settings] Measure 001 ~ 999
0 Beat 01 ~ 16 (display only)
Show the current measure number and beat during playback.
1 3 4 5 6 7 NOTE
[Knob 1] [F1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]
[SHIFT]+[F1] [Knob 1] [SHIFT]+[F2] [SHIFT]+[F3] [F4] The , , and buttons can also be used
[SHIFT]+[F4]
to change the measures number (also during
playback).
1 SONG (Song Number)

.......................... [Knob 1], [SHIFT]+[F1] → Numeric Keypad
182 RS7000
1. Song Playback
7 BPM (Tempo) [Track Selection Procedure]

.... [Knob 4], [F4] → [Knob 4], [SHIFT]+[F4] → Numeric Keypad Except for BPM track and SCENE/MUTE track functions the
track selection procedure is the same as in the PATTERN
[Settings] 001.0 ~ 300.0 (BPM)
mode (Page 73).
Sets the song playback tempo.
The BPM track and SCENE/MUTE track are selected by
holding the [TRACK SELECT] button and pressing the [TR-]
move the cursor to the right of the decimal point and use
or [TR+] button.
NOTE TRACK
SELECT
BPM can also be set by using the [TAP] button

(Page 68). Hold
A B C D E F G H I J
ALL 1~8 9~16 TR- TR+
8 OCT (Octave) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1
[Settings] -5 octaves ~ +5 octaves K ! L # M $ N % O & P '
TRANSPOSE(-)
Q ( R ) S -
TRANSPOSE(+)
T @ U ^ V _ W { X } Y ~
Shows the current octave setting of the keyboard.

Each “ ” on the display corresponds to one octave down,
A Track Status
and each “ ” corresponds to one octave up.
The keyboard octave can be changed by pressing the [KEY- Indicate whether the corresponding track contains data, as
BOARD] button so that its indicator goes out, and then using
the [OCT DOWN] and [OCT UP] buttons to set the octave.
well as the mute or solo status of the track. 4
: The track contains sequence data.
Press the [OCT DOWN] and [OCT UP] buttons simulta- : The track is empty.
The Song Mode

neously to restore the normal keyboard octave settings (no : The track is muted (no sound will be produced by this
octave shift). track).
9 Transpose muted and only this track will sound).
[Settings] -36 ~ 0 ~ +36 (semitones) : Sample data is assigned to this track.
Transposes the pitch of song playback. [Mute & Solo Setting Procedure]
Transposition is set in semitone increments. A setting of “12” The mute and solo setting procedure is the same as in the PAT-
transposes by one octave. TEN mode (Page 74).
[Procedure]
The transpose procedure is the same as in the PATTEN mode
(Page 73).
0 Track
[Settings] BPM, SCENE, 1 ~ 16
BPM .................. BPM Track
SCENE.............. Scene/Mute Track
1 ~ 16 ................ Sequence Track
Shows the track type and numbers.

The currently selected track number is highlighted.
RS7000 183
2. Song Recording
2. Song Recording
Create original sequences by recording performance data to the song tracks. Three recording modes
are available: real-time recording, step recording, and grid-step recording. Punch-in real-time record-
ing is also available.
NOTE
Before beginning recording, make sure that the UTILITY mode MEMORY PROTECT function is “OFF”
(Page 257). Recording is not possible when memory protection is turned on.
The Song Recording Display ● Step Record (Page 187)

This mode allows notes to be entered one at a time. Step record-
Song Recording has the following display pages. ing makes it easy to create songs even if you can’t play the parts
in real time.
● Record Standby (Page 184) Notes are entered by first specifying the note type, and then the
This page is used to prepare for recording performance data to note pitch via the keyboard.
the currently selected song.
● Grid-Step Record (Page 189)

● Real-time Record (Page 186) As in the Step record mode, notes are entered one at a time.
This recording mode allows notes played via the RS7000 key- After specifying the note’s pitch, the note is entered at the grid
board and velocity pads, variations applied via the assignable position (timing) specified by the keyboard.
knobs, and performance data from external MIDI devices, to be This method is particularly useful when entering drums and
recorded in real time. Recording can be carried out while moni- sequenced phrases which use consecutive notes of the same
toring playback of other tracks. pitch.
● Real-time Record: Replace (Page 186)
Any previous data in the recorded track will be erased (overwrit-
ten) and replaced by the new performance data. This is handy
when you need to re-record the same part several times.
● Real-time Record: Overdub (Page 186)
This mode allows material to be added to existing material on a
track. Previous performance data will not be erased. This makes
it easy to create parts by recording them a little at a time.
● Real-time Record: Punch (Page 187)
Real-time recording is carried out between specified punch-in
Record Standby
and punch out points. This allows you to record a specified sec-
tion of a previously-recorded track without having to re-record Prepare to record to the currently selected song by selecting the
the entire track. This recording mode overwrites any data previ- record track, record type, and other parameters.
ously in the recorded range.
Record Standby Procedure
1. Press [SONG] to engage the SONG Play mode.

2. Use [Knob 1] (SONG) to select the song to be recorded.
3. Press the [REC] button to go to the Rec Standby display.
184 RS7000
2. Song Recording
Display Parameters MULTI ...............Simultaneous recording to all 16

sequence tracks. Multi-channel data
from an external MIDI device can be
REC TYPE = REPLACE or OVERDUB recorded at once. MIDI channels 1
through 16 are assigned to the corre-
spondingly numbered tracks.
BPM ..................Allows recording of BPM (tempo)
data.
SCENE(SCENE/MUTE)
..........................Records SCENE/MUTE memory
changes or keyboard track mute oper-
1 2 3 4
[Knob 1]
ations.
[F3] [F4]
[SHIFT]+[F3] [SHIFT]+[F4] Selects the record track.
REC TYPE = GRID NOTE

Use the MULTI setting to record a number of
tracks from an external MIDI sequencer, or from
a multi-channel instrument such as MIDI guitar.
2 REC TYPE (Record Type) ............................. [Knob 2]

4
[Settings] REPLACE, OVERDUB, PUNCH,
The Song Mode

STEP, GRID
REC TYPE = PUNCH
Selects the record mode.
For more details on each record mode see “2. Song Record-
ing” on the previous page.
NOTE
• The STEP and GRID record types cannot be
selected when the REC TRACK parameter is
5 set to MULTI.
• The OVERDUB and GRID record types can-
[Knob 3]
[F3] not be selected when the REC TRACK
[SHIFT]+[F3] parameter is set to BPM.
• The STEP, OVERDUB and GRID record types
cannot be selected when the REC TRACK
REC TYPE = STEP parameter is set to SCENE.
3 REC QUANTIZE (Record Quantize)

... [Knob 3], [F3] → [Knob 3], [SHIFT]+[F3] → Numeric Keypad
6 [Settings]
VALUE
[Knob 3]
[SHIFT]+[F3] OFF, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet),
120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet),
240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
1 REC TRACK (Record Track) ...............................[Knob 1]
480 (1/4 note)
[Settings] TR1 ~ 16, MULTI, BPM, SCENE
TR1 ~ 16 ........... Selects a sequence track for record-
ing.
RS7000 185
2. Song Recording
SWING Set the punch-in and punch-out points for PUNCH real-time
OFF when VALUE = OFF recording.
50% ~ 75% when VALUE = Use [F3] to move the cursor to IN or OUT, and [Knob 3] to
60 , 120 , 240 , 480 set these values as required.
66% ~ 83% when VALUE = For example, first use [Knob 3] to enter the IN measure, then
80 , 160 , 320 press [F3] to move the cursor and use [Knob 3] to set the
OUT measure. [F3] can then be used to move the cursor to
Record quantize aligns the timing of notes which are not
the IN beat and OUT beat parameters, which can also be set
exactly on the beat on-the-fly as you record.
as required by using [Knob 3].
The record quantize parameters can be set in the Rec Standby
mode when the REPLACE or OVERDUB record type is
selected. 6 EVENT TYPE
The quantize VALUE parameter specifies the note timing to .......................... [Knob 3], [SHIFT]+[F3] → Numeric Keypad
which the nearest recorded notes will be aligned. When the STEP record type is selected this parameter specifies
The quantize SWING parameter specifies by how much the the type of event to be recorded.
timing of notes on even-numbered beats (back beats) will be [Settings] NOTE, PITCH BEND,
delayed to create a swing feel. CC[000] ~ CC[119] (Control Change),
When a triplet VALUE is specified, the last note of each trip- BPM Change
let is affected by the SWING parameter. (when the BPM track is selected)
Quarter note NOTE ............................. note data is recorded.
Back beat length Back beat PITCH BEND ................. pitch bend change data is
recorded.
Original timing
CC[000] ~ CC[119] ........ the corresponding control
Quantize value change data is recorded: vol-
(Swing rate = 50%) ume, pan, expression, etc.
Quantize value BPM ............................... tempo change data is
(Swing rate = 60%)
recorded.
To adjust the SWING parameter, press [F3] to move the cursor to Specifies the type of data to be recorded.
SWING, then use [Knob 3] to adjust. Numeric key input is valid only when inputting control
NOTE change numbers.
• When the OVERDUB record type is selected,
quantization will also be applied to the exist-
ing data in the track. Real-Time Recording
• When record quantize is not OFF, quantiza-
tion is applied to all controller data in addition
Real-time recording allows anything played on the RS7000 key-
to the note data. Use the Quantize job to
board, operation of the assignable knobs, and data received from
quantize only the note data.
an external MIDI controller to be recorded in real time.
In this section we’ll look at the real-time REPLACE, OVER-
DUB, and PUNCH recording procedure.
4 BPM (Tempo)
.... [Knob 4], [F4] → [Knob 4], [SHIFT]+[F4] → Numeric Keypad
This parameter has the same effect as in the SONG Play mode. Record Procedure (REPLACE, OVERDUB)
See page 183 for details.
1. Press [SONG] to enter the SONG Play mode.
5 Punch-in Point, Punch-out Point
2. Use [Knob 1] (SONG) to select the song to be recorded.
.... [Knob 3], [F3] → [Knob 3], [SHIFT]+[F3] → Numeric Keypad
Can be set when the REC TYPE is set to PUNCH.
[Settings] 4. Use [Knob 1] (REC TRACK) to select the record track.
IN....................... 001:1 ~ 999:4 5. Press [MIXER] to access the Voice Select display and use
OUT................... 001:1 ~ 999:4 [Knob 1] (BANK) and [Knob 3] (PROGRAM) to select the
desired voice, then press [EXIT] to return to the Rec Standby
display.
6. Use [Knob 2] (REC TYPE) to select the REPLACE or OVER-
DUB record type.
Also use [Knob 3] and [F3] to set up record quantize, and
[Knob 4] to set the BPM as required.
186 RS7000
2. Song Recording
7. Press [PLAY] and begin recording after the count-in.

]
NOTE
• Recording will begin automatically when the punch-in point is
• The OVERDUB and GRID record types can- reached, and recording will be disengaged when the punch-out
not be selected when the REC TRACK point is reached.
parameter is set to BPM.
All steps from 8 onward are the same as for Replace or Over-
• The STEP, OVERDUB and GRID record types
dub recording, above.
cannot be selected when the REC TRACK i
parameter is set to SCENE.
Step Recording
7. Press [PLAY] and begin recording after the count-in.
8. Play the part on the keyboard, velocity pads, and assignable Notes, pitch bend data and control data can be recorded step-by-
knobs. step.
NOTE
• Voices can be selected in the MIXER sub Record Procedure
mode (Page 194).
• BPM changes produced by operating [Knob 1. Press [SONG] to enter the SONG Play mode.
4] can be recorded when the BPM track is 2. Use [Knob 1] (SONG) to select the song to be recorded.
selected for recording.
• When the SCENE (Scene/Mute) track is
selected, SCENE and MUTE changes can be
recorded by pressing the [MEMORY 1] ~
4. Use [Knob 1] (REC TRACK) to select the record track.
4
5. Press [MIXER] to access the Voice Select display and use
[MEMORY 5] buttons. Also, track mute opera- [Knob 1] (BANK) and [Knob 3] (PROGRAM) to select the
The Song Mode

tions can be recorded by pressing the [MUTE] desired voice, then press [EXIT] to return to the Rec Standby
button so that its indicator lights, and then display.
using the keyboard to mute and un-mute 6. Use [Knob 2] (REC TYPE) to select the STEP record type.
tracks as required.
7. Use the EVENT TYPE parameter to specify the type of data
you want to record: note, pitch bend, control change.
9. Stop recording and return to the SONG Play mode by press- 8. Press [PLAY] to go to the STEP recording page.
ing the [STOP] button.
NOTE
NOTE If the BPM track is selected for recording, the
Pressing [JOB] while holding [SHIFT] directly event type will be set at BPM and cannot be
accesses the “Undo/Redo” phrase job (Page changed.
213), allowing the previous record operation to
be undone. This is useful if, for example, you’ve
accidentally erased material on a track you ● Recording Notes
wanted to keep by recording in the REPLACE 9. Use [Knob 1] (POINTER) to move the pointer to the position
mode. at which you want to enter a note, [Knob 2] (STEP) to set the
note length, [Knob 3] (VELOCITY) to set the note velocity,
and [Knob 4] (GATE TIME) to set the gate time.
10. Enter the note by pressing the appropriate key on the key-
Record Procedure (Punch) board.
Press [F1] (REST) to enter a rest, or [F2] (TIE) to enter a tie.
Steps 1 ~ 5 are the same as for Replace or Overdub recording, The [F3] (DELETE) and [F4] (BACK DELETE) buttons can
above. be used to delete entered notes.
6. Use [Knob 2] (REC TYPE) to select the PUNCH record type. NOTE
Also use [Knob 3], [F3] → [Knob 3] to set up punch-in and
In the step record mode notes are actually
punch-out points.
entered when the keys are released. So when
If necessary, use [Knob 4] to adjust BPM.
entering chords be sure to press all notes you
want to enter before releasing the keys.
RS7000 187
2. Song Recording
11. If you press the [PLAY] button the [PLAY] indicator will 1 Beat Graph
flash and you will be able to hear how your step-recorded
This is the display in which notes are “placed” during step
song is shaping up. Press [STOP] to stop playback and con-
recording.
tinue entering notes in the step mode.
12. Stop recording and return to the SONG Play mode by press- measure).
ing the [STOP] button. Each diamond-shaped marker in the display represents 1 32nd
● Recording Pitch Bend or Control Change Data beat (each 1/4 note division is divided into 8 32nd beats).
9. Use [Knob 1] (POINTER) to move the pointer to the position For example, if the following rhythmic pattern
at which you want to enter the data, [Knob 2] (STEP) to set is entered in 4/4 time the display will appear like the one
the data step size, and [Knob 3] (VALUE) to set the value. shown below.
When you need to make large value changes rotate a knob
while holding the [SHIFT] button to change values in incre-
ments of 10 rather than 1.
10. Enter the specified data by pressing a key on the keyboard.
All keys have the same effect except when “KEYBOARD” is
selected by [Knob 3] (VALUE), in which case the value
entered depends on the key pressed.
Press [F1] (REST) to enter a rest. The [F3] (DELETE) and
[F4] (BACK DELETE) buttons can be used to delete entered 2 POINTER ...... [Knob 1], [SHIFT]+[F1] → Numeric Keypad
notes.
Sets the data-entry position.
11. Press the [PLAY] button the [PLAY] to hear how your step- The triangular pointer above the beat graph indicates the
recorded song is progressing. Press [STOP] to stop playback data-entry position.
and continue entering data in the step mode. Rotating the [knob 1] causes the pointer to move left or right,
12. Stop recording and return to the SONG Play mode by press- accordingly.
ing the [STOP] button. Use [SHIFT] + [F1] → Numeric Keypad to directly enter a
measure number.
Display Parameters 3 STEP (Step Time)

[Settings]
When EVENT TYPE = NOTE Settings made via the knob
0001 ~ 0059, 32nd note, 16th note triplet, 16th note,
2 8th note triplet, 8th note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/4 note,
half note, whole note
Settings made via the numeric keypad
1 0001 ~ 9999 clocks
Specifies the length of the note or rest to be entered.

When the PB or CC event type is selected this parameter
specifies the step time:
6 7 8 9 the size of the step the pointer will move to the next position
[F1] [F2] [F3] [F4]
2 3 4 5 after an event is entered.
[SHIFT]+[F1] [SHIFT]+[F2] [SHIFT]+[F3] [SHIFT]+[F4] 4 VELOCITY
When EVENT TYPE is not NOTE [Settings] 001 ~ 127, RND1 ~ RND4 (random)
Specifies the velocity value with which the note will be
entered.
The set value (1 ~ 127) corresponds to the MIDI velocity
value entered.
When one of the random settings is selected (RND1 ~
RND4) a random velocity value will be entered.
0
5 GATE TIME
[Knob 3]
[SHIFT]+[F3] .......................... [Knob 4], [SHIFT]+[F4] → Numeric Keypad
[Settings] 001% ~ 200%
Sets the gate time to produce slurs, staccato notes, etc.
188 RS7000
2. Song Recording
“Gate time” refers to the actual length of time the note CC

sounds. For the same 1/4 note, for example, a long gate time 000 ~ 127, KEYBOARD
will produce a slur while a short gate time will produce a BPM
staccato effect. 001.0 ~ 300.0
Gate time is indicated as a percent value of the step time.
Sets the value of the data to be entered.
A setting of 50% produces a staccato sound, values between
When KEYBOARD is selected the value can directly entered
about 80% and 90% produce normal note length, and a value
via the RS7000 keyboard.
of 99% will produce a slur.
[Procedure]
6 REST ................................................................................[F1] VALUE entry procedure is the same as in the PATTERN
Press [F1] to enter a rest as long as the specified step time. The mode (Page 82).
point will move ahead to the next data-entry position. Rests do
not appear on the display.
Grid Step Recording

NOTE
There is no actual data representing rests. Like step recording, grid step recording allows notes to be
When a “rest” is inserted the pointer simply recorded to a song track one at a time. With grid step recording,
moves ahead to the next data-entry position, however, the pitch of the notes to be entered is specified first, and
effectively leaving a rest. the data-entry position is specified via the keyboard. This method
is particularly useful for entering drum patterns or sequences
which use several consecutive notes of the same pitch.
7 TIE .....................................................................................[F2] 4
When [F2] is pressed to enter a tie the preceding note is length-
ened to the full step time. For example, in the following phrase Record Procedure
The Song Mode

note 1 is entered with 1/4 note step time. If the step time is then
changed to an 8th note and [F2] is pressed, note 2 is entered. 1. Press [SONG] to enter the SONG Play mode.
1 2 2. Use [Knob 1] (SONG) to select the song to be recorded.
4. Use [Knob 1] (REC TRACK) to select the track to be
recorded.
Dotted notes can also be entered using the TIE function. To pro- 5. Press [MIXER] to access the Voice Select display and use
duce a dotted 1/4 note, for example, enter the step time to an 8th [Knob 1] (BANK) and [Knob 3] (PROGRAM) to select the
note, then press [F2] twice. desired voice, then press [EXIT] to return to the Rec Standby
display.
6. Use [Knob 2] (REC TYPE) to select the GRID record type.
7. Press [PLAY] and the Grid Step record display will appear.
8 DELETE...........................................................................[F3] 8. Set the pitch of the notes to be entered via [Knob 1] (NOTE).
Deletes all notes at the current pointer position. If necessary also use [Knob 2] (GATE TIME) to set the gate
Rotate [Knob 1] (POINTER) while holding [F3] to delete all time and [Knob 3] (VELOCITY) to set the note velocity.
events the pointer passes. 9. Use the keyboard to specify the note-entry point on the grid.
The grid divides a measure into 16th note divisions, and the
9 BACK DELETE ............................................................[F4] 16 white keys on the keyboard correspond to each of these
grid positions. The leftmost white key enters a note on the
Moves the pointer backward by one step and deletes all notes first beat of the measure, the 5th white key (B) enters a note
at that location. right on the 2nd beat, and so on.
A note is entered on the grid each time a white key is pressed
NOTE and its indicator lights. Press the same white key a second
time so that its indicator goes out to erase the note at that
Mistakenly entered notes can be erased by
position.
pressing [F4] immediately after they are entered
When the selected meter has more than 4 beats per measure
(before changing the step time value).
(5/4, for example), notes from the 5th beat onward can be
entered after pressing the [OCT UP] button. Press [OCT
DOWN] to go back to beats 1 through 4.
0 VALUE ........... [Knob 3], [SHIFT]+[F3] → Numeric Keypad
For example, this rhythmic pattern in 4/4 time can be entered
[Settings]
PITCH BEND as follows ( ).
-8192 ~ +8191, KEYBOARD
RS7000 189
2. Song Recording
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
10. Use the [ ] and [ ] buttons to move to the previous or

next measure.
11. If you press the [PLAY] button the [PLAY] indicator will
flash and you will be able to hear how your grid-recorded
song is shaping up. Press [STOP] to stop playback and con-
tinue entering notes in the grid step mode.
12. Stop recording and return to the SONG Play mode by press-
ing the [STOP] button.
Display Parameters
1 2 3 4

[F4]
[SHIFT]+[F2] [SHIFT]+[F3] [SHIFT]+[F4]
1 NOTE ........................................................................[Knob 1]
[Settings] C-2 ~ G8
Specifies the pitch of the notes to be entered.
In addition to using [Knob 1], the pitch can be specified by
pressing a key on the keyboard while holding the [SHIFT]
button.
2 GATE TIME
[Settings] 001% ~ 999%
Sets the gate time as a percentage of the grid’s 16th note
steps.
Settings lower then 99% produce notes which are shorter
then 16th notes, for a more staccato feel. Setting of 101% or
higher produce a slur.
3 VELOCITY
Has the same effect as the step recording parameter. Refer to
page 188 in the “Step Recording” section for details.
4 BPM (Tempo)
................. [Knob 4], [F4], [SHIFT]+[F4] → Numeric Keypad
Has the same effect as the pattern play parameter. Refer to page
183 in the “Song Playback” section for details.
190 RS7000
The GROOVE function can be used to add groove and feel to songs.
This is accomplished by varying note timing, gate time, and velocity on an easy-to-use grid. By using
the GROOVE function you can vary the feel of your songs over a wide range. Give dry-sounding pat-
terns more drive, and in general make your grooves more musical.
Press the [GROOVE] button while in the SONG Play mode to access the Grid Groove display page.
The Groove features are the same as in the PATTERN mode (Page 85).
Display Parameters
[SONG] → [GROOVE]
4
1 2 3 4
The Song Mode

1 NOTE OFFSET .......................................... [Knob 1]
2 CLOCK SHIFT ......................................................[Knob 2]
3 GATE OFFSET .......................................... [Knob 3]
4 VELO OFFSET (Velocity Offset).............. [Knob 4]
5 TR (Track)
RS7000 191
4. Play Effects
4. Play Effects
Play effects can be used to temporarily alter parameters such as gate time and velocity, or to add
effects such as harmony to enhance the richness and depth of the sound during song playback. Play
effects are set and applied via this sub mode. Three display pages are provided: Harmonize, Note, and
Timing.
Press [PLAY FX] while in the SONG Play mode to access the play effects.
The Play Effect features are the same as in the PATTERN mode (Page 87).
Display Parameters 1 NOTE OFFSET .......................................... [Knob 1]
2 GATE TIME ............................................... [Knob 2]

[1] Harmonize Page
3 VELO OFFSET (Velocity Offset) ............. [Knob 3]

[SONG] → [PLAY FX]
[3] Timing Page
[SONG] → [PLAY FX] × 3
1 2 3 4
1 UNISON ...................................................................[Knob 1]
1 2 3
2 OCTAVER ..............................................................[Knob 2] [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3]
3 HARMONIZE 1 .......................................... [Knob 3]

1 BEAT STRETCH ....................................... [Knob 1]
4 HARMONIZE 2 .....................................................[Knob 4]
2 CLOCK SHIFT ........................................... [Knob 2]
3 SWING .................................................................... [Knob 3]

[2] Note Page
[SONG] → [PLAY FX] × 2
1 2 3
192 RS7000
5. MIDI Delay
5. MIDI Delay
This sub mode can be used to apply a special MIDI delay effect to a song.
MIDI delay works by creating a copy of the original data which plays back several times slightly after
the original data, thus simulating the sound of a normal delay effect. MIDI delay has some special fea-
tures which aren’t available with standard delay effects, however.
Two display pages are provided: MIDI Delay and Feedback.
From the SONG Play mode press the [MIDI DELAY] button to access the MIDI delay pages.
The MIDI Delay features are the same as in the PATTERN mode (Page 90).
Display Parameters [2] Feedback Page
[1] MIDI Delay Page
[SONG] → [MIDI DELAY]
1 2 3 4
4
The Song Mode

1 2 3
1 FB VELOCITY (Feedback Velocity) ......... [Knob 1]
2 FB NOTE (Feedback Note) ...................... [Knob 2]

1 DELAY TIME .........................................................[Knob 1]
3 FB GATE TIME (Feedback Gate Time) .... [Knob 3]
2 DELAY LEVEL .....................................................[Knob 2]
4 FB CLOCK (Feedback Clock) ...................... [Knob 4]
3 REPEAT TIMES......................................... [Knob 3]
RS7000 193
This sub mode is used to adjust song-playback volume levels, effect levels, and other parameters indi-
vidually for each track. 4 pages are available: Voice Select, Volume/Pan/Out, Equalizer, and Effect
Send. The equalizer parameters are available on 2 sub pages accessible via the [F1] and [F4] buttons.
Press the [MIXER] button from the SONG Play mode to go to the MIXER Voice Select page.
The Mixer features are the same as in the PATTERN mode (Page 93).
Display Parameters [2] Volume/Pan/Out Page
[SONG] → [MIXER] × 2
[1] Voice Select Page
[SONG] → [MIXER]
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 1 VOLUME ................................................................ [Knob 1]

2 PAN .......................................................................... [Knob 2]

1 BANK MSB (Voice Bank MSB) ....................[Knob 1]
3 RANDOM PAN .................................................... [Knob 3]
2 PROGRAM (Program Number) ....................[Knob 3]
4 OUTPUT SEL (Output Select)...................... [Knob 4]
3 HOLD (Voice Parameter Hold) .....................[Knob 4]
194 RS7000
[3] Equalizer Page 1 EQ TYPE ................................................................ [Knob 1]
[SONG] → [MIXER] × 3 2 Q (Bandwidth) ..................................................... [Knob 2]
EQ TYPE = P.EQ 3 FREQUENCY ....................................................... [Knob 3]
4 GAIN (Output Select) ...................................... [Knob 4]
5 LOW FREQ. (Low Frequency) ..................... [Knob 3]
6 LOW GAIN ............................................................ [Knob 4]
1 2 3 4 7 HIGH FREQ. (High Frequency) ................... [Knob 2]

8 HIGH GAIN ............................................................ [Knob 3]

EQ TYPE = BOOST
[4] Effect Send Page
[SONG] → [MIXER] × 4
The Song Mode

EQ TYPE = LOW&HIGH
1 2 3 4
1 VARIATION ........................................................... [Knob 1]
2 DELAY .................................................................... [Knob 2]

5 6 [F4]
[Knob 3] [Knob 4] 3 REVERB ................................................................. [Knob 3]
4 DRY LEVEL .......................................................... [Knob 4]
[F1] 7 8
[Knob 2] [Knob 3]
EQ TYPE = THRU
RS7000 195
This sub mode allows voices to be edited for each song track. You can modify brightness, attack, and
other parameters to make the sound your own. There are 5 main display pages: LFO, Portamento,
Pitch, EG (Envelope Generator), and Filter. The LFO and EG pages each have 3 sub pages accessible
via the [F1] and [F4] buttons.
Press the [VOICE EDIT] button from the SONG Play mode to go to the VOICE EDIT LFO page.
The Voice Edit features are the same as in the PATTERN mode (Page 97).
Display Parameters 6 FILTER DEPTH ................................................... [Knob 2]
7 AMP DEPTH ......................................................... [Knob 3]

[1] LFO Page
8 LFO WAVE ............................................................ [Knob 4]

[SONG] → [VOICE EDIT]
9 SLOPE .................................................................... [Knob 1]
0 STEP/TOTAL ...........................[Knob 2], [F2] → [Knob 2]
A STEP VALUE ....................................................... [Knob 3]
[F4] B TEMPLATE ........................................................... [Knob 4]

1 2 3 4
C RANDOM ....................................................................... [F4]
[2] Portamento Page
[SONG] → [VOICE EDIT] × 2
[F1] [F4]
5 6 7 8
1 2 3
1 MONO/POLY ........................................................ [Knob 1]
2 PORTAMENTO SW
[F1]
9 0 A B C (Portamento Switch) ....................................... [Knob 2]
[F4]
[F2] 3 PORTAMENTO TIME ....................................... [Knob 3]
1 KEY ON RESET ...................................................[Knob 1]
2 BPM SYNC (BPM Synchronization) ......... [Knob 2]
3 LFO SPEED ...........................................................[Knob 3]
4 LFO PHASE...........................................................[Knob 4]
5 PITCH DEPTH ......................................................[Knob 1]
196 RS7000
[3] Pitch Page 2 FEG DECAY (Filter Envelope

Generator Decay) ..................................... [Knob 2]
3 FEG SUSTAIN (Filter Envelope Generator Sus-
tain) .......................................................................... [Knob 3]
4 FEG RELEASE (Filter Envelope Generator

Release) ................................................................. [Knob 4]
1 2 3 4 ■ PEG Page
1 COARSE TUNE....................................................[Knob 1]
2 DETUNE ..................................................................[Knob 2]
3 P.B. RANGE (Pitch Bend Range) ...............[Knob 3]

[F1] 1 2 3 4 5 6
4 PITCH BEND .........................................................[Knob 4] [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [F2] [Knob 3] [F3] [Knob 4]
[4] EG Page 1 PEG INIT LEVEL (Pitch Envelope Generator

Initial Level) ......................................................... [Knob 1] 4
■ AEG Page 2 PEG ATK (Pitch Envelope
The Song Mode

Generator Attack) ............................................. [Knob 2]
3 PEG DCY (Pitch Envelope

Generator Decay) .................................. [F2] → [Knob 2]
4 PEG SUS (Pitch Envelope

Generator Sustain) ........................................... [Knob 3]
1 2 3 4 [F4]
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] 5 PEG RLS (Pitch Envelope
Generator Release) .............................. [F3] → [Knob 3]
1 AEG ATTACK (Amplitude Envelope Generator
Attack) .................................................................... [Knob 1] 6 PEG RLS LEVEL (Pitch Envelope Generator
Release Level) .................................................... [Knob 4]
2 AEG DECAY (Amplitude Envelope Generator
Decay)......................................................................[Knob 2] [5] Filter Page

3 AEG SUSTAIN (Amplitude Envelope Generator
Sustain).................................................................. [Knob 3]
4 AEG RELEASE (Amplitude Envelope Genera-

tor Release).......................................................... [Knob 4]
■ FEG Page
1 2 3 4
1 CUTOFF (Filter Cutoff Frequency)............ [Knob 1]
2 RESONANCE ....................................................... [Knob 2]

[F1] [F4]
1 2 3 4
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] 3 FILTER TYPE ....................................................... [Knob 3]
1 FEG ATTACK (Filter Envelope Generator 4 ENV. DEPTH (Envelope Depth) .................. [Knob 4]
Attack) .....................................................................[Knob 1]
RS7000 197
8. Adding Effects
8. Adding Effects
This mode is used to select effects for song playback and change the effects settings as required. 4
pages are available: Effect Type, Variation Parameters, Delay/Chorus Parameters, and Reverb Parame-
ters. The Variation Parameters are available on 5 sub pages accessible via the [F1] and [F4] buttons,
the Delay/Chorus Parameters are available on 4 sub pages accessible via the [F1] and [F4] buttons, and
the Reverb Parameters are available on 3 sub pages accessible via the [F1] and [F4] buttons.
Press the [EFFECT] button from the SONG Play mode to go to the EFFECT mode.
The Effect features are the same as in the PATTERN mode (Page 104).
Display Parameters
[1] Effect Type Page
[SONG] → [EFFECT]
[F1]
5 6 7 8
1 ~ 4 EFFECT PARAMETERS
.................................................................[Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4]
1 2 3
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] 5 SEND VAR. TO DELAY ............................ [Knob 1]
1 VARIATION TYPE...............................................[Knob 1] 6 SEND VAR. TO REVERB ............................... [Knob 2]
2 DELAY TYPE ........................................................[Knob 2] 7 RETURN LEVEL ................................................. [Knob 3]
3 REVERB TYPE.....................................................[Knob 3] 8 PAN (Variation Pan) ......................................... [Knob 4]
[2] Variation Parameter Page
[SONG] → [EFFECT] × 2
1 2 3 4 [F4]
198 RS7000
8. Adding Effects
[3] Delay/Chorus Parameter Page [4] Reverb Parameter Page
[SONG] → [EFFECT] × 3 [SONG] → [EFFECT] × 4
[F4] [F4]
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]
[F1] [F1]
5 6 7 5 6
[Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]
4
1 ~ 4 EFFECT PARAMETERS 1 ~ 4 EFFECT PARAMETERS
The Song Mode

.................................................................[Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4] .................................................................[Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4]
5 SEND DELAY TO REVERB ............................[Knob 2] 5 RETURN LEVEL ................................................. [Knob 3]
6 RETURN LEVEL ..................................................[Knob 3] 6 PAN (Reverb Pan) ............................................. [Knob 4]
7 PAN (Delay Pan) .................................................[Knob 4]
RS7000 199
This sub mode is used to set up arpeggios, the assignable knobs, and other RS7000 functions. 4 pages
are available: Arpeggio Setting, A/D Setup, Knob Assign, and MIDI Out Channel. The A/D Setup param-
eters are available on 3 sub pages accessible via the [F1] and [F4] buttons.
Press the [SETUP] button from the SONG Play or Patch mode to go to the SETUP mode.
Features and details are the same as in the PATTERN mode (Page 107).
Display Parameters
y
[1] Arpeggio Setting Page
[SONG] → [SETUP]
[F1] 5 6 7 8
1 INPUT GAIN ......................................................... [Knob 1]
1 2 3 4 2 MONO/STEREO .................................................. [Knob 2]

3 VOLUME 1 ............................................................ [Knob 3]
1 TYPE.........................................................................[Knob 1]
4 VOLUME 2 ............................................................ [Knob 4]
2 SORT ........................................................................[Knob 2]
5 REVERB SEND LEVEL 1/2 ............................ [Knob 1]
3 HOLD........................................................................[Knob 3]
6 DELAY SEND LEVEL 1/2 ............................... [Knob 2]
4 OCT RANGE .........................................................[Knob 4]
7 VARIATION/DRY BALANCE 1/2 ................. [Knob 3]
8 PAN 1/2 .................................................................. [Knob 4]

[2] A/D Setup Page
[SONG] → [SETUP] × 2
1 2 3 4 [F4]
200 RS7000
[3] Knob Assign Page
1 2 3
1 KNOB SELECT ....................................................[Knob 1]
2 PARAMETER (MIDI OUT) ...............................[Knob 2]
3 TRACK.....................................................................[Knob 4]
[4] Out Channel Page 4

The Song Mode

1 2 3
[Knob 3] [Knob 4]
1 OUT SELECT ........................................................[Knob 3]
2 OUT CHANNEL....................................................[Knob 4]
3 TR (Track)
RS7000 201
The MASTER sub mode provides access to the 4-band master EQ parameters which adjust the sound
at the final output stage, and the master effect parameters.
TThe Master EQ parameters are available on 3 sub pages accessible via the [F1] and [F4] buttons, and
Press the [MASTER] button from the SONG Play mode to go to the MASTER mode.
Master settings effect all styles and songs.
The Master EQ and Effect features and details are the same as in the PATTERN mode (Page 111).
NOTE
The Master EQ and Effect features and details are the same as in “Chapter 2: The PATTERN mode” (Page 111).
Display Parameters 1 LOW GAIN ............................................................ [Knob 1]
2 MID1 GAIN ............................................................ [Knob 2]

[1] Master EQ Page
3 MID2 GAIN ............................................................ [Knob 3]

[SONG] → [MASTER]
4 HIGH GAIN ............................................................ [Knob 4]
5 LOW FREQUENCY ........................................... [Knob 1]
6 MID1 FREQUENCY ........................................... [Knob 2]
[F4] 7 MID2 FREQUENCY ........................................... [Knob 3]

1 2 3 4
8 HIGH FREQUENCY ........................................... [Knob 4]
9 LOW Q .................................................................... [Knob 1]
0 MID1 Q .................................................................... [Knob 2]
A MID2 Q .................................................................... [Knob 3]
[F1] [F4]
5 6 7 8 B HIGH Q ................................................................... [Knob 4]
[F1]
9 0 A B
202 RS7000
[2] Master Effect Page 1 EFFECT TYPE ..............[MASTER EFFECT Select Knob]
[SONG] → [MASTER] × 2 2 KNOB1 ASSIGN ................................................. [Knob 1]
3 KNOB2 ASSIGN ................................................. [Knob 2]

1
4 KNOB3 ASSIGN ................................................. [Knob 3]
5 KNOB4 ASSIGN ................................................. [Knob 4]
2 3 4 5 [F4] 6 Effect Parameter 1 ............................................ [Knob 1]

7 Effect Parameter 2 ............................................ [Knob 2]
[F1] [F4] A Effect Parameter 6 ............................................ [Knob 2]

6 7 8 9
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] 4
B Effect Parameter 7 ............................................ [Knob 3]
The Song Mode

C Effect Parameter 8 ............................................ [Knob 4]
D Effect Parameter 9 ............................................ [Knob 1]
E Effect Parameter 10 ......................................... [Knob 2]

[F1] 0 A B C [F4]
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] F Effect Parameter 11 ......................................... [Knob 3]
G Effect Parameter 12 ......................................... [Knob 4]
H Effect Parameter 13 ......................................... [Knob 1]
I Effect Parameter 14 ......................................... [Knob 2]

[F1] D E F G [F4]
J Effect Parameter 15 ......................................... [Knob 3]
K Effect Parameter 16 ......................................... [Knob 4]
[F1] H I J K
RS7000 203
The SAVE sub mode allows you save data to standard memory cards — available at many electronics
and computer stores — or disks.
5 display pages are provided: Save, Export, Rename, Delete, and Format.
Press [SAVE] from the SONG Play mode to go to the SAVE sub mode.
The SAVE sub mode cannot be selected, however, during song playback or recording.
NOTE
For information about memory cards, disks, file data, file extensions, etc., refer to “Chapter 2: The Pattern Mode”, page 114.
Save Page Structure ● Rename

The SAVE sub-mode includes the following display pages.
● Save
Saves data from the internal memory to memory card or disk.
● Delete
● Export
Saves the selected sample or song to memory card or disk in a
standard format — SMF or WAV — that can be handled by a per-
sonal computer.
● Format
204 RS7000
[1] Save Page 1 FILE TYPE ............................................................. [Knob 1]

[Settings] SONG, ALL
Saves internal data to a memory card or disk.
Features and details are the same as in the PATTERN mode (Page Specifies the type of data file to be saved.
114). For descriptions of the various file types see “About File
In this section we’ll describe only parameters which are different Types” on page 116.
from the PATTERN mode.
2 SONG ...................................................................... [Knob 2]
[Settings] 01 ~ 20
Display Parameters Selects the song to be saved.
This parameter is not available when the FILE TYPE param-
[SONG] → [SAVE] eter is set to “ALL”.
FILE TYPE = SONG, CARD or SCSI = CARD NOTE

Empty songs which contain no data cannot be saved.
Available Space Icon
3 SCSI/CARD ................................................................... [F4]
4 OK ..................................................................................... [F1]
■ Save Execution Page

[SONG] → [SAVE] → [F1]
4
1 4 2 5 3
[Knob 1] [F1] [Knob 2] [Knob 1] [F4]
The Song Mode

FILE TYPE = SONG, CARD or SCSI = SCSI
Partition Name
Disk Type
SCSI ID
Available Space 5 0 7 6 8 9
[Knob 1] [F1] [F2] [Knob 3] [F3] [F4]
5 FILE NAME ........................................................... [Knob 1]
6 Folder Select ....................................................... [Knob 3]
1 4 2 5 3
[F1] 7 NEW ................................................................................. [F2]
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 1] [F4] Icon
8 (UP) .......................................................................... [F3]

FILE TYPE = ALL, CARD or SCSI = CARD
9 OPEN ............................................................................... [F4]
Icon
Available Space
0 SAVE! .............................................................................. [F1]
1 4 3
[Knob 1] [F1] [F4]
RS7000 205
[2] Export Page 1 FILE TYPE ............................................................. [Knob 1]
Saves the selected sample or song to memory card or disk in a 2 TRACK .................................................................... [Knob 2]
standard format — WAV or SMF — that can be handled by a per-
sonal computer. 3 NOTE ....................................................................... [Knob 3]
Features and details are the same as in the PATTERN mode (Page
120). 4 SCSI/CARD ................................................................... [F4]
5 OK ..................................................................................... [F1]
Display Parameters
■ Export Execution Page
[SONG] → [SAVE] × 2 [SONG] → [SAVE] × 2 → [F1]
FILE TYPE = WAV, sample kit voice selected
Sample Number Sample Name Available Space Icon
6 A 8 7 9 0
[Knob 1] [F1] [F2] [Knob 3] [F3] [F4]
1 5 2 3 4 6 FILE NAME ........................................................... [Knob 1]

[Knob 1] [F1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
7 Folder Select ....................................................... [Knob 3]
FILE TYPE = WAV, pitched sample voice selected
8 NEW ................................................................................. [F2]
Sample Number Sample Name Available Space Icon
9 (UP) ........................................................................... [F3]
0 OPEN ............................................................................... [F4]
A EXPORT! ....................................................................... [F1]
1 5 2 4
[F1]
[3] Rename Page
FILE TYPE = SMF Changes the name of a file or folder.

Features and details are the same as in the PATTERN mode (page
Song Number Song Name Available Space Icon 122).
1 5 4
[Knob 1] [F1] [F4]
206 RS7000
Display Parameters [5] Format Page
[SONG] → [SAVE] × 3 Formats memory cards and disks.

124).
Display Parameters
[SONG] → [SAVE] × 5
2 1 3 4 5
[F1] [Knob 2] [F2] [F3] [F4] CARD or SCSI = SCSI
Partition Name
1 FILE...........................................................................[Knob 1]
SCSI ID
Disk Type Icon
2 SCSI/CARD....................................................................[F1]
3 (UP) ...........................................................................[F2]
4 OPEN................................................................................[F3]
5 RENAME! .......................................................................[F4] 4
1 2 3 4
[F1] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] [F4]
The Song Mode

[4] Delete Page
CARD or SCSI = CARD

123).
Display Parameters
1 4
[SONG] → [SAVE] × 4 [F1] [F4]
1 SCSI/CARD ................................................................... [F1]
2 FORMAT TYPE ................................................... [Knob 3]
3 PARTITION ........................................................... [Knob 4]

1 2 3 4
4 FORMAT! ....................................................................... [F4]
[Knob 1] [F1] [F2] [F4]
1 FILE...........................................................................[Knob 1]
2 (UP) ...........................................................................[F1]
3 OPEN................................................................................[F2]
4 DELETE! .........................................................................[F4]
RS7000 207
4 display pages are provided: Load, Import, SCSI Setup, and SCSI Communication.
Press [LOAD] from the SONG Play mode to go to the Load display.
NOTE
Refer to “Chapter 2: The Pattern Mode”, page 116, for information about file types.
Load Page Structure ● SCSI Communication

The LOAD sub-mode includes the following display pages. application running on a personal computer.
● Load
[1] Load Page

● Import
Loads sequence or sample data saved to disk using other equip- Loads data to internal memory from a memory card or disk.
ment, or saved to memory card or disk by a computer. Features and details are the same as in the PATTERN mode (Page
126).
In this section we’ll describe only parameters which are different
from the PATTERN mode.
Display Parameters
[SONG] → [LOAD]
● SCSI Setup
Provides access to a number of SCSI settings. CARD or SCSI = CARD
2 1 3
[F1] [Knob 2] [F4]
208 RS7000
CARD or SCSI = SCSI FILE TYPE = ALL, ALL+SYSTEM
Partition Name
SCSI ID
Disk Type Icon
4 6 8
[Knob 1] [F1] [F4]
2 1 3 FILE TYPE = SMPL

[F1] [Knob 2] [F4]
Sample Voice Number
1 FILE TYPE..............................................................[Knob 2]
[Settings] SONG, ALL, ALL+SYSTEM, SMPL
SONG.................... A single song is loaded into the
specified style number in the inter-
nal memory from a SONG type
(.R2S) or ALL type (.R2A) file. 4 6 7 5 8
ALL ....................... An ALL type (.R2A) file is loaded
and all internal memory except the
[Knob 1] [F1] [F2] [Knob 4] [F4] 4
system setup data is overwritten.
4 File Select ............................................................. [Knob 1]
The Song Mode

ALL+SYSTEM ...... An ALL type (.R2A) file is loaded
and all internal memory including 5 SONG, TRACK .................................................... [Knob 4]
the system setup data is overwrit-
[Settings]
ten.
Song Select
SMPL .................... A specified sample from multiple
(when FILE TYPE = SONG).................01 ~ 20
sample voices included in a PATT Track Select
(.R2P), SONG (.R2S),or ALL (.R2A) (when FILE TYPE = SMPL) .................01 ~ 16
type file can be loaded to the speci-
• When the selected FILE TYPE is SONG.
fied sample voice number.
Selects the song to which the data will be loaded.
Specifies the type of data file to be loaded. The name of the selected song is displayed.
For details about the various file types see “About File • When the selected FILE TYPE is SMPL.
Types” on page 116. Selects the track to which the data will be loaded.
If a sample voice is assigned to the selected track and the
2 SCSI/CARD....................................................................[F1] number of the assigned sample is the same as that of the sam-
ple to be loaded, the “REPLACE” appears to indicate that the
3 OK......................................................................................[F4] existing sample will be replaced by the loaded sample. If no
sample voices are assigned to the selected track then an
■ Load Execution Page empty sample voice number will be displayed and “EMPTY”
[SONG] → [LOAD] → [F4] will appear to indicate that the sample will be loaded to
empty memory.
FILE TYPE = SONG
4 7 5
RS7000 209
NOTE
1 FILE TYPE ............................................................. [Knob 2]
[Settings] SAMPLE, SMF, RM1x SONG
• When the SMPL file type is selected the song
SAMPLE ...........Sample data, WAV files, WAV files
to which the data will be loaded cannot be
selected from this display. To change the (.WAV) and AIFF files (.AIF) can be
song number return to the SONG Play mode loaded into the specified internal sam-
and select the desired song, then return to ple voice number.
this display page. SMF (Standard MIDI File)
• When the load operation is executed, any ..........................Sequence data can be loaded into the
existing data in the selected song number or currently selected pattern from an
sample voice number will be overwritten. SMF (Standard MIDI File, format-0 or
1) type file.
RM1x SONG .....Song data saved in RM1x pattern for-
6 (UP) ...........................................................................[F1] mat can be loaded into the currently
selected RS7000 song.
7 OPEN................................................................................[F2]
Specifies the type of data file to be imported.
8 LOAD! ..............................................................................[F4] Some imported samples may play at an unexpected pitch,
loop playback may change, or the sound quality may vary.
When an RM1x SONG file is imported the voice edit and
effect settings will not be reproduced. Some voices may also
[2] Import Page change.
For details about the various file types see “About File
Loads sequence or sample data which was saved to a SCSI disk Types” on page 116.
or memory card by other music equipment or a personal com-
puter. 2 SCSI/CARD ................................................................... [F1]
129). 3 OK ..................................................................................... [F4]
In this section we’ll describe only parameters which are different
from the PATTERN mode. ■ Import Execution Page
[SONG] → [LOAD] × 2 → [F4]
Display Parameters FILE TYPE = SAMPLE
[SONG] → [LOAD] × 2 Sample Voice Number
CARD or SCSI = CARD
4 7 8 5 9 6
[Knob 1] [F1] [F2] [Knob 3] [F4] [Knob 4]
2 1 3
[F1] [Knob 2] [F4]
CARD or SCSI = SCSI
Partition Name
SCSI ID
Disk Type Icon
2 1 3
[F1] [Knob 2] [F4]
210 RS7000
FILE TYPE = SMF, RM1x SONG 1 MOUNT ID .....................................................[Knob 1], [F1]
Song Number 2 MOUNT PARTITION ......................................... [Knob 2]
3 SCSI SELF ID ...................................................... [Knob 4]
4 NEXT/PREV .................................................................. [F3]
4 8
[Knob 1] [F2] [4] SCSI Communication Page

4 File Select ..............................................................[Knob 1]
application running on a personal computer.
5 TRACK.....................................................................[Knob 3]
132).
6 TYPE.........................................................................[Knob 4]
Display Parameters
7 (UP) ...........................................................................[F1]
[SONG] → [LOAD] × 4
8 OPEN................................................................................[F2]
4
9 IMPORT ...........................................................................[F4]
The Song Mode

[3] SCSI Setup Page
Provides access to a number of SCSI settings. 1 2

[Knob 1] [Knob 2]
131).
1 TRACK .................................................................... [Knob 1]
Display Parameters 2 TYPE ........................................................................ [Knob 2]
[SONG] → [LOAD] × 3
1 2 4 3
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [F3] [Knob 4]
[F1]
RS7000 211
13. The Song Jobs
13. The Song Jobs
The RS7000’s 30 song “jobs” can be used to edit and modify song data in a number of ways.
● Job List
00 Undo/Redo Undo job cancels the changes made by the most recent operation, restoring the data to its previ- P.213
ous state. Redo job cancel Undo and restores the changes.
[Note Category]
01 Quantize Adjusts the timing of note events by moving them closer to the nearest exact beat. P.214
02 Modify Velocity Alters the velocity values of the specified range of notes. P.214
03 Modify Gate Time Alters the gate times of the specified range of notes. P.214
04 Crescendo Creates a crescendo or decrescendo over the specified range of notes. P.215
05 Transpose Transposes notes in the specified range in semitone increments. P.215
06 Glide This job is ideal for producing guitar-like slide or note-bending effects. P.215
07 Create Roll This job is ideal for creating fast drum-like rolls. P.216
08 Chord Sort This job sorts chord events by order of pitch. P.216
09 Chord Separate Use this job after the Chord Sort job, above, to create guitar-like upstroke or downstroke effects. P.216
[Event Category]
10 Shift Clock Shifts all data events in the specified range forward or backward by the specified number of P.216
clocks.
11 Copy Event Copies all data from a specified source range to a specified destination location. P.217
12 Erase Event Clears all specified events from the specified range. P.217
13 Extract Event This job moves all instances of specified event data from a specified range of a song to the same P.218
range in a different song.
14 Create Continuous Data Creates continuous pitch bend or control change data over the specified range. P.218
15 Thin Out Thins out the specified type of continuous data in the specified range to save memory space. P.219
16 Modify Control Data Changes the values of a specified type of control change data in the specified range. P.219
17 Beat Stretch This job performs time-expansion or compression over the selected range. P.220
[Measure Category]
18 Create Measure Creates empty measures at the specified location. P.220
19 Delete Measure Deletes the specified measure(s). P.220
[Track Category]
20 Copy Track Copies all data of the selected type from specified source track to specified destination track. P.221
21 Exchange Track Exchanges the contents of two specified tracks. P.221
22 Mix Track This job mixes all data from two selected tracks — “a” and “b” — and places the result in track P.222
“b”.
23 Clear Track This job deletes all data of the selected type from the selected pattern P.222
track, or from all pattern tracks.
24 Normalize Play Effect This job rewrites the data in the selected track so that it incorporates the current Play FX/Groove/ P.222
MIDI Delay settings.
25 Divide Drum Track Separates the note events in a drum track and places the notes corresponding to different drum P.223
instruments in separate tracks.
212 RS7000
13. The Song Jobs
[Song Category]
26 Copy Song This job copies all data from a selected source song to a selected destination song. P.223
27 Split Song To Pattern Splits a selected song into two the specified sections of a specified style. P.223
28 Clear Song This job deletes all data from the specified song. P.224
29 Song Name Use this job to enter or change a song name. P.224
Job Procedure Precautions

Category Job
on the display and the job can not be executed.
• If you make a mistake or want to compare the sound of the data
before and after executing a job, use the Undo/Redo function
(Page 213).
• The job application range is specified in measures and beats as
follows:
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [F4] If the range is 001:1:000 ~ 004:1:000, the job will
effect data from the 1st beat of the 1st measure up to
the 4th (last) beat of the 3rd measure.
1. Press the [JOB] button from the SONG Play mode to go to 4
the job list. • The specifiable beat range will depend on the meter. 1 ~ 4 can
2. Use [Knob 1] (CATEGORY) and [Knob 2] (JOB) to move be specified if the meter is 4/4, 1 ~ 8 can be specified if the
The Song Mode

the cursor to the desired job. meter is 8/4, etc.
4. Use [Knob 2] (CURSOR ← →) to move the cursor to the var-
ious parameters, and [Knob 3] (VALUE -/+) or [SHIFT]+[F3]
→ Numeric Keypad to set the parameter values as required. 00 Undo/Redo
5. When the parameters are set press [F4] (DO!) to execute the
Details are the same as the PATTERN mode Undo/Redo job
job. “Completed.” will appear when the job is done.
(Page 134).
6. Press [EXIT] twice to go back to the SONG Play or Patch
mode.
NOTE
NOTE
Undo/Redo does not work with sample voice opera-
If the memory protect function is ON, “Memory Pro- tions.
tected” will appear on the display when the [JOB] but-
ton is pressed and it will not be possible to access the
job list. In this case go to the UTILITY mode System
page (Page 257) and turn MEMORY PROTECT
“OFF”. 1
2 [F4]
■ The following parameters are the same as in the

PATTERN mode (Page 135).
2 Undo/Redo target
RS7000 213
13. The Song Jobs
01 Quantize
Quantization is the process of adjusting the timing of note events 1 3 4 2 5

by moving them closer to the nearest exact beat. You can use this
feature, for example, to improve the timing of a performance
recorded in real time.
Details are the same as the PATTERN mode (Page 135).
1 3 4 2 5 6
1 Track
[Settings] 01 ~ 16, ALL
[Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4] 2 Range

[Settings]
Measure:Beat:Clock
1 Track
001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479
2 Range PATTERN mode (Page 136).
[Settings]
Measure:Beat:Clock 3 Set All
001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479
4 Rate
PATTERN mode (Page 135). 5 Offset
3 Quantize Value
4 Quantize Strength 03 Modify Gate Time

5 Swing Rate This job alters the gate times of the specified range of notes.
Gate time changes are calculated as follows:
6 Swing Gate Time
Adjusted gate time = (original gate time × Rate) + Offset.
If the result is 0 or less, the value is set to 1.
02 Modify Velocity
1 3 4 2 5
This job alters the velocity values of the specified range of notes.
Velocity changes are calculated as follows:
Adjusted velocity = (original velocity × Rate) + Offset.
If the result is 0 or less, the value is set to 1. If the result is higher
than 127, the value is set to 127.
Details are the same as the PATTERN mode (Page136).
1 Track
214 RS7000
13. The Song Jobs
2 Range
[Settings] 1 3 2
Measure:Beat:Clock
001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479

3 Set All
4 Rate
1 Track
5 Offset [Settings] 01 ~ 16, ALL
2 Range
[Settings]
04 Crescendo Measure:Beat:Clock
001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479
Creates a crescendo or decrescendo over the specified range of Note
notes. C-2 ~ G8
■ The following parameters are the same as in the 4
1 3 2 PATTERN mode (Page 138).
The Song Mode

3 Transpose
06 Glide
Replaces all notes following the first note in the specified seg-
ment with pitch bend data, producing smooth glides from note to
1 Track note. This job is ideal for producing guitar-like slide or note-
[Settings] 01 ~ 16, ALL bending effects.
2 Range
[Settings] 1 342
Measure:Beat:Clock
001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479
■ ThefollowingparametersarethesameasinthePAT-
TERN mode (Page 138).
3 Velocity Range
1 Track
05 Transpose [Settings] 01 ~ 16, ALL
Transposes notes in the specified range in semitone increments. 2 Range

Details are the same as the PATTERN mode (Page 138) [Settings]
Measure:Beat:Clock
001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479

RS7000 215
13. The Song Jobs
3 Time 1 Track
4 PB Range
2 Range
[Settings]
Measure:Beat:Clock
07 Create Roll 001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479
Creates a series of repeated notes in the specified range with the ■ The following parameters are the same as in the
specified continuous changes in clock step and velocity. This job PATTERN mode (Page 139).
is ideal for creating fast drum-like rolls.
Details are the same as the PATTERN mode (Page 139). 3 Type
1 245 3 4 Grid
09 Chord Separate
This job slightly separates notes in chords within the specified

[Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4] range, inserting a specified number of clocks between each note.
Use this job after the Chord Sort job, above, to create guitar-like
1 Track upstroke or downstroke effects.
[Settings] 01 ~ 16
1 3 2
2 Range
[Settings]
Measure:Beat:Clock
001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479

3 Note
1 Track
4 Step Clock [Settings] 01 ~ 16, ALL
5 Velocity 2 Range
[Settings]
Measure:Beat:Clock
001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479
08 Chord Sort
This job sorts chord events (simultaneous note events) by order of PATTERN mode (Page 140).
pitch.
Details are the same as the PATTERN mode (Page 139). 3 Clock
1 234
10 Shift Clock
Shifts all data events in the specified range forward or backward
by the specified number of clocks.
216 RS7000
13. The Song Jobs
1 2 3 4 [Settings]
Measure:Beat:Clock
001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479

4 Times
1 Track
[Settings] 01 ~ 16, BPM, SCENE, ALL 12 Erase Event
2 Range This job clears all specified events from the specified range,
[Settings] effectively producing a segment of silence.
Measure:Beat:Clock NOTE
001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479
When this job is applied to a phrase which uses sam-
■ The following parameters are the same as in the ple voices, the note events which trigger the sample
PATTERN mode (Page 140). voice will be erased so that the sample voice does not
sound, but the sample voice itself is not erased. 4
3 Clock
The Song Mode

4 Direction
1 3 2
11 Copy Event
This job copies all data from a specified source range to a

specified destination location.
1 3 2 4
1 Track
[Settings] 01 ~ 16, BPM, SCENE, ALL
2 Source Range
[Settings]
Measure:Beat:Clock
[Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4] 001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479
3 Event
CAUTION [Settings]
When Copy Event is executed any data already exist- When Track is 01 ~ 16, ALL:
ing at the Destination location will be overwritten. Event Type Range
Note (Note events) ........................ —
PC (Program change) .................... —
1 Track PB (Pitch bend) ............................. —
CC (Control change) ........................ 000 ~ 127, ALL
[Settings] 01 ~ 16, BPM, SCENE, ALL CAT (Channel aftertouch) .............. —
PAT (Polyphonic aftertouch) ......... —
2 Source Range
[Settings]
Measure:Beat:Clock
001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479
RS7000 217
13. The Song Jobs
EXC (System exclusive) ................ — ■ The following parameters are the same as in the
ALL (All events) ............................ — PATTERN mode (Page 142).
When Track is BPM:
Event Type Range 3 Event
BPM (Tempo) ................................ —
When Track is SCENE:
Event Type Range
ScnM (Scene Memory)................... — 14 Create Continuous Data
MutM (Mute Memory) ..................... —
TrMt (Track Mute) .......................... — Creates continuous pitch bend or control change data over the
specified range.
13 Extract Event 1 5 6 2 3 4 7
This job moves all instances of specified event data from a speci-
fied range of a track to the same range in a different track.
NOTE
If this job is applied to a track that uses sample voices,
the sample voices will not be moved to the destination
track but the note data that triggers them will, with the
result that the samples will no longer sound. To make
the sample sound, use the MIXER sub mode (Page 1 Track
194) to assign the appropriate sample voice to the [Settings] 01 ~ 16, BPM, ALL
destination track.
2 Range
Details are the same as the PATTERN mode (Page 142). [Settings]
Measure:Beat:Clock
001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479
1 2 3
3 Event Type
[Settings]
When Track is 01 ~ 16:
Event Type Range
PB (Pitch bend) ............................. —
CC (Control change) ........................ 000 ~ 127, ALL
4 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4] CAT (Channel aftertouch) .............. —
EXC (System exclusive) ................ —
1 Source Track When Track is BPM:
[Settings] 01 ~ 16 Event Type Range
BPM (Tempo) ................................ —
Selects the track from which events are to be extracted.
5 Data
2 Source Range
[Settings] (-8192 ... +8191 for pitch bend data,
Measure:Beat:Clock 1.0 ~ 300.0 for BPM data)
001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479
4 Destination Track PATTERN mode (Page 142).
[Settings] 01 ~ 16
4 Times
6 Clock
218 RS7000
13. The Song Jobs
7 Curve Control data changes are calculated as follows:

Adjusted gate time = (original gate time × Rate) + Offset.
If the result is outside the allowable range, the value will be set to
15 Thin Out minimum or maximum.
Thins out the specified type of continuous data in the specified
range to save memory space. 1 4 5 2 3 6
NOTE
The Thin Out job will not work on continuous data that
has a clock interval of greater than 60 clocks per
event.
1 Track
1 3 2
[Settings] 01 ~ 16, BPM, ALL
2 Range
[Settings] 4
Measure:Beat:Clock
001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479
The Song Mode

3 Event Type
1 Track [Settings]
[Settings] 01 ~ 16, BPM, ALL When Track is 01 ~ 16, All:
Event Type Range
2 Range PB (Pitch bend) ............................. —
CC (Control changer) ....................... 000 ~ 127, ALL
[Settings] CAT (Channel aftertouch) .............. —
Measure:Beat:Clock PAT (Polyphonic aftertouch) ......... —
001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479
When Track is BPM:
Event Type Range
3 Event Type BPM (Tempo) ................................ —
[Settings]
When Track is 01 ~ 16: 4 Set All
Event Type Range [Settings] Off, 000 ~ 127
PB (Pitch bend) ............................. —
(-8192 ~ +8191 for pitch bend,
CC (Control change) .........................000 ~ 127, ALL
1.0 ~ 300.0 for BPM)
CAT (Channel aftertouch) .............. —
PAT (Polyphonic aftertouch).......... —
5 Rate
When Track is BPM:
[Settings] 000% ~ 200%, ***
Event Type Range
BPM (Tempo) ................................ —
6 Offset
[Settings] -127 ~ +127 ***
(-8192 ~ +8191 for pitch bend, ***),
16 Modify Control Data (-275.0 ~ +275.0 for BPM, ***)
Changes the values of a specified type of control change data —

pitch bend, control change, aftertouch, etc. — in the specified
range.
RS7000 219
13. The Song Jobs
17 Beat Stretch NOTE

• When empty measures are inserted, measure
This job performs time-expansion or compression over the and meter data following the insert point are
selected range. moved forward accordingly.
All note step times, gate times, the positions of all events, etc., in • If the insert point is set after the last measure
the specified range are expanded or compressed. containing data, only the meter data at that
point is set without actually inserting the mea-
NOTE
sures.
Only MIDI data is affected by this job. Sample voices
are not expanded or compressed.
However, for samples recorded using the
SLICE+SEQ feature, the Beat Stretch job expands or
compresses the timing of the note data, step times, 1 2 3
and gate times that control playback of the sliced
samples. The sample voice itself is not affected.
1 3 2 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
1 Insert Point
Specifies the insert point (measure number) at which the
newly created blank measures will be inserted.
2 Meter
1 Track [Settings] 1/16 ~ 16/16, 1/8 ~ 16/8, 1/4 ~ 8/4
[Settings] 01 ~ 16, ALL Specifies the meter of the measures to be created. This does
not affect the original meter of the song, and can be used to
2 Range complex time signatures.
[Settings]
3 Number of Measures
Measure:Beat:Clock
001:1:000 ~ 999:16:479 [Settings] 01 ~ 99
Specifies the number of empty measures to be created and
3 Time inserted.
[Settings] 025% ~ 400%
19 Delete Measure
18 Create Measure
Deletes the specified measures.
Creates empty measures at the specified location.
Original data
Original data
001~004 005~012 013~024
001~004 005~016
Measures M005 ~ 012 deleted

8 measures inserted at measure 5
001~004 005~016
001~004 005~012 013~024
The inserted 8 measures
220 RS7000
13. The Song Jobs
NOTE
3 Destination Song
[Settings] 01 ~ 20
• Measure and meter data following the deleted
measures are moved backward accordingly. Selects the destination song.
• When sample voices are used in the deleted
measures, the note events which trigger the 4 Destination Track
sample voice will be erased so that the sam-
[Settings] 01 ~ 16
ple voice does not sound, but the sample
voice itself is not erased. Selects the destination track.
5 Data Type
[Settings]
1 SEQ EVENT
tings.
MIXER/VOICE EDIT
[Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4] SAMPLE
Sample voices selected by Voice Select.
1 Delete Range Determine the type(s) of data to be copied. When a checkbox
4
[Settings] 001 ~ 999 is checked the corresponding data type will be copied.
The Song Mode

Specifies the range of measures to be deleted. NOTE
destination song for local sample voice data,
20 Copy Track “Too Many Local Sample Voices” will appear
Copies all data from a specified source track to the specified des-
tination track.
• Undo/Redo (Page 213) cannot be used to
undo/redo a sample voice copy operation.
CAUTION [F4] (DO!) button is pressed, the “Are You
The copy operation overwrites any data previously Sure? Cancel [F2]/OK [F3]” confirmation
existing on the destination track. prompt will appear. [F3] will execute the Copy
Track job.
13 24
21 Exchange Track
Exchanges the specified type of data between two specified
tracks in the current style and section.
5 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]

12
1 Source Song
[Settings] 01 ~ 20
Selects the source song.
2 Source Track
3 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
[Settings] 01 ~ 16
Selects the source track.
RS7000 221
13. The Song Jobs
1 Track, 2 Track 2 Track b

[Settings] Track 01 ~ 16 [Settings] 01 ~ 16
Specify the two tracks between which data will be exchanged. Specifies track “b”.
3 Data Type
[Settings]
SEQ EVENT
23 Clear Track
This job deletes all data of the selected type from the selected
track, or from all tracks.
tings.
1
MIXER/VOICE EDIT
Determine the type(s) of data to be exchanged. When a

checkbox is checked the corresponding data type will be
exchanged.
2 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
22 Mix Track 1 Source Track

[Settings] 1 ~ 16, BPM, SCENE, ALL
This job mixes all data from two selected tracks — “a” and “b”
— and places the result in track “b”.
2 Data Type
Track “a” Track “b” [Settings]
SEQ EVENT
Mix track
Track “b” tings.
MIXER/VOICE EDIT
SAMPLE
NOTE
The sample voice assigned to the selected track.
If this job is applied to a track which uses a sample
voice, only the note data used to play the sample Determine the type(s) of data to be cleared. When a checkbox
voice will be mixed. The sample voice itself will not be is checked the corresponding data type will be cleared.
mixed.
NOTE
• Undo/Redo cannot be used to undo/redo
(Page 213) a sample voice clear operation.
12 Track “a” Track “b”
prompt will appear. [F3] will execute the Clear
Track job.
2 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
1 Track a
24 Normalize Play Effect
[Settings] 01 ~ 16 This job rewrites the data in the selected track so that it incorpo-
Specifies track “a”. rates the current Play FX/Groove/MIDI Delay settings.
222 RS7000
13. The Song Jobs
NOTE 26 Copy Song

After the Normalize Play Effect job is executed the
PLAY FX, GROOVE, and MIDI DELAY parameters for This job copies all data from a selected source song to a selected
the track are initialized. destination song.
The scene/mute memory contents and local samples used by the
song are also copied.
NOTE
destination song for local sample voice data,
“Too Many Local Sample Voices” will appear
1 [Knob 3] [F4] samples then try again.
1 Track undo/redo a sample voice copy operation.
When the [F4] (DO!) button is pressed, the
“Are You Sure? Cancel [F2]/OK [F3]” confir-
mation prompt will appear. [F3] will execute
the Copy Pattern job.
25 Divide Drum Track 4
Separates the note events in a drum phrase assigned to a specified
The Song Mode

track, and places the notes corresponding to different drum 1
instruments in separate tracks (tracks 1 through 8).
CAUTION
Any previous data in tracks 1 ~ 8 will be overwritten.
2 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
1 Source Song
1 [Settings] 01 ~ 20
Selects the source song.
2 Destination Song
[Settings] 01 ~ 20
Select the destination song.
1 Track
27 Split Song To Pattern
[Settings] 01 ~ 16
Specifies the drum track to be divided. Splits a selected song into two the specified sections of a speci-
fied style.
SMF data can be easily used as a basis for patterns.
CAUTION
The job overwrites any data already existing in the
destination pattern.
RS7000 223
13. The Song Jobs
28 Clear Song
2 3 1
This job deletes all data from the selected song or all songs.
Scene/mute memory data is also cleared.
4 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
1 Split Measure
2 [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
Specifies the measure at which the song will be split.
2 Split Destination Style, 3 Section 1 Song

[Settings] [Settings] 01 ~ 20, ALL
Style
01 ~ 64 2 KEEP COMMON SAMPLES
Section
If the checkbox is checked, the common sample voices used
A~P by the specified songs will not be cleared.
Specify the destination style and section. NOTE
The scene/mute data is also copied only if the split destina-
tion style is empty or if “ SAMPLE” box is being copied. Local sample voices used by the specified song will
be cleared regardless of this setting.
4 SAMPLE
If the checkbox is checked sample voices assigned to each
track in the source song are copied to the split destination
style as local sample voices and are assigned to the corre-
sponding tracks in that pattern. 29 Song Name
This checkbox has no effect if no sample voices are assigned
to the tracks in the source song. Use this job to enter or change a song name. The name can be up
NOTE to 16 characters long.
• When there is no memory available in the NOTE

destination style for local sample voice data, Songs cannot be selected from this display. Select the
“Too Many Local Sample Voices” will appear song you want to name or rename while in the SONG
on the display and the sample voice data will Play mode.
undo/redo a sample voice copy operation. 1
prompt will appear. [F3] will execute the Split
Song to Pattern job.
[Knob 2] [F4]
1 SONG NAME
Enters the song name.
Refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 67, for details on name entry.
224 RS7000
14. Song Editing
14. Song Editing
In addition to editing and deleting data recorded in songs, this sub mode allows insertion of new
events.
It can be used to correct mistakes as well as add dynamics or effects such as vibrato to refine and fin-
ish the song.
Press [EDIT] from the SONG Play mode to go to the song Edit Change page.
Press [EDIT] twice from the SONG Play mode to go to the View Filter page.
Details are the same as in the PATTERN mode (Page 154).
NOTE
• Before entering the Song Edit mode be sure to turn Memory Protection OFF (Page 257). If memory protec-
tion is ON “Memory Protected” will appear when the [EDIT] button is pressed and it will not be possible to
enter the song edit mode.
• Events include note events, program change events, and all other events that can be recorded in a song
track.
4
Song Edit Procedure 8. Press [F3] (INSERT) go to the Insert page if you want to
insert new tempo or scene/mute events.
The Song Mode

● To Edit Track 1 ~ 16
The procedure is the same as for phrase editing in the PATTERN
mode (Page 154).
● To Edit the BPM or SCENE/MUTE Track.

1. Select the song you want to edit in the SONG Play mode.
2. After pressing the [KEYBOARD] button so that its indicator Set the measure, beat, clock, and parameter, and then press
goes out, select the track to be edited by using the keyboard [F3] (DO!) insert the event.
[TR-] and [TR+] keys while holding the [TRACK SELECT] 9. Press [EXIT] to go back to the SONG Play mode.
button.
3. Press [EDIT] to go to the SONG Edit Change page. NOTE
4. Use [Knob 1] (↑↓) to move the cursor to the event to be The Solo function cannot be used while editing the
edited. BPM track or Scene/Mute track.
5. Use [Knob 2] (← →) to move the cursor to the event param-
eter to be edited, and use [Knob 4] (VALUE) to change the
value as required. An edited event will flash on the display.
• The measure, beat, and clock of an even can be edited to change its
location.
• While an event is flashing (being edited), you can use the SUB
MODE buttons as a numeric keypad to directly enter parameter
values.
6. When the parameter has been edited as required, press
[ENTER] to confirm and enter the edit (the event will stop
flashing).
• If the cursor is moved to a new event while the current event is
still flashing, editing of the current event is cancelled.
7. Press [F2] (DELETE) to delete the event at the cursor posi-
tion.
RS7000 225
14. Song Editing
1 Event
Edit Change Page
Display Parameters
3 Parameter
4 ← → (Cursor ← and →) .................................. [Knob 2]

3 1 2 4
5 DO! ................................................................................... [F3]
6 VALUE .................................................................... [Knob 4]
5 6 7 8 9 View Filter Page

[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [F2] [F3] [Knob 4]
1 TR (Track Number) Display Parameters
2 View Filter Icon

1 [Knob 3] [Knob 4] 2
4 Event and Parameters
5 ↑ ↓ (Cursor ↑ and ↓) .........................................[Knob 1]
6 ← → (Cursor ← and →)...................................[Knob 2]

3 4 5 6
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [F3] [F4]
7 DELETE...........................................................................[F2] [SHIFT]+[F1]
8 INSERT ............................................................................[F3]
1 Event Checkboxes ...........................[Knob 3], [Knob 4]
9 VALUE .....................................................................[Knob 4]
2 View Filter Icon
3 CTRL NO (Control Number)

Insert Page .......................... [Knob 1], [SHIFT]+[F1] → Numeric Keypad
Press [F3] (Insert) from the song EDIT page to access this page. 4 ← → (Cursor ← and →) .................................. [Knob 2]
5 CLEAR ALL .................................................................. [F3]

2 3
6 CHECK ALL ................................................................. [F4]
1 4 5 6
226 RS7000
Chapter 5. The Sampling Mode
About the Sampling Mode ............................ 228

1. Recording Samples (Sampling) ............... 229
2. The Real Time Loop Remix Function ...... 239
3. Sample Editing........................................... 241
4. The Sample Jobs ....................................... 244
RS7000 227
About the Sampling Mode
About the Sampling Mode
The SAMPLING mode is used to record and edit samples.
NOTE
Samples are digitally recorded audio waveform data complete with “sample parameters” which define how
the sample will play back.
The Sampling Sub Modes
The SAMPLING mode has the following 3 sub modes.

● SAMPLING
[STANDBY/START/STOP]...(Page 229)
Used for recording samples.
● Real Time Loop Remix

[REAL TIME LOOP REMIX] ...(Page 239)
Controls the Real Time Loop Remix function for remixing
recorded samples.
NOTE
• The Real Time Loop Remix function divides
the performance data on the selected track
and rearranges a part of the data to create
new variations. This is effective when applied
to a track which has been recorded using the
Slice Sampling function.
• The Real Time Loop Remix function can only
be used in the PATTERN mode.
● Sample Edit [SAMPLE EDIT]...(Page 241)

Allows recorded samples to be edited.
228 RS7000
1. Recording Samples (Sampling)
The SAMPLING mode is used to record and edit samples.
NOTE
Samples are digitally recorded audio waveform data complete with “sample parameters” which define how
• Before sampling be sure that the utility mode memory protect function is off (Page 257). If it is ON “Mem-
ory Protected” will appear and it will not be possible to enter the sampling mode when the [STAND BY/
START/STOP] button is pressed.
Sampling Features ● Recording samples is like using a multitrack

recorder.
● Sample kit voices & pitched voices. When the KIT+NOTE sampling type is selected, the recorded
Sample voices are divided into two types: “sample kit sample is not only saved as a sample voice, but the note data
voices” and “pitched voices”. required to play the sample back is automatically created as
“Sample kit voices” allow up to 128 different samples to be well.
assigned to different notes from C-2 to G8. Different samples For example, if a vocal sample is recorded while listening to
can thus be played individually or simultaneously as playback of other tracks, the recorded sample will be played
required. Stereo samples use up two of the available assign- back exactly as it was recorded in relation to the other tracks
ments, so up to 64 stereo samples can be assigned to one sam- — just like a multitrack recorder. Since what was actually
ple kit voice. recorded was the vocal sample and the note data required for
playback, the data can be edited later to modify the sample
5
Pitched voices play one sample at appropriate pitches across
the range of the keyboard. and the way it plays back in a variety of ways.
The Sampling Mode

● Local sample voices & common sample Vocal Sampling
voices.
Sample voices can be either “local” or “common”.
Track
Local sample voices are used by a specific song or style. Up
to 128 local sample voices can be saved with each song or
style. If you have samples you want to use in a number of Sample Voice Track (Note Data)
styles or songs, they should be used as “common sample 001
voices” (below).
Common sample voices are available for use by all songs and ● Tempo changes, quantization, groove, play
styles. Up to 128 common sample voices can be stored in the effects and more can be applied to recorded
RS7000 memory at a time. The sample contents and program samples.
number/voice relationship remains the same even when If the SLICE+SEQ sampling type is selected the recorded
songs or styles are switched. audio is automatically “sliced” into a number of samples
The maximum total number of sample voices — local for all based on the specified note length, then the samples are
songs/styles as well as common — that can be stored in the assigned to different notes begining from E0 to create a sam-
RS7000 memory at any one time is 256. ple kit voice. Furthermore, the note data required to play back
the individual samples as they were recorded is automatically
created in a sequence track.
For example, if a 1-measure drum pattern is sampled and a
quarter-note size is specified, the recorded measure will be
sliced into (approximately) four samples which will be
assigned to the E0, F0, F#0, and G0 notes on the keyboard.
RS7000 229
Samples up to 8 measures long 4. From the PATTERN or SONG mode press the [SETUP] but-
can be sliced. ton twice to go to the A/D Setup page, and use [Knob 1] to set
Original Sample
the INPUT GAIN as required.
Slice
5. From the PATTERN or SONG mode press the [STANDBY/
START/STOP] button to go to the Sampling Setup page.
6. Use [Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4] to set the sampling TYPE, FRE-
E0 F0 F#0 G0 The sample is sliced and
assigned to the keyboard.
QUENCY, SOURCE, etc., as required.
Current Measure 7. Press [F4] (OK) to go to the sampling standby page.
Note Data Depending on the selected sampling type, if the selected
G0 sequencer track already contains data, “Sequence or Sample
F#0
F0 exists. Cancel (F2)/Replace (F3)?” will appear on the display.
E0 Since this is a sequence track BPM Press [F3] to overwrite the existing sample.
changes, quantization, groove, play
8. Use [Knob 3] (TRIGGER MODE) and [Knob 4] (TRIGGER
effects, etc., can be applied as required.
LEVEL)/(PUNCH IN/OUT) to set the trigger mode and trig-
ger level or punch-in/out measures as required.
The SLICE+SEQ sampling type is best suited for sample
Use the [REC VOLUME] control to adjust the recording
break-beats and phrases. Slicing is not appropriate for record-
level.
ing one-shot drum samples or similar samples.
● Also functions as a regular sampler. 9. Press [STANDBY/START/STOP] to begin sampling.
When the KIT or PITCH sample type is selected the sample
data is recorded without creating any note data, just like a If TRIGGER MODE = MANUAL
Sampling will begin the instant the [STANDBY/START/
conventional sampler.
STOP] button is pressed. Press [STANDBY/START/
● Sample voices are played by being assigned to STOP] a second time to stop sampling.
tracks.
To play back a sample voice use the PATTERN or SONG If TRIGGER MODE = LEVEL
mode MIXER sub mode Voice Select page to assign the sam- Pressing [STANDBY/START/STOP] engages the trigger
ple voice to a sequencer track. Assigned sample voices can be wait mode, and sampling will begin automatically as soon
played by the sequencer as well as the keyboard and velocity as the input signal exceeds the specified trigger level. Sam-
pads. Depending on the sample type, single notes or chords pling ends when the [STANDBY/START/STOP] button is
can be played via the keyboard (Pitched Voice), or separate pressed.
samples can be played by each key (Sample Kit Voice).
If TRIGGER MODE = MEASURE
Using the Velocity Pads you can play a single sample at dif-
Pressing [STANDBY/START/STOP] engages the trigger
ferent pitches with velocity (Pitched Voice), or play 2 sepa- wait mode, then after pressing [PLAY] to start sequence
rate samples with velocity (Sample Kit Voice). playback sampling will begin automatically at the specified
punch-in measure. Sampling will stop automatically when
the specified punch-out measure is reached.
Sampling Procedure
NOTE
1. Press [UTILITY] to go to the system page and execute the • When the KIT+NOTE sampling type is
wave memory optimize function. selected sequence playback will begin auto-
2. In the PATTERN or SONG mode select the track to be sued
matically when the [STANDBY/START/
for sampling by pressing a white key on the keyboard while STOP] button is pressed. Sampling will
holding the [TRACK SELECT] button. always be synchronized with sequencer play-
back. In this case sequence playback cannot
3. Press [MIXER] to go to the MIXER page and select the sam- be started from the Sampling Standby page.
ple voice number to which you want to record the new sam- • Sequence playback will not start automati-
ple. cally when the SLICE+SEQ, KIT, or PITCH
type is selected. Press [PLAY] from the Sam-
pling Standby page in order to synchronize
sampling with sequencer playback.
230 RS7000
10. When the SLICE+SEQ sampling type is selected the Trim PITCH ...............The recorded sample is saved as a
page will appear automatically when sampling finishes. Use Pitched Voice.
[Knob 1], through [Knob 4] to set the parameters as required.
When the sampling type is KIT, KIT+NOTE, or PITCH the Determines the type of sample voice created when a sample
sampling mode will be exited. is recorded, and whether the note data required to play the
recorded sample will be created automatically.
11. Press [F4] (OK) to execute the Trim and Normalize func-
tions, and go on to the Slice page.
2 FREQUENCY ....................................................... [Knob 2]
12. Use [Knob 1] (MEAS) ~ [Knob 4] (SENS) to set the parame-
[Settings] 44.1 k (44.1 kHz),
ters, then press [F4] (DO!) to execute the Slice operation and
22 kLo (22.05 kHz Lo-Fi),
then [F3] (CREATE) to create the sample and sequence data.
11 kLo (11.025 kHz Lo-Fi),
5 kLo (5.5125 kHz Lo-Fi)
Display Parameters Specifies the sampling frequency. The 22 kLo, 11 kLo, 5 kLo,
settings add digital noise for a lo-fi sound.
Sampling Setup Page
NOTE
[STANDBY/START/STOP]
• At settings other than 44.1 kHz, the sound
monitored during recording may be different
from the recorded sound, depending on the
source signal.
• When the DIGITAL or OPTICAL source
option is selected, input sampling rates with
sampling frequencies of 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
and 32 kHz are supported. However in any
1 2 3 4
case, the data will be converted to the
RS7000's own sampling frequency of 44.1
kHz for recording.
5
1 TYPE (Sampling Type) ....................................[Knob 1] • Digital output is possible when the optional
The Sampling Mode

[Settings] SLICE+SEQ, KIT, KIT+NOTE, PITCH AIEB2 I/O Expansion Board is installed, but
SLICE+SEQ...... The recorded sample is divided into the output sampling frequency is fixed at 44.1
“slices”, the size of which are deter- kHz. Also, an input digital signal cannot be
mined by the specified note length.
simultaneously monitored via a digital output.
The resultant samples are then saved
as a single Sample Kit Voice. The note
3 SOURCE ................................................................ [Knob 3]
data required to play the Sample Kit
Voice thus created is also created
[Settings] A/D INPUT, STEREO OUT (RESAM-
PLING), DIGITAL, OPTICAL
automatically. This process can use
A/D INPUT ........A signal applied to the rear-panel
as much as three times the sampling
INPUT L and R connectors is sam-
memory required by normal sampling.
pled.
See page 237 for details on the
STEREO OUT (RESAMPLING)
amount of memory required. It is a
........The signal output from the RS7000
good idea to use the OPTIMIZE func-
stereo outputs is “resampled”.
tion (Page 259) prior to execution.
DIGITAL ............Selects the digital coaxial input when
KIT .................... The recorded sample is saved as a
the optional AIEB2 I/O Expansion
sample kit voice, or assigned to the
Board is installed.
specified key of existing sample kit
OPTICAL ..........Selects the digital optical input when
voices.
the optional AIEB2 I/O Expansion
KIT+NOTE ........ The recorded sample is saved as a
Board is installed.
sample kit voice, or assigned to the
specified key of existing sample kit Selects the input via which the signal to be sampled will be
voices. received.
The note data required to play
recorded samples is created automat-
ically.
RS7000 231
SAMPLE TYPE = SLICE+SEQ

NOTE
• The DIGITAL and OPTICAL settings can only 9
be effective when the optional AIEB2 I/O
Expansion Board is installed.
6 8
• When DIGITAL or OPTICAL is selected the
digital input signal will simultaneously be out- 5 7
put via the OUTPUT connector, while the
sound produced by the RS7000 will be output
via the DIGITAL OUT and OPTICAL OUT 1 2
connectors. [F2] [Knob 4]
• Resampling allows samples to be re-recorded
after application of filtering, effects, and other SAMPLE TYPE = KIT, KIT+NOTE
processing. The RS7000 allows the output
from sequencer tracks to be resampled, new 6 9
samples can be created from complex combi-
nation of multiple samples and sequence
8
data. The entire content of a pattern can be
easily turned into a single sample. When res- 5 7
ampling it is necessary to select the sampling
destination track (the selected destination
track will not play or be sampled). 3 1 2
4 MONO/STEREO...................................................[Knob 4] SAMPLE TYPE = PITCH

[Settings] MONO L, MONO R, MONO L+R, STEREO
MONO L............ The L-channel signal will be recorded 6 9
as a mono sample.
MONO R ........... The R-channel signal will be recorded 8
as a mono sample. 5 7
MONO L+R ....... The L-channel and R-channel signals
will be mixed and recorded as a mono
sample. 4 1 2
STEREO ........... A stereo sample will be recorded. [Knob 1] [F2] [Knob 4]
Only the STEREO option will be avail-
able when the DIGITAL or OPTICAL 1 TRIGGER MODE ........................................................ [F2]
source is selected.
[Settings] LEVEL, MEASURE, MANUAL
Specifies whether the input signal will be recorded as a mono LEVEL...............Sampling will begin as soon as an
or stereo sample. input signal exceeding the specified
trigger level is received.
5 OK......................................................................................[F4] MEASURE ........Sampling will begin at the specified
punch-in measure, and end at the
Calls the sampling standby page and engages the sampling specified punch-out measure.
standby mode. Pressing [STANDBY/START/STOP] has the
MANUAL...........Sampling will begin as soon as the
same effect.
[STANDBY/START/STOP] button is
pressed.
Sampling Standby Page Specifies the method by which sampling will be triggered.
[STANDBY/START/STOP] → [F4] or [STANDBY/START/STOP] NOTE

When this display is showing pressing the [STANDBY/START/
When the SLICE+SEQ sample type is selected
STOP] executes sample recording, calling the Sampling Execu-
and you want to accurately slice the sample
tion page (Page 234) or the trigger wait page (Page 233).
according to the specified note length, it is best
to set the TRIGGER MODE to MEASURE.
232 RS7000
2 TRIGGER LEVEL, PUNCH-IN/OUT .......... [Knob 4] 7 Sampling Time

[Settings] TRIGGER LEVEL 0 ~ 127 Displays the available sampling time.
PUNCH-IN/OUT
PATTERN MODE ..... PUNCH-IN 001 ~ 255,
PUNCH-OUT 002 ~ 256, END NOTE
SONG MODE ............ PUNCH-IN 001 ~ 998, • The total amount of available sampling time
PUNCH-OUT 002 ~ 999 depends on the amount of memory installed.
Sets the trigger level when the LEVEL trigger mode is • Sampling time can sometimes be increased
selected, or the punch-in and punch-out measures when the by executing the OPTIMIZE function.
MEASURE trigger mode is selected. • The sampling time will not be displayed when
The trigger level is the signal level at which sampling will the SLICE + SEQ sampling type is selected.
begin.
The punch-in/out measures are the measure numbers at
which sampling will begin and end. Press [F4] to move the 8 Sampling Frequency, Mono/Poly
cursor to move the cursor to the PUNCH-OUT parameter.
Displays the sampling frequency and mono/stereo settings
made in the Sampling Setup page (Page 231).
3 ASSIGN KEY.........................................................[Knob 1]
[Settings] C-2 ~ G8 9 Level Meter
This parameter is available when the KIT or KIT+NOTE Displays the level of the input signal. A clipping indicator
sample type is selected. will appear to the right of the level meter if the input signal is
Specifies the Sample Kit Voice note to which the recorded too large.
sample will be assigned.
If a sample is already assigned to the specified note “USED”
NOTE
will appear, and “EMPTY” will appear if the specified note is
unassigned. • The input signal level can be adjusted by
A sample previously assigned to the specified note will be
erased and replaced by the newly assigned sample.
using the [REC VOLUME] control when the A/
D INPUT source is selected.
5
• When the STEREO OUT source is selected
use the PATTERN or SONG mode MIXER
The Sampling Mode

4 ORIGINAL KEY ....................................................[Knob 1]
sub mode settings (Page 93, 194) to set the
[Settings] C-2 ~ G8
levels of each track.
This parameter is available when the PITCH sample type is • If the input signal is too large when the A/D
selected. INPUT source is selected and the [REC VOL-
Specifies the key (note) that will play the sample at the UME] control cannot provide enough adjust-
pitch at which it was originally recorded. ment, or if the input level is too small, try
changing the input gain setting. Press
5 Track Number [SETUP] twice from the SONG or PATTERN
[Settings] 01 ~ 16 mode to go to the A/D Setup page, then use
[Knob 1] to select MIC or LINE, as required.
The number of the selected track • Try to get the input level as high as possible
without clipping for the best sound quality.
6 Sample Voice Number • The input level cannot be adjusted when the
DIGITAL or OPTICAL source is selected.
The currently selected sample voice number (the number of
the next empty sample voice if a sample voice is not currently
selected). The displayed sample voice will be overwritten
when sampling is executed. 001 ~ 128 are local sample
voices, and C001 ~ C128 are common sample voices.
Trigger Conditions Page
NOTE
This display appears while waiting for the sampling trigger.
Select a sample voice via the PATTERN or
This page is selected by pressing the [STANDBY/START/STOP]
SONG mode MIXER Voice Select page (Page
button when the TRIGGER MODE is set to LEVEL or MEA-
93, 194) before press the [STANDBY/START/
SURE. Sequencer playback will begin automatically if the sam-
STOP] button to go to the sampling mode.
ple type is set to KIT+NOTE.
RS7000 233
NOTE Trim Page
When the TRIGGER MODE is set to MANUAL

The trim function makes it possible to specify the beginning and
sampling will begin as soon as the [STANDBY/
end points of a measure within a sample to allow appropriate slic-
START/STOP] button is pressed.
ing. Data prior to the specified beginning of the measure and data
after the specified end of the measure will be deleted, thus reduc-
ing the overall data size.
[STANDBY/START/STOP] → [F4] or [STANDBY/START/STOP]
→ [STANDBY/START/STOP]
The Trim page is automatically selected after sampling when the
SLICE+SEQ sample type is selected.
NOTE
To ensure proper slicing the sample should be
trimmed so that it loops cleanly. Loop playback
begins when the [F2] (AUDITION) button is
pressed, making it easy to hear even slight
changes in the sample length.
From this display sampling will begin according to the following
conditions:
• If TRIGGER MODE = LEVEL … Sampling will begin auto-
matically as soon as the input signal exceeds the specified trig- 7
ger level.
• If TRIGGER MODE = MEASURE … Press [STANDBY/
START/STOP] after pressing [PLAY] from the Sampling
Standby page to start sequence playback. Sampling will begin
automatically at the specified punch-in measure.
1 2 5 3 4 6
The Sampling Execution Page will appear when sampling begins. [F2]
Sampling Execution Page 1 NORMALIZE ......................................................... [Knob 1]

[Settings] OFF, ON
This display appears during sampling.
OFF ...................No normalization.
ON .....................The sample will be normalized.
Normalization achieves the highest possible sample level by

finding the highest level in the target sample and increasing
the overall sample level so that the peak level is just below
clipping. This function is used to increase the sound quality
of recorded samples.
From this display sampling will end according to the following
conditions: Normalize
• If TRIGGER MODE = MANUAL or LEVEL … Sampling

will end as soon as the [STANDBY/START/STOP] button is
pressed. If sequencer playback started automatically when
sampling was started, pressing the [STOP] button to stop play-
back will also end sampling. Sampling will also end if the pat-
NOTE
tern or sequence plays all the way through to the end and stops
automatically. Since slicing divides a sample into multiple seg-
ments, normalization while maintaining the
• If TRIGGER MODE = MEASURE … Sampling will end auto-
overall level relationship between the divided
matically when the specified punch-out measure is reached. Or samples is not possible after slicing. When nor-
sampling will end if the [STANDBY/START/STOP] button is malization is necessary it should be applied
pressed. before slicing.
The Trim page will appear when sampling ends and the SLICE +
SEQ sampling type is selected.
234 RS7000
2 START Point ........................................................[Knob 2] Slice Page

[Settings] 0 ~ End Point
The recorded sample is divided in to a number of “slices”, the
Specifies the point in the sample that is to be the beginning of size of which is determined by the specified note length.
the measure. When the Trim function is executed only the When the SLICE+SEQ sample type is selected, this page can be
portion of the sample between the START and END points selected from the Trim page by pressing [F4] (OK).
will remain. All other data will be deleted.
NOTE
NOTE
It is necessary to accurately adjust the length of
The sample is played back from the START the sample before executing the slice operation.
point when the [AUDITION] button is pressed, Use the [F2] (AUDITION) button in the Trim
so use this capability to precisely locate the page to loop the sample and precisely set the
desired start point. If the timing of the first trim START and END points as required.
desired beat or sound is cut off or delayed when
the [AUDITION] button is pressed, adjust the
START point so that it is heard exactly on the • The Initial Slice Display
beat.
6
3 END Point .............................................................[Knob 3]
[Settings] START Point ~ End of sample
Specifies the point in the sample that is to be the end of the
measure. When the Trim function is executed only the por-
tion of the sample between the START and END points will
remain. All other data will be deleted. 1 2 3 7 4 9 5
[F2] [F4]
[Knob 1] [F1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] 5
NOTE
Set the END point after setting then START
The Sampling Mode

• The Display After Slice Has Been Executed
point. The sample will loop while the [AUDI-
TION] button is held, so you can hear precisely
6
if the END point is set at the appropriate loca-
tion.
4 STEP.........................................................................[Knob 4]
[Settings] ×1, ×10, ×100, ×1000, ×10000, ×100000
Sets the “magnification factor” to be used when [Knob 2] and 2 7 8 5
[Knob 3] are used to specify the START and END points. 1 [F1] 3 [F2] 4 [F3] 9 [F4]
Higher settings allow higher value changes.
5 AUDITION.......................................................................[F2] 1 MEAS (Measure) ................................................ [Knob 1]

The sample will loop between the specified START and [Settings] 1 ~ 8
END points while this button is held. This lets you hear pre-
Specifies the number of measures in the sample to be sliced.
cisely how the settings are affecting the sample.
When the slice operation is executed, sequence data corre-
sponding to the specified number of measures is created. The
6 OK......................................................................................[F4]
sequence data is created from the beginning of the nearest
Executes the normalize and trim operations. measure at the point at which sampling is started.
The Slice page will appear automatically after execution.
7 VOICE (Sample Voice Number)

The sample voice number to which the sample will be saved.
001 ~ 128 are local sample voices; C001 ~ C128 are common
sample voices.
RS7000 235
2 METER........................................................ [F1] → [Knob 1]

NOTE
[Settings] 1/16 ~ 16/16, 1/8 ~ 16/8, 1/4 ~ 8/4
The maximum slice resolution for stereo sam-
Specifies the meter (time signature) of the sample. ples is 64 slices, and for mono samples 128
slices.
NOTE
• The time signature specified here defines the
4 SLICE TYPE ......................................................... [Knob 3]
basic number of slices per measure for sam-
ple slicing. [Settings] BEAT 1~3, PHRASE 1~4, QUICK
• The maximum slice resolution for stereo sam- BEAT 1~3 .........This slice type is suited for percus-
ples is 64 slices, and for mono samples 128 sive phrases such as drums or bass
slices. with a fast attack and short decay. 3
• When the number of slices exceeds 100, the variations are provided.
101st and higher samples will be assigned to PHRASE 1~4 ...Ideal for phrases containing cymbals
the keyboard beginning at C-2. or other instruments with a long
decay. 4 variations are provided.
QUICK...............Regardless of the phrase content, the
3 SUB DIVID (Sub Divide) ..................................[Knob 2] sample is divided at the specified
[Settings] note sub divisions. The number of
When METER = 1 ~ 8/4 slices per measure = (the METER
........ quarter note (1/1), 8th note (1/2), numerator) × (the SUB DIVID denomi-
8th note triplet (1/3), 16th note (1/4), nator).
16th note triplet (1/6), 32nd note (1/8),
32nd note triplet (1/12) Specifies how the sample is sliced, and to some extent the
When METER = 1 ~ 16/8
resulting sound quality. Select the type that best suits the
original phrase.
........ 8th note (1/1), 16th note (1/2),
See below for tips on selecting the appropriate slice type.
16th note triplet (1/3), 32nd note (1/4),
32nd note triplet (1/6) [Slice Type Selection Tips]
When METER = 1 ~ 16/16 ● When slicing percussive phrases with short
........ 16th note (1/1), 32nd note (1/2),
decay
• First try slicing using the BEAT1 type. Try adjusting the slice
32nd note triplet (1/3) sensitivity for finer control.
• If the result has a weak attack or the release portions of the
The METER parameter sets the basic slice unit, and SUB
phrase seem to overlap, try again using the BEAT2 type. Try
DIVID specifies even finer resolution for phrases containing adjusting the slice sensitivity for finer control.
regions with shorter notes • If after using BEAT1 the attack portions overlap or the rhyth-
In the example below METER = 4/4 and SUB DIVID = 1/2. mic feel is degraded, try again using BEAT3. Adjust the SUB
DIVID parameter for broad control of the slice fineness, and
use Sens for final adjustment.
● When slicing phrases with a long decay.
• First try slicing using the PHRASE1 type. Adjust the SUB
DIVID parameter for broad control of the slice fineness, and
use Sens for final adjustment.
METER = 4/4, SUB DIVID = 1/2 results in 8 slices.
1 measure
This parameter is not available when the slice type is BEAT

1~2, and the sample will be sliced on the transients, as shown
below.
1 measure
236 RS7000
• If the result has a weak attack or the release portions of the 9 SENS (Slice Sensitivity) ................................. [Knob 4]
phrase seem to overlap, try again using the PHRASE2 type.
Adjust the SUB DIVID parameter for broad control of the
[Settings] 1 ~ 5
slice fineness, and use SENS (Slice Sensitivity) for final Further adjusts the sub-divisions specified by the SUB
adjustment. DIVID parameter. Higher values result in higher resolution,
• If after using PHRASE2 the points at which the slices join
allowing even finer notes and smaller sounds to be detected
sound rough, try again using PHRASE3 and set the SUB
DIVID parameter for a finer slice. Adjust the SUB DIVID
and sliced.
parameter for broad control of the slice fineness, and use Use [AUDITION] to hear the results, and if they aren’t satis-
SENS (Slice Sensitivity) for final adjustment. factory change the setting and try again.
• PHRASE4 is best for sustained strings or brass type sounds
with vibrato, as well as vocal phrases. NOTE
• If after using PHRASE1 the points at which the slices join
sound rough, try again using PHRASE4 and set the SUB This parameter has no effect when the QUICK
DIVID parameter for a coarser slice. Adjust the SUB DIVID slice type is selected.
parameter for broad control of the slice fineness, and use
SENS (Slice Sensitivity) for final adjustment.
Wave Memory Required for Slice Operations
Individual wave data slices created through slice operations
NOTE
required approximately 1.5 times the original memory because a
• The results of a slice operation can be tail section is automatically added and fade-in and fade-out sec-
checked by using the [TAP] button to change tions are automatically created at the beginning and end of the
the BPM and then holding [F2] (AUDITION) to wave data. This helps to maintain maximum sound quality when
hear looped playback of the sequence. If you the BPM is increased, and results in smoother connections
need to change the coarseness or fineness of between slices (no tail section is created when the QUICK slice
the slices, adjust the SUB DIVID envelope type is selected).
sensitivity and press [F4] (DO!) to re-slice the
sample. Original
waveform
• If the sliced sample does not connect
smoothly, try setting a longer AEG release Sliced
Fade section
5
time. Further if the sample sounds “doubled” waveform
Tail section
The Sampling Mode

try a smaller play effect gate time rate setting.
• If the slice operation produces the desired
results, execute CREATE (below) to actually
create the sequence and Sample Kit Voice.
5 DO! ....................................................................................[F4]
Executes the slice operation. The settings can be changed as A memory work area is required for the synthesis calculations
many times as necessary before pressing [F3] (CREATE). carried out for each slice operation, as well as sufficient memory
to hold the completed waveforms.
6 VOICE (Sample Voice Number) When the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz, the approximate
amount of memory required for each slice type is listed below.
The sample voice number to which the sample will be saved.
001 ~ 128 are local sample voices; C001 ~ C128 are common
sample voices.
BEAT1 : Original wave size × N + (0.3 × number of slices)
kilobytes.
7 AUDITION.......................................................................[F2] BEAT2 : Original wave size × N + (0.2 × number of slices)
Hold to hear looped playback of the sequence created by the kilobytes.
slice operation. BEAT3 : Original wave size × N + (0.3 × number of slices)
kilobytes.
8 CREATE ..........................................................................[F3] PHRASE1 : Original wave size × N + (5.8 × number of slices)
kilobytes.
Creates a Sample Kit Voice from the sliced sample, creates PHRASE2 : Original wave size × N + (1.4 × number of slices)
the corresponding sequence in the current track, and then kilobytes.
returns to the main display. PHRASE3 : Original wave size × N + (0.4 × number of slices)
kilobytes.
PHRASE4 : Original wave size × N + (1.4 × number of slices)
kilobytes.
QUICK : Original wave size × 3 + (0.7 × number of slices)
kilobytes.
RS7000 237
For monaural samples N = 5.5, and for stereo samples N = 8.

Also, the number of slices is doubled for stereo samples.
With the memory expanded to the maximum 64 megabytes, for

example, if the entire memory is empty and a 44.1 kHz sample is
sliced to 32 slices, the longest possible sampling time will be
approximately:
BEAT1~3, PHRASE1~4: approx. 138 seconds (mono), 47 sec-

onds (stereo). QUICK: approx. 253 seconds (mono), 126 seconds
(stereo).
238 RS7000
2. The Real Time Loop Remix Function
Real Time Loop Remix can be used to re-arrange the performance data in a track.
Since the MIDI data is remixed and the samples are unaffected, the data can be remixed in real time.
This function is particularly effective when used on a track which contains samples recorded using the
SLICE+SEQ sample type or samples sliced using the sample slice job.
Since it is the MIDI data which is remixed, this function can also be used on normal sequence data.
Real Time Loop Remix Features Display Parameters
[LOOP REMIX]
● The Real Time Loop Remix function divides the data
in a selected track in the PATTERN mode to a variety
of note lengths, and randomly rearranges a portion
of the data to create totally new variations.
● The Real Time Loop Remix function works by rear-

ranging MIDI data.
When used on a track containing a sliced sample (i.e. a sam- 1 3 2 4
ple recorded with the SLICE+SEQ sample type selected, or a [Knob 1] [F2] [Knob 2] [F4]
sample sliced using the slice sample job), the various seg-
ments of the sample are rearranged with varied timing.
1 TYPE (Remix Type) .......................................... [Knob 1]
When used on samples recorded using the KIT, KIT+NOTE,
or PITCH sample type, the playback timing of the entire sam- [Settings] 1 ~ 16
ple may be changed but the sample itself will be unaffected. Determines how the data in the selected track will be divided
5
This function is also effective when used on normal sequence and rearranged. The division and rearrangement rules are dif-
data. ferent for each remix TYPE.
The Sampling Mode

NOTE 2 VARIATION (Remix Variation) .................... [Knob 2]
Not available in the SONG or PATTERN CHAIN [Settings] NORMAL 1 ~ 16, REVERSE 1 ~ 16,
modes. BREAK 1 ~ 16, PITCH 1 ~ 16, ROLL 1 ~ 16
NORMAL 1 ~ 16 .......The original data is only divided
and rearranged. 16 variations
are provided.
Real Time Loop Remix Procedure REVERSE 1 ~ 16 .......In addition to division and rear-
rangement, some portions of the
1. Press [LOOP REMIX] to go to the Real Time Loop Remix data may be played in reverse.
page. 16 variations are provided.
2. Use [Knob 1] (TYPE) and [Knob 2] (VARIATION) to select BREAK 1 ~ 16 ...........In addition to division and rear-
the remix type and variation. rangement, some portions of the
3. Press [F1] (REMIX) to remix the data and change the data may be deleted to create
arrangement of the pattern being played back. breaks. 16 variations are pro-
4. Press [F4] (CREATE) and the new sequence data created by vided.
the Real Time Loop Remix function will be saved in the cur- PITCH 1 ~ 16 ............In addition to division and rear-
rent track. rangement, some portions of the
data may be pitch-shifted. 16
variations are provided.
ROLL 1 ~ 16 .............In addition to division and rear-
rangement, some portions of the
data may be played with a roll
effect. 16 variations are pro-
vided.
Determines how the original performance data will be modi-

fied.
RS7000 239
3 REMIX ..............................................................................[F1]
Loop remixing based on the specified TYPE and VARIA-
TION begins when this button is pressed. To end remixing
and resume normal playback press the [EXIT] button.
4 CREATE ..........................................................................[F4]
Saves the new sequence data created by the Real Time Loop
Remix function in the current track.
NOTE
• Since the remixed data is saved as a new
phrase and assigned to the current track, the
original phrase data remains as an unas-
signed phrase.
• When the track uses a sample voice and
VARIATION = REVERSE 1~16, PITCH 1~16,
“Overwrite Sample Voice? Cancel [F2]/OK
[F3]” will appear. Press [F3] to execute CRE-
ATE and overwrite the original sample voice
with the new data. Press [F2] to abort.
• “Memory Protected” will appear when the
memory protect function is ON. Go to the util-
ity mode system page (Page 257) and turn
memory protection OFF, then try again.
240 RS7000
3. Sample Editing
3. Sample Editing
Samples can be edited in this mode.
NOTE
• Samples are digitally recorded audio waveform data complete with “sample parameters” which define how
• Before using the sample edit mode be sure to turn the UTILITY mode Memory Protect function OFF (Page
257). If the Memory Protect function is ON, “Memory Protected” will appear on the display when the [SAM-
PLE EDIT] button is pressed and it will not be possible to enter the edit mode.
• If no sample is assigned to the currently selected track, the sample job list page will appear when the
[SAMPLE EDIT] button is pressed and it will not be possible to enter the edit mode.
• Sample Edit cannot be accessed from the PATTERN Chain mode.
• The “Undo” function cannot be used to undo sample edit operations.
Sample Edit Features Sample Edit Procedure
● Samples can be directly edited in the Sample Edit 1. In the PATTERN or SONG Play mode, stop playback of the
mode. sequence and then select the track to which the sample voice
● Samples assigned to any track of the current pattern you want to edit is assigned (Page 73, 183).
or song can be edited. 2. Press [SAMPLE EDIT] to go to the Trim page.
● Samples have four Play Modes which determine how
3. If the selected sample voice is a Sample Kit Voice, press the 5
they are played back.
[KEYBOARD] button so that its indicator lights, and then
The play mode is specified in the Sample Edit Sample
press the key on the keyboard corresponding to the sample
The Sampling Mode

Parameter page (Page 242). The four play modes are listed
you want to edit.
below:
FORWARD.........The sample plays from the start point to 4. Use [Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4] to change the settings as required.
the end point. 5. Press [SAMPLE EDIT] to go to the Sample Parameter page.
REVERSE ...........The sample plays in reverse from the end 6. Use [Knob 1] ~ [Knob 4] to change the settings as required.
point to the start point.
LOOP ..................The sample loops repeatedly from the start 7. Press [EXIT] to go back to the Trim page, and then again to
point to the end point. return to the original display.
ATK+LOOP........After playing from the start point to the
end point, the sample loops between the
loop start point and the end point. Display Parameters
[1] Trim Page
START END
FORWARD
REVERSE [SAMPLE EDIT]

LOOP
8
ATK+LOOP 9
START(ATCK) START(LOOP)
2 6 7
1 [F1] 3 [F2] 4 5 [F4]
RS7000 241
3. Sample Editing
1 ZOOM IN/OUT ......................................................[Knob 1] START(LOOP)...... Sets the loop start point.

[Settings] IN, OUT When the PLAY MODE is set to ATK+LOOP this button
Rotate counter-clockwise to zoom in. switches the parameter to be adjusted by [Knob 2]. The but-
Rotate clockwise to zoom out. ton alternately selects the START(ATCK) and START
Above a certain zoom-in level, the waveforms near the start (LOOP) parameters.
and end points will be shown on the left and right halves of START(ATCK) .......Sets the initial playback start point for
the display. the sample.
START(LOOP) ........Sets the point at which the sample loop
2 ZOOM ...............................................................................[F1] begins.
When the ZOOM IN/OUT parameters is set to IN or OUT, 7 AUDITION ...................................................................... [F4]
each press on this button zooms the waveform display either
in or out, respectively. The sample will loop between the specified START and
END points while this button is held. This lets you hear pre-
3 START Point, START (ATCK) Point, START (LOOP) cisely how the settings are affecting the sample.
point .........................................................................[Knob 2]
[Settings] 0 ~ END Point
[Settings]
Sets the sample start and/or loop start points. Sample Voice Number
............ 001 ~ 128 are local sample voices;
When PLAY MODE = FORWARD, REVERSE, or LOOP C001 ~ C128 are common sample
Sets the START point.
voices.
When PLAY MODE = ATK+LOOP Sample Name ...... Display only.
[F2] switches between START(ATCK) and START(LOOP). Key Number (when a Sample Kit Voice is selected)
Sets the initial sample start point when START(ATCK) ............ C-2 ~ G8
selected.
Displays the number and name of the sample voice assigned to
Sets the loop START point when START(LOOP) selected.
the currently selected track. When a Sample Kit Voice is
NOTE assigned to the current track, the key number can be changed to
The PLAY MODE parameter is set in the Sam- change the sample to be edited.
ple Parameter page (Page 242). Refer to “Sample Edit Procedure”, step 3, on page 241 for
information on changing the track and key number.
4 END Point .............................................................[Knob 3] 9 Sample Information

[Settings] [Settings] All are display only.
START Point ~ End of sample Sampling Frequency .... kHz
Mono/Stereo ................ MONO, STEREO
Specifies end point of the sample. Sample Type ................ KIT (Sample Kit Voice),
PITCHED (Pitched Voice)
5 STEP.........................................................................[Knob 4]
Shows the sampling frequency, mono/stereo status, and sam-
[Settings] ×1, ×10, ×100, ×1000, ×10000, ×100000
ple type (KIT, PITCHED) of the selected sample.
Sets the “magnification factor” to be used when [Knob 2] and
[Knob 3] are used to specify the START and END points.
Higher settings allow higher value changes. [2] Sample Parameters
6 START ATCK / LOOP ...............................................[F2] [SAMPLE EDIT] × 2
[Settings] START(ATCK), START(LOOP) Sample Voice = PITCHED VOICE

START(ATCK)...... Sets the sample start point.
6
1 4 5
[SHIFT]+[F1]
242 RS7000
3. Sample Editing
Sample Voice = SAMPLE KIT VOICE 4 PLAY MODE ......................................................... [Knob 4]

[Settings] FORWARD, REVERSE, LOOP,
6 ATK+LOOP
FORWARD ......... The sample plays from the START
point to the END point.
7 REVERSE ........... The sample plays in reverse from the
END point to the START point.
LOOP .................. The sample loops repeatedly from
the START point to the END point.
1 2 3 4 5 ATK+LOOP ........ After playing from the START(ATCK)
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4] [F4] point to the END point, the sample
[SHIFT]+[F1]
loops between the START(LOOP)
point and the END point.
1 ORIGINAL KEY ....................................................[Knob 1]
[Settings] Specifies the sample playback mode.
Pitched Voice
ORIGINAL KEY ... C-2 (000) ~ G8 (127) START END
FORWARD
Sample Kit Voice
ORIGINAL KEY ... C-2 ~ G8 REVERSE
PITCH ................... -24 ~ +24 (display only) LOOP
Specifies the original key of the selected sample.

The original key is the key (note) that will play the sample at
the pitch at which it was originally recorded.
ATK+LOOP
[Knob 1] selects the original key.
NOTE
When the target is a Sample Kit Voice, the key
START(ATCK) START(LOOP) 5
to which the sample being edited is assigned is
The Sampling Mode

displayed in a semitone-increment pitch rela-
NOTE
tionship to the specified original key note
(PITCH =). START, START(ATCK), START(LOOP), and
For example, if the original key and the key of END are set in the Trim page (Page 241).
the sample being edited are the same, the pitch
relationship is “PITCH = 0” and the sample will
play at the originally recorded pitch. 5 AUDITION ...................................................................... [F4]
If the key to which the sample is assigned is
one semitone higher the original key, then the The sample will loop between the specified START and
pitch relationship is “PITCH = +1” and the sam- END points while this button is held. This lets you hear pre-
ple will sound one semitone higher than the cisely how the settings are affecting the sample.
original key.
This is the same parameter as in the Trim page (Page 241).
2 VOLUME .................................................................[Knob 2]
[Settings] 0 ~ 63 7 Sample Information
Individually sets the volume of each voice in a Sample Kit These are the same as in the Trim page (Page 241).
Voice.
3 PAN ...........................................................................[Knob 3]
[Settings] L63 ~ C ~ R63
Individually sets the pan position of each voice in a Sample
Kit Voice.
RS7000 243
4. The Sample Jobs
4. The Sample Jobs
13 jobs are provided for processing and modifying samples you’ve recorded.
NOTE
• The sample jobs are provided as a sub-mode of the SAMPLE EDIT mode. Press the [SAMPLE EDIT] but-
ton 3 times to access the sample job list.
• Before using the sample edit mode be sure to turn the UTILITY mode Memory Protect function OFF (Page
257). If the Memory Protect function is ON, “Memory Protected” will appear on the display when the [SAM-
PLE EDIT] button is pressed and it will not be possible to enter the edit mode.
• If no sample is assigned to the currently selected track, “the sample job list page” will appear when the
[SAMPLE EDIT] button is pressed.
• The “Undo” function cannot be used to undo sample edit operations.
● Job List
FILE Category
01 COPY Copies the specified sample voice to another sample voice. P.245
02 DELETE Deletes the selected sample or sample voice. P.246
03 EXTRACT Deletes the portions of the sample prior to the specified start point and after the P.246
specified end point.
04 MOVE Moves a sample or sample voice to a different sample voice number. P.246
PROCESS Category
05 NORMALIZE Maximizes the overall level of the selected sample. P.247
06 TIME STRETCH Changes the length of the sample without affecting the pitch. P.248
07 PITCH CONVERT Changes the pitch of the sample without affecting its length. P.248
08 FADE IN/OUT Creates fade-in or fade-out level variations. P.249
09 FREQUENCY CONVERT Halves the sample's sampling frequency. P.250
10 STEREO TO MONO Converts a stereo sample to mono. P.251
11 LOOP REMIX Remixes the sample by dividing it and rearranging the sections. The sound of P.251
some sections can also be changed.
SLICE Category
12 SLICE Slices the sample into the specified beat units. P.252
NAME Category
13 SAMPLE NAME Enters a name for the selected sample. P.253
Sample Job Procedure

Category Job
■ Call the Job List

1. Select the track to which the sample to be edited is assigned
in the PATTERN or SONG play mode (Page 73, 183)
2. Press [SAMPLE EDIT] 3 times to display the sample job list.
244 RS7000
4. The Sample Jobs
■ Select a Job
3. Use [Knob 1] (CATEGORY) and [Knob 2] (JOB) to move
01 COPY
the cursor to the desired job.
Copies the specified sample to a different sample number.
4. Press [F4] (SELECT) to go to the selected job page.
When the target is a Sample Kit Voice, samples assigned to each
key number can be copied individually.
■ Executing Jobs 01 (COPY) ~ 04 (MOVE)
5. Use [Knob 1] (SAMPLE) and [Knob 2] (KEY) to select the
target sample. Press [F2] (AUDITION) to audition the
selected sample.
6. For the COPY and MOVE jobs use [Knob 3] (SAMPLE) and
[Knob 4] (TYPE) to select the destination sample.
7. Press [F4] (DO!) to execute the job.
8. Press [EXIT] 4 times to return to the original display page. 1 2 5 3 4 6
[F2]
■ Executing Jobs 05 (NORMALIZE) ~ 11 (LOOP REMIX)
5. Use [Knob 1] (SAMPLE) and [Knob 2] (KEY) to select the
target sample. Press [F2] (AUDITION) to audition the 1 SAMPLE (Source Sample Number) .......... [Knob 1]
selected sample. [Settings] 001 ~ 128, C001 ~ C128
6. Use [Knob 3] and [Knob 4] to set the job parameters as Specifies the source sample voice.
required.
7. Press [F4] (DO!) to execute the job. Press [F2] (AUDITION) 2 KEY (Source Key Number) ........................... [Knob 2]
to audition the processed sample. [Settings] C-2 ~ G8
8. If the results aren’t satisfactory you can re-adjust the parame-
Specifies the key number of the source sample.
ters using [Knob 3] and [Knob 4] and then press [F4] (DO!)
again to re-execute the job.
9. Press [F3] (CREATE) to actually save the processed sample
NOTE 5
to the target sample number, overwriting the original sample. This parameter is not available when the speci-
If the original sample is a Pitched Sample it will be overwrit- fied source sample is a Pitched Voice.
The Sampling Mode

ten at this point. If the original sample is part of a Sample Kit
Voice a key-number selection page will appear in which
[Knob 2] can be used to select the key number. Pressing [F3] 3 SAMPLE
(OK) then overwrites the sample. (Destination Sample Number) .................... [Knob 3]
10. Press [EXIT] 4 times to return to the original display page. [Settings] 001 ~ 128, C001 ~ C128
Specifies the destination sample voice.
NOTE
When the DELETE or other job has been used 4 TYPE (Destination Type) ............................... [Knob 4]
to delete a sample voice assigned to the cur-
rently selected track, pressing [EXIT] will skip
the Sample Edit page and return to the original Specifies the type of the destination sample voice.
page. Selects the sample key number when the destination sample
is a Sample Kit Voice type.
NOTE
The PITCHED option is not available when a
Sample Kit Voice is stored in the destination
sample voice number.
5 AUDITION ...................................................................... [F2]

Plays the specified copy source sample.
6 DO! ................................................................................... [F4]

Executes the job.
RS7000 245
4. The Sample Jobs
02 DELETE
Deletes the specified sample or sample voice.
1 2 3 4
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [F2] [F4]
1 SAMPLE (Sample Number) .......................... [Knob 1]

1 2 3 4 [Settings] 001 ~ 128, C001 ~ C128
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [F2] [F4] Specifies the sample voice to which the extract job is to be
applied.
1 SAMPLE (Sample Number) ...........................[Knob 1]
[Settings] 001 ~ 128, C001 ~ C128 2 KEY (Key Number) ........................................... [Knob 2]
[Settings] C-2 ~ G8, ALL
Specifies the sample voice to be deleted.
Specifies the key number of the sample(s) to which the
2 KEY (Key Number) ............................................[Knob 2] extract job is to be applied.
When ALL is selected the extract job is applied to the entire
[Settings] C-2 ~ G8, ALL
sample voice.
Specifies the key number of the sample(s) to be deleted.
When ALL is selected the entire sample voice is deleted. NOTE
This parameter is not available when the speci-
NOTE fied sample is a Pitched Voice.
• This parameter is not available when the
specified sample is a Pitched Voice.
• When the last remaining sample in a Sample 3 AUDITION ...................................................................... [F2]
Kit Voice is deleted, the entire sample voice is Plays the specified sample.
deleted.
4 DO! ................................................................................... [F4]
3 AUDITION.......................................................................[F2] Executes the job.
Plays the specified sample.
4 DO! ....................................................................................[F4] 04 MOVE

Executes the job.
Moves the specified sample to a different sample or sample voice
number.
03 EXTRACT NOTE
• This job provides a convenient way to collect
Deletes the portions of the sample prior to the specified start
samples into a Sample Kit Voice from a num-
point and after the specified end point.
ber of sample voices.
• The original sample and sample voice will be
NOTE deleted.
• Refer to the Trim page for information about
the start and end points(Page 241).
• When the play mode is ATK + LOOP data
outside the start (attack) point and end point
region will be deleted.
1 2 5 3 4 6
[F2]
246 RS7000
4. The Sample Jobs
1 SAMPLE (Source Sample Number)...........[Knob 1] 2 KEY (Key Number) ........................................... [Knob 2]

[Settings] 001 ~ 128, C001 ~ C128 [Settings] C-2 ~ G8
Specifies the source sample voice. Specifies the key number of the sample to be normalized.
2 KEY (Source Key Number) ............................[Knob 2] NOTE

[Settings] C-2 ~ G8 This parameter is not available when the speci-
Specifies the key number of the source sample. fied sample is a Pitched Voice.
NOTE
3 RATIO ..................................................................... [Knob 3]
• This parameter is not available when the
[Settings] 001 ~ 800%
specified source sample is a Pitched Voice.
• When the last remaining sample is moved Specifies the post-normalization sample level.
from a Sample Kit Voice, the entire sample A setting of 100% maximizes the level so that the highest
voice is deleted. peak level in the sample is just below clipping (maximum
digital signal level).
Settings below 100% reduce the level of the sample accord-
3 SAMPLE ingly.
(Destination Sample Number) .....................[Knob 3] Settings higher than 100% will raise the sample level above
[Settings] 001 ~ 128, C001 ~ C128 the maximum, producing deliberate clipping.
Specifies the destination sample voice. Original

Waveform 100% Lower than 100% Higher than 100%
4 TYPE (Destination Type) ................................[Knob 4]
Specifies the type of the destination sample voice. 5
Selects the sample key number when the destination sample is a
4 AUDITION ...................................................................... [F2]
Sample Kit Voice type.
The Sampling Mode

NOTE Plays the normalized sample if pressed after [F4] (DO!) is
pressed to normalize the sample.
The PITCHED option is not available when a
Sample Kit Voice is stored in the destination 5 DO! ................................................................................... [F4]
sample voice number.
Executes the job.
5 AUDITION.......................................................................[F2] 6 CREATE ......................................................................... [F3]
Plays the specified move source sample. Saves the processed sample to the target sample number,
overwriting the original sample.
6 DO! ....................................................................................[F4] If the original sample is a Pitched Sample it will be overwrit-
Executes the job. Voice a key-number selection page will appear.
05 NORMALIZE
Maximizes (normalizes) the overall level of the specified sample.
7 8
[Knob 2] [F3]
1 2 4 3 6 5
[F2] 7 CREATE TO
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F3] [F4]
(Destination Key Number) ............................ [Knob 2]
[Settings] C-2 ~ G8
[Settings] 001 ~ 128, C001 ~ C128 Specifies the key number to which the processed sample will
be saved.
Specifies the sample voice to be normalized.
RS7000 247
4. The Sample Jobs
8 OK......................................................................................[F3] 5 AUDITION ...................................................................... [F2]

Saves the normalized sample to the specified destination key Plays the specified sample.
number. Plays the time-stretched sample if pressed after [F4] (DO!) is
pressed to stretch the sample.
6 DO! ................................................................................... [F4]

06 TIME STRETCH
Executes the job.
Changes the length of the sample without changing the pitch.
The sound quality of some samples may change. 7 CREATE ......................................................................... [F3]
Saves the processed sample to the target sample number,
overwriting the original sample. If the original sample is a
Pitched Sample it will be overwritten at this point.
If the original sample is part of a Sample Kit Voice a key-
number selection page will appear.
1 2 5 3 7 4 6
[F2] [F3] [F4]

[Settings] 001 ~ 128, C001 ~ C128
Specifies the sample voice to be time-stretched. 8 9
[Knob 2] [F3]
2 KEY (Key Number) ............................................[Knob 2]

8 CREATE TO
[Settings] C-2 ~ G8
(Destination Key Number) ........................... [Knob 2]
Specifies the key number of the sample to be time-stretched. [Settings] C-2 ~ G8
Specifies the key number to which the processed sample will
NOTE
be saved.
fied sample is a Pitched Voice. 9 OK ..................................................................................... [F3]
Saves the time-stretched sample to the specified destination
3 RATIO ......................................................................[Knob 3] key number.
[Settings] 25 ~ 400%
Specifies the length of post-process sample as a ratio of the
length of the original sample (100%). 07 PITCH CONVERT
4 ACCURACY...........................................................[Knob 4] Changes the pitch of the sample without changing the length.
The sound quality of some samples may change.
[Settings] SOUND 4 ~ SOUND 1, NORMAL,
RHYTHM 1 ~ RHYTHM 4
SOUND 4 ~ SOUND 1
........ These settings place emphasis on
sound quality, with the “SOUND 4”
setting producing the highest sound
quality.
NORMAL .......... Produces an optimum balance of
1 2 5 3 7 4 6
[F2] [F3] [F4]
sound quality and rhythmic feel. [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]
RHYTHM 1 ~ RHYTHM 4
........ These settings place emphasis on
rhythmic feel, with the “RHYTHM 4”
setting producing the most accurate [Settings] 001 ~ 128, C001 ~ C128
rhythmic feel. Specifies the sample voice to be pitch converted.
Specifies whether the sound quality or rhythmic feel of the
time-stretched sample will be emphasized.
248 RS7000
4. The Sample Jobs

08 FADE IN/OUT
[Settings] C-2 ~ G8
Specifies the key number of the sample to be pitch converted. Varies the level of the sample to produce a fade-in or fade-out.
NOTE
fied sample is a Pitched Voice.
3 PITCH .......................................................................[Knob 3] 1 2 5 3 7 4 6
[F2] [F3] [F4]
[Settings] -12 ~ 0 ~ +12 [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]
Specifies the amount and direction of pitch shift in semitone

increments. 1 SAMPLE (Sample Number) .......................... [Knob 1]
[Settings] 001 ~ 128, C001 ~ C128
4 FINE ..........................................................................[Knob 4]
[Settings] -50 ~ 0 ~ +50 Specifies the sample voice to which the fade-in or fade-out is
to be applied.
Specifies the amount and direction of fine pitch shift in cent
increments (1 cent = 1/100th of a semitone). 2 KEY (Key Number) ........................................... [Knob 2]
[Settings] C-2 ~ G8
5 AUDITION.......................................................................[F2]
Specifies the key number of the sample to which the fade-in
Plays the specified sample. or fade-out is to be applied.
Plays the pitch-converted sample if pressed after [F4] (DO!)
is pressed to pitch convert the sample.
NOTE 5
6 DO! ....................................................................................[F4] This parameter is not available when the speci-
The Sampling Mode

Executes the job.
7 CREATE ..........................................................................[F3]
3 FADE TYPE .......................................................... [Knob 3]
Saves the processed sample to the target sample number, [Settings] IN, OUT
If the original sample is a Pitched Sample it will be overwrit- Selects a fade-in (IN) or fade-out (OUT).
Voice a key-number selection page will appear. START, START (ATCK)
Fade In
LENGTH END
Fade Out
8 9
[Knob 2] [F3]
LENGTH
8 CREATE TO
(Destination Key Number) .............................[Knob 2] NOTE
[Settings] C-2 ~ G8
The portions of the sample prior to the specified
Specifies the key number to which the processed sample will START or START(ATCK) point and after the
be saved. specified END point will not be affected.
9 OK......................................................................................[F3]
Saves the pitch-converted sample to the specified destination
key number.
RS7000 249
4. The Sample Jobs
4 LENGTH ..................................................................[Knob 4]
09 FREQUENCY CONVERT
[Settings] 0 ~ End Point
Specifies the length of the fade-in or fade-out in 100 steps. Halves the sampling frequency of the specified sample. This can
When a fade-in is selected this parameter specifies the length be used to convert hi-fi samples to a lo-fi sound, and reduce the
of the fade starting at the specified START or sample size by half.
START(ATCK) point.
When a fade-out is selected this parameter specifies the
length of the fade starting at the beginning of the fade and
ending at the specified END point.
5 AUDITION.......................................................................[F2]
Plays the specified sample. 3
Plays the processed sample if pressed after [F4] (DO!) is 1 2 [F2]
5 4
pressed to apply a fade-in or fade-out to the sample. [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [F3] [F4]
6 DO! ....................................................................................[F4] 1 SAMPLE (Sample Number) .......................... [Knob 1]

Executes the job. [Settings] 001 ~ 128, C001 ~ C128
Specifies the sample voice to be converted.
7 CREATE ..........................................................................[F3]
Saves the processed sample to the target sample number, 2 KEY (Key Number) ........................................... [Knob 2]
overwriting the original sample. If the original sample is a [Settings] C-2 ~ G8
If the original sample is part of a Sample Kit Voice a key- Specifies the key number of the sample to be converted.
number selection page will appear.
NOTE
3 AUDITION ...................................................................... [F2]
8 9 Plays the specified sample.

[Knob 2] [F3] Plays the processed sample if pressed after [F4] (DO!) is
pressed to apply frequency conversion to the sample.
8 CREATE TO
4 DO! ................................................................................... [F4]
(Destination Key Number) .............................[Knob 2]
[Settings] C-2 ~ G8 Executes the job.
Specifies the key number to which the processed sample will 5 CREATE ......................................................................... [F3]
be saved.
Saves the processed sample to the target sample number,
9 OK......................................................................................[F3] overwriting the original sample. If the original sample is a
Saves the processed sample to the specified destination key If the original sample is part of a Sample Kit Voice a key-
number. number selection page will appear.
6 7
[Knob 2] [F3]
250 RS7000
4. The Sample Jobs
6 CREATE TO 5 DO! ................................................................................... [F4]

(Destination Key Number) .............................[Knob 2]
Executes the job.
[Settings] C-2 ~ G8
Specifies the key number to which the processed sample will 6 CREATE ......................................................................... [F3]
be saved. Saves the processed sample to the target sample number,
7 OK......................................................................................[F3] If the original sample is a Pitched Sample it will be overwrit-
Saves the processed sample to the specified destination key ten at this point. If the original sample is part of a Sample Kit
number. Voice a key-number selection page will appear.
10 STEREO TO MONO
Converts a stereo sample to a mono sample.
7 8
[Knob 2] [F3]
7 CREATE TO
(Destination Key Number) ............................ [Knob 2]
1 2 4 3 6 5 [Settings] C-2 ~ G8
[F2] [F3]
[Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
be saved.
1 SAMPLE (Sample Number) ...........................[Knob 1] 5
[Settings] 001 ~ 128, C001 ~ C128 8 OK ..................................................................................... [F3]
The Sampling Mode

Specifies the sample voice to be converted. Saves the processed sample to the specified destination key
number.
[Settings] C-2 ~ G8
Specifies the key number of the sample to be converted. 11 LOOP REMIX
NOTE Slices and randomly rearranges the selected sample while also
changing the sound of some portions to create totally new varia-
This parameter is not available when the speci- tions.
fied sample is a Pitched Voice. This job is effective when used with accurately-extracted 1 or 2-
measure break-beats or phrase samples. Before using the Loop
Remix job, set the loop start and end points in the Trim page, and
3 TYPE.........................................................................[Knob 3] then use the sample Extract job.
[Settings] L+R>MONO, L>MONO, R>MONO
L+R>MONO ...... The left and right channels of the ste-
reo sample are mixed and converted
to a mono sample.
L>MONO........... The left channel on the stereo sample
is converted to a mono sample.
R>MONO .......... The right channel on the stereo sam- 5 7 4 6
1 2 3 [F3]
ple is converted to a mono sample. [F2] [F4]
Specifies which channel, or both channels, of the stereo sam-

ple will be converted to a mono sample.
4 AUDITION.......................................................................[F2] [Settings] 001 ~ 128, C001 ~ C128
Plays the specified sample. Specifies the sample voice to be remixed.

Plays the processed sample if pressed after [F4] (DO!) is
pressed to convert the sample.
RS7000 251
4. The Sample Jobs
2 KEY (Key Number) ............................................[Knob 2] 8 CREATE TO

[Settings] C-2 ~ G8 (Destination Key Number) ............................ [Knob 2]
[Settings] C-2 ~ G8
Specifies the key number of the sample to be remixed.
NOTE be saved.

9 OK ..................................................................................... [F3]
Saves the processed sample to the specified destination key
number.
3 TYPE.........................................................................[Knob 3]
[Settings] 1 ~ 5 NOTE
Specifies the degree to which the looped portion of the sam- Loop Remix is intended to be used for remixing
ple will be sliced. single samples, and will not work on an entire
sliced sample voice.
4 VARIATION............................................................[Knob 4] Tracks containing sliced sample voices can be
remixed using the Real Time Loop Remix func-
[Settings] NORMAL 1, NORMAL 2, REVERSE 1, tion.
REVERSE 2
NORMAL1 ........ The original data is sliced and rear-
ranged only.
NORMAL2 ........ A variation of NORMAL 1.
REVERSE1 ....... In addition to slicing and rearrange-
ment, some portions of the sample 12 SLICE
will be played in reverse.
REVERSE2 ....... A variation of REVERSE 1. The sample is divided into a number of “slices”, the size of which
is determined by the specified note length.
Determines how the original sample is varied by the loop At the same time the note data required to reproduce the sliced
remix job. sample is inserted at the beginning of the currently selected mea-
sure in the currently selected track (or from the beginning of the
5 AUDITION.......................................................................[F2] currently selected phrase in the PATTERN mode).

Plays the processed sample if pressed after [F4] (DO!) is Original Sample
pressed to remix the sample.
Slice
6 DO! ....................................................................................[F4]
Executes the job. Random results will be produced each time E0 F0 F#0 G0
Sliced Sample
the [F4] button is pressed.
Current Measure
7 CREATE ..........................................................................[F3] Note Data
G0
Saves the processed sample to the target sample number, F#0
F0
overwriting the original sample. E0
If the original sample is a Pitched Sample it will be overwrit-
ten at this point. If the original sample is part of a Sample Kit ■ Sample Selection Display
Voice a key-number selection page will appear.
1 2 3 4
[F2]
8 9
[Knob 2] [F3]
[Settings] 001 ~ 128, C001 ~ C128
Specifies the sample voice to be sliced.
252 RS7000
4. The Sample Jobs

[Settings] C-2 ~ G8
Specifies the key number of the sample to be sliced.
NOTE
fied sample is a Pitched Voice. = A
[Knob 2] [F3]
3 AUDITION.......................................................................[F2] 0 CREATE TO ............................................................. [Knob 2]

Plays the specified sample. [Settings] TR01 ~ TR16
Specifies the track to which the sliced sample and note data
4 DO! ....................................................................................[F4] will be saved.
Selects the sample to be sliced and moves to the next page.
A OK ..................................................................................... [F3]
Saves the sliced sample and note data to the specified desti-
The Slice Parameter Page nation track.
NOTE
See page 237 for information on the amount of
free memory required for slice operations.
5
5 6 A 9 =
The Sampling Mode

[Knob 1] 7 8 [F3]
[Knob 3] [Knob 3]
13 SAMPLE VOICE NAME
Allows a name to be entered for the selected sample voice.

5 MEAS (Measure) .................................................[Knob 1]
6 METER.....................................................................[Knob 1]
7 SUB DIVIDE...........................................................[Knob 3]
8 SLICE TYPE ..........................................................[Knob 4]

1 2 3
9 SENS (Slice Sensitivity)
0 DO! 1 SAMPLE (Sample Number) .......................... [Knob 1]

For the details of each parameter, refer to the slice page (Page [Settings] 001 ~ 128, C001 ~ C128
235) of the sampling mode. Specifies the sample voice to be named.
A CREATE ..........................................................................[F3] 2 NAME ← → ........................................................... [Knob 3]

If the original sample voice is a pitched voice, it will be saved
Enters a name of up to 8 characters for the sample voice.
at this point by overwriting.
Use [Knob 3] to move the cursor, and the keyboard to enter
If the original sample voice is a sample kit voice, a page will
the corresponding character at the selected character location.
appear allowing you to select the track.
Refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 67, for more information
on name entry.
3 DO! ................................................................................... [F4]

Enters the sample voice name.
RS7000 253
4. The Sample Jobs
254 RS7000
Chapter 6. The Utility Mode
About the Utility Mode .................................. 256

1. System........................................................ 257
2. MIDI Setup .................................................. 260
3. MIDI Filter ................................................... 262
RS7000 255
About the Utility Mode
The UTILITY mode provide access to overall RS7000 system settings and MIDI setup parameters.
Press the [UTILITY] button to go to the UTILITY mode.
The UTILITY mode includes the following 3 pages.
● System... (Page 257)

Master tuning, foot switch settings, and other overall system
parameters are available via this page. 3 additional pages can be
accessed by using the [F1] and [F4] buttons, for a total of 4 Sys-
tem pages.
● MIDI Setup... (Page 260)

MIDI synchronization, echo back, and other MIDI-related setup
parameters. 1 additional page can be accessed by using the [F1]
and [F4] buttons, for a total of 2 MIDI Setup pages.
● MIDI Filter... (Page 262)

Specifies which MIDI events will be transmitted via the MIDI IN
or OUT connectors.
256 RS7000
1. System
1. System
Master tuning, foot switch settings, and other overall system parameters are available via this page.
3 additional pages can be accessed by using the [F1] and [F4] buttons, for a total of 4 System pages.
Display Parameters Specifies whether style and section changes will be made on
measure boundaries, or 1/2-note ~ 1/16-note boundaries.
4 MEMORY PROTECT................................. [Knob 4]

[Settings] OFF, ON
OFF ...................It is possible to record or edit pat-
terns, songs, and sample voices.
ON .....................It is not possible to record or edit pat-
terns, songs, and sample voices.
[F4] Determines whether the memory containing patterns, songs,

1 2 3 4
and samples will be protected or not.
1 MASTER TUNE ...................................................[Knob 1]

[Settings] -102.4 ~ +102.3
Tunes the RS7000 tone generator in 0.1-cent increments.
(one “cent” = 1/100th of a semitone).
[F1] 5 6 7 8 [F4]
2 FOOT SWITCH .....................................................[Knob 2] [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [Knob 4]
[Settings] SEQ START, SECTION, SUSTAIN, TAP,
SAMPLING 5 CLICK MODE ....................................................... [Knob 1]
SEQ START...... Pressing the footswitch alternately [Settings] OFF, REC, REC/PLAY, ALL
starts and stops the RS7000
sequencer.
OFF ...................The click will not sound.
REC...................The click will sound during real-time
6
SECTION .......... Pressing the footswitch selects the
recording only.
section in sequence (A, B, C, etc.).
REC/PLAY ........The click will sound during real-time
The Utility Mode

SUSTAIN .......... The footswitch functions as a sustain
recording and playback.
pedal.
ALL ...................The click will always sound.
TAP ................... Automatically sets the BPM according
to the speed at which the footswitch Determines whether and when the metronome click will
tapped. sound.
SAMPLING ....... When the trigger mode is MANUAL
the footswitch has the same function
6 CLICK BEAT ........................................................ [Knob 2]
as the [STANDBY/START/STOP] but-
ton. [Settings] 16, 08, 04, 02, 01
Selects the function of a footswitch connected to the rear- Determines on which beats the metronome click will sound.
panel FOOT SW jack.(Page 23) 16 = 16th notes, 08 = 8th notes, 04 = quarter notes, 02 = half
notes, and 01 = whole notes.
3 PATTERN QUANTIZE............................... [Knob 3]
[Settings] 1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16 7 REC COUNT ......................................................... [Knob 3]
1 ........................ 1 measure [Settings] OFF, 1 ~ 8 MEAS
1/2 ..................... Half note OFF ...................Recording starts as soon as the
1/4 ..................... Quarter note [PLAY] button is pressed in the Rec
1/8 ..................... 8th note Standby mode.
1/16 ................... 16th note 1 ~ 8 MEAS.......Sets the number of count-in measures
provided before recording starts.
Sets the number of count-in measures provided before

recording starts in the real-time recording modes.
RS7000 257
1. System
8 LED DISPLAY.......................................................[Knob 4] A PATTERN BPM HOLD ..................................... [Knob 3]

[Settings] BPM, MEAS [Settings] OFF, ON
BPM .................. The numeric LED displays the BPM ON .....................The BPM will not change when a new
(tempo). style is selected.
MEAS................ The numeric LED displays the current OFF ...................The BPM will change when a new
measure number during playback and style is selected.
recording.
Determines whether the BPM setting will switch to the BPM
Specifies the parameters to be normally displayed by the value stored with each style when a new style is selected dur-
numeric LED. ing playback.
B LCD MODE ........................................................... [Knob 4]

[Settings] POSI, NEGA
POSI..................The normal display mode.
NEGA ................An inverse “negative” display mode.
Selects normal or inverse display on the LCD.

[F1] 9 0 A B [F4]
9 EVENT CHASE ....................................................[Knob 1]

[Settings] OFF, PC, PC+PB+CTRL, ALL
Event chase refers to the ability to rapidly locate certain
[F1]
events so that it is possible to start playback from any point in C D E F
a pattern or song with proper voice assignments, pitch, etc. [Knob 1] [Knob 2] [Knob 3] [F4]
This specifies the events to be rapidly “chased” in such a situ-
ation. C TG MUTE MODE ................................................ [Knob 1]
PC allows rapid chase of program change events, while
[Settings] AUDIO, MIDI
PC+PB+CTRL chases program change, pitch bend, and con-
trol change events. ALL specifies all events except note Determines whether the MIDI sequence data or the tone gen-
events. erator audio output will be muted when a track is muted.
When a track is muted the corresponding MIDI output is also
NOTE
turned off whether the setting is AUDIO or MIDI.
• When a setting other than OFF selected there
may be a slight delay when starting playback,
NOTE
and the fast-forward or fast-reverse opera-
tions may run a little slower. If a track is un-muted while a note is playing, if
• When ALL is selected a large volume of data the AUDIO option is selected the note will
is transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector sound from that point on, but if the MIDI option
which may, in some cases, cause errors with is selected the note will not sound.
some types of external MIDI equipment.
D STEREO OUT LEVEL ...................................... [Knob 2]

0 SYS.EX.INTERVAL TIME ......................................[Knob 2] [Settings] +0 dB, +6 dB, +12 dB, +18 dB
[Settings] 000 ~ 900 ms
Sets the nominal output level delivered via the stereo outputs,
Allows the MIDI system exclusive (bulk dump) interval to be headphone outputs, and digital/optical outputs (on the
set between 000 and 900 milliseconds in 100-millisecond optional I/O expansion board — page 21).
increments. If MIDI errors occur when transmitting data to Higher settings may result in distorted sound depending on
external MIDI devices, try setting a longer SYS.EX INTER- the voices and number of simultaneous notes used.
VAL TIME.
258 RS7000
1. System
E AS1&2 OUT LEVEL ...........................................[Knob 3]

[Settings] +0 dB, +6 dB, +12 dB, +18 dB
Sets the nominal output level delivered via assignable outputs
1 and 2 (on the optional AIEB2 I/O expansion board — page
21).
Higher settings may result in distorted sound depending on
the voices and number of simultaneous notes used.
F WAVE MEMORY OPTIMIZE ...................................[F4]

Optimization consolidates areas of used and available mem-
ory to create the largest possible area of contiguous available
memory. If the optimize operation results in a larger amount
of contiguous available memory, the sampling time will be
automatically recalculated.
NOTE
Operations which manipulate recorded samples
in memory - adding or deleting samples, for
example - can result in non-continuous blocks
of data in memory. Sufficient continuous free
memory is required for sample recording or
loading. If you want to record a 20-second sam-
ple, for example, but the available memory is
broken down into one 10-second and two 5-
second blocks of memory, 20 seconds of unin-
terrupted sample recording or loading will not
be possible. The optimize function can solve
this problem by maximizing the amount of con-
tinuous free memory available.
6
The Utility Mode

Before Optimize
Memory Sample A Sample B Sample C
5 second blank 10 second blank 5 second blank
After Optimize
Memory Sample A Sample B Sample C 20 seconds free for

recording
20 second blank
RS7000 259
2. MIDI Setup
2. MIDI Setup
MIDI synchronization, echo back, and other MIDI-related setup parameters.

1 additional page can be accessed by using the [F1] and [F4] buttons, for a total of 2 MIDI Setup pages.
Display Parameters 2 MIDI CLOCK OUT .............................................. [Knob 2]

[Settings] OFF, MIDI A, MIDI B, MIDI A+B
OFF .............. MIDI clock is not transmitted.
MIDI A .......... MIDI clock is transmitted via MIDI OUT A.
MIDI B .......... MIDI clock is transmitted via MIDI OUT B.
MIDI A+B ..... MIDI clock is transmitted via MIDI OUT A
and B.
Specifies whether and from which MIDI output MIDI clock

[F4] will be transmitted by the RS7000.
1 2 3 4
3 MIDI CONTROL .................................................. [Knob 3]
[Settings] OFF, IN, MIDI A, MIDI B, MIDI A+B,
1 MIDI SYNC .............................................................[Knob 1]
IN/OUT A, IN/OUT B, IN/OUT A+B
[Settings] INTERNAL, MIDI, MTC OFF ...................MIDI control is not transmitted.
INTERNAL ........ Synchronization to internal clock. Use IN.......................MIDI control is received but not tre-
this setting when the RS7000 is to be ansmitted.
used alone or as the master clock OUT A ...............MIDI control is transmitted via MIDI
source for other equipment. OUT A.
MIDI................... The RS7000 is synchronized to a MIDI OUT B ...............MIDI control is transmitted via MIDI
clock received from an external MIDI OUT B.
master device via the MIDI IN connec- OUT A+B ..........MIDI control is transmitted via MIDI
tor. OUT A and B.
MTC .................. The RS7000 is synchronized to an IN/OUT A ..........MIDI control is received and transmit-
MTC signal received via MIDI IN. MMC ted via MIDI OUT A.
signals are transmitted via MIDI OUT. IN/OUT B ..........MIDI control is received and transmit-
Use this setting when the RS7000 is to ted via MIDI OUT B.
be used as a MIDI slave, such as when IN/OUT A+B......MIDI control is received and transmit-
synchronized to an MTC-capable ted via MIDI OUT A and B.
MTR.
Specifies whether and via which MIDI outputs MIDI control
Determines which RS7000 playback will be synchronized to signals — start, continue, stop, and song position pointer —
the internal clock or an external MIDI clock. will be received and/or transmitted by the RS7000.
MMC signals are also transmitted when MIDI SYNC is set to
MTC.
NOTE
• MTC (MIDI Time Code) allows simultaneous 4 ECHO BACK ........................................................ [Knob 4]
synchronization of multiple audio devices via
[Settings]
standard MIDI cables. It includes data corre-
OFF, THRU A, THRU B, THRU A+B, REC MONITOR
sponding to hours, minutes, seconds, and
frames. The RS7000 does not transmit MTC. OFF ....................... No echo back.
THRU A................. MIDI data received via the MIDI IN
A device such as the Yamaha AW4416 is
connector is re-transmitted via the
necessary as an MTC master. MIDI OUT A connector.
• MMC (MIDI Machine Control) allows remote THRU B................. MIDI data received via the MIDI IN
control of multitrack recorders, MIDI sequenc- connector is re-transmitted via the
ers, etc. A MMC-compatible multitrack MIDI OUT B connector.
recorder, for example, will automatically THRU A+B ............ MIDI data received via the MIDI IN
respond to start, stop, fast forward, and fast connector is re-transmitted via the
reverse operations performed on the control- MIDI OUT A and B connectors.
ling sequencer, thus keeping playback of the
sequencer and multitrack recorder aligned.
260 RS7000
2. MIDI Setup
REC MONITOR..... MIDI data received via the MIDI IN

connector is re-transmitted via the NOTE
MIDI channel and MIDI output • If program change or control change data is
assigned to the currently selected
track. In this case the currently
included in the performance data, this data
selected track will sound regard- will be changed when mixer, voice edit, or
less of the original channel. effect data is recalled with a style or song.
• If a voice is set to “Phrase” in the PATTERN
Determines whether received MIDI data is re-transmitted and
mode, the voice setting will be changed
via which output.
regardless of this setting.
NOTE
The REC MONITOR setting is ideal when using 7 MTC START OFFSET .................................[Knob 4], [F4]
an external MIDI keyboard and tone generator [Settings] Hour: Minute: Second: Frame
when using the RS7000 to create songs. Hour ..................00 ~ 23
Minute...............00 ~ 59
Second .............00 ~ 59
Frame ...............00 ~ 29
Specifies the time-code time from which sequence playback

will start MTC is received. This feature can be used to accu-
rately align playback of the RS7000 with an external MTC-
compatible device.
Use [F4] to select Hour, Minute, Second, or Frame, then use
[Knob 4] to set as required.
[F1]
5 6 7
[F4]
5 TG PARAM OUT..................................................[Knob 1]
[Settings] OFF, OUT A, OUT B
OFF ................... No parameter output.
OUT A ............... Parameter data is transmitted via MIDI
OUT A. 6
OUT B ............... Parameter data is transmitted via MIDI
OUT B.
The Utility Mode

Determines whether MIDI data corresponding to tone gener-
ator parameter changes made in one of the sub modes
(MIXER, VOICE EDIT, EFFECT) will be transmitted via a
MIDI OUT connector.
6 VOICE SETUP TO TG .......................................[Knob 2]

[Settings] OFF, ON
OFF ................... Voices and effects are not changed
when a different style or song is
selected.
ON..................... The voice and effect settings stored
with each song or style are recalled
when a different song or style is
selected.
Determines whether or not the mixer, voice edit, and effect

parameters stored with each style or song will be recalled
when a style or song is selected.
RS7000 261
3. MIDI Filter
3. MIDI Filter
Specifies which MIDI events will be transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector.
These settings apply to pattern and song playback via MIDI OUT. Mixer, voice edit and effect settings,
as well as knob and keyboard operations, are transmitted via MIDI OUT regardless of these settings.
Display Parameters
[F1] [F2] [F4]
[Settings]
NOTE
PITCH BEND
PROGRAM CHANGE
CONTROL CHANGE
CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH
POLY AFTER TOUCH
EXCLUSIVE
The display shows whether the corresponding MIDI events

will be transmitted or not.
.................. The corresponding MIDI event will not
be transmitted.
.................. The corresponding MIDI event will be

transmitted.
Use [F1] and [F2] to move the cursor, and [F4] to check or un-
check the boxes.
NOTE
When an IN box is disabled, the corresponding
MIDI event will not be sent to the sequencer
and will not be recorded. All events are sent to
the tone generator section regardless of the
MIDI Filter settings.
262 RS7000
Chapter 7. Other Information
1. MIDI Basics ................................................ 264

2. MIDI Events Handled by the RS7000 ....... 266
RS7000 263
1. MIDI Basics
1. MIDI Basics
1. MIDI is ... In a similar way, multiple transmitting devices in a MIDI system

can be set to transmit on separate channels which reach the
“MIDI” is an acronym for “Musical Instrument Digital Inter- receiving device(s) via a MIDI cable. Only a MIDI device set to
face”, and is a worldwide standard designed to allow perfor- receive on the same channel as a transmitting device will be con-
mance, voice, and other data to be transferred between musical trolled by that device.
instruments. Data communication is assured even between musi-
cal instruments and equipment from different manufacturers. MIDI Instrument MIDI Instrument
MIDI has three main functions: (transmitting device) (receiving device)
The first is remote control of musical instruments. For example, (Performance data) (Performance data)
performance or voices switching operations, etc., carried out on ch.1 .. Piano ch.1 .. Piano
one instruments can remotely control another instrument con- ch.2 .. Guitar ch.2 .. Guitar
ch.3 .. Bass ch.3 .. Bass
nected via MIDI.
Second is automated performance. Performance data recorded by MIDI transmit MIDI receive
a sequencer or computer can be transmitted via MIDI to multiple channel settings channel settings
instruments for fully automatic playback.
The third is synchronization between instruments. Instruments
that use tempo data for playback or recording can be connected
via MIDI and accurately synchronized to the same tempo. 3. Multi-timbre and Single-timbre
Tone Generators
2. MIDI Channels MIDI tone generators can be grouped into two main types
according to the number of channels that can simultaneously
MIDI data is transferred over 16 channels numbered from 1 receive on — Multi-timbre and Single-timbre.
through 16. It is thus possible to transfer the MIDI performance Single-timbre tone generators can receive and play the MIDI per-
data for up to 16 different “parts” via a single cable. formance for one part via a single MIDI channel. This type of
MIDI channels can be thought of as being like television chan- tone generator is most commonly used as an expansion tone
nels. Each TV station broadcasts on a separate channel. At the module for keyboards or other MIDI controllers.
receiving end (i.e. the TV set) the television receiver can be set to Multi-timbre tone generators are capable of simultaneously
receive only one of the many channels that are on the air at the receiving and playing the MIDI performance data for several
same time. parts over multiple MIDI channels. This type of tone generator
can be thought of as several single-timbre tone generators in one
integrated unit. In this sense, the number of simultaneous parts
that can be played by a multi-timbre tone generator is determined
by the number of single-timbre tone generators it contains.
The RS7000 tone generator is a multi-timbre type which is
always capable of simultaneously playing up to 16 different parts.
Broadcast
Channel 1 Synthesizer Single-timbre Tone Generator
The receiver (Performance data)
Channel 1
selects channel ch.1 .. piano
1, 2, or 3
Multi-timbre Tone Generator

Sequencer
Broadcast Channel 2 (Performance data) Channel 1
Broadcast Channel 3
ch.1 .... Piano
Channel 2
ch.2 .... Guitar
ch.16 .. Drums
Channel 16
264 RS7000
1. MIDI Basics
4. Parts and Part Parameters
The individual single tone generators that make up a multi tone

generator are often referred to as “parts”. Since the RS7000 tone
generator can simultaneously play data on up to 16 channels, it
has 16 parts. In addition to specifying separate MIDI channels for
each part, it is possible to individually set the voice, pan position,
volume, and a range of other parameters.
The RS7000 provides voice, pan, volume, effect send level, and
other tone generator parameters in the MIXER and VOICE EDIT
sub modes. Taking a look at the various parameters available will
give you a good idea of the many parameters provided for each
part. These type of parameters are commonly known as “part
parameters”.
5. Parts and Tracks
In the RS7000, the performance data recorded on each of its 16

tracks plays the corresponding tone generator parts. Although the
default track-to-part relationship is that track 1 plays part 1, track
2, plays part 2, etc., these assignments can be changed via the
SETUP Out Channel display page (Page 110) so that any track
plays any part.
Sequencer Tone Generator
Track 1 Part 1
Track 2 Part 2
Track 3 Part 3
Track 16 Part 16
7
6. MIDI Signal Flow
Other Information
MIDI IN MIDI Filter
MIDIフィルター Sequencer
シーケンサー部 Tone音源部
Generator
ECHO BACK=THRU
MIDI Filter
MIDIフィルター
MIDI OUT
Controller
コントローラー部
ECHO BACK=RecM
RS7000 265
2. MIDI Events Handled by the RS7000
1. Note ~ 9. Exclusive events are handled in the PHRASE EDIT (Page 154) and SONG EDIT (Page 225)
modes. 10. BPM (tempo) change events can be manipulated when editing the BPM track in the SONG
EDIT and PATTERN Chain Edit modes.
1. Note 3. Program Change (PC)
Note Name Gate time Velocity Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB Program Voice
Number Name
• These are the events that define notes, making up the largest
portion of all performance data. • Program change events select voices.
• The note name defines the pitch. • The bank select MSB and LSB parameters are actually
• The gate time specifies the length of the note in beats and included in the Control Change category, below, but since in
clocks. the RS7000 these 3 events are used to select voices they are
• Velocity is “how hard” the note is played. The bar graph to the grouped and described here.
right is a graphic representation of the value. • Bank select MSB and LSB select the voice bank.
• The program number selects an individual voices from the
[Settings]
Note Name C-2 ~ G8 voice category and bank number specified by the MSB and
Gate Time 000:001 ~ 999:479 LSB.
Velocity 001 ~ 127 • Refer to “Chapter 1: Basics”, page 61, for more information on
RS7000 voice banks.
[Settings]
2. Pitch Bend Bank Select MSB 000 ~ 127
Bank Select LSB 000 ~ 127
Program Number 000 ~ 127
Data
• Defines continuous changes in pitch.

• Pitch bend events are generated by pitch bend wheel operation
on an external keyboard.
• The data is a numerical representation of pitch bend wheel
position. The bar graph to the right is a graphic representation
of the value.
[Settings]
Data -8192 ~ +0000 ~ +8191
266 RS7000
4. Control Change (CC) ● Panpot (Control Number 010)

• Sets the pan position for each individual part. The sound is
panned fully left when the value is “0” and fully right when the
value is “127”. The displayed values are –64 ~ +63.
● Expression (Control Number 011)
• Sets the expression for each individual part. No sound is pro-
duced when the value is “0”, and “127” produces maximum
volume. This parameter produces volume variations during
Control Number Data
playback.
● Sustain (Hold 1) (Control Number 064)
• Control Change events control voice and effect parameters. • This MIDI message represents sustain pedal ON/OFF opera-
• Control Change events are generated when a controller such as tions. Notes playing when the pedal is pressed will be sus-
a modulation wheel or foot controller is operated on an exter- tained. When the value is “0” ~ “63” sustain is OFF, and when
nal keyboard. the data is “64” ~ “127” sustain is ON.
• Control numbers 1 - 119 (except for 32) can be recorded in real ● Portamento (Control Number 065)
• This MIDI message turns portamento ON or OFF. When the
time by using the assignable knobs.
value is “0” ~ “63” portamento is OFF, and when the data is
• The control number specifies the controller.
“64” ~ “127” portamento is ON.
• The data specifies the “position” of the controller assigned to
• The length (degree) of the portamento effect is controlled by
the selected control number. The bar graph to the right is a
Portamento Time (Control Number 005).
graphic representation of the data value.
● Sostenuto Pedal (Control Number 066)
[Settings] • This MIDI message represents sostenuto pedal ON/OFF opera-
Control Number 000 ~ 127
tions. When the value is “0” ~ “63” sostenuto is OFF, and when
Data 000 ~ 127
the data is “64” ~ “127” sostenuto is ON.
● Harmonic Content (Control Change 071)
NOTE
• Adjusts the resonance of the filter assigned to a voice. The res-
If the controller data is varied suddenly, the tone onance is adjusted by using the data range of 0 ~ 127 as an off-
generator may produce click noise in some set value with a display range of –64 ~ +63 which is added to
cases.
the voice data.
● Release Time (Control Change 072)
• Adjusts the release time of the voice AEG. The release time is
Some of the more important control numbers and controllers
are listed below. adjusted by using the data range of 0 ~ 127 as an offset value
● Modulation Wheel (Control Number 001)

with a display range of –64 ~ +63 which is added to the voice 7
• The MIDI data produced when a modulation wheel is operated. data.
No modulation is applied when the value is “0”, and “127” pro- ● Attack Time (Control Change 073)
Other Information
• Adjusts the attack time of the voice AEG. The attack time is
duces maximum modulation.
adjusted by using the data range of 0 ~ 127 as an offset value
● Portamento Time (Control Number 005)
• This MIDI message controls the portamento effect. No porta- with a display range of –64 ~ +63 which is added to the voice
mento is produced when the value is “0”, and “127” produces data.
maximum portamento time. ● Brightness (Control Change 074)
• Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the filter assigned to a voice.
• Portamento is only produced when Portamento (Control Num-
The cutoff is adjusted by using the data range of 0 ~ 127 as an
ber 065) is ON.
offset value with a display range of –64 ~ +63 which is added
● Data Entry MSB (Control Number 006)
● Data Entry LSB (Control Number 038) to the voice data.
• These parameters specify the value of RPN MSB, RPN LSB
(Page 268), NRPN MSB, and NRPN LSB events (Page 268).
The value is represented by two control change data numbers
— the MSB and the LSB.
● Volume (Control Number 007)
• Sets the volume for each individual part. No sound is produced
when the value is “0”, and “127” produces maximum volume.
RS7000 267
● Effect Send Level 1 (Reverb Effect) ● All Sound Off (Control Number 120)
(Control Number 091) • Turns all currently sounding notes off for all parts.
• Specifies the reverb effect send level. ● Reset All Controllers (Control Number 121)
● Effect Send Level 3 (Chorus Effect) • Resets all controllers to their initial values. The following
(Control Number 093) parameters are affected: Pitch Bend, Channel Pressure, Poly-
• Specifies the delay/chorus effect send level. phonic Key Pressure, Modulation, Expression, Hold 1, Porta-
● Effect Send Level 4 (Variation Effect) mento, Sostenuto, Soft Pedal, Portamento Control, RPN*,
(Control Number 094)
NRPN* (* The RPN and NRPN are specified as having no
• Specifies the variation effect send level.
number, and no internal data is changed).
● Data Increment (Control Number 096)
● Data Decrement (Control Number 097) • The following data is not affected: Program Change, Bank
• These MIDI messages increment or decrement by one the Select MSB and LSB, Volume, Pan, Dry Send Level, Effect
value of pitch bend sensitivity, fine tune, or coarse tune settings Send Level 1, 3, and 4, Pitch Sensitivity, Fine Tuning, Coarse
made using RPN (Page 269). Tuning.
● NRPN MSB (Non-Registered Parameter Number ● Omni Mode Off (Control Number 124)
MSB) (Control Number 099) • Performs the same operation as when an All Notes Off message
● NRPN LSB (Non-Registered Parameter Number is received. The voice receive channel is set to 1.
LSB) (Control Number 098) ● Omni Mode On (Control Number 125)
• Used primarily as offset values for vibrato, filter, EG, drum • Performs the same operation as when an All Notes Off message
setup and other settings. is received. Only the voice receive channel is set to Omni On.
• Data Entry (Page 267) is used to set the parameter value after ● Mono (Control Number 126)
specifying the parameter using the NRPN MSB and LSB. • Performs the same operation as when an All Sound Off mes-
• Once an NRPN is specified, the following data entry message sage is received. If the 3rdbyte parameter (the parameter that
received on the same channel is processed as the value of that determines the mono number) is 0 ~ 16 the parts corresponding
NRPN. Prevent operational errors by transmitting an RPN Null to those channels are set to mono.
message (7FH, 7FH) after using these messages to perform a ● Poly (Control Number 127)
control operation. • Performs the same operation as when an All Sound Off mes-
• Refer to “8. NRPN” for information about the parameter. (Page sage is received, and sets the parts corresponding to those
270) channels are set to poly.
● RPN MSB (Registered Parameter Number MSB)
● RPN LSB (Registered Parameter Number LSB)
• Used primarily as offset values for pitch bend sensitivity, tun-
ing, and other part settings.
• Data Entry (Page 267) is used to set the parameter value after
specifying the parameter using the RPN MSB and RPN LSB.
• Once an RPN is specified, the following data entry message
received on the same channel is processed as the value of that
RPN. Prevent operational errors by transmitting an Null mes-
sage (7FH, 7FH) after using these messages to perform a con-
trol operation.
• Refer to “7. RPN” for information about the parameter. (Page
269)
268 RS7000
5. Channel Aftertouch (CAT) 7. Registered Parameter Number (RPN)
Data RPN MSB-LSB Data Entry

MSB-LSB
• This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after
the note is played. • Changes parameter values for each tone generator part.
• The data represents the amount of pressure applied to the key. • Normally three types of control change data are sent: RPN
The bar graph to the right is a graphic representation of the MSB (101), RPN LSB (100), and Data Entry MSB (6). In the
value. RS7000, Data Entry LSB (38) is added to this and the resulting
[Settings] group of control change events is handled as one.
Data 000 ~ 127 • Once an RPN is specified, the following data entry message
RPN. Prevent operational errors by transmitting an Null mes-
6. Polyphonic Aftertouch (PAT) sage (7FH, 7FH) after using these messages to perform a con-
trol operation.
• The RS7000 tone generator section allows control of the 4 fol-
lowing parameters.
[Settings]
RPN MSB 000 ~ 127
RPN LSB 000 ~ 127
Data Entry MSB 000 ~ 127
Note Name Data
Data Entry LSB 000 ~ 127
• This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after

the note is played. Unlike the Channel Aftertouch event, how-
ever, individual data is provided for each key.
• Note Name specifies the key. 7
• The data represents the amount of pressure applied to the key.
The bar graph to the right is a graphic representation of the
Other Information
value.
[Settings]
Note Name C-2 ~ G8
Data 000 ~ 127
● Parameter List (RPN)

Data Range Initial
MSB LSB Display Parameter Name Function
MSB LSB Value
Specifies the amount of pitch bend produced in
000 000 PBSens Pitch Bend Sensitivity 000~024 – 024
response to pitch bend data in semitone increments.
000 001 FnTune Fine Tune -64~+63 – +00 Adjusts the tuning in cent increments.
000 002 CsTune Coarse Tune -24~+24 – +00 Adjusts the tuning in semitone increments.
Voids the RPN and NRPN settings so no tone gener-
127 127 Null Null – – – ator settings are changed when the following Data
Entry message is received.
RS7000 269
8. Non-Registered Parameter Number 9. Exclusive

(NRPN)
Data
NRPN MSB-LSB Data Entry

MSB-LSB
• Changes internal tone generator settings such as voice and
effect settings, remote switch control, tone generator mode
• Changes parameter values for each tone generator part. switching, and others via MIDI.
• There is no compatibility between different manufacturers. • The 2nd byte is a manufacturer ID number, and there is no data
Numerous parameters specific to each tone generator can be compatibility between manufacturers. This type of event is
controlled to produce tonal changes. used to control RS7000-specific functions.
• Normally three types of control change data are sent: NRPN • The cursor can be used to scroll through the data if the data size
MSB (99), NRPN LSB (98), and Data Entry MSB (6). In the is greater than 17 bytes.
RS7000 this group of control change events is handled as one. [Settings]
• Once an NRPN is specified, the following data entry message Data 00 ~ 7F, F7 (Hexadecimal)
NRPN. Prevent operational errors by transmitting an RPN Null NOTE
message (7FH, 7FH) after using these messages to perform a The black keys on the keyboard (SECTION) A ~
control operation. F are used to enter the A ~ F portions of hexa-
• For filter cutoff frequency, resonance, and other independent decimal data. When [SHIFT]+[F4] is pressed or
control change parameters, it is normal to use the independent [Knob 4] is operated the cursor will flash, and
the numeric keypad or the keyboard black keys
control change parameters rather than the NRPN.
can be used to enter A ~ F.
[Settings]
NRPN MSB 000 ~ 127
NRPN LSB 000 ~ 127
Data Entry MSB 000 ~ 127 10. BPM Change
Tempo
• Changes the BPM at any point during the sequence.

• The tempo at the beginning of the sequence can be set in the
SONG Play or PATTERN Chain Play mode, but SONG EDIT
and PATTERN Chain Play settings take priority.
• BPM Change is used to set the actual playback tempo. For
example, to change the tempo from 120 to 100, enter BPM =
100 at the point at which the change is to occur.
• Can only be manipulated in the BPM track.
[Settings] Tempo 1.0 ~ 300.0
270 RS7000
Appendix
1. Installing Optional Equipment ................. 272

2. Specifications............................................ 282
3. Troubleshooting........................................ 286
4. Error Message List.................................... 288
5. Voice List (Normal voice) ......................... 291
6. Drum Voice List......................................... 295
7. Phrase Category List ................................ 313
8. Effect Type List ......................................... 313
9. Effect Parameter List ................................ 315
10. Effect Data/Value Table ............................ 323
11. MIDI Data Format....................................... 325
12. Glossary..................................................... 334
13. Index........................................................... 343
RS7000 271
1. Installing Optional Equipment
The RS7000 provides slots, connectors, and installation space that can accommodate a variety of options for enhancing its performance
and functionality, such as SIMM expansion memory and I/O expansion boards.
Removing the Bottom Cover
Procedure
1. Be sure you have the following at hand before starting the installation.
• Phillips screwdriver: Magnetic-tipped screwdriver is recommended.
• Workbench: Please carry out all work on a stable workbench or table. Spreading a cloth over the work surface will prevent
scratching.
• Gloves: Be sure to wear gloves so that your hands are not scratched by the metal cover or other metal parts.
2. Switch off the RS7000 power, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3. Remove the screws holding the bottom cover in place.
• Set the RS7000 upside down on the workbench and use a Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the 12 screws from the bottom (see illus-
tration below).
CAUTION
Do not remove the screw marked A in the illustration below. This screw is not relevant to removing the bot-
tom cover.
Holes B in the diagram below have no connection with removing the bottom cover.
4. Holding both sides of the bottom cover with both hands, lift the bottom cover straight up to remove it.
272 RS7000
Replacing the Bottom Cover
IMPORTANT
When replacing the bottom cover, be sure that you do not get cables caught or pulled between the cover and
main unit. This could cause broken connections or malfunctions.
Procedure
1. Holding both sides of the bottom cover with both hands, lower the cover straight down from above to its original position.
2. Use the original screws to re-attach the bottom cover.

• Replace the twelve screws to fasten the bottom cover.
CAUTION
Do not use screws other than those removed in step 3 (Page 272). Other screws can damage the unit.
Holes B in the diagram below are not screw holes. Be careful not to insert screws into these holes.
Appendix
B
3. Carefully turn the unit right side up.
RS7000 273
Installing SIMMs
You can increase the RS7000’s memory by installing commercially available SIMMs (single in-line memory modules). This section
explains how to carry out the installation.
Important information about purchasing SIMMs for the RS7000

The RS7000 does not necessarily support all commercially available SIMMs. YAMAHA cannot guarantee opera-
tion of SIMMs that you purchase. Before purchasing SIMMs, please consult your YAMAHA dealer or an autho-
rized YAMAHA distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Manual) for advice.
IMPORTANT
• Before beginning the installation, please read precautions “Handling and Installation of Options,” found at
the beginning of this manual.
• You need to use 72-pin SIMMs with access times of 70ns or less. The SIMM module size may be 4, 8, 16,
or 32 MB. The RS7000 is designed for use with 32 bit SIMMs, but can also accept installation of 36 bit
(parity-type) SIMMs.
• When purchasing SIMMs, make sure that the SIMM design does not utilize more than 18 memory chips
per module. (SIMMs comprised of more than 18 chips do not operate correctly on the RS7000.)
• SIMMs must be installed as a pair of the identical capacity. It is not possible to add just a single SIMM.
• The RS7000 ships with 4 MB of memory installed. This means that if, for example, you install a pair of 16
MB SIMMs, the sampling memory will be 4 + (16 × 2) = 36 MB. However, the maximum sampling memory
is 64 MB. For this reasons the original memory will effectively be disabled if you install a pair of 32 MB
SIMMs (one pair: 32 × 2 = 64 MB).
• YAMAHA recommends that you purchase SIMMs that conform to the JEDEC* standard.
Please be aware, however, that conformance to this standard does not guarantee that the SIMM will oper-
ate on the RS7000 even if it operates on a personal computer.
* JEDEC (Joint Electron Device Engineering Council) sets standards for terminal configurations within electronic
devices.
274 RS7000
Procedure
1. Be sure that you have the following at hand before starting the installation.
• SIMMs (one pair: 2 modules)
• Workbench: Please carry out all work on a stable workbench or table. Spreading a cloth over the work surface will help prevent
scratching.
2. Remove the bottom cover (Page 272).
3. Insert the SIMM module into the socket on the circuit board.
• First identify the sockets that you will install the SIMM into.
Sockets for SIMM

installation
NOTE
When inserting SIMMs, always begin with the outer socket (i.e., the socket closest to the side of the RS7000
cover). SIMMs will not fit into the socket if you reverse this order.
• Hold the SIMM with its cutout part facing the rear panel, and set the SIMM into the socket at an angle as shown in the figure
below (1). Then push the SIMM upright until it clicks into the position shown in figure (2), locking it into place.
(1) (2)
Appendix
• Repeat this step for the other SIMM.
• If you need to remove a SIMM from a socket, hold open the two hooks on the socket (one at each end), push on the SIMM to tilt
it downward, and then pull it out.
This completes the installation.

If you wish to install an I/O expansion board, continue with the I/O expansion board installation procedure (Page 276).
RS7000 275
4. Replace the bottom cover (Page 273).

5. Plug in the power cord.
• To verify that the installed SIMMs are detected correctly, hold down [SHIFT] and press [UTILITY] to access the FREE MEM-
ORY display (Page 68).
Installing the AIEB2 I/O Expansion Board
The optional AIEB2 Input/Output expansion board adds digital I/O (both optical and coaxial formats) and six assignable outputs to the
RS7000.
For information about the board’s connectors and general board setup, refer to information elsewhere in this manual.
IMPORTANT
Before performing the installation, please read precautions “Handling and Installation of Options”, found at
the beginning of this manual. Please note that the AIEB1 cannot be used in the RS7000.
Procedure
1. Be sure that you have the following at hand before starting the installation.
• AIEB2 I/O expansion board: Confirm that there are 3 cables extending from the board.
• Workbench: Please carry out all work on a stable workbench or table. Spreading a cloth over the work surface will help prevent
scratching.
2. Remove the bottom cover (Page 272).
3. Remove the three screws (B) from the rear panel, and remove the I/O cover.
CAUTION
• The I/O cover may fall down when all three screws are removed, so be sure to hold the I/O cover with one
hand while removing the screws.
• The I/O cover you removed will not be needed as long as the AIEB2 is installed, but the screws with which
it was attached will be used to attach the AIEB2, so be careful not to misplace them.
• These screws (B) are of a different type than the twelve screws that fasten the bottom cover. Be careful not
to confuse them with the bottom cover screws. The unit may be damaged if you use the incorrect screws.
276 RS7000
I/O cover
(B)
4. Plug in the flat cable backward.

• Disconnect the flat cable.
• Insert the opposite plug into the connector.
The connector has a cut-out that prevents it from being connected in an incorrect orientation.
5. Connect the flat cable.

• Connect the flat cable from the I/O expansion board (the thin, flat cable) to the corresponding connector on the RS7000’s circuit
board (marked “C” in the illustration below: CN16).
The connector is “keyed” so that it will only go in one way.
CN 16
6. Insert the AIEB2 I/O expansion board. Appendix

• Support the I/O expansion board as shown in the illustration below, and fasten it to the rear panel by screwing in the three screws
(B) that you removed at Step 3 above.
(B)
RS7000 277
7. Connect the 3-wire red/white cable.

• Of the two red/white cables that extend from the I/O expansion board, first connect the 3-wire cable to the connector shown in the
illustration below (CN7: 3-pin).
Make sure that the direction is correct, and do not try to force the connection.
CN 7
CN 6
CN 2
CN 1
CN 4
8. Connect the other red/white cable (4-wire) in the same way.

• Connect the cable to the connector shown below (CN2: 4-pin).
CN 7
CN 6
CN 2
CN 1
CN 4
9. Secure the cables to the bundle tie.

• Run the 3-wire and 4-wire cables through the bundle tie (see illustration below), and secure them.
Bundle tie
278 RS7000
• Use the bundle tie to secure the 3-wire cable, and the 4-wire cable (see illustration below).
Bundle tie
CAUTION
Make sure that the cables are bundled below the circuit board. If any cables are pinched between the cover
and I/O expansion circuit board when the bottom cover is replaced, broken connections or malfunctions may
occur.
Correct Incorrect
10. Replace the bottom cover (Page 273).

11. Plug in the power cord.
Appendix
RS7000 279
Connecting external SCSI devices
This section explains how to connect external devices such as external hard disk drives, MO drives, or CD-ROM drives.
About SCSI
SCSI (pronounced “scuzzy”) stands for Small Computer System Interface, and is a data transmission interface standard used by personal
computers and other devices.
Since the RS7000 has a SCSI interface, you can connect and use hard disk drives, MO disk drives, CD-ROM drives, and other SCSI-
compatible devices that have a 50-pin SCSI connector. Up to 7 SCSI devices can be connected.
Most external SCSI devices have two SCSI terminals, allowing a number of devices to be “chained” together. Devices chained together
in this way can normally be connected in any order.
The last device in the chain must be “terminated”, either with a terminator unit plugged into the open SCSI connector, or by turning the
device’s internal terminator on (if available). The first device in the chain must also be terminated, but in the case of the RS7000 this is
accomplished by the terminator inside the RS7000.
indicates the terminator (or a terminator switch

turned ON). For devices not marked by this
symbol, do not attach a terminator (or, turn the
terminator off).
Main Unit
External SCSI External SCSI External SCSI

device device device
IMPORTANT
• Before connecting SCSI devices, be sure to turn off the power of the RS7000 and all connected equip-
ment. If the power is on while connections are being made, the RS7000 or SCSI devices can be damaged.
• Including the RS7000, each SCSI device is distinguished by a number from 0 - 7, called the SCSI ID. If two
or more devices have the same SCSI ID number, the SCSI devices will not function correctly. When
shipped from the factory, the RS7000 is set to SCSI ID 6. Be aware that the SCSI ID number of a device
has no relation to its position in the daisy-chain.
• Don’t forget to attach a terminator to the last SCSI device in the daisy-chain.
• If an external SCSI device is not connected, it is not necessary to attach a terminator to the external SCSI
connector of the RS7000.
• Use as short a SCSI cable as possible. Using long cables can cause unreliable operation. (In general, the
total cable length should be less than 6 meters (approximately 18 feet).)
• Use good-quality SCSI cables. Poor-quality cables can cause unreliable operation.
• Some SCSI devices have only one SCSI connector. If you are using such a device, connect it at the end of
the daisy-chain.
280 RS7000
Procedure
1. Use SCSI cables to daisy-chain the external SCSI devices.

• There are several types of SCSI connector. Use SCSI cables appropriate for your devices.
2. Connect the power cable of the external SCSI device to an AC outlet.
3. Set the SCSI ID (0 - 7) of the external SCSI device.
• Select a SCSI ID that will not conflict with the other SCSI devices (including the RS7000). When the RS7000 is shipped from the
factory, the SCSI ID is set to 6.
4. Attach the terminator to the SCSI connector (the vacant one of the two SCSI connectors) of the last device in the daisy-chain.
Alternatively, turn on the terminator switch of that device.
5. Make sure that the terminator switch is turned OFF for all other devices in the daisy-chain (i.e., all devices other than the last
device).
6. Turn on the power of the external SCSI device(s), and after waiting several seconds, turn on the power of the RS7000.
NOTE
Many articles and books concerning SCSI are available. However most of them discuss only the concepts or
the specification, and do not tell you what to do if the system does not work when connected as described.
The following paragraphs will provide more information about SCSI that will help you correct problems which
may occur when SCSI devices are connected. Please read this material if you experience problems. Please
be aware that when connecting SCSI devices, problems with termination and cabling can cause valuable
data to be damaged. We regret that Yamaha can take no responsibility regarding any data which is lost.
■ Realities of terminator installation

Although we have said that a terminator is required at the beginning and end of the SCSI bus, this is a general principle and not a
requirement. For example if the bus is extremely short (45 cm or less), there are cases in which it is best for there to be a terminator
only on one or the other end. However if other drives are connected in addition to these drives, the situation will again be different.
Also, if the SCSI devices are separated by more than 3 meters, it is said that using a terminator at the 3 meter point is preferable. In
this case, three or more terminators will exist within the SCSI bus.
In this way, the theory and practice of SCSI connections can differ widely. Simply changing a drive in a system that had been work-
ing correctly can cause operation to become unreliable, or adding a drive to an unreliable system can cause it to start working cor-
rectly. In practice, a certain amount of trial and error is necessary.
■ Reasons for SCSI errors

A SCSI bus operates stably only if all the connected SCSI devices are operating correctly. If any of the devices are producing noise,
the other devices will also produce errors, and in the worst case, the boot block of a drive can be destroyed. (All data in that drive
will be lost.)
Also, there are cases in which a system on which data appears to have saved may not have actually saved the data, resulting in data
loss.
The following paragraphs will discuss the reasons for such errors, and will provide a sequence for your troubleshooting.
• Check the SCSI ID
Appendix
Make sure that there is no conflict between the SCSI ID of each SCSI device including the RS7000. When shipped from the factory,
the RS7000’s SCSI ID is set to 6. Be sure to turn off the power before changing the SCSI ID setting of the external SCSI device.
• Check the terminator

As discussed above, check the location where the terminator is attached.
• Check the SCSI cables

Low-quality SCSI cables will almost always create problems. Always use double-shielded cables. It is also important that the shield
be grounded inside the connector. Long SCSI cables frequently cause problems, so use as short a SCSI cable as possible. Bending or
twisting a SCSI cable in a confined space can cause conductors to break or pins to be broken, so be careful to avoid this.
Operation is not guaranteed if the SCSI connector of the RS7000 is connected via a converter to any external device other than a 50-
pin SCSI device (such as a Wide SCSI, ATA (IDE), USB, or IEEE 1394 device).
RS7000 281
2. Specifications
2. Specifications
Sequencer Section Maximum Note Capacity Approx. 259,000 notes

Note Resolution Quarter note/480
Maximum Polyphony 124 notes
BPM (Tempo) 1.0 - 300.0
Record Modes Real time replace
Real time overdub (Pattern and Song modes only)
Real time punch (Song mode only)
Step (Pattern and Song modes only)
Grid Step (Pattern and Song Modes only)
Tracks Pattern Mode : 16 phrase tracks
Pattern Chain Mode : Pattern track
: BPM track
: Scene/Mute track
Song Mode : 16 sequence tracks
: BPM track
: Scene/Mute track
Patterns Patterns : 1024 (64 styles × 16 sections)
Measures : 256 maximum
Phrases Preset Phrases : 5980
User Phrases : 256 per style
Pattern Chains 20 chains
Songs 20 songs
Edit Phrase edit
Pattern Chain edit
Song edit
Jobs Pattern Jobs : 37
Pattern Chain Jobs :9
Song Jobs : 30
Grid Groove Note Offset, Clock Shift, Gate Time Offset, Velocity Offset
Play Effects Harmonize (Unison, Octaver, Harmonize 1 & 2)
Note (Note Offset, Gate Time, Velocity Offset)
Timing (Beat Stretch, Clock Shift, Swing)
MIDI Delay MIDI Delay Edit, Feedback Edit
Arpeggio Type (Up, Down, Alternate 1 & 2, Random), Sort, Hold, Octave
Range
Real Time Loop Remix
Sequence Format RS7000 original sequence format
SMF format 0, 1 (Format 1 load only)
RM1x format (PATT, SONG) (load only)
282 RS7000
2. Specifications
Tone generator block Type AWM2 tone generator

Maximum polyphony 62 notes
Multi-timbral capability 16 timbres (with DVA)
Preset voices Normal voices 1054 (except GM voices)
Drum voices 63 kits (except GM kits)
Effects 4 systems
Reverb : 12 types
Delay Chorus : 25 types
Variation : 100 types
Master : 8 types
Equalizer Master equalizer 4 Band parameteric equalizer
Track equalizer 5 types
Tone Generator Section Sample Voice Types Pitched Voice, Sample Kit Voice
Maximum Samples 256
Sampling Source Analog inputs L/R
Stereo outputs L/R
Digital I/O (When optional AIEB2 I/O Expansion Board installed)
Optical I/O (When optional AIEB2 I/O Expansion Board installed)
A/D Conversion 20-bit, 64 × oversampling
D/A Conversion 24-bit, 128 × oversampling
Sampling Types Slice + Sequence, Kit, Kit + Note, Pitch
Sample Data Bits 16
Sampling Frequency : 44.1 kHz (MONO/STEREO), 22.05 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 5.5125 kHz
(LO-FI mode, MONO/STEREO)
Digital Inputs (When optional AIEB2 I/O Expansion Board installed)
: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (STEREO only)
Internal Sample Memory Standard : 4 megabytes (onboard)
Maximum : 64 megabytes (32 megabyte SIMMs × 2)
* 4 onboard megabytes unavailable after
maximum expansion.
Sampling Time Max. Sample Length : 32 megabytes mono
: 64 megabytes stereo
Max. Sample Time (Mono or Stereo)
: Approx. 6 min. 20 sec. (44.1 kHz)
Appendix
Sample Format Original format
AIFF (load only), WAV (save and load)
A3000/4000/5000, SU700, (load only)
Sampling Jobs 13
RS7000 283
2. Specifications
Controls Power Switch (ON/OFF)

Master Volume Control (MASTER VOLUME)
Recording Level Control (REC VOLUME)
Master Effect Selector Knob
Master Effect Parameter Knobs (× 4)
Multi-function knobs (× 4)
Assignable Knobs (× 18)
Contrast Control
Mode Buttons [PATTERN], [PATT CHAIN], [SONG], [UTILITY]
Sub Mode Buttons [GROOVE], [PLAY FX], [MIDI DELAY], [MIXER], [VOICE EDIT],
[EFFECT], [SETUP], [MASTER], [SAVE], [LOAD], [JOB], [EDIT]
Function Buttons [F1] - [F4]
Master Effect Button [EFFECT ON/OFF]
Sampling Buttons [REALTIME LOOP REMIX], [SAMPLE EDIT], [STANDBY/START/
STOP]
Play Effect Button [SELECT]
Voice Edit Buttons [WAVE] (LFO), [AMP/FILTER/PITCH], [PORTAMENTO TYPE],
[TYPE] (FILTER)
Exit Button [EXIT]
Sequencer Buttons [REC], [ ], [STOP], [PLAY], [ ], [ ]
Shift Button [SHIFT]
Arpeggio Button [ARPEGGIO ON]
Mute/Scene Buttons [STORE], [MUTE/SCENE], [MEMORY 1] – [MEMORY 5]
Octave Buttons [OCT DOWN], [OCT UP]
Keyboard Mode Buttons [KEYBOARD], [TRANSPOSE], [MUTE], [TRACK SELECT]
Keyboard Pads (× 26)
Tap Button [TAP]
Velocity Pads (× 2) [PAD 1], [PAD 2]
Display (LCD) 64 × 240 dot graphic LCD with backlighting and contrast control
LEDs MODE (× 4) (green)

EFFECT ON/OFF (green)
SAMPLING (REALTIME LOOP REMIX (green), SAMPLE EDIT
(green), STANDBY/START/STOP (red))
SEQUENCE PLAY FX SELECT (× 2) (yellow)
VOICE EDIT (× 18) (yellow)
REC (red)
PLAY (green)
SECTION (× 10) (red)
MUTE/SCENE (× 2) (red)
TRACK (× 16) (red)
KEYBOARD mode (KEYBOARD (green), MUTE (red))
ARPEGGIO ON (green)
Function Buttons (× 4) (red)
MIDI IN (red), MIDI OUT A (green), MIDI OUT B (green)
7-segment LED (4-digit)
284 RS7000
2. Specifications
Connectors PHONES (Standard stereo phone jack)

OUTPUT (Standard phone jack × 2) (L/MONO, R)
INPUT (Standard phone jack × 2) (L, R)
FOOT SWITCH
MIDI IN, MIDI OUT (× 2, A & B)
CARD SLOT (3.3 V SmartMedia)
SCSI (50-pin half-pitch)
AC INLET (AC power)
Dimensions 440 mm × 363 mm × 134 mm

(W × D × H)
Weight 7 kg
Supplied Accessories Power cord

CD-ROM (× 1)
SmartMedia (8 MB × 1) : Sound & Sequence data
Owner’s Manual Set
Options I/O Expansion Board : AIEB2

Expansion Memory (use a pair of Identical SIMMS conforming to the
specifications below):
Type : 72-pin SIMM (Fast page or EDO, JEDEC
standard)
Access Time : 70 ns or faster
Parity : Parity or non-parity
Capacity : 4/8/16/32 megabytes
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. YAMAHA Corp. reserves the right to change
or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in
every locale, please check with your YAMAHA dealer.
Appendix
RS7000 285
3. Troubleshooting
3. Troubleshooting
No sound? Wrong sound? When a problem like this occurs please check the following points before
assuming that the product is faulty. In many cases you’ll find the solution to your problem here. If the
problem persists, then contact your YAMAHA dealer.
Problem Possible causes Page

No Sound Overall System Causes
• Are the power supplies to the unit and related external equipment turned on?
• Is the unit properly connected to related external equipment via MIDI or (Page 22)
audio cables?
• Is the MASTER VOLUME control turned up to an appropriate level? (Page 13)
• Is the MIDI filter set so that note-on messages are blocked? (Page 262)
• Is the output select setting appropriate? (Page 94)
Voice & Effect Related Causes
• Are the effect and filter settings appropriate? (Page 104, 198)
(Inappropriate filter cutoff frequency settings can result in no sound)
Pattern & Song Related Causes
• Are the individual volume levels for each track set at appropriate levels? (Page 93, 194)
• Are the tracks muted? (Page 74, 183)
• Is the Out Channel set to OFF? (Page 110, 200)
• Are the playback data volume and expression settings appropriate? (Page 154, 225, 267)
• Is the groove or playback effect velocity offset set too low? (Page 86, 88, 191,
192)
Sample Related Causes
• Is the sample volume set to an appropriate level? (Page 243)
• Is the Original Key parameter set properly? (Page 243)
Distorted Sound Overall System Causes
• Is the MASTER VOLUME set so high that clipping is occurring? (Page 13)
• Is the Out Level set too high? (Page 258)
Voice & Effect Related Causes
• Are any effect settings causing the distortion? (Page 104, 198)
(Excessively high filter resonance settings can cause distortion)
• Is the Unison effect turned on? (Page 88, 192)
(The Unison effect can sometimes sound like distortion)
Sound Level Too Low • Are the volume or expression settings too low? (Page 154, 225, 267)
• Is the groove or playback effect velocity offset set too low? (Page 86, 88, 191,
192)
• Is the Out Level set too low? (Page 258)
Pitch or Intervals are Overall System Causes
Wrong • Is the Master Tune parameter set at a value other than “0”? (Page 257)
• Has the pitch bend wheel on an external device been moved?
Voice & Multi Related Causes
• Is Transpose set at a value other than “0”? (Page 73, 160, 183)
• Is the groove note offset set to change the pitch? (Page 86, 191)
• Is the Pitch Bend knob in the center position? (Page 15)
Sample Related Causes
• Is the Original Key parameter set properly? (Page 243)
286 RS7000
3. Troubleshooting
Sound Is Cut Off • Are you exceeding the maximum polyphony of the instrument? (Page 62)
Playback Does Not Begin • Does the selected pattern, phrase, pattern chain, or song contain data? (Page 77, 161, 184)
When the [PLAY] Button Is • Is the MIDI SYNC parameter set to INTERNAL? (Page 260)
Pressed
Rhythm and Note Timing • Are the groove or play effect parameters set to change the timing? (Page 85, 87, 191,
Is Different From When 192)
Recorded
Voice & Effect Settings • Is data which resets the tone generator recorded at the beginning of the (Page 154, 225)
Change When Playback Is sequence?
Started
Can’t Record a Phrase or • Is a preset phrase selected? (Page 75)
Song • Is memory protection turned on? (Page 257)
Can’t Record Samples • Have you exceeded the maximum allowable number of sample voices? (Page 61, 229)
• Is there enough free sample memory? (Page 68)
• Is the source input set properly? (Page 231)
• Is the A/D level set properly? (Page 108, 200)
Memory is Full Even • The total RS7000 memory capacity determines the number of patterns, (Page 68)
Though There Are Avail- phrases, and songs that can be recorded. For example, if the memory con-
able Patterns or Songs tains phrases or songs that use up a large amount of memory, the memory
may become full even though the available pattern or song numbers are not
all used.
MIDI Bulk Data Transmis- • Was the dump interval time set to too short a value when the data was saved? (Page 258)
sion/Reception Won’t
Work Properly
Can’t Save Data • Is the memory card or disk being used write protected? (Page 115)
• Is the memory card or disk being used properly formatted? (Page 116)
Appendix
RS7000 287
4. Error Message List
● Operational Errors
No Data When a job is executed, the selected track or range contains no data. Select an
appropriate track or range.
Illegal Input An unacceptable input or value has been specified. Check the input method or
value.
Illegal Track Number An unacceptable track number has been specified. Select the track again.
Illegal Phrase Number An unacceptable phrase number has been specified. Select the phrase again.
Illegal Measure An unacceptable measure number has been specified. Select the measure
again.
Illegal Check Box No check boxes have been checked in a track job which requires a check box
selection. Check the appropriate check box.
Meter Mismatch The meter values of the original and edited data are different.
No F7 (End Of Exc.) Exclusive data has been entered or changed without the necessary “End Of
Exclusive” byte (F7). Make sure F7 is included.
Preset Phrase You have attempted to edit or record a preset phrase. Preset phrases must be
copied to a user phrase before they can be edited.
Pattern Length Mismatch A job will result in the length of a phrase being greater than 256 measures.
Phrase Length Mismatch An edit operation will result in a phrase which is longer than 256 measures.
Phrase Number Overflow The maximum number of phrases (256) has been exceeded when recording,
executing a job, or editing.
Too Long Sample A sample time stretch or other job has resulted in a sample being too long.
Too Short Sample The sample length is too short and the Frequency Convert job cannot be exe-
cuted.
Too Low Freq The sampling frequency is too low and the Frequency Convert job cannot be
executed.
Digital In Unlocked The DIGITAL/OPTICAL input is unlocked. Check the connections and the out-
put from the source device.
● System Errors
Backup Battery Low The internal backup battery is running low. Have the battery replaced by your
YAMAHA dealer or an authorized YAMAHA service center.
Sequence Memory Full The internal memory is full and recording, editing, job execution, MIDI recep-
tion/transmission, or loading from card or disk cannot continue. Try again after
erasing unwanted song, pattern, or user phrase data.
Sample Number Overflow A sampling operation, job, or load operation has exceeded the maximum
allowable number of samples. Try again after erasing unnecessary samples.
Too Many Local Voices The maximum number of samples allowable for a pattern or song (128) has
been exceeded.
Too Many Common Voices The maximum allowable number of common sample voices (128) has been
exceeded.
Too Many Sample Voices The maximum overall number of sample voices (256) has been exceeded.
Wave Memory Full The wave memory is full and further sampling operations, jobs, or load opera-
tions cannot be executed. In some cases, the amount of remaining memory will
be increased when you execute the Wave Memory Optimize operation.
Factory Set This message appears when the RS7000 is restored to the initial factory set-
tings (Page 25). The data in internal memory can be corrupted when the backup
battery voltage runs too low, for example, and all data will automatically be
restored to the factory settings, causing this message to appear.
288 RS7000
Memory Protected Memory protection is turned on, and you have attempted to alter data using a
record, job, or edit operation.
SIMM Error An appropriate pair of expansion SIMMs is not properly installed, or the pair is
not properly matched (Page 20).
● MIDI Errors
MIDI Buffer Full The MIDI receive buffer is full and processing cannot continue. Try receiving
the data again.
● Card/Disk Errors
Card/Disk Full The card or disk is full and no more data can be saved. Use a new card or disk,
or make space by erasing unwanted data from the card or disk.
File Not Found The specified file was not found on the card or disk during a load operation. Try
again after re-inserting/re-connecting the card or disk.
Bad Card/Disk The card or disk is unusable. Format the card or disk and try again.
Card/Disk Not Ready A card or disk is not properly inserted in or connected to the RS7000.
Unformatted Card/Disk The card or disk is not formatted, or the format is unusable by the RS7000.
Check the card/disk contents.
Write Protected The card or disk is write protected, or you have attempted to write to a read-
only medium such as CD-ROM.
Bad File An unusable file has been loaded.
Can’t Change File Name When executing a Rename operation, a file or folder with the same name
already exists in the specified folder.
Illegal File The file specified for loading is unusable by the RS7000.
No Data When executing a save operation, the specified song or style contains no data
and cannot be saved.
Too Long Sample You have attempted to load a sample which is too long.
No Sample Files The linked sample files cannot be found during a load operation.
Read/Write Error An error has occurred while reading from or writing to the card or disk. Check
card insertion, disk connections, or SCSI termination.
SCSI Error A SCSI error has occurred. Check the SCSI connections and termination.
Copy Protected You have attempted to export a copy-protected sample.
Illegal File Name The specified file name is unacceptable.
Read Only File You have attempted to delete, rename, or overwrite a read-only file.
Can’t Make Folder No more folders can be created below the current level because a folder having
the same name exists on the card or disk.
Too Deep Folder Folders below this level cannot be accessed.
Appendix
Not Empty Folder You have attempted to delete a folder that contains data.
Unsupported Disk The connected disk drive cannot be used.
RS7000 289
● Other Messages (Not Errors)

Are you sure? NO[F2]/ Confirms that you want to execute a specified operation. Press [F2] or [F3] as
YES[F3] required.
Can’t Undo. Cancel [F2]/OK When some jobs are executed the internal memory becomes full and undo
[F3] cannot be used. Press [F3] if this is OK, or [F2] to abort the operation. Try again
after erasing unwanted songs, patterns, or user phrases.
Completed The specified load, save, format, or other job has been completed.
Executing … A format operation or job is being executed. Please wait.
Loading ... (xxxxxxxx) Appears when a file is being loaded. Press [F3] to abort the load operation.
Abort [F3]
Overwrite? NO[F2]/YES[F3] A save operation will overwrite data on the card or disk, and this message con-
firms whether it is OK to continue. Press [F2] or [F3] as required.
Overwrite Sample Voice? When executing Create after Realtime Loop Remix this message confirms
Cancel [F2]/OK [F3] whether it is OK to overwrite the sample voice in the current track. Press [F3] to
overwrite, or [F2] to abort.
Saving ... (xxxxxxxx) Appears when a file is being saved. Press [F3] to abort the save operation.
Abort [F3]
Same Common Sample Voice Appears when a pattern or song which uses common sample voices is loaded
Number. Skip All [F2]/Renum- and a common sample voice will be loaded into a number which already con-
ber [F3] tains data. Press [F2] skip loading the common sample voice data, or [F3] load
the data after renumbering the voice.
Sequence or Sample Voice Appears when sequence or sample data already exists in a track selected in
Exists. Cancel [F2]/ the sampling setup display.
Replace [F3]
290 RS7000
5. Voice List (Normal voice)
Inst. Group GM Synth Bass & Lead1 Synth Pad & Synth EFX1 Synth Material Band Instrument Classical Instrument & Wind Ethnic & Percussion SFX 1 Synth Bass & Lead2
Bank MSB 0 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63
Bank LSB 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Program EL EL EL EL EL EL EL EL EL
1 GrandPno 1 RezoBas1 1 SynthPad 2 Saw1 A 1 BritePno 1 Strings1 2 Kalimba1 1 Trance1 2 DX100Bas 2
2 BritePno 1 FunkBass 1 ChoirPad 2 Saw2 A 1 FM Piano 2 Strings2 1 Kalimba2 2 Trance2 2 FMBass4 1
3 E.Grand 1 BleepBas 2 Atms Pad 2 SwDual1A 2 El.Grand 1 Trem.Str 2 ThumbPno 2 Trance3 2 FMBass5 2
4 HnkyTonk 2 BlipBass 2 AnalogPd 2 SwDual2A 1 St.Piano 2 Syn Str1 2 LogDrum1 1 Trance4 2 FMBass6 2
5 E.Piano1 2 FM Bas1 2 VoicePad 2 SawOct A 2 HnkyTonk 2 Syn Str2 2 LogDrum2 1 Trance5 2 FM BDBas 2
6 E.Piano2 1 FM Bas2 2 GlassPad 2 Square A 1 Mono Pno 1 Syn Str3 2 PacifcPc 2 Trance6 2 Syn Slap 2
7 Harpsi. 1 BuzzBas1 1 SweepPd1 2 Pulse A 2 LoFi Pno 2 Syn Str4 2 Balafon 2 Trance7 2 FatBass1 1
8 Clavi. 1 Dog Bass 2 SweepPd2 2 PlsDualA 2 St.EP1 2 AnaQuart 2 SteelDr1 2 Trance8 2 FatBass2 2
9 Celesta 2 OctBass1 2 SmokyPad 2 SqurOctA 2 Chor.EP1 2 SyTrmStr 2 SteelDr2 2 Trance9 2 FatBass3 2
10 Glocken 1 OctBass2 2 WarmPad1 2 PulsOctA 2 Mono EP1 2 Pizz.Str 1 Gamelan1 2 Trance10 2 FatBass4 2
11 MusicBox 2 MonoBas1 2 WarmPad2 2 Sync A 1 LoFi EP1 2 Solo Str 2 Gamelan2 1 Trance11 2 VinBass1 1
12 Vibes 1 MonoBas2 2 StringPd 2 TriSineA 2 Wah EP1 2 Violin 2 BaliOrch 2 FunnyCPU 2 VinBass2 2
13 Marimba 1 SquarBa1 2 Rise Pad 2 Noise1 A 1 TremoEP1 2 Viola 2 AtlantPc 2 Siren 2 VinBass3 1
14 Xylophon 2 SquarBa2 2 Halo Pad 2 Noise2 A 1 Old EP 2 Cello 2 AsiaBel1 2 SystmDwn 2 VinBass4 1
15 TubulBel 1 DeepBass 2 Vox Pad 2 Lead1 A 1 MelloEP1 2 SynHarp1 2 AsiaBel2 2 Smoky 2 RezoBas2 1
16 Dulcimer 2 FlatBass 1 HarmoPad 2 Lead2 A 1 St.EP2 2 Celesta 2 Sitar1 1 Sonr&CPU 2 RezoBas3 1
17 DrawOrgn 2 Tri Bass 2 Hum Pad 2 Lead3 A 1 Chor.EP2 2 Glocken 1 Sitar2 2 FX-NG 2 RezoBas4 1
18 PercOrgn 2 SineBass 2 BlowPad1 2 FM1 A 1 Mono EP2 2 MusicBox 2 IndiaDrn 2 Machine? 2 GTekBas1 2
19 RockOrgn 2 DB Bass 2 SquarePd 2 FM2 A 1 LoFi EP2 2 SyTubBel 2 TibetDrn 2 Bikers 1 GTekBas2 2
20 ChrchOrg 2 DB BaDwn 2 Sci-Fi 2 FM3 A 1 Wah EP2 2 SynHrpsi 2 IndiaStr 2 RvrsLife 2 RampBass 2
21 ReedOrgn 2 KickBa1 2 TronStrn 2 Digi1 A 1 TremoEP2 2 BrasSect 2 Dulcimer 2 PanImpct 2 GarageBa 2
22 Acordion 2 KckB1Dwn 2 TronChor 2 Digi2 A 1 St.DxEP 2 Trumpet 1 Koto 2 ShotStar 1 BuzzBas2 2
23 Harmnica 1 KickBa2 2 Itopia 2 Digi3 A 1 ChorDxEP 2 Trombone 2 EthnPick 2 AnBubble 1 BuzzBas3 2
24 TangoAcd 2 KckB2Dwn 2 SynVoice 2 Digi4 A 1 BrteDxEP 2 Tuba 2 Banjo 2 GameOver 2 OrganBa 1
25 NylonGtr 1 CS RezBa 2 Ana Vox1 1 Digi5 A 1 Clavi. 2 Mute.Trp 1 Shamisen 2 ToneDeaf 1 R&B Bass 2
26 SteelGtr 1 MG Bass1 1 Ana Vox2 2 Digi6 A 1 WahClav1 2 Syn Horn 2 Fiddle 1 What? 2 SmoothBa 2
27 Jazz Gtr 1 MG Bass2 2 VoiceOoh 2 Digi7 A 1 WahClav2 1 SprnoSax 1 Shanai 2 Zap Gun 2 PunchBas 2
28 CleanGtr 1 MG Bass3 2 ChoirAah 2 Digi8 A 1 DigiClav 2 Alto Sax 1 Shakhchi 1 Hndrail1 1 DubBas1 1
29 Mute.Gtr 2 MG Pedal 2 Aah/Ooh 2 Digi9 A 1 Organ1 2 TenorSax 1 TremShak 2 Hndrail2 2 DubBas2 2
30 Ovrdrive 2 OB Bass 2 EP Pad1 2 Digi10 A 1 Organ2 2 Bari.Sax 2 AsiaFlut 2 Hitchhik 2 DubBas3 2
31 Dist.Gtr 2 XP Bass 2 EP Pad2 2 Digi11 A 1 Organ3 2 Oboe 2 Bagpipe 1 Digger 2 FatLoBas 2
32 GtrHarmo 1 PizzBass 2 EthnoPad 2 Digi12 A 1 Organ4 2 Eng.Horn 2 Sho 2 Propelr1 2 FTekBass 2
33 Aco.Bass 1 TalkBass 2 Angels 2 Saw1 B 1 HousOrg1 2 Bassoon 2 Digeridu 2 Propelr2 2 BL Saw5 1
34 FngrBass 1 VocoBas1 2 NewAgePd 2 Saw2 B 1 ThinOrgn 2 Clarinet 1 Koukin1 2 Greeting 2 BL Saw6 1
35 PickBass 1 VocoBas2 2 Rain 2 SwDual1B 2 RockOrg1 2 Piccolo 1 Koukin2 2 Safari 2 BL Saw7 1
36 Fretless 1 OctRezBa 2 OrintSeq 2 SwDual2B 1 DriveOrg 2 Flute 1 Berimba1 2 Sesame 2 BL Saw8 1
37 SlapBas1 1 CyberBas 2 SmokBell 2 SawOct B 2 DirtyOrg 2 Recorder 2 Berimba2 2 Buddha 2 BL Rezo1 1
38 SlapBas2 1 DkCorBa1 2 Atmosphr 2 Square B 1 MrtianOr 2 PanFlute 1 BrimbSol 1 Wah Seq1 2 BL Rezo2 2
39 SynBass1 1 HdCorBa1 2 Bright 2 Pulse B 2 ChrchOr1 2 Bottle 2 FngrCym1 2 Wah Seq2 2 BL Squr4 1
40 SynBass2 2 HdCorBa2 2 EthnoKey 2 PlsDualB 2 ChrchOr2 2 Whistle 1 FngrCym2 1 Biter 2 BL Squr5 1
41 Violin 1 Uni Bass 2 Ana Bell 2 SqurOctB 2 ReedOrgn 2 Ocarina 1 Gong 1 Vacuum 2 BL Dist9 1
42 Viola 2 SyncLow 2 PolySync 2 PulsOctB 2 Acordion 2 Strings3 2 ThaiGong 2 Brokndwn 2 BL Dst10 2
43 Cello 2 BL Saw1 1 AnaDrone 2 Sync B 1 Harmnica 1 Strings4 2 Shekere 1 Teleport 2 BL Dst11 1
44 Contrabs 2 BL Saw2 2 DigiBel1 2 TriSineB 2 TangoAcd 2 Strings5 2 TaikoDrm 1 Scat 2 BL Dst12 2
45 Trem.Str 2 BL Saw3 2 Crystal 2 Noise1 B 1 Vibes1 1 Syn Str5 2 Big Drum 1 Disaster 2 PolyBas1 2
46 Pizz.Str 1 BL Saw4 2 AnaSprng 2 Noise2 B 1 Vibes2 2 PopPizz 2 Timpani 2 Match 2 PolyBas2 2
47 Harp 2 BL Squr1 1 SynChime 2 Lead1 B 1 Vibes3 2 Harp 2 Tabla 2 LasrShot 2 NJS Bass 2
48 Timpani 2 BL Squr2 2 Mod Sine 2 Lead2 B 1 Marimba 1 SynHarp2 2 Udu 2 Whimsy1 2 FatPolyB 2
Appendix
49 Strings1 2 BL Squr3 2 ShortRez 2 Lead3 B 1 Xylophon 2 TubulBel 1 Udu Bend 1 Whimsy2 2 NoizBass 1
50 Strings2 2 BL Dist1 2 Self Seq 2 FM1 B 1 FngrBas1 1 Harpsi. 2 Djembe 2 Feeder 2 OctHvyBa 2
51 Syn.Str1 2 BL Dist2 2 EchoBell 2 FM2 B 1 FngrBas2 1 EgyptDrm 2 Rising 2 TwnSawBa 2
52 Syn.Str2 2 BL Dist3 2 MajrBrs1 2 FM3 B 1 FlngFnB1 2 Surdo 2 Drain 2 AhabBass 2
53 ChoirAah 2 BL Dist4 2 MajrBrs2 2 Digi1 B 1 MuteFngB 1 Tambourn 1 Spin 2 WoahBass 2
54 VoiceOoh 1 BL Dist5 2 SoftBras 2 Digi2 B 1 CompFngB 2 AnTambrn 1 Takeoff 2 BuzzoidB 2
55 SynVoice 1 BL Dist6 2 SyStack1 2 Digi3 B 1 Subsonic 1 Cowbell 1 GiantStp 2 SykoBass 2
56 Orch.Hit 1 BL Dist7 1 SyStack2 2 Digi4 B 1 DistBass 2 AnCowbl1 1 CyberStp 2 DkCorBa2 2
57 Trumpet 1 BL Dist8 2 SyStack3 2 Digi5 B 1 WahBass1 1 AnCowbl2 1 Typhoon 2 Techstep 2
58 Trombone 2 MG Saw 1 DirtyStk 2 Digi6 B 1 WahBass2 1 Vibraslp 1 Rocker 2 Abstract 2
59 Tuba 2 OB Saw 2 SweepSaw 2 Digi7 B 1 PickBas1 2 AnVbrslp 1 Amphibia 2 SubSlide 2
60 Mute.Trp 1 Dual Saw 2 SwpXpand 2 Digi8 B 1 PickBas2 2 SyVbrslp 1 Escape 2 UK Oam 2
61 Fr.Horn 2 CSPortLd 2 Swp Sync 2 Digi9 B 1 MutePkBa 2 Bongo 2 Shower 1 Jazzstep 2
62 BrasSect 1 Wah Saw 1 SwpVoice 2 Digi10 B 1 SlapBas1 1 Conga 1 Thunder 2 BL Lead1 1
63 SynBras1 2 CSMonoLd 2 Goblins 2 Digi11 B 1 SlapBas2 1 AnaConga 1 Wind 2 BL Lead2 1
64 SynBras2 2 DualSqur 2 Echoes 2 Digi12 B 1 Fretles1 1 Timbale 1 Seashore 2 SqrSolo1 2
: No sound.
The suffixes “A” ~ “D” on voice names in the "Synth Material" instrument group indicate the voice template type.
A : Long Decay, LFO Wave - Triangle
B : Short Decay, LFO Wave - Triangle
C : Long Decay, LFO Wave - Saw up
D : Long Decay, LFO Wave - S&H
RS7000 291
Inst. Group Synth Pad & Synth EFX2 SFX2 Drum Kit GM Drum Kit
Bank MSB 63 63 126 127
Bank LSB 8 9 0 0
Program EL EL Kit Type Kit Type
1 NoizPad1 2 LFOSync1 2 AnlgKit1 Trigger StandKit Trigger
2 NoizPad2 2 LFOSync2 2 AnlgKit2 Trigger † †
3 NoizPad3 2 LFOSync3 2 RhBoxKit Trigger † †
4 NzModPad 2 LFOSync4 1 SynthKit Trigger † †
5 ColdPad1 2 LFOSync5 1 SE Kit Trigger † †
6 ColdPad2 2 LFOSync6 2 PsychKit Trigger † †
7 BlowPad2 2 LFOSync7 2 Acid Kit Trigger † †
8 WarmPad3 2 LFOSync8 2 TeknoKit Trigger † †
9 LowHigh 2 LFOSync9 2 AmbntKit Trigger † †
10 RevrsKey 2 LFOSyc10 2 Hard Kit Trigger † †
11 ResLfoPd 2 LFOSyc11 2 HousKit1 Trigger † †
12 Xtacy 2 LFOSyc12 2 BreakKit Trigger † †
13 Atlas 2 LFOSyc13 2 JunglKit Trigger † †
14 ResChord 2 LFOSyc14 2 D&B Kit Trigger † †
15 Wheezer 2 LFOSyc15 2 Big Kit Trigger † †
16 SlowGas 2 LFOSyc16 2 Hip Kit1 Trigger † †
17 Snarly 2 LFOSyc17 2 Aco.Kit Trigger † †
18 FrozenPd 2 LFOSyc18 2 Jazz Kit Trigger † †
19 VPad 2 LFOSyc19 1 BrushKit Trigger † †
20 Ele Pad 2 LFOSyc20 1 PercKit1 Trigger † †
21 AP Pad 2 LFOSyc21 1 BD Kit Full Editing † †
22 DigiKey1 2 LFOSyc22 2 HH&CyKit Full Editing † †
23 DigiKey2 2 LFOSyc23 2 SD Kit Full Editing † †
24 DigiBel2 2 LFOSyc24 2 Tom Kit Full Editing † †
25 Syn Bell 2 LFOSyc25 2 SFX Kit1 SFX † †
26 80sChime 2 LFOSyc26 2 SFX Kit2 SFX † †
27 AnaSyMod 2 LFOSyc27 2 AnlgKt1N Note on/off † †
28 Goldchrd 2 LFOSyc28 2 AnlgKt2N Note on/off † †
29 Cave 2 LFOSyc29 2 RhBoxKtN Note on/off † †
30 BubbleSq 2 LFOSyc30 2 SynthKtN Note on/off † †
31 DikiVibe 2 LFOSyc31 2 SE Kit N Note on/off † †
32 ArpTech 2 LFOSyc32 2 PsychKtN Note on/off † †
33 Unbell 2 LFOSyc33 2 AcidKitN Note on/off † †
34 HappyMan 2 LFOSyc34 2 TeknoKtN Note on/off † †
35 Ibiza 2 LFOSyc35 1 AmbntKtN Note on/off † †
36 Orange 2 LFOSyc36 2 HardKitN Note on/off † †
37 CheapRes 1 LFOSyc37 2 HousKt1N Note on/off † †
38 HouseChd 2 LFOSyc38 1 BreakKtN Note on/off † †
39 Lizzy 2 LFOSyc39 2 JunglKtN Note on/off † †
40 PolySaw1 2 LFOSyc40 2 D&B KitN Note on/off † †
41 PolySaw2 1 LFOSyc41 2 Big KitN Note on/off † †
42 PolySaw3 2 LFOSyc42 2 HipKit1N Note on/off † †
43 LushChor 2 LFOSyc43 1 Aco.KitN Note on/off † †
44 Swp Poly 2 LFOSyc44 2 JazzKitN Note on/off † †
45 LFO Pad1 2 LFO SFX1 2 BrushKtN Note on/off † †
46 LFOSycPd 2 LFO SFX2 1 PercKt1N Note on/off † †
47 LFO Pad2 2 LFO SFX3 1 RX Kit Trigger † †
48 LFO Pad3 2 LFO SFX4 2 ElectKit Trigger † †
49 Shoal 2 LFO SFX5 1 HousKit2 Trigger † †
50 LFO Stck 2 LFO SFX6 1 Hip Kit2 Trigger † †
51 Swp Noiz 2 LFO SFX7 1 R&B Kit Trigger † †
52 VoxDcnd1 1 Police 1 SmothKit Trigger † †
53 VoxDcnd2 2 Cops 2 HumanKit Trigger † †
54 Ambient1 2 AlarmDwn 2 RevrsKit Note on/off † †
55 Ambient2 2 BadTrip 2 RX Kit N Note on/off † †
56 Ambient3 2 Dentist 2 ElectKtN Note on/off † †
57 Ambient4 2 ShortWav 2 HousKt2N Note on/off † †
58 Ambient5 2 GTR SFX 2 HipKit2N Note on/off † †
59 Ambient6 2 Whirlpol 2 R&B KitN Note on/off † †
60 Ambient7 2 RetroUFO 2 SmothKtN Note on/off † †
61 Ambient8 2 EleNoiz 2 HumanKtN Note on/off † †
62 Ambient9 2 Pingpong 2 Perc2Kit Full Editing † †
63 Ambent10 2 DelySFX1 2 SFX Kit3 SFX † †
64 DelySFX2 1 † †
: No sound.
292 RS7000
Inst. Group GM Synth Bass & Lead1 Synth Pad & Synth EFX1 Synth Material Band Instrument Classical Instrument & Wind Ethnic & Percussion SFX 1 Synth Bass & Lead2
Bank MSB 0 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63
Bank LSB 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Program EL EL EL EL EL EL EL EL EL
65 SprnoSax 1 CS Squar 2 AsianEch 2 Saw1 C 1 Fretles2 2 Agogo 1 Steam 1 PWM Lead 2
66 Alto Sax 1 WahSquar 1 SoundTrk 2 Saw2 C 1 ChoFrles 2 AnaMetal 1 Bubble 1 BPF Lead 2
67 TenorSax 1 WahPulse 1 Majesty 2 SwDual1C 2 FlnFrles 2 Cabasa 1 Dog 1 PolySaw2 2
68 Bari.Sax 2 SubOsc1 2 Bali Pad 2 SwDual2C 1 AcoBass1 1 Maracas 1 Horse 1 TechSaw 2
69 Oboe 2 SubOsc2 2 Warrior 2 SawOct C 2 AcoBass2 1 SmbWhisl 1 Tweet 1 1 PulsFbLd 1
70 Eng.Horn 2 CS ModLd 2 PwrSweep 2 Square C 1 BaGlisnd 2 Guiro 2 Tweet 2 2 Poly Ld1 2
71 Bassoon 2 PWM Solo 2 Palace 2 Pulse C 2 CleanGt1 2 AnaGuiro 1 Growl 1 Poly Ld2 2
72 Clarinet 1 PolySaw1 1 Soda 2 PlsDualC 2 CleanGt2 2 Claves 1 DoorSqek 1 Poly Ld3 2
73 Piccolo 1 StarLead 2 Coaster 2 SqurOctC 2 ChorsGt1 2 AnaClave 1 DoorSlam 1 Poly Ld4 2
74 Flute 1 PowrSolo 2 MilkyWay 2 PulsOctC 2 FlangeGt 2 WoodBlok 1 Telphon1 1 Saw Solo 1
75 Recorder 2 SyncLd1 2 Bush 2 Sync C 1 Wah Gtr1 2 Cuica 2 Telphon2 1 SinSolo1 2
76 PanFlute 1 SyncLd2 2 EnginRom 2 TriSineC 2 Wah Gtr2 1 Triangle 2 Scratch1 1 SinSolo2 2
77 Bottle 2 BeepLead 2 Glaswork 2 Noise1 C 1 Mute Gtr 2 Shaker1 1 TurnTabl 1 AgileLd 2
78 Shakhchi 1 BuzzSolo 2 OohStack 2 Noise2 C 1 Jazz Gtr 1 AnShaker 1 TapeRwnd 1 SweetP10 1
79 Whistle 1 5th Saw 2 Galaxy 2 Lead1 C 1 OctJzGtr 2 JinglBel 1 GlasNoiz 1 SinSolo3 1
80 Ocarina 1 5thPulse 2 Comet 2 Lead2 C 1 Ovrdrive 2 BellTree 1 MetalNz1 1 RampLead 1
81 SquareLd 2 Bend 5th 2 Shrine 2 Lead3 C 1 Dist.Gtr 2 WindChm1 1 MetalNz2 1 SqrSolo2 2
82 Saw.Lead 2 PopLd4th 2 Hovering 2 FM1 C 1 WahFazG1 2 WindChm2 2 IndstTom 1 SynBrass 2
83 CaliopLd 2 VoxSyn1 2 Marsh 2 FM2 C 1 WahFazG2 2 Castanet 1 CarEIgn 1 Oct.Lead 2
84 Chiff Ld 2 VoxSyn2 2 Hypnosis 2 FM3 C 1 PowrChd1 1 Sticks 1 CarTSqel 1 PardisLd 2
85 CharanLd 2 BreathLd 2 WaterBel 2 Digi1 C 1 GtrHarmo 1 Feet1 2 Car Pass 1 Pipe Ld2 2
86 Voice Ld 1 Pipe Ld1 2 Hallucin 2 Digi2 C 1 SteelGtr 1 Clap L 1 CarCrash 1 Pipe Ld3 2
87 Fifth Ld 2 NewDrone 2 Digi3 C 1 12StrGtr 2 Clap S 1 Train 1 ResTouch 2
88 Bass &Ld 2 Motor 1 Digi4 C 1 NylonGt1 1 AnaClap1 1 Helicptr 1 RndmBeep 2
89 NewAgePd 2 Sonar1 1 Digi5 C 1 NylonGt2 2 SynClap1 1 RevBurst 1 EnrgySqr 2
90 Warm Pad 2 Sonar2 1 Digi6 C 1 P.Scrape 1 FngrSnap 1 RevLowNz 1 Tech Saw 2
91 PolySyPd 2 OrganStk 2 Digi7 C 1 FretNoiz 2 AnSdStk1 1 Laugh 1 TeknoMan 2
92 ChoirPad 2 Vox Bell 2 Digi8 C 1 DpChorEP 2 AnSdStk2 1 Scream 1 TechLead 2
93 BowedPad 2 ColdStab 1 Digi9 C 1 MelloEP2 2 AnSdStk3 1 Punch 1 BigSyn1 2
94 MetalPad 2 Kick&Hit 1 Digi10 C 1 Digi EP1 2 AnSdStk4 1 Heart 1 BigSyn2 2
95 Halo Pad 2 BrasHit1 1 Digi11 C 1 Digi EP2 2 MelodTom 1 Footstep 1 EleCarpt 2
96 SweepPad 2 Syn Stab 1 Digi12 C 1 Digi EP3 2 Syn Drum 2 Applause 2 Autism 1
97 Rain 2 GiantStb 1 Saw1 D 1 Mono EP3 1 Ana Tom 1 BrthNoiz 1 HdcorBnd 2
98 SoundTrk 2 HardStab 1 Saw2 D 1 Chor EP3 2 Ana BD 1 Gunshot 1
99 Crystal 2 OrganStb 1 SwDual1D 2 Mono EP4 1 AnaCymb1 1 Bomb 1
100 Atmosphr 2 Orch.Hit 1 SwDual2D 1 Chor EP4 2 AnaCymb2 1 HiQ 1 1
101 Bright 2 HammerHt 1 SawOct D 2 MonEP3/4 2 LoopCymb 1 HiQ 2 1
102 Goblins 2 ChoirHit 1 Square D 1 TrmEP3/4 2 RevCymbl 1 SFX Gun1 1
103 Echoes 2 BrasHit2 1 Pulse D 2 OldSkPno 1 Rev Roll 1 SFX Gun2 1
104 Sci-Fi 2 BrasHit3 1 PlsDualD 2 ClickEP 2 Rev SD 1 BrstNoiz 1
105 Sitar 1 BrasHit4 1 SqurOctD 2 SweetEP 2 Rev Tom 1 Ripper 1
106 Banjo 2 GuitrHit 1 PulsOctD 2 RotrOrgn 2 Rev Kick 1 RvThundr 1
107 Shamisen 2 OrganHit 1 Sync D 1 RockOrg2 2 RevHatCl 1 RvDoorSl 1
108 Koto 2 EP Hit 1 TriSineD 2 HousOrg2 2 RevTimba 1 RvScrDwn 1
109 Kalimba 1 NY Hit 1 Noise1 D 1 SurfOrgn 2 RevDjemb 1 RvTapeRw 1
110 Bagpipe 1 RvKck&Ht 1 Noise2 D 1 SynthOrg 2 RevFCym 1 RvGlasNz 1
111 Fiddle 1 RvBrsHt1 1 Lead1 D 1 RockOrg3 2 Shaker2 2 RvMtlNz1 1
112 Shanai 2 RvGntStb 1 Lead2 D 1 JazzOrg1 2 AnMaracs 1 RvMtlNz2 1
113 TnklBell 2 RvOrgStb 1 Lead3 D 1 ChrchOr3 2 AnGuiro2 1 RvIndsTm 1
Appendix
114 Agogo 1 RvOrchHt 1 FM1 D 1 DigiOrg1 2 TambrnRX 1 RvCarEIg 1
115 SteelDrm 1 RvHamrHt 1 FM2 D 1 DigiOrg2 2 CowbelRX 1 RvCarCrs 1
116 WoodBlok 1 RvChorHt 1 FM3 D 1 JazzOrg2 2 Bongo RX 2 RevPunch 1
117 TaikoDrm 1 RvBrsHt2 1 Digi1 D 1 GarageOr 2 Agogo RX 2 RvGunsht 1
118 MelodTom 1 RvBrsHt3 1 Digi2 D 1 FngrBas3 2 ShakerRX 1 RevBomb 1
119 Syn.Drum 1 RvBrsHt4 1 Digi3 D 1 FlngFnB2 2 Feet2 1 RevHiQ1 1
120 RevCymbl 1 RvGtrHit 1 Digi4 D 1 SlapBas3 2 Clap Aco 1 RevHiQ2 1
121 FretNoiz 2 RvOrgHit 1 Digi5 D 1 SlapBas4 2 AnaClap2 1 RevSyTm1 1
122 BrthNoiz 1 RvEP Hit 1 Digi6 D 1 AcoBass3 2 Clap RX5 1 RevSyTm2 1
123 Seashore 2 RvNY Hit 1 Digi7 D 1 CleanGt3 1 SynClap2 1 RvSFXGn1 1
124 Tweet 2 Digi8 D 1 ChorsGt2 2 SynSdStk 1 RvSFXGn2 1
125 Telphone 1 Digi9 D 1 ChMuteGt 2 FM SdStk 1 RvBrstNz 1
126 Helicptr 1 Digi10 D 1 DistMute 1 SynTom1 1 RvRipper 1
127 Applause 1 Digi11 D 1 PowrChd2 1 SynTom2 1 RvSyVibr 1
128 Gunshot 1 Digi12 D 1 BrightAG 2 AnaClick 1 RvBelTre 1
: No sound.
RS7000 293
Inst. Group Synth Pad & Synth EFX2 SFX2 Drum Kit GM Drum Kit
Bank MSB 63 63 126 127
Bank LSB 8 9 0 0
Program EL EL Kit Type Kit Type
65 DelySFX3 1 StandKit Trigger
70 Seq SFX1 2 † †
71 Seq SFX2 2 † †
72 EerieRes 2 † †
73 Tibet 2 † †
74 Airsnake 2 † †
75 Hammer 2 † †
76 EchoShot 2 † †
77 SFX Prc1 2 † †
78 SFX Prc2 2 † †
79 SFX Prc3 2 † †
80 SFX Prc4 2 † †
81 SFX Prc5 2 † †
82 SFX Prc6 2 † †
83 SFX Prc7 2 † †
84 NoizClap 2 † †
85 FEG Noiz 1 † †
86 FlngNoiz 2 † †
87 SynMetal 1 † †
88 Rebound 2 † †
89 Zap1 1 † †
90 Zap2 1 † †
91 Zoom 1 † †
92 Alarm 1 † †
93 Vox Go! 1 † †
94 VoxWhoa! 1 † †
95 Vox Yo! 1 † †
96 VoxAhhh! 1 † †
97 Vox Huh! 1 † †
98 Vox Muh! 1 † †
99 Vox Tah! 1 † †
100 Vox Buh! 1 † †
101 Vox Hit 1 † †
102 Vocd Ahh 1 † †
103 VoxDrum1 1 † †
104 VoxDrum2 1 † †
105 Scratch2 1 † †
106 ScrtchDr 1 † †
107 ScrtchVx 1 † †
108 RvSyMetl 1 † †
109 RvRebond 2 † †
110 RevZap1 1 † †
111 RevZap2 1 † †
112 RevZoom 1 † †
113 RevAlarm 1 † †
114 RvVoxGo! 1 † †
115 RvVxWhoa 1 † †
116 RvVoxYo! 1 † †
117 RvVxAhhh 1 † †
118 RvVxHuh! 1 † †
119 RvVxMuh! 1 † †
120 RvVxTah! 1 † †
121 RvVxBuh! 1 † †
122 RvVoxHit 1 † †
123 RvVxDrm2 1 † †
124 † †
125 † †
126 † †
127 † †
128 † †
: No sound.
294 RS7000
6. Drum Voice List
6. Drum Voice List
Full edit type

Bank MSB 126 126 126 126
Bank LSB 0 0 0 0
Program 21 22 23 24
Kit Type Full Editing Full Editing Full Editing Full Editing
Key Alternate Key Alternate Key Alternate Key Alternate
Note# Note
BD Kit off assign HH&Cy Kit off assign SD Kit off assign Tom Kit off assign
0 C -2 Reverse BD Electro Reverse Hi-Hat Open Synth Vox Go! Reverse Tom Human 1
1 C# -2 Reverse BD FX Gate Reverse Hi-Hat Open SE Scratch Vox 1 F Reverse Tom Human 2
2 D -2 Reverse BD Hammer Reverse Hi-Hat Open Analog 81 Vox Buh! Reverse Tom Electro 1
3 D# -2 Reverse BD Analog Power Reverse Hi-Hat Closed Analog 70 Vox Tah! Reverse Tom Electro 2
4 E -2 Reverse BD Analog Distortion 6 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Analog 70 Vox Hit Reverse Tom SFX 1
5 F -2 Reverse BD Analog Distortion 3 Reverse Hi-Hat Closed 90 Hi Blip Reverse Tom SFX 2
6 F# -2 Reverse BD Analog Distortion 2 Reverse Hi-Hat Open 90 Hi Q 2 Reverse Tom Analog 90 1
7 G -2 Reverse BD Analog Tight Hi-Hat Closed R&B Hi Q 1 Reverse Tom Analog 90 2
8 G# -2 Reverse BD Analog 94 Hi-Hat Pedal R&B Zap 1 Reverse Tom Analog Distortion 1
9 A -2 Reverse BD Analog Blip 2 Hi-Hat Open R&B Sword Reverse Tom Analog Distortion 2
10 A# -2 Reverse BD Analog Rubber 2 Hi-Hat Closed Light FX Metal Tom Human
11 B -2 BD Electro Hi-Hat Pedal Light Metal Noise 1 Tom Human
12 C -1 BD FX Gate Hi-Hat Open Light Synth Click Tom Human
13 C# -1 BD Hammer Hi-Hat Closed RX5 Snare Hammer Tom Human
14 D -1 BD Analog Power Hi-Hat Half RX7 Snare Wood Tom Human
15 D# -1 BD Analog Distortion 5 Hi-Hat Open RX5 Snare Timber Tom Human
16 E -1 BD Analog Distortion 6 Hi-Hat Closed Lo-fi Snare FX Noise Tom Electro 1 1
17 F -1 BD Analog Distortion 4 Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi 1 Snare FX Gate Tom Electro 1 2
18 F# -1 BD Analog Distortion 3 Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi 2 Snare Hip FX L Tom Electro 1 3
19 G -1 BD Analog Distortion 2 Hi-Hat Closed Tek Snare Hip FX H Tom Electro 1 4
20 G# -1 BD Analog Tight Hi-Hat Open Tek 1 Snare Electro Tom Electro 1 5
21 A -1 BD Analog 94 Hi-Hat Open Tek 2 Snare FM Tom Electro 1 6
22 A# -1 BD Analog Blip 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 70 Snare Analog 83 Tom SFX 1
23 B -1 BD Analog Rubber 2 Hi-Hat Open Analog 70 1 Snare Analog 82 Tom SFX 2
24 C 0 BD Analog 93 Hi-Hat Open Analog 70 2 Snare Analog 95 Tom SFX 3
25 C# 0 BD Analog 90 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 80 Snare Analog 94 Tom SFX 4
26 D 0 BD Analog 83 Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 1 Snare Analog 93 Tom SFX 5
27 D# 0 BD Analog 82 Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 2 Snare Analog 92 Tom SFX 6
28 E 0 BD Analog 92 Hi-Hat Closed 90 Snare Analog 90 Tom Analog 90 1
29 F 0 BD Analog 91 Hi-Hat Open 90 1 Snare Analog 91 Tom Analog 90 2
30 F# 0 BD Analog Deep Hi-Hat Open 90 2 Snare Analog 91 Q Tom Analog 90 3
31 G 0 BD Analog Hard 2 Hi-Hat Closed 90 Snare Analog Gate Tom Analog 90 4
32 G# 0 BD Analog Hard 1 Hi-Hat Open 90 1 Snare Synth 1 Tom Analog 90 5
33 A 0 BD Analog Blip 1 Hi-Hat Open 90 2 Snare Synth 2 Tom Analog 90 6
34 A# 0 BD Analog Rubber 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 81 1 Snare Synth 3 Tom Analog Distortion 1
35 B 0 BD Analog Loose Hi-Hat Closed Analog 81 2 Snare Synth 4 Tom Analog Distortion 2
36 C 1 BD Synth 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog 81 1 Snare Analog Distortion Tom Analog Distortion 3
37 C# 1 BD Synth 2 Hi-Hat Open Analog 81 2 Snare Noise Distortion Tom Analog Distortion 4
38 D 1 BD Analog Distortion 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog 81 3 Metal Noise 2 Tom Analog Distortion 5
39 D# 1 Ripper Hi-Hat Closed Analog DM Snare Analog 81 L Tom Analog Distortion 6
40 E 1 BD Analog 70 L Hi-Hat Open Analog DM 1 Snare Analog 81 Tom Synth 1 1
41 F 1 BD Analog 70 Hi-Hat Open Analog DM 2 Snare Analog 80 Tom Synth 1 2
42 F# 1 BD Analog 80 Hi-Hat Closed Synth Snare Analog 70 L Tom Synth 1 3
43 G 1 BD Analog 80 Long Hi-Hat Open Synth 1 Snare Analog 70 Tom Synth 1 4
44 G# 1 BD Dry Hi-Hat Open Synth 2 Snare Analog DM Tom Synth 1 5
45 A 1 BD Dry Hard Hi-Hat Closed Synth Snare Clap Tom Synth 1 6
46 A# 1 BD Room 1 Hi-Hat Open Synth 1 Snare Mid Room Tom Industrial 1
47 B 1 BD Soft Hi-Hat Open Synth 2 Snare Ambience Tom Industrial 2
48 C 2 BD Room 2 Hi-Hat Closed SE Snare Piccolo 1 Tom Industrial 3
49 C# 2 BD Break Lo-fi 2 Hi-Hat Open SE 1 Snare Piccolo Rim 1 Tom Industrial 4
50 D 2 BD Break Lo-fi 1 Hi-Hat Open SE 2 Snare Break Lo-fi 3 Tom Industrial 5
51 D# 2 BD & Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Heavy Snare Break Lo-fi 2 Tom Industrial 6
52 E 2 BD Jungle 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Heavy Snare Break Lo-fi 1 Tom Analog 80 1
53 F 2 BD Jungle 1 Hi-Hat Open Heavy Snare Roll Break Tom Analog 80 2
Appendix
54 F# 2 BD Jungle 3 Hi-Hat Open Heavy Brush Snare Jungle 3 Tom Analog 80 3
55 G 2 BD D&B 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tight Snare Jungle 1 Tom Analog 80 4
56 G# 2 BD D&B 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Heavy Snare Jungle 2 Tom Analog 80 5
57 A 2 BD RX5 1 Hi-Hat Open Heavy Snare D&B 1 Tom Analog 80 6
58 A# 2 BD RX5 2 Hi-Hat Closed Break Snare D&B 2 Tom Analog 80 Soft 1
59 B 2 BD Room 3 Hi-Hat Pedal Break 1 Snare D&B 3 Tom Analog 80 Soft 2
60 C 3 BD Power Gate Hi-Hat Open Break Snare D&B 4 Tom Analog 80 Soft 3
61 C# 3 BD R&B 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tight Snare Roll Tom Analog 80 Soft 4
62 D 3 BD R&B 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Break 2 Reverse Roll Tom Analog 80 Soft 5
63 D# 3 BD Lo-fi Hi-Hat Open Break Reverse Snare Tom Analog 80 Soft 6
The overall kit sound can be varied by using the Voice Edit parameters.
All instruments are compatible with Key Off messages.
RS7000 295
6. Drum Voice List
Bank MSB 126 Bank MSB 126 126

Bank LSB 0 Bank LSB 0 0
Program 62 Program 21 22
Kit Type Full Editing Kit Type Full Editing Full Editing
Key Alternate Key Alternate Key Alternate
Note# Note Note# Note
Perc2 Kit off assign BD Kit off assign HH&Cy Kit off assign
0 C -2 Reverse Surdo Open 64 E 3 BD Hip Deep Reverse Hi-Hat
1 C# -2 Reverse Djembe Open 65 F 3 BD Break Deep Ride Cymbal 90
2 D -2 Reverse Tabla Open 66 F# 3 BD Break Heavy Ride Cymbal Heavy 1
3 D# -2 Reverse Tabla High 67 G 3 BD Break Hard Ride Cymbal Heavy Brush
4 E -2 Reverse Udu Low 68 G# 3 Big Drum Ride Cymbal Heavy 2
5 F -2 Reverse Udu Finger 69 A 3 Taiko Drum Ride Cymbal Heavy Dark
6 F# -2 Reverse Conga L 70 A# 3 Surdo Open Ride Cymbal Cup 1
7 G -2 Reverse Conga H Mute 71 B 3 Feet 2 Ride Cymbal Cup 2
8 G# -2 Reverse Conga H Open 72 C 4 BD Industrial Ride Cymbal Cup 3
9 A -2 Reverse Bongo H 73 C# 4 Door Slam Ride Cymbal Cup Brush
10 A# -2 Reverse Timbale 74 D 4 Punch Metal Noise 2
11 B -2 Reverse Sticks 75 D# 4 Heart Crash Cymbal 90
12 C -1 Reverse Shekere 2 76 E 4 Feet 1 Crash Analog 80
13 C# -1 Reverse Shaker 3 77 F 4 BD Human Cymbal Synth 1
14 D -1 Reverse Shaker 2 78 F# 4 BD Human Deep Cymbal Synth 1 L
15 D# -1 Reverse Shaker 1 79 G 4 Vox Buh! Cymbal Synth 2
16 E -1 Big Drum 80 G# 4 Vox Muh! Cymbal Synth 3
17 F -1 Taiko Drum 81 A 4 Reverse BD Analog 93 Reverse Synth Cymbal
18 F# -1 Tom Industrial 82 A# 4 Reverse BD Analog 90 Crash Cymbal Heavy 1
19 G -1 Surdo Open 83 B 4 Reverse BD Analog 83 Crash Cymbal Heavy Brush
20 G# -1 Surdo Mute 84 C 5 Reverse BD Analog 82 Crash Cymbal Heavy 2
21 A -1 Djembe Open 85 C# 5 Reverse BD Analog 91 Crash Cymbal Heavy 3
22 A# -1 Djembe Mute 86 D 5 Reverse BD Analog Deep Splash Cymbal 1
23 B -1 Djembe Edge 87 D# 5 Reverse BD Analog Hard 1 Splash Cymbal 2
24 C 0 Tabla Bend 88 E 5 Reverse BD Analog Blip 1 Splash Cymbal Brush
25 C# 0 Tabla Open 89 F 5 Reverse BD Analog Rubber 1 Crash Cymbal Slow Attack
26 D 0 Tabla Mute 90 F# 5 Reverse BD Analog Loose Reverse Cymbal Loop
27 D# 0 Tabla High 91 G 5 Reverse BD Synth 1 Gong 1
28 E 0 Udu Low 92 G# 5 Reverse BD Synth 2 Gong 2
29 F 0 Udu High 93 A 5 Reverse BD Analog Distortion 1 Gong 3
30 F# 0 Udu Finger 94 A# 5 Reverse Ripper Finger Cymbal
31 G 0 Conga L 95 B 5 Reverse BD Analog 70 Ride Cymbal Light
32 G# 0 Conga H Mute 96 C 6 Reverse BD Analog 81 Ride Cymbal Light Brush
33 A 0 Conga H Open 97 C# 6 Reverse BD Dry Crash Cymbal Light
34 A# 0 Bongo L 98 D 6 Reverse BD Soft Crash Cymbal Light Brush
35 B 0 Bongo H 99 D# 6 Reverse BD Room 2 Splash Cymbal 3
36 C 1 Bongo RX5 L 100 E 6 Reverse BD Break Lo-fi 2 Chinese Cymbal
37 C# 1 Bongo RX5 H 101 F 6 Reverse BD Break Lo-fi 1 Crash Cymbal Slow Attack
38 D 1 Conga Analog 1 102 F# 6 Reverse BD & Hi-Hat Open Cymbal Synth 1
39 D# 1 Conga Analog 2 103 G 6 Reverse BD Jungle 3 Splash Cymbal 4
40 E 1 Conga Analog 3 104 G# 6 Reverse BD D&B 1 Reverse Ride Cymbal Heavy
41 F 1 Conga Analog 4 105 A 6 Reverse BD D&B 2 Reverse Ride Cymbal Cup
42 F# 1 Conga Analog 5 106 A# 6 Reverse BD RX5 1 Reverse Metal Noise 2
43 G 1 Timbale L 107 B 6 Reverse BD RX5 2 Reverse Crash Cymbal 90
44 G# 1 Timbale H 108 C 7 Reverse BD Room 3 Reverse Crash Analog 80
45 A 1 Log Drum 1 109 C# 7 Reverse BD Power Gate Reverse Cymbal Synth 1
46 A# 1 Log Drum 2 110 D 7 Reverse BD R&B 1 Reverse Crash Cymbal Heavy
47 B 1 Log Drum 3 111 D# 7 Reverse BD R&B 2 Reverse Splash Cymbal 1
48 C 2 Wood Block L 112 E 7 Reverse BD Lo-fi Reverse Splash Cymbal 2
49 C# 2 Wood Block H 113 F 7 Reverse BD Break Deep Reverse Gong 1
50 D 2 Castanet 114 F# 7 Reverse BD Break Heavy Reverse Gong 2
51 D# 2 Claves 115 G 7 Reverse BD Break Hard Reverse Finger Cymbal
52 E 2 Claves Analog 116 G# 7 Reverse Big Drum Reverse Ride Cymbal Light
53 F 2 Sticks 117 A 7 Reverse Taiko Drum Reverse Crash Cymbal Light
54 F# 2 Finger Snap 118 A# 7 Reverse Surdo Open Reverse Splash Cymbal 3
55 G 2 Shekere 3 119 B 7 Reverse Feet 2 Reverse Hi-Hat Closed Heavy
56 G# 2 Shekere 2 120 C 8 Reverse Tom Industrial Reverse Hi-Hat Pedal Heavy
57 A 2 Shekere 1 121 C# 8 Reverse Door Slam Reverse Hi-Hat Open Heavy
58 A# 2 Shaker 3 122 D 8 Reverse Punch Reverse Hi-Hat Closed Light
59 B 2 Cabasa 123 D# 8 Reverse Feet 1 Reverse Hi-Hat Pedal Light
60 C 3 Shaker RX11 124 E 8 Reverse BD Human Reverse Hi-Hat Open Light
61 C# 3 Shaker 2 125 F 8 Reverse BD Human Deep Reverse Hi-Hat Closed Break
62 D 3 Shaker 1 126 F# 8 Reverse Vox Buh! Reverse Hi-Hat Pedal Break 1
63 D# 3 Shaker Analog 127 G 8 Reverse Vox Muh! Reverse Hi-Hat Open Break
296 RS7000
6. Drum Voice List
Bank MSB 126 126 126

Bank LSB 0 0 0
Program 23 24 62
Kit Type Full Editing Full Editing Full Editing
Note# Note
SD Kit off assign Tom Kit off assign Perc2 Kit off assign
64 E 3 Cymbal Synth 2 Tom Hard 1 Maracas Analog 80
65 F 3 Brush Tap Soft Tom Hard 2 Maracas
66 F# 3 Brush Tap Tom Hard 3 Maracas Analog 70
67 G 3 Brush Slap Soft Tom Hard 4 Gong 1
68 G# 3 Brush Slap Tom Hard 5 Gong 2
69 A 3 Brush Swirl Tom Hard 6 Gong 3
70 A# 3 Brush Swirl Short Tom Soft 1 Cymbal Synth 3
71 B 3 Snare RX5 1 Tom Soft 2 Metal Noise 2
72 C 4 Snare RX5 2 Tom Soft 3 Sword
73 C# 4 Snare Mid Rim Tom Soft 4 Glass Noise
74 D 4 Snare Dry Tom Soft 5 FX Metal
75 D# 4 Snare Dry Rim Tom Soft 6 Cowbell
76 E 4 Snare Break Rim Tom Soft Dark 1 Cowbell RX11
77 F 4 Snare R&B 1 Tom Soft Dark 2 Agogo L
78 F# 4 Snare R&B 2 Tom Soft Dark 3 Agogo H
79 G 4 Snare R&B Rim Tom Soft Dark 4 Agogo RX5 L
80 G# 4 Snare Piccolo Rim 2 Tom Soft Dark 5 Agogo RX5 H
81 A 4 Snare Break Lo-fi 3 Tom Soft Dark 6 Cowbell Analog 80
82 A# 4 Snare Hip Rim 2 Tom Brush 1 Cowbell Analog 70
83 B 4 Snare Break Hard Tom Brush 2 Metal Analog
84 C 5 Snare Lo-fi Tom Brush 3 Tambourine RX5
85 C# 5 Snare Hip Rezo Tom Brush 4 Tambourine
86 D 5 Snare Hip Rim 3 Tom Brush 5 Tambourine Analog
87 D# 5 Snare Gate Cut Tom Brush 6 Bell Tree
88 E 5 Snare Hip Gate Tom Dry 1 Jingle Bell
89 F 5 Snare Gate 1 Tom Dry 2 Wind Chime
90 F# 5 Snare Gate 2 Tom Dry 3 Triangle Open
91 G 5 Side Stick Analog 90 Tom Dry 4 Triangle Mute
92 G# 5 Side Stick Analog 90 Dark Tom Dry 5 Finger Cymbal
93 A 5 Side Stick Analog 80 Tom Dry 6 Cuica Open
94 A# 5 Side Stick Analog 70 Tom RX5 1 Cuica Mute
95 B 5 Side Stick FM Tom RX5 2 Guiro Long
96 C 6 Side Stick FX Tom RX5 3 Guiro Short
97 C# 6 Snare Hip Rim 8 Tom RX5 4 Guiro Analog DM
98 D 6 Side Stick Electro Tom RX5 5 Guiro Analog 70
99 D# 6 Side Stick Tom RX5 6 Vibraslap
100 E 6 Snare Hip Rim 1 Tom Ambience 1 Vibraslap Synth
101 F 6 Side Stick RX5 Tom Ambience 2 Vibraslap Analog
102 F# 6 Snare Hip Rim 4 Tom Ambience 3 Samba Whistle L
103 G 6 Snare Hip Rim 5 Tom Ambience 4 Samba Whistle H
104 G# 6 Snare Hip Rim 9 Tom Ambience 5 Hi Q 1
105 A 6 Snare Hip Rim 7 Tom Ambience 6 Hi Q 2
106 A# 6 Snare Hip Rim 6 Reverse Tom Synth 1 1 SFX Gun 1
107 B 6 Log Drum 2 Reverse Tom Synth 1 2 SFX Gun 2
108 C 7 Log Drum 3 Reverse Tom Industrial 1 Zap 1
109 C# 7 Bongo RX5 H Reverse Tom Industrial 2 Zap 2
110 D 7 Hand Clap Analog 90 Reverse Tom Analog 80 1 Zoom
111 D# 7 Hand Clap Analog 80 Reverse Tom Analog 80 2 Alarm
112 E 7 Hand Clap Analog 80 Short Reverse Tom Analog 80 Soft 1 Police
113 F 7 Hand Clap Small Reverse Tom Analog 80 Soft 2 Tape Rewind
114 F# 7 Hand Clap Acoustic Reverse Tom Hard 1 Metal Noise 1
115 G 7 Hand Clap Large Reverse Tom Hard 2 Noiseburst
116 G# 7 Hand Clap RX5 Reverse Tom Soft 1 Reverse Synth Cymbal
117 A 7 Hand Clap Electro Reverse Tom Soft 2 Reverse Low Noise
118 A# 7 Hand Clap Synth Reverse Tom Soft Dark 1 Feet 2
Appendix
119 B 7 Noiseburst Reverse Tom Soft Dark 2 Reverse Metal Noise 2
120 C 8 Hand Clap Analog 80 Q Reverse Tom Brush 1 Reverse Cowbell
121 C# 8 Finger Snap Reverse Tom Brush 2 Reverse Agogo
122 D 8 Reverse Snare Analog 83 Reverse Tom Dry 1 Reverse Cowbell Analog 80
123 D# 8 Reverse Snare Analog 91 Reverse Tom Dry 2 Reverse Tambourine
124 E 8 Reverse Snare Piccolo Rim 1 Reverse Tom RX5 1 Reverse Bell Tree
125 F 8 Reverse Snare Break Lo-fi 3 Reverse Tom RX5 2 Reverse Jingle Bell
126 F# 8 Reverse Side Stick Reverse Tom Ambience 1 Reverse Finger Cymbal
127 G 8 Reverse Hand Clap Analog 80 Reverse Tom Ambience 2 Reverse Vibraslap Synth
RS7000 297
6. Drum Voice List
Trigger Type
Bank MSB 126 126 126 126
Bank LSB 0 0 0 0
Program 1 2 3 4
Kit Type Trigger Trigger Trigger Trigger
Note# Note
Anlg Kit1 off assign Anlg Kit2 off assign RhBox Kit off assign Synth Kit off assign
12 C -1 Reverse Side Stick Analog 90 Reverse Side Stick Analog 80 Reverse Side Stick Analog 70 Reverse Side Stick Electro
13 C# -1 Reverse Tom Analog Distortion Reverse Tom Analog 80 H Reverse Tom Analog 80 H Reverse Tom Synth 1
14 D -1 Reverse Tom Analog 90 Reverse Tom Analog 80 L Reverse Tom Analog 80 L Reverse Tom Electro
15 D# -1 Reverse BD Analog Rubber 2 Reverse BD Analog 83 Reverse BD Analog 81 Reverse BD FX Gate
16 E -1 Reverse BD Analog 90 Reverse BD Analog 82 Reverse BD Analog 70 Reverse BD Electro
17 F -1 Reverse Crash Cymbal 90 Reverse Crash Analog 80 Reverse Cymbal Synth 1 Reverse Cymbal Synth 1
18 F# -1 Reverse Ride Cymbal 90 Reverse Ride Cymbal 90 Cymbal Synth 2 Reverse Ride Cymbal 90
19 G -1 Reverse Snare Analog Gate Reverse Snare Analog 82 Reverse Snare FM Reverse Snare Gate 1
20 G# -1 Reverse Snare Analog 90 Reverse Snare Analog 81 Reverse Snare Analog 70 Reverse Snare Synth 1
21 A -1 Reverse Hand Clap Analog 90 Reverse Hand Clap Analog 80 Reverse Snare Clap Reverse Hand Clap Electro
22 A# -1 Reverse Hi-Hat Open 90 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Analog 81 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Analog 70 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Synth
23 B -1 BD Analog Tight BD Analog 83 BD Analog 80 BD FX Gate
24 C 0 BD Analog Rubber 2 BD Analog 80 Long BD Analog 80 Long BD Analog Blip 1
25 C# 0 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Synth Click
26 D 0 Snare Analog 94 Snare Analog 83 Snare FM Snare Electro
27 D# 0 Hand Clap Analog 80 Snare Clap Hand Clap Analog 80 Hand Clap Electro
28 E 0 Snare Analog Gate Snare Analog 82 Side Stick FM Snare Gate 1
29 F 0 Tom Analog Distortion 1 Tom Analog 80 H1 Tom Analog 80 H1 Tom Synth 1 1
30 F# 0 Hi-Hat Closed 90 H 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 80 1 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog DM 2 Hi-Hat Closed SE 1
31 G 0 Tom Analog Distortion 2 Tom Analog 80 H2 Tom Analog 80 H2 Tom Synth 1 2
32 G# 0 Hi-Hat Open 90 H1 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 2 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog DM 1 2 Hi-Hat Open SE 1 1
33 A 0 Tom Analog Distortion 3 Tom Analog 80 H3 Tom Analog 80 H3 Tom Synth 1 3
34 A# 0 Hi-Hat Open 90 H2 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog DM 2 2 Hi-Hat Open SE 1 1
35 B 0 BD Analog 91 BD Analog 82 BD Analog 70 L BD Electro
36 C 1 BD Analog 90 BD Analog 80 BD Analog 70 BD Synth 1
37 C# 1 Side Stick Analog 90 Side Stick Analog 80 Side Stick Analog 70 Side Stick Electro
38 D 1 Snare Analog 90 Snare Analog 81 Snare Analog 70 Snare Synth 1
39 D# 1 Hand Clap Analog 90 Hand Clap Analog 80 Snare Clap Hand Clap Synth
40 E 1 Snare Analog 91 Snare Analog 80 Snare Analog DM Snare Synth 2
41 F 1 Tom Analog 90 1 Tom Analog 80 1 Tom Analog 80 1 Tom Electro 1 1
42 F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed 90 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 81 1 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 70 1 Hi-Hat Closed Synth 2
43 G 1 Tom Analog 90 2 Tom Analog 80 2 Tom Analog 80 2 Tom Electro 1 2
44 G# 1 Hi-Hat Open 90 1 2 Hi-Hat Open Analog 81 2 2 Hi-Hat Open Analog 70 1 1 Hi-Hat Open Synth 1 2
45 A 1 Tom Analog 90 3 Tom Analog 80 3 Tom Analog 80 3 Tom Electro 1 3
46 A# 1 Hi-Hat Open 90 2 2 Hi-Hat Open Analog 81 2 Hi-Hat Open Analog 70 2 1 Hi-Hat Open Synth 1 2
47 B 1 Tom Analog 90 4 Tom Analog 80 4 Tom Analog 80 4 Tom Electro 1 4
48 C 2 Tom Analog 90 5 Tom Analog 80 5 Tom Analog 80 5 Tom Electro 1 5
49 C# 2 Crash Cymbal 90 Crash Analog 80 Cymbal Synth 1 Cymbal Synth 1
50 D 2 Tom Analog 90 6 Tom Analog 80 6 Tom Analog 80 6 Tom Electro 1 6
51 D# 2 Ride Cymbal 90 Ride Cymbal 90 Ride Cymbal 90 Ride Cymbal 90
52 E 2 Crash Cymbal Slow Attack Crash Cymbal Slow Attack Cymbal Synth 2 Cymbal Synth 3
53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup
54 F# 2 Tambourine RX5 Tambourine Analog Tambourine Analog Tambourine Analog
55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal
56 G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog 80 Cowbell Analog 70 Cowbell Analog 70
57 A 2 Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy
58 A# 2 Cowbell Analog 80 Vibraslap Synth Vibraslap Analog Vibraslap Synth
59 B 2 Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Heavy
60 C 3 Bongo RX5 H Bongo Analog H Bongo Analog H Bongo Analog H
61 C# 3 Bongo RX5 L Bongo Analog L Bongo Analog L Bongo Analog L
62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H Conga Analog H Conga Analog H
63 D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M Conga Analog M Conga Analog M
64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L Conga Analog L Conga Analog L
65 F 3 Timbale H Metal Analog H Metal Analog H Metal Analog H
66 F# 3 Timbale L Metal Analog L Metal Analog L Metal Analog L
67 G 3 Agogo RX5 H Glass Noise H Glass Noise H Glass Noise H
68 G# 3 Agogo RX5 L Glass Noise L Glass Noise L Glass Noise L
69 A 3 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa
70 A# 3 Maracas Maracas Analog 80 Maracas Analog 70 Maracas Analog 80
71 B 3 SFX Gun 2 SFX Gun 2 SFX Gun 2 SFX Gun 2
72 C 4 SFX Gun 1 SFX Gun 1 SFX Gun 1 SFX Gun 1
73 C# 4 Scratch 2 Guiro Analog DM H Guiro Analog 70 Guiro Analog DM H
74 D 4 Scratch Stop 1 Guiro Analog DM L Guiro Analog DM Guiro Analog DM L
75 D# 4 Hi Q 1 H Claves Analog Claves Analog Hi Q 1 H
76 E 4 Hi Q 1 L Hi Q 1 Hi Q 1 Hi Q 1 L
77 F 4 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2
78 F# 4 Scratch 1 H Scratch 1 Scratch 1 H Scratch 1 H
79 G 4 Scratch 1 L Scratch 1 Scratch 1 L Scratch 1 L
80 G# 4 Triangle Mute 3 Triangle Mute 3 Triangle Mute 3 Triangle Mute 3
81 A 4 Triangle Open 3 Triangle Open 3 Triangle Open 3 Triangle Open 3
82 A# 4 Shaker Analog Shaker Analog Shaker Analog Shaker Analog
83 B 4 Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell
84 C 5 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree
: No sound.
Some Voice Edit parameters will have no effect on the sound.
298 RS7000
6. Drum Voice List
Bank MSB 126 126 126 126

Bank LSB 0 0 0 0
Program 5 6 7 8
Note# Note
SE Kit off assign Psych Kit off assign Acid Kit off assign Tekno Kit off assign
12 C -1 Reverse Side Stick FX Reverse Side Stick Analog 90 Reverse Side Stick Reverse Side Stick Analog 80
13 C# -1 Reverse BD Synth 2 Reverse Tom Synth 1 Reverse Tom Analog 80 Reverse Tom Analog 90
14 D -1 Reverse Tom SFX Reverse Tom Hard Reverse Tom Analog 90 Reverse Tom Analog 80
15 D# -1 Reverse Big Drum Reverse BD Analog 90 Reverse BD RX5 2 Reverse BD Analog Distortion 4
16 E -1 Reverse BD Hammer Reverse BD Analog Hard 2 Reverse BD Analog 92 Reverse BD Analog Rubber 1
17 F -1 Reverse Cymbal Synth 1 Reverse Crash Cymbal 90 Reverse Crash Cymbal 90 Reverse Crash Analog 80
18 F# -1 Reverse Ride Cymbal 90 Reverse Ride Cymbal 90 Reverse Ride Cymbal 90 Reverse Ride Cymbal 90
19 G -1 Reverse Metal Noise 2 Reverse Snare Piccolo Rim 1 Reverse Snare Jungle 3 Reverse Snare Analog 95
20 G# -1 Reverse Snare Hammer Reverse Snare Analog 91 Reverse Snare Analog 93 Reverse Snare Break Lo-fi 3
21 A -1 Reverse FX Metal Snare Roll Reverse Hand Clap Small Reverse Hand Clap Synth
22 A# -1 Reverse Hi-Hat Open SE Reverse Hi-Hat Open Heavy Reverse Hi-Hat Open RX5 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Tek
23 B -1 Big Drum BD Analog Blip 2 BD Analog 91 BD Analog Distortion 4
24 C 0 Punch BD Analog 90 BD RX5 2 BD Analog Deep
25 C# 0 Side Stick FX Log Drum 3 Side Stick Side Stick Analog 90
26 D 0 Metal Noise 2 Snare Mid Rim Snare Jungle 3 Snare Analog 95
27 D# 0 Hand Clap Synth Snare Ambience Hand Clap Small Hand Clap Analog 80
28 E 0 Snare Synth 3 Snare Piccolo Rim 2 Snare Analog 80 Snare Analog 92
29 F 0 Tom Synth 3 1 Tom Synth 1 1 Tom Analog 80 1 Tom Analog 90 1
30 F# 0 Hi-Hat Closed Synth 1 Hi-Hat Closed Heavy 1 1 Hi-Hat Closed RX5 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tek 1
31 G 0 Tom Synth 3 2 Tom Synth 1 2 Tom Analog 80 2 Tom Analog 90 2
32 G# 0 Hi-Hat Open Synth 1 1 Hi-Hat Closed Heavy 2 1 Hi-Hat Open RX5 1 1 Hi-Hat Open Tek 1 1
33 A 0 Tom Synth 3 3 Tom Synth 1 3 Tom Analog 80 3 Tom Analog 90 3
34 A# 0 Hi-Hat Open Synth 1 1 Hi-Hat Open Heavy 1 Hi-Hat Open RX5 2 1 Hi-Hat Open Tek 2 1
35 B 0 Door Slam BD Analog Blip 1 BD Analog 80 BD Analog Loose
36 C 1 BD Hammer BD Analog Hard 2 BD Analog 92 BD Analog Rubber 1
37 C# 1 FX Metal Side Stick Analog 90 Side Stick Analog 90 Side Stick Analog 80
38 D 1 Snare Hammer Snare Analog 91 Snare Analog 93 Snare Break Lo-fi 3
39 D# 1 Metal Noise 1 Hand Clap Analog 80 Hand Clap Analog 80 Hand Clap Synth
40 E 1 Snare Synth 4 Snare Analog Gate Snare Analog 91 Snare FX Noise
41 F 1 Tom SFX 1 Tom Hard 1 Tom Analog 90 1 Tom Analog 80 1
42 F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed SE 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 81 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 81 2 Hi-Hat Closed Lo-fi 2
43 G 1 Tom SFX 2 Tom Hard 2 Tom Analog 90 2 Tom Analog 80 2
44 G# 1 Hi-Hat Open SE 1 2 Hi-Hat Closed 90 2 Hi-Hat Closed 90 2 Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi 2
45 A 1 Tom SFX 3 Tom Hard 3 Tom Analog 90 3 Tom Analog 80 3
46 A# 1 Hi-Hat Open SE 1 2 Hi-Hat Open 90 2 Hi-Hat Open 90 2 Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi 2
47 B 1 Tom SFX 4 Tom Hard 4 Tom Analog 90 4 Tom Analog 80 4
48 C 2 Tom SFX 5 Tom Hard 5 Tom Analog 90 5 Tom Analog 80 5
49 C# 2 Cymbal Synth 1 Crash Cymbal 90 Crash Cymbal 90 Crash Analog 80
50 D 2 Tom SFX 6 Tom Hard 6 Tom Analog 90 6 Tom Analog 80 6
52 E 2 Reverse Synth Cymbal Gong Crash Cymbal Slow Attack Crash Cymbal Slow Attack
53 F 2 Metal Noise 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup
54 F# 2 Tambourine Analog Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Analog
55 G 2 Gunshot Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal
56 G# 2 Cowbell Analog 70 Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Analog 80
57 A 2 Bomb Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal 90
58 A# 2 Vibraslap Analog Cowbell Analog 80 Cowbell Analog 80 Vibraslap Synth
59 B 2 Cymbal Synth 1 Ride Cymbal Heavy Cymbal Synth 1 Cymbal Synth 1
60 C 3 Bongo Analog H Bongo H Bongo RX5 H Bongo Analog H
61 C# 3 Bongo Analog L Bongo L Bongo RX5 L Bongo Analog L
62 D 3 Conga Analog H Djembe Mute Conga H Mute Conga Analog H
63 D# 3 Conga Analog M Djembe Edge Conga H Open Conga Analog M
64 E 3 Conga Analog L Djembe Open Conga L Conga Analog L
65 F 3 Zoom H Tabla High Timbale H Metal Analog H
66 F# 3 Zoom L Tabla Open Timbale L Metal Analog L
Appendix
67 G 3 Glass Noise H Udu Finger Agogo RX5 H Glass Noise H
68 G# 3 Glass Noise L Udu High Agogo RX5 L Glass Noise L
69 A 3 Hand Clap Synth Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa
70 A# 3 Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Analog 80
73 C# 4 Scratch 2 Guitar Power Chord L Scratch 2 Guiro Analog DM H
74 D 4 Scratch Stop 1 Guitar Power Chord H Scratch Stop 1 Guiro Analog DM L
75 D# 4 Hi Q 1 H Hi Q 1 H Hi Q 1 H Hi Q 1 H
76 E 4 Hi Q 1 L Hi Q 1 L Hi Q 1 L Hi Q 1 L
77 F 4 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2
78 F# 4 Scratch 1 H Digeridoo 1 Scratch 1 H Scratch 1 H
79 G 4 Scratch 1 L Digeridoo 2 Scratch 1 L Scratch 1 L
80 G# 4 Hi-Hat Closed SE 3 Digeridoo 3 Triangle Mute 3 Triangle Mute 3
81 A 4 Hi-Hat Open SE 3 Finger Cymbal Triangle Open 3 Triangle Open 3
83 B 4 Vibraslap Synth Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell
84 C 5 Tape Rewind Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree
: No sound.
RS7000 299
6. Drum Voice List
Bank MSB 126 126 126 126

Bank LSB 0 0 0 0
Program 9 10 11 12
Note# Note assign
Ambnt Kit off assign Hard Kit off assign Hous Kit1 off assign Break Kit off
12 C -1 Reverse Hi Q 1 Reverse Snare Wood Reverse Finger Snap Reverse Snare Hip Rim 5
13 C# -1 Reverse Tom Brush Reverse Tom Industrial Reverse Tom RX5 Reverse Tom RX5
14 D -1 Reverse Tom Analog 80 Reverse Tom Analog Distortion Reverse Tom Analog 90 Reverse Tom Soft
15 D# -1 Reverse BD Analog Blip 1 Reverse Ripper Reverse BD Hip Deep Reverse BD Break Deep
16 E -1 Reverse BD Analog 82 Reverse BD Analog Distortion 1 Reverse BD Analog 90 Reverse BD Break Lo-fi 1
17 F -1 Reverse Cymbal Synth 1 Reverse Crash Cymbal 90 Reverse Crash Cymbal 90 Reverse Crash Cymbal Heavy
19 G -1 Reverse Brush Slap Reverse Snare Gate 2 Reverse Snare Hip FX L Reverse Snare Dry Rim
20 G# -1 Reverse Snare Analog 82 Reverse Snare Analog Distortion Reverse Snare Analog 90 Reverse Snare Break Lo-fi 3
21 A -1 Brush Swirl Reverse Noiseburst Reverse Hand Clap Analog 80 Snare Roll Break
22 A# -1 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Heavy Reverse Hi-Hat Open 90 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Break
23 B -1 BD Analog 80 H Ripper BD Hip Deep BD Soft
24 C 0 BD Analog Blip 1 BD Analog Distortion 3 BD Analog 93 BD Break Deep
25 C# 0 Hi Q 2 Snare Wood Finger Snap Snare Hip Rim 5
26 D 0 Brush Slap Snare Gate 1 Snare Analog 95 Snare Break Lo-fi 3
27 D# 0 Hi Q 1 Sword Hand Clap Acoustic Snare FX Noise
28 E 0 Snare Analog 70 Snare Gate 2 Snare Hip FX L Snare Dry Rim
29 F 0 Tom Brush 1 Tom Industrial 1 Tom RX5 1 Tom RX5 1
30 F# 0 Hi-Hat Closed Synth 1 Hi-Hat Closed Heavy 1 Hi-Hat Closed Light 1 Hi-Hat Closed Heavy 1
31 G 0 Tom Brush 2 Tom Industrial 2 Tom RX5 2 Tom RX5 2
32 G# 0 Hi-Hat Closed SE 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Heavy 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Light 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Heavy 1
33 A 0 Tom Brush 3 Tom Industrial 3 Tom RX5 3 Tom RX5 3
34 A# 0 Hi-Hat Open Synth 1 Hi-Hat Open Heavy 1 Hi-Hat Open Light 1 Hi-Hat Open Heavy 1
35 B 0 BD Analog 70 BD Analog Distortion 2 BD Analog 92 BD Break Lo-fi 2
36 C 1 BD Analog 80 BD Analog Distortion 1 BD Analog 90 BD Break Lo-fi 1
37 C# 1 Side Stick Analog 80 Snare Hip Rim 1 Side Stick Analog 90 Snare Hip Rim 2
38 D 1 Snare Analog 82 Snare Analog Distortion Snare Analog 90 Snare Break Lo-fi 3
39 D# 1 Hand Clap Analog 80 Noiseburst Hand Clap Analog 80 Snare Break Rim
40 E 1 Snare Analog 81 Snare Noise Distortion Snare Analog 91 Snare Break Lo-fi 2
41 F 1 Tom Analog 80 1 Tom Analog Distortion 1 Tom Analog 90 1 Tom Soft 1
42 F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 80 2 Hi-Hat Closed 90 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 81 2 Hi-Hat Closed Break 2
43 G 1 Tom Analog 80 2 Tom Analog Distortion 2 Tom Analog 90 2 Tom Soft 2
44 G# 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog 81 2 Hi-Hat Open 90 1 2 Hi-Hat Open 90 1 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Break 1 2
45 A 1 Tom Analog 80 3 Tom Analog Distortion 3 Tom Analog 90 3 Tom Soft 3
46 A# 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 2 Hi-Hat Open 90 2 2 Hi-Hat Open 90 2 2 Hi-Hat Open Break 2
47 B 1 Tom Analog 80 4 Tom Analog Distortion 4 Tom Analog 90 4 Tom Soft 4
48 C 2 Tom Analog 80 5 Tom Analog Distortion 5 Tom Analog 90 5 Tom Soft 5
49 C# 2 Cymbal Synth 1 Crash Cymbal 90 Crash Cymbal 90 Crash Cymbal Heavy
50 D 2 Tom Analog 80 6 Tom Analog Distortion 6 Tom Analog 90 6 Tom Soft 6
51 D# 2 Ride Cymbal 90 Ride Cymbal 90 Ride Cymbal 90 Ride Cymbal Heavy
52 E 2 Crash Cymbal Slow Attack Chinese Cymbal Crash Cymbal Slow Attack Chinese Cymbal
54 F# 2 Tambourine Tambourine Analog Tambourine Tambourine
56 G# 2 Cowbell Analog 80 Cowbell Analog 80 Cowbell Cowbell
58 A# 2 Vibraslap Analog Vibraslap Cowbell Analog 80 Cowbell Analog 80
60 C 3 Bongo H BD & Hi-Hat Open H Bongo H Bongo H
61 C# 3 Bongo L BD & Hi-Hat Open L Bongo L Bongo L
62 D 3 Conga H Mute Metal Noise 2 H Conga H Mute Conga H Mute
63 D# 3 Conga H Open Metal Noise 2 L Conga H Open Conga H Open
64 E 3 Conga L Big Drum Conga L Conga L
65 F 3 Metal Analog H Snare Timber H Timbale H BD & Hi-Hat Open
66 F# 3 Metal Analog L Snare Timber L Timbale L BD & Hi-Hat Open
67 G 3 Glass Noise H Glass Noise H Agogo H Agogo H
68 G# 3 Glass Noise L Glass Noise L Agogo L Agogo L
69 A 3 Cabasa Cold Stab H Cabasa Cabasa
70 A# 3 Maracas Analog 80 Cold Stab L Maracas Maracas
71 B 3 Tweet Stab Hard H Stab Organ H Hit Brass 1
72 C 4 Stream Stab Hard L Stab Organ L Kick & Hit
73 C# 4 Thunder Scratch 2 Stab Giant H Scratch 2
74 D 4 Wind Scratch Stop 1 Stab Giant L Scratch Stop 1
75 D# 4 Claves Analog Hi Q 1 H Claves Claves
76 E 4 Wood Block H Hi Q 1 L Wood Block H Wood Block H
77 F 4 Wood Block L Hi Q 2 Wood Block L Wood Block L
78 F# 4 Tambourine Analog Scratch 1 H Cuica Mute Scratch 1 H
79 G 4 Cowbell Analog 70 Scratch 1 L Cuica Open Scratch 1 L
82 A# 4 Shaker Analog Shaker Analog Shaker Analog Shaker 1
84 C 5 Wind Chime Bell Tree Bell Tree Turntable Noise on
: No sound.
300 RS7000
6. Drum Voice List
Bank MSB 126 126 126 126

Bank LSB 0 0 0 0
Program 13 14 15 16
Note# Note
Jungl Kit off assign D&B Kit off assign Big Kit off assign HipHp Kit off assign
12 C -1 Reverse Snare Hip Rim 5 Reverse Snare Hip Rim 1 Reverse Side Stick Reverse Snare Hip Rim 5
13 C# -1 Reverse Tom Hard Reverse Tom Soft Reverse Tom Hard Reverse Tom Hard
14 D -1 Reverse Tom Soft Reverse Tom Hard Reverse Tom Ambience Reverse Tom Soft
15 D# -1 Reverse BD Analog Loose Reverse BD Hip Deep Reverse BD FX Gate Reverse BD Hip Deep
16 E -1 Reverse BD Jungle 1 Reverse BD D&B 2 Reverse BD Power Gate Reverse BD R&B 1
17 F -1 Reverse Crash Cymbal Heavy Reverse Crash Cymbal Heavy Reverse Crash Cymbal Heavy Reverse Crash Cymbal Heavy
18 F# -1 Reverse Ride Cymbal Heavy Reverse Ride Cymbal Heavy Reverse Ride Cymbal Heavy Reverse Ride Cymbal Light
19 G -1 Reverse Snare Piccolo Rim 2 Reverse Roll Reverse Snare Gate 2 Reverse Snare Hip Rim 3
20 G# -1 Reverse Snare Jungle 1 Reverse Snare D&B 1 Reverse Snare Gate 1 Reverse Snare R&B 1
21 A -1 Snare Roll Break Snare Roll Break Snare Roll Break Snare Roll Break
22 A# -1 Reverse Hi-Hat Reverse Hi-Hat Open Break Reverse Hi-Hat Open Heavy Reverse Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi
23 B -1 BD Analog Loose BD Soft BD Room 2 BD Lo-fi
24 C 0 BD Jungle 2 BD Hip Deep BD FX Gate BD Hip Deep
25 C# 0 Snare Hip Rim 1 Bongo RX5 H Side Stick Snare Hip Rim 4
26 D 0 Snare Jungle 3 Snare R&B 2 Snare Dry Snare Hip Rim 2
27 D# 0 Hand Clap Synth Snare Timber Hand Clap Acoustic Snare Timber
28 E 0 Snare Piccolo Rim 1 Snare D&B 3 Snare Gate 2 Snare Hip Rim 3
29 F 0 Tom Hard 1 Tom Soft 1 Tom Hard 1 Tom Hard 1
30 F# 0 Hi-Hat Closed Break 1 Hi-Hat Closed Light 1 Hi-Hat Closed Light 1 Hi-Hat Closed Lo-fi 1
31 G 0 Tom Hard 2 Tom Soft 2 Tom Hard 2 Tom Hard 2
32 G# 0 Hi-Hat Pedal Break 1 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Light 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Light 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Break 1 1
33 A 0 Tom Hard 3 Tom Soft 3 Tom Hard 3 Tom Hard 3
34 A# 0 Hi-Hat Open Break 1 Hi-Hat Open Light 1 Hi-Hat Open Light 1 Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi 1
35 B 0 BD Jungle 3 BD D&B 1 BD Room 3 BD R&B 2
36 C 1 BD Jungle 1 BD D&B 2 BD Power Gate BD R&B 1
37 C# 1 Snare Hip Rim 5 Snare Hip Rim 1 Snare Hip Rim 1 Snare Hip Rim 5
38 D 1 Snare Jungle 1 Snare D&B 1 Snare Gate 1 Snare R&B 1
39 D# 1 Snare Clap Noiseburst Hand Clap Large Snare Hip Gate
40 E 1 Snare Jungle 2 Snare D&B 2 Snare Ambience Snare R&B Rim
41 F 1 Tom Soft 1 Tom Hard 1 Tom Ambience 1 Tom Soft 1
42 F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed Light 2 Hi-Hat Closed Tight 2 Hi-Hat Closed Heavy 2 Hi-Hat Closed R&B 2
43 G 1 Tom Soft 2 Tom Hard 2 Tom Ambience 2 Tom Soft 2
44 G# 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Light 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Break 2 2 Hi-Hat Closed Heavy 2 Hi-Hat Pedal R&B 2
45 A 1 Tom Soft 3 Tom Hard 3 Tom Ambience 3 Tom Soft 3
46 A# 1 Hi-Hat Open Light 2 Hi-Hat Open Break 2 Hi-Hat Open Heavy 2 Hi-Hat Open R&B 2
47 B 1 Tom Soft 4 Tom Hard 4 Tom Ambience 4 Tom Soft 4
48 C 2 Tom Soft 5 Tom Hard 5 Tom Ambience 5 Tom Soft 5
49 C# 2 Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy
50 D 2 Tom Soft 6 Tom Hard 6 Tom Ambience 6 Tom Soft 6
51 D# 2 Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Light
52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal
54 F# 2 Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine
56 G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell
58 A# 2 Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Cowbell Analog 80
59 B 2 Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Light Ride Cymbal Heavy
60 C 3 Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H
61 C# 3 Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L
62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute
63 D# 3 Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open
64 E 3 Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L
65 F 3 Tabla High Snare D&B 4 BD & Hi-Hat Open H BD & Hi-Hat Open H
66 F# 3 Tabla Open Reverse Hi-Hat BD & Hi-Hat Open L BD & Hi-Hat Open L
Appendix
67 G 3 Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H
68 G# 3 Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L
70 A# 3 Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas
71 B 3 Samba Whistle H Sonar H Samba Whistle H Stab Giant H
72 C 4 Samba Whistle L Sonar L Samba Whistle L Stab Giant L
73 C# 4 Guiro Short Vox Bell H Scratch 2 Scratch 2
74 D 4 Guiro Long Vox Bell L Scratch Stop 1 Scratch Stop 1
75 D# 4 Claves Claves Claves Claves
76 E 4 Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Noiseburst
77 F 4 Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Car Crash
78 F# 4 Cuica Mute 4 Cuica Mute 4 Scratch 1 H Scratch 1 H
79 G 4 Cuica Open 4 Cuica Open 4 Scratch 1 L Scratch 1 L
82 A# 4 Shaker 1 Shaker 1 Shaker 1 Shaker 1
84 C 5 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Turntable Noise on
: No sound.
RS7000 301
6. Drum Voice List
Bank MSB 126 126 126 126

Bank LSB 0 0 0 0
Program 17 18 19 20
Note# Note
Aco. Kit off assign Jazz Kit off assign Brush Kit off assign Percs Kit off assign
12 C -1 Reverse Side Stick Reverse Side Stick Reverse Snare Hip Rim 5 Reverse Log Drum 2
13 C# -1 Reverse Tom Soft Reverse Tom Brush Reverse Tom Soft Reverse Djembe Open
14 D -1 Reverse Tom Dry Reverse Tom Soft Reverse Tom Brush Reverse Tabla Open
15 D# -1 Reverse BD Dry Hard Reverse BD Room 2 Reverse BD Room 2 Reverse Surdo Open
16 E -1 Reverse BD Room 2 Reverse BD Dry Hard Reverse BD Dry Hard Digeridoo 3 Short
17 F -1 Reverse Crash Cymbal Light Reverse Crash Cymbal Light Reverse Crash Cymbal Light Digeridoo 3 Long
18 F# -1 Reverse Ride Cymbal Heavy Reverse Cymbal Loop Reverse Ride Cymbal Heavy Gong 1
19 G -1 Reverse Snare Piccolo Rim 2 Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Short Digeridoo 2
20 G# -1 Reverse Snare Mid Room Reverse Snare Piccolo 1 Reverse Brush Slap Side Stick
21 A -1 Snare Roll Snare Roll Brush Swirl Long Digeridoo 1
22 A# -1 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Heavy Reverse Hi-Hat Open Light Reverse Hi-Hat Open Light Sticks
23 B -1 BD Dry BD Soft BD Soft Big Drum
24 C 0 BD Dry Hard BD Room 2 BD Room 2 Surdo Open 5
25 C# 0 Side Stick Finger Snap Snare Hip Rim 4 Castanet
26 D 0 Snare Piccolo 1 Brush Slap Brush Slap Soft Surdo Mute 5
27 D# 0 Hand Clap Acoustic Hand Clap Acoustic Hand Clap Acoustic Hand Clap Large
28 E 0 Snare Piccolo Rim 1 Brush Tap Brush Tap Soft Djembe Mute
29 F 0 Tom Soft 1 Tom Brush 1 Tom Soft 1 Djembe Open L
30 F# 0 Hi-Hat Closed Light 1 Hi-Hat Closed Heavy 1 Hi-Hat Closed Heavy 1 Triangle Mute 1
31 G 0 Tom Soft 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Soft 2 Djembe Open H
32 G# 0 Hi-Hat Pedal Light 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Heavy 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Heavy 1 Triangle Open Short 1
33 A 0 Tom Soft 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Soft 3 Djembe Edge
34 A# 0 Hi-Hat Open Light 1 Hi-Hat Open Heavy 1 Hi-Hat Open Heavy 1 Triangle Open 1
35 B 0 BD Room 1 BD Dry BD Dry Taiko Drum
36 C 1 BD Room 2 BD Dry Hard BD Dry Hard Feet 1
37 C# 1 Snare Hip Rim 1 Side Stick Snare Hip Rim 5 Log Drum 2
38 D 1 Snare Mid Room Snare Piccolo 1 Brush Slap Shekere 3
39 D# 1 Hand Clap Large Hand Clap Small Hand Clap Small Shekere 2
40 E 1 Snare Break Rim Snare Piccolo Rim 1 Brush Tap Shekere 1
41 F 1 Tom Dry 1 Tom Soft 1 Tom Brush 1 Tabla Open
42 F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed Heavy 2 Hi-Hat Closed Light 2 Hi-Hat Closed Light Brush 2 Maracas Analog 80
43 G 1 Tom Dry 2 Tom Soft 2 Tom Brush 2 Tabla Mute
44 G# 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Heavy 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Light 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Light 2 Shaker Analog
45 A 1 Tom Dry 3 Tom Soft 3 Tom Brush 3 Tabla High
46 A# 1 Hi-Hat Open Heavy 2 Hi-Hat Open Light 2 Hi-Hat Open Light Brush 2 Cabasa
47 B 1 Tom Dry 4 Tom Soft 4 Tom Brush 4 Udu Low
48 C 2 Tom Dry 5 Tom Soft 5 Tom Brush 5 Udu High
49 C# 2 Crash Cymbal Light Crash Cymbal Light Crash Cymbal Light Brush Finger Cymbal 1
50 D 2 Tom Dry 6 Tom Soft 6 Tom Brush 6 Udu Finger
51 D# 2 Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Heavy Brush Berimbau 2 2
52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Brush Gong 2
53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Brush Berimbau 1 2
55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Brush Gong 3
57 A 2 Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy Brush Wind Chime
58 A# 2 Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap
59 B 2 Ride Cymbal Light Ride Cymbal Light Ride Cymbal Light Brush Finger Cymbal 2
65 F 3 Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H
66 F# 3 Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L
71 B 3 Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle H
72 C 4 Samba Whistle L Samba Whistle L Samba Whistle L Samba Whistle L
73 C# 4 Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short
74 D 4 Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long
76 E 4 Wood Block H Wood Block Wood Block H Wood Block H
77 F 4 Wood Block L Wood Block Wood Block L Wood Block L
78 F# 4 Cuica Mute 4 Cuica Mute 4 Cuica Mute 4 Cuica Mute 4
79 G 4 Cuica Open 4 Cuica Open 4 Cuica Open 4 Cuica Open 4
: No sound.
302 RS7000
6. Drum Voice List
Bank MSB 126 126 126 126

Bank LSB 0 0 0 0
Program 47 48 49 50
Note# Note
RX Kit off assign Elect Kit off assign Hous Kit2 off assign Hip Kit2 off assign
12 C -1 Reverse Side Stick RX5 Reverse Hi Blip Reverse Side Stick Analog 90 Reverse Side Stick RX5
13 C# -1 Reverse Tom Soft Reverse Tom Synth 1 Reverse Tom Analog 90 Reverse BD Analog 83
14 D -1 Reverse Tom RX5 Reverse Tom SFX Reverse Snare Synth 2 Reverse Tom Soft
15 D# -1 Reverse BD Room 1 Reverse BD Power Gate Reverse Low Noise Turntable Noise
16 E -1 Reverse BD RX5 1 Reverse BD Analog 82 Reverse BD Analog 92 Reverse BD Hip Deep
17 F -1 Reverse Crash Cymbal Light Reverse Crash Cymbal 90 Reverse Synth Cymbal Reverse Crash Cymbal Light
18 F# -1 Reverse Ride Cymbal Heavy Reverse Ride Cymbal 90 Reverse Cymbal Loop Reverse Ride Cymbal Heavy
19 G -1 Reverse Snare Mid Room Reverse Snare Hip Rim 3 Reverse Snare Analog 91 Reverse Roll
20 G# -1 Reverse Snare RX5 1 Reverse Snare Analog 82 Reverse Snare Analog DM Reverse Snare Break Lo-fi 3
21 A -1 Snare Roll Reverse Hand Clap Analog 80 Snare Roll FX Snare Roll Break
22 A# -1 Reverse Hi-Hat Open RX5 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 Reverse Hi-Hat Closed 90 Reverse Hi-Hat Pedal Break 1
23 B -1 BD Soft BD Power Gate BD Analog 91 BD Analog 81
24 C 0 BD Room 1 BD RX5 1 BD Analog 92 BD Analog 83
25 C# 0 Snare Hip Rim 4 Hi Blip Side Stick Analog 80 Side Stick Analog 80
26 D 0 Snare Dry Snare Analog 95 Snare Analog DM Snare Analog 83
27 D# 0 Hand Clap Small Hand Clap RX5 Hand Clap Analog 80 Hand Clap Analog 80
28 E 0 Snare Mid Room Snare Hip Rim 3 Snare Analog 91 Snare Synth 2
29 F 0 Tom Soft 1 Tom Synth 1 1 Tom Analog 90 1 Tom Synth 2 1
30 F# 0 Hi-Hat Half RX7 1 Hi-Hat Closed Synth 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 80 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tek 1
31 G 0 Tom Soft 2 Tom Synth 1 2 Tom Analog 90 2 Tom Synth 2 2
32 G# 0 Hi-Hat Pedal Light 1 Hi-Hat Open Synth 1 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog DM 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 1
33 A 0 Tom Soft 3 Tom Synth 1 3 Tom Analog 90 3 Tom Synth 2 3
34 A# 0 Hi-Hat Open Light 1 Hi-Hat Open Synth 2 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 1 Hi-Hat Open Tek 1
35 B 0 BD RX5 2 BD Analog Blip 1 BD Analog 90 BD Break Deep
36 C 1 BD RX5 1 BD Analog 81 BD Analog Hard 2 BD Hip Deep
37 C# 1 Side Stick RX5 Side Stick Analog 80 Side Stick Analog 90 Side Stick RX5
38 D 1 Snare RX5 1 Snare Analog 82 Snare Wood Snare Analog 93
39 D# 1 Hand Clap RX5 Hand Clap Analog 80 Noiseburst Hand Clap Small
40 E 1 Snare RX5 2 Hand Clap Electro Zap 1 Snare Break Lo-fi 3
41 F 1 Tom RX5 1 Tom SFX 1 Tom Electro 2 1 Tom Soft 1
42 F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed RX5 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 80 2 Hi-Hat Closed 90 2 Hi-Hat Closed Break 2
43 G 1 Tom RX5 2 Tom SFX 2 Tom Electro 2 2 Tom Soft 2
44 G# 1 Hi-Hat Open RX5 1 2 Hi-Hat Open Analog 81 2 Hi-Hat Open 90 1 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Break 1 2
45 A 1 Tom RX5 3 Tom SFX 3 Tom Electro 2 3 Tom Soft 3
46 A# 1 Hi-Hat Open RX5 2 2 Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 2 Hi-Hat Open 90 2 2 Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi 2
47 B 1 Tom RX5 4 Tom SFX 4 Tom Electro 2 4 Tom Soft 4
48 C 2 Tom RX5 5 Tom SFX 5 Tom Electro 2 5 Tom Soft 5
49 C# 2 Crash Cymbal Light Crash Cymbal 90 Crash Cymbal 90 Crash Cymbal Heavy
50 D 2 Tom RX5 6 Tom SFX 6 Tom Electro 2 6 Tom Soft 6
51 D# 2 Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal 90 Ride Cymbal 90 Ride Cymbal Heavy
52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Crash Cymbal Slow Attack Cymbal Synth 1 Chinese Cymbal
53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Cymbal Synth 1 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup
54 F# 2 Tambourine RX5 Tambourine SFX Tambourine Tambourine RX5
55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Crash Analog 80 Splash Cymbal
56 G# 2 Cowbell RX11 Side Stick FX Cowbell Cowbell RX11
57 A 2 Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Light Crash Cymbal Light
58 A# 2 Vibraslap Cowbell Analog 80 Cowbell Analog 80 Cowbell Analog 80
59 B 2 Ride Cymbal Light Cymbal Synth 1 Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Heavy
60 C 3 Bongo RX5 H Bongo Analog H Bongo H Bongo H
61 C# 3 Bongo RX5 L Bongo Analog L Bongo L Bongo L
62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H Conga H Mute Conga H Mute
63 D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M Conga H Open Conga H Open
64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L Conga L Conga L
65 F 3 Timbale H Noise FX Tom Synth 1 H Hit Brass 2
66 F# 3 Timbale L Telephone FX Tom Synth 1 L Hit Guitar
Appendix
67 G 3 Agogo RX5 H Metal Noise 1 H Synth Click Agogo H
68 G# 3 Agogo RX5 L Metal Noise 1 L Side Stick FX Agogo L
69 A 3 Shaker RX11 Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi Cabasa Cabasa
71 B 3 Samba Whistle H Zap 1 Vox Drum 1 L Hit EP L
72 C 4 Samba Whistle L Zap 2 Vox Drum 1 H Hit EP H
73 C# 4 Guiro Short Zoom Tambourine Analog Scratch Spin
74 D 4 Guiro Long Reverse Synth Cymbal Guiro Analog DM Scratch Stop 2
75 D# 4 Claves Hi Q 1 H Claves Analog Claves Analog
76 E 4 Wood Block H Hi Q 1 L Tambourine RX5 Door Squeak
77 F 4 Wood Block L Hi Q 2 Cowbell RX11 Hit Brass 3
78 F# 4 Cuica Mute 4 Hit Hammer Shaker RX11 Scratch BD F
79 G 4 Cuica Open 4 Hit Orchestra VPercussion Scratch BD B
80 G# 4 Triangle Mute 3 Hi-Hat Closed SE 3 Triangle Mute 3 Triangle Mute 3
81 A 4 Triangle Open 3 Hi-Hat Open SE 3 Triangle Open 3 Triangle Open 3
82 A# 4 Shaker 1 Shaker Analog Shaker Analog Shaker Analog
83 B 4 Jingle Bell FX Metal Jingle Bell Tambourine Low
84 C 5 Bell Tree Wind Chime FX Wind Chime FX Wind Chime
: No sound.
RS7000 303
6. Drum Voice List
Bank MSB 126 126 126 127

Bank LSB 0 0 0 0
Program 51 52 53 1
Note# Note
R&B Kit off assign Smoth Kit off assign Human Kit off assign GM-Stand Kit off assign
12 C -1 Reverse Snare Hip Rim 6 Reverse Side Stick Electro Reverse Vox Go!
13 C# -1 Reverse Tom Synth 1 Reverse Tom Analog 80 Reverse Vox Buh!
14 D -1 Reverse BD Analog 83 Reverse Tom Soft Reverse BD Human
15 D# -1 Turntable Noise Turntable Noise Reverse Vox Muh!
16 E -1 Reverse BD Analog 82 Reverse BD Analog 90 Reverse Vox Buh!
17 F -1 Udu FX Reverse Crash Cymbal Light Reverse Noiseburst
18 F# -1 Reverse Cymbal Loop Car Crash Reverse Vox Whoa!
19 G -1 Reverse Snare FX Gate Reverse Snare Analog 95 Reverse Vox Hit
20 G# -1 Reverse Snare Hip Rim 3 Reverse Snare Analog 94 Reverse Vox Buh!
21 A -1 Snare Roll Break Snare Roll Break Reverse Snare Hip FX H
22 A# -1 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Tek Reverse Hi-Hat Pedal Light 2 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi
23 B -1 BD Analog 83 BD Analog 80 Vox Muh! Seq Click L
24 C 0 BD Analog 82 BD Analog 70 L BD Human Seq Click H
25 C# 0 Finger Snap Finger Snap Scratch Vox 1 F Brush Tap
26 D 0 Side Stick Electro Snare Analog 81 Vox Hit Brush Swirl
27 D# 0 Hand Clap Synth Hand Clap Analog 80 Scratch Vox 1 B Brush Slap
28 E 0 Snare Analog Gate Snare Analog 80 Vox Tah! Brush Tap Swirl
29 F 0 Tom Synth 1 1 Tom Analog 80 1 Vox Buh! 1 Snare Roll
30 F# 0 Hi-Hat Closed Tek 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 81 1 Scratch Vox 2 F 1 Castanet
31 G 0 Tom Synth 1 2 Tom Analog 80 2 Vox Buh! 2 Snare Piccolo 1
32 G# 0 Hi-Hat Open Tek 1 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog DM 1 Scratch Vox 2 B 1 Sticks
33 A 0 Tom Synth 1 3 Tom Analog 80 3 Vox Buh! 3 BD Soft
34 A# 0 Hi-Hat Open Tek 2 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog 81 1 Hi-Hat Open Tek 1 Snare Mid Rim
35 B 0 BD Soft BD Analog 70 BD Human Deep BD Dry
36 C 1 BD Analog Rubber 1 BD Analog 90 Vox Buh! BD Dry Hard
37 C# 1 Snare Hip Rim 7 Side Stick Electro Vox Go! Side Stick
38 D 1 Snare Hip Rim 3 Snare Analog 94 Vox Buh! Snare Mid Room
39 D# 1 Hand Clap Small Hand Clap Small Snare Hip FX H Hand Clap Small
40 E 1 Snare FX Gate Snare Analog 95 Snare Hip Rezo Snare Piccolo Rim 1
41 F 1 Tom Analog 81 1 Tom Soft 1 Tom Human 1 Tom Dry 1
42 F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 80 2 Hi-Hat Closed Light 2 Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi 2 Hi-Hat Closed Light 1
43 G 1 Tom Analog 81 2 Tom Soft 2 Tom Human 2 Tom Dry 2
44 G# 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 70 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Light 2 Scratch Vox 2 B 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Light 1
45 A 1 Tom Analog 81 3 Tom Soft 3 Tom Human 3 Tom Dry 3
46 A# 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 2 Hi-Hat Open Light 2 Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi 2 Hi-Hat Open Light 1
47 B 1 Tom Analog 81 4 Tom Soft 4 Tom Human 4 Tom Dry 4
48 C 2 Tom Analog 81 5 Tom Soft 5 Tom Human 5 Tom Dry 5
49 C# 2 Crash Cymbal Light Crash Cymbal Heavy Noiseburst Crash Cymbal Light
50 D 2 Tom Analog 81 6 Tom Soft 6 Tom Human 6 Tom Dry 6
51 D# 2 Ride Cymbal 90 Ride Cymbal Heavy Vox Whoa! Ride Cymbal Heavy
52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Vox Hit Chinese Cymbal
53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Vox Go! Ride Cymbal Cup
54 F# 2 Tambourine Tambourine Scratch SD B Tambourine
55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Vox Ahhh! Splash Cymbal
56 G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Vox Drum 1 Cowbell
57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 90 Crash Cymbal Light Cymbal Synth 2 Crash Cymbal Heavy
58 A# 2 Cowbell Analog 80 Cowbell Analog 80 Vox Drum 2 Vibraslap
59 B 2 Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal 90 Vocd Ahh Ride Cymbal Light
60 C 3 Bongo H Bongo Analog H Bongo H Bongo H
61 C# 3 Bongo L Bongo Analog L Bongo L Bongo L
65 F 3 Synth Bubble H Scratch Vox 1 F Vox Yo! Timbale H
66 F# 3 Synth Bubble L Scratch Vox 1 B Vox Huh! Timbale L
67 G 3 Agogo H Metal Analog H Agogo H Agogo H
68 G# 3 Agogo L Metal Analog L Agogo L Agogo L
69 A 3 Shaker Analog Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa
71 B 3 Vox Drum 1 H Hit EP L Reverse Vox Whoa! Samba Whistle H
72 C 4 Vox Drum 1 L Hit EP H Reverse Vox Muh! Samba Whistle L
73 C# 4 Hi Q 1 Vox Pad L Scratch 2 Guiro Short
74 D 4 Hi Q 2 Vox Pad H Scratch Stop 1 Guiro Long
75 D# 4 Claves Analog Claves Analog Reverse Scratch Stop 1 Claves
76 E 4 Vibraslap Synth Hand Clap Electro Scratch 4 B Wood Block H
77 F 4 Scratch Spin Scratch Stop 2 Reverse Scratch Stop 2 Wood Block L
78 F# 4 Scratch 3 B Finger Cymbal Scratch 1 H Cuica Mute
79 G 4 Scratch 3 F Vibraslap Scratch 1 L Cuica Open
83 B 4 Tambourine Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell
84 C 5 Wind Chime FX Wind Chime Turntable Noise Bell Tree
: No sound.
304 RS7000
6. Drum Voice List
Note on/off type

Bank MSB 126 126 126 126
Bank LSB 0 0 0 0
Program 27 28 29 30
Kit Type Note on/off Note on/off Note on/off Note on/off
Note# Note
AnlgKt1N off assign AnlgKt2N off assign RhBoxKtN off assign SynthKtN off assign
12 C -1 Reverse Side Stick Analog 90 Reverse Side Stick Analog 80 Reverse Side Stick Analog 70 Reverse Side Stick Electro
13 C# -1 Reverse Tom Analog Distortion Reverse Tom Analog 80 H Reverse Tom Analog 80 H Reverse Tom Synth 1
14 D -1 Reverse Tom Analog 90 Reverse Tom Analog 80 L Reverse Tom Analog 80 L Reverse Tom Electro
15 D# -1 Reverse BD Analog Rubber 2 Reverse BD Analog 83 Reverse BD Analog 81 Reverse BD FX Gate
16 E -1 Reverse BD Analog 90 Reverse BD Analog 82 Reverse BD Analog 70 Reverse BD Electro
17 F -1 Reverse Crash Cymbal 90 Reverse Crash Analog 80 Reverse Cymbal Synth 1 Reverse Cymbal Synth 1
18 F# -1 Reverse Ride Cymbal 90 Reverse Ride Cymbal 90 Cymbal Synth 2 Reverse Ride Cymbal 90
19 G -1 Reverse Snare Analog Gate Reverse Snare Analog 82 Reverse Snare FM Reverse Snare Gate 1
20 G# -1 Reverse Snare Analog 90 Reverse Snare Analog 81 Reverse Snare Analog 70 Reverse Snare Synth 1
21 A -1 Reverse Hand Clap Analog 90 Reverse Hand Clap Analog 80 Reverse Snare Clap Reverse Hand Clap Electro
22 A# -1 Reverse Hi-Hat Open 90 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Analog 81 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Analog 70 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Synth
23 B -1 BD Analog Tight BD Analog 83 BD Analog 80 BD FX Gate
24 C 0 BD Analog Rubber 2 BD Analog 80 Long BD Analog 80 Long BD Analog Blip 1
25 C# 0 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Synth Click
26 D 0 Snare Analog 94 Snare Analog 83 Snare FM Snare Electro
27 D# 0 Hand Clap Analog 80 Snare Clap Hand Clap Analog 80 Hand Clap Electro
28 E 0 Snare Analog Gate Snare Analog 82 Side Stick FM Snare Gate 1
29 F 0 Tom Analog Distortion 1 Tom Analog 80 H1 Tom Analog 80 H1 Tom Synth 1 1
30 F# 0 Hi-Hat Closed 90 H Hi-Hat Closed Analog 80 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog DM Hi-Hat Closed SE
31 G 0 Tom Analog Distortion 2 Tom Analog 80 H2 Tom Analog 80 H2 Tom Synth 1 2
32 G# 0 Hi-Hat Open 90 H1 Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 2 Hi-Hat Open Analog DM 1 Hi-Hat Open SE 1
33 A 0 Tom Analog Distortion 3 Tom Analog 80 H3 Tom Analog 80 H3 Tom Synth 1 3
34 A# 0 Hi-Hat Open 90 H2 Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 Hi-Hat Open Analog DM 2 Hi-Hat Open SE 1
35 B 0 BD Analog 91 BD Analog 82 BD Analog 70 L BD Electro
36 C 1 BD Analog 90 BD Analog 80 BD Analog 70 BD Synth 1
37 C# 1 Side Stick Analog 90 Side Stick Analog 80 Side Stick Analog 70 Side Stick Electro
38 D 1 Snare Analog 90 Snare Analog 81 Snare Analog 70 Snare Synth 1
39 D# 1 Hand Clap Analog 90 Hand Clap Analog 80 Snare Clap Hand Clap Synth
40 E 1 Snare Analog 91 Snare Analog 80 Snare Analog DM Snare Synth 2
41 F 1 Tom Analog 90 1 Tom Analog 80 1 Tom Analog 80 1 Tom Electro 1 1
42 F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed 90 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 81 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 70 Hi-Hat Closed Synth
43 G 1 Tom Analog 90 2 Tom Analog 80 2 Tom Analog 80 2 Tom Electro 1 2
44 G# 1 Hi-Hat Open 90 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog 81 2 Hi-Hat Open Analog 70 1 Hi-Hat Open Synth 1
45 A 1 Tom Analog 90 3 Tom Analog 80 3 Tom Analog 80 3 Tom Electro 1 3
46 A# 1 Hi-Hat Open 90 2 Hi-Hat Open Analog 81 Hi-Hat Open Analog 70 2 Hi-Hat Open Synth 1
47 B 1 Tom Analog 90 4 Tom Analog 80 4 Tom Analog 80 4 Tom Electro 1 4
48 C 2 Tom Analog 90 5 Tom Analog 80 5 Tom Analog 80 5 Tom Electro 1 5
49 C# 2 Crash Cymbal 90 Crash Analog 80 Cymbal Synth 1 Cymbal Synth 1
50 D 2 Tom Analog 90 6 Tom Analog 80 6 Tom Analog 80 6 Tom Electro 1 6
52 E 2 Crash Cymbal Slow Attack Crash Cymbal Slow Attack Cymbal Synth 2 Cymbal Synth 3
54 F# 2 Tambourine RX5 Tambourine Analog Tambourine Analog Tambourine Analog
56 G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog 80 Cowbell Analog 70 Cowbell Analog 70
58 A# 2 Cowbell Analog 80 Vibraslap Synth Vibraslap Analog Vibraslap Synth
60 C 3 Bongo RX5 H Bongo Analog H Bongo Analog H Bongo Analog H
61 C# 3 Bongo RX5 L Bongo Analog L Bongo Analog L Bongo Analog L
62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H Conga Analog H Conga Analog H
63 D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M Conga Analog M Conga Analog M
64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L Conga Analog L Conga Analog L
65 F 3 Timbale H Metal Analog H Metal Analog H Metal Analog H
66 F# 3 Timbale L Metal Analog L Metal Analog L Metal Analog L
Appendix
67 G 3 Agogo RX5 H Glass Noise H Glass Noise H Glass Noise H
68 G# 3 Agogo RX5 L Glass Noise L Glass Noise L Glass Noise L
70 A# 3 Maracas Maracas Analog 80 Maracas Analog 70 Maracas Analog 80
73 C# 4 Scratch 2 Guiro Analog DM H Guiro Analog 70 Guiro Analog DM H
74 D 4 Scratch Stop 1 Guiro Analog DM L Guiro Analog DM Guiro Analog DM L
75 D# 4 Hi Q 1 H Claves Analog Claves Analog Hi Q 1 H
76 E 4 Hi Q 1 L Hi Q 1 Hi Q 1 Hi Q 1 L
77 F 4 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2
78 F# 4 Scratch 1 H Scratch 1 Scratch 1 H Scratch 1 H
79 G 4 Scratch 1 L Scratch 1 Scratch 1 L Scratch 1 L
80 G# 4 Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute
81 A 4 Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open

RS7000 305
6. Drum Voice List
Bank MSB 126 126 126 126

Bank LSB 0 0 0 0
Program 31 32 33 34
Note# Note
SEKitN off assign PsychKtN off assign AcidKitN off assign TeknoKtN off assign
12 C -1 Reverse Side Stick FX Reverse Side Stick Analog 90 Reverse Side Stick Reverse Side Stick Analog 80
13 C# -1 Reverse BD Synth 2 Reverse Tom Synth 1 Reverse Tom Analog 80 Reverse Tom Analog 90
14 D -1 Reverse Tom SFX Reverse Tom Hard Reverse Tom Analog 90 Reverse Tom Analog 80
15 D# -1 Reverse Big Drum Reverse BD Analog 90 Reverse BD RX5 2 Reverse BD Analog Distortion 4
16 E -1 Reverse BD Hammer Reverse BD Analog Hard 2 Reverse BD Analog 92 Reverse BD Analog Rubber 1
17 F -1 Reverse Cymbal Synth 1 Reverse Crash Cymbal 90 Reverse Crash Cymbal 90 Reverse Crash Analog 80
19 G -1 Reverse Metal Noise 2 Reverse Snare Piccolo Rim 1 Reverse Snare Jungle 3 Reverse Snare Analog 95
20 G# -1 Reverse Snare Hammer Reverse Snare Analog 91 Reverse Snare Analog 93 Reverse Snare Break Lo-fi 3
21 A -1 Reverse FX Metal Snare Roll Reverse Hand Clap Small Reverse Hand Clap Synth
22 A# -1 Reverse Hi-Hat Open SE Reverse Hi-Hat Open Heavy Reverse Hi-Hat Open RX5 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Tek
23 B -1 Big Drum BD Analog Blip 2 BD Analog 91 BD Analog Distortion 4
24 C 0 Punch BD Analog 90 BD RX5 2 BD Analog Deep
25 C# 0 Side Stick FX Log Drum 3 Side Stick Side Stick Analog 90
26 D 0 Metal Noise 2 Snare Mid Rim Snare Jungle 3 Snare Analog 95
27 D# 0 Hand Clap Synth Snare Ambience Hand Clap Small Hand Clap Analog 80
28 E 0 Snare Synth 3 Snare Piccolo Rim 2 Snare Analog 80 Snare Analog 92
29 F 0 Tom Synth 3 1 Tom Synth 1 1 Tom Analog 80 1 Tom Analog 90 1
30 F# 0 Hi-Hat Closed Synth Hi-Hat Closed Heavy 1 Hi-Hat Closed RX5 Hi-Hat Closed Tek
31 G 0 Tom Synth 3 2 Tom Synth 1 2 Tom Analog 80 2 Tom Analog 90 2
32 G# 0 Hi-Hat Open Synth 1 Hi-Hat Closed Heavy 2 Hi-Hat Open RX5 1 Hi-Hat Open Tek 1
33 A 0 Tom Synth 3 3 Tom Synth 1 3 Tom Analog 80 3 Tom Analog 90 3
34 A# 0 Hi-Hat Open Synth 1 Hi-Hat Open Heavy Hi-Hat Open RX5 2 Hi-Hat Open Tek 2
35 B 0 Door Slam BD Analog Blip 1 BD Analog 80 BD Analog Loose
36 C 1 BD Hammer BD Analog Hard 2 BD Analog 92 BD Analog Rubber 1
37 C# 1 FX Metal Side Stick Analog 90 Side Stick Analog 90 Side Stick Analog 80
38 D 1 Snare Hammer Snare Analog 91 Snare Analog 93 Snare Break Lo-fi 3
39 D# 1 Metal Noise 1 Hand Clap Analog 80 Hand Clap Analog 80 Hand Clap Synth
40 E 1 Snare Synth 4 Snare Analog Gate Snare Analog 91 Snare FX Noise
41 F 1 Tom SFX 1 Tom Hard 1 Tom Analog 90 1 Tom Analog 80 1
42 F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed SE Hi-Hat Closed Analog 81 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 81 Hi-Hat Closed Lo-fi
43 G 1 Tom SFX 2 Tom Hard 2 Tom Analog 90 2 Tom Analog 80 2
44 G# 1 Hi-Hat Open SE 1 Hi-Hat Closed 90 Hi-Hat Closed 90 Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi
45 A 1 Tom SFX 3 Tom Hard 3 Tom Analog 90 3 Tom Analog 80 3
46 A# 1 Hi-Hat Open SE 1 Hi-Hat Open 90 Hi-Hat Open 90 Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi
47 B 1 Tom SFX 4 Tom Hard 4 Tom Analog 90 4 Tom Analog 80 4
48 C 2 Tom SFX 5 Tom Hard 5 Tom Analog 90 5 Tom Analog 80 5
49 C# 2 Cymbal Synth 1 Crash Cymbal 90 Crash Cymbal 90 Crash Analog 80
50 D 2 Tom SFX 6 Tom Hard 6 Tom Analog 90 6 Tom Analog 80 6
52 E 2 Reverse Synth Cymbal Gong Crash Cymbal Slow Attack Crash Cymbal Slow Attack
53 F 2 Metal Noise 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup
54 F# 2 Tambourine Analog Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Analog
55 G 2 Gunshot Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal
56 G# 2 Cowbell Analog 70 Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Analog 80
57 A 2 Bomb Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal 90
58 A# 2 Vibraslap Analog Cowbell Analog 80 Cowbell Analog 80 Vibraslap Synth
59 B 2 Cymbal Synth 1 Ride Cymbal Heavy Cymbal Synth 1 Cymbal Synth 1
60 C 3 Bongo Analog H Bongo H Bongo RX5 H Bongo Analog H
61 C# 3 Bongo Analog L Bongo L Bongo RX5 L Bongo Analog L
62 D 3 Conga Analog H Djembe Mute Conga H Mute Conga Analog H
63 D# 3 Conga Analog M Djembe Edge Conga H Open Conga Analog M
64 E 3 Conga Analog L Djembe Open Conga L Conga Analog L
65 F 3 Zoom H Tabla High Timbale H Metal Analog H
66 F# 3 Zoom L Tabla Open Timbale L Metal Analog L
67 G 3 Glass Noise H Udu Finger Agogo RX5 H Glass Noise H
68 G# 3 Glass Noise L Udu High Agogo RX5 L Glass Noise L
69 A 3 Hand Clap Synth Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa
73 C# 4 Scratch 2 Guitar Power Chord L Scratch 2 Guiro Analog DM H
74 D 4 Scratch Stop 1 Guitar Power Chord H Scratch Stop 1 Guiro Analog DM L
75 D# 4 Hi Q 1 H Hi Q 1 H Hi Q 1 H Hi Q 1 H
76 E 4 Hi Q 1 L Hi Q 1 L Hi Q 1 L Hi Q 1 L
77 F 4 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2
78 F# 4 Scratch 1 H Digeridoo 1 Scratch 1 H Scratch 1 H
79 G 4 Scratch 1 L Digeridoo 2 Scratch 1 L Scratch 1 L
80 G# 4 Hi-Hat Closed SE Digeridoo 3 Triangle Mute Triangle Mute
81 A 4 Hi-Hat Open SE Finger Cymbal Triangle Open Triangle Open
83 B 4 Vibraslap Synth Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell
84 C 5 Tape Rewind Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree

306 RS7000
6. Drum Voice List
Bank MSB 126 126 126 126

Bank LSB 0 0 0 0
Program 35 36 37 38
Note# Note
AmbntKtN off assign HardKitN off assign HousKt1N off assign BreakKtN off assign
12 C -1 Reverse Hi Q 1 Reverse Snare Wood Reverse Finger Snap Reverse Snare Hip Rim 5
13 C# -1 Reverse Tom Brush Reverse Tom Industrial Reverse Tom RX5 Reverse Tom RX5
14 D -1 Reverse Tom Analog 80 Reverse Tom Analog Distortion Reverse Tom Analog 90 Reverse Tom Soft
15 D# -1 Reverse BD Analog Blip 1 Reverse Ripper Reverse BD Hip Deep Reverse BD Break Deep
16 E -1 Reverse BD Analog 82 Reverse BD Analog Distortion 1 Reverse BD Analog 90 Reverse BD Break Lo-fi 1
17 F -1 Reverse Cymbal Synth 1 Reverse Crash Cymbal 90 Reverse Crash Cymbal 90 Reverse Crash Cymbal Heavy
19 G -1 Reverse Brush Slap Reverse Snare Gate 2 Reverse Snare Hip FX L Reverse Snare Dry Rim
20 G# -1 Reverse Snare Analog 82 Reverse Snare Analog Distortion Reverse Snare Analog 90 Reverse Snare Break Lo-fi 3
21 A -1 Brush Swirl Reverse Noiseburst Reverse Hand Clap Analog 80 Snare Roll Break
22 A# -1 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Heavy Reverse Hi-Hat Open 90 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Break
23 B -1 BD Analog 80 H Ripper BD Hip Deep BD Soft
24 C 0 BD Analog Blip 1 BD Analog Distortion 3 BD Analog 93 BD Break Deep
25 C# 0 Hi Q 2 Snare Wood Finger Snap Snare Hip Rim 5
26 D 0 Brush Slap Snare Gate 1 Snare Analog 95 Snare Break Lo-fi 3
27 D# 0 Hi Q 1 Sword Hand Clap Acoustic Snare FX Noise
28 E 0 Snare Analog 70 Snare Gate 2 Snare Hip FX L Snare Dry Rim
29 F 0 Tom Brush 1 Tom Industrial 1 Tom RX5 1 Tom RX5 1
30 F# 0 Hi-Hat Closed Synth Hi-Hat Closed Heavy Hi-Hat Closed Light Hi-Hat Closed Heavy
31 G 0 Tom Brush 2 Tom Industrial 2 Tom RX5 2 Tom RX5 2
32 G# 0 Hi-Hat Closed SE Hi-Hat Pedal Heavy Hi-Hat Pedal Light Hi-Hat Pedal Heavy
33 A 0 Tom Brush 3 Tom Industrial 3 Tom RX5 3 Tom RX5 3
34 A# 0 Hi-Hat Open Synth Hi-Hat Open Heavy Hi-Hat Open Light Hi-Hat Open Heavy
35 B 0 BD Analog 70 BD Analog Distortion 2 BD Analog 92 BD Break Lo-fi 2
36 C 1 BD Analog 80 BD Analog Distortion 1 BD Analog 90 BD Break Lo-fi 1
37 C# 1 Side Stick Analog 80 Snare Hip Rim 1 Side Stick Analog 90 Snare Hip Rim 2
38 D 1 Snare Analog 82 Snare Analog Distortion Snare Analog 90 Snare Break Lo-fi 3
39 D# 1 Hand Clap Analog 80 Noiseburst Hand Clap Analog 80 Snare Break Rim
40 E 1 Snare Analog 81 Snare Noise Distortion Snare Analog 91 Snare Break Lo-fi 2
41 F 1 Tom Analog 80 1 Tom Analog Distortion 1 Tom Analog 90 1 Tom Soft 1
42 F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 80 Hi-Hat Closed 90 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 81 Hi-Hat Closed Break
43 G 1 Tom Analog 80 2 Tom Analog Distortion 2 Tom Analog 90 2 Tom Soft 2
44 G# 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog 81 Hi-Hat Open 90 1 Hi-Hat Open 90 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Break 1
45 A 1 Tom Analog 80 3 Tom Analog Distortion 3 Tom Analog 90 3 Tom Soft 3
46 A# 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 Hi-Hat Open 90 2 Hi-Hat Open 90 2 Hi-Hat Open Break
47 B 1 Tom Analog 80 4 Tom Analog Distortion 4 Tom Analog 90 4 Tom Soft 4
48 C 2 Tom Analog 80 5 Tom Analog Distortion 5 Tom Analog 90 5 Tom Soft 5
49 C# 2 Cymbal Synth 1 Crash Cymbal 90 Crash Cymbal 90 Crash Cymbal Heavy
50 D 2 Tom Analog 80 6 Tom Analog Distortion 6 Tom Analog 90 6 Tom Soft 6
51 D# 2 Ride Cymbal 90 Ride Cymbal 90 Ride Cymbal 90 Ride Cymbal Heavy
52 E 2 Crash Cymbal Slow Attack Chinese Cymbal Crash Cymbal Slow Attack Chinese Cymbal
54 F# 2 Tambourine Tambourine Analog Tambourine Tambourine
56 G# 2 Cowbell Analog 80 Cowbell Analog 80 Cowbell Cowbell
58 A# 2 Vibraslap Analog Vibraslap Cowbell Analog 80 Cowbell Analog 80
60 C 3 Bongo H BD & Hi-Hat Open H Bongo H Bongo H
61 C# 3 Bongo L BD & Hi-Hat Open L Bongo L Bongo L
62 D 3 Conga H Mute Metal Noise 2 H Conga H Mute Conga H Mute
63 D# 3 Conga H Open Metal Noise 2 L Conga H Open Conga H Open
64 E 3 Conga L Big Drum Conga L Conga L
65 F 3 Metal Analog H Snare Timber H Timbale H BD & Hi-Hat Open
66 F# 3 Metal Analog L Snare Timber L Timbale L BD & Hi-Hat Open
Appendix
67 G 3 Glass Noise H Glass Noise H Agogo H Agogo H
68 G# 3 Glass Noise L Glass Noise L Agogo L Agogo L
69 A 3 Cabasa Cold Stab H Cabasa Cabasa
70 A# 3 Maracas Analog 80 Cold Stab L Maracas Maracas
71 B 3 Tweet Stab Hard H Stab Organ H Hit Brass 1
72 C 4 Stream Stab Hard L Stab Organ L Kick & Hit
73 C# 4 Thunder Scratch 2 Stab Giant H Scratch 2
74 D 4 Wind Scratch Stop 1 Stab Giant L Scratch Stop 1
75 D# 4 Claves Analog Hi Q 1 H Claves Claves
76 E 4 Wood Block H Hi Q 1 L Wood Block H Wood Block H
77 F 4 Wood Block L Hi Q 2 Wood Block L Wood Block L
78 F# 4 Tambourine Analog Scratch 1 H Cuica Mute Scratch 1 H
79 G 4 Cowbell Analog 70 Scratch 1 L Cuica Open Scratch 1 L
82 A# 4 Shaker Analog Shaker Analog Shaker Analog Shaker 1
84 C 5 Wind Chime Bell Tree Bell Tree Turntable Noise

RS7000 307
6. Drum Voice List
Bank MSB 126 126 126 126

Bank LSB 0 0 0 0
Program 39 40 41 42
Note# Note
JunglKtN off assign D&BKitN off assign BigKitN off assign HipKit1N off assign
12 C -1 Reverse Snare Hip Rim 5 Reverse Snare Hip Rim 1 Reverse Side Stick Reverse Snare Hip Rim 5
13 C# -1 Reverse Tom Hard Reverse Tom Soft Reverse Tom Hard Reverse Tom Hard
14 D -1 Reverse Tom Soft Reverse Tom Hard Reverse Tom Ambience Reverse Tom Soft
15 D# -1 Reverse BD Analog Loose Reverse BD Hip Deep Reverse BD FX Gate Reverse BD Hip Deep
16 E -1 Reverse BD Jungle 1 Reverse BD D&B 2 Reverse BD Power Gate Reverse BD R&B 1
17 F -1 Reverse Crash Cymbal Heavy Reverse Crash Cymbal Heavy Reverse Crash Cymbal Heavy Reverse Crash Cymbal Heavy
18 F# -1 Reverse Ride Cymbal Heavy Reverse Ride Cymbal Heavy Reverse Ride Cymbal Heavy Reverse Ride Cymbal Light
19 G -1 Reverse Snare Piccolo Rim 2 Reverse Roll Reverse Snare Gate 2 Reverse Snare Hip Rim 3
20 G# -1 Reverse Snare Jungle 1 Reverse Snare D&B 1 Reverse Snare Gate 1 Reverse Snare R&B 1
21 A -1 Snare Roll Break Snare Roll Break Snare Roll Break Snare Roll Break
22 A# -1 Reverse Hi-Hat Reverse Hi-Hat Open Break Reverse Hi-Hat Open Heavy Reverse Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi
23 B -1 BD Analog Loose BD Soft BD Room 2 BD Lo-fi
24 C 0 BD Jungle 2 BD Hip Deep BD FX Gate BD Hip Deep
25 C# 0 Snare Hip Rim 1 Bongo RX5 H Side Stick Snare Hip Rim 4
26 D 0 Snare Jungle 3 Snare R&B 2 Snare Dry Snare Hip Rim 2
27 D# 0 Hand Clap Synth Snare Timber Hand Clap Acoustic Snare Timber
28 E 0 Snare Piccolo Rim 1 Snare D&B 3 Snare Gate 2 Snare Hip Rim 3
29 F 0 Tom Hard 1 Tom Soft 1 Tom Hard 1 Tom Hard 1
30 F# 0 Hi-Hat Closed Break Hi-Hat Closed Light Hi-Hat Closed Light Hi-Hat Closed Lo-fi
31 G 0 Tom Hard 2 Tom Soft 2 Tom Hard 2 Tom Hard 2
32 G# 0 Hi-Hat Pedal Break 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Light Hi-Hat Pedal Light Hi-Hat Pedal Break 1
33 A 0 Tom Hard 3 Tom Soft 3 Tom Hard 3 Tom Hard 3
34 A# 0 Hi-Hat Open Break Hi-Hat Open Light Hi-Hat Open Light Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi
35 B 0 BD Jungle 3 BD D&B 1 BD Room 3 BD R&B 2
36 C 1 BD Jungle 1 BD D&B 2 BD Power Gate BD R&B 1
37 C# 1 Snare Hip Rim 5 Snare Hip Rim 1 Snare Hip Rim 1 Snare Hip Rim 5
38 D 1 Snare Jungle 1 Snare D&B 1 Snare Gate 1 Snare R&B 1
39 D# 1 Snare Clap Noiseburst Hand Clap Large Snare Hip Gate
40 E 1 Snare Jungle 2 Snare D&B 2 Snare Ambience Snare R&B Rim
41 F 1 Tom Soft 1 Tom Hard 1 Tom Ambience 1 Tom Soft 1
42 F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed Light Hi-Hat Closed Tight Hi-Hat Closed Heavy Hi-Hat Closed R&B
43 G 1 Tom Soft 2 Tom Hard 2 Tom Ambience 2 Tom Soft 2
44 G# 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Light Hi-Hat Pedal Break 2 Hi-Hat Closed Heavy Hi-Hat Pedal R&B
45 A 1 Tom Soft 3 Tom Hard 3 Tom Ambience 3 Tom Soft 3
46 A# 1 Hi-Hat Open Light Hi-Hat Open Break Hi-Hat Open Heavy Hi-Hat Open R&B
47 B 1 Tom Soft 4 Tom Hard 4 Tom Ambience 4 Tom Soft 4
48 C 2 Tom Soft 5 Tom Hard 5 Tom Ambience 5 Tom Soft 5
49 C# 2 Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy
50 D 2 Tom Soft 6 Tom Hard 6 Tom Ambience 6 Tom Soft 6
51 D# 2 Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Light
52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal
58 A# 2 Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Cowbell Analog 80
59 B 2 Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Light Ride Cymbal Heavy
65 F 3 Tabla High Snare D&B 4 BD & Hi-Hat Open H BD & Hi-Hat Open H
66 F# 3 Tabla Open Reverse Hi-Hat BD & Hi-Hat Open L BD & Hi-Hat Open L
71 B 3 Samba Whistle H Sonar H Samba Whistle H Stab Giant H
72 C 4 Samba Whistle L Sonar L Samba Whistle L Stab Giant L
73 C# 4 Guiro Short Vox Bell H Scratch 2 Scratch 2
74 D 4 Guiro Long Vox Bell L Scratch Stop 1 Scratch Stop 1
76 E 4 Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Noiseburst
77 F 4 Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Car Crash
78 F# 4 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Scratch 1 H Scratch 1 H
79 G 4 Cuica Open Cuica Open Scratch 1 L Scratch 1 L
84 C 5 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Turntable Noise

308 RS7000
6. Drum Voice List
Bank MSB 126 126 126 126

Bank LSB 0 0 0 0
Program 43 44 45 46
Note# Note
Aco.KitN off assign JazzKitN off assign BrushKtN off assign PercKt1N off assign
12 C -1 Reverse Side Stick on Reverse Side Stick Reverse Snare Hip Rim 5 Reverse Log Drum 2
13 C# -1 Reverse Tom Soft on Reverse Tom Brush Reverse Tom Soft Reverse Djembe Open
14 D -1 Reverse Tom Dry on Reverse Tom Soft Reverse Tom Brush Reverse Tabla Open
15 D# -1 Reverse BD Dry Hard on Reverse BD Room 2 Reverse BD Room 2 Reverse Surdo Open
16 E -1 Reverse BD Room 2 on Reverse BD Dry Hard Reverse BD Dry Hard Digeridoo 3 Short
17 F -1 Reverse Crash Cymbal Light on Reverse Crash Cymbal Light Reverse Crash Cymbal Light Digeridoo 3 Long
18 F# -1 Reverse Ride Cymbal Heavy on Reverse Cymbal Loop Reverse Ride Cymbal Heavy Gong 1
19 G -1 Reverse Snare Piccolo Rim 2 on Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Short Digeridoo 2
20 G# -1 Reverse Snare Mid Room on Reverse Snare Piccolo 1 Reverse Brush Slap Side Stick
21 A -1 Snare Roll on Snare Roll Brush Swirl Long Digeridoo 1
22 A# -1 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Heavy on Reverse Hi-Hat Open Light Reverse Hi-Hat Open Light Sticks
23 B -1 BD Dry on BD Soft BD Soft Big Drum
24 C 0 BD Dry Hard on BD Room 2 BD Room 2 Surdo Open
25 C# 0 Side Stick on Finger Snap Snare Hip Rim 4 Castanet
26 D 0 Snare Piccolo 1 on Brush Slap Brush Slap Soft Surdo Mute
27 D# 0 Hand Clap Acoustic on Hand Clap Acoustic Hand Clap Acoustic Hand Clap Large
28 E 0 Snare Piccolo Rim 1 on Brush Tap Brush Tap Soft Djembe Mute
29 F 0 Tom Soft 1 on Tom Brush 1 Tom Soft 1 Djembe Open L
30 F# 0 Hi-Hat Closed Light on Hi-Hat Closed Heavy Hi-Hat Closed Heavy Triangle Mute
31 G 0 Tom Soft 2 on Tom Brush 2 Tom Soft 2 Djembe Open H
32 G# 0 Hi-Hat Pedal Light on Hi-Hat Pedal Heavy Hi-Hat Pedal Heavy Triangle Open Short
33 A 0 Tom Soft 3 on Tom Brush 3 Tom Soft 3 Djembe Edge
34 A# 0 Hi-Hat Open Light on Hi-Hat Open Heavy Hi-Hat Open Heavy Triangle Open
35 B 0 BD Room 1 on BD Dry BD Dry Taiko Drum
36 C 1 BD Room 2 on BD Dry Hard BD Dry Hard Feet 1
37 C# 1 Snare Hip Rim 1 on Side Stick Snare Hip Rim 5 Log Drum 2
38 D 1 Snare Mid Room on Snare Piccolo 1 Brush Slap Shekere 3
39 D# 1 Hand Clap Large on Hand Clap Small Hand Clap Small Shekere 2
40 E 1 Snare Break Rim on Snare Piccolo Rim 1 Brush Tap Shekere 1
41 F 1 Tom Dry 1 on Tom Soft 1 Tom Brush 1 Tabla Open
42 F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed Heavy on Hi-Hat Closed Light Hi-Hat Closed Light Brush Maracas Analog 80
43 G 1 Tom Dry 2 on Tom Soft 2 Tom Brush 2 Tabla Mute
44 G# 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Heavy on Hi-Hat Pedal Light Hi-Hat Pedal Light Shaker Analog
45 A 1 Tom Dry 3 on Tom Soft 3 Tom Brush 3 Tabla High
46 A# 1 Hi-Hat Open Heavy on Hi-Hat Open Light Hi-Hat Open Light Brush Cabasa
47 B 1 Tom Dry 4 on Tom Soft 4 Tom Brush 4 Udu Low
48 C 2 Tom Dry 5 on Tom Soft 5 Tom Brush 5 Udu High
49 C# 2 Crash Cymbal Light on Crash Cymbal Light Crash Cymbal Light Brush Finger Cymbal 1
50 D 2 Tom Dry 6 on Tom Soft 6 Tom Brush 6 Udu Finger
51 D# 2 Ride Cymbal Heavy on Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Heavy Brush Berimbau 2
52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal on Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Brush Gong 2
53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup on Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Brush Berimbau 1
54 F# 2 Tambourine on Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine
55 G 2 Splash Cymbal on Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Brush Gong 3
56 G# 2 Cowbell on Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell
57 A 2 Crash Cymbal Heavy on Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy Brush Wind Chime
58 A# 2 Vibraslap on Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap
59 B 2 Ride Cymbal Light on Ride Cymbal Light Ride Cymbal Light Brush Finger Cymbal 2
60 C 3 Bongo H on Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H
61 C# 3 Bongo L on Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L
62 D 3 Conga H Mute on Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute
63 D# 3 Conga H Open on Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open
64 E 3 Conga L on Conga L Conga L Conga L
65 F 3 Timbale H on Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H
66 F# 3 Timbale L on Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L
Appendix
67 G 3 Agogo H on Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H
68 G# 3 Agogo L on Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L
69 A 3 Cabasa on Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa
70 A# 3 Maracas on Maracas Maracas Maracas
71 B 3 Samba Whistle H on Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle H
72 C 4 Samba Whistle L on Samba Whistle L Samba Whistle L Samba Whistle L
73 C# 4 Guiro Short on Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short
74 D 4 Guiro Long on Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long
75 D# 4 Claves on Claves Claves Claves
76 E 4 Wood Block H on Wood Block Wood Block H Wood Block H
77 F 4 Wood Block L on Wood Block Wood Block L Wood Block L
78 F# 4 Cuica Mute on Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute
79 G 4 Cuica Open on Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open
80 G# 4 Triangle Mute on Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute
81 A 4 Triangle Open on Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open
82 A# 4 Shaker 1 on Shaker 1 Shaker 1 Shaker 1
83 B 4 Jingle Bell on Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell
84 C 5 Bell Tree on Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree

RS7000 309
6. Drum Voice List
Bank MSB 126 126 126 126

Bank LSB 0 0 0 0
Program 54 55 56 57
Note# Note
RevrsKit off assign RX Kit N off assign ElectKtN off assign HousKt2N off assign
12 C -1 Reverse Finger Snap Reverse Side Stick RX5 Reverse Hi Blip Reverse Side Stick Analog 90
13 C# -1 Reverse Tom Synth 1 Reverse Tom Soft Reverse Tom Synth 1 Reverse Tom Analog 90
14 D -1 Reverse Tom Industrial Reverse Tom RX5 Reverse Tom SFX Reverse Snare Synth 2
15 D# -1 Reverse Feet 2 Reverse BD Room 1 Reverse BD Power Gate Reverse Low Noise
16 E -1 Reverse BD Hammer Reverse BD RX5 1 Reverse BD Analog 82 Reverse BD Analog 92
17 F -1 Reverse Sword Reverse Crash Cymbal Light Reverse Crash Cymbal 90 Reverse Synth Cymbal
18 F# -1 Reverse FX Metal Reverse Ride Cymbal Heavy Reverse Ride Cymbal 90 Reverse Cymbal Loop
19 G -1 Reverse Vox Hit Reverse Snare Mid Room Reverse Snare Hip Rim 3 Reverse Snare Analog 91
20 G# -1 Reverse Snare Hammer Reverse Snare RX5 1 Reverse Snare Analog 82 Reverse Snare Analog DM
21 A -1 Reverse Roll Snare Roll Reverse Hand Clap Analog 80 Snare Roll FX
22 A# -1 Reverse Hi-Hat Open SE Reverse Hi-Hat Open RX5 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 Reverse Hi-Hat Closed 90
23 B -1 Reverse BD FX Gate BD Soft BD Power Gate BD Analog 91
24 C 0 Reverse BD Power Gate BD Room 1 BD RX5 1 BD Analog 92
25 C# 0 Reverse Side Stick Snare Hip Rim 4 Hi Blip Side Stick Analog 80
26 D 0 Reverse Snare Gate 1 Snare Dry Snare Analog 95 Snare Analog DM
27 D# 0 Reverse Hand Clap Large Hand Clap Small Hand Clap RX5 Hand Clap Analog 80
28 E 0 Reverse Snare Gate 2 Snare Mid Room Snare Hip Rim 3 Snare Analog 91
29 F 0 Reverse Tom Hard 1 Tom Soft 1 Tom Synth 1 1 Tom Analog 90 1
30 F# 0 Reverse Hi-Hat Closed Heavy Hi-Hat Half RX7 Hi-Hat Closed Synth Hi-Hat Closed Analog 80
31 G 0 Reverse Tom Hard 2 Tom Soft 2 Tom Synth 1 2 Tom Analog 90 2
32 G# 0 Reverse Hi-Hat Pedal Heavy Hi-Hat Pedal Light Hi-Hat Open Synth 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog DM
33 A 0 Reverse Tom Hard 3 Tom Soft 3 Tom Synth 1 3 Tom Analog 90 3
34 A# 0 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Heavy Hi-Hat Open Light Hi-Hat Open Synth 2 Hi-Hat Open Analog 80
35 B 0 Reverse BD Analog Rubber 2 BD RX5 2 BD Analog Blip 1 BD Analog 90
36 C 1 Reverse BD Analog 90 BD RX5 1 BD Analog 81 BD Analog Hard 2
37 C# 1 Reverse Side Stick Analog 90 Side Stick RX5 Side Stick Analog 80 Side Stick Analog 90
38 D 1 Reverse Snare Analog 90 Snare RX5 1 Snare Analog 82 Snare Wood
39 D# 1 Reverse Hand Clap Analog 90 Hand Clap RX5 Hand Clap Analog 80 Noiseburst
40 E 1 Reverse Snare Analog 91 Snare RX5 2 Hand Clap Electro Zap 1
41 F 1 Reverse Tom Analog 90 1 Tom RX5 1 Tom SFX 1 Tom Electro 2 1
42 F# 1 Reverse Hi-Hat Closed 90 Hi-Hat Closed RX5 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 80 Hi-Hat Closed 90
43 G 1 Reverse Tom Analog 90 2 Tom RX5 2 Tom SFX 2 Tom Electro 2 2
44 G# 1 Reverse Hi-Hat Closed 90 Hi-Hat Open RX5 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog 81 Hi-Hat Open 90 1
45 A 1 Reverse Tom Analog 90 3 Tom RX5 3 Tom SFX 3 Tom Electro 2 3
46 A# 1 Reverse Hi-Hat Open 90 Hi-Hat Open RX5 2 Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 Hi-Hat Open 90 2
47 B 1 Reverse Tom Analog 90 4 Tom RX5 4 Tom SFX 4 Tom Electro 2 4
48 C 2 Reverse Tom Analog 90 5 Tom RX5 5 Tom SFX 5 Tom Electro 2 5
49 C# 2 Reverse Crash Cymbal 90 Crash Cymbal Light Crash Cymbal 90 Crash Cymbal 90
50 D 2 Reverse Tom Analog 90 6 Tom RX5 6 Tom SFX 6 Tom Electro 2 6
51 D# 2 Reverse Ride Cymbal 90 Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal 90 Ride Cymbal 90
52 E 2 Reverse Cymbal Loop Chinese Cymbal Crash Cymbal Slow Attack Cymbal Synth 1
53 F 2 Reverse Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Cymbal Synth 1 Ride Cymbal Cup
54 F# 2 Reverse Tambourine RX5 Tambourine RX5 Tambourine SFX Tambourine
55 G 2 Reverse Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Crash Analog 80
56 G# 2 Reverse Cowbell Cowbell RX11 Side Stick FX Cowbell
57 A 2 Reverse Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Light
58 A# 2 Reverse Cowbell Analog 80 Vibraslap Cowbell Analog 80 Cowbell Analog 80
59 B 2 Reverse Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Light Cymbal Synth 1 Ride Cymbal Heavy
60 C 3 Reverse Bongo RX5 H Bongo RX5 H Bongo Analog H Bongo H
61 C# 3 Reverse Bongo RX5 L Bongo RX5 L Bongo Analog L Bongo L
62 D 3 Reverse Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga Analog H Conga H Mute
63 D# 3 Reverse Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga Analog M Conga H Open
64 E 3 Reverse Conga L Conga L Conga Analog L Conga L
65 F 3 Reverse Timbale H Timbale H Noise FX Tom Synth 1 H
66 F# 3 Reverse Timbale L Timbale L Telephone FX Tom Synth 1 L
67 G 3 Reverse Agogo RX5 H Agogo RX5 H Metal Noise 1 H Synth Click
68 G# 3 Reverse Agogo RX5 L Agogo RX5 L Metal Noise 1 L Side Stick FX
69 A 3 Reverse Cabasa Shaker RX11 Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi Cabasa
70 A# 3 Reverse Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas
71 B 3 Reverse SFX Gun 2 Samba Whistle H Zap 1 Vox Drum 1 L
72 C 4 Reverse SFX Gun 1 Samba Whistle L Zap 2 Vox Drum 1 H
73 C# 4 Reverse Zap 1 Guiro Short Zoom Tambourine Analog
74 D 4 Reverse Scratch Stop 1 Guiro Long Reverse Synth Cymbal Guiro Analog DM
75 D# 4 Reverse Hi Q 1 H Claves Hi Q 1 H Claves Analog
76 E 4 Reverse Hi Q 1 L Wood Block H Hi Q 1 L Tambourine RX5
77 F 4 Reverse Hi Q 2 Wood Block L Hi Q 2 Cowbell RX11
78 F# 4 Reverse Zap 2 Cuica Mute Hit Hammer Shaker RX11
79 G 4 Reverse Tom SFX Cuica Open Hit Orchestra VPercussion
80 G# 4 Reverse Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Hi-Hat Closed SE Triangle Mute
81 A 4 Reverse Triangle Open Triangle Open Hi-Hat Open SE Triangle Open
82 A# 4 Reverse Shaker Analog Shaker 1 Shaker Analog Shaker Analog
83 B 4 Reverse Jingle Bell Jingle Bell FX Metal Jingle Bell
84 C 5 Reverse Bell Tree Bell Tree Wind Chime FX Wind Chime FX

310 RS7000
6. Drum Voice List
Bank MSB 126 126 126 126

Bank LSB 0 0 0 0
Program 58 59 60 61
Note# Note
Hip Kit2N off assign R&B KitN off assign SmothKtN off assign HumanKtN off assign
12 C -1 Reverse Side Stick RX5 Reverse Snare Hip Rim 6 Reverse Side Stick Electro Reverse Vox Go!
13 C# -1 Reverse BD Analog 83 Reverse Tom Synth 1 Reverse Tom Analog 80 Reverse Vox Buh!
14 D -1 Reverse Tom Soft Reverse BD Analog 83 Reverse Tom Soft Reverse BD Human
15 D# -1 Turntable Noise Turntable Noise Turntable Noise Reverse Vox Muh!
16 E -1 Reverse BD Hip Deep Reverse BD Analog 82 Reverse BD Analog 90 Reverse Vox Buh!
17 F -1 Reverse Crash Cymbal Light Udu FX Reverse Crash Cymbal Light Reverse Noiseburst
18 F# -1 Reverse Ride Cymbal Heavy Reverse Cymbal Loop Car Crash Reverse Vox Whoa!
19 G -1 Reverse Roll Reverse Snare FX Gate Reverse Snare Analog 95 Reverse Vox Hit
20 G# -1 Reverse Snare Break Lo-fi 3 Reverse Snare Hip Rim 3 Reverse Snare Analog 94 Reverse Vox Buh!
21 A -1 Snare Roll Break Snare Roll Break Snare Roll Break Reverse Snare Hip FX H
22 A# -1 Reverse Hi-Hat Pedal Break 1 Reverse Hi-Hat Open Tek Reverse Hi-Hat Pedal Light Reverse Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi
23 B -1 BD Analog 81 BD Analog 83 BD Analog 80 Vox Muh!
24 C 0 BD Analog 83 BD Analog 82 BD Analog 70 L BD Human
25 C# 0 Side Stick Analog 80 Finger Snap Finger Snap Scratch Vox 1 F
26 D 0 Snare Analog 83 Side Stick Electro Snare Analog 81 Vox Hit
27 D# 0 Hand Clap Analog 80 Hand Clap Synth Hand Clap Analog 80 Scratch Vox 1 B
28 E 0 Snare Synth 2 Snare Analog Gate Snare Analog 80 Vox Tah!
29 F 0 Tom Synth 2 1 Tom Synth 1 1 Tom Analog 80 1 Vox Buh! 1
30 F# 0 Hi-Hat Closed Tek Hi-Hat Closed Tek Hi-Hat Closed Analog 81 Scratch Vox 2 F
31 G 0 Tom Synth 2 2 Tom Synth 1 2 Tom Analog 80 2 Vox Buh! 2
32 G# 0 Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 Hi-Hat Open Tek 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog DM Scratch Vox 2 B
33 A 0 Tom Synth 2 3 Tom Synth 1 3 Tom Analog 80 3 Vox Buh! 3
34 A# 0 Hi-Hat Open Tek Hi-Hat Open Tek 2 Hi-Hat Open Analog 81 Hi-Hat Open Tek
35 B 0 BD Break Deep BD Soft BD Analog 70 BD Human Deep
36 C 1 BD Hip Deep BD Analog Rubber 1 BD Analog 90 Vox Buh!
37 C# 1 Side Stick RX5 Snare Hip Rim 7 Side Stick Electro Vox Go!
38 D 1 Snare Analog 93 Snare Hip Rim 3 Snare Analog 94 Vox Buh!
39 D# 1 Hand Clap Small Hand Clap Small Hand Clap Small Snare Hip FX H
40 E 1 Snare Break Lo-fi 3 Snare FX Gate Snare Analog 95 Snare Hip Rezo
41 F 1 Tom Soft 1 Tom Analog 81 1 Tom Soft 1 Tom Human 1
42 F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed Break Hi-Hat Closed Analog 80 Hi-Hat Closed Light Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi
43 G 1 Tom Soft 2 Tom Analog 81 2 Tom Soft 2 Tom Human 2
44 G# 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Break 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 70 Hi-Hat Pedal Light Scratch Vox 2 B
45 A 1 Tom Soft 3 Tom Analog 81 3 Tom Soft 3 Tom Human 3
46 A# 1 Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi Hi-Hat Open Analog 80 Hi-Hat Open Light Hi-Hat Open Lo-fi
47 B 1 Tom Soft 4 Tom Analog 81 4 Tom Soft 4 Tom Human 4
48 C 2 Tom Soft 5 Tom Analog 81 5 Tom Soft 5 Tom Human 5
49 C# 2 Crash Cymbal Heavy Crash Cymbal Light Crash Cymbal Heavy Noiseburst
50 D 2 Tom Soft 6 Tom Analog 81 6 Tom Soft 6 Tom Human 6
51 D# 2 Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal 90 Ride Cymbal Heavy Vox Whoa!
52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Vox Hit
53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Vox Go!
54 F# 2 Tambourine RX5 Tambourine Tambourine Scratch SD B
55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Vox Ahhh!
56 G# 2 Cowbell RX11 Cowbell Cowbell Vox Drum 1
57 A 2 Crash Cymbal Light Crash Cymbal 90 Crash Cymbal Light Cymbal Synth 2
58 A# 2 Cowbell Analog 80 Cowbell Analog 80 Cowbell Analog 80 Vox Drum 2
59 B 2 Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal Heavy Ride Cymbal 90 Vocd Ahh
60 C 3 Bongo H Bongo H Bongo Analog H Bongo H
61 C# 3 Bongo L Bongo L Bongo Analog L Bongo L
65 F 3 Hit Brass 2 Synth Bubble H Scratch Vox 1 F Vox Yo!
66 F# 3 Hit Guitar Synth Bubble L Scratch Vox 1 B Vox Huh!
Appendix
67 G 3 Agogo H Agogo H Metal Analog H Agogo H
68 G# 3 Agogo L Agogo L Metal Analog L Agogo L
69 A 3 Cabasa Shaker Analog Cabasa Cabasa
70 A# 3 Maracas Analog 80 Maracas Maracas Maracas
71 B 3 Hit EP L Vox Drum 1 H Hit EP L Reverse Vox Whoa!
72 C 4 Hit EP H Vox Drum 1 L Hit EP H Reverse Vox Muh!
73 C# 4 Scratch Spin Hi Q 1 Vox Pad L Scratch 2
74 D 4 Scratch Stop 2 Hi Q 2 Vox Pad H Scratch Stop 1
75 D# 4 Claves Analog Claves Analog Claves Analog Reverse Scratch Stop 1
76 E 4 Door Squeak Vibraslap Synth Hand Clap Electro Scratch 4 B
77 F 4 Hit Brass 3 Scratch Spin Scratch Stop 2 Reverse Scratch Stop 2
78 F# 4 Scratch BD F Scratch 3 B Finger Cymbal Scratch 1 H
79 G 4 Scratch BD B Scratch 3 F Vibraslap Scratch 1 L
82 A# 4 Shaker Analog Shaker 1 Shaker 1 Shaker 1
83 B 4 Tambourine Low Tambourine Jingle Bell Jingle Bell
84 C 5 Wind Chime Wind Chime FX Wind Chime Turntable Noise

RS7000 311
6. Drum Voice List
SFX type
Bank MSB 126 126 126
Bank LSB 0 0 0
Program 25 26 63
Kit Type SFX SFX SFX
Note# Note assign
SFX Kit1 off assign SFX Kit2 off assign SFX Kit3 off
24 C 0 LFO SFX2 RevBomb EleNoiz
25 C# 0 LFO SFX3 RvThundr DelySFX4
26 D 0 LFO SFX4 RvDoorSl DelySFX7
27 D# 0 Pingpong RevPunch EerieRes
28 E 0 Trance1 Shower Tibet
29 F 0 Trance2 Thunder Airsnake
30 F# 0 Trance3 Wind Hammer
31 G 0 Trance4 Seashore EchoShot
32 G# 0 Trance5 Steam SFX Prc1
33 A 0 Trance6 Bubble SFX Prc2
34 A# 0 Trance7 Dog SFX Prc3
35 B 0 Trance8 Horse SFX Prc4
36 C 1 Trance9 Tweet 1 SFX Prc5
37 C# 1 Trance10 Tweet 2 SFX Prc6
38 D 1 Trance11 Growl SFX Prc7
39 D# 1 FunnyCPU DoorSqek NoizClap
40 E 1 Siren DoorSlam FEG Noiz
41 F 1 SystmDwn Telphon1 FlngNoiz
42 F# 1 Smoky Telphon2 SynMetal
43 G 1 Sonr&CPU Scratch1 Rebound
44 G# 1 FX-NG TurnTabl Vox Go!
45 A 1 Machine? TapeRwnd VoxWhoa!
46 A# 1 Bikers GlasNoiz Vox Yo!
47 B 1 RvrsLife MetalNz1 VoxAhhh!
48 C 2 PanImpct MetalNz2 Vox Huh!
49 C# 2 ShotStar IndstTom Vox Muh!
50 D 2 AnBubble CarEIgn Vox Tah!
51 D# 2 GameOver CarTSqel Vox Buh!
52 E 2 ToneDeaf Car Pass Vox Hit
53 F 2 What? CarCrash Vocd Ahh
54 F# 2 Zap Gun Train VoxDrum1
55 G 2 Hndrail1 Helicptr VoxDrum2
56 G# 2 Hndrail2 RevBurst RvVoxGo!
57 A 2 Hitchhik RevLowNz RvVxWhoa
58 A# 2 Digger Laugh RvVoxYo!
59 B 2 Propelr1 Scream RvVxAhhh
60 C 3 Propelr2 Punch RvVxHuh!
61 C# 3 Greeting Heart RvVxMuh!
62 D 3 Safari Footstep RvVxTah!
63 D# 3 Sesame Applause RvVxBuh!
64 E 3 Buddha BrthNoiz RvVoxHit
65 F 3 Wah Seq1 Gunshot RvVxDrm2
66 F# 3 Wah Seq2 Bomb Scrtch2C
67 G 3 Biter HiQ 1 Scrtch2D
68 G# 3 Vacuum HiQ 2 Scrtch2E
69 A 3 Brokndwn SFX Gun1 Scrtch2F
70 A# 3 Teleport SFX Gun2 ScratchH
71 B 3 Scat BrstNoiz ScrchDrC
72 C 4 Disaster Ripper ScrchDrD
73 C# 4 Match Zap1 ScrchDrE
74 D 4 LasrShot Zap2 ScrchDrF
75 D# 4 Whimsy1 Zoom ScrchVxA
76 E 4 Whimsy2 Alarm ScrchVxB
77 F 4 Feeder RvTapeRw ScrchVxC
78 F# 4 Rising RvGlasNz ScrchVxD
79 G 4 Drain RvMtlNz1 ScrchDwn
80 G# 4 Spin RvMtlNz2 RvScrDwn
81 A 4 Takeoff RvIndsTm Scrtch2A
82 A# 4 GiantStp RvCarEIg Scrtch2B
83 B 4 CyberStp RvCarCrs ScrchDrA
84 C 5 Typhoon RvGunsht ScrchDrB
85 C# 5 Rocker RevHiQ1 RvSyVibr
86 D 5 Amphibia RevHiQ2 RvBelTre
87 D# 5 Escape RevSyTm1 RvSyMetl
88 E 5 Whirlpol RevSyTm2 RvRebond
89 F 5 ShortWav RvSFXGn1
90 F# 5 Dentist RvSFXGn2
91 G 5 AlarmDwn RvBrstNz
92 G# 5 Cops RvRipper
93 A 5 Police RevZap1
94 A# 5 LFO SFX7 RevZap2
95 B 5 LFO SFX5 RevZoom
96 C 6 LFO SFX6 RevAlarm
: No sound.
312 RS7000
7. Phrase Category List
7. Phrase Category List
Phrase Category Display Category Name

US User User
BD ✳1 Bass Drum Bass Drum
SD ✳1 SD/Clap Snare Drum/Clap
HH ✳1 HH/Ride Hi-Hat/Ride Cymbal
CR ✳1 Crash Cym. Crash Cymbal
PC ✳1 Percussion Percussion
BA ✳2 Bass Bass
LD ✳2 Synth Lead Synth Lead
SQ ✳2 Synth Seq. Synth Sequence
CH ✳2 Synth Chord Synth Chord
PD ✳2 Synth Pad Synth Pad
FX ✳2 Synth Efx Synth Effects
SE ✳2 SE Sound Effects
KB ✳2 Keyboard Keyboard
GT ✳2 Guiter Guiter
CW ✳2 Clasc/Wind Classical/Wind ✳1 Can only be selected for tracks 1 ... 8.
ET ✳2 Ethnic Ethnic ✳2 Can only be selected for tracks 9 ... 16.
8. Effect Type List
MIDI No.
Effect Category Effect Name LCD (HEX) DLY/
REV VAR Master
MSB LSB CHO
--- NO EFFECT OFF 00 00 0 0 0
REVERB
HALL 1 HALL 1 01 00 1 1
HALL 2 HALL 2 01 01 2 2
ROOM 1 ROOM 1 01 10 3 3
ROOM 2 ROOM 2 01 11 4 4
ROOM 3 ROOM 3 01 12 5 5
STAGE 1 STAGE 1 01 20 6 6
STAGE 2 STAGE 2 01 21 7 7
PLATE PLATE 01 30 8 8
WHITE ROOM WHITEROOM 01 40 9
TUNNEL TUNNEL 01 41 10
BASEMENT BASEMENT 01 42 11
CANYON CANYON 01 43 12
DELAY
DELAY L, C, R DELAY LCR 02 00 9
DELAY L, R DELAY LR 02 10 18 10
ECHO ECHO 02 20 25 11
CROSS DELAY CROSS-DLY 02 30 24 12
CONTROL DELAY (MONO) CTRLDLY M 02 40 19 13
CONTROL DELAY (STEREO) CTRLDELAY 02 48 20 14 3
TEMPO DELAY (MONO) TMP-DLY 1 02 50 21 15
TEMPO DELAY (STEREO) TMP-DLY 2 02 58 22 16
TEMPO CROSS DELAY TMP-C-DLY 02 60 23 17
EARLY REFLECTION
EARLY REFLECTION 1 ER 1 03 00 18
EARLY REFLECTION 2 ER 2 03 01 19
GATE REVERB GATE REV 03 10 20
REVERSE GATE REVRSGATE 03 20 21
KARAOKE
KARAOKE 1 KARAOKE 1 04 00 22
Appendix
CHORUS
CHORUS 1 CHORUS 1 05 00 1 25
CELESTE 1 CELESTE 1 05 10 6 30
SYMPHONIC SYMPHONIC 05 20 10 34
ENSEMBLE DETUNE ENSEMBLE 05 30 11 35
FLANGER
FLANGER 1 FLANGER 1 06 00 12 36
V-FLANGER V-FLANGER 06 10 39
TEMPO FLANGER TMP-FLNG 06 50 15 40
DYNAMIC FLANGER D-FLANGER 06 60 41
PHASER
PHASER 1 PHASER 1 07 00 16 42
PHASER 2 PHASER 2 07 08 43
TEMPO PHASER TMP-PHASE 07 50 17 44
DYNAMIC PHASER D-PHASER 07 60 45
RS7000 313
8. Effect Type List
MIDI No.
Effect Category Effect Name LCD (HEX) DLY/
REV VAR Master
MSB LSB CHO
MODULATION
TREMOLO TREMOLO 08 00 46
AUTO PAN AUTO PAN 08 10 47
ROTARY SPEAKER ROTARY SP 08 50 48
DISTORTION+ROTARY SPEAKER DIST+RTRY 08 51 49
OVERDRIVE+ROTARY SPEAKER ODRV+RTRY 08 52 50
AMP SIM.+ROTARY SPEAKER AMP+RTRY 08 53 51
2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER 2WAY RTRY 08 60 52
DISTORTION+2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER DST+2RTRY 08 61 53
OVERDRIVE+2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER ODRV+2RTY 08 62 54
AMP SIM.+2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER AMP+2RTRY 08 63 55
DUAL ROTOR SPEAKER1 DUAL RTR1 08 70 56
DUAL ROTOR SPEAKER2 DUAL RTR2 08 71 57
DISTORTION
DISTORTION DIST 09 00 58
COMP DISTORTION COMP+DIST 09 01 59
V-DISTORTION V-DIST 09 10 60 6
OVER DRIVE OVERDRIVE 09 20 61
AMP SIMULATOR AMP SIM 09 30 62
DIST+DELAY DIST+DLY 09 40 63
OVERDRIVE+DELAY ODRV+DLY 09 41 64
DYNAMIC
COMPRESSOR COMPRESSR 0A 00 65
NOISE GATE NOISEGATE 0A 20 66
COMP+DIST+DELAY CMP+DT+DL 0A 40 67
COMP+OVERDRIVE+DELAY CMP+OD+DL 0A 41 68
MULTI COMPRESSOR 1 MULTICOMP 0A 50 69 4
MULTI COMPRESSOR 2 MULTICMP2 0A 51 70
PITCH CHANGE
PITCH CHANGE 1 PTCH CNG1 0B 00 71
PITCH CHANGE 2 PTCH CNG2 0B 01 72
WAH
AUTO WAH AUTO WAH 0C 00 73
AUTO WAH + DIST A-WAH+DST 0C 01 74
AUTO WAH + OVERDRIVE A-WAH+ODR 0C 02 75
TOUCH WAH TOUCH WAH 0C 10 76
TOUCH WAH + DIST T-WAH+DST 0C 11 77
TOUCH WAH + OVERDRIVE T-WAH+ODR 0C 12 78
WAH+DIST+DELAY WAH+DT+DL 0C 40 79
WAH+OVERDRIVE+DELAY WAH+OD+DL 0C 41 80
LO-FI
LO-FI LO-FI 0D 00 81 7
LOW RESOLUTION LOW RESO 0D 10 82
NOISY NOISY 0D 20 83
ATTACK LO-FI ATK LO-FI 0D 30 84
DIGITAL TURNTABLE D-TURNTBL 0D 50 85
TECH
DIGITAL SCRATCH D-SCRATCH 0E 00 86
AUTO SYNTH AUTOSYNTH 0E 10 87
TECH MODULATION TECH MOD 0E 20 88
JUMP JUMP 0E 30 89
ISOLATION ISOLATION 0E 40 90 1
SLICE SLICE 0E 50 91 8
MISC
3-BAND EQ 3-BAND EQ 0F 00 92
2-BAND EQ 2-BAND EQ 0F 01 93
HARMONIC ENHANCER ENHANCER 0F 10 94
VOICE CANCEL VCECANCEL 0F 20 95
AMBIENCE AMBIENCE 0F 30 96
TALKING MODULATOR TALK MOD 0F 40 97
RING MODULATOR RING MOD 0F 70 98 5
DYNAMIC RING MODULATOR D-RINGMOD 0F 71 99
DYNAMIC FILTER D-FILTER 0F 78 100 2
314 RS7000
9. Effect Parameter List

1. Reverb 15 TEMPO FLANGER
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
01 HALL 1 ~ 08 PLATE Number
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table 1 LFO Speed 16th, 8th/3, 16th., 8th, 4th/3, (5 ~ 21) 1
Number 8th., 4th, 2th/3, 4th., 2nd,
1 Reverb Time 0.3s ~ 30.0s (0 ~ 69) 1 4 Whole/3, 2nd., 4thx4, 4thx5,
2 Initial Delay 0.1ms ~ 200.0ms (0 ~ 127) 2 5 4thx6, 4thx7, 4thx8
3 Reverb Delay 0.1ms ~ 200.0ms (0 ~ 127) 3 5 2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
4 ER/Rev Balance E63>R ~ E=R ~ E<R63 (1 ~ 127) 4 3 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 3
5 HPF Cutoff Frequency 20Hz ~ 8.0kHz (0 ~ 52) 5 3 4 Delay Offset 0.0ms ~ 50.0ms (0 ~ 127) 4 2
6 LPF Cutoff Frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 6 3 5 LFO Phase Difference -180deg ~ +180deg (4 ~ 124) 5
7 Diffusion 0 ~ 10 (0 ~ 10) 7 6 LFO Phase Reset off (free run), Key On Reset, (0 ~ 2) 6
SEQ Start Reset
8 Density 0~4 (0 ~ 4) 8
7 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 7 3
9 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 9
8 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8
10 Feedback High Damp 0.1 ~ 1.0 (1 ~ 10) 10
9 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 9 3
09 WHITE ROOM ~ 12 CANYON 10 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
Number 16 PHASER 1
1 Reverb Time 0.3s ~ 30.0s (0 ~ 69) 1 4 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
Number
2 Initial Delay 0.1ms ~ 200.0ms (0 ~ 127) 2 5
1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1
3 Reverb Delay 0.1ms ~ 200.0ms (0 ~ 127) 3 5
2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
4 Diffusion 0 ~ 10 (0 ~ 10) 4
3 Phase Shift Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
5 Width 0.5m ~ 30.2m (0 ~ 104) 5 11
4 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 4
6 Height 0.5m ~ 30.2m (0 ~ 104) 6 11
5 Stage 4, 5, 6 (4 ~ 6) 5
7 Depth 0.5m ~ 30.2m (0 ~ 104) 7 11
6 Diffusion mono/stereo (0 ~ 1) 6
8 Wall Vary 0 ~ 30 (0 ~ 30) 8
9 HPF Cutoff Frequency 20Hz ~ 8.0kHz (0 ~ 52) 9 3
8 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8
10 LPF Cutoff Frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 10 3
2. Delay/Chorus 10 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
01 CHORUS 1 ~ 09 CELESTE 4 17 TEMPO PHASER

No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
Number Number
1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1 1 LFO Speed 16th, 8th/3, 16th., 8th, 4th/3, (5 ~ 21) 1
2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2 8th., 4th, 2th/3, 4th., 2nd,
Whole/3, 2nd., 4thx4, 4thx5,
3 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 3 4thx6, 4thx7, 4thx8
4 Delay Offset 0.0ms ~ 50.0ms (0 ~ 127) 4 2 2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
5 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 5 3 3 Phase Shift Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
6 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~+12dB (52 ~ 76) 6 4 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 4
7 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 7 3 5 Stage 4, 5, 6 (4 ~ 6) 5
8 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8 6 LFO Phase Reset off (free run), Key On Reset, (0 ~ 2) 6
SEQ Start Reset
10 SYMPHONIC
Number 8 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8
1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1 9 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 9 3
2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2 10 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
3 Delay Offset 0.0ms ~ 50.0ms (0 ~ 127) 3 2

18 DELAY L, R
4 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 4 3 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
5 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 5 Number
6 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 6 3 1 Lch Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 740.0ms (0 ~ 127) 1 19
7 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 7 2 Rch Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 740.0ms (0 ~ 127) 2 19
3 Lch Feedback Time 0.1ms ~ 740.0ms (0 ~ 127) 3 19
11 ENSEMBLE DETUNE
4 Rch Feedback Time 0.1ms ~ 740.0ms (0 ~ 127) 4 19
Number 5 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 5
1 Detune -50cent ~ +50cent (14 ~ 114) 1 6 Feedback High Damp 0.1 ~ 1.0 (1 ~ 10) 6
2 Initial Delay Lch 0.0ms ~ 50.0ms (0 ~ 127) 2 2 7 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 7 3
3 Initial Delay Rch 0.0ms ~ 50.0ms (0 ~ 127) 3 2 8 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8
Appendix
12 FLANGER 1 ~ 14 FLANGER 3 10 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
Number 19 CONTROL DELAY (MONO)
1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2 Number
3 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 3 1 Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 1480.0ms (0 ~ 127) 1 20
4 Delay Offset 0.0ms ~ 50.0ms (0 ~ 127) 4 2 2 Delay Transition Rate 1~48 (1 ~ 48) 2
5 LFO Phase Difference -180deg ~ +180deg (4 ~ 124) 5 3 Delay Time Offset 0~127 (0 ~ 127) 3
6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 6 3 4 Control Type normal, scratch (0 ~ 1) 4
7 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 7 5 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 5
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 8 3 6 Feedback High Damp 0.1 ~ 1.0 (1 ~ 10) 6
9 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 9 7 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 7 3
8 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8
10 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
RS7000 315
20 CONTROL DELAY (STEREO) 009 DELAY L, C, R

Number Number
1 Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 740.0ms (0 ~ 127) 1 19 1 Lch Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 1486.0ms (1 ~ 14860) 1
2 Delay Transition Rate 1 ~ 48 (1 ~ 48) 2 2 Rch Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 1486.0ms (1 ~ 14860) 2
3 Delay Time Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3 3 Cch Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 1486.0ms (1 ~ 14860) 3
4 Control Type normal, scratch (0 ~ 1) 4 4 Feedback Time 0.1ms ~ 1486.0ms (1 ~ 14860) 5
5 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 5 5 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 6
6 Feedback High Damp 0.1 ~ 1.0 (1 ~ 10) 6 6 Feedback High Damp 0.1 ~ 1.0 (1 ~ 10) 7
7 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 7 3 7 Cch Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 8
8 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8 8 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 9 3
9 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 9 3 9 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
10 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10 10 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 11 3
11 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12
21 TEMPO DELAY (MONO) ~ 22 TEMPO DELAY (STEREO)
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table 010 DELAY L, R
Number No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
1 Delay Time 32nd, 16th/3, 32nd., 16th, 8th/ (2 ~ 14) 1 Number
3, 16th., 8th, 4th/3, 8th., 4th, 1 Lch Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 1486.0ms (1 ~ 14860) 1
2th/3, 4th., 2nd
2 Rch Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 1486.0ms (1 ~ 14860) 2
2 Lag -63ms ~ +63ms (1 ~ 127) 2
3 Lch Feedback Time 0.1ms ~ 1486.0ms (1 ~ 14860) 3
3 L/R Diffusion -63ms ~ +63ms (1 ~ 127) 3
4 Rch Feedback Time 0.1ms ~ 1486.0ms (1 ~ 1486) 4
4 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 4
5 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 5
5 Feedback High Dump 0.1 ~ 1.0 (1 ~ 10) 5
7 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 7
8 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
9 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 9
10 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12
23 TEMPO CROSS DELAY
011 ECHO
Number
1 L→R Delay Time 32nd, 16th/3, 32nd., 16th, 8th/ (2 ~ 14) 1
3, 16th., 8th, 4th/3, 8th., 4th, 1 Lch Delay1 Time 0.1ms ~ 743.0ms (1 ~ 7430) 1
2th/3, 4th., 2nd 2 Rch Delay1 Time 0.1ms ~ 743.0ms (1 ~ 7430) 2
2 R→L Delay Time 32nd, 16th/3, 32nd., 16th, 8th/ (2 ~ 14) 2 3 Lch Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 5
3, 16th., 8th, 4th/3, 8th., 4th, 4 Rch Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 6
2th/3, 4th., 2nd
3 Lag -63ms ~ +63ms (1 ~ 127) 3
6 Lch Delay2 Time 0.1ms ~ 743.0ms (1 ~ 7430) 9
4 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 4
7 Rch Delay2 Time 0.1ms ~ 743.0ms (1 ~ 7430) 10
8 Delay2 Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 11
6 Input Select L, R, L&R (0 ~ 2) 6
10 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 14
8 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8
12 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 16
10 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
012 CROSS DELAY
24 CROSS DELAY
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table Number
Number
1 L->R Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 743.0ms (1 ~ 7430) 1
1 L→R Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 740.0ms (0 ~ 127) 1 19
2 R->L Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 743.0ms (1 ~ 7430) 2
2 R→L Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 740.0ms (0 ~ 127) 2 19
3 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 3
3 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 3
7 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
7 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 7
9 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12
9 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 9
013 CONTROL DELAY (MONO)
25 ECHO
Number
1 Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 1486.0ms (1 ~ 14860) 1
1 Lch Delay1 Time 0.1ms ~ 740.0ms (0 ~ 127) 1 19
2 Delay Transition Rate 1 ~ 48 (1 ~ 48) 2
2 Rch Delay1 Time 0.1ms ~ 740.0ms (0 ~ 127) 2 19
3 Delay Time Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
3 Lch Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 3
4 Control Type normal, scratch (0 ~ 1) 4
4 Rch Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 4
5 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 5
7 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 7
8 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
9 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 9
10 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12
3. Variation
014 CONTROL DELAY (STEREO)
001 HALL1 ~ 008 PLATE No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
Number 1 Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 743.0ms (1 ~ 7430) 1
1 Reverb Time 0.3s ~ 30.0s (0 ~ 69) 1 4 2 Delay Transition Rate 1 ~ 48 (1 ~ 48) 2
2 Initial Delay 0.1ms ~ 99.3ms (0 ~ 63) 2 5 3 Delay Time Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
3 Reverb Delay 0.1ms ~ 99.3ms (0 ~ 63) 3 5 4 Control Type normal, scratch (0 ~ 1) 4
4 ER/Rev Balance E63>R ~ E=R ~ E<R63 (1 ~ 127) 4 5 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 5
5 HPF Cutoff Frequency 20Hz ~ 8.0kHz (0 ~ 52) 5 3 6 Feedback High Damp 0.1 ~ 1.0 (1 ~ 10) 6
6 LPF Cutoff Frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 6 3 7 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 9 3
7 Diffusion 0 ~ 10 (0 ~ 10) 7 8 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
8 Density 0~4 (0 ~ 4) 8 9 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 11 3
9 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 9 10 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12
316 RS7000
015 TEMPO DELAY (MONO) ~ 016 TEMPO DELAY (STEREO) 034 SYMPHONIC
Number Number
1 Delay Time 32nd, 16th/3, 32nd., 16th, 8th/ (2 ~ 14) 1 1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1
3, 16th., 8th, 4th/3, 8th., 4th, 2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
2th/3, 4th., 2nd
2 Lag -63ms ~ +63ms (1 ~ 127) 2
3 L/R Diffusion -63ms ~ +63ms (1 ~ 127) 3
5 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 6
4 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 5
7 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8
8 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz ~ 10.0kHz (14 ~ 54) 9 3
7 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
9 EQ Mid Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
10 EQ Mid Width 0.1 ~ 12.0 (1 ~ 120) 11
9 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12
035 ENSEMBLE DETUNE
017 TEMPO CROSS DELAY
Number
1 Detune -50cent ~ +50cent (14 ~ 114) 1
1 L->R Delay Time 32nd, 16th/3, 32nd., 16th, 8th/ (2 ~ 14) 1
3, 16th., 8th, 4th/3, 8th., 4th, 2 Lch Initial Delay 0.0ms ~ 50.0ms (0 ~ 127) 2 2
2th/3, 4th., 2nd 3 Rch Initial Delay 0.0ms ~ 50.0ms (0 ~ 127) 3 2
2 R->L Delay Time 32nd, 16th/3, 32nd., 16th, 8th/ (2 ~ 14) 2 4 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 5 3
3, 16th., 8th, 4th/3, 8th., 4th, 5 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 6
2th/3, 4th., 2nd
3 Lag -63ms ~ +63ms (1 ~ 127) 3
7 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8
4 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 5
5 Feedback High Dump 0.1 ~ 1.0 (1 ~ 10) 6 036 FLANGER 1 ~ 038 FLANGER 3
6 Input Select L, R, L&R (0 ~ 2) 8 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
7 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 9 3 Number
8 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10 1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1
9 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 11 3 2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
10 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12 3 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 3
018 EARLY REFLECTION1 ~ 019 EARLY REFLECTION2 5 LFO Phase Difference -180deg ~ +180deg (4 ~ 124) 5
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table 6 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz ~ 10.0kHz (14 ~ 54) 6 3
Number
7 EQ Mid Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 7
1 Type S-hall, L-hall, random, reverse, (0 ~ 5) 1
plate, spring 8 EQ Mid Width 0.1 ~ 12.0 (1 ~ 120) 8
2 Room Size 0.1 ~ 20.0 (0 ~ 127) 2 6 9 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 9 3
3 Initial Delay 0.1ms ~ 200.0ms (0 ~ 127) 3 5 10 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
4 Liveness 0 ~ 10 (0 ~ 10) 4 11 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 11 3
5 HPF Cutoff Frequency 20Hz ~ 8.0kHz (0 ~ 52) 5 3 12 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12
6 LPF Cutoff Frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 6 3
039 V-FLANGER
7 Diffusion 0 ~ 10 (0 ~ 10) 7 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
8 Density 0~3 (0 ~ 3) 8 Number
9 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 9 1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1
10 Feedback High Damp 0.1 ~ 1.0 (1 ~ 10) 10 2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
3 LFO Wave Triangle, Sine, Random (0 ~ 2) 3
020 GATE REVERB ~ 021 REVERSE GATE
4 Analog Feel 0 ~ 10 (0 ~ 10) 4
Number 5 Feedback Level -100 ~ +100% (0 ~ 200) 5
1 Type type-A, type-B (0 ~ 1) 1 6 Feedback High Damp 0.1 ~ 1.0 (1 ~ 10) 6
2 Room Size 0.1 ~ 20.0 (0 ~ 127) 2 6 7 Delay offset 0.09 ~ 36.21ms (0 ~ 139) 7
3 Initial Delay 0.1ms ~ 200.0ms (0 ~ 127) 3 5 8 Modulation Phase -180 ~ +180 (0 ~ 16) 8
4 Liveness 0 ~ 10 (0 ~ 10) 4 9 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 9 3
5 HPF Cutoff Frequency 20Hz ~ 8.0kHz (0 ~ 52) 5 3 10 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
6 LPF Cutoff Frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 6 3 11 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 11 3
7 Diffusion 0 ~ 10 (0 ~ 10) 7 12 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12
8 Density 0~3 (0 ~ 3) 8 13 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz ~ 10.0kHz (14 ~ 54) 13 3
9 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 9 14 EQ Mid Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 14
10 Feedback High Damp 0.1 ~ 1.0 (1 ~ 10) 10 15 EQ Mid Width 0.1 ~ 12.0 (1 ~ 120) 15
022 KARAOKE 1 ~ 024 KARAOKE 3 040 TEMPO FLANGER

Number Number
1 Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 400.0ms (0 ~ 127) 1 7 1 LFO Speed 16th, 8th/3, 16th., 8th, 4th/3, (5 ~ 21) 1
8th., 4th, 2th/3, 4th., 2nd,
Appendix
2 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 2 Whole/3, 2nd., 4thx4, 4thx5,
3 HPF Cutoff Frequency 20Hz ~ 8.0kHz (0 ~ 52) 3 3 4thx6, 4thx7, 4thx8
4 LPF Cutoff Frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 4 3 2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
3 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 3
025 CHORUS 1 ~ 033 CELESTE 4
4 Delay offset 0.0ms ~ 50.0ms (0 ~ 127) 4 2
Number 5 LFO Phase Difference -180deg ~ +180deg (4 ~ 124) 5
1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1 6 LFO Phase Reset off (free run), Key On Reset, (0 ~ 2) 6
SEQ Start Reset
2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
3 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 3
8 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
10 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12
6 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 6
12 EQ Mid Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 14
8 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8
13 EQ Mid Width 0.1 ~ 12.0 (1 ~ 120) 15
10 EQ Mid Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
11 EQ Mid Width 0.1 ~ 12.0 (1 ~ 120) 11
12 Input Mode mono/stereo (0 ~ 1) 12
RS7000 317
41 DYNAMIC FLANGER 046 TREMOLO

Number Number
1 Sensitivity 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1 1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1
2 Delay Time Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2 2 AM Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
3 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 3 3 PM Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
4 Direction up, down (0 ~ 1) 5 4 LFO Phase Difference -180deg ~ +180deg (4 ~ 124) 4
5 Attack Time 0.3ms ~ 227ms (0 ~ 127) 6 17 5 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 5 3
6 Release Time 2.6ms ~ 2171ms (0 ~ 127) 7 18 6 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 6
7 Release Curve 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 8 7 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 7 3
8 Dyna Threshold Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 9 8 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8
9 Dyna Level Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 10 9 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz ~ 10.0kHz (14 ~ 54) 9 3
10 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 13 3 10 EQ Mid Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
11 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 14 11 EQ Mid Width 0.1 ~ 12.0 (1 ~ 120) 11
12 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 15 3 12 Input Mode mono/stereo (0 ~ 1) 12
13 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 16
047 AUTO PAN
42 PHASER 1 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
Number 1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1
1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1 2 L/R Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2 3 F/R Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
3 Phase Shift Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3 4 PAN Direction L<>R, L>>R, L<<R, Lturn, (0 ~ 5) 4
4 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 4 Rturn, L/R
5 Stage 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 (4 ~ 12) 5 5 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 5 3
6 Diffusion mono/stereo (0 ~ 1) 6 6 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 6
7 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 9 3 7 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 7 3
8 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10 8 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8
9 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 11 3 9 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz ~ 10.0kHz (14 ~ 54) 9 3
10 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12 10 EQ Mid Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
11 EQ Mid Width 0.1 ~ 12.0 (1 ~ 120) 11
043 PHASER 2
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table 048 ROTARY SPEAKER
1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1 Number
2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2 1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1
3 Phase Shift Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3 2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
4 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 4 3 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 5 3
5 Stage 3, 4, 5, 6 (3 ~ 6) 5 4 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 6
6 LFO Phase Difference -180deg ~ +180deg (4 ~ 124) 6 5 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 7 3
7 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 9 3 6 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8
8 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10 7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz ~ 10.0kHz (14 ~ 54) 9 3
9 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 11 3 8 EQ Mid Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
10 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12 9 EQ Mid Width 0.1 ~ 12.0 (1 ~ 120) 11
44 TEMPO PHASER 049 DISTORTION+ROTARY SPEAKER ~ 050 OVERDRIVE+ROTARY SPEAKER

Number Number
1 LFO Speed 16th, 8th/3, 16th., 8th, 4th/3, (5 ~ 21) 1 1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1
8th., 4th, 2th/3, 4th., 2nd, 2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
Whole/3, 2nd., 4thx4, 4thx5, 3 Drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 5
4thx6, 4thx7, 4thx8
4 Drive LPF Cutoff Freq 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 6 3
2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
5 Drive Output Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 7
3 Phase Shift Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
4 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 4
7 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
5 Stage 3, 4, 5, 6 (3 ~ 6) 5
6 LFO Phase Reset off (free run), Key On Reset, (0 ~ 2) 6
SEQ Start Reset 9 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12
7 LFO Phase Difference -180deg ~ +180deg (4 ~ 124) 7

051 AMP SIM.+ROTARY SPEAKER
(deg)
9 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10 1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1
10 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 11 3 2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
11 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12 3 Amp Type off, stack, combo, tube (0 ~ 3) 5
4 Amp Drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 6
045 DYNAMIC PHASER
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table 5 Amp LPF Cutoff Freq 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 7 3
Number 6 Amp Output Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 8
1 Sensitivity 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1 7 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 9 3
2 Dyna Level Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2 8 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
3 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 3 9 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 11 3
4 Stage 4, 5, 6 (4 ~ 6) 4 10 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12
5 Direction up, down (0 ~ 1) 5
052 2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER
6 Attack Time 0.3ms ~ 227ms (0 ~ 127) 6 17
7 Release Time 2.6ms ~ 2171ms (0 ~ 127) 7 18 Number
8 Release Curve 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 8 1 Rotor Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1
9 Dyna Threshold Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 9 2 Drive Low 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
10 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 13 3 3 Drive High 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
11 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 14 4 Divide Frequency 100Hz ~ 10.0kHz (14 ~ 54) 5 3
12 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 15 3 5 Low/High Balance L63>H ~ L=H ~ L<H63 (1 ~ 127) 6
13 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 16 6 Mic L-R Angle 0deg ~ 180deg (0 ~ 60) 7
8 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
10 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12
318 RS7000
053 DISTORTION+2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER ~ 054 OVERDRIVE+2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER 060 V- DISTORTION
Number Number
1 Rotor Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1 1 Over Drive 0 ~ 100% (0 ~ 100) 1
2 Drive Low 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2 2 Device Transistor, Vintage Tube, (0 ~ 4) 2
3 Drive High 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3 Dsitortion1, Dsitortion2, Fuzz
4 Divide Frequency 100Hz ~ 10.0kHz (14 ~ 54) 5 3 3 Speaker Type Flat, Stack, Combo, Twin, (0 ~ 5) 3
Radio, Megaphone
5 Low/High Balance L63>H ~ L=H ~ L<H63 (1 ~ 127) 6
4 Presence -10 ~ 10 (0 ~ 20) 4
6 Mic L-R Angle 0deg ~ 180deg (0 ~ 60) 7
5 Dist Output Level 0 ~ 100% (0 ~ 100) 5
7 Drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 9
6 Delay Mix 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 6
8 Drive LPF Cutoff Freq 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 10 3
7 Lch Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 1486.0ms (1 ~ 14860) 7
9 Feedback Time 0.1ms ~ 1486.0ms (1 ~ 14860) 9
11 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 14
10 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 10
13 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 16
062 AMP SIMULATOR
055 AMP SIM.+2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER
Number
1 drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1
1 Rotor Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1
2 AMP type off, stack, combo, tube (0 ~ 3) 2
2 Drive Low 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
3 LPF cutoff frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 3 3
3 Drive High 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
4 edge 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 4
4 Divide Frequency 100Hz ~ 10.0kHz (14 ~ 54) 5 3
5 output level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 5
5 Low/High Balance L63>H ~ L=H ~ L<H63 (1 ~ 127) 6
6 Mic L-R Angle 0deg ~ 180deg (0 ~ 60) 7 063 DIST+DELAY ~ 064 OVERDRIVE+DELAY
7 Amp Type off, stack, combo, tube (0 ~ 3) 9 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
8 Amp Drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 10 Number
9 Amp LPF Cutoff Freq 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 11 3 1 Dist Drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1
10 Amp Output Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 12 2 Dist Output Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
11 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 13 3 3 Dist EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 3
12 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 14 4 Dist EQ Mid Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 4
13 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 15 3 5 Delay Time L 0.1ms ~ 1486.0ms (1 ~ 14860) 5
14 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 16 6 Delay Time R 0.1ms ~ 1486.0ms (1 ~ 14860) 6
7 Delay Feedback Time 0.1ms ~ 1486.0ms (1 ~ 14860) 7
056 DUAL ROTOR SPEAKER1 ~ 057 DUAL ROTOR SPEAKER2 8 Delay Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 8
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table 9 Delay Mix 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 9
Number
1 Speed Control slow, fast (0 ~ 1) 1 065 COMPRESSOR
2 Slow-Fast Time of Rotor 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
3 Slow-Fast Time of Horn 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 4 Number
4 Rotor Speed Slow 0.0Hz ~ 2.65Hz (0 ~ 63) 5 1 1 Threshold -48dB ~ -6dB (79 ~ 121) 1
5 Horn Speed Slow 0.0Hz ~ 2.65Hz (0 ~ 63) 6 1 2 Ratio 1 ~ 20.0 (0 ~ 7) 2 10
6 Rotor Speed Fast 2.692Hz ~ 39.70Hz (64 ~ 127) 7 1 3 Output Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
7 Horn Speed Fast 2.692Hz ~ 39.70Hz (64 ~ 127) 8 1 4 Attack 1ms ~ 40ms (0 ~ 19) 5 8
8 Drive Low 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 9 5 Release 10ms ~ 680ms (0 ~ 15) 6 9
9 Drive High 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 10

066 NOISE GATE
10 Low/High Balance L63>H ~ L=H ~ L<H63 (1 ~ 127) 11 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
11 Mic L-R Angle 0deg ~ 180deg (0 ~ 60) 12 Number
12 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 13 3 1 Threshold -72dB ~ -30dB (55 ~ 97) 1
13 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 14 2 Output Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
14 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 15 3 3 Attack 1ms ~ 40ms (0 ~ 19) 3 8
15 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 16 4 Release 10ms ~ 680ms (0 ~ 15) 4 9
058 DISTORTION, 061 OVERDRIVE 067 COMP+DIST+DELAY ~ 068 COMP+OVERDRIVE+DELAY

Number Number
1 Drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1 1 Comp Threshold -48dB ~ -6dB (79 ~ 121) 1
2 LPF Cutoff Frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 2 3 2 Comp Ratio 1 ~ 20.0 (0 ~ 7) 2 10
3 Output Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3 3 Comp Attack 1ms ~ 40ms (0 ~ 19) 3 8
4 Edge 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 4 4 Comp Release 10ms ~ 680ms (0 ~ 15) 4 9
5 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 5 3 5 Drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 5
6 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 6 6 Drive Output Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 6
7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz ~ 10.0kHz (14 ~ 54) 9 3 7 Drive EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 7
Appendix
8 EQ Mid Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10 8 Drive EQ Mid Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8
9 EQ Mid Width 0.1 ~ 12.0 (1 ~ 120) 11 9 Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 1486.0ms (1 ~ 14860) 9
10 Delay Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 10
059 COMP DISTORTION
11 Delay Mix 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 11
Number
069 MULTI COMPRESSOR1
1 Threshold -48dB ~ -6dB (79 ~ 121) 1 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
2 Ratio 1 ~ 20.0 (0 ~ 7) 2 10 Number
3 Attack 1ms ~ 40ms (0 ~ 19) 3 8 1 Type Normal, Low, Mid, High, Low/ (0 ~11) 1
4 Release 10ms ~ 680ms (0 ~ 15) 4 9 High, Low/Mid, Mid/High, Full
Bit, Wild, Attacky, Low End,
5 Drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 5 Hard
6 LPF Cutoff Frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 6 3 2 Low Gain Offset -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 2
7 Output Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 7 3 Mid Gain Offset -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 3
8 Edge 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 8 4 High Gain Offset -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 4
9 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 9 3 5 Threshold Offset -32 ~ +32 (32 ~ 96) 5
10 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
12 EQ Mid Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 14
13 EQ Mid Width 0.1 ~ 12.0 (1 ~ 120) 15
RS7000 319
070 MULTI COMPRESSOR2 079 WAH+DIST+DELAY ~ 080 WAH+OVERDRIVE+DELAY

Number Number
1 Low Gain -∞ ~ +18dB (0 ~ 55) 1 14 1 Wah Sensitive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1
2 Mid Gain -∞ ~ +18dB (0 ~ 55) 2 14 2 Wah Cutoff Frequency 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
3 High Gain -∞ ~ +18dB (0 ~ 55) 3 14 3 Wah Resonance 1 ~ 12.0 (10 ~ 120) 3
4 Divide Freq 32Hz,1.2kHz ~ 630Hz,10.0kHz (0 ~ 89) 4 15 4 Wah Release 10ms ~ 680ms (52 ~ 67) 4 12
5 Low Threshold -54dB ~ -6dB (73 ~ 121) 5 5 Dist Drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 5
6 Low Ratio 1 ~ 20.0 (0 ~ 7) 6 10 6 Dist Output Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 6
7 Low Attack 1ms ~ 200ms (0 ~ 29) 7 8 7 Dist EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 7
8 Low Release 10ms ~ 3000ms (0 ~ 15) 8 9 8 Dist EQ Mid Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8
9 Mid Threshold -54dB ~ -6dB (73 ~ 121) 9 9 Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 1486.0ms (1 ~ 14860) 9
10 Mid Ratio 1 ~ 20.0 (0 ~ 7) 10 10 10 Delay Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 10
11 Mid Attack 1ms ~ 200ms (0 ~ 29) 11 8 11 Delay Mix 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 11
12 Mid Release 10ms ~ 3000ms (0 ~ 15) 12 9
081 LO-FI
13 High Threshold -54dB ~ -6dB (73 ~ 121) 13
14 High Ratio 1 ~ 20.0 (0 ~ 7) 14 10 Number
15 High Attack 1ms ~ 200ms (0 ~ 29) 15 8 1 Sampling Freq. Control 44.1kHz ~ 344.5Hz (0 ~ 127) 1
16 High Release 10ms ~ 3000ms (0 ~ 15) 16 9 2 Word Length 1 ~ 127 (1 ~ 127) 2
3 Output Gain -6dB ~ +36dB (0 ~ 42) 3
071 PITCH CHANGE1 ~ 072 PITCH CHANGE2
In [072] PITCH CHANGE2, the unit of Fine1 and Fine2 (numbers 2 and 3) is cent. 4 Filter Type thru, Power Bass, Radio, Tele- (0 ~ 5) 4
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table phone, Clean, Low
Number 5 Pre-LPF Cutoff Freq 63Hz ~ 20.0kHz (10 ~ 60) 5 3
1 Pitch -24 ~ +24 (40 ~ 88) 1 6 Pre-LPF Resonance 1 ~ 12.0 (10 ~ 120) 6
2 Fine1 -50 ~ +50 (14 ~ 114) 2 7 Bit Assign 0~6 (0 ~ 6) 7
3 Fine2 -50 ~ +50 (14 ~ 114) 3 8 Emphasis off/on (0 ~ 1) 8
4 Initial Delay 0.1ms ~ 248.9ms (0 ~ 79) 5 7 9 Input Mode mono/stereo (0 ~ 1) 9
5 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 6
082 LOW RESOLUTION
6 Pan1 L63 ~ C ~ R63 (1 ~ 127) 9
7 Output Level1 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 10 Number
8 Pan2 L63 ~ C ~ R63 (1 ~ 127) 11 1 Mod Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1
9 Output Level2 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 12 2 Mod Delay Offset 1 ~ 127 (1 ~ 127) 2
3 Mod Feedback -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 3
073 AUTO WAH
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table 4 Resolution 1,1/2 ~ 1/128 (0 ~ 7) 4
Number 5 Mod Mix Balance 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 5
1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1 6 Phase Inverse R off, wet (0 ~ 1) 6
2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
083 NOISY
3 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
4 Resonance 1 ~ 12.0 (10 ~ 120) 4 Number
5 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 5 3 1 Drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1
6 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 6 2 Mod Depth 0 ~ 10 (0 ~ 10) 2
7 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 7 3 3 Mod Speed 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
8 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8 4 Mod Feedback -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 4
5 AM Speed 0.00Hz ~ 39.7Hz (0 ~ 127) 5 1
074 AUTO WAH+DIST ~ 075 AUTO WAH+OVERDRIVE
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table 6 AM Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 6
Number 7 Mod Mix Balance 1 ~ 127 (1 ~ 127) 7
1 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 1 8 LPF Cutoff Frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 9 3
2 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2 9 LPF Resonance 1.0 ~ 12.0 (10 ~ 120) 10
3 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3 10 EQ Frequency 100Hz ~ 10.0kHz (14 ~ 54) 13 3
4 Resonance 1 ~ 12.0 (10 ~ 120) 4 11 EQ Gain -12 ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 14
5 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 5 3 12 EQ Width 1.0 ~ 12.0 (10 ~ 120) 15
6 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 6
084 ATTACK LO-FI
8 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8 Number
9 Drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 9 1 Sensitive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1
10 Drive LPF Cutoff Freq 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 10 3 2 Resolution 1,1/2 ~ 1/32 (0 ~ 5) 2
11 Drive Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 11 3 Peak Frequency 100Hz ~ 10.0kHz (14 ~ 54) 3 3
12 Drive Mid Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12 4 LPF Cutoff Frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 4 3
13 Drive Output Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 13 5 Flanger Mix Balance 1 ~ 127 (1 ~ 127) 5
6 Flanger Speed 0.00Hz ~ 39.7Hz (0 ~ 127) 6 1
076 TOUCH WAH
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table 7 Flanger LFO Wave tri, sine, saw up, saw down (0 ~ 3) 7
Number 8 Flanger Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 9
1 Sensitive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1 9 Flanger Depth Ofst R -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 10
2 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2 10 Flanger Delay 0.1 ~ 650.0ms (1 ~ 6500) 11
3 Resonance 1 ~ 12.0 (10 ~ 120) 3 11 Flanger Delay Ofst R 0 ~ -884 (0 ~ 884) 12
4 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 5 3 12 Flanger Feedback -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 13
5 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 6 13 Flanger Feedback Ofst R -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 14
6 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 7 3 14 Flanger Feedback HiDamp 0.1 ~ 1.0 (1 ~ 10) 15
7 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8 15 Feedback HiDamp Ofst R -0.9 ~ +0.9 (1 ~ 19) 16
077 TOUCH WAH+DIST ~ 078 TOUCH WAH+OVERDRIVE 085 DIGITAL TURNTABLE

Number Number
1 Sensitive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1 1 Click Density 0~5 (0 ~ 5) 1
2 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2 2 Click Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
3 Resonance 1 ~ 12.0 (10 ~ 120) 3 3 Noise Tone 0~6 (0 ~ 6) 3
4 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 5 3 4 Noise Mod Speed 0.00Hz ~ 39.7Hz (0 ~ 127) 4 1
5 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 6 5 Noise Mod Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 5
6 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 7 3 6 Dry Send to Noise 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 6
7 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8 7 Noise LPF Freq 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 7 3
8 Drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 9 8 Noise LPF Q 1.0 ~ 12.0 (10 ~ 120) 8
9 Drive LPF Cutoff Freq 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 10 3 9 Noise Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 9
10 Drive Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 11 10 Dry LPF Frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 10 3
11 Drive Mid Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12 11 Dry Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 11
320 RS7000
086 DIGITAL SCRATCH 091 SLICE

Number Number
1 Input Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1 1 Divide Type 4th, 8th, 16th (0 ~ 2) 1
2 Initial Delay 0.1 ~ 460.0ms (1 ~ 4600) 2 2 Gate Time 0 ~ 100% (0 ~ 100) 2
3 Scratch Speed 1 ~ 127 (1 ~ 127) 3 3 Divide Min Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
4 Scratch Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 4 4 Drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 4
5 Auto Pan Speed 0.00Hz ~ 39.7Hz (0 ~ 127) 5 1 5 Pan AEG Type A~E (0 ~ 4) 5
6 Auto Pan Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 6 6 Pan AEG Min Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 6
7 EQ Frequency 100Hz ~ 10.0kHz (14 ~ 54) 9 3 7 Pan Type A~J (0 ~ 9) 7
8 EQ Gain -12 ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10 8 Pan Depth -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 8
9 EQ Width 1.0 ~ 12.0 (10 ~ 120) 11 9 AEG Phase 0 ~ 15 ( ×16th note) (0 ~ 15) 9
10 EQ low frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 13 3
087 AUTO SYNTH 11 EQ low gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 14

No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table 12 EQ high frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 15 3
Number 13 EQ high gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 16
1 Mod Speed 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1
2 Mod Wave Type typeA, typeB, typeC, typeD (0 ~ 3) 2 092 3-BAND EQ
3 Mod Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
Number
4 Mod Depth Ofst R -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 4
5 LPF Frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 5 3
2 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 2
6 HPF Frequency 20Hz ~ 8.0kHz (0 ~ 52) 6 3
7 Dry Mix Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 7
4 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 4
8 Delay Time 0.1 ~ 370.0ms (1 ~ 3700) 8
9 Delay Time Ofst R 0 ~ 884 (0 ~ 884) 9
6 EQ Mid Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 6
10 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 10
7 EQ Mid Width 0.1 ~ 12.0 (1 ~ 120) 7
11 FB Level Ofst R -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 11
12 Delay Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 12
13 AM Speed 0.00Hz ~ 39.7Hz (0 ~ 127) 13 1 093 2-BAND EQ
14 AM Wave tri, sine, saw up, saw down (0 ~ 3) 14 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
Number
15 AM Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 15
16 AM Inverse R normal, inverse (0 ~ 1) 16
2 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 2
088 TECH MODULATION 3 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 3 3
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table 4 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 4
Number
1 Mod Speed 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1 094 HARMONIC ENHANCER
2 Mod Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
Number
3 Pre Mod HPF Cutoff Freq 20Hz ~ 8.0kHz (0 ~ 52) 3 3
4 Mod Gain -12 ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 4
2 Drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
5 Mod LPF Cutoff Freq 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 5 3
3 Mix Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
6 Mod LPF Resonance 1.0 ~ 12.0 (10 ~ 120) 6
7 Mod Mix Balance D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 (1 ~ 127) 7 095 VOICE CANCEL
8 Delay Time 0.1 ~ 740.0ms (1 ~ 7400) 9 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
9 Delay Time Ofst R 0 ~ 884 (0 ~ 884) 10 Number
10 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 11 1 Low Adjust 0 ~ 26 (0 ~ 26) 1
11 Feedback Level Ofst R -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 12 2 High Adjust 0 ~ 26 (0 ~ 26) 2
12 Feedback Hi Damp 0.1 ~ 1.0 (1 ~ 10) 13
096 AMBIENCE
13 Feedback Hi Damp Ofst R -0.9 ~ +0.9 (1 ~ 19) 14
Number
089 JUMP
1 Delay Time 0.0ms ~ 50.0ms (0 ~ 127) 1 2
Number 2 Wet Output Phase normal/inverse (0 ~ 1) 2
1 Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1 3 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 5 3
2 Speed 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2 4 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 6
3 Direction L<>R, L>>R (0 ~ 1) 3 5 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 7 3
4 Type typeA, typeB, typeC (0 ~ 2) 4 6 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 8
5 Jump Wave Type typeA, typeB, typeC, typeD (0 ~ 3) 5
097 TALKING MODULATOR
6 Resolution 1,1/2 ~ 1/256 (0 ~ 8) 6
7 LPF Frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 7 3 Number
8 HPF Frequency 20Hz ~ 8.0kHz (0 ~ 52) 8 3 1 Vowel a/i/u/e/o (0 ~ 4) 1
2 Move Speed 1 ~ 62 (1 ~ 62) 2
090 ISOLATION
3 Drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
Appendix
Number 4 Output Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 4
1 On/off SW off, on (0 ~ 1) 1
098 RING MODULATOR
2 Low Level -64 ~ +63 (0 ~ 127) 2
3 Mid Level -64 ~ +63 (0 ~ 127) 3 Number
4 High Level -64 ~ +63 (0 ~ 127) 4 1 Carrier Freq Coarse 0.5 - 5kHz (0 ~ 127) 1 16
5 Low Mute off/on (0 ~ 1) 5 2 Carrier Freq Fine 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
6 Mid Mute off/on (0 ~ 1) 6 3 HPF Cutoff Frequency 20Hz ~ 8.0kHz (0 ~ 52) 3 3
7 High Mute off/on (0 ~ 1) 7 4 LPF Cutoff Frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 4 3
5 LFO Wave tri, sine (0 ~ 1) 5
6 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 6 1
7 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 7
9 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
11 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12
RS7000 321
099 DYNAMIC RING MODULATOR 4 MULTI COMPRESSOR1

Number Number
1 Sensitivity 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1 1 Type Normal, Low, Mid, High, Low/ (0 ~ 11) 1
2 HPF Cutoff Frequency 20Hz ~ 8.0kHz (0 ~ 52) 3 3 High, Low/Mid, Mid/High, Full
Bit, Wild, Attacky, Low End,
3 LPF Cutoff Frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 4 3 Hard
4 Direction up, down (0 ~ 1) 5 2 Low Gain Offset -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 2
5 Attack Time 0.3ms ~ 227ms (0 ~ 127) 6 17 3 Mid Gain Offset -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 3
6 Release Time 2.6ms ~ 2171ms (0 ~ 127) 7 18 4 High Gain Offset -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 4
7 Release Curve 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 8 5 Threshold Offset -32 ~ +32 (32 ~ 96) 5
8 Dyna Threshold Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 9
9 Dyna Level Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 10 5 RING MODULATOR
10 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 13 3 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
Number
11 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 14
1 Carrier Freq Coarse 0.5 - 5kHz (0 ~ 127) 1 16
2 Carrier Freq Fine 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 2
13 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 16
100 DYNAMIC FILTER 4 LPF Cutoff Frequency 1.0kHz ~ 20.0kHz (34 ~ 60) 4 3
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table 5 LFO Wave tri, sine (0 ~ 1) 5
Number 6 LFO Speed 0.0Hz ~ 39.70Hz (0 ~ 127) 6 1
1 Sensitivity 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1 7 LFO Depth 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 7
2 Filter Type LPF(12dB),LPF(18dB),LPF(24 (0 ~ 5) 2 8 Dry/Wet Balance D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 (1 ~ 127) 8
dB),HPF, BPF, BEF
3 Dyna Level Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
10 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
4 Resonance -16 ~ +111 (0 ~ 127) 4
12 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12
6 Attack Time 0.3ms ~ 227ms (0 ~ 127) 6 17
7 Release Time 2.6ms ~ 2171ms (0 ~ 127) 7 18 6 V- DISTORTION
8 Release Curve 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 8 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
9 Dyna Threshold Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 9 Number
10 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz (4 ~ 40) 13 3 1 Over Drive 0 ~ 100% (0 ~ 100) 1
11 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 14 2 Device Transistor, Vintage Tube, (0 ~ 4) 2
Dsitortion1, Dsitortion2, Fuzz
3 Speaker Type Flat, Stack, Combo, Twin, (0 ~ 5) 3
13 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 16 Radio, Megaphone
4 Presence -10 ~ 10 (0 ~ 20) 4
3. Master
5 Dist Output Level 0 ~ 100% (0 ~ 100) 5
1 ISOLATION 6 Delay Mix 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 6
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table 7 Lch Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 743.0ms (1 ~ 7430) 7
Number
1 On/off SW off, on (0 ~ 1) 1
9 Feedback Time 0.1ms ~ 743.0ms (1 ~ 7430) 9
2 Low Level -64 ~ +63 (0 ~ 127) 2
10 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 10
3 Mid Level -64 ~ +63 (0 ~ 127) 3
4 High Level -64 ~ +63 (0 ~ 127) 4
12 Dry/Wet Balance D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 (1 ~ 127) 12
5 Low Mute off, on (0 ~ 1) 5
6 Mid Mute off, on (0 ~ 1) 6 7 LO-FI
7 High Mute off, on (0 ~ 1) 7 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
Number
2 DYNAMIC FILTER 1 Sampling Freq. Control 44.1kHz ~ 344.5Hz (0 ~ 127) 1 13
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table 2 Word Length 1 ~ 127 (1 ~ 127) 2
Number
3 Output Gain -6dB ~ +36dB (0 ~ 42) 3
1 Sensitivity 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 1
4 Filter Type thru, Power Bass, Radio, Tele- (0 ~ 5) 4
2 Filter Type LPF(12dB), LPF(18dB), (0 ~ 5) 2 phone, Clean, Low
LPF(24dB), HPF, BPF, BEF
5 Pre-LPF Cutoff Freq 63Hz ~ 20.0kHz (10 ~ 60) 5 3
3 Dyna Level Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
6 Pre-LPF Resonance 1 ~ 12.0 (10 ~ 120) 6
4 Resonance -16 ~ +111 (0 ~ 127) 4
7 Bit Assign 0~6 (0 ~ 6) 7
8 Emphasis off/on (0 ~ 1) 8
6 Attack Time 0.3ms ~ 227ms (0 ~ 127) 6 17
7 Release Time 2.6ms ~ 2171ms (0 ~ 127) 7 18
8 Release Curve 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 8
9 Dyna Threshold Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 9 8 SLICE
10 Dry/Wet Balance D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 (1 ~ 127) 10 No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table
12 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 14 1 Divide Type 4th, 8th, 16th (0 ~ 2) 1
13 EQ High Frequency 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz (28 ~ 58) 15 3 2 Gate Time 0 ~ 100% (0 ~ 100) 2
14 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 16 3 Divide Min Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
4 Drive 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 4
3 CONTROL DELAY (STEREO) 5 Pan AEG Type A~E (0 ~ 4) 5
No. Parameter Range Value MIDI Parameter Table 6 Pan AEG Min Level 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 6
Number
7 Pan Type A~J (0 ~ 9) 7
1 Delay Time 0.1ms ~ 371.5ms (1 ~ 3715) 1
8 Pan Depth -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 8
2 Delay Transition Rate 1 ~ 48 (1 ~ 48) 2
9 AEG Phase 0 ~ 15 (× 16th note) (0 ~ 15) 9
3 Delay Time Offset 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ 127) 3
4 Control Type normal, scratch (0 ~ 1) 4
5 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 (1 ~ 127) 5
12 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 14
14 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 16
9 EQ Low Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 10
11 EQ High Gain -12dB ~ +12dB (52 ~ 76) 12
322 RS7000
10. Effect Data/Value Table
Table#1 Table#2 Table#3 Table#4 Table#5

LFO Frequency Modulation Delay Offset EQ Frequency Reverb time Delay Time (200.0ms)
Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value
0 0.00 43 1.81 86 5.38 0 0.0 43 4.3 86 8.6 0 THRU(20) 43 2.8k 0 0.3 43 4.6 0 0.1 43 67.8 86 135.5
1 0.04 44 1.85 87 5.55 1 0.1 44 4.4 87 8.7 1 22 44 3.2k 1 0.4 44 4.7 1 1.7 44 69.4 87 137.0
2 0.08 45 1.89 88 5.72 2 0.2 45 4.5 88 8.8 2 25 45 3.6k 2 0.5 45 4.8 2 3.2 45 70.9 88 138.6
3 0.13 46 1.94 89 6.06 3 0.3 46 4.6 89 8.9 3 28 46 4.0k 3 0.6 46 4.9 3 4.8 46 72.5 89 140.2
4 0.17 47 1.98 90 6.39 4 0.4 47 4.7 90 9.0 4 32 47 4.5k 4 0.7 47 5.0 4 6.4 47 74.1 90 141.8
5 0.21 48 2.02 91 6.73 5 0.5 48 4.8 91 9.1 5 36 48 5.0k 5 0.8 48 5.5 5 8.0 48 75.7 91 143.3
6 0.25 49 2.06 92 7.07 6 0.6 49 4.9 92 9.2 6 40 49 5.6k 6 0.9 49 6.0 6 9.5 49 77.2 92 144.9
7 0.29 50 2.10 93 7.40 7 0.7 50 5.0 93 9.3 7 45 50 6.3k 7 1.0 50 6.5 7 11.1 50 78.8 93 146.5
8 0.34 51 2.15 94 7.74 8 0.8 51 5.1 94 9.4 8 50 51 7.0k 8 1.1 51 7.0 8 12.7 51 80.4 94 148.1
9 0.38 52 2.19 95 8.08 9 0.9 52 5.2 95 9.5 9 56 52 8.0k 9 1.2 52 7.5 9 14.3 52 81.9 95 149.6
10 0.42 53 2.23 96 8.41 10 1.0 53 5.3 96 9.6 10 63 53 9.0k 10 1.3 53 8.0 10 15.8 53 83.5 96 151.2
11 0.46 54 2.27 97 8.75 11 1.1 54 5.4 97 9.7 11 70 54 10.0k 11 1.4 54 8.5 11 17.4 54 85.1 97 152.8
12 0.51 55 2.31 98 9.08 12 1.2 55 5.5 98 9.8 12 80 55 11.0k 12 1.5 55 9.0 12 19.0 55 86.7 98 154.4
13 0.55 56 2.36 99 9.42 13 1.3 56 5.6 99 9.9 13 90 56 12.0k 13 1.6 56 9.5 13 20.6 56 88.2 99 155.9
14 0.59 57 2.40 100 9.76 14 1.4 57 5.7 100 10.0 14 100 57 14.0k 14 1.7 57 10.0 14 22.1 57 89.8 100 157.5
15 0.63 58 2.44 101 10.1 15 1.5 58 5.8 101 11.1 15 110 58 16.0k 15 1.8 58 11.0 15 23.7 58 91.4 101 159.1
16 0.67 59 2.48 102 10.8 16 1.6 59 5.9 102 12.2 16 125 59 18.0k 16 1.9 59 12.0 16 25.3 59 93.0 102 160.6
17 0.72 60 2.52 103 11.4 17 1.7 60 6.0 103 13.3 17 140 60 THRU(20.0k) 17 2.0 60 13.0 17 26.9 60 94.5 103 162.2
18 0.76 61 2.57 104 12.1 18 1.8 61 6.1 104 14.4 18 160 18 2.1 61 14.0 18 28.4 61 96.1 104 163.8
19 0.80 62 2.61 105 12.8 19 1.9 62 6.2 105 15.5 19 180 19 2.2 62 15.0 19 30.0 62 97.7 105 165.4
20 0.84 63 2.65 106 13.5 20 2.0 63 6.3 106 17.1 20 200 20 2.3 63 16.0 20 31.6 63 99.3 106 166.9
21 0.88 64 2.69 107 14.1 21 2.1 64 6.4 107 18.6 21 225 21 2.4 64 17.0 21 33.2 64 100.8 107 168.5
22 0.93 65 2.78 108 14.8 22 2.2 65 6.5 108 20.2 22 250 22 2.5 65 18.0 22 34.7 65 102.4 108 170.1
23 0.97 66 2.86 109 15.5 23 2.3 66 6.6 109 21.8 23 280 23 2.6 66 19.0 23 36.3 66 104.0 109 171.7
24 1.01 67 2.94 110 16.2 24 2.4 67 6.7 110 23.3 24 315 24 2.7 67 20.0 24 37.9 67 105.6 110 173.2
25 1.05 68 3.03 111 16.8 25 2.5 68 6.8 111 24.9 25 355 25 2.8 68 25.0 25 39.5 68 107.1 111 174.8
26 1.09 69 3.11 112 17.5 26 2.6 69 6.9 112 26.5 26 400 26 2.9 69 30.0 26 41.0 69 108.7 112 176.4
27 1.14 70 3.20 113 18.2 27 2.7 70 7.0 113 28.0 27 450 27 3.0 27 42.6 70 110.3 113 178.0
28 1.18 71 3.28 114 19.5 28 2.8 71 7.1 114 29.6 28 500 28 3.1 28 44.2 71 111.9 114 179.5
29 1.22 72 3.37 115 20.9 29 2.9 72 7.2 115 31.2 29 560 29 3.2 29 45.7 72 113.4 115 181.1
30 1.26 73 3.45 116 22.2 30 3.0 73 7.3 116 32.8 30 630 30 3.3 30 47.3 73 115.0 116 182.7
31 1.30 74 3.53 117 23.6 31 3.1 74 7.4 117 34.3 31 700 31 3.4 31 48.9 74 116.6 117 184.3
32 1.35 75 3.62 118 24.9 32 3.2 75 7.5 118 35.9 32 800 32 3.5 32 50.5 75 118.2 118 185.8
33 1.39 76 3.70 119 26.2 33 3.3 76 7.6 119 37.5 33 900 33 3.6 33 52.0 76 119.7 119 187.4
34 1.43 77 3.87 120 27.6 34 3.4 77 7.7 120 39.0 34 1.0k 34 3.7 34 53.6 77 121.3 120 189.0
35 1.47 78 4.04 121 28.9 35 3.5 78 7.8 121 40.6 35 1.1k 35 3.8 35 55.2 78 122.9 121 190.6
36 1.51 79 4.21 122 30.3 36 3.6 79 7.9 122 42.2 36 1.2k 36 3.9 36 56.8 79 124.4 122 192.1
37 1.56 80 4.37 123 31.6 37 3.7 80 8.0 123 43.7 37 1.4k 37 4.0 37 58.3 80 126.0 123 193.7
38 1.60 81 4.54 124 33.0 38 3.8 81 8.1 124 45.3 38 1.6k 38 4.1 38 59.9 81 127.6 124 195.3
39 1.64 82 4.71 125 34.3 39 3.9 82 8.2 125 46.9 39 1.8k 39 4.2 39 61.5 82 129.2 125 196.9
40 1.68 83 4.88 126 37.0 40 4.0 83 8.3 126 48.4 40 2.0k 40 4.3 40 63.1 83 130.7 126 198.4
41 1.72 84 5.05 127 39.7 41 4.1 84 8.4 127 50.0 41 2.2k 41 4.4 41 64.6 84 132.3 127 200.0
42 1.77 85 5.22 42 4.2 85 8.5 42 2.5k 42 4.5 42 66.2 85 133.9
Table#6 Table#7 Table#8 Table#9 Table#10 Table#11 Table#12

Room Size Delay Time (400.0ms) Compressor Attack Time Compressor Release Time Compressor Ratio Reverb Width; Depth; Hight Wah Release time
Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value
0 0.1 43 6.8 0 0.1 43 135.5 86 270.9 0 1 0 10 0 1.0 0 0.5 43 11.8 86 24.2 52 10
1 0.3 44 7.0 1 3.2 44 138.6 87 274.0 1 2 1 15 1 1.5 1 0.8 44 12.1 87 24.5 53 15
2 0.4 2 6.4 45 141.8 88 277.2 2 3 2 25 2 2.0 2 1.0 45 12.3 88 24.9 54 25
3 0.6 3 9.5 46 144.9 89 280.3 3 4 3 35 3 3.0 3 1.3 46 12.6 89 25.2 55 35
4 0.7 4 12.7 47 148.1 90 283.5 4 5 4 45 4 5.0 4 1.5 47 12.9 90 25.5 56 45
5 0.9 5 15.8 48 151.2 91 286.6 5 6 5 55 5 7.0 5 1.8 48 13.1 91 25.8 57 55
6 1.0 6 19.0 49 154.4 92 289.8 6 7 6 65 6 10.0 6 2.0 49 13.4 92 26.1 58 65
7 1.2 7 22.1 50 157.5 93 292.9 7 8 7 75 7 20.0 7 2.3 50 13.7 93 26.5 59 75
8 1.4 8 25.3 51 160.7 94 296.1 8 9 8 85 8 2.6 51 14.0 94 26.8 60 85
9 1.5 9 28.4 52 163.8 95 299.2 9 10 9 100 9 2.8 52 14.2 95 27.1 61 100
10 1.7 10 31.6 53 167.0 96 302.4 10 12 10 115 10 3.1 53 14.5 96 27.5 62 115
11 1.8 11 34.7 54 170.1 97 305.5 11 14 11 140 11 3.3 54 14.8 97 27.8 63 140
12 2.0 12 37.9 55 173.3 98 308.7 12 16 12 170 12 3.6 55 15.1 98 28.1 64 170
13 2.1 13 41.0 56 176.4 99 311.8 13 18 13 230 13 3.9 56 15.4 99 28.5 65 230
14 2.3 14 44.2 57 179.6 100 315.0 14 20 14 340 14 4.1 57 15.6 100 28.8 66 340
15 2.5 15 47.3 58 182.7 101 318.1 15 23 15 680 15 4.4 58 15.9 101 29.2 67 680
16 2.6 16 50.5 59 185.9 102 321.3 16 26 16 850 16 4.6 59 16.2 102 29.5
17 2.8 17 53.6 60 189.0 103 324.4 17 30 17 1000 17 4.9 60 16.5 103 29.9
Appendix
18 2.9 18 56.8 61 192.2 104 327.6 18 35 18 1200 18 5.2 61 16.8 104 30.2
19 3.1 19 59.9 62 195.3 105 330.7 19 40 19 1500 19 5.4 62 17.1
20 3.2 20 63.1 63 198.5 106 333.9 20 50 20 1700 20 5.7 63 17.3
21 3.4 21 66.2 64 201.6 107 337.0 21 60 21 2000 21 5.9 64 17.6
22 3.5 22 69.4 65 204.8 108 340.2 22 70 22 2400 22 6.2 65 17.9
23 3.7 23 72.5 66 207.9 109 343.3 23 80 23 3000 23 6.5 66 18.2
24 3.9 24 75.7 67 211.1 110 346.5 24 100 24 6.7 67 18.5
25 4.0 25 78.8 68 214.2 111 349.6 25 120 25 7.0 68 18.8
26 4.2 26 82.0 69 217.4 112 352.8 26 140 26 7.2 69 19.1
27 4.3 27 85.1 70 220.5 113 355.9 27 160 27 7.5 70 19.4
28 4.5 28 88.3 71 223.7 114 359.1 28 180 28 7.8 71 19.7
29 4.6 29 91.4 72 226.8 115 362.2 29 200 29 8.0 72 20.0
30 4.8 30 94.6 73 230.0 116 365.4 30 8.3 73 20.2
31 5.0 31 97.7 74 233.1 117 368.5 31 8.6 74 20.5
32 5.1 32 100.9 75 236.3 118 371.7 32 8.8 75 20.8
33 5.3 33 104.0 76 239.4 119 374.8 33 9.1 76 21.1
34 5.4 34 107.2 77 242.6 120 378.0 34 9.4 77 21.4
35 5.6 35 110.3 78 245.7 121 381.1 35 9.6 78 21.7
36 5.7 36 113.5 79 248.9 122 384.3 36 9.9 79 22.0
37 5.9 37 116.6 80 252.0 123 387.4 37 10.2 80 22.4
38 6.1 38 119.8 81 255.2 124 390.6 38 10.4 81 22.7
39 6.2 39 122.9 82 258.3 125 393.7 39 10.7 82 23.0
40 6.4 40 126.1 83 261.5 126 396.9 40 11.0 83 23.3
41 6.5 41 129.2 84 264.6 127 400.0 41 11.2 84 23.6
42 6.7 42 132.4 85 267.7 42 11.5 85 23.9
RS7000 323
Table#13 Table#14 Table#15 Table#16

LO-FI Sampling Frequency Control Multi Compressor Gain Divide Frequency Carrier Frequency Coarse
Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value1 Value2 Data Value1 Value2 Data Value1 Value2 Data Value Data Value Data Value
0 44.1k 43 1.00k 86 506.9 0 -∞ 43 6 0 32 1.2k 43 160 2.5k 86 630 5.0k 0 0.5 43 47.3 86 514
1 22.1k 44 980.0 87 501.1 1 -60 44 7 1 32 1.6k 44 160 3.2k 87 630 6.3k 1 1.5 44 49.9 87 543
2 14.7k 45 958.7 88 495.5 2 -57 45 8 2 32 2.0k 45 160 4.0k 88 630 8.0k 2 2.0 45 52.8 88 574
3 11.0k 46 938.3 89 490.0 3 -54 46 9 3 32 2.5k 46 160 5.0k 89 630 10.0k 3 2.5 46 55.8 89 607
4 8.82k 47 918.8 90 484.6 4 -51 47 10 4 32 3.2k 47 160 6.3k 4 3.5 47 59.0 90 642
5 7.35k 48 900.0 91 479.3 5 -48 48 11 5 32 4.0k 48 160 8.0k 5 4.0 48 62.4 91 678
6 6.30k 49 882.0 92 474.2 6 -45 49 12 6 32 5.0k 49 160 10.0k 6 4.5 49 65.9 92 717
7 5.51k 50 864.7 93 469.1 7 -42 50 13 7 32 6.3k 50 250 1.2k 7 5.5 50 69.7 93 758
8 4.90k 51 848.1 94 464.2 8 -39 51 14 8 32 8.0k 51 250 1.6k 8 6.0 51 73.7 94 801
9 4.41k 52 832.1 95 459.4 9 -36 52 15 9 32 10.0k 52 250 2.0k 9 6.5 52 77.9 95 847
10 4.01k 53 816.7 96 454.6 10 -33 53 16 10 63 1.2k 53 250 2.5k 10 7.5 53 82.3 96 895
11 3.68k 54 801.8 97 450.0 11 -30 54 17 11 63 1.6k 54 250 3.2k 11 8.0 54 87.0 97 946
12 3.39k 55 787.5 98 445.5 12 -27 55 18 12 63 2.0k 55 250 4.0k 12 8.5 55 92.0 98 1.00k
13 3.15k 56 773.7 99 441.0 13 -24 13 63 2.5k 56 250 5.0k 13 8.9 56 97.2 99 1.05k
14 2.94k 57 760.3 100 436.6 14 -23 14 63 3.2k 57 250 6.3k 14 9.4 57 103 100 1.11k
15 2.76k 58 747.5 101 432.4 15 -22 15 63 4.0k 58 250 8.0k 15 10.0 58 109 101 1.18k
16 2.59k 59 735.0 102 428.2 16 -21 16 63 5.0k 59 250 10.0k 16 10.6 59 115 102 1.24k
17 2.45k 60 723.0 103 424.0 17 -20 17 63 6.3k 60 315 1.2k 17 11.2 60 121 103 1.32k
18 2.32k 61 711.3 104 420.0 18 -19 18 63 8.0k 61 315 1.6k 18 11.8 61 128 104 1.39k
19 2.21k 62 700.0 105 416.0 19 -18 19 63 10.0k 62 315 2.0k 19 12.5 62 136 105 1.47k
20 2.10k 63 689.1 106 412.1 20 -17 20 80 1.2k 63 315 2.5k 20 13.2 63 143 106 1.55k
21 2.00k 64 678.5 107 408.3 21 -16 21 80 1.6k 64 315 3.2k 21 13.9 64 152 107 1.64k
22 1.92k 65 668.2 108 404.6 22 -15 22 80 2.0k 65 315 4.0k 22 14.7 65 160 108 1.74k
23 1.84k 66 658.2 109 400.9 23 -14 23 80 2.5k 66 315 5.0k 23 15.6 66 169 109 1.84k
24 1.76k 67 648.5 110 397.3 24 -13 24 80 3.2k 67 315 6.3k 24 16.5 67 179 110 1.94k
25 1.70k 68 639.1 111 393.8 25 -12 25 80 4.0k 68 315 8.0k 25 17.4 68 189 111 2.05k
26 1.63k 69 630.0 112 390.3 26 -11 26 80 5.0k 69 315 10.0k 26 18.4 69 200 112 2.17k
27 1.58k 70 621.1 113 386.8 27 -10 27 80 6.3k 70 500 1.2k 27 19.4 70 211 113 2.29k
28 1.52k 71 612.5 114 383.5 28 -9 28 80 8.0k 71 500 1.6k 28 20.6 71 224 114 2.43k
29 1.47k 72 604.1 115 380.2 29 -8 29 80 10.0k 72 500 2.0k 29 21.7 72 236 115 2.56k
30 1.42k 73 595.9 116 376.9 30 -7 30 125 1.2k 73 500 2.5k 30 23.0 73 250 116 2.71k
31 1.38k 74 588.0 117 373.7 31 -6 31 125 1.6k 74 500 3.2k 31 24.3 74 264 117 2.87k
32 1.34k 75 580.3 118 370.6 32 -5 32 125 2.0k 75 500 4.0k 32 25.7 75 279 118 3.03k
33 1.30k 76 572.7 119 367.5 33 -4 33 125 2.5k 76 500 5.0k 33 27.1 76 295 119 3.20k
34 1.26k 77 565.4 120 364.5 34 -3 34 125 3.2k 77 500 6.3k 34 28.7 77 312 120 3.39k
35 1.23k 78 558.2 121 361.5 35 -2 35 125 4.0k 78 500 8.0k 35 30.3 78 330 121 3.58k
36 1.19k 79 551.3 122 358.5 36 -1 36 125 5.0k 79 500 10.0k 36 32.0 79 348 122 3.79k
37 1.16k 80 544.4 123 355.6 37 0 37 125 6.3k 80 630 1.2k 37 33.9 80 368 123 4.00k
38 1.13k 81 537.8 124 352.8 38 1 38 125 8.0k 81 630 1.6k 38 35.8 81 389 124 4.23k
39 1.10k 82 531.3 125 350.0 39 2 39 125 10.0k 82 630 2.0k 39 37.8 82 412 125 4.47k
40 1.08k 83 525.0 126 347.2 40 3 40 160 1.2k 83 630 2.5k 40 40.0 83 435 126 4.73k
41 1.05k 84 518.8 127 344.5 41 4 41 160 1.6k 84 630 3.2k 41 42.3 84 460 127 5.00k
42 1.03k 85 512.8 42 5 42 160 2.0k 85 630 4.0k 42 44.7 85 486
Table#17 Table#18 Table#19 Table#20

Dynamic Attack Time Dynamic Release Time Compressor Attack Time Delay Time (1480.0ms)
Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value
0 0.3 43 74 86 152 0 2.6 43 135 86 847 0 1 43 900 86 3100 0 1 43 2000 86 6600
1 0.9 44 76 87 154 1 3.0 44 139 87 869 1 2 44 950 87 3200 1 2 44 2100 87 6800
2 1.8 45 78 88 156 2 3.4 45 143 88 890 2 5 45 1000 88 3300 2 5 45 2200 88 7000
3 2.7 46 80 89 158 3 3.9 46 148 89 912 3 10 46 1050 89 3400 3 10 46 2300 89 7200
4 3.6 47 81 90 160 4 4.3 47 152 90 934 4 15 47 1100 90 3500 4 15 47 2400 90 7400
5 5.4 48 83 91 161 5 4.7 48 156 91 955 5 20 48 1150 91 3600 5 20 48 2500 91 7600
6 7.2 49 85 92 163 6 5.2 49 161 92 977 6 30 49 1200 92 3700 6 30 49 2600 92 7800
7 9.0 50 87 93 165 7 5.6 50 165 93 999 7 40 50 1250 93 3800 7 40 50 2700 93 8000
8 10 51 89 94 167 8 6.0 51 169 94 1021 8 50 51 1300 94 3900 8 50 51 2800 94 8200
9 12 52 90 95 169 9 6.5 52 174 95 1042 9 60 52 1350 95 4000 9 60 52 2900 95 8400
10 14 53 92 96 170 10 6.9 53 178 96 1064 10 70 53 1400 96 4100 10 70 53 3000 96 8600
11 16 54 94 97 172 11 7.3 54 182 97 1086 11 80 54 1450 97 4200 11 80 54 3100 97 8800
12 18 55 96 98 174 12 7.8 55 187 98 1107 12 90 55 1500 98 4300 12 90 55 3200 98 9000
13 20 56 98 99 176 13 8.2 56 195 99 1129 13 100 56 1550 99 4400 13 100 56 3300 99 9200
14 21 57 100 100 178 14 8.6 57 217 100 1151 14 110 57 1600 100 4500 14 120 57 3400 100 9400
15 23 58 101 101 180 15 13 58 239 101 1173 15 120 58 1650 101 4600 15 140 58 3500 101 9600
16 25 59 103 102 181 16 17 59 261 102 1194 16 130 59 1700 102 4700 16 160 59 3600 102 9800
17 27 60 105 103 183 17 22 60 282 103 1216 17 140 60 1750 103 4800 17 180 60 3700 103 10000
18 29 61 107 104 185 18 26 61 304 104 1238 18 150 61 1800 104 4900 18 200 61 3800 104 10200
19 30 62 109 105 187 19 30 62 326 105 1259 19 160 62 1850 105 5000 19 220 62 3900 105 10400
20 32 63 110 106 189 20 35 63 347 106 1281 20 170 63 1900 106 5100 20 240 63 4000 106 10600
21 34 64 112 107 190 21 39 64 369 107 1303 21 180 64 1950 107 5200 21 260 64 4100 107 10800
22 36 65 114 108 192 22 43 65 391 108 1346 22 190 65 2000 108 5300 22 280 65 4200 108 11000
23 38 66 116 109 194 23 48 66 413 109 1390 23 200 66 2050 109 5400 23 300 66 4300 109 11200
24 40 67 118 110 196 24 52 67 434 110 1433 24 220 67 2100 110 5500 24 350 67 4400 110 11400
25 41 68 120 111 198 25 56 68 456 111 1477 25 240 68 2150 111 5600 25 400 68 4500 111 11600
26 43 69 121 112 200 26 61 69 478 112 1520 26 260 69 2200 112 5700 26 450 69 4600 112 11800
27 45 70 123 113 201 27 65 70 499 113 1563 27 280 70 2250 113 5800 27 500 70 4700 113 12000
28 47 71 125 114 203 28 69 71 521 114 1607 28 300 71 2300 114 5900 28 550 71 4800 114 12200
29 49 72 127 115 205 29 74 72 543 115 1650 29 320 72 2350 115 6000 29 600 72 4900 115 12400
30 50 73 129 116 207 30 78 73 565 116 1694 30 340 73 2400 116 6100 30 700 73 5000 116 12600
31 52 74 130 117 209 31 83 74 586 117 1737 31 360 74 2450 117 6200 31 800 74 5100 117 12800
32 54 75 132 118 210 32 87 75 608 118 1781 32 380 75 2500 118 6300 32 900 75 5200 118 13000
33 56 76 134 119 212 33 91 76 630 119 1824 33 400 76 2550 119 6400 33 1000 76 5300 119 13200
34 58 77 136 120 214 34 96 77 651 120 1867 34 450 77 2600 120 6500 34 1100 77 5400 120 13400
35 60 78 138 121 216 35 100 78 673 121 1911 35 500 78 2650 121 6600 35 1200 78 5500 121 13600
36 61 79 140 122 218 36 104 79 695 122 1954 36 550 79 2700 122 6700 36 1300 79 5600 122 13800
37 63 80 141 123 220 37 109 80 717 123 1998 37 600 80 2750 123 6800 37 1400 80 5700 123 14000
38 65 81 143 124 221 38 113 81 738 124 2041 38 650 81 2800 124 6900 38 1500 81 5800 124 14200
39 67 82 145 125 223 39 117 82 760 125 2085 39 700 82 2850 125 7000 39 1600 82 5900 125 14400
40 69 83 147 126 225 40 122 83 782 126 2128 40 750 83 2900 126 7200 40 1700 83 6000 126 14600
41 70 84 149 127 227 41 126 84 803 127 2171 41 800 84 2950 127 7400 41 1800 84 6200 127 14800
42 72 85 150 42 130 85 825 42 850 85 3000 42 1900 85 6400
324 RS7000
11. MIDI Data Format

The RS7000 tone generator and sequencer blocks handle different MIDI events. These are listed separately in the (3) TRANSMIT/RECEIVE DATA
MIDI Data Format as well as in the MIDI Implementation Chart.
(3-1) CHANNEL VOICE MESSAGES
● Tone generator block (Voice part) (3-1-1) NOTE OFF
STATUS 1000nnnn(8nH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
(1) TRANSMIT FLOW NOTE NUMBER 0kkkkkkk k = 0 (C-2) - 127 (G8)
VELOCITY 0vvvvvvv v is ignored
MIDI OUT [SW1] NOTE ON/OFF 9nH
(A, B)
Only received.
[SW2] KNOB 1 - 31 EnH, BnH
(3-1-2) NOTE ON/OFF
[SW3] FOOT SW BnH 40H STATUS 1001nnnn(9nH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
NOTE NUMBER 0kkkkkkk k = 0 (C-2) - 127 (G8)
VELOCITY 0vvvvvvv (v = 0) NOTE ON
[SW4] SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE
MESSAGE 00000000 (v = 0) NOTE OFF
<PARAMETER CHANGE>
SYSTEM F0H 43H 1nH 6AH aaH aaH aaH (3-1-3) PROGRAM CHANGE
ddH.....ddH F7H
MULTI PART F0H 43H 1nH 6AH aaH aaH aaH STATUS 1100nnnn(CnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
ddH.....ddH F7H PROGRAM NUMBER 0ppppppp p = 0 - 127
EFFECT F0H 43H 1nH 6AH aaH aaH aaH
ddH.....ddH F7H
(3-1-4) PITCH BEND CHANGE
AD PART F0H 43H 1nH 6AH aaH aaH aaH
ddH.....ddH F7H STATUS 1110nnnn(EnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
LSB 0vvvvvvv PITCH BEND CHANGE LSB
MSB 0vvvvvvv PITCH BEND CHANGE MSB
SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE
MESSAGE
MIDI MASTER VOL- F0H 7FH 7FH 04H 01H llH mmH F7H 14 bit resolution.
UME
MSB
IDENTITY REPLY F0H 7EH 7FH 06H 02H 43H 00H 41H
ddH ddH 00H 00H 00H 01H F7H 00000000B (00H) Minimum value
01000000B (40H) Center value
01111111B (7FH) Maximum value
ACTIVE SENSING FEH
If the SETUP Knob Assign parameter assigns this to a knob 1 - 31, this message is
transmitted by knob operations.
[SW1] Out Select and Out Channel
The output connector and MIDI Transmit Channel can be set for each track in SETUP Out Channel.
(3-1-5) CONTROL CHANGE
NOTE ON/OFF will be according to the settings of the current track.
[SW2] Knob 1 - 31 Assign STATUS 1011nnnn(BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
The SETUP Knob Assign settings specify the track whose [SW1] settings will determine the output CONTROL NUMBER 0ccccccc
connector, and the type of messages that will be output. CONTROL VALUE 0vvvvvvv
[SW3] Foot Switch
This will be output only if the UTILITY Foot Switch function has been set to Sustain.
[SW4] TG Parameter Out * Control numbers transmitted
The output connector and output enable/disable are set by the UTILITY Parameter Out setting. c=0 BANK SEL MSB ; 0:GM VOICE
63:RS7000 VOICE
(2) RECEIVE FLOW 64:RS7000 SAMPLE VOICE
126:RS7000 DRUM VOICE
MIDI IN [SW1] CHANNEL VOICE 127:GM DRUM
MASSAGE
NOTE OFF 8nH
c = 32 BANK SEL LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *3
NOTE ON/OFF 9nH c = 64 SUSTAIN SWITCH ; v = 0 - 63:OFF, 64 - 127:ON
CONTROL CHANGE BnH If the UTILITY Foot Switch parameter is set to Sustain, this message is transmitted by
PROGRAM CHANGE CnH
PITCH BEND CHANGE EnH
foot switch operations.
If the SETUP Knob Assign parameter assigns this to a knob 1 - 31, knob operations will
transmit c=1 - 119 (except 32).
CHANNEL MODE
MESSAGE
* Control numbers received
ALL SOUND OFF BnH 78H c=0 BANK SEL MSB ; v = 0:GM VOICE
RESET ALL BnH 79H 63:RS7000 VOICE
CONTROLLERS
ALL NOTE OFF BnH 7BH
64:RS7000 SAMPLE VOICE
OMNI MODE OFF BnH 7CH 126:RS7000 DRUM VOICE
OMNI MODE ON BnH 7DH 127:GM DRUM
MONO MODE ON BnH 7EH
POLY MODE ON BnH 7FH
c = 32 BANK SEL LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *3
c=1 MODULATION ; v = 0 - 127
Appendix
c=5 PORTAMENTO TIME ; v = 0 - 127 *2
SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE
MESSAGE
c=6 DATA ENTRY MSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1
<PARAMETER CHANGE> c = 38 DATA ENTRY LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1
SYSTEM F0H 43H 1nH 6AH aaH aaH aaH c=7 TRACK VOLUME ; v = 0 - 127
ddH.....ddH F7H
EFFECT F0H 43H 1nH 6AH aaH aaH aaH
c = 10 PAN ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
ddH.....ddH F7H c = 11 EXPRESSION ; v = 0 - 127
MULTI PART F0H 43H 1nH 6AH aaH aaH aaH c = 16 LFO AMOD DEPTH ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
ddH.....ddH F7H
AD PART F0H 43H 1nH 6AH aaH aaH aaH
c = 17 LFO FMOD DEPTH ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
ddH.....ddH F7H c = 18 AEG SUSTAIN LEVEL ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE c = 19 FILTER ENV. DEPTH ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
MESSAGE c = 64 SUSTAIN SWITCH ; v = 0-63:OFF, 64-127:ON
GM MODE ON F0H 7EH 7FH 09H 01H F7H c = 65 PORTAMENTO SWITCH ; v = 0-63:OFF, 64-127:ON *2
MIDI MASTER VOLUME F0H 7FH 7FH 04H 01H llH mmH F7H
IDENTITY REQUEST F0H 7EH 0nH 06H 01H F7H c = 66 SOSTENUTO ; v = 0-63:OFF, 64-127:ON
c = 71 FILTER RESONANCE ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
c = 72 AEG RELEASE TIME ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
ACTIVE SENSING FEH
c = 73 AEG ATTACK TIME ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
c = 74 FILTER CUTOFF ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
[SW1] Data received via MIDI is sent to Part = n according to the receive channel.
c = 75 AEG DECAY TIME ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
c = 76 LFO SPEED ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *4
c = 77 LFO PMOD DEPTH ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
c = 80 FEG ATTACK TIME ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
c = 81 FEG DECAY TIME ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
RS7000 325
c = 82 FEG SUSTAIN LEVEL ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 (3-4) SYSTEM REAL TIME MESSAGES
c = 83 FEG RELEASE TIME ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 (3-4-1) ACTIVE SENSING
c = 91 REVERB SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127 STATUS 11111110(FEH)
c = 93 DELAY/CHORUS SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127
Transmitted at intervals of approximately 200 msec.
c = 94 DRY/VARIATION BALANCE ; v = 0 - 127 *5
Not transmitted while reading/writing a card or disk.
c = 96 DATA ENTRY INC ; v = 127 *1
c = 97 DATA ENTRY DEC ; v = 127 *1 Once this message is received, detection of Active Sensing messages will begin. If nei-
*1 Used only when setting a parameter specified by RPN. ther status nor data is received for an interval of approximately 350 msec or more, the
*2 Not valid for rhythm sounds. MIDI reception buffer will be cleared, and any sounding notes and the sustain switch
PORTAMENTO TIME adjusts the rate of pitch change when PORTAMENTO will be forced off. The value of the various control messages will be reset to specific
SWITCH=ON; portamento time is shortest at 0, and longest at 127. values (the same values as when Reset All Controller is received).
*3 This is 0 when MSB = 0, 126, or 127. (3-5) SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
0–9 when MSB = 63. (3-5-1) UNIVERSAL NON REALTIME MESSAGE
0–1 when MSB = 64. (3-5-1-1) GENERAL MIDI MODE ON
*4 “16th” – “4thx8” when VOICE EDIT setting BPM Sync = on. F0H 7EH 7FH 09H 01H F7H
*5 0: Dry Level = 127, Variation Send Level = 0. The following controllers will be reset to the corresponding values.
64:Dry Level = 127, Variation Send Level = 126. TRACK VOLUME 100
127: Dry Level = 0, Variation Send Level = 127. PAN Center
(3-2) CHANNEL MODE MESSAGES PROGRAM CHANGE 1
STATUS 1011nnnn(BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER BANK SELECT MSB 0
CONTROL NUMBER 0ccccccc c = CONTROL NUMBER
REVERB SEND LEVEL 40
CONTROL VALUE 0vvvvvvv v = DATA VALUE
DELAY/CHORUS SEND LEVEL 0
(3-2-1) ALL SOUND OFF (CONTROL NUMBER = 78H, DATA VALUE = 0) DRY/VARIATION BALANCE 0
Silence all currently-sounding notes of the corresponding channel. The status of chan- PITCH BEND CHANGE 0 (center)
nel messages such as Sustain Switch and Sostenuto will be maintained. MODULATION 0 (off)
(3-2-2) RESET ALL CONTROLLERS (CONTROL NUMBER = 79H, DATA VALUE = 0) EXPRESSION 127 (maximum)
Reset the values of the following controllers. SUSTAIN SWITCH 0 (off)
PITCH BEND CHANGE 0 (center) SOSTENUTO SWITCH 0 (off)
MODULATION 0 (off) RPN A state in which no number has been set
EXPRESSION 127 (maximum) MIDI MASTER VOLUME 127 (maximum)
SUSTAIN SWITCH 0 (off) PITCH BEND SENSITIVITY 02 (2 semitones)
PORTAMENTO SWITCH 0 (off) FINE TUNING 0
SOSTENUTO SWITCH 0 (off) COARSE TUNING 0
RPN State in which no number has been set; inter- (3-5-1-2)IDENTITY REQUEST (only transmitted)
nal data will not change F0H 7EH 0nH 06H 01H F7H (n is the Device Number, but the RS7000 receives all
numbers.)
Other data will not be reset. (3-5-1-3)IDENTITY REPLY (only transmitted)
(3-2-3) ALL NOTE OFF (CONTROL NUMBER = 7BH, DATA VALUE = 0) F0H 7EH 7FH 06H 02H 43H 00H 41H ddH ddH 00H 00H 00H 01H F7H
Turn off all currently-on notes of the corresponding channel. However if sustain or sos- dd; Device Number Code RS7000 = 14H, 04H
tenuto are on, the sound will not end until these are turned off. (3-5-2)UNIVERSAL REALTIME MESSAGE
(3-2-4) OMNI MODE OFF (CONTROL NUMBER = 7CH, DATA VALUE = 0) (3-5-2-1) MIDI MASTER VOLUME
Perform the same processing as when All Note Off is received. F0H 7FH 7FH 04H 01H llH mmH F7H
(3-2-5) OMNI MODE ON (CONTROL NUMBER = 7DH, DATA VALUE = 0) Modifies the Master Volume value.
Perform the same processing as when All Note Off is received. The RS7000 will not The mm value is used as the MIDI Master Volume value. (The value of ll is
enter Omni On mode. ignored.)
(3-5-3)PARAMETER CHANGE
(3-2-6) MONO (CONTROL NUMBER = 7EH, DATA VALUE = 0)
11110000 F0 Exclusive Status
Perform the same processing as when All Sound Off is received, and if the 3rd byte
01000011 43 YAMAHA ID
(mono number) is in the range of 0 ~ 16, set the corresponding channel to Mode 4 (m=1).
0001nnnn 1n Device Number
(3-2-7) POLY (CONTROL NUMBER = 7FH, DATA VALUE = 0) 01101010 6A Model ID
Perform the same processing as when All Sound Off is received, and set the correspond- 0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address High
ing channel to Mode 3. 0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address Mid
0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address Low
(3-3) REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER
0ddddddd ddddddd Data
STATUS 1011nnnn(BnH) n = 0 ~ 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER | | |
LSB 01100100(64H) 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive
RPN LSB 0ppppppp p = RPN LSB (see table below)
For parameters whose data size is 2 or 4, data for the corresponding size will be
MSB 01100101(65H)
RPN MSB 0qqqqqqq q = RPN MSB (see table below) transmitted.
DATA ENTRY MSB 00000110(06H) For the Address and Byte Count, refer to the separate table.
DATA VALUE 0mmmmmmm m = Data Value The RS7000 receives all device numbers, and transmits these messages with n=0.
DATA ENTRY LSB 00100110(26H)
DATA VALUE 0lllllll l = Data Value
The following four types are received.
First, designate the RPN MSB and RPN LSB to specify the parameter that you wish to System Data
control. Then use Data Entry to set the value of the specified parameter. Effect Data
RPN D.ENTRY Multi Part Data
AD Part Data
LSB MSB MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME DATA RANGE
00H 00H mmH --- PITCH BEND SENSITIVITY 00H ~ 18H (0 - 24 semitones)
01H 00H mmH llH MASTER FINE TUNE {mmH, llH} = {00H, 00H} -
{40H, 00H} - {7FH, 7FH}
(-8192*100/8192) - 0 -
(+8192*100/8192)
02H 00H mmH --- MASTER COARSE TUNE 28H - 40H - 58H (-24 - 0 - +24
semitones)
7FH 7FH --- --- RPN RESET Reset to a state in which no RPN
number has been specified.
Internal setting values will not
change.
326 RS7000
● Sequencer block (Sequencer Part) (2) RECEIVE FLOW

(1) TRANSMIT FLOW MIDI IN [SW1] CHANNEL VOICE
MESSAGE
MIDI OUT [SW1] [SW3] CHANNEL VOICE NOTE OFF 8nH
(A, B) MESSAGE NOTE ON/OFF 9nH
NOTE ON/OFF 9nH POLYPHONIC KEY AnH
POLYPHONIC KEY AnH PRESSURE
PRESSURE CONTROL CHANGE BnH
CONTROL CHANGE BnH PROGRAM CHANGE CnH
PROGRAM CHANGE CnH CHANNEL PRESSURE DnH
CHANNEL PRESSURE DnH PITCH BEND CHANGE EnH
PITCH BEND CHANGE EnH
CHANNEL MODE
[SW3] CHANNEL MODE MESSAGE
MESSAGE ALL SOUND OFF BnH 78H
ALL SOUND OFF BnH 78H RESET ALL BnH 79H
RESET ALL CON- BnH 79H CONTROLLERS
TROLLERS LOCAL CONTROL BnH 7AH
LOCAL CONTROL BnH 7AH OMNI MODE OFF BnH 7CH
OMNI MODE OFF BnH 7CH OMNI MODE ON BnH 7DH
OMNI MODE ON BnH 7DH MONO MODE ON BnH 7EH
MONO MODE ON BnH 7EH POLY MODE ON BnH 7FH
POLY MODE ON BnH 7FH
SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE F0H ........ F7H
[SW5] TIMING CLOCK F8H MESSAGE
[SW2] SYSTEM REALTIME [SW3] TIMING CLOCK F8H

MESSAGE
START FAH
CONTINUE FBH [SW3] MTC QUARTER FRAME F1H
STOP FCH MESSAGE
SYSTEM COMMON [SW2] SYSTEM REALTIME

MESSAGE MESSAGE
SONG POSITION F2H START FAH
POINTER CONTINUE FBH
SONG SELECT F3H STOP FCH
[SW3] SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE F0H ........ F7H SYSTEM COMMON

MESSAGE MESSAGE
SONG POSITION F2H
POINTER
[SW2] [SW4] MIDI MACHINE SONG SELECT F3H
CONTROL
STOP F0H 7FH 7FH 06H 01H F7H
DEFERRED PLAY F0H 7FH 7FH 06H 03H F7H SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE F0H 43H 7EH 00H ssH ddH F7H
LOCATE F0H 7FH 7FH 06H 44H 06H 01H hrH MESSAGE
mnH scH frH ffH F7H SECTION CONTROL
[SW1] Out Select and Out Channel [SW1] MIDI Input Filter
The SETUP parameter Out Channel allows the output connector and MIDI transmit The UTILITY parameter MIDI Filter allows reception to be turned on/off.
channel to be specified for each track. [SW2] MIDI Control In
[SW2] MIDI Control Out The UTILITY parameter MIDI Control allows reception to be turned on/off.
The UTILITY parameter Control allows transmission to be turned on/off and the [SW3] MIDI Sync
output connector to be specified. Timing Clock is received when the UTILITY parameter MIDI Sync = MIDI, and
[SW3] MIDI Output Filter MTC is received when MIDI Sync = MTC.
The UTILITY parameter MIDI Filter allows transmission to be turned on/off.
[SW4] MIDI Sync
Transmitted when UTILITY MIDI Sync is set to MTC.
[SW5] MIDI Clock Out
The UTILITY parameter MIDI Clock out allows transmission to be turned on/off
and the output connector to be specified.
Appendix
RS7000 327
<Table 1-1> Parameter Base Address DELAY/CHORUS

Top Address Description Address Size Data Parameter Description Default
H M L (H) Value (H)
H M L
SYSTEM 00 00 00 System 01 01 00 2 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS TYPE MSB 02 50 (TMP-DLY1)
00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS TYPE LSB
EFFECT 01 00 00 Reverb
Delay/Chorus 02 2 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER 1st bit6-0 → bit13-7 depends on type
01 01 00 1 MSB
Variation
01 02 00
Master EQ 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER 2nd bit6-0 → bit6-0
01 40 00 1 LSB
Master Effect
04 2 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER depends on type
01 41 00
2 MSB
MULTI PART GROUP1 10 00 00 Multi Part 1 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER
: 2 LSB
10 0F 00 Multi Part 16 06 2 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER depends on type
MULTI PART GROUP2 11 00 00 Multi Part 1 3 MSB
: 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER
11 0F 00 Multi Part 16 3 LSB
MULTI PART GROUP3 13 00 00 Multi Part 1 08 2 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER depends on type

4 MSB
:
13 0F 00 Multi Part 16 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER
4 LSB
AD PART 14 00 00 AD Part 1
0A 2 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER depends on type
14 01 00 AD Part 2 5 MSB
00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER
5 LSB
<Table 1-2> MIDI Parameter Change Table (SYSTEM) 0C 2 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER depends on type
Address Size Data Parameter Description Default 6 MSB
H M L (H) Value (H) 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER

6 LSB
00 00 00 1 NOT USED
0E 2 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER depends on type
01 1 NOT USED 7 MSB
02 4 00 - 0F MASTER TUNE -102.4 - +102.3[cent], 1st bit3-0 → 00 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER
bit15-12 7 LSB
00 - 0F 2nd bit3-0 → bit11-8 04 10 2 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER depends on type
00 - 0F 3rd bit3-0 → bit7-4 00 8 MSB
00 - 0F 4th bit3-0 → bit3-0 00 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER
06 1 NOT USED 8 LSB
07 1 00 - 03 STEREO OUT LEVEL 00:0dB, 01:+6dB, 02:+12dB, 03:+18dB 00 12 2 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER depends on type
9 MSB
08 1 00 - 03 AS1&2 OUT LEVEL 00:0dB, 01:+6dB, 02:+12dB, 03:+18dB 00
09 1 NOT USED 9 LSB
14 2 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PARAMETER depends on type
10 MSB
<Table 1-3> MIDI Parameter Change Table (EFFECT) 10 LSB
16 1 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS RETURN - 40
REVERB LEVEL ∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0
Address Size Data Parameter Description Default ...64...127)
H M L (H) Value 17 1 01 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS PAN L63...C...R63(1...64 40
(H) ...127)
00 00 00 2 00 - 7F REVERB TYPE MSB 01 10 18 1 00 - 7F SEND DELAY/CHORUS TO - 00
(ROOM1) REVERB ∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0
00 - 7F REVERB TYPE LSB ...64...127)
02 2 00 - 7F REVERB PARAMETER 1 MSB 1st bit6-0 → bit13-7 00 12
00 - 7F REVERB PARAMETER 1 LSB 2nd bit6-0 → bit6-0
04 2 00 - 7F REVERB PARAM ETER 2 MSB ˝ 00 0A
00 - 7F REVERB PARAMETER 2 LSB
06 2 00 - 7F REVERB PARAMETER 3 MSB ˝ 00 08
08 2 00 - 7F REVERB PARAMETER 4 MSB ˝ 00 0D
0A 2 00 - 7F REVERB PARAMETER 5 MSB ˝ 00 31
0C 2 00 - 7F REVERB PARAMETER 6 MSB ˝ 00 00
0E 2 00 - 7F REVERB PARAMETER 7 MSB ˝ 00 04
16 1 00 - 7F REVERB RETURN LEVEL - 40
∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
17 1 01 - 7F REVERB PAN L63...C...R63(1...64...127) 40
328 RS7000
VARIATION MASTER EQ
Address Size Data Parameter Description Default Address Size Data Parameter Description Default
H M L (H) Value (H) H M L (H) Value (H)
01 02 00 2 00 - 7F VARIATION TYPE MSB 09 30 (AMP SIM) 01 40 00 1 28 - 58 EQ LOW GAIN -24 - +24[dB] 40

00 - 7F VARIATION TYPE LSB 01 1 0A - 28 EQ LOW FREQUENCY 63 - 2000[Hz] 0E
02 2 00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 1 1st bit6-0 → bit13-7 depends on type 02 1 01 - 78 EQ LOW Q 0.1 - 12.0 0A
MSB 03 1 NOT USED
00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 1 LSB 2nd bit6-0 → bit6-0 04 1 NOT USED
04 2 00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 2 ˝ depends on type 05 1 NOT USED
MSB
06 1 NOT USED
00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 2 LSB
07 1 NOT USED
06 2 00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 3 ˝ depends on type
MSB 08 1 34 - 4C EQ MID1 GAIN -12 - +12[dB] 40
00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 3 LSB 09 1 0E - 36 EQ MID1 FREQUENCY 100 - 10.0[kHz] 1A
08 2 00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 4 ˝ depends on type 0A 1 01 - 78 EQ MID1 Q 0.1 - 12.0 0A

MSB 0B 1 NOT USED
00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 4 LSB 0C 1 34 - 4C EQ MID2 GAIN -12 - +12[dB] 40
0A 2 00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 5 ˝ depends on type 0D 1 0E - 36 EQ MID2 FREQUENCY 100 - 10.0[kHz] 2D
MSB 0E 1 01 - 78 EQ MID2 Q 0.1 - 12.0 0A
00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 5 LSB 0F 1 NOT USED
0C 2 00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 6 ˝ depends on type 10 1 34 - 4C EQ HIGH GAIN -12 - +12[dB] 40
MSB
11 1 1C - 3A EQ HIGH FREQUENCY 0.5 - 16.0[kHz] 34
12 1 01 - 78 EQ HIGH Q 0.1 - 12.0 0A
0E 2 00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 7 ˝ depends on type
MSB 13 1 NOT USED

10 2 00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 8 ˝ depends on type
MSB
00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 8 LSB MASTER EFFECT
12 2 00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 9 ˝ depends on type Address Size Data Parameter Description Default
MSB H M L (H)
00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 9 LSB 01 41 00 2 NOT USED
14 2 00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 10 ˝ depends on type NOT USED
MSB
02 2 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 1 MSB 1st bit6-0 → bit13-7 depends on type
00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 10
LSB 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 1 LSB 2nd bit6-0 → bit6-0
16 2 00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 11 ˝ depends on type 04 2 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 2 MSB ˝ depends on type
MSB 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 2 LSB
00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 11 06 2 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 3 MSB ˝ depends on type
LSB 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 3 LSB
MSB
00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 4 LSB
LSB 0A 2 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 5 MSB ˝ depends on type
1A 2 00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 13 ˝ depends on type 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 5 LSB
MSB 0C 2 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 6 MSB ˝ depends on type
00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 13 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 6 LSB
LSB 0E 2 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 7 MSB ˝ depends on type
1C 2 00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 14 ˝ depends on type 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 7 LSB
MSB
10 2 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 8 MSB ˝ depends on type
1E 2 00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 15 ˝ depends on type 12 2 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 9 MSB ˝ depends on type
MSB 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 9 LSB
00 - 7F VARIATION PARAMETER 15 14 2 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 10 MSB ˝ depends on type
MSB
LSB 18 2 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 12 MSB ˝ depends on type
22 1 00 - 7F VARIATION RETURN LEVEL -∞dB...0dB...+6dB 40 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 12 LSB

(0...64...127) 1A 2 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 13 MSB ˝ depends on type
23 1 01 - 7F VARIATION PAN L63...C...R63 40 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 13 LSB
(1...64...127) 1C 2 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 14 MSB ˝ depends on type
24 1 00 - 7F SEND VARIATION TO REVERB -∞dB...0dB...+6dB 00 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 14 LSB
(0...64...127)
1E 2 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 15 MSB ˝ depends on type
25 1 00 - 7F SEND VARIATION TO DELAY/ -∞dB...0dB...+6dB 00
CHORUS (0...64...127) 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 15 LSB
Appendix
20 2 00 - 7F MASTER EFF TYPE 16 MSB ˝ depends on type
RS7000 329
<Table 1-4> MIDI Parameter Change Table (MULTI- MULTI PART GROUP2
Address Size Data Parameter Description Default
PART)MULTI PART GROUP1 H M L (H) Value (H)
11 pp 30 1 00 - 7F LFO AMP MOD DEPTH -64 - +63 40
H M L (H) Value (H)
31 1 00 - 7F LFO FILTER MOD DEPTH -64 - +63 40
10 pp 00 1 00 - 7F BANK SELECT MSB 0 - 127 00
32 1 00 - 7F LFO PITCH MOD DEPTH -64 - +63 40
01 1 00 - 7F BANK SELECT LSB 0 - 127 00
33 1 00 - 7F RANDOM PAN DEPTH -64 - +63 40
02 1 00 - 7F PROGRAM NUMBER 1 - 128 00
34 1 NOT USED
03 1 NOT USED
35 1 NOT USED
04 1 00 - 01 MONO/POLY MODE MONO, POLY 01
36 1 NOT USED
05 1 NOT USED
37 1 00 - 7F FEG DEPTH -64 - +63 40
06 1 NOT USED
07 1 NOT USED
08 1 NOT USED MULTI PART GROUP3
09 1 28 - 58 PITCH BEND RANGE -24 - +24 40 Address Size Data Parameter Description Default
H M L (H) Value (H)
0A 1 NOT USED
0B NOT USED 13 pp 00 1 00 - 06 LFO WAVE 0:TRI, 1:SAW UP, 2:SAW 00
DOWN, 3:SQU, 4:S/H,
0C 1 NOT USED
5:PROGRAM, 6:USER
0D 1 00 - 7F VOLUME 0 - 127 64
01 1 00 - 05 LFO PHASE 0, 90, 120, 180, 240, 270 00
0E 1 01 - 7F PAN L63 - C - R63 40
02 1 00 - 15 LFO SPEED (BPM Sync=on only) 4th × 8 - 16 th 0B
0F 1 28 - 58 COARSE TUNE -24 - +24[semitones] 40
03 1 00 - 06 LFO BPM SYNC OFF,ON 06
10 2 00 - 0F DETUNE MSB -12.8 - +12.7[Hz], 1st bit3-0 → 08
04 1 00 - 03 LFO USER WAVE TOTAL STEP 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16 00
bit7-4
05 1 00 - 7F LFO USER WAVE SLOPE OFF, UP, DOWN, 40
00 - 0F DETUNE LSB 2nd bit3-0 → bit3-0 00
UP&DOWN
12 1 00 - 7F REVERB SEND 0 - 127 28
06 1 00 - 7F LFO USER WAVE STEP VALUE1 0 - 127 40
13 1 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS SEND 0 - 127 00
14 1 00 - 7F VARIATION SEND 0 - 127 00
15 1 00 - 7F DRY LEVEL 0 - 127 7F
0A 1 00 - 7F LFO USER WAVE STEP VALUE4 0 - 127 40
16 1 NOT USED
0B 1 00 - 7F LFO USER WAVE STEP VALUE5 0 - 127 40
17 1 00 - 7F FILTER CUTOFF FRE- -64 - +63 40
0C 1 00 - 7F LFO USER WAVE STEP VALUE6 0 - 127 40
QUENCY
0D 1 00 - 7F LFO USER WAVE STEP VALUE7 0 - 127 40
18 1 00 - 7F FILTER RESONANCE -64 - +63 40
0E 1 00 - 7F LFO USER WAVE STEP VALUE8 0 - 127 40
19 1 NOT USED
0F 1 00 - 7F LFO USER WAVE STEP VALUE10 0 - 127 40
1A 1 NOT USED
1B 1 00 - 7F PORTAMENTO TIME 0 - 127 40
1C 1 00 - 02 PORTAMENTO MODE OFF, FINGERED, FULL-TIME 00
1D 1 NOT USED
1E 1 00 - 09 OUTPUT SELECT 0: L&R, 1 - 6: AS1 - AS6, 7: 00
AS1&2, 8:3&4, 9:5&6 14 1 00 - 7F LFO USER WAVE STEP VALUE15 0 - 127 40
1F 1 00 - 01 VOICE PARAMETER HOLD OFF, ON 00 15 1 00 - 7F LFO USER WAVE STEP VALUE16 0 - 127 40
10 pp 20 1 NOT USED 13 pp 40 1 NOT USED

21 1 00 - 7F AEG ATTACK TIME -64 - +63 40 41 1 00 - 06 FILTER TYPE 0:Bypass, 1:LPF24, 00
2:LPF18, 3:LPF12, 4:HPF,
22 1 00 - 7F AEG DECAY TIME -64 - +63 40
5:BPF, 6:BEF
23 1 NOT USED
42 1 NOT USED
24 1 00 - 7F AEG RELEASE TIME -64 - +63 40
43 1 00 - 05 EQ TYPE Low&High, P.EQ, 00
25 1 NOT USED BOOST6, BOOST12,
26 1 NOT USED BOOST18, THRU
27 1 NOT USED 44 1 00 - 0F EQ Q 0 - 31 04
28 1 00 - 7F AEG SUSTAIN LEVEL -64 - +63 40 45 2 00 - 01 EQ (LOW) FREQUENCY MSB Low&High:46 - 182, 00
P.EQ:83 - 251
29 1 NOT USED
46 00 - 0F EQ (LOW) FREQUENCY LSB 36
2A 1 NOT USED
47 1 20 - 60 EQ (LOW) GAIN -32 - +32 40
2B 1 00 - 7F PEG ATTACK TIME -64 - +63 40
48 2 00 - 01 EQ HIGH FREQUENCY MSB Low&High:131 - 241 01
2C 1 00 - 7F PEG DECAY TIME -64 - +63 40
49 00- 7F EQ HIGH FREQUENCY LSB 67
2D 1 NOT USED
4A 1 20 - 60 EQ HIGH GAIN -32 - +32 40
2E 1 00 - 7F PEG RELEASE TIME -64 - +63 40
2F 1 00 - 7F PEG INITIAL LEVEL -64 - +63 40
30 1 NOT USED
31 1 NOT USED
32 1 00 - 7F PEG SUSTAIN LEVEL -64 - +63 40
33 1 00 - 7F PEG RELEASE LEVEL -64 - +63 40
34 1 NOT USED
35 1 00 - 7F FEG ATTACK TIME -64 - +63 40
36 1 00 - 7F FEG DECAY TIME -64 - +63 40
37 1 NOT USED
38 1 00 - 7F FEG RELEASE TIME -64 - +63 40
39 1 NOT USED
3A 1 NOT USED
3B 1 NOT USED
3C 1 00 - 7F FEG SUSTAIN LEVEL -64 - +63 40
3D 1 NOT USED
10 pp 40 1 00 - 7F LFO SPEED (BPM Sync=off -64 - +63 40

only)
41 1 NOT USED
42 1 NOT USED
43 1 NOT USED
44 1 NOT USED
45 1 00 - 02 LFO KEY ON RESET OFF, EACH KEYON, FIRST 00
KEYON
46 1 NOT USED
47 1 NOT USED
48 1 NOT USED
49 1 NOT USED
330 RS7000
<Table 1-5> MIDI Parameter Change Table (AD PART)

H M L (H) Value (H)
14 0n 00 1 NOT USED
01 1 NOT USED
02 1 NOT USED
03 1 NOT USED
04 1 NOT USED
05 1 NOT USED
06 1 NOT USED
07 1 NOT USED
08 1 NOT USED
09 1 NOT USED
0A 1 NOT USED
0B 1 NOT USED
0C 1 NOT USED
0D 1 00 - 7F VOLUME 0 - 127 5A
0E 1 00 - 7F PAN L63 - C - R63 40
0F 1 NOT USED
10 2 NOT USED
12 1 00 - 7F REVERB SEND 0 - 127 00
13 1 00 - 7F DELAY/CHORUS SEND 0 - 127 00
14 1 00 - 7F DRY/VARIATION BALANCE 0 - 127 00
15 1 NOT USED
16 1 NOT USED
17 1 NOT USED
18 1 NOT USED
19 1 NOT USED
1A 1 NOT USED
1B 1 NOT USED
1C 1 NOT USED
1D 1 NOT USED
1E 1 NOT USED
70 1 00 - 01 INPUT GAIN MIC, LINE 01

71 1 00 - 01 MONO/STEREO (n=0 only) MONO × 2, STEREO 01
Appendix
RS7000 331
YAMAHA [ Music Priduction Studio --- sequencer part ] Date:22-MAR-2001
Model RS7000 MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.0
Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Function...
Basic Default 1-16 1-16
Channel Changed x x
Default x x
Mode Messages x x
Altered ************** x
Note 0-127 0-127

Number : True voice **************
Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127 o v=1-127

Note OFF x 9nH,v=0 x
After Key's o o
Touch Ch's o o
Pitch Bend o o
0-121 o o
Control
Change
Prog o 0-127 o 0-127

Change : True # **************
System Exclusive o o
: Song Pos. o *1 o *1
Common : Song Sel. o *1 o *1
: Tune x x
System : Clock o *2 o *3
Real Time: Commands o *1 o *1
Aux :All Sound OFF o o
:Reset All Cntrls o o
:Local ON/OFF o o
:All Notes OFF x x
Mes- :Active Sense x x
sages:Reset x x
Notes: *1 if MIDI control in/out is enabled. send MMC (stop, differed play, locate) if sync mode is MTC.
*2 if MIDI clock out is enabled. receive MTC quarter frame message if sync mode is MTC.
*3 if MIDI sync is external.
Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No
332 RS7000
YAMAHA [ Music Production Studio --- voice part ] Date:04-APR-2001
Model RS7000 MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.0
Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Function...
Basic Default 1-16 1-16
Channel Changed x x
Default 3 1 Memorized

Mode Messages x 1-4 (m=1) *1
Altered ************** x
Note 0-127 0-127 Transpose

Number : True voice ************** 0-127
Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127 o v=1-127

Note OFF x 9nH,v=0 x
After Key's x x
Touch Ch's x x
Pitch Bend o o 0-24 semi
0 o o Bank Select MSB

1,5-7,10-11 - o
16-19 - o
32 o o Bank Select LSB
Control 38 - o
64 o o Sustain Switch
Change 65,66 - o
71-77 - o
80-83 - o
91,93,94,96,97 - o
1-31 o - Assignable Knob
33-119 o - Assignable Knob
Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127

Change : True # ************** 0 - 127
System Exclusive o o
: Song Pos. x x
Common : Song Sel. x x
Appendix
: Tune x x
System : Clock x x
Real Time: Commands x x
Aux :All Sound OFF x o
:Reset All Cntrls x o
:Local ON/OFF x x
:All Notes OFF x o (123-125)
Mes- :Active Sense o o
sages:Reset x x
Notes: *1 m is always treated as "1" regardless of its value.
Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No
RS7000 333
12. Glossary
12. Glossary
A Beat
When playing back or recording a song, one “beat” (a
Aftertouch rhythmic subdivision of a measure).
MIDI messages which are transmitted when additional BPM (Beats Per Minute)
pressure is applied to the keyboard after notes are Another term for “tempo”, determining the speed of
played. playback.
Amplitude Envelope BPM Track
A curve that defines the amplitude variation of a note A sequencer track dedicated to the recording and play-
from the time it is initially played (attack) until it fades back of BPM changes.
away completely (release).
Breakbeats
Arpeggio Originally this term referred to a section of a song in
Sometimes known as “broken chords”, the notes of a which all other instruments stop playing while only the
chord are played one-after-another rather than all at drums maintain the rhythm. In dance music such drum
once. The RS7000 auto arpeggio feature automatically phrases are often sampled and looped to provide the
creates a variety of arpeggios based on notes you play rhythmic foundation for a new piece of music. Generally,
on the keyboard. a drum pattern of a few measures in length is referred to
AWM2 Tone Generation as a breakbeat.
A method of generating sound developed by YAMAHA Brilliance
which is based on digitally recorded waveforms. Since it A control or parameter that regulates the brightness of
generates the complex waveform of actual acoustic the tone. The cutoff frequency of the RS7000 filters can
instruments, it provides extremely realistic sounds. Digi- be controlled to adjust the brilliance.
tal filtering is also built-in, allowing precise control over
Buffer
the tone. AWM2 is an acronym for Advanced Wave
A memory area used for temporary data storage.
Memory 2.
Bulk Data
A type of System Exclusive message which consists of
B data for the internal settings of a device.
Bus line
Bank Number A route (line) that carries audio signals between stages
In the RS7000 use of the bank select MSB and LSB is of a sound system. The bus lines of the RS7000 include
facilitated by categorizing voices according to bank “SEND VAR. TO DELAY”, SEND VAR. TO REVERB”,
number. SEND DELAY TO REVERB”, and the stereo bus line
Bank Select that collects the stereo output of each stage.
MIDI data used to select extended voices. Control num- Byte
ber 0 (MSB) and 32 (LSB) as used together to select A group of 8 digital bits is generally referred to as a
voice banks. Actual voice selection is achieved by trans- “byte”. A single byte can be represented by a 2-digit
mitting the bank select value in combination with the hexadecimal number. This type of notation is used to
appropriate program change number. represent MIDI data, memory capacity, and other digital
values.
334 RS7000
12. Glossary
C D
Cent Data Entry

In musical terms a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone. A type of MIDI control change data (control change
number 6) generally used to set RPN-specified parame-
Channel
ters.
See “MIDI Channel”, page 337.
Delay
Channel Aftertouch
An effect (or device) that delays an audio signal. The
Aftertouch refers to the capability to control some
RS7000’s variation effects include delay effects.
aspect of the sound by varying pressure on the key-
board after notes are played. Two types of aftertouch Depth
data are used: polyphonic and channel. Channel after- The amount or degree to which an effect changes the
touch is aftertouch data in which only one aftertouch original sound.
value is transmitted for each MIDI channel. In contrast, Device Number
polyphonic aftertouch produces separate aftertouch A special MIDI channel used for system exclusive mes-
values for each note played. sages. Device numbers 1 through 16 are available, and
Checksum system exclusive data communication becomes possi-
A value used to verify the integrity of multiple blocks of ble when both the transmitting and receiving devices
received MIDI data (system exclusive data). The check- are set to the same number.
sum is transmitted at the end of the data. Digital Filter
Clock A filter that works in the digital rather than analog
A unit of note resolution. On the RS7000 one clock domain. The RS7000 provides digital filters for each
voice element, allowing a wide range of tonal control.
equals 1/480th of a quarter note.
DIGITAL IN/OUT Connector
Common Sample Voice
Coaxial connectors for input and output of digital audio
Sample voices which are available for use by all songs
signals.
and styles. Regardless of the number of songs and
styles, a maximum of 128 common sample voices can Drum Voice
be stored in the RS7000 internal memory. The content A special type of voice used only for drum or percussion
and program number/voice relationship of common instruments. Each key on the keyboard plays a different
sample voices does not change when songs or styles drum or percussion instrument.
are switched.
Dry Sound
Control Change The audio signal that is not processed by an effect. Nor-
A type of MIDI messages that is transmitted when a mally when using an effect, not all of the audio signal is
controller (modulation wheel, foot controller etc.) is passed through the effect. Rather, the degree of the
operated. Each controller has its own control number. effect is adjusted by mixing the sound that passes
through the effect (the wet sound) with the sound that
Appendix
Cutoff Frequency
bypasses the effect (the dry sound).
Filters work by allowing portions of the signal lower or
higher than a given frequency to pass, and cutting the DSP
remainder of the signal. This frequency is referred to as Stands for Digital Signal Processor. Digital signal pro-
the cutoff frequency. cessors digitally process signals to produce a wide
range of effects. The RS7000 includes high-quality DSP
capability for the reverb, chorus, and other effects.
RS7000 335
12. Glossary
Dump out Exclusive

The process of transmitting bulk data as MIDI System See the entry for System Exclusive.
Exclusive messages.
Expression
A MIDI control change message used to control the vol-
ume of an individual track or part.
E
Echo back F
The action or process in which data received at the
MIDI IN connector is re-transmitted from the MIDI OUT
Filter
connector.
A circuit that modifies tone by blocking or passing a
Edit specific frequency range of the sound. The RS7000 has
The action of modifying or editing data. filters for each voice element.
Effect Formatting
A circuit (device) that processes the sound to add vari- The action of initializing a memory card or SCSI disk so
ous effects. that it can be used by the RS7000.
The RS7000 provides 3 system effect stages (reverb,
delay/chorus and variation), as well as a range of mas-
ter effects. G
Element
A block within the AWM2 tone generator that generates Gate time
a single sound. The voices of the RS7000 consist of 1 The length of time that a note actually sounds.
to 2 elements. Groove
End Point Refers to rhythmic “feel”. The RS7000 features a
The point at which playback of a sample is set to stop. Groove function which can be used to subtly (or dramat-
ically) alter the groove of a pattern or song.
Ensemble
An ensemble consists of two or more instruments play-
ing together. The RS7000 is capable of playing ensem- H
bles consisting of up to 32 parts.
Envelope Generator (EG) Hertz

A circuit that modifies the level of the tone generator The standard unit of frequency defined as “cycles per
from the moment that a note is played until the sound second”. The pitch of the A3 note on a piano is about
decays to silence. The AEG controls the volume, the 440 Hertz.
PEG controls the pitch, and the FEG controls the filter.
Hexadecimal
Equalizer A system of numbering based on 16, in which the digits
A circuit or device that divides the frequency spectrum increment in units of n-th powers of 16. The alphabetical
into multiple bands which can be boosted or cut as characters A ~ F are used to express the numbers 10 ~
required to tailor the overall frequency response. 15.
Event
A single piece of the data (such as Note On/Off or Pro-
gram Change messages) which makes up a sequence.
336 RS7000
12. Glossary
I M
Initialize MIDI
The act of restoring a parameter to its most basic “ini- An acronym for Musical Instruments Digital Interface, a
tial” value. standard for transferring data between musical instru-
ments. Most electronic musical instruments today
Interval Time
implement the MIDI specification and provide MIDI con-
A delay inserted at regular intervals when transmitting
nectors. Such instruments can be connected together
bulk data that was recorded in a sequence track.
to create remote performance or automatic perfor-
mance systems.
L MIDI Channel
16 MIDI channels are provided — 1 ~ 16 — and the
LFO transmitting and receiving devices must be set to the
An acronym for Low Frequency Oscillator, a circuit that same channel to allow communication of performance
produces a signal at a low frequency. The signal from data.
the LFO can be used to modulate pitch, volume or tone MIDI Data Filer
to produce effects such as vibrato, tremolo and wah. A MIDI device that receives data for the internal settings
Local Sample Voice of a MIDI device in the form of System Exclusive mes-
A sample which available for use by only a specific song sages, and stores them to floppy disk. An example is
or style. Up to 128 local sample voices can be stored for the YAMAHA MDF3 MIDI data filer.
each song or style. Samples which are available for use MIDI Time Code (MTC)
by all songs or styles are known as “common sample A time-based synchronization signal which allows syn-
voices”. chronization of MIDI equipment, multitrack recorders,
Loop and other linear recording/playback devices. MTC is
Repeat playback of all or a specified section of a sam- based on the industry-standard SMPTE time code.
ple. MIDI Wind Controller
Low Pass Filter A sophisticated breath controller that play like a saxo-
A type of filter which cuts the high frequencies. The phone or similar wind instrument while producing MIDI
sound can be brightened by raising the cutoff frequency performance data that can be used to control MIDI tone
of the filter, or darkened by lowering it. generators, sequencers, etc. An example of a high-per-
formance MIDI Wind Controller is the YAMAHA WX5.
LSB
An acronym for Least Significant Byte, referring to the MSB
lower byte of data when MIDI control change data is An acronym for Most Significant Byte, referring to the
divided into two bytes (the MSB and LSB) for transmis- upper byte of data when MIDI control change data is
sion. divided into two bytes (the MSB and LSB) for transmis-
sion.
Appendix
RS7000 337
12. Glossary
Multi-timbral Tone Generator Optimize

A tone generator that can simultaneously produce more The process of “de-fragmenting” the sample memory so
than one type of sound. that the largest possible contiguous segment of mem-
ory is available for sampling.
Mute
A function that temporarily silences a specified track. Overdub
A method of real-time recording in which new material
is recorded without erasing previously recorded data.
N
Normalize P
The process of maximizing the overall level of a sample
by increasing the amplitude of the waveform so that the Pan
highest peak level is just below clipping. The parameter that sets the stereo location of a sound
when it is played back in stereo. The pan parameters
Normal Voice
found in the MIXER, VOICE EDIT, and other modes.
A voice which play normally via the keyboard with the
standard pitches for each key. Parameter
A setting or data item which you can edit in the various
Note On/Off
mode and sub mode displays.
MIDI messages which represent notes played on a key-
board or other instrument. Pressing a key produces a Parameter Change
Note On message, and a Note Off message is pro- A MIDI system exclusive message which can be used
duced when the key is released. to adjust internal parameter settings. Refer to the MIDI
Data Format section for details.
NRPN
An acronym for Non Registered Parameter Number. Part
These are a type of MIDI control change message, and A single voice played via one of the 16 available MIDI
are used to edit sounds via MIDI, allowing you to edit fil- channels is known as a “part”. The RS7000 has 16
ter or EG settings, or adjust the pitch or level for each parts.
instrument of a drum voice.
Partition
A software division on a disk storage medium (hard disk
or MO, for example) used to store data.
O
Pattern
Offset Edit This term covers a wide range of performance data that
A type of editing in which the value of a parameter is not can be recorded and played in the PATTERN mode.
changed directly, rather a specified “offset” value is Patterns can be repeated and switched to create the
added to or subtracted from the current parameter desired musical flow. Patterns consist of from 1 to 16
value. phrases assigned to the pattern mode sequence tracks.
OPTICAL IN/OUT Connector Pattern Chain

Optical connectors for input and output of digital audio A number of patterns played in sequence (“chained”) to
signals. create a complete song. The PATTERN CHAIN mode
automates the process of switching styles and sections.
338 RS7000
12. Glossary
Phrase Preset
An individual instrumental “part” which can be used in a An item provided in the internal memory. In the RS7000
pattern: a drum pattern, bass line, or chord part. a substantial number of phrases are provided as pre-
sets.
Phrase Sampling
The act of sampling an entire musical or rhythmic Punch-in Record
phrase, as opposed to recording a one-shot sample A method of realtime recording in which the user speci-
such as a single snare hit. fies the punch-in and punch-out points, so that record-
ing takes place only in that area.
Pitch EG
An envelope generator that can be used to control the
pitch of a voice from the note attack until the final
Q
release.
Pitched Voice Q (Bandwidth)

A voice which plays at the standard pitches of each key An equalizer parameter used in band-pass or band-
on the keyboard. Pitched voices allow samples to be elimination type filters. The “Q” is the bandwidth, or the
played at various pitches or various pitches to be played range of frequencies affected by the filter. The higher
simultaneously to create chords, just like conventional the Q, the broader the affected band.
instruments.
Quantize
Polyphonic Aftertouch A function which can be used to “tighten up” the inexact
Aftertouch refers to the capability to control some timing of notes or other events that were entered in real-
aspect of the sound by varying pressure on the key- time.
board after notes are played. Two types of aftertouch
data are used: polyphonic and channel. Channel after-
touch is aftertouch data in which only one aftertouch R
value is transmitted for each MIDI channel. In contrast,
polyphonic aftertouch produces separate aftertouch
RAM
values for each note played.
Random Access Memory than can be written to, read
Polyphony from, and erased as required. The RS7000 uses inter-
The number of notes that can be played simultaneously nal RAM memory.
by a tone generator or instrument. The maximum
Real-time Recording
polyphony of the RS7000 is 62 notes.
A method of recording in which a performance is
Portamento recorded as it is played in real time, similar to a conven-
An effect that smoothly changes the pitch from one note tional multi-track recorder.
to another note. Higher Portamento Time values will
Redo
produce a slower change, and there will be no effect
A function which “redoes” (restores) the results of a
with a setting of 0.
function which has been undone by using the “Undo”
Appendix
Portamento Switch function.
MIDI control change number 65 turns the portamento
Replace
effect on or off.
A method of real-time recording or punch recording in
which previously recorded data is erased (replaced) as
new material is recorded.
RS7000 339
12. Glossary
Resonance Sample Voice

A parameter that boosts the level of the signal in the A voice based on a sample created by using the sam-
area of the cutoff frequency. By emphasizing the over- pling function.
tones in this area, this can produce a distinctive “peaky”
Sampling Frequency
tone, making the sound brighter and harder.
Specifies the number of “samples” taken of an analog
Reverb signal each second. The individual samples are con-
An effect that simulates the acoustical reverberation of verted to digital values which represent the amplitude of
a room or space. The sound that reaches our ear usu- the signal and the sample point. The higher the sam-
ally includes not only the direct sound, but also sound pling frequency the higher the resultant sound quality.
that was reflected off the walls or ceiling. Reverb cre-
Sampling Level
ates these indirect reflections artificially. Although some
The signal level (the “record” level) set when sampling.
reflections can be perceived individually as distinct ech-
oes, the term “reverb” usually refers only to the indistinct Save
“wash” of reflected sound. The process of saving data or songs from internal mem-
ory to floppy disk.
Reverse
Applies to the trick of playing a sample or a portion of a Scene Memory
sample in reverse. The RS7000 has 5 scene memories which can store
complete “snapshots” of all current settings for instant
ROM
recall when needed.
Read Only Memory. This type of memory can be read
from but not written to or erased. All preset memory is SCSI
ROM memory. Stands for “Small Computer Serial Interface”. The SCSI
interface is used to connect hard disks and other stor-
RPN
age media to the RS7000.
An acronym for Registered Parameter Number. These
MIDI messages are used to adjust individual part set- Section
tings such as Pitch Bend Sensitivity or Tuning. A term referring to each of the 16 types of patterns that
comprise a style. Patterns are selected by specifying
the style and the section.
S Send Level
The amount of signal that is sent to a specified bus line
Sample for processing by an effect. The amount of signal that is
A recorded sound or phrase produced by a sampling returned from the effect is the “return level”.
operation.
Sensitivity
Sample Data The degree to which an aspect of the sound (e.g., vol-
Data including the sampled waveform and the data that ume) responds to control (e.g., note velocity).
specifies the start point, end point, and other playback
Sequencer
parameters.
A system (or device) that records, edits, modifies, and
Sample Kit Voice plays back a musical performance in the form of MIDI
A sample kit voices is a single voice in which different messages.
samples are assigned to each key from C-2 through G8.
Sequence Tracks
Sample kit voices allow different samples to be played
Tracks which record and playback normal MIDI
individually or simultaneously via different keys on the
sequence data.
keyboard.
340 RS7000
12. Glossary
SIMM System Exclusive Message

Single In-line Memory Module: a type of RAM memory A type of MIDI message used to exchange data unique
module commonly used by personal computers — and to a specific model or type of device.
the RS7000 for sample storage.
Soft Pedal
T
Control change number 67: the type of MIDI control
change message used to communicate soft pedal oper-
ation. Tap
The RS7000 [TAP] button can be used to tap-enter
Song BPM values.
A musical composition created by recording perfor-
mance data on one or more tracks. Track
A location where musical performance data is recorded.
Sostenuto Pedal
Control change number 66: the type of MIDI control Transpose
change message used to communicate sostenuto pedal Shifting the overall pitch in semitone steps.
operation. Tremolo
Standard MIDI File (SMF) An effect produced by cyclically modulating the volume.
SMF is an acronym for Standard MIDI File; a format that Trim
allows easy exchange of song data between different The act of “trimming” samples by specifying the desired
sequencers. Most of today’s software and hardware start and end points in order to remove unwanted mate-
manufacturers provide software/hardware that can read rial.
and write Standard MIDI Files.
Tuning
Start Point The process of matching the pitch of two or more instru-
The point at which playback of a sample begins. ments when playing in an ensemble. Normally, A3 is
Step Recording tuned to 440 Hz.
The method of recording in which music is input by
entering notes one by one, specifying the note length,
U
velocity, and pitch etc. of each note.
Style
Undo
The collective name for a set of 16 sections (A-P).
A function that “undoes” or cancels the previous opera-
Synchronization tion.
The function or process of matching the playback or
Utility Mode
recording tempo of a device with a separate, external
A mode on the RM1x in which system or MIDI settings
device such as another sequencer or a rhythm
can be made.
machine.
Appendix
System (effect)
An effect which can be applied to all parts by adjusting V
the Send Levels and Return Level. System effects allow
reverb or chorus etc. to be applied to the overall music. Variation Effect
The RM1x provides Reverb and Chorus as system One of the RS7000 effect stages. Variation effects can
effects. The Variation effect can also be used as a sys- be used to produce dramatic sound variations. A wide
tem effect. variety of effect programs such as delay, rotary speaker,
auto pan, amp simulation and auto wah are provided, in
addition to reverb and chorus.
RS7000 341
12. Glossary
Velocity
A numerical value indicating the speed (force) with
which a note was played.
Voice
A sound that is built into the tone generator that can be
selected and played.
Voice Bank
Voices are organized into voice banks which can be
selected by using MIDI bank select MSB and LSB data.
Wah Effect
An effect that cyclically modulates the tone. The
RS7000 produces this effect by using an LFO signal to
modulate the cutoff frequency of a filter. Wah effects are
included in the Variation effect stage.
Wave
A digitally recorded instrument waveform.
Wet Sound
The audio signal that is processed by an effect. Nor-
mally when using an effect, not all of the audio signal is
passed through the effect. Rather, the degree of the
effect is adjusted by mixing the sound that passes
through the effect (the wet sound) with the sound that
bypasses the effect (the dry sound).
342 RS7000
13. Index
13. Index
A CC (Control changer) ...........................................................................219

CD-ROM drive .....................................................................................280
A/D INPUT.......................................................................................... 231 CHAIN .................................................................................................159
A/D Setup ..................................................................................... 108, 200 Chain Name ..................................................................................159, 174
AC INLET ............................................................................................. 19 CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH ..............................................................262
AC inlet .................................................................................................. 22 Channel Aftertouch (CAT) ...................................................................269
ACCURACY ....................................................................................... 248 Chord Separate .............................................................................140, 216
ADVANCE .......................................................................................... 141 Chord Sort ....................................................................................139, 216
AEG ATTACK (Amplitude Envelope Generator Attack) ........... 101, 197 Clear Chain ...........................................................................................174
AEG DECAY (Amplitude Envelope Generator Decay) ............. 101, 197 Clear Pattern .........................................................................................153
AEG RELEASE (Amplitude Envelope Generator Release) ....... 101, 197 Clear Phrase ..........................................................................................148
AEG SUSTAIN (Amplitude Envelope Generator Sustain) ......... 101, 197 Clear Song ............................................................................................224
AIEB2 .............................................................................................. 20, 21 Clear Track ...................................................................................150, 222
AIEB2 I/O Expansion Board ............................................................... 276 CLICK BEAT .......................................................................................257
All Sound Off ....................................................................................... 268 CLICK MODE .....................................................................................257
AMP DEPTH ................................................................................. 98, 196 CLOCK SHIFT ..........................................................13, 86, 89, 191, 192
AMP/FILTER/PITCH ........................................................................... 15 COARSE TUNE ...........................................................................100, 197
Append Pattern ..................................................................................... 151 Coarse Tune ..........................................................................................269
Append Phrase ..................................................................................... 146 coaxial ....................................................................................................20
Arpeggiator ............................................................................................ 63 Common Sample Voice ..........................................................................61
ARPEGGIO ON ............................................................................... 18, 63 common sample voice ..........................................................................229
Arpeggio Setting .................................................................................. 108 CONTRAST .....................................................................................19, 24
AS1&2 OUT LEVEL .......................................................................... 259 CONTROL CHANGE .........................................................................262
ASSIGN KEY ...................................................................................... 233 Control Change (CC) ............................................................................267
Assignable Knob .................................................................................... 62 Controller ................................................................................................62
ASSIGNABLE OUT ............................................................................. 20 Convert to Song ....................................................................................173
ATK+LOOP ......................................................................................... 243 COPY ...................................................................................................245
ATTACK ............................................................................................... 15 Copy Chain ...........................................................................................174
Attack Time ......................................................................................... 267 Copy Event ...........................................................................141, 172, 217
AUDITION ......................................... 235, 237, 242, 243, 245, 246, 247, Copy Pattern .........................................................................................151
248, 249, 250, 251, 252, 253 Copy Phrase ..........................................................................................144
Auto Load .............................................................................................. 68 Copy Song ............................................................................................223
Auto Repeat ........................................................................................... 68 Copy Track ...................................................................................148, 221
CREATE ......................................................................................237, 240
Create Continuous Data ................................................................142, 218
Create Measure .............................................................................173, 220
B
Create Roll ....................................................................................139, 216
CREATE TO ........................................................................................253
BACK DELETE .................................................................... 82, 163, 189
Crescendo .....................................................................................138, 215
BANK .................................................................................................... 93
CTRL NO (Control Number) ...............................................................156
BANK (Voice Bank) .............................................................................. 79
Curve ....................................................................................................143
BANK MSB (Voice Bank MSB) ......................................................... 194
CUTOFF .................................................................................................15
Beat Graph ............................................................................. 81, 163, 188
CUTOFF (Filter Cutoff Frequency) .............................................103, 197
BEAT STRETCH .................................................................... 13, 89, 192
Beat Stretch .................................................................................. 144, 220
BPM ..................................................................................... 160, 162, 163
BPM (Tempo) .................................................... 73, 79, 84, 183, 186, 190 D
BPM Change ........................................................................................ 270
BPM SYNC (BPM Synchronization) ............................................ 98, 196 Data Decrement ....................................................................................268
BREAK ................................................................................................ 239 Data Entry LSB ....................................................................................267
Brightness ............................................................................................ 267 Data Entry MSB ...................................................................................267
Data Increment .....................................................................................268
DECAY ..................................................................................................15
DELAY ..........................................................................................96, 195
C
Delay ......................................................................................................91
DELAY LEVEL .............................................................................91, 193
CARD .................................................................................................... 19
DELAY SEND .....................................................................................109
CAT .............................................................................................. 141, 142
DELAY SEND LEVEL .......................................................................200
CAT (Channel Aftertouch) .................................................................. 155
DELAY TIME ................................................................................91, 193
CAT (Channel aftertouch) ........................................... 143, 217, 218, 219
DELAY TYPE .............................................................................104, 198
CATEGORY ........................................................................ 134, 171, 213
DELAY/CHO .........................................................................................14
CC .......................................................................................... 83, 141, 142
Delay/Chorus ........................................................................................105
CC (Control Change) ........................................................................... 155
Delay/Chorus Effect ...............................................................................63
CC (Control change) .................................................... 143, 217, 218, 219
RS7000 343
13. Index
Delay/Chorus Parameter ...................................................................... 199 FEG ATTACK (Filter Envelope GeneratorAttack) .....................101, 197
DELETE ................................................ 82, 155, 163, 168, 189, 207, 246 FEG DECAY (Filter Envelope Generator Decay) .......................101, 197
Delete Measure ............................................................................ 173, 220 FEG RELEASE (Filter Envelope Generator Release) .................102, 197
DELETE! ............................................................................................. 123 FEG SUSTAIN (Filter Envelope Generator Sustain) ..................102, 197
DEPTH ................................................................................................... 14 FILE ......................................................................................................123
DETUNE ...................................................................................... 100, 197 FILE NAME .........................................................119, 121, 167, 205, 206
DIGITAL ............................................................................................. 231 FILE TYPE ...........................119, 121, 127, 129, 167, 170, 205, 206, 209
DIGITAL IN, OUT ................................................................................ 20 File Type ...............................................................................................116
Digital input and output for connection ................................................. 20 FILTER ..................................................................................................15
Direction ...................................................................................... 141, 217 Filter .............................................................................................102, 197
Disk ...................................................................................................... 116 FILTER DEPTH .............................................................................98, 196
Display ................................................................................................... 13 FILTER TYPE .............................................................................103, 197
Divide Drum Track ...................................................................... 150, 223 Fine Tune ..............................................................................................269
Drum Voice ............................................................................................ 60 Folder ....................................................................120, 122, 167, 205, 206
DRY LEVEL ................................................................................. 96, 195 FOOT SW ...............................................................................................19
DRY VARI ............................................................................................ 14 FOOT SWITCH ...................................................................................257
Footswitch ..............................................................................................23
FORMAT .............................................................................................125
E Format ..................................................................................114, 168, 207
FORMAT TYPE ..........................................................................168, 207
ECHO BACK ...................................................................................... 260 FORWARD ..........................................................................................243
EDIT .............................................................................. 17, 154, 175, 225 FREQUENCY ........................................................................95, 195, 231
Edit Change .......................................................................................... 176 FREQUENCY CONVERT ..................................................................250
EFFECT ......................................................................................... 17, 198 Function ..................................................................................................13
Effect ...................................................................................... 63, 104, 198 Function Tree .........................................................................................55
EFFECT ON/OFF .................................................................................. 12
Effect Parameter ........................................................................... 165, 203
Effect Send Level ................................................................................. 268 G
EFFECT SEND/VOLUME ................................................................... 14
EFFECT TYPE .................................................................... 113, 165, 203 GAIN (Output Select) ....................................................................95, 195
Effect Type ................................................................................... 104, 198 GATE OFFSET ..............................................................................86, 191
EG .......................................................................................... 14, 101, 197 GATE TIME .................................................13, 82, 84, 88, 188, 190, 192
END Point .................................................................................... 235, 242 Get Phrase .............................................................................................147
ENV. DEPTH ........................................................................................ 15 Glide .............................................................................................138, 215
ENV. DEPTH (Envelope Depth) ................................................. 103, 197 Grid Groove ............................................................................................85
EQ TYPE ....................................................................................... 95, 195 Grid Step Recording .......................................................................83, 189
Equalizer ........................................................................................ 94, 195 Grid-Step Record ............................................................................77, 184
Erase Event .......................................................................... 141, 172, 217 GROOVE ...............................................................................................17
Event .................................................................................... 155, 156, 177 Groove ............................................................................................85, 191
Event and Parameter ............................................................................ 176
EVENT CHASE .................................................................................. 258
EVENT TYPE ............................................................................... 79, 186 H
EXC .............................................................................................. 141, 142
EXC (System exclusive) ...................................................................... 218 hard disk drive ......................................................................................280
Exchange Phrase .................................................................................. 145 Harmonic Content ................................................................................267
Exchange Track ........................................................................... 149, 221 Harmonize ......................................................................................88, 192
EXCLUSIVE ....................................................................................... 262 Headphone ..............................................................................................22
Exclusive .............................................................................................. 270 HIGH FREQ (High Frequency) ...........................................................195
EXIT ...................................................................................................... 17 HIGH FREQ. (High Frequency) ............................................................95
Expansion Memory................................................................................. 20 HIGH FREQUENCY ...........................................................112, 164, 202
EXPORT ...................................................................................... 122, 206 HIGH GAIN ...........................................................95, 112, 164, 195, 202
Export ................................................................................... 120, 167, 206 HIGH Q ................................................................................112, 164, 202
Expression ............................................................................................ 267 HOLD ...........................................................................................108, 200
EXTRACT ........................................................................................... 246 HOLD (Voice Parameter Hold) .....................................................94, 194
Extract Event ................................................................................ 142, 218
I
F
I/O expansion board .............................................................................272
FADE IN/OUT ..................................................................................... 249 IMPORT .......................................................................................131, 211
FADE TYPE ........................................................................................ 249 Import ...........................................................................................129, 210
FB CLOCK (Feedback Clock) ....................................................... 92, 193 INPUT GAIN ...............................................................................109, 200
FB GATE TIME (Feedback Gate Time) ............................................. 193 INPUT L and R ......................................................................................19
FB GATE TIME (Feedback Time) ........................................................ 92 INSERT ................................................................................................155
FB NOTE (Feedback Note) ................................................................... 91 Insert .....................................................................................................177
FB VELOCITY (Feedback Velocity) ............................................ 91, 193
Feedback ........................................................................................ 91, 193
344 RS7000
13. Index
J MID1 FREQUENCY ...........................................................112, 164, 202

MID1 GAIN .........................................................................111, 164, 202
JOB ................................................................................ 17, 134, 171, 213 MID1 Q ................................................................................112, 164, 202
Job .......................................................................................................... 67 MID2 FREQUENCY ...........................................................112, 164, 202
JUMP ................................................................................................... 182 MID2 GAIN .........................................................................112, 164, 202
MID2 Q ................................................................................112, 164, 202
MIDI .....................................................................................................264
MIDI Channel .......................................................................................264
K
MIDI CLOCK OUT .............................................................................260
MIDI CONTROL .................................................................................260
KEY ON RESET ........................................................................... 98, 196
MIDI DELAY ..................................................................................13, 17
KEYBOARD ......................................................................................... 18
MIDI Delay ....................................................................................90, 193
Keyboard ................................................................................................ 18
MIDI Event ...........................................................................................266
KIT ............................................................................................... 230, 231
MIDI event ...........................................................................................262
KIT+NOTE .................................................................................. 229, 231
MIDI Filter ...........................................................................................262
Knob Assign ................................................................................ 109, 201
MIDI IN connector .................................................................................19
KNOB SELECT ........................................................................... 109, 201
MIDI IN/OUT Indicator .........................................................................13
KNOB1 ASSIGN ................................................................. 113, 165, 203
MIDI OUT A and B connectors .............................................................19
KNOB2 ASSIGN ................................................................. 113, 165, 203
MIDI Setup ...........................................................................................260
KNOB3 ASSIGN ................................................................. 113, 165, 203
MIDI SYNC .........................................................................................260
KNOB4 ASSIGN ................................................................. 113, 165, 203
Mix Phrase ............................................................................................145
Mix Track .............................................................................................222
MIXER ...................................................................................................17
L Mixer ..............................................................................................93, 194
MMC (MIDI Machine Control) .....................................................23, 260
LCD MODE ......................................................................................... 258 MO disk ................................................................................................116
LED DISPLAY .................................................................................... 258 MO disk drive .......................................................................................280
LENGTH ............................................................................ 72, 75, 79, 250 Mode .................................................................................................52, 64
Level Meter .......................................................................................... 233 MODE Button ........................................................................................17
LFO .......................................................................................... 14, 97, 196 Modify Control Data ....................................................................143, 219
LFO PHASE .................................................................................. 98, 196 Modify Gate Time ........................................................................137, 214
LFO SPEED ................................................................................... 98, 196 Modify Velocity ...........................................................................136, 214
LFO WAVE ................................................................................... 98, 196 Modulation Wheel ................................................................................267
LOAD ............................................................................ 17, 128, 169, 170 Mono ....................................................................................................268
Load ............................................................................................. 126, 208 MONO/POLY ..............................................................................100, 196
LOAD! ................................................................................................. 210 MONO/STEREO ..................................................................109, 200, 232
Local Sample Voice ............................................................................... 61 MOUNT ID ..........................................................................131, 170, 211
Local sample voice .............................................................................. 229 MOUNT PARTITION .........................................................131, 170, 211
LOOP ................................................................................................... 243 MOVE ..................................................................................................246
loop ...................................................................................................... 242 MTC (MIDI Time Code) ................................................................23, 260
LOOP REMIX ............................................................................. 239, 251 MTC START OFFSET ........................................................................261
LOW FREQ. (Low Frequency) ..................................................... 95, 195 MULTI .................................................................................................185
LOW FREQUENCY ........................................................... 112, 164, 202 MUTE .....................................................................................................18
LOW GAIN ........................................................... 95, 111, 164, 195, 202 Mute ........................................................................................................74
LOW Q ................................................................................. 112, 164, 202
N
M
Non-Registered Parameter Number (NRPN) .......................................270
MASTER ............................................................................................... 17 NORMAL .............................................................................................239
Master .................................................................................. 111, 164, 202 Normal Voice .........................................................................................60
MASTER EFFECT ................................................................................ 12 NORMALIZE ..............................................................................234, 247
Master Effect .......................................................... 68, 111, 112, 165, 203 Normalize Play Effect ..................................................................150, 222
Master EQ ............................................................................ 111, 164, 202 NOTE ...............................................................79, 84, 121, 190, 206, 262
Master EQ & Effect ............................................................................... 63 Note ................................................................88, 141, 142, 155, 192, 266
MASTER TUNE .................................................................................. 257 Note (Note events) ................................................................................217
MASTER VOLUME ............................................................................. 13 NOTE OFFSET ................................................................86, 88, 191, 192
Maximum Polyphony ............................................................................ 62 NOTE SHIFT .........................................................................................75
maximum polyphony ............................................................................. 87 NRPN ...................................................................................................155
MEAS (Measure) ........................................................................... 75, 235 NRPN LSB (Non-Registered Parameter Number LSB) ......................268
Measure .................................................................................................. 72 NRPN MSB (Non-Registered Parameter Number MSB) ....................268
MEMORY ............................................................................................. 18 Null .......................................................................................................269
Memory .................................................................................... 63, 68, 114
Memory Card ....................................................................................... 114
MEMORY PROTECT ......................................................................... 257
METER ........................................................................................ 236, 253
Meter .............................................................................................. 72, 182
RS7000 345
13. Index
O PEG SUS (Pitch Envelope Generator Sustain) ............................102, 197

PGM (Program Number) ........................................................................79
OCT (Octave) ............................................................................... 160, 183 PHONE .............................................................................................19, 22
OCT DOWN .................................................................................... 18, 73 Phrase .....................................................................................................75
OCT RANGE ............................................................................... 108, 200 PHRASE CAT. (Phrase Category) .........................................................75
OCT UP ........................................................................................... 18, 73 Phrase Edit ............................................................................................154
Octave .................................................................................................... 73 Phrase Name .........................................................................................148
OCTAVER ..................................................................................... 88, 192 PHRASE NO. (Phrase Number) ............................................................75
Omni Mode Off .................................................................................... 268 Phrase Recording ....................................................................................77
Omni Mode On .................................................................................... 268 PITCH ............................................................................15, 230, 231, 239
OPEN ........................................................................... 120, 122, 123, 130 Pitch ..............................................................................................100, 197
OPTICAL ............................................................................................. 231 PITCH BEND .....................................................15, 79, 82, 101, 197, 262
OPTICAL IN, OUT ............................................................................... 20 Pitch Bend ............................................................................................266
ORIGINAL KEY ......................................................................... 233, 243 pitch bend change ...................................................................................79
OUT CHANNEL ......................................................................... 110, 201 Pitch Bend Sensitivity ..........................................................................269
Out Channel ......................................................................................... 110 PITCH CONVERT ...............................................................................248
OUT SELECT .............................................................................. 110, 201 PITCH DEPTH ...............................................................................98, 196
OUTPUT L/MONO & R ....................................................................... 19 PITCHED SAMPLE ....................................................................130, 132
OUTPUT SEL (Output Select) .............................................................. 94 Pitched Voice .........................................................................................61
Overdub .......................................................................................... 77, 184 pitched voice .........................................................................................229
Play Effect ......................................................................................87, 192
PLAY FX .........................................................................................17, 87
point ......................................................................................................242
P
POINTER ...............................................................................81, 163, 188
Poly .......................................................................................................268
P.B. RANGE (Pitch Bend Range) ............................................... 100, 197
POLY AFTER TOUCH .......................................................................262
PAD 1 .............................................................................................. 19, 62
Polyphonic Aftertouch (PAT) ..............................................................269
PAD 2 .............................................................................................. 19, 62
Portamento ............................................................................100, 196, 267
PAN ....................................................................... 94, 105, 109, 200, 243
PORTAMENTO SW (Portamento Switch) .................................100, 196
PAN (Delay Pan) ......................................................................... 105, 199
PORTAMENTO TIME ..........................................................15, 100, 196
PAN (Reverb Pan) ....................................................................... 106, 199
Portamento Time ..................................................................................267
PAN (Variation Pan) ............................................................................ 198
PORTAMENTO TYPE ..........................................................................15
Panpot .................................................................................................. 267
POWER ..................................................................................................19
Parameter ............................................................................................. 265
Preset Memory .......................................................................................63
PARAMETER (MIDI OUT) ....................................................... 109, 201
PROGRAM (Program Number) .....................................................94, 194
Part ....................................................................................................... 265
PROGRAM CHANGE .........................................................................262
PARTITION ........................................................................ 125, 168, 207
Program Change (PC) ..........................................................................266
PAT .............................................................................................. 141, 142
PUNCH-IN/OUT ..................................................................................233
PAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch) .............................................................. 155
Put Phrase .............................................................................................147
PAT (Polyphonic aftertouch) ............................................... 143, 217, 219
Patch ....................................................................................................... 75
PATT CHAIN ........................................................................ 17, 158, 159
PATTERN .......................................................................... 17, 70, 75, 119 Q
Pattern .............................................................................................. 59, 72
PATTERN BPM HOLD ...................................................................... 258 Q (Bandwidth) ................................................................................95, 195
Pattern Chain Editing ........................................................................... 175 Quantize ........................................................................................135, 214
Pattern Chain Job ................................................................................. 171 Quantize Value .....................................................................................135
PATTERN CHAIN mode ...................................................................... 52
Pattern Chain Mode ............................................................................. 158
Pattern Chain Play ................................................................................ 159 R
Pattern Chain Recording ...................................................................... 161
Pattern Job ............................................................................................ 133 RANDOM ....................................................................................100, 196
PATTERN mode .................................................................................... 52 RANDOM PAN .....................................................................................94
Pattern Mode .......................................................................................... 70 RATIO ..................................................................................................247
Pattern Playback ..................................................................................... 72 REAL TIME LOOP REMIX .................................................................13
PATTERN QUANTIZE ...................................................................... 257 Real Time Loop Remix Function .........................................................239
PB ................................................................................................. 141, 142 Real Time Recording ....................................................................161, 162
PB (Pitch Bend) ................................................................................... 155 Real-time Record ............................................................................77, 184
PB (Pitch bend) ............................................................ 143, 217, 218, 219 Real-Time Recording .....................................................................80, 186
PB Range ............................................................................................. 139 REC COUNT .......................................................................................257
PC ................................................................................................. 141, 142 REC LOOP (Record Loop) ....................................................................78
PC (Program Change) .......................................................................... 155 REC QUANTIZE (Record Quantize) .................................................... 78
PC (Program change) ........................................................................... 217 REC TRACK (Record Track) ......................................................161, 185
PEG ATK (Pitch Envelope Generator Attack) ............................ 102, 197 REC TYPE (Record Type) .....................................................78, 162, 185
PEG DCY (Pitch Envelope Generator Decay) ............................ 102, 197 REC VOLUME ......................................................................................13
PEG INIT LEVEL (Pitch Envelope Generator Initial Level) ...... 102, 197 Registered Parameter Number (RPN) ..................................................269
PEG RLS (Pitch Envelope Generator Release) ........................... 102, 197 RELEASE ..............................................................................................15
PEG RLS LEVEL (Pitch Envelope Generator Release Level) ... 102, 197 Release Time ........................................................................................267
346 RS7000
13. Index
REMIX ................................................................................................. 240 SEQUENCE PLAY FX ..........................................................................13

RENAME ............................................................................. 123, 168, 207 Sequencer .........................................................................................16, 59
Rename ................................................................................ 122, 167, 206 Sequencer Button ...................................................................................63
REPEAT TIME .............................................................................. 91, 193 SETUP ....................................................................................................17
Replace ........................................................................................... 77, 184 Setup .............................................................................................107, 200
REPLACE, OVERDUB ........................................................................ 80 SEXC (System Exclusive) ....................................................................155
Reset All Controller ............................................................................. 268 SHIFT .....................................................................................................16
RESONANCE ....................................................................... 15, 103, 197 Shift Clock ....................................................................................140, 216
REST ...................................................................................... 82, 163, 189 SIMM .............................................................................................20, 274
RETURN LEVEL ........................................................ 105, 106, 198, 199 SIMM expansion memory ....................................................................272
REVERB .................................................................................. 14, 96, 195 SLICE ...................................................................................................252
Reverb .................................................................................................. 106 Slice ......................................................................................................235
Reverb Effect ......................................................................................... 63 SLICE TYPE ................................................................................236, 253
Reverb Parameter ................................................................................. 199 SLICE+SEQ .................................................................................229, 231
REVERB SEND .................................................................................. 109 SLOPE ............................................................................................99, 196
REVERB SEND LEVEL ..................................................................... 200 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ...................................................................117
REVERB TYPE ................................................................................... 198 SMF C (Standard MIDI File) ...............................................................116
REVERSE .................................................................................... 239, 243 Solo .........................................................................................................74
ROLL ................................................................................................... 239 SONG .............................................................................................17, 205
RPN ...................................................................................................... 155 Song ........................................................................................................60
RPN LSB (Registered Parameter Number LSB) ................................. 268 SONG (Song Number) .........................................................................182
RPN MSB (Registered Parameter Number MSB) ............................... 268 Song Editing .........................................................................................225
Song Job ...............................................................................................212
SONG mode ...........................................................................................53
S Song Mode ...........................................................................................180
Song Name ...................................................................................182, 224
SAMPLE EDIT ...................................................................................... 13 Song Playback ......................................................................................182
Sample Edit .......................................................................................... 241 Song Recording ....................................................................................184
Sample Job ........................................................................................... 244 SORT ............................................................................................108, 200
SAMPLE KIT .............................................................................. 130, 132 Sostenuto Pedal ....................................................................................267
Sample Kit Voice ................................................................................... 61 SOURCE ..............................................................................................231
sample kit voice ................................................................................... 229 SPEED ....................................................................................................14
Sample Parameter ................................................................................ 242 Split Pattern ..........................................................................................152
Sample Voice ......................................................................................... 60 Split Phrase ...........................................................................................146
Sample voice ........................................................................................ 229 Split Song To Pattern ...........................................................................223
sample voice ................................................................................. 130, 132 STANDBY START/STOP .....................................................................13
SAMPLE VOICE NAME .................................................................... 253 START .................................................................................................242
Sample Voice Number ......................................................................... 233 START (LOOP) point ..........................................................................242
SAMPLING ........................................................................................... 12 START ATCK / LOOP ........................................................................242
Sampling .............................................................................................. 229 START Point ................................................................................235, 242
Sampling Frequency ............................................................................ 233 STEP .......................................................................................82, 235, 242
SAMPLING mode ................................................................................. 54 STEP (Step Time) ........................................................................163, 188
Sampling Mode .................................................................................... 228 Step Record ....................................................................................77, 184
Sampling Setup .................................................................................... 231 Step Recording .......................................................................80, 163, 187
Sampling Standby ................................................................................ 232 STEP VALUE ..............................................................................100, 196
Sampling Time ..................................................................................... 233 STEP/TOTAL ................................................................................99, 196
SAVE ..................................................................... 17, 114, 120, 166, 205 STEREO OUT (RESAMPLING) ........................................................231
Save .............................................................................. 118, 167, 204, 205 STEREO OUT LEVEL ........................................................................258
SCENE/MUTE ...................................................................................... 18 STEREO TO MONO ...........................................................................251
Scene/Mute ............................................................................................ 62 STORE ...................................................................................................18
SCMS (Serial Copy Management System) ............................................ 21 Strength ................................................................................................135
SCSI ............................................................................................... 19, 280 STYLE ..........................................................................................159, 161
SCSI Communication .................................................................. 132, 211 Style ........................................................................................................59
SCSI ID ................................................................................................ 281 STYLE (Style Number) ..........................................................................72
SCSI SELF ID ..................................................................... 131, 170, 211 STYLE NAME .....................................................................................161
SCSI Setup ........................................................................... 131, 170, 211 Style Name .............................................................................72, 153, 160
SCSI/CARD ................................ 119, 121, 122, 127, 130, 167, 168, 170, Style Number ........................................................................................177
205, 206, 207, 209, 210 SUB DIVID (Sub Divide) ............................................................236, 253
SEC (Section) ......................................................................................... 75 SUB MODE ...........................................................................................17
SECTION ............................................................................... 72, 159, 161 Sub Mode ...............................................................................................64
Section ............................................................................................ 59, 177 sub mode .................................................................................................52
SELECT ................................................................................................. 14 SUSTAIN ...............................................................................................15
SEND DELAY TO REVERB ..................................................... 105, 199 Sustain ..................................................................................................267
SEND VAR. TO DELAY ............................................................ 105, 198 SWING ...............................................................................14, 78, 89, 192
SEND VAR. TO REVERB ......................................................... 105, 198 Swing Gate Time ..........................................................................136, 214
Sens (Slice Sensitivity) ........................................................................ 237 Swing Rate ...................................................................................135, 214
RS7000 347
13. Index
SYS.EX.INTERVAL TIME ................................................................ 258 Voice Select ....................................................................................93, 194

System .................................................................................................. 257 VOICE SETUP TO TG ........................................................................261
System Memory ..................................................................................... 63 VOLUME .......................................................................94, 109, 200, 243
Volume .................................................................................................267
T
W
TAP ........................................................................................................ 18
Tap ......................................................................................................... 68 WAV (Wave) .......................................................................................116
TEMPLATE ................................................................................. 100, 196 WAVE MEMORY OPTIMIZE ...........................................................259
TG MUTE MODE ............................................................................... 258
TG PARAM OUT ................................................................................ 261
The Keyboard ......................................................................................... 62 Z
The Velocity Pad .................................................................................... 62
Thin Out ....................................................................................... 143, 219 ZOOM ..................................................................................................242
TIE ................................................................................................. 82, 189 ZOOM IN/OUT ....................................................................................242
TIME STRETCH ................................................................................. 248
Timing ............................................................................................ 89, 192
Tone Generator ...................................................................................... 60
TR (Track) ..................................................................... 86, 110, 191, 201
TRACK ........................................................ 109, 121, 130, 132, 201, 211
Track ............................................................ 60, 67, 73, 76, 160, 183, 265
Track Number ...................................................................................... 233
TRACK SELECT .................................................................................. 18
TRACK VOLUME ................................................................................ 14
TRANSPOSE ......................................................................................... 18
Transpose ............................................................... 73, 138, 160, 183, 215
TRIGGER LEVEL ............................................................................... 233
TRIGGER MODE ............................................................................... 232
Trim .............................................................................................. 234, 241
TRNS ON/OFF (Transpose ON/OFF) ................................................... 79
TWE ............................................................................................. 132, 211
TYPE .............................................. 15, 108, 130, 132, 200, 211, 251, 252
TYPE (Destination Type) .................................................................... 245
TYPE (Sampling Type) ....................................................................... 231
U
Undo/Redo ..................................................................... 68, 134, 172, 213
UNISON ........................................................................................ 88, 192
User Memory ......................................................................................... 63
UTILITY ................................................................................................ 17
UTILITY mode ...................................................................................... 53
Utility Mode ......................................................................................... 256
V
VALUE .......................................................................................... 82, 189
VARIATION ......................................................................... 96, 195, 252
VARIATION (Remix Variation) ......................................................... 239
Variation Effect ...................................................................................... 63
Variation Parameter ..................................................................... 105, 198
VARIATION SEND ............................................................................ 109
VARIATION TYPE .................................................................... 104, 198
VARIATION/DRY BALANCE .......................................................... 200
VELO OFFSET (Velocity Offset) ......................................... 86, 191, 192
VELOCITY ................................................................ 14, 82, 84, 188, 190
VELOCITY (Velocity Offset) ............................................................... 88
Velocity Range ..................................................................................... 138
View Filter ........................................................................... 155, 156, 226
Voice ...................................................................................................... 60
VOICE (Sample Voice Number) ................................. 235, 237, 242, 243
Voice Bank ............................................................................................. 61
VOICE EDIT ......................................................................................... 17
Voice Edit ...................................................................................... 97, 196
348 RS7000
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con- product is found to be the source of interference, which can be
tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-
expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by nate the problem by using one of the following measures:
the FCC, to use the product. Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or the interference.
another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s sup- Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
plied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instruc- fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
tions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization
to use this product in the USA. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna.
If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the co-axial type cable.
requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital
devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential envi- please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of
ronment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact
devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600
not installed and used according to the instructions found in the Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by
other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS

Connecting the Plug and Cord • Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up.
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED • This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up.
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance • Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het
with the following code: moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur afdankt
GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH
of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing:
BLUE : NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT
correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your Tel. 030-2828425
plug proceed as follows: For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end
of the service life please consult your retailer or Yamaha Service Center
The wire which is coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be connected as follows:
to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center
safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN-and-YELLOW. Address : Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal Tel : 030-2828425
which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. • Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal • Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical
which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. waste.
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. (3 wires) (lithium disposal)
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning
må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte
batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller
en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera
använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo
ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty
paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
(lithium caution)
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.
WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, 8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-
basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Exam-
include, but are not limited to, the following: ples of wet /damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub,
sink, or wet basement.
1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Spe-

cial Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found 9. This product should be used only with the components sup-
in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including con- plied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufac-
nection to the main supply. turer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety
markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product.
2. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that

described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing 10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from
should be referred to qualified service personnel. the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for
extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when
there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activ-
3. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are ity.
manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where
they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about
the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for sup- 11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are
ply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.
required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name
plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Mes-
sage Section of this manual. 12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qual-
ified service person when:
a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or
4. DANGER -Grounding Instructions: This product must be b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been
grounded and therefore has been equipped with a three pin attach- spilled into the enclosure through openings; or
ment plug. If this product should malfunction, the ground pin pro- c. The product has been exposed to rain; or
vides a path of low resistance for electrical current, reducing the d. The product does not operate, exhibits a marked change
risk of electrical shock. If your wall socket will not accommodate in performance; or
this type plug, contact an electrician to have the outlet replaced in e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the
accordance with local electrical codes. Do NOT modify the plug or product has been damaged.
change the plug to a different type!
13. This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli-

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects fier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing
on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT
on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level
any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing
must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
(or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period
larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, before damage occurs.
consult a local electrician.
14. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or acces-

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically sory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the prod-
designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations uct or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to
that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are
enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured
unobstructed ventilation is required. BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for
seating only. No other uses are recommended.
7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be

installed in locations that do not seriously contribute to their oper-
ating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources
such as; radiators, heat registers etc., should be avoided.
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-469-3
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
authorized distributor listed below. Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
NORTH AMERICA ITALY ASIA

CANADA Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A., HONG KONG
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. Combo Division Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 02-935-771 Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 416-298-1311 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Tel: 2737-7688
U.S.A. Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A. INDONESIA
Yamaha Corporation of America Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain PT. Nusantik
U.S.A. Tel: 91-201-0700 Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Tel: 714-522-9011 GREECE Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Philippe Nakas S.A. Tel: 21-520-2577
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece KOREA
Tel: 01-364-7111
MEXICO Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., SWEDEN Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,
Departamento de ventas Yamaha Scandinavia AB Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Tel: 02-3770-0661
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Box 30053 MALAYSIA
Tel: 686-00-33 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Tel: 031 89 34 00
BRAZIL Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. DENMARK Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Tel: 3-703-0900
Tel: 011-853-1377 Generatorvej 8B PHILIPPINES
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
ARGENTINA Tel: 44 92 49 00
Yupangco Music Corporation
Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, FINLAND Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Buenos Aires, Argentina F-Musiikki Oy Tel: 819-7551
Tel: 1-4371-7021 Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SINGAPORE
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN Tel: 09 618511
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES NORWAY Singapore
Yamaha de Panama S.A. Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Tel: 65-747-4374
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Grini Næringspark 1 TAIWAN
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: 67 16 77 70 10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,
Tel: 507-269-5311 ICELAND Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Skifan HF Tel: 02-2713-8999
EUROPE Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 THAILAND
THE UNITED KINGDOM IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
Tel: 525 5000 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,
MK7 8BL, England Yamaha Europa GmbH. Bangkok 10320, Thailand
Tel: 01908-366700 Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Tel: 02-641-2951
IRELAND F.R. of Germany THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Tel: 04101-3030 AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Yamaha Corporation,
Tel: 01-2859177 AFRICA Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
GERMANY/SWITZERLAND Yamaha Corporation, Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Tel: 053-460-2317
Yamaha Europa GmbH. Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Tel: 053-460-2312
F.R. of Germany OCEANIA
Tel: 04101-3030 AUSTRALIA
MIDDLE EAST Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Austria
TURKEY/CYPRUS Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria Yamaha Europa GmbH. 3006, Australia
Tel: 01-60203900 Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Tel: 3-9693-5111
F.R. of Germany NEW ZEALAND
THE NETHERLANDS Tel: 04101-3030
Yamaha Music Nederland Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands
OTHER COUNTRIES 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Tel: 030-2828411 Yamaha Music Gulf FZE Auckland, New Zealand
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone Tel: 9-634-0099
BELGIUM P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Yamaha Music Belgium
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
Tel: 971-4-881-5868
Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Tel: 02-7258220 Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
FRANCE Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Yamaha Musique France, Tel: 053-460-2312
Division Professionnelle
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2445
SY23
Yamaha Web Site (English only)
www.yamahasynth.com
Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only)
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
This document is printed on chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink.
M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2001 Yamaha Corporation
V702090 202CRCP12.2-03C0 Printed in Japan

Yamaha Rs7000 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Yamaha Rs7000 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Yamaha Rs7000 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless

specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance AC INLET

and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed OUT B

under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/

Power supply/Power cord Water warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord Location

(2)-8 1/2 RS7000 3

• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or

Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

4 RS7000 (2)-8 2/2

• AC Power Cord • Memory Card Security Adapter

● Powerful 16-track Sequencer

● Memory Card Storage, SCSI, and Memory Expansion

Using the Owner’s Manual

The Manual Structure

Finding Specific Information

● The Table of Contents ...(Page 10)

● The Index ...(Page 343)

● The Controls & Connectors ...(Page 12)

● The Function Tree ...(Page 55)

● The Page Footers, Margins, and Headers

RS7000 FEATURES ....................................................... 7 Character Entry ......................................... 67

Real-Time Recording......................................... 186

Chapter 5. The Sampling Mode 227

Chapter 6. The Utility Mode 255

Chapter 7. Other Information 263

The Controls & Connectors

The Top Panel (Upper Section)

MUSIC PRODUCTION STUDIO

MASTER EFFECT SAMPLING

SEQUENCE PLAY FX EFFECT SEND / VOLUME

1 MASTER EFFECT (Page 63) Control Knob 1 ~ Control Knob 4

INPUT L and R connectors, and allow editing of recorded

[REAL TIME LOOP REMIX] Button

[EFFECT ON/OFF] Button SAMPLING

when the master effects are on.

5 Display BEAT STRETCH CLOCK SHIFT SWING

[CLOCK SHIFT/MIDI DELAY] Knob

[SWING/VELOCITY] Knob 0 LFO Knobs

[TRACK VOLUME] Knob (Page 94)

[ATTACK] Knob [PORTAMENTO TIME] Knob (Page 100)

[PORTAMENTO TIME] Knob

[PITCH BEND] Knob (Page 101)

The Top Panel (Lower Section)

BPM SUB MODE

E [SHIFT] Button [ ■ ](STOP) Button

[ ](Fast Reverse) Button

[ ](Fast Forward) Button

H MODE Buttons [GROOVE] Button

K SCENE/MUTE Buttons M [ARPEGGIO ON] Button

[STORE] Button P [MUTE] Button (Page 74)

T [PAD 1] and [PAD 2] U CARD Slot

The Rear Panel

1 POWER Switch 5 FOOT SW Jack

Rear Panel with Optional AIEB2 I/O

1 OPTICAL IN, OUT Connectors Options

3 ASSIGNABLE OUT 1 ~ 6 Jacks